· procurement and contracting requirements general requirements architectural and mechanical...

Procurement and Contracting RequirementsGeneral Requirements

Architectural and Mechanical Specifications

for

New Kitchen Design

GR Baker Hospital543 Front Street, Quesnel. BC V2J 2K7

Prepared for Northern Health

Issued For Tender on 02 April 2020

Stantec Project Ref: 144319132

Project Manual Volume 1Project Manual Volume 1 of 2

Issued for Tender on 25 May 2020

Architectural Specifications

8 June 2020

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 00 01 10 543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 OF 2

Project No. 144319132 May 2020

Part 1 Directory

1.1 NORTHERN HEALTH AUTHORITY OWNER

300 - 299 Victoria Street

Prince George, BC

V2L 5B8

Contact for Invitation to Tender Enquiries:

Project Manager:

Rebecca Gustafson, P.Eng. e-mail: [email protected]

1.2 STANTEC ARCHITECTURE LTD. MANAGING CONSULTANT

1100 - 111 Dunsmuir Street

Vancouver, B.C. V6B 6A3

TEL: (604) 696-8279

Contacts: Martin Gillatt e-mail: [email protected]

1.3 STANTEC CONSULTING LTD. STRUCTURAL



TEL: (604) 696-8483

Contact: Majid Baradaran Shoraka e-mail: [email protected]

1.4 STANTEC CONSULTING LTD. MECHANICAL PLUMBING



TEL: (236) 333-3593

Contact: Douglas Bryan e-mail: [email protected]

1.5 STANTEC DOUGLAS BRYAN CONSULTING LTD. MECHANICAL HVAC



TEL: (236) 333-3593

Contact: Douglas Bryan e-mail: [email protected]

mailto:[email protected]



GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 00 01 10 543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 OF 2


1.6 STANTEC CONSULTING LTD. ELECTRICAL



TEL: (604) 696-8480

Contact: Bernard Legare e-mail: [email protected]

1.7 KAIZEN FOODSERVICE PLANNING & DESIGN INC KITCHEN DESIGNER

Unit 14, 1525 Cornwall Rd, Oakville, ON L6J 0B2

Phone: 905.338.3222 + 1 866-386-4613

Contact: Eva Chuchmach e-mail: [email protected]

END OF SECTION



GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 00 01 10 543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL V2J 2K7 LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 4

Project No. 144319132 June 2020

SPECIFICATON

DOCUMENT 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

SPECIFICATION DESIGN DISCIPLINE

00 00 00 Title Page A

00 01 02 Directory A

00 01 10 Table of Contents A

00 01 15 List of Drawing Sheets A

00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders

00 41 13 Part 1.2 Stipulated Price Bid Form NH

00 73 00 Part 1.1-1.3 Instructions Stipulated Price Supplementary NH

00 73 19 Part 1.4 Project Specific Amendments Owner Insured (over 1m) NH

CCDC2 2008

GR Baker Hazardous Building Materials Assessment Report Dated July 21 2010

NH

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 11 00 Summary of Work A

01 14 00 Work Restrictions

01 29 00 Payment Procedures

01 26 60 Change Order Procedures

01 29 83 Payment Procedures for Testing

01 30 19 Project Meetings

01 31 13 Project Coordination Schedule Over 1M

01 32 16 Construction Schedule

01 33 00 Submittals A

01 35 00 Delegated Design

01 35 23 Health and Safety

01 35 26 Environmental Protection

01 42 00 References A

01 45 00 Quality Control A

01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls

01 51 00 Temporary Utilities

01 52 00 Construction Facilities

01 56 00 Temporary Barriers and Enclosures

01 60 00 Materials and Equipment

01 60 00 Product Requirements

01 61 00 Common Product Requirements

00 71 00 Examination and Preparation

01 73 00 Execution Requirements

01 73 30 Cutting and Patching

01 74 11 Cleaning

01 74 21 Construction Waste Management and Disposal

01 77 00 Closeout Procedures

01 78 23 Operation & Maintenance Data A

01 78 36 Warranties

01 78 39 Project As Built Documents



01 78 40 Maintenance Requirements

00 79 00 Demonstration Training

00 91 13 General Commissioning (CX) Requirements

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 19 Selective Demolition A

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

03 30 00 Concrete Floor Repairs A

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY

Not Required

DIVISION 05 – METALS

Not Required

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00 Rough Carpentry A

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 84 00 Firestopping and Smoke Seals A

07 92 00 Joint Sealants A

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

08 11 00 Metal Doors and Frames A

08 43 13 Interior Aluminum Windows A

08 71 00 Door Hardware A

08 71 01 Door Hardware Schedule

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

09 22 16 Non Structural Metal Framing

09 25 00 Gypsum Board A

09 51 23 Acoustic Ceilings A

09 65 00 Resilient Flooring A

09 72 16 Rigid Sheet Vinyl Wall Covering A

09 90 00 Painting and Finishing A

DIVISION 11 – FOOD SERVICES

11 40 00 Foodservices clauses A

MECHANICAL



DIVISION 21 TABLE OF CONTENTS

21 05 00 Common Work for Fire Suppression Systems M

21 05 53 Identification for Fire Suppression M

21 05 93 Testing and Adjusting for Fire Suppression M

21 08 00 Commissioning for Fire Suppression Systems M

21 13 00 Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems M

21 25 00 Fire Extinguishers M

21 99 65 Fire Suppression Equipment Manufacturers M

M


22 05 00 Common Work for Plumbing Systems M

22 05 20 Thermometers and Gauges for Plumbing M

22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing M

22 05 48 Vibration Isolation for Plumbing M

22 05 49 Seismic Restraints for Plumbing M

22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing M

22 05 93 Testing and Adjusting for Plumbing Systems M

22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation M

22 08 00 Commissioning of Plumbing Systems M

22 11 00 Domestic Water Distribution M

22 13 00 Sanitary And Storm Drainage Systems M

22 13 03 Grease Sewer Systems M

22 13 09 Radon Mitigation Systems M

22 16 00 Radon Mitigation Systems M

22 16 00 Facility Natural Gas Systems M

22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures And Trim M

22 99 65 Plumbing Equipment Manufacturers M


23 05 00 Common Work for HVAC Systems M

23 05 13 Motor Requirements for HVAC Systems M

23 05 14 Variable Speed Drives M

23 05 16 Hydronic Piping Expansion M

23 05 20 Thermometers and Gauges for HVAC M

23 05 48 Vibration Isolation For Hvac Systems M

23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Systems M

23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Systems M

23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC M

23 07 13 HVAC Duct Insulation M

23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation M

23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC Systems M

23 21 13 Hydronic Piping M

23 21 14 Hydronic Specialties M

23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping M

23 25 00 HVAC Water Treatment M

23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings M

23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories M

23 34 00 HVAC Fans M

23 36 00 Air Terminal Units M

23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets M



23 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures And Trim M

23 41 00 Particulate Air Filtration M

23 81 10 Packaged Indoor Heating/Cooling Units M

23 99 65 H.V.A.C. – Equipment Manufacturers M

23 99 66 H.V.A.C. – Subtrades M


25 05 00 Common Work for Control Systems M

25 09 13 Instrumentation and Control Devices M

ELECTRICAL

See Electrical Drawings E

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 11 00 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 SUMMARY OF WORK NORTHERN HEALTH Page 1 of 8


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 PROJECT MAUNAL

.1 Read, interpret and coordinate the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 and all other parts as they apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY OF THE WORK

.1 Work of this contract shall include all labour, materials, construction work, site preparation and equipment, for architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing and electrical, necessary for the modifications and new construction at the GR Baker Hospital, Quesnel, BC, as indicated in the Contract Documents.

.2 The Works comprise a refurbishment of an existing basement storage space into a new commercial kitchen to serve the hospital plus minor works to the GR Baker Cafeteria.

.3 Division of the Work among Subcontractors, suppliers or vendors is solely the Contractor’s responsibility. Neither the Owner nor Consultant assumes any responsibility to act as an arbiter to establish subcontract terms between sectors or disciplines of work.

.4 The Work of this contract includes all labour, equipment and products required, necessary or normally recognized as necessary for the proper and complete execution of the work of each trade.

1.3 SCHEDULE AND COST

.1 The contractor is to develop a scheduled timeframe (dates) in which certain components will be undertaken.

.2 The Contractor is to allow for all overhead and management costs related to the project for the duration of the Construction period.

1.4 THE SITE

.1 Construction hoarding will be required.

.1 The Contractors exterior hoarding line cannot cause loss of parking stalls Outside of the immediate project area.

.2 Contractor’s traffic movement and mobilization/storage area for the various components will be agreed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work.

.3 Contractor to review the following 3d Scans of the project area to familiarize themselves with the existing conditions: (best done in google chrome)

.1 Identified Basement Store: https://my.matterport.com/show/?m=vsXAmq3VoDu

.2 Existing Cafeteria: https://my.matterport.com/show/?m=674WqmGfFE7

1.5 SPECIFICATION

.1 Ensure that subcontractors understand that the general conditions of the contract, and division 1, general requirements as they apply to technical sections governing their work.

.2 Work in this Specification is divided into Technical Sections that are not intended to identify contractual limits between Subcontractors, or between General Contractor and their Subcontractors. Organize division of labour and supply of materials essential to

https://my.matterport.com/show/?m=vsXAmq3VoDu

https://my.matterport.com/show/?m=674WqmGfFE7



complete the Project in all its parts and provide a total enclosure and protection from weather of interior spaces, as established in the Contract Documents.

.3 Wherever the noun "building" occurs in the Contract Documents it shall be taken to mean all buildings included in the Contract.

.4 Wherever in the Contract Documents the words "approval", "approved", "direction", "directed", "selection", "selected", "request", "requested", "report", and similar words are used, such approvals, directions, selections, requests and reports will be given by the Consultant in writing unless specifically stated otherwise.

.5 Wherever in the Contract Documents the word "supply" is used in any form, it shall mean that the work specified to be supplied includes delivery to site and unloading at location directed.

.6 Wherever in the Contract Documents the word "installed" issued in any form, it shall mean that the work specified for installation includes uncrating, unpacking, etc; moving from stored location to place of installation; and installing to meet specified requirements.

.7 Wherever in this Specification it is specified that work is "to proceed" or "to meet approval", "direction", "selection" or" request" by jurisdictional authorities or others, provide approval, direction, selection or request in writing.

.8 Wherever in this Specification or as directed by the Consultant it is specified that work shall be repaired, made good or replaced, it shall be performed without any additional cost to the Owner.

.9 Whenever in the Specifications the term "and/or" is used, the Consultant is to decide which of all possible meanings, is to be used in the sentence where this term occurs

1.6 WORK PERFORMED UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS

.1 The Owner may at any time purchase products have them installed by that contractor. Coordinate timing of arrival and installation of these Owner "Supply and Install" products, allow access on site and provide services required for the installation.

.2 Work not to be included in this Contract, as noted "NIC" on the Drawings.

1.7 WORK BY OWNER

.1 Permit the Owner and/or his contractors to inspect the work at any reasonable time, and to perform such work and install such equipment as the Owner may require.

1.8 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

.1 Submit a construction progress schedule within five (5) working days of notification of tender acceptance, for approval

.2 Correct, revise, up-date, and otherwise maintain schedule during progress of construction on a monthly basis as a minimum or as directed by the Consultant/Owner. Supply each corrected, revised and up-dated schedule to Owner, Consultant, and Subcontractor.

.3 Revisions to the schedule altering the intent of the schedule must first be approved by the Consultant/Owner prior to implementing and issuing said revision.

.4 Construction progress schedule to be in bar chart format in sufficient detail to monitor the actual progress of the work. Activities must be in sufficient detail to include for decisions/approvals required by the Owner and/or Consultant, shop drawing mock- up, sample submissions, deliveries, off site fabrication, erection, on-site installation and any other events or sub-activities as may pertain to the activities of the bar chart.



.5 Highlight activities encountering slippage stating the reason for slippage, impact to the overall schedule, and a statement of corrective action in order to adhere to the construction progress schedule.

.6 Indicate on the schedule critical activities and as requested provide a statement of monitoring, expediting and controlling of critical activities

.7 Indicate the effects of changes to the work on the construction progress schedule.

.8 Monitor, expedite and otherwise control the construction scheduling practices.

.9 Include as a regular part of the Site Meetings indicated in Section 01 31 19 Project Meetings, a review of the Construction Progress Schedule, delivery schedule of critical items and Change Order schedule.

.10 Maintain on site an updated construction progress schedule for review by Contractor, Subcontractors, Owner and Consultant. Show progress as it relates to the planned sequencing of activities.

.11 Prepare schedule in format as approved by the Owner and/or Consultant.

1.9 SITE PROGRESS RECORDS

.1 Maintain at site a permanent written record of progress of work. Make the record available at all times with copies provided when requested. Include in record each day:

.2 Attendance of Contractor's and Subcontractor's work forces at Project and a record of the work they perform.

.3 Dates, status and particulars of submissions, ie. shop drawings, samples, mock-ups and the like.

.4 .4 Dates, status and particulars of deliveries, for example manufacturing dates, delivery and installation dates

.5 Visits to site by Owner, Consultant, jurisdictional authorities, testing companies, Contractor, Subcontractors, and suppliers.

.6 Maintain a progress chart in approved format. Show on chart proposed work schedule and progress of work by Contractor and Subcontractor, status of delivery items, (ie. shop drawings status, manufacture dates), and product delivery and installation dates.

1.10 EXAMINATION

.1 Examine site and ensure that each subtrade performing work related to site conditions has examined it, so that everyone is fully informed on particulars which affect the Work in order that construction proceeds competently and expeditiously.

.2 Examine physical features, working restrictions and limitations that are known to exist so that the Owner is not restricted in their use of the premises.

1.11 PREVIOUSLY COMPLETED WORK

.1 Where dimensions are required for proper fabrication, verify dimensions of completed work in place before fabrication and installation of work to be incorporated with it.

.2 Verify that previously executed work and surfaces are satisfactory for installation or application, or both, and that performance of subsequent work will not be adversely affected.

.3 Ensure that work installed in an unsatisfactory manner is rectified by those responsible for its installation before further work proceeds.



.4 Commencement of work will constitute acceptance of site conditions and previously executed work as satisfactory.

.5 Defective work resulting from application to, or installation on, or incorporation with, unsatisfactory previous work will be considered the responsibility of those performing the later work.

1.12 CONSTRUCTION MEASUREMENTS

.1 Take site dimensions of completed work before installation of work to be incorporated commences.

.2 Before commencing installation of work, verify that its layout is accurately in accordance with intent of Drawings, and that positions, levels, and clearances to adjacent work are maintained.

.3 Before commencing work, verify that all clearances required by jurisdictional authorities can be maintained.

.4 If work is installed in wrong location, rectify it before construction continues.

.5 Where dimensions are not available before fabrication commences, the dimensions required shall be agreed upon between the trades concerned.

.6 All measurements shall be Imperial.

1.13 PROTECTION OF WORK, PROPERTY AND PERSONS

.1 Include in work necessary methods, materials, and construction to ensure that no damage or harm to work, materials, property and persons results from the work of this Contract. Temporary facilities relating to protection are specified in Section 01 50 00 Construction and Temporary Facilities.

.2 Comply with instructions and/or orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction.

.3 Deliver materials or assembled products to site in a timely manner for installation. Place materials for other subtrades to install close to installation location. Cooperate with other subtrades as require.

.4 Ensure that compulsory wearing of hard hats and safety boots is observed by all persons employed on the work. Provide spare hard hats for visitors, refuse admission to the premises to those refusing to wear same.

.5 Keep excavations, and pits free of rainwater, ground water, backing up of drains and sewers, and all other water. Pump dry as required.

.6 Protect adjacent private and public property from damage and, if damaged, make good immediately. Make good private property to match in all details its original condition in material and finishes as approved, and public property in accordance with requirements specified and/or instructed by its Owner or as directed by the Consultant.

.7 Keep surfaces, on which finish materials will be applied, free from grease, oil, and other contamination which would be detrimental in any way to the application of finish materials.

.8 Do not apply visible markings to surfaces exposed to view in finished state or that receive transparent finishes.

.9 Protect surfaces of completed work exposed to view from staining, disfigurement and all other damage by restriction of access or by use of physical means suitable to the material and surface location. Establish with each Subcontractor the suitability of such protection in each case.



.10 Brace and shore masonry walls until their designed lateral support is incorporated at both top and bottom, in accordance with safe construction practices.

.11 Enforce fire prevention methods at site for new work maintain existing in accordance with local governing authorities. Do not permit bonfires, open flame heating devices or accumulation of debris. Use flammable materials only if proper safety precautions are taken, both in use and storage.

.12 Do not store flammable materials in the building. Take necessary measures to prevent spontaneous combustion. Place cloths and other disposable materials that are a fire hazard in closed metal containers and remove them from the building every night.

.13 Where flammable materials are being applied, ensure that adequate ventilation is provided, spark-proof equipment is used, and smoking and open flames are prohibited.

.14 Ensure that volatile fluid wastes are not disposed of in storm or sanitary sewers or in open drain courses.

1.14 PUBLIC UTILITIES AND SERVICES

.1 Verify location of and limitations imposed by, existing mechanical, electrical, telephone and similar services, and protect them from damage. If necessary, relocate active services to ensure that they function continuously wherever possible in safety and without risk of damage or down time to the existing buildings.

.2 Cap off and remove unused utility services encountered during work after approval is given by the utilities concerned or jurisdictional authorities, which ever may apply.

.3 Relocation, removal, protection and capping of existing utility services shall be performed only by the applicable utility, and of other services by licensed mechanics.

.4 Ensure that precautions are taken to prevent leakage and spillage from plumbing and mechanical work that may damage surfaces and materials finished or unfinished.

.5 Give constant close supervision to roofing/waterproofing membranes following their installation, during the time they are temporarily protected or exposed, to ensure that no damage occurs to them before completion of building.

.6 Prevent spread of dust beyond the construction site by wetting, or by other approved means, as required or as directed by the Consultant and/or authorities having jurisdiction.

1.15 FASTENINGS

.1 Include in the Work necessary fastenings, anchors, inserts, attachment accessories, and adhesives.

.2 Do not install wood plugs or blocking for fastenings in masonry, concrete, or metal construction, unless specified or indicated on the drawings.

.3 Do not use fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of materials in which they are installed. Do not use powder actuated fastening devices unless specified or prior written approval is given by the Consultant for each specific use.

.4 Do not use power driven fasteners in concrete unless approved by Structural Consultant.

.5 Install metal-to-metal fastenings fabricated of the same metal or of a metal which will not set up electrolytic action causing damage to fastenings or components, or both. Use non-corrosive or galvanized steel fastenings for exterior work, and where attached to, or contained within, exterior walls and slabs. Leave steel anchors bare where cast in concrete.



.6 Install work with fastenings or adhesives in sufficient quantity to ensure permanent secure anchorage of materials, components, and equipment. Space anchors within limits of load-bearing or shear capacity.

.7 Space exposed fastenings evenly and in an organized pattern. Keep number to a minimum. Provide exposed metal fastenings of same material, texture, colour and finish as metal on which they occur.

.8 At fastenings that penetrate metal roof deck, ensure that penetrations are sealed airtight with approved sealant.

.9 Galvanize steel anchors in masonry and at exterior of building, unless otherwise specified elsewhere. Leave steel anchors bare where cast in concrete.

1.16 CLEANING

.1 Ensure that spatters, droppings, soil, labels, and debris are removed from surfaces to receive finishes, before they set up. Leave work and adjacent finished work in new condition.

.2 Use only cleaning materials which are recommended for the intended purpose by both the manufacturer of the surface to be cleaned and by the cleaning material supplier.

.3 Maintain areas "broom clean" at all times during the work. Vacuum clean interior areas immediately before finish painting commences.

.4 Do not burn or bury waste material at site. Remove as often as required to avoid accumulation.

.5 Do not allow waste material and debris to accumulate in an unsightly or hazardous manner. Sprinkle dusty accumulations with water or other approved materials during removal of same.

.6 Control lowering of materials. Use as few handlings as possible. Do not drop or throw materials from storeys above grade.

.7 Ensure that cleaning operations are scheduled to avoid deposit of dust or other foreign matter or surfaces during finishing work and until wet or tacky surfaces are cured.

.8 Supply instructions for final cleaning of the work for each finish product, as specified in each Technical Section and in Section 01 33 00.

.9 Final cleaning is to be performed one (1) week prior to opening the project to the public and shall include cleaning of all work as required by each trade. Co-ordinate final cleaning with Owner's maintenance staff.

1.17 ADJUSTING

.1 Ensure that all parts of work fit snugly, accurately and in true planes, and that moving parts operate positively and freely, without binding and scraping.

.2 Verify that work functions properly, and adjust it accordingly to ensure satisfactory operation.

.3 Lubricate products as recommended by the supplier.

1.18 SALVAGE

.1 Unless otherwise specified, surplus material resulting from construction, and construction debris shall become the property of Contractor, who shall dispose of it away from site.



.2 Treasure, such as coins, bills, papers of value, and articles of antiquity, discovered during digging, demolition and cutting at the site shall remain property of Owner, and shall be delivered immediately into his custody.

1.19 SIGNAGE

.1 Site signage will require written approval by the Owner prior to fabrication or installation.

.2 Submit to the Owner layout of required signage, show types, sizes and locations.

1.20 MATERIAL RECYCLING AND WASTE REDUCTION

.1 Material recycling is mandated through the Regional District requirements, and hazardous waste is controlled by the Provincial Government, and transportation of same on some roads is controlled by the Federal Government.

.2 Material recycling and waste reduction measures should result in the majority of materials being recycled.

1.21 WORK BY OTHERS

.1 Co-operate with Facilities Management & Operations (FM&O) of the GR Baker Hospital in carrying out their respective works and carry out instructions from Consultant.

1.22 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

.1 Limit use of site and premises to allow:

.1 Owner and public occupancy

.2 Building Exits During Construction: Maintain existing exit routes except as noted on drawings.

.3 Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings, however Greyed out areas of drawings are for reference only and do not constitute an absolute boundary to the extent of renovation.

1.23 OWNER OCCUPANCY

.1 The facility will be operational during regular business hours. Welfare of facility staff and the public visitors and preservation of facility operations is always a priority. Contractor must be prepared to stop work if requested by the Owner.

.2 Cooperate with Owner in scheduling operations to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner usage.

.3 Maintain fire and life safety systems to occupied areas and public access to exits during all stages of the work.

.4 Achieve Occupancy at the completion of each phase to allow for public occupation of the space prior to proceeding with subsequent phases.

1.24 ALTERNATE PRICE ITEMS

.1 A separate price is required for the Selective Demolition of the Existing Kitchen at GR Baker Hospital. See Section 02 41 19 - Selective Demolition and Mechanical Demolition Clauses.

1.25 CASH ALLOWANCE

.1 None



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 14 00 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 WORK RESTRICTIONS NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 3


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK SITE ACCESS AND EGRESS

.1 Access and egress of personnel and vehicles/equipment of work site shall be restricted to locations for each Component of work to be agreed with Contractor prior to commencement of the Work. The contractor does not require prior arrangements for access within the Area of Work as noted on the drawings.

1.2 USE OF SITE AND FACILITIES

.1 Execute work with least possible interference or disturbance to normal use of premises.

.2 Where security is reduced by work provide temporary means to maintain security.

.3 Existing sanitary facilities anywhere on the Hospital site shall not be used by Contractor.

.4 Closures: protect work temporarily until permanent enclosures are completed

.5 Use of catering facilities already existing on site is prohibited.

.6 Contractor is to familiarize themselves with GR Baker Hospital restricted parking and critical access for ambulances and other essential vehicles.

1.3 EXISTING BUILDINGS AND OPERATIONS

.1 Buildings immediately adjacent and connecting to the Work will be occupied during the Work. As operations progress execute work with least possible interference or disturbance to site operations, building operations and occupants of existing buildings. This includes interferences or disturbances such as:

.1 Noise, dust, fumes, vibrations, traffic.

.2 Allow for after-hours/weekend work where construction prevents access to and/or operation of the adjacent hospital departments.

.2 The works

.1 Contractor access – Please discuss with Northern Health

.2 Hoardings need to be erected in front of the refurb area corridor wall. Allow sufficient space to construct the grease trap on the inside of the hoarding and provide sufficient space for a bed to be wheeled down the corridor to the stairs at the end. Provide impact resistant finish to bottom 1220mm of hoarding to protect against damage from hospital traffic.

.3 Note: the corridor is a means of escape for the hospital.

1.4 EXISTING EXITING FACILITIES AND PHASED OPERATION

.1 Existing buildings outside of the Work of this Contract will not be available for the use of the Contractor. Refer to Section 01 52 00 - Construction Facilities.

1.5 EXISTING SERVICES AND PHASED OPERATIONS

.1 Notify Owner one week prior to intended interruption of services and obtain required permission.



.2 Where Work involves terminating, breaking into or connecting to existing services, give Owner one week notice for necessary interruption of mechanical or electrical service throughout course of work.

1.6 SPECIAL RESTRICTION REQUIREMENTS

.1 Carry out noise generating Work on weekdays from 7:30am to 4:30pm and on Saturdays, (no Sundays and statutory holidays) from 10:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. hours. The client and the City of Quesnel should be contacted for any restrictions which are more restrictive than that noted above. Excessively noisy work (hammer drilling, saw cutting, etc.) shall be coordinated with owner and executed during reduced patient hours.

1.7 SECURITY CLEARANCES

.1 Each Contractor hired at NH shall appoint an individual responsible for occupational health and safety. This individual shall be responsible for verifying that a safe work environment is maintained, and for notifying NH and if applicable, other contractor firms, of potential hazards their work activities may create.

.2 While working on any site of NH, all Contractors, Estimators, Inspectors, and Non- NH representatives must:

.1 Comply with all aspects of the WorkSafeBC (WSBC) OH&S Regulation

.2 Work safely in a manner that does not pose a hazard to themselves, NH staff, other contractors, patients or public

.3 Provide personnel that are trained to work safely in their appointed tasks

.4 Report any unsafe conditions to your NH representative/contact

.5 Ensure that sub-contractors comply with the WSBC OH&S Regulation

.6 Follow hospital safety policies and procedures, where applicable.

.7 Please refer to the NH Contractor Coordination Policy.

1.8 PHOTO ID

.1 Photo ID is not required on this site. Please coordinate ID requirements with FM on site.

1.9 CONTRACTOR SIGN-IN

.1 Please coordinate ID requirements with FM on site.

1.10 NON-SMOKING ENVIRONMENT

.1 Smoking is not permitted anywhere on NH property.

1.11 HEALTH & SAFETY MEETING ATTENDANCE

.1 A mandatory meeting will be held prior to the commencement of physical work on the project for which the successful General Contractor on this project will be designated as the Prime Contractor. The meeting will be chaired by the Prime Consultant, will include the NH Project Manager and will also include representatives from all contracting companies and other affected groups. Sub-contractors must all designate a person as the “Sub-Trade Safety Co-ordinator (OH&S Reg. 20.3(3b). This person is responsible for the sub-contractors site health and safety activities. This person must be in full attendance at this meeting and sign off on the GRB OH&S document. This document will be completed in full and a completed copy will be provided to each attendee.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 26 60 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 3


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 INTENT

.1 Read this Section in conjunction with the conditions governing changes in the Work and valuation of changes in the General Conditions of Contract.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

.1 "Actual cost of material and labour" as used in the valuation of changes article in the General Conditions of Contract, means the sum of costs directly related to or necessarily and properly incurred by Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub subcontractors in the performance of a change in the Work. Direct costs shall include:

.1 Materials cost,

.2 total labour cost,

.3 travel and subsistence cost,

.4 temporary work cost,

.5 construction equipment cost,

and shall exclude overhead cost and profit.

.2 "Material cost" means cost of all Materials, including transportation and storage thereof. All rebates, refunds, returns from sale of surplus Materials, and trade discounts other than prompt payment discounts, shall be credited to Minister.

.3 "Total labour cost" means sum of direct labour cost and payroll burden cost.

.4 "Direct labour cost" means base wage costs of employees, excluding payroll burden cost.

.5 "Payroll burden cost" means costs statutory charges and fringe benefit costs additional to direct labour cost and includes unemployment insurance, workers' compensation, vacation pay, statutory holiday pay, health and welfare, pension plan, training fund, and other payroll costs which are hourly wage dependent and are paid by the employer.

.6 "Travel and subsistence cost" means travel and subsistence costs incurred by employees when working beyond a reasonable commuting distance from their normal place of residence.

.7 "Temporary work cost" means cost of temporary structures, facilities, services, controls, and other temporary items used in the performance of a Change in the Work, including maintenance, dismantling and removal, less any residual value after dismantling and removal.

.8 "Construction equipment cost" means the cost of rented or owned equipment, including cost of loading, transportation, unloading, erection, maintenance, dismantling and removal.

.9 "Overhead cost" means Contractor's, Subcontractors' and Sub-subcontractors' costs related to:

.1 operation and maintenance of head offices, branch offices, and site offices,

.2 administration at head offices, branch offices, and site offices,

.3 general management, legal, audit, and accounting services,

.4 buying organization, corporate tax,

.5 financing and other bank charges,

.6 bonding and insurance,



.7 salaries and other compensation of off-site personnel,

.8 salaries and other compensation of on-site superintendents and other supervisory personnel,

.9 planning, estimating, and scheduling of work,

.10 expendable and non-expendable small tools, including maintenance thereof,

.11 recruitment and training of on-site staff, and

.12 all other costs not defined as direct costs.

.10 The following shall apply to the valuation of adjustments to the Contract Price attributable to changes:

.1 The adjustment to the Contract Price will not exceed the actual cost of

performing the Work attributable to the change plus the following:

.1 for Work performed by the Contractor directly, a 10% mark-up for overhead and profit on the actual cost of the Work attributable to the change;

.2 for any Work performed by a Subcontractor:

.1 a 10% mark-up on the actual cost of the Work performed by the Subcontractor attributable to the change for the Subcontractor’s overhead and profit; and

.2 a 5% mark-up on the actual cost of the Work performed by the Subcontractor attributable to the change for the Contractor's overhead and profit.

1.3 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES – LUMP SUM METHOD OF VALUATION

.1 Consultant will issue a Request for Proposal to Contractor.

.2 Contractor shall submit a Contractor Proposal stipulating:

.1 a lump sum increase, decrease, or no change in the Contract Price, and

.2 an increase, decrease, or no change in the Contract Time, on account of the proposed change in the Work.

.3 Include in Contractor Proposal a detailed breakdown of lump sum increase or decrease, indicating Contractor's, and where applicable Subcontractors' and Sub subcontractors':

.1 itemized direct costs applicable to the proposed change in the Work, and

.2 applicable amounts for overhead and profit, in accordance with percentages specified in the General Conditions of Contract.

Do not include costs that would otherwise be incurred in the normal performance of the Work.

.4 Include in detailed breakdown of Contractor Proposal a further breakdown of the total labour cost component indicating, for each applicable trade and trade classification, the labour rate(s) and the number of hours from which the total labour cost is derived.

.5 Upon Owner’s approval and acceptance of Contractor Proposal, a "Change Order" signed by the Owner will be issued to Contractor to be signed by the Contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 29 00 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 PAYMENT PROCEDURES NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 2


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 Owner/Contractor Agreement.

1.2 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT

.1 Make applications for payment on account as provided in Agreement as Work progresses.

.2 Date applications for payment last day of agreed payment period and ensure amount claimed is for value, proportionate to amount of Contract, of Work performed and Products delivered to Place of Work at that date.

.3 Submit to Consultant, at least 14 days before first application for payment. Schedule of values for parts of Work, aggregating total amount of Contract Price, to facilitate evaluation of applications for payment.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

.1 Provide schedule of values supported by evidence as Consultant may reasonably direct and when accepted by Consultant, be used as basis for applications for payment.

.2 Include statement based on schedule of values with each application for payment.

.3 Support claims for products delivered to Place of Work but not yet incorporated into Work by such evidence as Consultant may reasonably require to establish value and delivery of products.

1.4 PROGRESS PAYMENT

.1 Consultant will issue to Owner, no later than 10 days after receipt of an application for payment, certificate for payment in amount applied for or in such other amount as Consultant determines to be due. If Consultant amends application, Consultant will give notification in writing giving reasons for amendment.

1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF WORK

.1 Prepare and submit to Consultant comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected and apply for a review by Consultant to establish Substantial Completion of Work or substantial completion of designated portion of Work when Work is substantially performed if permitted by lien legislation applicable to Place of Work designated portion which Owner agrees to accept separately is substantially performed. Failure to include items on list does not alter responsibility to complete Contract.

.2 No later than 10 days after receipt of list and application, Consultant will review Work to verify validity of application, and no later than 7days after completing review, will notify Contractor if Work or designated portion of Work is substantially performed.

.3 Consultant: state date of Substantial Completion of Work or designated portion of Work in certificate.

.4 Immediately following issuance of certificate of Substantial Completion of Work, in consultation with Consultant, establish reasonable date for finishing Work. O&M manuals (1 digital copy) is required before substantial completion can be awarded.

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 29 00 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 PAYMENT PROCEDURES NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 2 of 2


1.6 PAYMENT OF HOLDBACK UPON SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF WORK

.1 After issuance of certificate of Substantial Completion of Work:

.1 Submit application for payment of holdback amount.

.2 Submit sworn statement that accounts for labour, subcontracts, products, construction machinery and equipment, and other indebtedness which may have been incurred in Substantial Completion of Work and for which Owner might in be held responsible have been paid in full, except for amounts properly retained as holdback or as identified amount in dispute.

.2 After receipt of application for payment and sworn statement, Consultant will issue certificate for payment of holdback amount.

.3 Where holdback amount has not been placed in a separate holdback account, Owner shall, 10 days prior to expiry of holdback period stipulated in lien legislation applicable to Place of Work, place holdback amount in bank account in joint names of Owner and Contractor.

.4 Amount authorized by certificate for payment of holdback amount is due and payable on day following expiration of holdback period stipulated in lien legislation applicable to Place of Work.

1.7 PROGRESSIVE RELEASE OF HOLDBACK

.1 If Consultant has certified that Work of subcontractor or supplier has been performed prior to Substantial Completion of Work, Owner may pay holdback amount retained for such subcontract Work, or products supplied by such supplier, on day following expiration of holdback period for such Work stipulated in lien legislation applicable to Place of Work.

.2 If a progressive release of holdback is requested, the contractor is to coordinate a substantial completion review in-line with the consultants regularly scheduled site visits.

1.8 FINAL PAYMENT

.1 Submit application for final payment when Work is completed.

.2 Consultant will, no later than 10 days after receipt of application for final payment, review Work to verify validity of application. Consultant will give notification that application is valid or give reasons why it is not valid, no later than 7 days after reviewing Work.

.3 Consultant will issue final certificate for payment when application for final payment is found valid.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 29 83 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 PAYMENT PROCEDURES FOR TESTING NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 2


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

.1 Requirements for inspection and testing to be carried out by testing laboratory designated by Consultant are specified under various sections.

1.2 APPOINTMENT AND PAYMENT

.1 Owner will appoint and pay for services of testing laboratory except follows:

.1 Inspection and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities.

.2 Inspection and testing performed exclusively for Contractor's convenience.

.3 Testing, adjustment and balancing of conveying systems, mechanical and electrical equipment and systems.

.4 Mill tests and certificates of compliance.

.5 Tests specified to be carried out by Contractor under the supervision of Consultant.

.6 One (1) set of foundation Concrete Tests: Strength test with entrainment; Slump test with entrainment.

.7 Additional soil sub-surface testing by geotechnical engineer to be paid for by contractor.

.2 Where tests or inspections by designated testing laboratory reveal Work not in accordance with contract requirements, pay costs for additional tests or inspections as required by Consultant to verify acceptability of corrected work.

1.3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

.1 Provide labour, equipment and facilities to:

.1 Provide access to Work for inspection and testing.

.2 Facilitate inspections and tests.

.3 Make good Work disturbed by inspection and test.

.4 Provide storage on site for laboratory's exclusive use to store equipment and cure test samples.

.2 Notify Consultant 48 hours in advance of testing operations to allow for assignment of laboratory personnel and scheduling of test.

.3 Where materials are specified to be tested, deliver representative samples in required quantity to testing laboratory.

.4 Pay costs for uncovering and making good Work that is covered before required inspection or testing is completed and approved by Consultant.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 29 83 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 PAYMENT PROCEDURES FOR TESTING NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 2 of 2


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 30 19 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 PROJECT MEETINGS NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 2


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

.1 Within 30 days after award of Contract, Construction Manager shall hold a meeting to discuss construction strategies and procedures.

.2 Representatives of Owner, Consultants, Contractor, major Subcontractors, suppliers listed in bid form, field inspectors and supervisors must be in attendance.

.3 The Preconstruction meeting will be chaired by the Architect, all subsequent meetings will be chaired by the Contractor.

.4 Construction Manager shall perform the following duties:

.1 Coordinate time and location of meeting and notify parties concerned minimum one week before meeting.

.2 Prepare agenda for meeting.

.3 Preside at meeting.

.4 Record minutes of meeting including significant proceedings and decisions.

.5 Reproduce and distribute copes of minutes within three days of meeting:

.1 To all participants at meeting.

.2 To all parties affected by decisions made at meeting.

.5 Agenda to include:

.1 Appointment of official representative of participants in the Work.

.2 Schedule of Work: in accordance with Construction Progress Schedules.

.3 Schedule of submission of shop drawings, samples, colour chips.

.4 Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities, fences in accordance with Section 01 52 00 - Construction Facilities.

.5 Site security in accordance with Section 01 56 00 - Temporary Barriers and Enclosures.

.6 Proposed changes, change orders, procedures, approvals required, mark-up percentages permitted, time extensions, overtime, administrative requirements.

.7 Owner provided termination of Services and salvaged items as indicated on drawings.

.8 Record drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.9 Maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.10 Take-over procedures, acceptance, warranties in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.11 Monthly progress claims, administrative procedures, photographs, hold backs.

.12 Appointment of inspection and testing agencies or firms.

.13 Insurances, transcript of policies.

1.2 PROGRESS MEETINGS

.1 During course of Work schedule progress meetings every two weeks or as approved by the NH PM. Construction Manager to review and confirm dates with both the client and consultant

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 30 19 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 PROJECT MEETINGS NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 2 of 2


.2 Contractor, major Subcontractors involved in Work and Consultants and Owner are to be in attendance.

.3 Notify parties minimum one week prior to meetings as to who is required to attend from Consultant Team.

.4 Construction Manager shall perform the following duties:

.1 Prepare agenda for meetings.

.2 Preside at meetings.

.3 Record minutes of meeting including significant proceedings and decisions.

.4 Reproduce and distribute copes of minutes within three days of meeting:

.1 To all participants at meeting.

.2 To all parties affected by decisions made at meeting.

.5 Agenda to include the following:

.1 Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting.

.2 Review of Work progress since previous meeting.

.3 Field observations, problems, conflicts.

.4 Problems which impede construction schedule.

.5 Review of off-site fabrication delivery schedules.

.6 Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule.

.7 Revision to deconstruction/construction schedule.

.8 Progress schedule, during succeeding work period.

.9 Review submittal schedules: expedite as required.

.10 Maintenance of quality standards.

.11 Review proposed changes for affect on construction schedule and on completion date.

.12 Other business.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 30 13 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 PROJECT COORDINATION NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 5


1.1 DESCRIPTION

.1 Coordination of the work of all Sections of the Specification is the responsibility of the Contractor.

.2 The Contractor will be deemed to possess the necessary technical skills to carefully evaluate all requirements of the Contract, and to have included in the Price all costs for the proper implementation of these requirements.

.3 The Contractor's responsibility includes, but is not restricted to, coordination specified in this Section, except where otherwise specified.

1.2 RELATED MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK

.1 Coordination of the installation of systems specified in Divisions 20 and 26, including the interrelating operation and functioning between components of a system and between systems, is the responsibility of those performing the work of Divisions 15 and 16, with final coordination the responsibility of the Contractor.

.2 Provide interference drawings as herein specified to ensure proper coordination of sub trade work. No extras will be considered for work not properly coordinated prior to installation

.3 Ensure that service poles, pipes, conduit, wires, fill-pipes, vents, regulators, meters and similar Project service work is located in inconspicuous locations. If not indicated on Drawings, verify location of service work with Consultant before commencing installation.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

.1 Coordinate requirements of jurisdictional authorities.

.2 Quality Control:

.1 Ensure that work meets specified requirements.

.2 Schedule, supervise and coordinate inspection and testing as specified in Section 01 45 00.

.3 Job Records:

.1 Maintain job records and ensure that such records are maintained by Subcontractors.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide a complete set of all required Contract Documents, together with instructions for changes to the work which are issued, to each firm preparing shop drawings.

.2 Schedule and expedite submission of specified submittals.

.3 Review submittals and make comments as specified in Section 01 33 00.

.4 Ensure that each original submission, and their subsequent revisions and resubmissions are made on schedule.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the supplier or distributor of materials specified or accepted alternatives, which have been bid, has materials on the



site when required. The Contractor shall obtain confirmed delivery dates from the supplier, and ensure no delay in the progress of the work

.2 Provide equipment delivery schedule, coordinated with construction and submittals schedule, showing delivery dates for major and/or critical equipment. Provide delivery access and unloading areas.

.3 Make available areas for storage of products and construction equipment to meet specified requirements, and to ensure a minimum of interference with progress of the work and relocation.

.4 Make access available for transference of stored products and construction equipment to work areas.

.5 The Contractor shall contact the Consultant immediately upon receipt of information indicating that any material or item, will not be available on time, in accordance with the original schedule, and similarly it shall be the responsibility of all subcontractors and suppliers to so inform the Contractor.

.6 The Consultant reserves the right to receive from the Contractor at any time, upon request, copies of actual purchase or work orders of any material or products to be supplied for the work.

.7 If materials and products have not been placed on order, the Consultant may instruct such items to be placed on order, if direct communication in writing from the manufacturer or prime suppliers is not available indicating that delivery of said material will be made in sufficient time for the orderly completion of the Work.

.8 The Consultant's review of purchase orders or other related documentation shall in no way release the Contractor, or his subcontractors and suppliers from their responsibility for ensuring the timely ordering of all materials and items required, including the necessary expediting, to complete the work as scheduled in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

.1 Ensure that conditions within the building are maintained and that work proceeds under conditions meeting specified environmental requirements.

.2 Ensure that protection of adjacent property and the work is adequately provided and maintained to meet specified requirements.

1.7 WARRANTIES

.1 Ensure that warranties are provided as specified.

.2 Coordinate warranty conditions of interconnected work to ensure that full coverage is obtained.

1.8 COORDINATION

.1 Review Contract Documents and advise the Consultant of possible conflicts between parts of the work before preparation of shop drawings, ordering of products or commencement of affected work.

.2 Coordinate and be responsible for layout of all work in each area and work on which subsequent work depends to facilitate mutual progress, and to prevent conflict between parts of the work.

.3 No addition to the Total Price will be allowed because of interference between the parts of the work of a trade or between the work of different trades unless such interference



was brought to the attention of the consulting team in writing prior to the start of construction.

.4 Ensure that each Section makes known, for the information of the Contractor and other Sections, the environmental and surface conditions required for the execution of its work; and that each Section makes known the sequences of others' work required for installation of its work.

.5 Ensure that each Section, before commencing work, knows requirements for subsequent work and that each Section is assisted in the execution of its preparatory work by Sections whose work depends upon it.

.6 Ensure that work to be enclosed within ceiling and/or wall spaces can be so accommodates without interference and with other parts of the work.

.7 Ensure that setting drawings, templates, and all other information necessary for the location and installation of materials, holes, sleeves, inserts, anchors, accessories, fastenings, connections, and access panels are provided by each Section whose work requires cooperative location and installation by other Sections, and that such information is communicated to the applicable installer.

.8 Deliver materials supplied by one Section to be installed by another well before the installation begins, as per Construction Progress Schedule.

.9 Sections giving installation information in error, or too late to incorporate in the work, shall be responsible for having additional work done which is thereby made necessary.

.10 Remove and replace work installed in error which is unsatisfactory for subsequent work.

.11 Prepare interference and equipment placing drawings to ensure that all components will be properly accommodated within the spaces provided.

.12 Prepare drawings to indicate coordination and methods of installation of a system with other systems where their relationship is critical. Ensure that all details of equipment apparatus, and connections are coordinated.

.13 Ensure that clearance required by jurisdictional authorities and for proper maintenance are indicated on Drawings.

.14 Distribute coordination drawings well in advance of fabrication and installation of work affected. Place no orders for affected equipment without submission of coordination drawings to the supplier.

1.9 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS

.1 Record, as the work progresses, work constructed differently than shown on Contract Documents. Record all changes in the work caused by site conditions; by Owner, Consultant, sub-consultants, Contractor, and Subcontractor originated changes; and by site instructions, supplementary instructions, field orders, change orders, addendums, correspondence, and directions of jurisdictional authorities. Accurately record location of concealed structure, and mechanical and electrical services, piping, valves, conduits, pull boxes, junction boxes and similar work not clearly in view, the position of which is required for maintenance, alteration work, and future additions. Do not conceal critical work until its location has been recorded.

.2 Dimension location of concealed work in reference to building walls, and elevation in reference to floor elevation. Indicate at which point dimension is taken to concealed work. Dimension all terminations and offsets of runs of concealed work.

.3 Make records in a neat and legibly printed manner with a non-smudging medium.



.4 Identify each record drawing as "Project Record Copy". Maintain drawings in good condition and do not use them for construction purposes.

.5 After completion of the work, purchase a complete set of white prints from the Consultant and transfer the information recorded on the white prints accurately, neatly in red ink with dimensions, as applicable. Return these marked-up as-built white prints plus two additional sets of white prints to the Consultant for his review. Any subsequent changes found by the Consultant shall remain the responsibility of the contractor and new white prints will be issued for these changes and re- submitted back to the Consultant at no charge to the Owner.

.6 Maintain Project record drawings in a state current to Project. Such state will be considered a condition precedent for validation of applications for payment. The Consultant's visual inspection will constitute proof that record drawings are current.

.7 Provide Consultant with accurate red-marked record drawings for their transfer to latest version of AutoCAD with application for Certificate of Substantial Performance. Final acceptance of the Work will be predicated on receipt and approval of record drawings.

1.10 DETAIL FINISHING DRAWINGS

.1 During the course of the work, the Owner will provide the Contractor with detail drawings showing the interior finishes and furnishings of the building. The Contractor shall read these drawings in conjunction with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall check the detail drawings against the Contract Documents and shall report any discrepancies to the Consultant.

1.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING

.1 Before cutting, drilling, or sleeving structural load-bearing elements, obtain approval of location and methods from the Structural Engineer and the General Contractor.

.2 Do not endanger work or property by cutting, digging, or similar activities. No Section shall cut or alter the work of another Section unless such cutting or alteration is approved by the latter Section and the General Contractor.

.3 Cut and drill with true smooth edges and to minimum suitable tolerances.

.4 Fit construction tightly to ducts, pipes and conduits to stop air movement completely. The Section performing work that penetrates a fire, air, vapour, moisture, thermal or acoustic separation of the building shall pack voids tightly with rock wool, fibreglass or fire stop material as may be required; seal air, vapour and moisture barriers; and caulk joints as may be required to ensure that no air movement through the penetration is possible.

.5 Cutting, drilling and sleeving of work shall be done only by the Section who has installed it. The Section requiring drilling and sleeving shall inform the Section performing the work of the location and other requirements for drilling and sleeving.

.6 Replace, and otherwise make good, all damaged work, as identified by the Consultant or Contractor.

.7 Cutting and Patching for Holes Required by Mechanical and Electrical work:

.1 Include under work of Divisions 20 and 26 cutting or provision of holes up to and including 50 square inches and related patching, except as otherwise indicated.

.2 Include under work of this Division holes and other openings larger than 50 square inches, and chases, bulkheads, furring and required patching. This Section shall be responsible for determination of work required for holes in excess of 50 square inches.



.8 This Section shall be responsible for all cutting and patching in addition to that specified for mechanical and electrical work, and shall directly supervise performance of cutting and patching by other Sections.

.9 Patching or replacement of damaged work shall be done by the Subcontractor under whose work it was originally executed, and at the expense of the Subcontractor who caused the damage.

.10 Make patches as invisible as possible in final assembly to the approval of the Consultant/Owner. Unacceptable work will be replaced at no charge to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 32 16 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 1


1.0 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE This clause applies to projects with a construction value in excess of $1,000,000.00

.1 The Contractor shall: a) prepare and submit to the Consultant within ten (10) Working Days of the contract award

by the Owner, a computer generated construction schedule in Critical Path Method (CPM) network diagram format that indicates the timing (start and completion date of activities) of all major activities of the Work and provides details of the critical events and their inter-relationship to demonstrate the Work will be performed in conformance with the Contract Time; and

b) submit one opaque reproduction (plus four copies) to the Consultant, who will review the

schedule for conformity to the conditions of the Contract or as stipulated by the Contract Documents, and will return one reviewed copy to the Contractor within ten (10) Working Days after receipt; and

c) monitor the progress of the Work relative to the construction schedule and update the

schedule on a monthly basis for Consultant review at time of submission for application for payment and as stipulated by the Contract documents; and

d) promptly advise the Consultant of any revisions required to the schedule as a result of

extensions of the Contract Time as provided in Part 6 – CHANGES IN THE WORK for the Owners approval; and

e) indicate changes occurring since previous submission of schedule such as major

changes in scope, activities modified since previous submission, revised projections of progress and completion, other identifiable changes; and

f) provide a narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, the impact on the

schedule, corrective action recommended and its effect, the effect of changes on schedules of Other Contractors, where present; and

g) distribute copies of the Consultant approved revised schedule to the Owner, Consultant,

Job Site office, Subcontractors, other concerned parties etc.; and h) instruct recipients of the revised schedule to report to the Contractor within five (5)

Working Days, any problems anticipated by the time frames noted in the schedule.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 33 00 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 4


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 ADMINISTRATIVE

.1 Submit to Managing Consultant submittals listed for review. Submit promptly and in orderly sequence to not cause delay in Work. Failure to submit in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.

.2 Do not proceed with Work affected by submittal until review is complete.

.3 Present shop drawings, product data, samples and mock-ups in Metric units.

.4 Where items or information is not produced in Metric units converted values are acceptable.

.5 Review submittals prior to submission to Consultant. This review represents that necessary requirements have been determined and verified, or will be, and that each submittal has been checked and co-ordinated with requirements of Work and Contract Documents. Submittals not stamped, signed, dated and identified as to specific project will be returned without being examined and considered rejected.

.6 Notify Consultant in writing at time of submission, identifying deviations from requirements of Contract Documents stating reasons for deviations.

.7 Verify field measurements and affected adjacent Work are co-ordinated.

.8 Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submission is not relieved by Consultant's review of submittals.

.9 Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submission from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Consultant review.

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

.1 The term "shop drawings" means drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures and other data which are to be provided by Contractor to illustrate details of a portion of Work.

.2 Where specified in individual sections submit shop drawings bearing stamp and signature of qualified professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of British Columbia, Canada.

.3 Indicate materials, methods of construction and attachment or anchorage, erection diagrams, connections, explanatory notes and other information necessary for completion of Work. Where articles or equipment attach or connect to other articles or equipment, indicate that such items have been co-ordinated, regardless of Section under which adjacent items will be supplied and installed. Indicate cross references to design drawings and specifications.

.4 Allow 10 (ten) working days for Consultant's review of each submission.

.5 Adjustments made on shop drawings by Consultant are not intended to change Contract Price. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to Consultant prior to proceeding with Work.

.6 Make changes in shop drawings as Consultant may require, consistent with Contract Documents. When resubmitting, notify Consultant in writing of revisions other than those requested.

.7 Accompany submissions with transmittal letter, containing:



.1 Date.

.2 Project title and number.

.3 Contractor's name and address.

.4 Specification sections and indication of partial or complete submittal for stated section

.5 Other pertinent data.

.8 Submissions include:

.1 Date and revision dates.


.3 Name and address of:

.1 Subcontractor.

.2 Supplier.

.3 Manufacturer.

.4 Contractor's stamp, signed by Contractor's authorized representative certifying approval of submissions, verification of field measurements and compliance with Contract Documents.

.9 After Consultant's review, distribute copies.

.10 Submit electronic copy of shop drawings for each requirement requested.

.11 Submit electronic copies of product data sheets or brochures for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Consultant where shop drawings will not be prepared due to standardized manufacture of product.

.12 Submit electronic copies of test reports for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Consultant.

.1 Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that material, product or system identical to material, product or system to be provided has been tested in accord with specified requirements.

.2 Testing must have been within 3 years of date of contract award for project.

.13 Submit electronic copies of certificates for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Consultant.

.1 Statements printed on manufacturer's letterhead and signed by responsible officials of manufacturer of product, system or material attesting that product, system or material meets specification requirements.

.2 Certificates must be dated after award of project contract complete with project name.

.14 Submit electronic copies of manufacturers instructions for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Consultant.

.1 Pre-printed material describing installation of product, system or material, including special notices and Material Safety Data Sheets concerning impedances, hazards and safety precautions.

.15 Submit electronic copies of Manufacturer's Field Reports for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Consultant.

.1 Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturer's representative to confirm compliance with manufacturer's standards or instructions.

.16 Submit electronic copies of Operation and Maintenance Data for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Consultant.



.17 Delete information not applicable to project.

.18 Supplement standard information to provide details applicable to project.

.19 If upon review by Consultant, no errors or omissions are discovered or if only minor corrections are made, copies will be returned and fabrication and installation of Work may proceed. If shop drawings are rejected, noted copy will be returned and resubmission of corrected shop drawings, through same procedure indicated above, must be performed before fabrication and installation of Work may proceed.

.20 The review of shop drawings is for sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with general concept.

.1 This review shall not mean that the Consultant approves detail design inherent in shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with Contractor submitting same, and such review shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting requirements of construction and Contract Documents.

.2 Without restricting generality of foregoing, Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at job site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for co-ordination of Work of sub-trades.

1.3 SAMPLES/BROCHURES FOR COLOUR OR TEXTURE

.1 Submit for review samples in duplicate or as requested in respective specification Sections. Label samples with origin and intended use.

.2 Deliver samples prepaid to Consultant's business address.

.3 Notify Consultant in writing, at time of submission of deviations in samples from requirements of Contract Documents.

.4 Where colour, pattern or texture is criterion, submit full range of samples.

.5 Adjustments made on samples by Consultant are not intended to change Contract Price. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to Consultant prior to proceeding with Work.

.6 Make changes in samples which Consultant may require, consistent with Contract Documents.

.7 Reviewed and accepted samples will become standard of workmanship and material against which installed Work will be verified.

1.4 CERTIFICATES AND TRANSCRIPTS

.1 Immediately after award of Contract, submit WorkSafe BC status.

.2 Submit transcription of insurance immediately after award of Contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 35 00 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 DELEGATED DESIGN NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 2


Part 1 General

1.1 INTENT

.1 The intent of Delegated Design Submittals required by this section is to account for professional engineering responsibility for design, review and acceptance of components of Work forming a part of permanent Work in accordance with Building Code, and that has been assigned to a design entity other than Consultant including, but not limited to, the following:

.1 Design requiring structural analysis of load bearing components and connections.

.2 Design requiring compliance with fire safety regulations.

.3 Design requiring compliance with life or health safety regulations.

.2 This section provides standard forms for submittal of Letter of Commitment and Letter of Compliance required complying with requirements of Building Code and design delegated to a professional Engineer within technical specification sections.

.3 Delegated Design Submittals are not required for components of Work requiring engineering for temporary Work (i.e.: crane hoisting, engineered lifts, false Work, shoring, concrete formwork) that would normally form a part of Contractor’s scope of Work.

.4 The requirements of this section are in general conformance with recommended Responsibilities for Engineering Services for Building Projects published by Association of Professional Engineers and Geoscientists of British Columbia (APEGBC), with regards to duties of specialty professionals appointed during construction period.

.5 The requirements of this section do not diminish responsibilities of Consultant’s role as Registered Professional of Record; submittals will be used by Consultant to establish that Work is substantially performed in accordance with Building Code.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping

.2 Refer to Structural Drawings for items requiring delegated design submittals

.3 Divisions 23 and 26 Coordinate with disciplines for items requiring delegated design submittals.

1.3 DELEGATED DESIGN

.1 Performance and Design Criteria: Provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by Contract Documents.

.2 If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Consultant.

.3 Delegated design will be required for elements designed by a specialty professional, which may include:

.1 Elements normally fabricated off-site

.2 Fall Arrest System for rooftop Anchors.

.3 Exterior cladding system.

.4 Handrailing system.

.5 Elements that require specialized fabrication equipment or a proprietary fabrication process not usually available at job site (i.e.: open web steel joists,

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 35 00 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 DELEGATED DESIGN NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 2 of 2


wood trusses, combination wood and metal or plywood joists, prefabricated wood or metal buildings, noise and vibration isolation devices, elevators).

.6 Elements requiring civil engineering, not normally a part of scope of services performed by architectural; structural; mechanical; electrical; or geotechnical disciplines of Consultant.

Part 2 Products

2.1 LETTER OF COMMITMENT

.1 Submit signed and sealed S-B addressed to Consultant in accordance with format in Appendix A attached to the end of this Section prior to starting Work requiring design and seal of a professional engineer

2.2 LETTER OF COMPLIANCE

.1 Submit signed and sealed S-C addressed to Consultant in accordance with format in Appendix B attached to the end of this Section on completion of Work requiring design and seal of a professional engineer.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 IMPLEMENTATION

.1 Include summary of Work described in technical specification section as a part of the required Letter of Commitment.

.2 Prepare required submittals and present to Consultant within sufficient time to allow for Consultant’s detailed review and acceptance.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 35 23 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 HEALTH AND SAFETY NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 1


1 GENERAL

1.1 HEALTH AND SAFETY

.1 Under The Occupational Health and Safety Act, as amended, the Contractor to undertake the role of the "Constructor" as defined in the Act. Be responsible to provide full safety program for anyone who gets paid for services on Site including management, labour, delivery drivers, service personnel, Consultant’s representatives and others involved for services on Site. Arrange for pre-project meeting related to safety, site safety training and safety committees complete with accident investigation procedures.

.2 As per The Occupational Health and Safety Act regulation 26.2(1) - (as amended) ensure that Consultants’ representatives who may be required to visit the Site, receive the appropriate and adequate oral and written instructions and training in fall protection and use of fall protection systems. Ensure that the safety instructors prepare, sign and maintain a written record of the training, which to have to be produced if requested by the Ministry of Labour. Be responsible for issuance of “proof of training cards” to all those who have completed the training course.

.3 Comply with requirements of Acts and Regulations with respect to health and safety including Occupational Health and Safety Act, (as amended) and Regulations for Construction Projects (as amended) made thereunder; Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) Regulation; and Alberta Regulation including the following:

.1 Before commencement of Work, and throughout Contract, maintain on Site, and readily accessible to those who may be exposed to hazardous materials, list of hazardous materials proposed to be used on Site or workplace, with current Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS).

.2 Ensure hazardous materials used and/or supplied on Site are labeled in accordance with WHMIS requirements. Provide detailed written procedures for safe handling, storage and use of such hazardous materials including special precautions, safe clean up and disposal procedures. Conform to Environmental Protection Act for disposal requirements.

.3 Ensure that those who handle, and/or are exposed to, or are likely to handle or be exposed to, hazardous materials are fully instructed and trained in accordance with WHMIS requirements.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 35 26 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 OF 3


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

.1 This section addresses general requirements for environmental protection. This section is not intended to identify all and/or specific requirements. This section must be referenced to and interpreted simultaneously with all other sections pertinent to the works described herein.

.2 Comply with General Conditions, and all applicable Environmental Laws.

.3 No unnecessary or unauthorized site disturbances shall be permitted within registered tree covenant boundaries, riparian areas or within the critical root zones of other treed areas designated for preservation.

1.2 FIRES

.1 Fires and burning of rubbish on site not permitted.

1.3 DISPOSAL OF WASTES

.1 Do not bury rubbish and waste materials on site.

.2 Do not dispose of waste or volatile materials, such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner into waterways, storm or sanitary sewers.

1.4 DRAINAGE

.1 Provide temporary drainage and pumping as necessary to keep excavations and site free from water.

.2 Do not pump water containing suspended materials into waterways, sewer or drainage systems.

.3 Control disposal of runoff water containing suspended materials or other harmful substances in accordance with local authority’s requirements.

1.5 SITE CLEARING AND PLANT PROTECTION

.1 Protect trees and plants on site and adjacent properties where indicated.

.2 Protect roots of designated trees to drip line during excavation and site grading to prevent disturbance or damage. Avoid unnecessary traffic, dumping and storage of materials over root zones.

.3 Minimize stripping of topsoil and vegetation.

1.6 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

.1 Utilize erosion control measures such as but not limited to the following to reduce or eliminate the detachment and transport of soil particles:

.1 Schedule earth moving and stripping work to periods when rainfall is minimal.



.2 Maintain or establish permanent vegetative cover shortly after earthworks are completed.

.3 Apply mulching in the form of protective straw layers or other suitable material on any exposed soils areas that are not to be covered with permanent vegetative cover shortly after.

.2 Utilize sediment control measures such as the following to slow the velocity of sediment laden water, thereby allowing suspended particles to settle out of suspension:

.1 Construct and maintain sediment traps and sediment barriers.

.2 Construct and maintain temporary check dams in areas where sediment laden water congregates.

.3 Construct and maintain filter socks and storm drain inlet barriers in and around all receiving catch basins.

.3 Keep roadways, sidewalks and walkways clear of mud, silt, topsoil etc. from vehicles entering and exiting the project site. Mud, which may accumulate on the road, is to be removed immediately by shoveling and or sweeping. Roadways are not to be washed with water that may end up in receiving waters, unless appropriate sediment removal techniques are used.

1.7 POLLUTION CONTROL

.1 Maintain temporary erosion and pollution control features installed under this contract.

.2 Control emissions from equipment and plant to local authority’s emission requirements.

.3 Prevent sandblasting and other extraneous materials from contaminating air beyond application area, by providing temporary enclosures.

.4 Cover or wet down dry materials and rubbish to prevent blowing dust and debris. Provide dust control for temporary roads.

.5 Contractor to maintain all equipment used onsite to ensure no leaking of fuel, engine oils, hydraulic fluids or other potentially toxic material onto the site or surrounding areas.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 42 00 543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL V2J 2K7 REFERENCES NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 7


Part 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

.1 Applicable codes, policies and standards.

.2 Reference standards and associations.

.3 Standards producing industry organizations and their addresses.

1.2 APPLICABLE CODES, POLICIES, AND STANDARDS

.1 The project shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the intent of all applicable codes, ordinances, standards and regulations, including the following:

.1 Building Code:

.2 Local Municipal Codes and Standards.

.3 National Model Energy Code for Buildings (NMECB) or ASHRAE 90.1.

.4 Provincial Fire Marshall Regulations and the Fire Marshall Act.

.5 WorkSafe BC (Workers' Compensation Board Regulations).

.6 Applicable NFPA Regulations; BC Fire Marshall Regulations.

.7 Canadian Electrical Code (CEC).

.8 CAN/CSA-Z317.1, Special Requirements for Plumbing Installations in Health Care Facilities.

.9 CAN/CSA-Z317.2, Special Requirements for Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Systems in Health Care Facilities.

.10 CAN/CSA-Z317.10, Handling of Waste Materials in Health Care Facilities and Veterinary Health Care Facilities.

.11 CSA Z317.13-12, Infection Control During Construction, Renovation, and Maintenance of Health Care Facilities.

.12 CAN/CSA Z318.0, Commissioning of Health Care Facilities.

.13 CSA S832, Guidelines for Seismic Risk Reduction of Operational and Functional Components in Hospitals.

.14 CSA Z32, Electrical Safety and Essential Electrical Systems in Health Care Facilities.

.15 CSA S478, Guideline on Durability in Buildings.

.16 ASHRAE 90.1, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings, Mandatory Requirements.

.17 ASHRAE 62.1, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.

.18 Other CSA Standards, ULC Standards, association and organization standards referenced in specification sections.

.19 IES (Illuminating Engineering Society) Standards.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND ASSOCIATIONS

.1 Within the text of the specifications, reference may be made to the following standards and associations.

.2 For Products or quality specified in individual specification sections, by association, trade, or other references or consensus standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.



.3 Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.

.4 Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of the Consultant shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise, in any reference document.

.1 AA Aluminum Association

.2 AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association

.3 ACEC Association of Consulting Engineers of Canada

.4 ACI American Concrete Institute

.5 AHA American Hardboard Association

.6 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction

.7 AITC American Institute of Timber Construction

.8 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association Inc.

.9 ANSI American National Standards Institute

.10 API American Petroleum Institute

.11 ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute

.12 ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers

.13 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers

.14 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

.15 ASPT Association for Asphalt Paving Technologists

.16 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

.17 AWCCBC Association of Wall and Ceiling Contractors of B.C.

.18 AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International

.19 AWI Architectural Woodworkers Association

.20 AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada

.21 AWPA American Wire Producers Association

.22 AWS American Welding Society

.23 AWWA American Water Works Association

.24 BCBC British Columbia Building Code

.25 CaGBC Canada Green Building Council

.26 CANPLY Canadian Plywood Association

.27 CCA Canadian Construction Association

.28 CCDC Canadian Construction Documents Committee

.29 CCME Canadian Council of Ministers of the Environment

.30 CEC Canadian Electrical Code (published by CSA)

.31 CEMA Canadian Electrical Manufacturer's Association

.32 CEPA Canadian Environmental Protection Act

.33 CFFM Canadian Forces Fire Marshal

.34 CGA Canadian Gas Association

.35 CGBC Canadian Green Building Council

.36 CGSB Canadian General Standards Board

.37 CISC Canadian Institute of Steel Construction

.38 CITC Canadian Institute of Timber Construction

.39 CLA Canadian Lumberman's Association



.40 CMB Construction Materials Board

.41 CPCA Canadian Painting Contractors' Association

.42 CPCI Canadian Prestressed Concrete Institute

.43 CPMA Canadian Paint Manufacturers Association

.44 CRCA Canadian Roofing Contractors Association

.45 CSA Canadian Standards Association

.46 CSC Construction Specifications Canada

.47 CSDFMA Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturing Association

.48 CSPI Corrugated Steel Pipe Institute

.49 CSSBI Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute

.50 CUFCA Canadian Urethane Foam Contractor's Association

.51 CWC Canadian Wood Council

.52 EC Environment Canada, Conservation and Protection

.53 ECP Environmental Choice Program

.54 EEMAC Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers' Association of Canada

.55 EIMA EIFS Industry Manufacturer's Association

.56 EPA Environmental Protection Agency

.57 FCC Fire Commissioner of Canada

.58 FEMA Federal Emergency Management Agency

.59 FGMA Flat Glass Manufacturers Association

.60 FM Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation

.61 GRI Geosynthetic Research Institute

.62 HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association

.63 ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association

.64 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

.65 IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association

.66 LEED Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design

.67 LSGA Laminators Safety Glass Association

.68 MPI Master Painters Institute

.69 MSG Manufacturers Standard Gauge

.70 MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry

.71 NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

.72 NBC National Building Code (Canada)

.73 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

.74 NFPA National Fire Protection Association

.75 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association

.76 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority

.77 NRC National Research Council

.78 NSPE National Society of Professional Engineers

.79 OBC Ontario Building Code

.80 PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute

.81 QPL Qualification Program List

.82 RAIC Royal Architectural Institute of Canada

.83 RCABC Roofing Contractors Association of British Columbia



.84 SCC Standards Council of Canada

.85 SCAQMD South Coast Air Quality Management District

.86 SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council

.87 SSPC The Society for Protective Coatings

.88 TTMAC Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada

.89 UL Underwriters Laboratories

.90 ULC Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada

.91 WHMIS Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System

1.4 STANDARDS PRODUCING INDUSTRY ORGANIZATIONS

.1 The following associations and organizations are cited in specification sections. Acronym, name, address, and Internet URL: addresses are as follows.

.2 Canadian Organizations:

.1 ACEC - Association of Consulting Engineers of Canada, 130 Albert Street, Suite 616, Ottawa, ON K1P 5G4; URL: http://www.acec.ca.

.2 AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, 516-4 Street West, High River, AB T1V 1B6; URL: http://www.awmac.com.

.3 Canada Green Building Council, 330 - 55 rue Murray Street, Ottawa, ONK1N 5M3; Tel: 613-241-1184, Fax: 613-241-5750; URL: http://www.cagbc.org.

.4 CCA - Canadian Construction Association, 75 Albert St., Suite 400, Ottawa, ON K1P 5E7; URL: http://www.cca-acc.com.

.5 CCDC - Canadian Construction Documents Committee, Refer to ACEC, CCA, CSC or RAIC; URL: http://www.CCDC.org.

.6 CFFM - Canadian Forces Fire Marshal, 101 Colonel By Drive, Ottawa, ON K1A 0K2; URL: http://www.dnd.ca/admie/dgcps/CFFMe.htm.

.7 CGA - Canadian Gas Association, 20 Eglinton Avenue West, Suite 1305, Toronto, ON M4R 1K8; URL: http://www.cga.ca.

.8 CGSB - Canadian General Standards Board, Place du Portage, Phase III, 6B1, 11 Laurier Street, Hull, QC K1A 0S5; URL: http://w3.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb.

.9 CISC - Canadian Institute of Steel Construction, 201 Consumers Road, Suite 300, Willowdale, ON M2J 4G8; URL: http://www.cisc-icca.ca.

.10 CLA - Canadian Lumbermen's Association, 27 Goulburn Avenue, Ottawa, ON K1N 8C7; URL: http://www.cla-ca.ca.

.11 CNLA - Canadian Nursery Landscape Association, RR #4, Stn. Main,7856 Fifth Street, Milton, ON L9T 2X8; URL: http://www.canadanursery.com.

.12 CRCA - Canadian Roofing Contractors Association, 155 Queen Street,Suite 1300, Ottawa, ON K1P 6L1; URL: http://www.roofingcanada.com.

.13 CSA - Canadian Standards Association International, 178 Rexdale Blvd., Toronto, ON M9W 1R3; URL: http://www.csa-international.org.

.14 CSC - Construction Specifications Canada, 120 Carlton Street, Suite 312, Toronto, ON M5A 4K2; URL: http://www.csc-dcc.ca.

.15 CSDMA - Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association, One Yonge Street, Suite 1801, Toronto, ON M5E 1W7; URL: http://www.csdma.org.

.16 CSPI - Corrugated Steel Pipe Institute, 652 Bishop Street N, Unit 2A, Cambridge, ON N3H 4V6; URL: http://www.cspi.ca.

.17 CSSBI - Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute, 652 Bishop St. N., Unit 2A, Cambridge, ON N3H 4V6; URL: http://www.cssbi.ca.



.18 CUFCA - Canadian Urethane Foam Contractor's Association, Box 3214, Winnipeg, MB R3C 4E7; URL: http://www.cufca.ca.

.19 CWC - Canadian Wood Council, 1400 Blair Place, Suite 210, Ottawa, ON K1J 9B8; URL: http://www.cwc.ca.

.20 EC - Environment Canada, Conservation and Protection, Inquiry Centre, 351 St. Joseph Blvd, Hull, QC KIA 0H3; URL: http://www.ec.gc.ca.

.21 EFC - Electro Federation of Canada, 5800 Explorer Drive, Suite 200, Mississauga, ON L4W 5K9; URL: http://www.electrofed.com.

.22 MPI - The Master Painters Institute, 4090 Graveley Street, Burnaby, BC V5C 3T6; URL: http://www.paintinfo.com.

.23 NABA - National Air Barrier Association, PO Box 2747, Winnipeg, MB R3C 4E7; URL: http://www.naba.ca.

.24 NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority, 406-First Capital Place, 960 Quayside Drive, New Westminster, BC V3M 6G2; URL: http://www.nlga.org.

.25 NRC - National Research Council, Building M-58, 1200 Montreal Road, Ottawa, ON K1A 0R6; URL: http://www.nrc.gc.ca.

.26 QPL - Qualification Program List, c/o Canadian General Standards Board, Place du Portage, Phase III, 6B1, 11 Laurier Street, Hull, QC K1A 1G6; URL: http://www.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb.

.27 RAIC - Royal Architectural Institute of Canada, 55 Murray Street, Suite 330, Ottawa, ON K1N 5M3; URL: http://www.raic.org.

.1 RCABC - Roofing Contractors Association of British Columbia, 9734 201st Street, Langley, BC, V1M 3E8 URL http://www.rcabc.org/

.28 SCC - Standards Council of Canada, 270 Albert Street, Suite 2000, Ottawa, ON K1P 6N7; URL: http://www.scc.ca.

.29 TTMAC - Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada, 30 Capston Gate, Unit 5 Concord, ON L4K 3E8; URL: http://www.ttmac.com.

.30 ULC - Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada, 7 Crouse Road, Toronto, ON M1R 3A9; URL: http://www.ulc.ca.

.3 USA Organizations:

.1 AA - Aluminum Association, 900 19th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20006; URL: http://www.aluminum.org.

.2 AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, 444 N Capitol Street N.W., Suite 249, Washington, DC 20001; URL: http://www.aashto.org.

.3 AHA - American Hardboard Association, 1210W Northwest Hwy, Palatine, IL 60067; URL: http://www.hardboard.org.

.4 AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction, 7012 S. Revere Parkway, Suite 140, Englewood, CO 80112; URL: http://www.aitc-glulam.org.

.5 AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association Inc., 30 West University Drive, Arlington Heights, IL 60004-1893; URL: http://www.amca.org.

.6 ANSI - American National Standards Institute, 25 West 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; URL: http://www.ansi.org.

.7 APA - The Engineered Wood Association, P.O. Box 11700, Tacoma, WA 98411-0700; URL: http://www.apawood.org.

.8 API - American Petroleum Institute, 1220 L St. Northwest, Washington, DC 20005-4070; URL: http://www.api.org.

http://www.ulc.ca/



.9 ARI - Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute, 4100 N Fairfax Drive, Suite 200, Arlington, VA 22203; URL: http://www.ari.org.

.10 ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers, 1791 Tullie Circle NE, Atlanta, GA 30329; URL: http://www.ashrae.org.

.11 ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers, ASME Headquarters, 3 Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990; URL: http://www.asme.org.

.12 ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive West, Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959; URL: http://www.astm.org.

.13 AWCI - Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International, 803 West Broad Street, Suite 600, Falls Church, UA 22046; URL: http://www.awci.org.

.14 AWPA - American Wire Producer's Association, 801 N Fairfax Street, Suite 211, Alexandria, VA 22314-1757; URL: http://www.awpa.org.

.15 AWPA - American Wood Preservers' Association, P.O. Box 5690, Granbury TX 76049-0690; URL: http://www.awpa.com.

.16 AWS - American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, FL 33126; URL: http://www.amweld.org.

.17 AWWA - American Water Works Association, 6666 W. Quincy Avenue, Denver, CO 80235; URL: http://www.awwa.org.

.18 EIMA - EIFS Industry Manufacturer's Association, 3000 Corporate Center Drive, Suite 270, Morrow, GA 30260; URL: http://www.eima.com.

.19 ISAP - International Society for Asphalt Paving, 400 Selby Avenue, Suite 1, St. Paul, MN 55102; URL: http://www.asphalt.org.

.20 IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, IEE Corporate Office, 3 Park Avenue, 17th Floor, New York, NY 10016-5997;URL: http://www.ieee.org.

.21 MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, 127 Park Street, N.E., Vienna, VA 22180-4602; URL: http://www.mss-hq.com.

.22 NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, 8 South Michigan Avenue, Suite 1000, Chicago, IL 60603;URL: http://www.naamm.org.

.23 NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association, 1300 N 17th Street, Suite 1847, Rosslyn, VA 22209; URL: http://www.nema.org.

.24 NFPA - National Fire Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, P.O. Box 9101Quincy, MA 02269-9101; URL: http://www.nfpa.org.

.25 NFSA - National Fire Sprinkler Association, P.O. Box 1000, Patterson, NY 12563; URL: http://www.nfsa.org.

.26 NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association, 6830 Raleigh-La Grange Road, Memphis, TN 38184-0518; URL: http://www.natlhardwood.org.

.27 NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers, 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-2794; URL: http://www.nspe.org.

.28 PCI - Prestressed Concrete Institute, 209 W. Jackson Blvd., Suite 500, Chicago, IL 60606-6938; URL: http://www.pci.org.

.29 PEI - Porcelain Enamel Institute, PO Box 920220, Norcross, GA 30010;URL: http://www.porecelainenamel.com.

.30 SSPC - The Society for Protective Coatings, 40 24th Street, 6th Floor, Pittsburgh, PA 15222-4656; URL: http://www.sspc.org.

.31 TPI - Truss Plate Institute, 583 D'Onofrio Drive, Suite 200, Madison, WI 53719;URL: http://www.tpinst.org.

.32 UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, 333 Pfingsten Road, Northbrook, IL60062-2096; URL: http://www.ul.com.



Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 45 00 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 QUALITY CONTROL NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 2


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 INSPECTION

.1 Allow Consultant access to Work. If part of Work is in preparation at locations other than Place of Work, allow access to such Work whenever it is in progress.

.2 Give timely notice requesting inspection if Work is designated for special tests, inspections or approvals by Consultant instructions, or law of Place of Work.

.3 If Contractor covers or permits to be covered Work that has been designated for special tests, inspections or approvals before such is made, uncover such Work, have inspections or tests satisfactorily completed and make good such Work.

.4 Consultant will order part of Work to be examined if Work is suspected to be not in accordance with Contract Documents. If, upon examination such work is found not in accordance with Contract Documents, correct such Work and pay cost of examination and correction. If such Work is found in accordance with Contract Documents, Consultant shall pay cost of examination and replacement.

1.2 INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AGENCIES

.1 Independent Inspection/Testing Agencies will be engaged by the Owner for purpose of inspecting and/or testing portions of Work. Cost of such services will be borne by Owner.

.2 Provide equipment required for executing inspection and testing by appointed agencies.

.3 Employment of inspection/testing agencies does not relax responsibility to perform Work in accordance with Contract Documents.

.4 If defects are revealed during inspection and/or testing, appointed agency will request additional inspection and/or testing to ascertain full degree of defect. Correct defect and irregularities as advised by Consultant at no cost to Owner, pay costs for retesting and reinspection.

1.3 ACCESS TO WORK

.1 Allow inspection/testing agencies access to Work, off site manufacturing and fabrication plants.

.2 Co-operate to provide reasonable facilities for such access.

1.4 PROCEDURES

.1 Notify appropriate agency and Owner in advance of requirement for tests, in order that attendance arrangements can be made.

.2 Submit samples and/or materials required for testing, as specifically requested in specifications. Submit with reasonable promptness and in orderly sequence to not cause delays in Work.

.3 Provide labour and facilities to obtain and handle samples and materials on site. Provide sufficient space to store and cure test samples.

1.5 REJECTED WORK

.1 Remove defective Work, whether result of poor workmanship, use of defective products or damage and whether incorporated in Work or not, which has been rejected by Consultant as failing to conform to Contract Documents. Replace or re-execute in accordance with Contract Documents.

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 45 00 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 QUALITY CONTROL NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 2 of 2


.2 Make good other Contractor's work damaged by such removals or replacements promptly.

.3 If in opinion of Consultant it is not expedient to correct defective Work or Work not performed in accordance with Contract Documents, Owner will deduct from Contract Price difference in value between Work performed and that called for by Contract Documents, amount of which will be determined by Consultant.

1.6 REPORTS

.1 Submit electronic copies of inspection and test reports to Consultant.

.2 Provide copies to subcontractor of work being inspected or tested and manufacturer or fabricator of material being inspected or tested.

1.7 TESTS AND MIX DESIGNS

.1 Furnish test results and mix designs as requested.

.2 Cost of tests and mix designs beyond those called for in Contract Documents or beyond those required by law of Place of Work will be appraised by Consultant and may be authorized as recoverable.

1.8 MILL TESTS

.1 Submit mill test certificates as requested or required of specification Sections.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 50 00 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 16


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Provide temporary facilities and controls specified in this section and as otherwise required for performance of Work of the Contract.

.2 Materials Storage: There will be no on-site materials storage on this project, without Owner’s written permission. Procure and pay for off-site storage. Bring materials to the site only immediately prior to their incorporation into the Work.

1.2 SITE FENCE AND HOARDING

.1 Comply with requirements in Safety Procedure Manual, the Site Safety Plan and Site Specific requirements.

.2 Supply, install and maintain perimeter site fencing to conform to City of Quesnel’ standards and by-laws, complete with pained plywood and project signage, and lighting to alert and protect the public from entering the construction site during the course of the Work.

.3 Provide exterior and interior hoarding in accordance with BC Occupational Health and Safety Act.

.4 Provide covered hoarding and protection over public areas, and any other location threatened by overhead hazards. Paint hoarding where located facing streets.

.5 Temporary site hoarding is removed and disposed of by the contractor at the end of the Work, or when building has been enclosed and agreed to by the city AHJ.

.6 Permits

.1 Arrange and pay for necessary permits for proper execution and completion of the work of this section.

.7 Shop Drawings

.1 Submit shop drawings of temporary hoarding in accordance Section 01 33 00.

.2 Shop drawings: to show and describe in detail construction of temporary hoarding indicating all dimensions of materials, materials, materials grades, fabrication and connection details, including the relationship of temporary hoarding with existing utility poles, transit shelters, traffic signs and/or traffic lights, parking meters, area ways, vaults, newspaper vending boxes, buried utility services, overhead telephone lines and similar items.

.3 Include scope and location of hoarding on shop drawings .

.4 Shop drawings shall bear the seal and signature of a professional engineer registered in Ontario and familiar with designing hoarding structures.

.8 Design

.1 Design hoarding to meet bylaws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and obtain approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Design and supervise construction and maintenance of hoardings, covered ways, protective canopies and project sign(s).

.3 Prepare and install a project sign that will include the names of the design team. Submit preview of sign to Consultant to review before ordering.



.4 Maintain approved signs and notices in good condition for duration of project, and dispose of off-site on completion of project or as directed by Consultant.

1.3 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

.1 Provide and maintain, during the entire progress of the work, a suitable office on the site, for own use, with suitable tables or benches for the examination of drawings, specifications and contract documents where notices and instructions from Consultant may be received and acknowledged. Provide meeting space for eight (8) people.

1.4 TEMPORARY INTERNET AND OFFICE EQUIPMENT

.1 Computer and Internet Service: Provide one computer minimum connect to high speed internet access.

.2 Reference Materials: Where specified in individual sections make referenced standards available for review by Construction Team and Consultant and Consultant’s Team. The following minimum reference materials to be available as required.

.1 BC. Building Code.

.2 City of Quesnel standards and by-laws

1.5 ACCIDENT AND FIRST AID

.1 Provide, at the site, such equipment and medical facilities as are necessary to furnish first aid to anyone who may be injured in connection with the Work.

.2 Promptly report, in writing, to Project Manager, on accidents arising out of, or in connection with the performance of the Work, whether on or adjacent to the site, which caused death, personal injury, or property damage, giving full details and statements of witnesses.

.1 In case of serious damages, injuries, or death report, accident immediately by phone to the Project Manager.

1.6 SANITARY FACILITIES

.1 Provide and properly maintain in a clean condition, suitable and convenient facilities for accommodation for workers employed on the Work such that it shall not be a source of inconveniences, complaint, or nuisance to the public or the residents in the vicinity of the Works.

1.7 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATING

.1 Provide general heating for enclosed buildings to protect the integrity of structures, conditions and to allow work to proceed within the enclosed building.

1.8 LAYOUT OF THE WORK

.1 Layout major grid lines and mark on concrete structure at base of building together with sufficient datum elevations.

.2 Maintain layout and if disturbed, arrange for replacement at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.9 GUARD RAILS AND BARRICADES

.1 Provide temporary safeguards and protection, to protect against accident or injury to workers or other personnel on site.

.2 Provide and maintain guard as required by the authority having jurisdiction.



.3 Protect building materials in their final position, from freezing.

.4 Be responsible for safe storage of materials.

.5 Prevent sprayed materials from contaminating air beyond application area, by providing temporary enclosures.

.6 Remove temporary barriers and enclosures prior to completion and final acceptance. Patch and repair surfaces to original condition.

1.10 DESIGN OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES

.1 Be responsible for design and safety of temporary facilities. Temporary facilities of such nature that engineering proficiency is required for their design to ensure safety during construction to be designed by a Professional Engineer licensed to practice in BC.

.2 Before the temporary structures are used; the person responsible for the design or their representative to inspect the structure and issue a certificate stating that it has been constructed according to their design and meets code requirements.

1.11 WEATHER ENCLOSURES

.1 Provide weather tight closures to unfinished door and window openings, to top of shafts and other openings in floors and roofs.

.2 Provide protection against weather, rain, wind, storms, so as to maintain work, materials, apparatus and fixtures free from injury or damage. At end of day’s work protect new work likely to be damaged from same.

.3 Close off floor areas where walls are not finished; seal off other openings; enclose building interior work area for temporary heat.

.4 Properly protect the Work, and make provision for necessary temporary cold weather heating, during such periods of Work stoppages.

1.12 DUST TIGHT SCREENS

.1 Provide required dust tight screens to localize dust-generating activities, and protect workers, finished areas of Work, and the Public.

.2 Construct partitions using 92 mm steel studs at 400 mm oc. with continuous 0.15 mm polyethylene between studs and 12.7 mm drywall or plywood on one side. Extend partitions to underside of structure and seal to maintain dust proof seal. Ensure partitions are sealed at abutting walls or structure and at floors. Where exposed to the public the drywall to be vinyl faced.

.3 Provide, maintain and relocate protection until dust-generating activities are complete.

1.13 ELEVATORS

.1 Refer to Elevator Specifications.

1.14 PUBLIC TRAFFIC FLOW

.1 Provide and maintain, traffic signs barricades and lights as required, to protect the public at perimeter of construction site limits.

.2 Control traffic entering and leaving the site by providing flag persons.

.3 Do not obstruct building access or access to adjacent portions of site at any time, except by prior arrangements with the Owner and Authority Having Jurisdiction.



1.15 PROTECTION OF THE PUBLIC AND FIRE SAFETY

.1 Comply with requirements of the BC Building Code, including Safety Measures at Construction and Demolition Sites except where specified in stronger requirements.

1.16 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION

.1 Cleanup garbage and debris on a daily basis to achieve project’s Scheduling and Safety objectives.

.2 Clean up site on a regular basis during progress of Work, clean-up building premises and site and dispose of waste material, rubbish, and debris.

.3 Do not allow waste material, rubbish, and debris to accumulate and become an unsightly or hazardous condition. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.

.4 Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.

.5 Do not allow waste material, rubbish, and windblown debris to reach and contaminate adjacent properties.

.6 Sprinkle dusty debris with water as required.

.7 Lower waste material in a controlled manner; do not drop or throw materials from heights.

.8 Clean interior building areas prior to commencement of finishing operations and continue cleaning on an as-needed basis and to eliminate dust, until building is ready for occupancy.

1.17 MANAGEMENT AND WASTE DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Comply with Provincial and Municipal laws, rules and regulations pertaining to disposal operations.

.2 Collect and dispose of non-hazardous waste material, rubbish and debris from site.

.3 Do not burn or bury waste material, rubbish and debris on site.

.4 Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains.

.5 Separate hazardous waste from general waste and stored in an area designated by Owner. Ensure waste is promptly and properly removed and disposed of in accordance with regulations. Pay cost associated with debris removal.

1.18 CLEANING OF STREETS AND SIDEWALKS

.1 Prevent depositing of mud or debris on roadways, sidewalks, and paved areas. Promptly clean mud or debris so deposited.

.2 Clean or scrub trucks on site away from slops to street, not on roadway.

.3 Provide regular street sweeping to deal with concrete spills, asphalt pieces, construction and mud debris. Do not wash down streets or sidewalks by means of a flush truck. Vacuum sweep off-site areas.

.4 Prevent clogs in gutters and waste water drains. Where debris may be washed into the drains, provide silt diverter so that runoff will not lead to blockages and possible flooding that affects local properties and roadways. Comply to EPA storm-water runoff rules.

1.19 PEST CONTROL

.1 Provide rodent control and other pest control programs during construction, in accordance with requirements of jurisdictional authorities.



1.20 REMOVAL AND RESTORATION

.1 Remove temporary facilities specified in this Section, prior to request for inspection for Final Acceptance.

.2 Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition.

1.21 PARKING

.1 Onsite parking is to be coordinated with the PM and Facilities Maintenance staff on site.. Ensure that employees and subcontractor minimize impact of parking on neighboring residents and businesses.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 51 00 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 TEMPORARY UTILITIES NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 11


PART 1 GENERAL

.1 Include in the work construction of temporary facilities as required for the performance of the work as construction aids and as required by jurisdictional authorities, or as otherwise specified. Install to meet needs of construction as work progresses. Maintain construction and temporary facilities during use, repair them when damaged, relocate them as required by the work, remove them at completion of need, and make good adjacent work and property affected by their installation.

.2 Include in the work, construction of temporary facilities to provide for construction safety such as: fences, barricades, bracing, supports, storage, sanitation and first aid facilities, fire protection, stand pipes, electrical supply, temporary heat, steam supply, ventilation, construction equipment with its supports and guards, stairs, ramps, platforms, runways, ladders, scaffolds, guardrails, temporary flooring, rubbish chutes, and walkway, morality and guard lights, all as required of the Construction by the Occupational Health and Safety Act of the Province of BC, latest edition, as well as all other regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction.

.3 Construct temporary work of new materials unless otherwise approved.

.4 Ensure that structural, mechanical, and electrical characteristics of temporary facilities are suitable and adequate for the use intended. Be responsible that no harm is caused to persons and property by failure of temporary facilities because of placing, locations, stability, protection, structural sufficiency, removal, or any other cause.

.5 Prepare shop drawings and specifications of temporary work and submit for approval of jurisdictional authorities if so required. Submit duplicate copy to Consultant for his information.

.6 Locate temporary facilities where shown on Drawings or as directed.

.7 Apply two coats of paint, in approved colours, to temporary constructions, such as storage sheds; offices; supports; bracing and back side of signs; barricades; and where otherwise specified.

.8 Temporary Electric Power:

.1 The Contractor shall supply electric power for all construction purposes. Make connections available to any part of the work within distance of a 30 m extension. Provide power at temporary storage sheds and field office. Each Subcontractor shall be responsible for his own extension cords.

.2 Contractor shall provide and be responsible for payment of temporary power required for all equipment for construction use in excess of available existing sources.

.3 Contractor will be permitted use of existing power for construction purposes at no cost to the Contractor. Provide additional temporary power for individual tasks required by the technical sections

.9 Temporary Lighting:

.1 Install lighting for the following:

.1 Emergency evacuation, safety and security throughout the Project at intensity levels required by jurisdictional authorities

.2 Performance of work throughout work areas as required, evenly distributed, and at intensities to ensure proper installations and applications are achieved.

.3 Performance of finishing work in areas as required, evenly distributed, and of an intensity of at least 30 foot candles.



.2 Permanent lighting may be used during construction, provided lamps, fluorescent tubes and ballasts that are so used are replaced with new at time work is turned over to Owner.

.10 Temporary Heat:

.1 Heat the building during construction and completion of finish work to ensure a minimum temperature of 15 degrees Celsius and to maintain temperature for performance of the work including working, surface, and curing conditions required by all specified materials. Use only oil or propane fired heaters with enclosed combustion chamber vented to exterior in accordance with good practice and safety regulations.

.2 Take care that heating units are placed so that formwork and its supports are not endangered and that no material is damaged by excessive heat.

.3 If possible, and when approved by the Owner, the permanent heating system may be used to provide heat during construction. If approved, the Contractor shall be responsible for its operation, and for replacing and repairing damage it may suffer, and shall assume operation and maintenance of the system in all its parts and payment for fuel consumed. Operation and maintenance shall include inspection at least every two weeks of thermostats: valves: switches: lubrication: fan, belt and motor adjustment: cleaning and/or replacement of filters: and replacement of filters and re-servicing of system at completion of work.

.4 Connect electric motors only to permanent source of power, or otherwise provide proper source with correct design characteristics and with no fluctuation in voltage. Commence warranty period after re-servicing and from time the Owner takes over the premises.

.11 Temporary Water Supply:

.1 Provide water of potable quality for all construction purposes, at one location at least, on each floor area. If possible, and when approved by the Owner, the permanent site water source be used to provide water during construction.

.12 Temporary Sanitary Facilities:

.1 Provide sanitary facilities for persons on the work site as approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. Install them in sufficient number and maintain them in a sanitary condition.

.2 Do not permit construction personnel to use washroom and toilet facilities on premises which have been installed as part of the new work or which are part of the existing building for use by non-construction personnel.

.13 Connections to Utilities:

.1 Make arrangements for connections to water, sewer, gas, electric, and telephone utilities as required for temporary use during construction.

.2 The Owner is responsible for payment of final connection charges that are part of service contracts between him and each utility.

1.2 CONSTRUCTION AIDS

.1 Hoists and Cranes:

.1 Each Subcontractor is responsible for providing his own hoisting and crane operations. Equipment shall be operated by qualified hoist and/or crane operators.

.2 Where multiple trades are involved in high level work, the Contractor shall co-ordinate the hoisting and trade requirements.

.2 Building Enclosure:



.1 Include in work, temporary enclosures for building as required to protect it, in its entirety or in its parts, against the elements, to maintain environmental conditions required for work within the enclosure, and to prevent damage to materials stored within. Design enclosures to withstand wind pressures required for the building by jurisdictional authorities.

.2 Use structural framing of building for support of temporary enclosure framing only upon verification that the load limits of the building frame will not be exceeded. Erect enclosures to allow complete accessibility for installation of materials during the time enclosures remain in place.

.3 Scaffolding:

.1 Each Subcontractor shall provide his own scaffolding.

.2 Scaffolding shall be erected clear of walls, and to ensure that it does not interfere with continuing work.

.3 Subcontractor shall be responsible for its examination for sufficiency of his scaffolding and be responsible for accidents due to its insufficiency.

.4 The Contractor will be responsible for co-ordination of scaffold work if multiple trade usage can by achieved from one installation.

1.3 BARRIERS

.1 Install barricades to prevent damaging traffic over interior finished areas, as well as safety barricades and otherwise, as may be required.

.2 All barriers to be approved by the Owner prior to installation.

1.4 TEMPORARY HOARDING

.1 Provide temporary hoarding, covered walkways and the like as specified herein and complying with the National Building Code, BC Building Code all other by-laws of the municipality and all other jurisdictional authorities.

.2 Shop Drawings:

.1 Submit shop drawings of temporary hoarding in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

.2 Shop drawings shall show and describe in detail construction of temporary hoarding indicating all dimensions of materials, materials, materials grades, fabrication and connection details, including the relationship of temporary hoarding with existing utility poles, transit shelters, traffic signs and/or traffic lights, parking meters, area ways, vaults, newspaper vending boxes, buried utility services, overhead streetcar power lines, overhead telephone lines and similar items.

.3 Shop drawings shall bear the seal and signature of a professional engineer registered to design structures in the place of Work.

.3 Materials:

.1 Wood Framing: Sizes as indicated on standard drawing, RE-1556M, NLGA No. 2 Grade minimum, SPS 2 (Machine Stress Rated Lumber), well- seasoned, processed and stamped at the same mill with appropriate grade markings.

.2 Wood Decking: Sizes and species as indicated on standard drawing RE- 1556M, NLGA Grade No. 2 minimum, "V" jointed tongue and groove wood roof plank decking, kiln dried to 15% moisture content, of lengths to suit conditions, processed and stamped at the same mill with appropriate grade markings.



.3 Plywood Sheathing: Minimum thicknesses as indicated on standard drawing RE-1556M, exterior grade Douglas Fir veneer core plywood, exposed one side, and conforms to CSA 0121, Grade G/Solid.

.4 Rough Hardware: Provide rough hardware such as nails, spikes, staples, bolts, nuts, washers, screws, and clips as required for temporary hoarding. Nails for plywood shall be annular or spiral type, other nails shall be spiral type. Nails and/or spikes for wood roof plank decking shall be annular or spiral type. All nails, spikes and staples shall conform to CSA B111. All rough hardware shall be hot-dip galvanized to conform to CAN/CSA-G164-M, unless otherwise noted.

.5 Paint Primer: Exterior alkyd paint type wood primer conforming to CGSB 1- GP-189M and compatible with finish paint system.

.6 Paint: Exterior alkyd enamel type paint for wood, conforming to CAN/CGSB- 1.135-M (flat), or CAN/CGSB-1.59-M (gloss), or CAN/CGSB-1.28-M. Colours, paint types and gloss as selected later by Consultant to meet Owner's requirements.

.7 Electrical: Provide conduit, wiring, electrical boxes, switches and all other components required to conform to the requirements of Division 16, the Canadian Electrical Code and all other jurisdictional authorities.

.8 Light Fixtures: Surface mounted, security type light fixture complete with vandal proof housing, prismatic lens and 100W/A19 lamp mounting, 'Kendall No. 3990', or approved equal.

.4 Installation:

.1 Install and erect temporary hoarding prior to commencement of Work in accordance with the requirement of the jurisdictional authorities.

.2 Supply, install, energize and maintain lighting at maximum 10'-0" O.C. along the length of all covered hoarding areas.

.3 Provide one (1) coat of paint primer and three (3) coats of finish paint to all surfaces of temporary hoarding. Perform all painting of temporary hoarding in accordance with the requirements of the Ontario Painting Contractor's Association Painting Specification Manual. Repaint temporary hoarding with one (1) coat of finish paint every six (6) months.

.4 Contractor shall provide painted graphics on temporary hoarding as detailed later by the Consultant to meet the Owner's requirements. Contractor shall employ painters especially skilled in painting of graphics. Neatly and accurately layout graphics to proportions and spacings required. Paint graphics in colours as required.

.5 Co-ordinate installation of temporary hoarding with the requirements of all jurisdictional authorities.

.6 Maintain temporary hoarding in good order and appearance.

.7 Dismantle, remove and dispose of temporary hoarding upon completion of construction and in accordance with the requirements of the jurisdictional authorities.

.8 Plastic coloured "caution" tape, plastic snow or construction type fencing, or other similar methods shall not be used as temporary hoarding.

1.5 PROTECTION

.1 Provide temporary protection to construction as required by the Work, to protect it from damage.

.2 Box with wood or otherwise protect from damage, by continuing construction, finished sills, jambs, corners, and the like.



.3 Adequately protect the Work at all stages of operations and maintain protection until the Work is completed. Remove and replace, at no additional cost to Owner, damaged Work and materials that cannot be repaired or restored to the approval of the Consultant.

.4 Provide spare safety helmets for and enforce their use by Owner, Consultants, and representatives and authorized visitors to the site.

.5 In addition to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, provide temporary protection and safeguards adequate to protect against:

.1 Accident or injury to workers and other persons on the site or adjacent work and properties.

.2 Damage to any part of the Work and to any adjoining or adjacent structure, property, services, and other similar items, by overloading, weather, frost, any other cause resulting from the execution of the Work.

.3 Protect work, existing property, adjacent tenant and public property from damage during performance of Work. Should any part of the Work or any buildings, services or similar items on or surrounding the areas of the work and adjacent to any road leading thereto become damaged or disfigured due to lack or failure of such protection, they shall be made good with material identical with the existing and adjoining surfaces, to the satisfaction of the authorities having jurisdiction and the Owner.

.4 Damaged work shall be made good by those performing work originally, or workers experienced or skilled in that particular type of work, at expense of those causing damage.

.5 Provide and maintain necessary temporary enclosures, hoardings, fences, gates, barriers, guards, hoists, cranes, stairs, ladders and scaffolding, walks, platforms, staging as necessary for the Work and protection of workers, public and others from injury, and for public access to adjacent buildings. All such apparatus shall meet requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction.

.6 Provide secure, rigid guard railings, hoardings and barricades around openings, as required by authorities and to maintain safety.

.7 Provide proper guard devices, signs, signals and lights for the prevention of accidents.

.8 Maintain at night, sufficient and suitable warning lights to prevent accidents and injuries to persons and/or property.

.9 Alter, remove and relocate or replace hoardings, barriers and entrances as required by authorities and the Work. Hazards requiring such protection shall be eliminated as soon as possible and protection devices removed. Maintain protection until state of construction allows their removal.

.10 Provide and maintain temporary weathertight protection for all exterior openings in walls, floors and roofs until the building is closed in.

.11 Close off floor areas where walls are not finished, seal off openings and enclose building interior work area. Polyethylene or other approved translucent material shall be framed in or around wall openings. Provide temporary doors, frames, hinges, locks, keys and bolts as required.

.12 Should the work be stopped for any cause, provide protection and bracing for the Work.

.6 Protect all existing trees and landscaping which is to remain, using methods and materials recommended by the Canadian Nursery Trades Association and as approved by the Consultant.

.7 Lay protective 1/2" plywood over completed areas of roof on which other trades are to work.



1.6 FIRE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Comply with fire and safety regulations required by the jurisdictional authorities.

.2 Take necessary precautions to eliminate fire hazards and to prevent damage to Work, building materials, equipment and other property both public and private having to do with Work. Inspect Work at minimum weekly intervals for this purpose.

.3 Store and locate products and equipment packed in cardboard cartons, wood crates and other combustible containers in orderly and accessible manner.

.4 Tarpaulins shall be fire-resistant.

.5 Open fires and burning of rubbish are not permitted on the site.

.6 Provide and maintain in working order, ULC labelled fire extinguishers or other approved fire extinguishing equipment, locate in prominent positions, in accordance with requirements of authorities and insurance companies having jurisdiction, codes, regulations and bylaws in the building until the permanent fire protection system in the building is available.

.7 Provide temporary standpipe system, when required by authorities having jurisdiction.

.8 Except as otherwise specified herein, soldering, welding and cutting operations shall be carried out in areas free of combustible and flammable contents, with walls, ceilings and floors of noncombustible construction or lined with noncombustible materials.

.9 When it is not practicable to undertake welding, soldering and cutting operations in areas described in the previous paragraph, combustible and flammable materials shall either be removed minimum of 35'-0" feet from the work area or otherwise protected against ignition by sheet metal or other noncombustible material.

.10 When welding, soldering, or cutting is to be carried out near piping containing flammable gas, the section of piping located within 3'-0" of the torch or other source of combustion shall be covered with wet, noncombustible insulating material at least 1/4" thick.

.11 Prior to initiating any open flame work or welding operation, discuss the proposed work with the Consultant and take necessary precautions to prevent inadvertent activation of the existing fire alarm system. Have sufficient suitable hand operated fire extinguishers on hand near the work area. Ensure that an additional person is readily available to operate fire extinguishers should the need arise.

1.7 PERSONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Comply with all requirements of the Occupational Health and Safety Act, Ministry of Labour, Construction Safety Association and all other jurisdictional authorities in the place of the Work.

.2 Contractor shall submit company safety policy for review by Owner and Consultant.

.3 The policy must meet or exceed the requirements of the jurisdictional authorities.

.4 Contractor shall employ and pay for services of safety supervisor in accordance with the requirements of the jurisdictional authorities. Safety supervisor shall have training with the Construction Safety Association.

.5 Alcohol and/or drugs will not be allowed on the site. Anyone found in possession of alcohol and/or drugs shall be dismissed from the site immediately and without notice, maybe subject to civil and/or criminal proceedings.

.6 WHMIS program shall be fully enforced.

.7 Contractor shall be prepared to sign the "Guidelines For The Structure and Function Of The Joint Occupational Health and Safety Committee", if requested by the Owner.



.8 When carrying out soldering, welding or cutting procedures, be it in shop or in the field, ensure that workers comply with the following:

.1 Wear appropriate protective clothing such as gloves, leather aprons and/or arm spark guards.

.2 Wear suitable goggles or face shields as appropriate.

.3 Protect co-workers from eye or other injuries through the use of fire resistant portable shielding devices.

.4 Provide and use a portable fume eliminator at all times during welding, soldering, or cutting operations within the existing building.

1.8 SECURITY

.1 Maintain security of construction site by control of access through enclosing barricades, and hoardings during times work is in progress, and by locking hardware.

.2 Properly close and lock the construction site at nights, Sundays, holidays and other occasions when the Work is not in progress.

.3 The Owner assumes no responsibility for the safeguarding of tools or equipment from theft.

.4 Take precautions to guard construction site, premises, materials and the public during and after working hours. During regular working hours, maintain watch to guard construction site and contents.

.5 Maintain security at all times construction is shut down because of a strike or a lockout.

.6 Provide security as required and ensure adjacent commercial activity is not affected by construction activity.

.7 Provide personnel to direct traffic as required during working hours.

1.9 ACCESS ROADS, WALKS AND PARKING

.1 Access Roads and Walks:

.1 All construction vehicles and personnel required for construction shall use existing access roads and walks as determined at later date by Owner. When no longer required, or at completion of Work, make good disturbed surfaces. Maintain roads and walks, removing dirt, mud, debris, ice, snow and other obstructions during use.

.2 Provide for access of emergency vehicles at all times.

.2 Parking:

.1 Parking for Contractor's, subcontractors, suppliers and/or their employee's vehicles shall be limited to restricted area as designated by the Owner.

.2 The Owner, property management and their employees will not be responsible for parking fines incurred by the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers and/or their employees.

1.10 SITE SIGNS

.1 No signs, bills or posters will be allowed on the site, other than site signs as follows:

.1 Project construction sign shall be supplied and installed by Owner under work of separate Contract.

.2 Place only specified project construction sign and notices regarding safety, caution, or instructions on or near site.



.3 No unauthorized signs, bills, posters or advertisements of any kind are permitted. Should such unauthorized advertisements be applied to the temporary hoarding by the public or anyone else, upon discovery of such, the Contractor shall remove them on a weekly basis.

.4 Erect all notices as directed by Owner.

.5 Remove all notices on completion of the Contract.

1.11 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

.1 Field Offices:

.1 Provide temporary offices in a standard, not separate trailer, for Owner's, Consultant's and Contractor's use. They shall contain facilities as required for Contractor, a conference table and chairs for site meetings, and facilities for the Owner and the Consultants.

.2 Temporary field offices shall be designated on site until such time where an area located inside the constructed building, can be designated by the Owner. No other location shall be used for temporary field office.

.3 Facilities shall consist of: an office desk and chair, a two drawer filing cabinet, two chairs, use of a telephone, use of facsimile machine, and a layout table for drawings located so that when drawings are spread out their orientation is same as that of building under construction.

.4 Heat, cool and light offices to minimum code requirements for office buildings.

.5 Keep temporary field office clean and remove all rubbish at the end of each work day.

.6 Include construction and operating hardware, with security locks, as required by the Owner.

.2 Site Storage:

.1 Until such time where an area can be located inside the constructed building, designated by the Owner as a temporary site storage, provide storage trailers in locations indicated by the Owner.

.2 Include security locks, as required.

.3 Install lighting in storage areas and heat in those storage areas containing materials damaged by low temperature.

1.12 DUST CONTROL

.1 Provide dust tight screens or barriers to localize dust generating activities for the protection of tenants, employees, equipment, adjacent and finished areas of Work, and the public. Maintain and relocate protection until Work is complete. Respond immediately to complaints of dust received from the public, authorities, Owner and Consultant.

.2 Obtain Consultant's approval of installed dustproof screens and protection methods before proceeding with construction/alteration work.

.3 Painted gypsum wallboard and metal stud dustproof screens, shall extend to underside of structure, and shall be erected to protect adjoining areas and rooms. Apply bead of sealant or other acceptable seal continuously around periphery of each face of partitioning to seal gypsum board/structure junction where dustproof screens abut fixed building components. Seal perimeter of cutouts, around fixtures and fittings and other penetrations. Tape or seal between adjacent boards. Separate construction areas from occupied areas.

.4 Provide protection for existing equipment sensitive to dust and noise. Co-ordinate location of dust barriers and dust tight doors with Consultant.



.5 Install temporary packing at bottom of doors to areas where demolition/construction shall be performed to prevent dust seepage into existing spaces. Do not permit dust and dirt to escape beyond area being constructed/altered.

.6 Provide daily vacuuming of construction dust from existing areas as work progresses; this shall be considered a minimum requirement, increase vacuuming as necessary. The Owner may have vacuuming work done by others and cost deducted from Contractor's progress payments if this requirement is not fulfilled.

.7 Provide locked doors in barriers to permit access by Consultant, Owner and Owner's security personnel to construction areas and to areas under Contractor's custody.

.8 Supply padlocks and construction cores.

.9 Remove dustproof screens at completion of work in areas and make good damaged or blemished areas. Patch and make good to access, altered and damaged areas caused by work and screens. Maintain integrity of fire or sound separation.

.10 Prevent nuisance to adjacent areas near the work from dust by taking additional appropriate anti-dust measures at such times as found necessary, and at other times complaints of dust are received from the Owner's representative and others.

1.13 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL

.1 Take measures to control noise and vibration generated by the Work.

.2 Take appropriate noise and vibration control measures at times found necessary, and at other times complaints of noise are received from the public, authorities, Owner and Consultant.

.3 These requirements are for the consideration of the public, tenants and employees. Requirements shall not be construed as cause for elimination or restriction of Contractor's working schedule, claims for delay of work nor additional costs.

1.14 COLD WEATHER WORKING

.1 Particular attention is drawn to the requirement that the Contractor shall commence work immediately the Contract is awarded and shall continue full scale operations throughout the winter months and thereafter until the work is completed and accepted by the Consultant.

.2 It is understood that the Contract Price includes sufficient funds for the provisions of temporary heating, temporary shelters and all other necessary cold weather measures to enable all trades to proceed without delay regardless of weather.

1.15 FIRES

.1 Open burning fires on site will not be permitted.

1.16 FIRST AID SERVICES

.1 Provide and maintain First Aid services as required by the authorities having jurisdiction, the Workplace Safety and Insurance Board (WSIB) and Union Agreements.

1.17 TRAFFIC CONTROL

.1 When overhead work is in progress, provide and maintain flagpersons, temporary traffic signals, barricades, flares, lights and/or lanterns as required to perform the Work, and protect the Public as required by the jurisdictional authorities



1.18 ENVIRONMENTAL/POLLUTION CONTROL/SITE CLEANING

.1 Prevent the escape of untreated effluent, be it liquid or gaseous substance or any liquid or solid wastes, being objectionable or detrimental to adjoining areas of the construction site.

.2 Burning or burying of rubbish, waste, and the like is not permitted on construction site.

.3 Only fires for heating bitumen and temporary heaters as specified are permitted on site.

.4 Take care to prevent staining or smoke damage to structure or materials. Replace stained or damaged work.

.5 Make every effort to provide environmental protection, take precautionary measures to prevent excessive noise, sounds, vibrations, dust, air pollution, smoke, etc., which may become objectionable to people occupying adjacent areas.

.6 Keep building site clean and free or unsightly collection of waste materials and debris. Provide for temporary storage and collection of waste materials, and dispose to local authorities recommendations at intervals to maintain a clean site condition.

.7 Confine apparatus, the storage of materials and the operations of workers to the site. Do not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction materials.

1.19 SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

1.20 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

.1 Provide temporary utilities controls in order to execute work expeditiously.

.2 Remove from site all such work after use.

1.21 DEWATERING

.1 Provide temporary drainage and pumping facilities to keep excavations and site free from standing water.

1.22 WATER SUPPLY

.1 Provide continuous supply of potable water for construction use.

1.23 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION

.1 Temporary heaters are not permitted unless permission is granted by the Owner, in which case they must be electric.

.2 Provide temporary ventilation in enclosed areas as required to:

.1 Facilitate progress of Work.

.2 Provide adequate ventilation to meet health regulations for safe working environment.

.3 Prevent accumulations of dust, fumes, mists, vapours or gases in areas occupied during construction or deconstruction.

.4 Provide local exhaust ventilation to prevent harmful accumulation of hazardous substances into atmosphere of occupied areas.

.5 Dispose of exhaust materials in manner that will not result in harmful exposure to persons.

.6 Ventilate storage spaces containing hazardous or volatile materials.



.7 Continue operation of ventilation and exhaust system for time after cessation of work process to assure removal of harmful contaminants.

.3 Maintain strict supervision of operation of temporary ventilating equipment to:

.1 Conform to applicable codes and standards.

.2 Enforce safe practices.

.3 Prevent abuse of services.

.4 Be responsible for damage to Work due to failure in providing adequate ventilation and protection during construction.

1.24 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHT

.1 Provide temporary power during the course of Work for temporary lighting and operating of power tools.

.2 Provide and maintain temporary lighting throughout project.

1.25 TEMPORARY COMMUNICATION FACILITIES

.1 Provide and pay for temporary data hook up, lines, and equipment necessary for own use.

1.26 FIRE PROTECTION

.1 Provide and maintain temporary fire protection equipment during performance of Work required by Insurance companies, Building Code and Fire Code.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 52 00 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 3


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

1.2 HOARDING

.1 See Section 01 56 00 – Temporary Barriers and Enclosures.

1.3 SCAFFOLDING AND STAIRS

.1 Scaffolding in accordance with CAN/CSA-S269.2 for Deconstruction and Making-good.

.2 Provide and maintain scaffolding, ramps, ladders, swing staging, platforms, and temporary stairs (scaffold stairs).

.3 Existing entrance and exits at adjacent buildings to be maintained for Owner’s staff whenever possible.

1.4 HOISTING

.1 Provide, operate and maintain hoists cranes as required for moving of workers, materials and equipment. Make financial arrangements with Subcontractors for their use of hoists.

.2 Hoists cranes to be operated by qualified operator.

1.5 SITE STORAGE/LOADING

.1 Confine work and operations of employees by Contract Documents. Do not unreasonably encumber premises with products.

.2 Do not load or permit to load any part of Work with weight or force that will endanger Work.

1.6 SECURITY

.1 Provide security for site. Contractor is responsible for any damage or missing items until Substantial Completion.

1.7 OFFICES

.1 Provide marked and fully stocked first-aid case in a readily available location.

.2 Contractors to provide their own offices as necessary. Location to be confirmed by Consultant.

1.8 EQUIPMENT, TOOL AND MATERIALS STORAGE

.1 Provide and maintain, in clean and orderly condition, lockable weatherproof sheds for storage of tools, equipment and materials.

.2 Locate materials not required to be stored in weatherproof sheds on site in manner to cause least interference with work activities.

1.9 SANITARY FACILITIES

.1 Provide sanitary facilities for work force in accordance with governing regulations and ordinances.



.2 Post notices and take precautions as required by local health authorities. Keep area and premises in sanitary condition.

1.10 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC

.1 Provide access and temporary relocated roads as necessary to maintain traffic.

.2 Maintain and protect traffic on affected roads during construction period except as otherwise specifically directed by Consultant.

.3 Provide measures for protection and diversion of traffic, including provision of watch-persons and flag-persons, erection of barricades, placing of lights around and in front of equipment and work, and erection and maintenance of adequate warning, danger, and direction signs

.4 Protect travelling public from damage to person and property.

.5 Contractor's traffic on roads selected for hauling material to and from site to interfere as little as possible with public traffic.

.6 Verify adequacy of existing roads and allowable load limit on these roads. Contractor: responsible for repair of damage to roads caused by construction operations.

.7 Construct access and haul roads necessary.

.8 Provide necessary lighting, signs, barricades, and distinctive markings for safe movement of traffic.

.9 Dust control: adequate to ensure safe operation at all times and maintain wetted surfaces during deconstruction.

.10 Lighting: to assure full and clear visibility for full width of haul road and work areas during night work operations.

.11 Provide snow removal during period of Work within contractors hoarding zone.

1.11 CLEAN-UP

.1 Remove construction debris, waste materials, packaging material from work site daily.

.2 Clean dirt or mud tracked onto paved or surfaced roadways.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 56 00 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 2


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

.1 Provide temporary controls in order to execute Work expeditiously.

.2 Remove from site all such work after use.

1.2 HOARDING

.1 Contractor to provide, erect, remove when complete, temporary enclosures as required. Locations are to be as required for all work and not limited to as shown on drawings. Continuous access is to be maintained to all working areas of the facility as required by client.

1.3 GUARD RAILS AND BARRICADES

.1 Provide secure, rigid guard rails and barricades around deep excavations, open shafts, open edges of floors, and roofs.

.2 Provide as required by governing authorities.

1.4 WEATHER ENCLOSURES

.1 Provide weather tight closures to unfinished openings at all new and existing buildings as demolition progresses.

1.5 ACCESS TO SITE

.1 Provide and maintain access roads, sidewalk crossings, ramps and construction runways as may be required for access to Work.

1.6 FIRE ROUTES

.1 Maintain access to property including overhead clearances for use by emergency response vehicles.

1.7 PROTECTION OF EXISTING BUILDING(S)

.1 Provide protection to existing building(s) and equipment during performance of Work.

.2 Provide necessary screens, covers, and hoardings.

.3 Confirm with Owner and Managing Consultant locations and installation schedule two weeks prior to installation.

.4 Be responsible for damage incurred due to lack of or improper protection.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 56 00 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 2 of 2


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 60 00 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 4


1.1 GENERAL

.1 Products refer to materials, manufactured components and assemblies, fixtures and equipment incorporated in the work.

.2 Use only products of Canadian manufacture unless such products are not manufactured in Canada, are specified otherwise, or are not competitive.

.3 Products for use in the Project and on which the Bid was based shall be in production at time of tender date, with a precise model and shop drawings available for viewing.

.4 Where equivalent products are specified, or where alternatives are proposed, these products claimed by the Contractor as equivalent shall be comparable in construction, type, function, quality, performance, and, where applicable, in appearance. Where specified equivalents are used in the Stipulated Price for the work, they shall be subject to final approval.

.5 Incorporate products in the work in strict accordance with Manufacturers' directions, instructions and specifications, where reference is made to them, shall include full information on storing, handling, preparing, mixing, installing, erecting, applying, and other matters concerning the materials that are pertinent to their use and their relationship to materials with which they are incorporated.

.6 Products delivered to the Project site for incorporation in the work shall be considered the property of the Owner. Maintain protection and security of products stored on the site after payment has been made for them.

.7 Do not install permanently incorporated labels, trademarks and nameplates, in visible locations unless required for operating instructions or by jurisdictional authorities.

1.2 PRODUCT HANDLING

.1 Manufacture, pack, ship, deliver and store products so that no damage occurs to structural qualities and finish appearance, nor in any other way detrimental to their function or appearance, or both.

.2 Ensure that products, while transported, stored or installed, are not exposed to an environment which would increase their moisture content beyond the maximum specified.

.3 Schedule early delivery of products to enable work to be executed without delay. Before delivery, arrange for receiving at site.

.4 Deliver and store products at site where directed by the Contractor.

.5 Brace work such as door frames, large window units and similar products to prevent distortion or breakage in handling.

.6 Deliver packaged products, and store until use, in original unopened wrapping or containers, with manufacturer's seals and labels intact.

.7 Label packaged products to describe contents, quantity and other information as specified.

.8 Label fire-rated products to indicate approval of Underwriters' Laboratories.

.9 Product handling requirements may be repeated, and additional requirements specified, in other Sections.



1.3 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

.1 Store products on site with secure protection against all harmful environmental conditions. Prevent damage, adulteration, staining and soiling of materials while stored.

.2 Protect prefinished metal surfaces by protective coatings or wrappings until time of final cleanup specified in Section 01 70 00. Protection shall be easily removable under work of Section 01 70 00 without damage to finishes.

.3 Store manufactured products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

.4 Store steel, lumber, masonry units, and similar products on platforms raised clear of ground.

.5 Store finished products and woodwork under cover at all times.

.6 Do not store products at locations or in such a manner that they damage previously completed work.

.7 Storage and special protection requirements may be repeated and additional requirements specified, in other Sections.

1.4 SPECIFIED PRODUCTS

.1 Products specified by manufacturer's name, brand name or catalogue reference shall be the basis of the bid and shall be supplied for the work without exception in any detail, subject to allowable substitutions as approved.

.2 Where several proprietary products are specified, any one of the several will be acceptable, but must be clarified at time of bidding. Later substitutions will not be acceptable.

.3 For products specified by reference standards, the onus shall be on the supplier to establish that such products meet reference standard requirements. The Consultant may require affidavits from the supplier, as specified in Section 01 33 00, or inspection and testing at the expense of the supplier, or both, to prove compliance. Products exceeding minimum requirements established by reference standards will be accepted for the work if such products are compatible with, and harmless to, work with which they are incorporated.

1.5 SCHEDULING OF PRODUCT DELIVERY

.1 Verify that products supplied by all Sections are ordered from suppliers in sufficient time to ensure delivery for incorporation in the work within the time limits established by approved construction schedule.

.2 Obtain confirmed delivery dates from product suppliers.

.3 Immediately inform the Consultant should supplier's confirmation of delivery dates indicate that Project completion may be delayed.

.4 Submit copies of purchase orders and confirmations of delivery dates for products as may be requested.

.5 A schedule of product delivery shall be established and reviewed at each job site meeting.

.6 When deemed necessary, plant visits shall occur by the General Contractor to ensure delivery dates given are true and accurate.

1.6 SUBSTITUTION OF PRODUCTS DURING PROGRESS OF WORK

.1 as approved, if the listed product cannot be delivered to maintain construction schedule, and if the delay is caused by conditions beyond the Constructor's control. Substitute only



a product that is of equal or superior quality to the specified product as approved, and with no addition to the Contract Price. If only a product of inferior quality is available and acceptable to the Owner, the Contract Price shall be adjusted accordingly as approved by the Consultant/Owner.

.2 Application for substitution will not be considered if caused by ordering of product later than date required by supplier's delivery schedule to ensure completion of the work on schedule as approved.

.3 Obtain approval for substitutions. Application for approval shall be made only by the Contractor. Process proposals for substituted work in accordance with procedures established for changes in the work.

.4 Submit, with request for substitution, documentary evidence that substituted products are equal to, or superior to, approved products, and a comparison of price and delivery factors for both specified or approved products, and proposed substitute.

.5 Ensure, that substituted products can be both functionally and dimensionally incorporated in the work with no loss of intended function, performance, space or construction time, and that spare parts and service are readily available. The Contractor shall be responsible for additional installation costs, including architectural and engineering fees, required by incorporation of substituted products, and for adaptions made otherwise necessary to ensure that above requirements are satisfied.

1.7 DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS AND WORK

.1 Products and work found defective; not in accordance with the Specifications; or defaced or injured through negligence of the Contractor, his employees or Subcontractors, or by fire, weather or any other cause will be rejected for incorporation in the work whether or not incorporated in the work.

.2 Remove rejected products and work from the premises immediately.

.3 Replace rejected products and work with no delay after rejection. Provide replacement products and execute replacement work precisely as required by the Specifications for the defective work replaced. Previous inspection and payment shall not relieve the Contractor from the obligation of providing sound and satisfactory work in compliance with the Specifications.

.4 Testing and retesting of any part of the work as directed by the Owner, Consultant or Contractor to establish its conformance to the Contract Documents shall be performed at no addition to the Contract Price.

1.8 WORKERS, SUPPLIERS AND SUBCONTRACTORS

.1 Assign work only to workers, suppliers, and Subcontractors who have complete knowledge, not only of the conditions of the Specifications, but of jurisdictional requirements, and reference standards and specifications.

.2 Give preference to use of local workers, suppliers and Subcontractors wherever possible.

.3 Certified and qualified installers of a specific product line shall be used when called for in these Specifications.

1.9 WORKMANSHIP

.1 Unless otherwise specified in a more detailed manner, workmanship shall be of the highest quality recognized by the trade executing the work in accordance with standard practices, by the best methods recommended by the manufacturer of the product, and as approved by the Consultant.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 60 00 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 3


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Products.

.2 Manufacturer’s Instructions.

.3 Transportation and Delivery.

.4 Storage and Protection.

.5 General Installation Requirements

.6 Product Options.

.7 Substitutions.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 This section applies to Technical Specification sections, and supplements the General and Supplemental Conditions, and General-Subcontractor Agreement.

1.3 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Products include material, equipment and systems.

.2 Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, unless otherwise approved in writing by Consultant. Specifications and referenced standards are minimum requirements.

.3 A required component to be supplied in quantity shall be the same, and shall be interchangeable. This requirement applied to items furnished under one or several sections of the specifications.

.4 Unless specified or indicated otherwise, materials employed for construction purposes, such as formwork, scaffolding, and temporary lighting, shall not be incorporated into Work.

.5 Unless indicated or specified otherwise, products incorporated into the Work shall be new, and of the most suitable grade of their respected kinds for the intended use.

1.4 TRANSPORTATION AND DELIVERY

.1 Confirm suppliers or distributors of materials specified or accepted alternatives, which have been bid, has their materials on site when required. Obtain confirmed delivery dates from the supplier, and ensure no delay in progress of the work.

.2 Provide equipment delivery schedule, coordinated with construction and submittals schedule, showing delivery dates for major and/or critical equipment.

.1 Transport products by methods to avoid product damage.

.2 Provide delivery access and unloading areas.

.3 Deliver products in manufacturer’s original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.

.4 Furnish equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage.

.5 Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.

.6 Immediately replace non-conforming products with new conforming products, at no additional cost to Owner.



.7 Make available areas for storage of products and construction equipment to meet specified requirements, and to ensure a minimum of interference with progress of the work and relocation.

.8 Make access available to transfer stored products and construction equipment to work areas.

.3 Contact Consultant immediately upon receipt of information indicating that any material or item, will not be available on time, in accordance with the original schedule, and similarly it shall be the responsibility of all subcontractors and suppliers to so inform the Contractor.

.4 Consultant reserves the right to receive, upon request, from Contractor at any time copies of actual purchase or work orders of any material or products to be supplied for the work.

.5 If materials and products have not been placed on order, the Consultant may instruct such items to be placed on order, if direct communication in writing from the manufacturer or prime suppliers is not available indicating that delivery of said material will be made in sufficient time for the orderly completion of the Work.

.6 The Consultant's review of purchase orders or other related documentation shall in no way release the Contractor, or his subcontractors and suppliers from their responsibility for ensuring the timely ordering of all materials and items required, including the necessary expediting, to complete the work as scheduled in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

.1 Store products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible.

.2 Store sensitive products in weather-tight enclosures. Maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer’s instructions, and as otherwise required to prevent damage.

.3 For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. Protect from soiling or staining through ground contact. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; provide ventilation to avoid condensation.

.4 Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well-drained area; prevent mixing with foreign matter.

.5 Arrange storage of products to furnish convenient access for inspection and inventory.

1.6 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

.1 Unless indicated or specified otherwise, install each product in accordance with the product manufacturer’s instructions.

.2 Obtain and distribute copies of manufacturer’s instructions to parties involved in the installation, including two copies to Consultant.

1.7 PRODUCT OPTIONS

.1 Product specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Provide product meeting those standards.

.2 Product Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with an “or approved” Provision: Use specified product or submit request for substitution in accordance with the specified requirements. When approved a substitute product may be used.

.3



.4 Product Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers, without a provision for Substitution: No substitution will be allowed, except as specified under the Article on Substitutions.

1.8 SUBSTITUTIONS

1. Refer to Section 01 25 00

1.9 PRODUCTS

.1 Not Used.

1.10 EXECUTION

.1 Not Used

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 61 00 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 4


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 Within text of each specifications section, reference may be made to reference standards.

.2 Conform to these reference standards, in whole or in part as specifically requested in specifications.

.3 If there is question as to whether products or systems are in conformance with applicable standards, Consultant reserves right to have such products or systems tested or to receive test data.

.4 Cost for such testing will be born by Consultant in event of conformance with Contract Documents or by Contractor in event of non-conformance.

1.2 QUALITY

.1 Products, materials, equipment and articles incorporated in Work shall be new, not damaged or defective, and of best quality for purpose intended. If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of products provided.

.2 Procurement policy is to acquire, in cost effective manner, items containing highest percentage of recycled and recovered materials practicable consistent with maintaining satisfactory levels of competition. Make reasonable efforts to use recycled and recovered materials and in otherwise utilizing recycled and recovered materials in execution of work.

.3 Defective products, whenever identified prior to completion of Work, will be rejected, regardless of previous reviews. Review does not relieve responsibility but is precaution against oversight or error. Remove and replace defective products at own expense and be responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection.

.4 Should disputes arise as to quality or fitness of products, decision rests strictly with Consultant based upon requirements of Contract Documents.

.5 Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, maintain uniformity of manufacture for any particular or like item throughout building.

.6 Permanent labels, trademarks and nameplates on products are not acceptable in prominent locations, except where required for operating instructions, or when located in mechanical or electrical rooms.

1.3 AVAILABILITY

.1 Immediately upon signing Contract, review product delivery requirements and anticipate foreseeable supply delays for items. If delays in supply of products are foreseeable, notify Consultant of such, in order that substitutions or other remedial action may be authorized in ample time to prevent delay in performance of Work.

.2 In event of failure to notify Consultant at commencement of Work and should it subsequently appear that Work may be delayed for such reason, Consultant reserves right to substitute more readily available products of similar character, at no increase in Contract Price or Contract Time.

1.4 STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION

.1 Handle and store products in manner to prevent damage, adulteration, deterioration and soiling and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions when applicable.



.2 Store packaged or bundled products in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact. Do not remove from packaging or bundling until required in Work.

.3 Store products subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.

.4 Store cementitious products clear of earth or concrete floors, and away from walls.

.5 Keep sand, when used for grout or mortar materials, clean and dry. Store sand on wooden platforms and cover with waterproof tarpaulins during inclement weather.

.6 Store sheet materials, lumber on flat, solid supports and keep clear of ground. Slope to shed moisture.

.7 Store and mix paints in heated and ventilated room. Remove oily rags and other combustible debris from site daily. Take every precaution necessary to prevent spontaneous combustion.

.8 Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and to satisfaction of Consultant.

.9 Touch-up damaged factory finished surfaces to Consultant's satisfaction. Use touch-up materials to match original. Do not paint over name plates.

1.5 TRANSPORTATION

.1 Pay costs of transportation of products required in performance of Work.

1.6 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, install or erect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosures provided with products. Obtain written instructions directly from manufacturers.

.2 Notify Consultant in writing, of conflicts between specifications and manufacturer's instructions.

1.7 QUALITY OF WORK

.1 Ensure Quality of Work is of highest standard, executed by workers experienced and skilled in respective duties for which they are employed. Immediately notify Consultant if required Work is such as to make it impractical to produce required results.

.2 Do not employ anyone unskilled in their required duties. Consultant reserves right to require dismissal from site, workers deemed incompetent or careless.

.3 Decisions as to standard or fitness of Quality of Work in cases of dispute rest solely with Consultant, whose decision is final.

1.8 CO-ORDINATION

.1 Ensure co-operation of workers in laying out Work. Maintain efficient and continuous supervision.

.2 Be responsible for coordination and placement of openings, sleeves and accessories.

1.9 CONCEALMENT

.1 In finished areas conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors, walls and ceilings, except where indicated otherwise.

.2 Before installation inform Consultant if there is interference. Install as directed by Consultant.



1.10 REMEDIAL WORK

.1 Perform remedial work required to repair or replace parts or portions of Work identified as defective or unacceptable. Co-ordinate adjacent affected Work as required.

.2 Perform remedial work by specialists familiar with materials affected. Perform in a manner to neither damage nor put at risk any portion of Work.

1.11 LOCATION OF FIXTURES

.1 Consider location of fixtures, outlets, and mechanical and electrical items indicated as approximate. Contractor to coordinate the work of all trades to ensure placement of fixtures work in tandem.

.2 Inform Consultant of conflicting installation. Install as directed.

1.12 FASTENINGS

.1 Provide metal fastenings and accessories in same texture, colour and finish as adjacent materials, unless indicated otherwise.

.2 Prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals and materials.

.3 Use non-corrosive hot dip galvanized steel fasteners and anchors for securing exterior work, unless stainless steel or other material is specifically requested in affected specification Section.

.4 Space anchors within individual load limit or shear capacity and ensure they provide positive permanent anchorage. Wood, or any other organic material plugs are not acceptable.

.5 Keep exposed fastenings to a minimum, space evenly and install neatly.

.6 Fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of material to which anchorage is made are not acceptable.

1.13 FASTENINGS - EQUIPMENT

.1 Use fastenings of standard commercial sizes and patterns with material and finish suitable for service.

.2 Use heavy hexagon heads, semi-finished unless otherwise specified. Use No. 304 stainless steel for exterior areas.

.3 Bolts may not project more than one diameter beyond nuts.

.4 Use plain type washers on equipment, sheet metal and soft gasket lock type washers where vibrations occur. Use resilient washers with stainless steel.

1.14 PROTECTION OF WORK IN PROGRESS

.1 Prevent overloading of parts of building. Do not cut, drill or sleeve load bearing structural member, unless specifically indicated without written approval of Consultant.

1.15 EXISTING UTILITIES

.1 When breaking into or connecting to existing services or utilities, execute Work at times directed by local governing authorities, with minimum of disturbance to Work.

.2 Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. When services are encountered, cap off in manner approved by authority having jurisdiction. Stake and record location of capped service.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 71 00 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 1


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 EXISTING SERVICES

.1 Before commencing work, establish location and extent of service lines in area of Work and notify Consultant of findings.

1.2 RECORDS

.1 Maintain a complete, accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.

1.3 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

.1 Promptly notify Consultant in writing if subsurface conditions at Place of Work differ materially from those indicated in Contract Documents, or a reasonable assumption of probable conditions based thereon.

.2 After prompt investigation, should Consultant determine that conditions do differ materially, instructions will be issued for changes in Work as provided in Changes and Change Orders.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 73 00 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 EXECUTION NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 6


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.

.2 Before construction, verify location and points of connection of utility services.

.3 Verify with authorities having jurisdiction and utility companies.

.4 Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

.5 Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

.6 Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

.7 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

1.2 PREPARATION

.1 Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Coordinate with requirements specified in Section 01 50 00 for temporary utilities.

.3 Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services:

.4 Notify Owner not less than 7 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

.5 Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.

.6 Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

.7 Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

.8 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of need for clarification of Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Consultant. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.



1.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

.1 Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Consultant promptly.

.2 General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

.3 Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

.4 Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions.

.5 Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.

.6 Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.

.7 Notify Consultant when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances.

.8 Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction.

.9 Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.

.10 Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

.11 Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Consultant.

1.4 INSTALLATION

.1 General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

.2 Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

.3 Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.

.4 Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

.5 Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

.6 Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Performance.

.7 Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

.8 Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work

.9 Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Consultant.

.10 Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.



.11 Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

.12 Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

1.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

.1 Before cutting, drilling, or sleeving structural load-bearing elements, obtain approval of location and methods from the Structural Engineer and the General Contractor.

.2 Do not endanger work or property by cutting, digging, or similar activities. No Section shall cut or alter the work of another Section unless such cutting or alteration is approved by the latter Section and the General Contractor.

.3 X-ray floor assemblies, walls and structures, locate all services prior to cutting, drilling or digging.

.4 Cut and drill with true smooth edges and to minimum suitable tolerances.

.5 Fit construction tightly to ducts, pipes and conduits to stop air movement completely. The Section performing work that penetrates a fire, air, vapour, moisture, thermal or acoustic separation of the building shall pack voids tightly with rock wool, fibreglass or fire stop material as may be required; seal air, vapour and moisture barriers; and caulk joints as may be required to ensure that no air movement through the penetration is possible.

.6 Cutting, drilling and sleeving of work shall be done only by the Section who has installed it. The Section requiring drilling and sleeving shall inform the Section performing the work of the location and other requirements for drilling and sleeving.

.7 Replace, and otherwise make good, all damaged work, as identified by the Consultant or Contractor.

.8 Cutting and Patching for Holes Required by Mechanical and Electrical work:

.1 Include under work of Divisions 20 and 26 cutting or provision of holes up to and including 400 square cm and related patching, except as otherwise indicated.

.2 Include under work of this Division holes and other openings larger than 400 square cm, and chases, bulkheads, furring and required patching. This Section shall be responsible for determination of work required for holes in excess of 400 square cm.

.9 This Section shall be responsible for all cutting and patching in addition to that specified for mechanical and electrical work, and shall directly supervise performance of cutting and patching by other Sections.

.10 Patching or replacement of damaged work shall be done by the Subcontractor under whose work it was originally executed, and at the expense of the Subcontractor who caused the damage.

.11 Make patches as invisible as possible in final assembly to the approval of the Consultant/Owner. Unacceptable work will be replaced at no charge to the Owner.

1.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

.1 General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

.2 Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).



.3 Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

.4 Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

.5 Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

.6 Remove liquid spills promptly.

.7 Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.

.8 Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

.9 Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

.10 Recycling and Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. Recycle products identified in Construction Waste Management Plan.

.11 During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Performance.

.12 Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

.13 Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

1.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

.1 tart equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

.2 Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation.

.3 Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

1.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

.1 Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Performance.

.2 Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

1.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

.1 Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.

.2 Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.



.3 Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

.4 Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

.5 Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

.6 Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.

1.10 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:

.1 Structural integrity of elements of project.

.2 Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.

.3 Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of operational elements.

.4 Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.

.5 Work of Owner or separate contractor.

.3 Include in request:

.1 Identification of project.

.2 Location and description of affected Work.

.3 Statement on necessity for cutting or alteration.

.4 Description of proposed Work, and products to be used.

.5 Alternatives to cutting and patching.

.6 Effect on Work of Owner or separate contractor.

.7 Written permission of affected separate contractor.

.8 Date and time work will be executed.

1.11 MATERIALS

.1 Required for original installation.

.2 Change in Materials: Submit request for substitution in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

1.12 PREPARATION

.1 Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching.

.2 After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of Work.

.3 Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

.4 Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings; provide devices and methods to protect other portions of project from damage.

.5 Provide protection from elements for areas which are to be exposed by uncovering work; maintain excavations free of water.

1.13 EXECUTION

.1 Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work.

.2 Fit several parts together, to integrate with other Work.



.3 Uncover Work to install ill-timed Work.

.4 Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work.

.5 Remove samples of installed Work for testing.

.6 Provide openings in non-structural elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work.

.7 Execute Work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

.8 Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather-exposed and moisture-resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces.

.9 Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic or impact tools not allowed on masonry work without prior approval.

.10 Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

.11 Fit Work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

.12 At penetration of fire rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with firestopping material in accordance with Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping, full thickness of the construction element.

.13 Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes: Refinish continuous surfaces to nearest intersection. Refinish assemblies by refinishing entire unit.

.14 Conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floor, wall and ceiling construction of finished areas except where indicated otherwise.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

3.2

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 73 30 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 CUTTING AND PATCHING NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 3


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work.


.1 Section 01 61 00 – Common Product Requirements.

.2 Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping.

.3 Individual Product Specification Sections:

.1 Cutting and patching incidental to work of the section.

.2 Advance notification to other sections of openings required in Work of those sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:

.1 Structural integrity of any element of Project.

.2 Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.

.3 Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.

.4 Work of Owner or separate contractor.

.2 Include in request:

.1 Identification of Project.

.2 Location and description of affected Work.

.3 Necessity for cutting or alteration.

.4 Description of proposed Work and Products to be used.

.5 Alternatives to cutting and patching.

.6 Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor.

.7 Written permission of affected separate contractor.

.8 Date and time work will be executed.

1.4 WARRANTY

.1 Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Primary Products: Those required for original installation.

.2 Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Examine existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching.

.2 After uncovering existing Work, assess conditions affecting performance of work.

.3 Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.

.2 Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work.

.3 Maintain excavations free of water.

3.3 CUTTING

.1 Execute cutting and fitting including excavation and fill to complete the Work.

.2 Uncover work to install improperly sequenced work.

.3 Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work.

.4 Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.

.5 Provide openings in the Work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work.

.6 Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.

.7 Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.

3.4 PATCHING

.1 Execute patching to complement adjacent Work.

.2 Fit Products together to integrate with other Work.

.3 Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

.4 Employ original installer to perform patching for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces.

.5 Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

.6 Fit work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.



.7 At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping, to full thickness of the penetrated element.

.8 Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit:

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 74 11 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 CLEANING NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 2


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 PROJECT CLEANLINESS

.1 Maintain Work in tidy condition, free from excessive accumulation of waste products and debris, including that caused by Owner or other Contractors.

.2 Remove waste materials from site at regularly scheduled times.

1.2 FINAL CLEANING

.1 Clean work prior to final review by Consultant.

.2 When Work is Substantially Performed remove surplus products, tools, construction machinery and equipment not required for performance of remaining Work.

.3 Remove waste products and debris other than that caused by others and leave Work clean and suitable for occupancy.

.4 Prior to final review remove surplus products, tools, construction machinery and equipment.

.5 Remove waste products and debris including that caused by Owner or other Contractors.

.6 Remove waste materials from site at regularly scheduled times or dispose of as directed by Consultant. Do not burn waste materials on site, unless approved by Consultant.

.7 Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for disposal of waste and debris.

.8 Vacuum clean and dust building interiors.

1.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 Separate waste materials for recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 74 11 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 CLEANING NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 2 of 2


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 74 21 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 2


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT GOALS

.1 Prior to start of Work conduct meeting with Consultant to review and discuss Waste Management Plan and Goals.

.2 Waste Management Goal is to divert all materials considered recyclable from landfill sites.

.3 Accomplish maximum control of solid construction waste.

.4 Preserve environment and prevent pollution and environment damage.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

.1 Class III: non-hazardous waste - construction renovation waste.

.2 Inert Fill: inert waste - exclusively asphalt and concrete.

.3 Recycled: ability of product or material to be recovered at end of its life cycle and reused.

1.3 DISPOSAL OF WASTES

.1 Do not bury rubbish or waste materials.

.2 Do not dispose of waste, volatile materials, mineral spirits, oil, and paint thinner into waterways, storm, or sanitary sewers.

.3 Keep records of construction waste including:

.1 Number and size of bins.

.2 Waste type of each bin.

.3 Reused or recycled waste destination.

.4 Remove materials from deconstruction as deconstruction/disassembly Work progresses.

.5 Review the contaminated soils report provided by the consultant, and account for removal of all contaminated soils encountered during excavation and performance of the work. Disposal of contaminated soils is to be in compliance with the BC Ministry of Environment guidelines.

1.4 USE OF SITE AND FACILITIES

.1 Execute work with least possible interference or disturbance to normal use of premises.

.2 Provide temporary security measures approved by Consultant.

1.5 SCHEDULING

.1 Co-ordinate Work with other activities at site to ensure timely and orderly progress of Work.

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 74 21 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 2 of 2


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

.1 Handle waste materials not reused, salvaged, or recycled in accordance with appropriate regulations and codes.

3.2 CLEANING

.1 Remove tools and waste materials on completion of Work and leave work area in clean and orderly condition.

.2 Clean-up work area as work progresses.

.3 Source separate materials to be reused/recycled into specified sort areas.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 77 00 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 4


1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

1.1.1 Comply with requirements stated in Conditions of the Contract and in

Specifications for administrative procedures in closing out the Work.

1.2 CONTRACT ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURES 1.2.1 Prior to requesting Consultant’s inspection for Substantial Performance: 1.2.2 1.2.3 Ensure Work is ready for use for purpose intended. 1.2.4 1.2.5 Review Contract Documents and inspect Work to confirm prerequisites to

Substantial Performance of Work have been fulfilled and that Work is ready for inspection for Substantial Performance.

1.2.6 1.2.7 Submit written request to Consultant for inspection for Substantial Performance

of the Work, certifying prerequisites have been fulfilled and specifying known exceptions in the form of a list of items to be completed, corrected or submitted and date which items on list will be complete.

1.2.8 1.2.9 Results of Consultant’s inspection for Substantial Performance will form initial

Contract Deficiency list. 1.2.10 1.2.11 Following inspection, Consultant will: 1.2.12 1.2.13 Issue a Letter of Substantial Performance stating effective date of Substantial

Performance of Work, with a copy of the Contract Deficiency list attached thereto, or

1.2.14 1.2.15 Advise Contractor that prerequisites to Substantial Performance are not fulfilled

and repeat inspection for Substantial Performance as necessary. 1.2.16 1.2.17 Upon issuance of Letter of Substantial Performance, Owner will assume

responsibility for care, custody and control of the Work.

1.3 FINAL CLEANING 1.3.1 Perform final cleaning prior to request for inspection for Substantial Performance

of the Work. 1.3.2 Remove grease, paint spots, dirt, dust, stains, labels, fingerprints and other

foreign matter from interior and exterior surfaces; vacuum and dust behind grilles, louvres and screens; wash floor surfaces not otherwise finished; clean metal doors and frames; clean metal work; clean equipment; clean hardware; clean and polish glass on both sides; clean and polish mirrors.

1.3.3 Use low Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) emitting cleaning products that do not damage substrates and that are certified by Green Seal or The Environmental Choice Program.

1.3.4 Repair, patch and touch-up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishes. 1.3.5 Replace cracked and broken glass 1.3.6 Ensure that cleaning agents and methods do not remove finishes and permanent

protective coatings on surfaces being cleaned. 1.3.7 Remove waste, surplus materials and temporary facilities from the site. 1.3.8 Leave all surfaces in perfectly clean and unsoiled condition



2.0 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

.1 Provide one set of blackline prints for red ink record prints- clearly identified as "AS BUILT" conditions, for drawing purposes. Store record documents in site office apart from documents used for construction. Submit completed Final Project Record Drawings as specified in Section 01 78 39 Project Record Documents.

.2 Submit with each submission a covering letter including Date of Submission, Contractor's

name, address and telephone number.

.3 Submit to the Consultant one (1) copy of maintenance, operating and instruction manuals.

.4 Separately bound manuals are to be prepared for the following trade work:

1) Building: Architectural elements, fixtures, finishes, casework, hardware,

specialties, etc. 2) Mechanical: Heating ventilating, air conditioning, etc.

3) Plumbing: Plumbing, fire sprinklers, etc.

4) Electrical: Power, lighting, fire alarm system, data, communications, security, etc.

.5 Provide maintenance manuals in hard and electronic format as specified hereafter, giving full

operating and maintenance instructions for each system and major piece of equipment, as well as maintenance instructions for building elements, fixtures and finishes.

.6 Manuals are to contain pertinent maintenance operational and installation instruction

information on equipment, materials cleaning and lubrication schedules, filters, overhaul, replacement, adjustment schedules, and emergency procedures as applicable. Instructions in manuals shall be in simple language so as to guide the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of building material, components, equipment and systems.

.7 Include all items covered by Change Orders.

.8 Update the manuals periodically during the installation and commissioning phase of the Work

so that the manuals are final by the scheduled turnover date.

.9 Include equipment supplied by the Owner and pre-tendered equipment.

.10 Binders:

1) Binders shall be ACCO Canadian Co. Ltd. or approved substitution as follows: 2) ACCO Inview D-Ring Binders – color Black

1 inch – 41805-0 2 inch - 41807

3) ACCO expanding bar-lock catalogue binder - color Black

3 to 5.5 inches – 05436-0

.11 Pages:



1) Descriptions and lists are to be neatly typed or printed on 216 mm x 280 mm heavy bond paper. Duplicate pages shall be made by electrostatic dry copier.

2) The maximum paper size for schedules and diagrams is 280 mm x 432 mm. Larger

paper sizes will be accepted for diagrams only if a mylar sepia is provided for each sheet.

3) Alphabetical index tab separators are to be used in each manual to identify each

information “Section”.

.12 Manual contents shall be organized into applicable categories of Work, parallel to specifications divisions and sections.

.13 Architectural manuals shall include in general, but shall not necessarily be limited to, the

following:

1) List of all Subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers, complete with addresses and telephone and facsimile numbers.

2) Copy of hardware schedule and paint schedules, complete with the actual

manufacturer, supplier and identification names and numbers.

3) All manufacturer’s equipment, materials, products, data, details, identification, list, schedules of maintenance, operational and installation instruction information as required in accordance with the various sections of the specification.

4) All extended guarantees, warranties, maintenance bonds, certificates, letters of

guarantees, registration cards, as called for in the various sections of the specification, with the following information:

.1 Name and address of subject. .2 Commencement date (Substantial Performance of the Work) of guarantees and

warranties. .3 Duration and expiry date of guarantees and warranties. .4 Signature and seal of the Contractor, installer, manufacturer and/or supplier as

applicable.

5) Complete set of all final reviewed shop drawings.

6) Certificates of Inspection.

7) Test reports and certificates as applicable.

8) Confirmation letters of all extra, reserve, replacement materials as required in accordance with various sections of the specification has been properly handed over and received by the Owner in good order.

9) Confirmation letters of all portable units, equipment, materials such as fire

extinguishers, special tools, keys for all equipment and/or panels, elevator pads/accessories, keys to millwork, casework, has been properly handed over and received by the Owner in good order.

10) Submit to the Consultant one (1) copy of plumbing/mechanical and electrical manuals

in accordance with this section and to detailed requirements specifically set out in the various sections of the specification as applicable.



2.1 PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE 2.1.1 to requesting Consultant’s inspection for Substantial Performance, do the

following: 2.1.1.1 Review Contract Documents and compare with inventory list to verify

that all required items have been delivered. 2.1.1.2 Verify that items listed on inventory list are in their designated storage

locations. 2.1.1.3 Inspect items to verify that they meet specified requirements and are in

serviceable condition. 2.1.1.4 Arrange for delivery of any missing items. 2.1.1.5 Arrange for replacement of items not meeting specified requirements or

not in serviceable condition. 2.1.1.6 Provide Consultant with copy of inventory list indicating status of all

required items. 2.1.1.7 Review inventory list with Consultant prior to inspection for Substantial

Performance. 2.1.1.8 For items not delivered prior to Substantial Performance of the Work,

provide a duplicate copy delivery slip and obtain Owner’s signature upon delivery. Owner will only accept responsibility for care, custody, and control of items properly received and signed for.

2.2 ELECTRONIC COPIES OF MANUALS

.1 In addition to the printed copies, submit electronic copies of all operating and maintenance data as specified under clause 1.4.

.2 Submit data on a USB stick. Provide one (1) copy of each USB for the Owner and 1 copy to

the Consultant.

.3 Do not provide separate CDs for each major section. Use more than one CD only if the volume of data exceeds the capacity of a single CD. Professionally label each CD and CD jewel case, including the name of the Owner, project and CD title.

.4 Organize electronic data using directories and sub-directories as generally described in

clause 1.4. Prior to assembling the electronic data, submit to the Consultant a detailed list of the proposed directory/sub-directory structure including proposed files names. File names to be easily recognizable without the need to open the document to know what information the file contains. Directory structure and file naming is subject to the approval of the Consultant.

.5 Provide information in Portable Document Format (PDF). Break down large files into

sections and use bookmark structure for easy navigation.

END of SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 78 23 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 5


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Provide 1 hard copy and one digital copy of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals for this project and turn over to Owner.

.2 The Manual will include a chapter of written descriptions for daily, weekly, monthly and emergency procedures for general operation and maintenance. The descriptions will include procedures for mechanical, electrical, and architectural equipment expected to be performed by the staff of the building, written using simple, non-technical terms so they may be clearly understood.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

.1 Submit a draft soft (electronic) copy, through online Rform software, of the tables of contents for the manuals, for review by the Consultant, 30 days prior to the date of Substantial Performance of the Work. Once draft is reviewed and marked final, send one soft copy to Consultant and Owner and two (2) Hard Copies to Owner.

.2 Submit completed maintenance manuals with application for Substantial Performance, for review by the Consultant.

.3 Manuals are to contain pertinent care, maintenance, operational and installation information for the building. Instructions in the manuals to be in plain language so as to guide the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of building materials, finishes, components, equipment and systems.

.4 Include all items covered by Change Orders.

.5 Include equipment supplied by the Owner.

.6 Bind manual contents into hard plastic coated three-ring binders, complete with coloured plastic tabs organizing contents into applicable categories of Work, based on the specifications for the project. Label the cover and spine of the manuals with the name of the project and manual contents.

.7 Format:

.1 Descriptions and lists are to be neatly typed or printed on 216 mm x 280 mm (8 ½” x 11”) heavy bond paper.

.2 The maximum paper size for schedules and diagrams is 279 mm x 432 mm(11” x 17”). Larger paper sizes will be accepted for diagrams only if a reduction to 11” x 17” is also provided.

.3 Index tab separators are to be used in each manual to identify each information “Section”.

1.3 ORGANIZATION OF MANUALS

.1 SECTION 1.0 - DIRECTORY

.1 Provide a directory listing the names, addresses, telephone and facsimile numbers of Consultant, engineering consultants, contractor, subcontractors and major equipment, product suppliers and service contract providers (e.g., alarm system, elevator). Include emergency contact names.

.2 SECTION 2.0 - LIST OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

.1 Provide a complete index of drawings, specifications. Provide index of shop drawings and test reports in their own sections.



.3 SECTION 3.0 - ARCHITECTURAL

.1 Provide care, cleaning and recommended maintenance instructions for finishes and materials as specified.

.2 Provide operation and maintenance instructions for equipment such as overhead doors, landscape irrigation systems and elevators. Provide descriptive and technical data, maintenance and operating procedures, wiring diagrams, spare parts lists, name of service representative, suppliers for replacement parts, trouble shooting data and preventive maintenance program.

.3 Provide all necessary Passive House information, certification application and certificate as referenced in 01 35 63.

.4 Submit a backup copy of the elevator control system software on disc placed in pocket in Manual.

.5 Provide copy of finish hardware schedule and paint schedules, complete with the manufacturer, supplier and identification names and numbers.

.6 Provide inspection and approval certificates from authorities having jurisdiction.

.7 Provide RCABC and MPA Guarantee and documentation.

.8 Provide a copy of warranty and guarantee certificates as specified.

.9 Provide a complete set of reviewed shop drawings.

.10 Submit a list of chattels, if any, including make, model and serial number provided by the Contractor for the project.

.4 SECTION 4.0 - MECHANICAL (Refer to Mechanical Specifications for more information.)

.1 Provide the following information, if pertinent:

.1 Mechanical Drawing List

.2 Description of Systems

.3 Mechanical System Troubleshooting

.4 Suggested preventative maintenance schedule, belt schedule, lubrication schedule

.5 Subtrade and supplier list, equipment repair manuals

.6 Chemical treatment certificates, hydrostatic and air test certificates

.7 Balancing report

.8 Valve tag schedule, piping colour code

.9 Equipment start up reports

.10 Guarantee certificate, final inspection certificates, warrantee certificates

.11 Sprinkler Shop Drawings

.12 Vibrations Isolation Shop Drawings

.13 Air Handling Unit & A/C Unit Shop Drawings

.14 Fan Shop Drawings

.15 Grille Shop Drawings

.16 Radiant Heating Shop Drawings

.17 Sump Pump Shop Drawings

.18 Plumbing Fixtures and Drains Shop Drawings

.19 Controls “As Built” Drawings

.20 WHMIS Information

.21 Fire Protection Plan

.2 Under each of the above headings, provide the following information, arranged under separate tabs, for each system and major piece of equipment:



.1 Descriptive and Technical Data

.1 Include detailed description of the system and components, an explanation of how each component interfaces with others and the location of each thermostat and all controls.

.3 Operating Procedures

.1 Provide complete and detailed operation of each major component.

.2 Include starting procedure, exact switch and control location.

.3 Describe operation of component controls, changes required for summer or winter operation and method of making changes.

.4 Describe trouble shooting sequence when settings can not be maintained.

.5 Describe safe guards to check if equipment goes off line.

.6 Describe fire protection and smoke control.

.4 Maintenance and Lubrication

.1 Provide detailed preventive maintenance schedule for each of the major components including daily, weekly, monthly, semi-annual and yearly checks and tasks.

.2 Describe lubrication and maintenance procedures for equipment components such as bearings, drives, motors and filters. Include recommended lubricants.

.3 Compile this information for each typical piece of equipment.

.4 Provide a belt schedule.

.5 List of Equipment Suppliers and Subcontractors

.1 Provide a complete list of equipment Suppliers and Subcontractors and service representatives including address and telephone numbers.

.2 Outline procedures for purchasing parts and equipment.

.3 Provide a detailed description including drawings, dimensions, parts list and repair manual for each piece of equipment specified.

.6 Certification and Test Results; include copies of the following:

.1 Pre-operational cleaning reports and chemical treatment

.2 Hydrostatic and air tests performed on piping systems

.3 Equipment alignment certificates

.4 Balancing reports for air and water systems

.5 Valve tag identification schedule including location, service and normal position

.6 Pipe color code

.7 Inspection and approval certificates for plumbing and gas systems and heating and ventilation systems

.8 Equipment startup reports

.9 Warranty certificates

.7 Shop Drawings

.8 .1 Include copy of all reviewed shop drawings.

.5 SECTION 5.0 - ELECTRICAL

.1 Provide an index with the following headings:

.1 Switch Gear and Distribution

.2 Lighting Fixtures and Lamps



.3 Fire Alarm System

.4 Emergency Generator System

.5 Mechanical Motor Control Equipment.

.6 Communication Systems

.7 Security System

.2 Under each of the above headings, provide the following information, arranged under separate tabs, for each system and major piece of equipment:

.1 Descriptive and Technical Data

.2 Maintenance and Operating Procedures

.3 Wiring Diagrams

.4 Spare Parts List

.5 Service Representatives

.6 Suppliers for Replacement Parts

.7 Test Results

.8 Certifications and warranties

.9 Trouble Shooting Data

.10 Preventive Maintenance Program Complete With Checklists

1.4 SCHEDULE OF MAINTENANCE MANUALS SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide a complete Schedule of Maintenance Manual Submittals

.2 Include a copy of all reviewed shop drawings as noted in the Schedule of Maintenance Manual Submittals, or as requested by the Consultant.

.3 Provide manufacturer product information required by the Owner to maintain the building is included in the Maintenance Manuals.

1.5 SCHEDULE OF MAINTENANCE MANUAL SUBMITTALS

.1 Specification Divisions: 0-12 Notes:

.1 Trade listing.

.2 Submit Subcontractor or Supplier’s name, address, telephone number and emergency contact.

.3 Submit copy of reviewed shop drawings or Product data as specified. Submit engineered shop drawings where specified.

.4 Submit installation instructions for products.

.5 Submit warranties and guarantees as called for in the specifications. Warranties and guarantees to be signed by an authorized signing authority.

.6 Submit list of recommended maintenance intervals for materials covered under warranties and guarantees.

.7 Submit manufacturer’s instructions covering the care, cleaning, and maintenance of specified finishes.

.8 Submit a complete copy of the hardware schedule in accordance with the specifications.

.9 Submit complete listing of paint products, colours, gloss levels and locations.

.10 Submit descriptions and operation of major components and systems, including seasonal variations, interface with other components, and operation of controls.

.11 Submit testing, adjusting and balancing reports as specified



.12 Submit inspection and test certificates issued by authorities having jurisdiction and equipment manufacturers. Submit performance data sheets after commissioning is complete.

.13 Submit wiring diagrams and schematics as specified.

.14 Submit a complete list of equipment and fixtures installed as part of the Work complete with make and model numbers.

.15 Submit a complete list of spare parts for equipment, and source.

1.6 FIRE SAFETY PLAN

.1 The Owner shall engage a qualified consultant to prepare a fire safety plan and documents in accordance with the National Fire Code, most recent edition. Refer in particular to section 2.8 Emergency Planning.

.2 The Fire Safety Plan shall be submitted to the Consultant for review.

.3 The National Fire Code require that the fire safety plan be kept in a location designated by the Authority Having Jurisdiction ( Ontario Building Code, 2.8.2.5 (1)). The Consultant shall review this requirement at the design development stage with the fire department to confirm if a secure location in the lobby will be required.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 78 36 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 WARRENTIES NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 OF 1


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 WARRENTIES

.1 Submit warranties in individual specification Sections in accordance with Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures.

.2 Issue warranties in the name of the Building Owner supplied on manufacturer's/ suppliers standard warranty letterhead.

.3 Date warranty from date of Substantial Performance as determined by Consultant. Sign warranty. Warranty shall include:

.1 Name of company providing warranty.

.2 Contact name.

.3 Contact address.

.4 Date warranty starts.

.5 Date warranty expires.

.4 Provide duplicate notarised copies.

.5 Provide table of contents and assemble in three D side ring binder with durable plastic or cloth cover.

.6 Submit prior to final application for payment.

.7 For items of work delayed beyond date of Substantial Performance, provide updated submittal within 10 days after Owner’s acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.

.8 Extended installation warranties (notwithstanding product warranties as specified in the relevant Specification divisions) are to be supplied as follows:

.1 Roofing (10 yrs)

.2 Standby power generator, transfer switches and load bank (2 yrs)

.3 High voltage transformers and Main Switch board (2yrs)

.4 Fire alarm system (2 yrs)

.5 VRF system and Heat Pumps (2yrs) .

.6 ERVs/Air Handling Units (2yrs)

.7 Installation and continuity of the building air and water seal, as required by Passive House (10 yrs)

1.2 PRODUCTS

.1 Not Used.

1.3 EXECUTION

1.4 PREPARATION

.1 Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents from subcontractors, suppliers, and manufactures. END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 78 39 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 PROJECT AS BUILT DOCUMENTS NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 3


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Record on a daily basis, changes and deviations from the contract on a set of white prints identified as " As-Built Drawings".

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures.

.2 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

.1

.2 Preparation: Mark prints in red ink to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up As-built Prints.

.1 Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

.2 Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. This project in in English and metric measure.

.3 Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

.3 Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

.1 Dimensional changes to Drawings.

.2 Revisions to details shown on Drawings.

.3 Depths of foundations below first floor.

.4 Locations and depths of underground utilities.

.5 Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.

.6 Site Conditions

.7 Addenda directives

.8 Correspondence directives

.9 Site clarifications

.10 Site instructions

.11 Changes by authorities having jurisdiction

.12 Revisions to electrical circuitry.

.13 Actual equipment locations.

.14 Duct size and routing.

.15 Locations of concealed internal utilities.

.16 Changes made by Change Order or Change Directive.

.17 Changes made following Consultant's written orders.

.18 Details not on the original Contract Drawings.



.19 Field records for variable and concealed conditions.

.20 Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

.21 Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.

.22 Mark as-built sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

.23 Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

.24 Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

.4 Format: Identify and date each As-built Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT AS- BUILT DRAWING" in a prominent location.

.1 As-built Prints: Organize As-built Prints into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include complete list of all drawings on cover sheets.

.2 As-built CAD Drawings: Organize CAD information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each CAD file.

.3 As-built PDF Drawings: from the As-built CAD Drawings, prepare a PDF of each one and name each PDF file the same name as the corresponding CAD file.

.4 Identification: As follows:

.1 Project name.

.2 Date.

.3 Designation "PROJECT AS-BUILT DRAWINGS."

.4 Name of Owner and Consultant with contact information.

.5 Name of Contractor with contact information.

2.2 AS-BUILT PRODUCT DATA

.1 Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

.1 Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

.2 Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

.3 If possible, a Change Order proposal should include resubmitting updated Product Data. This eliminates the need to mark up the previous submittal.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

.1 Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

.1 Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project As-built Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project As-built Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

.2 Maintenance of As-built Documents and Samples: Store As-built Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project As-built Documents for construction purposes. Maintain As-built Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project As-built Documents for Consultant's and Owner's reference during normal working hours.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 78 40 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 OF 3


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Equipment and systems.

.2 Materials and finishes.

.3 Spare parts.

.4 Maintenance manuals.

.5 Special tools.

.6 Storage, handling and protection.


.1 Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

1.3 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

.1 Information in this section is to be incorporated into the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

.2 List each Item of Equipment and Each System: include description of unit or system, and component parts. Give function, normal operation characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.

.3 Panel board circuit directories: provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications.

.4 Include installed colour coded wiring diagrams.

.5 Operating Procedures: include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.

.6 Maintenance Requirements: include routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

.7 Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.

.8 Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.

.9 Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.

.10 Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance.

.11 Provide installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.



.12 Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with installed colour coded piping diagrams.

.13 Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams.

.14 Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.

.15 Include test and balancing reports as required.

.16 Additional requirements: As specified in individual specification sections.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND FINISHES

.1 Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: include product data, with catalogue number, size, composition, and colour and texture designations. Provide information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.

.2 Instructions for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

.3 Moisture-protection and Weather-exposed Products: include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

.4 Building Envelope: include copies of drawings of building envelope components, illustrating the interface with similar or dissimilar items to provide an effective air, vapour and thermal barrier between indoor and outdoor environments. Include an outline of requirements for regular inspections and for regular maintenance to ensure that on-going performance of the building envelope will meet the initial building envelope criteria.

.5 Additional Requirements: as specified in individual specifications sections.

2.2 SPARE PARTS

.1 Provide spare parts, in quantities specified in individual specification sections.

.2 Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work.

.3 Receive and catalogue all items. Submit inventory listing to Consultant. Include approved listings in Maintenance Manual.

.4 Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment.

2.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

.1 Provide maintenance and extra materials, in quantities specified in individual specification sections.

.2 Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work.




.4 Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment.

2.4 SPECIAL TOOLS

.1 Provide special tools, in quantities specified in individual specification section.

.2 Provide items with tags identifying their associated function and equipment.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 DELIVER TO SITE

.1 Deliver to site location as directed, place and store.

3.2 STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION

.1 Store spare parts, maintenance materials, and special tools in manner to prevent damage or deterioration. Confirm with Consultant and Owner.

.2 Store in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact.

.3 Store components subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.

.4 Store paints and freezable materials in a heated and ventilated room.

.5 Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and to satisfaction of Consultant.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 79 00 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 3


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Procedures for demonstration and instruction of Products, equipment and systems to Owner's personnel.

.2 Seminars and demonstrations.


.1 This section describes requirements applicable to all Sections.

1.3 DESCRIPTION

.1 Demonstration and Training is to occur after Commissioning has been completed and reports submitted to Consultant.

.2 Demonstrate operation and maintenance of equipment and systems to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of substantial performance.

.3 Owner will provide list of personnel to receive instructions and will coordinate their attendance at agreed-upon times.

1.4 COMPONENT DEMONSTRATION

.1 Manufacturer to provide authorized representative to demonstrate operation of equipment and systems.

.2 Instruct Owner's personnel and provide written report that demonstration and instructions have been completed.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit schedule of time and date for demonstration of each item of equipment and each system two weeks prior to designated dates, for Consultant's approval.

.2 Submit reports within one week after completion of demonstration, that demonstration and instructions have been satisfactorily completed.

.3 Give time and date of each demonstration, with list of persons present.

1.6 CONDITIONS FOR DEMONSTRATIONS

.1 Testing, adjusting, and balancing has been performed and equipment and systems are fully operational.

.2 Provide copies of completed operation and maintenance manuals for use in demonstrations and instructions.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Verify that suitable conditions for demonstration and instructions are available.

.2 Verify that designated personnel are present.

.3 Prepare agendas and outlines.

.4 Establish seminar organization.

.5 Explain component design and operational philosophy and strategy.

.6 Develop equipment presentations.

.7 Present system demonstrations.

.8 Accept and respond to seminar and demonstration questions with appropriate answers.

3.2 PREPARATION OF AGENDAS AND OUTLINES

.1 Prepare agendas and outlines including the following:

.1 Equipment and systems to be included in seminar presentations.

.2 Name of companies and representatives presenting at seminars.

.3 Outline of each seminar's content.

.4 Time and date allocated to each system and item of equipment.

.5 Provide separate agenda for each system

3.3 SEMINAR ORGANIZATION

.1 Coordinate content and presentations for seminars.

.2 Coordinate individual presentations and ensure representatives scheduled to present at seminars are in attendance.

.3 Arrange for presentation leaders familiar with the design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the equipment and systems. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects of the equipment or system, arrange for specialists familiar with each aspect.

.4 Coordinate proposed dates for seminars with Owner and select mutually agreeable dates.



3.4 EXPLANATION OF DESIGN STRATEGY

.1 Explain design philosophy of each system. Include following information:

.1 An overview of how system is intended to operate.

.2 Description of design parameters, constraints and operational requirements.

.3 Description of system operation strategies.

.4 Information to help in identifying and troubleshooting system problems.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, and maintenance of each item of equipment at scheduled times, at the equipment location.

.2 Instruct personnel in all phases of operation and maintenance using operation and maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction.

.3 Instruct personnel on control and maintenance of sensory equipment and operational equipment associated with maintaining energy efficiency and longevity of service.

.4 Review contents of manual in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

.5 Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when the need for additional data becomes apparent during instructions.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 01 91 13 543 FRONT STREET. QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 GENERAL COMMISSIONING (CX) REQUIREMENTS NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 10


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes:

.1 General requirements relating to third party commissioning of project's components and systems, specifying general requirements to PV of components, equipment, sub-systems, systems, and integrated systems.

.2 Related Sections:

.1 Section 01 32 16 – Construction Schedule

.2 Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

.3 Mechanical and electrical specifications.

.3 Acronyms:

.1 AFD - Alternate Forms of Delivery, service provider.

.2 BMM - Building Management Manual.

.3 Cx - Commissioning.

.4 EMCS - Energy Monitoring and Control Systems.

.5 O&M - Operation and Maintenance.

.6 PI - Product Information.

.7 PV - Performance Verification.

.8 TAB - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.

1.2 GENERAL

.1 Cx is a planned program of tests, procedures and checks carried out systematically on systems and integrated systems of the finished Project. Cx is performed after systems and integrated systems are completely installed, functional and Contractor's Performance Verification responsibilities have been completed and approved. Objectives:

.1 Verify installed equipment, systems and integrated systems operate in accordance with contract documents and design criteria and intent.

.2 Ensure appropriate documentation is compiled into the BMM.

.3 Effectively train O&M staff.

.2 Contractor is to hire a third-party commissioning agency and assist in the Cx process, operating equipment and systems, troubleshooting and making adjustments as required.

.1 Systems are to be operated at full capacity under various modes to determine if they function correctly and consistently at peak efficiency. Systems to be interactive with each other as intended in accordance with Contract Documents and design criteria.

.2 During these checks, adjustments are to be made to enhance performance to meet environmental or user requirements.

.3 Design Criteria: as per client's requirements or determined by designer. To meet Project functional and operational requirements.



1.3 COMMISSIONING OVERVIEW

.1 Cx is to be performed by a third-party independent commissioning agency.

.2 Cx to be a line item of Contractor's cost breakdown.

.3 Cx activities supplement field quality and testing procedures described in relevant technical sections.

.4 Cx is conducted in concert with activities performed during stage of project delivery. Cx identifies issues in Planning and Design stages which are addressed during Construction and Cx stages to ensure the built facility is constructed and proven to operate satisfactorily under weather, environmental and occupancy conditions to meet functional and operational requirements. Cx activities include transfer of critical knowledge to facility operational personnel.

.5 Consultant will issue Interim Acceptance Certificate when:

.1 Completed Cx documentation has been received, reviewed for suitability and approved by Engineer.

.2 Equipment, components and systems have been commissioned.

.3 O&M training has been completed.

1.4 NON-CONFORMANCE TO PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

.1 Should equipment, system components, and associated controls be incorrectly installed or malfunction during Cx, correct deficiencies, re-verify equipment and components within the unfunctional system, including related systems as deemed required by Consultant, to ensure effective performance.

.2 Costs for corrective work, additional tests, inspections, to determine acceptability and proper performance of such items to be borne by Contractor. Above costs to be in form of progress payment reductions or hold-back assessments.

1.5 PRE-CX REVIEW

.1 Before Construction:

.1 Review contract documents confirm by writing to Consultant.

.1 Adequacy of provisions for Cx.

.2 Aspects of design and installation pertinent to success of Cx.

.2 During Construction:

.1 Co-ordinate provision, location and installation of provisions for Cx.

.3 Before start of Cx:

.1 Have completed Cx Plan up to date.

.2 Ensure installation of related components, equipment, sub-systems, systems is complete.

.3 Fully understand Cx requirements and procedures.

.4 Have Cx documentation shelf ready.

.5 Understand completely design criteria and intent and special features.

.6 Submit complete start-up documentation to Consultant.



.7 Have Cx schedules up to date.

.8 Ensure systems have been cleaned thoroughly.

.9 Complete TAB procedures on systems, submit TAB reports to Consultant for review and approval.

.10 Ensure "As-Built" system schematics are available.

.4 Inform Consultant in writing of discrepancies and deficiencies on finished works.

1.6 CONFLICTS

.1 Report conflicts between requirements of this section and other sections to Consultant before start-up and obtain clarification.

.2 Failure to report conflict and obtain clarification will result in application of most stringent requirement.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.1 Submit no later than 4 weeks after award of Contract:

.1 Name of Contractor's Cx agent.

.2 Draft Cx documentation.

.3 Preliminary Cx schedule.

.2 Request in writing to Consultant for changes to submittals and obtain written approval at least 8 weeks prior to start of Cx.

.3 Submit proposed Cx procedures to Consultant where not specified and obtain written approval at least 8 weeks prior to start of Cx.

.4 Provide additional documentation relating to Cx process required by Consultant.

1.8 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION

.1 Installation Check Lists and Product Information (PI) / Performance Verification (PV) Forms for requirements and instructions for use.

.2 Consultant to review and approve Cx documentation.

.3 Provide completed and approved Cx documentation to Consultant.

1.9 COMMISSIONING SCHEDULE

.1 Provide detailed Cx schedule as part of construction schedule in accordance with Section 01 32 16 - Construction Schedule.

.2 Provide adequate time for Cx activities prescribed in technical sections and commissioning sections including:

.1 Approval of Cx reports.

.2 Verification of reported results.

.3 Repairs, retesting, re-commissioning, re-verification.

.4 Training.



1.10 COMMISSIONING MEETINGS

.1 Convene Cx meetings following project meetings: Section 01 32 16 - Construction Schedule.

.2 Purpose: to resolve issues, monitor progress, identify deficiencies, relating to Cx.

.3 Continue Cx meetings on regular basis until commissioning deliverables have been addressed.

.4 At 60% construction completion stage, noted per Section 01 32 16 - Construction Schedule, Consultant to call a separate Cx scope meeting to review progress, discuss schedule of equipment start-up activities and prepare for Cx. Issues at meeting to include:

.1 Review duties and responsibilities of Contractor and subcontractors, addressing delays and potential problems.

.2 Determine the degree of involvement of trades and manufacturer's representatives in the commissioning process.

.5 Thereafter Cx meetings to be held until project completion and as required during equipment start-up and functional testing period.

.6 Meeting will be chaired by Consultant, who will record and distribute minutes.

.7 Ensure subcontractors and relevant manufacturer representatives are present at 60% and subsequent Cx meetings and as required.

1.11 STARTING AND TESTING

.1 Contractor assumes liabilities and costs for inspections. Including disassembly and re-assembly after approval, starting, testing and adjusting, including supply of testing equipment.

1.12 WITNESSING OF STARTING AND TESTING

.1 Provide 14 days’ notice prior to commencement.

.2 Engineer to witness of start-up and testing.

.3 Contractor's Cx Agent to be present at tests performed and documented by sub-trades, suppliers and equipment manufacturers.

1.13 MANUFACTURER'S INVOLVEMENT

.1 Factory testing: manufacturer to:

.1 Coordinate time and location of testing.

.2 Provide testing documentation for approval by Engineer.

.3 Arrange for Engineer to witness tests.

.4 Obtain written approval of test results and documentation from Engineer before delivery to site.

.2 Obtain manufacturers installation, start-up and operations instructions prior to start-up of components, equipment and systems and review with Engineer.



.1 Compare completed installation with manufacturer's published data, record discrepancies, and review with manufacturer.

.2 Modify procedures detrimental to equipment performance and review same with manufacturer before start-up.

.3 Integrity of warranties:

.1 Use manufacturer's trained start-up personnel where specified elsewhere in other divisions or required to maintain integrity of warranty.

.2 Verify with manufacturer that testing as specified will not void warranties.

.4 Qualifications of manufacturer's personnel:

.1 Experienced in design, installation and operation of equipment and systems.

.2 Ability to interpret test results accurately.

.3 To report results in clear, concise, logical manner.

1.14 PROCEDURES

.1 Verify that equipment and systems are complete, clean, and operating in normal and safe manner prior to conducting start-up, testing and Cx.

.2 Conduct start-up and testing in following distinct phases:

.1 Included in delivery and installation:

.1 Verification of conformity to specification, approved shop drawings and completion of PI report forms.

.2 Visual inspection of quality of installation.

.2 Start-up: follow accepted start-up procedures.

.3 Operational testing: document equipment performance.

.4 System PV: include repetition of tests after correcting deficiencies.

.5 Post-substantial performance verification: to include fine-tuning.

.3 Correct deficiencies and obtain approval from Engineer after distinct phases have been completed and before commencing next phase.

.4 Document required tests on approved PV forms.

.5 Failure to follow accepted start-up procedures will result in re-evaluation of equipment by an independent testing agency selected by Engineer. If results reveal that equipment start-up was not in accordance with requirements, and resulted in damage to equipment, implement following:

.1 Minor equipment/systems: implement corrective measures approved by Engineer.

.2 Major equipment/systems: if evaluation report concludes that damage is minor, implement corrective measures approved by Engineer.

.3 If evaluation report concludes that major damage has occurred, Engineer shall reject equipment.

.1 Rejected equipment to be removed from site and replaced with new.

.2 Subject new equipment/systems to the specified start-up procedures.



1.15 START-UP DOCUMENTATION

.1 Assemble start-up documentation and submit to Consultant for approval before commencement of commissioning.

.2 Start-up documentation to include:

.1 Factory and on-site test certificates for specified equipment.

.2 Pre-start-up inspection reports.

.3 Signed installation/start-up check lists.

.4 Start-up reports,

.5 Step-by-step description of complete start-up procedures, to permit Engineer to repeat start-up at any time.

1.16 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

.1 After start-up, operate and maintain equipment and systems as directed by equipment/system manufacturer.

.2 With assistance of manufacturer develop written maintenance program and submit to Consultant for approval before implementation.

.3 Operate and maintain systems for length of time required for commissioning to be completed.

.4 After completion of commissioning, operate and maintain systems until issuance of certificate of interim acceptance.

1.17 TEST RESULTS

.1 If start-up, testing and/or PV produce unacceptable results, repair, replace or repeat specified starting and/or PV procedures until acceptable results are achieved.

.2 Provide manpower and materials, assume costs for re-commissioning.

1.18 START OF COMMISSIONING

.1 Notify Consultant at least 21 days prior to start of Cx.

.2 Start Cx after elements of building affecting start-up and performance verification of systems have been completed.

1.19 INSTRUMENTS / EQUIPMENT

.1 Submit to Consultant for review and approval:

.1 Complete list of instruments proposed to be used.

.2 Listed data including, serial number, current calibration certificate, calibration date, calibration expiry date and calibration accuracy.

.2 Provide the following equipment as required:

.1 2-way radios.

.2 Ladders.

.3 Equipment as required to complete work.



1.20 COMMISSIONING PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

.1 Carry out Cx:

.1 Under actual operating conditions, over entire operating range, in all modes.

.2 On independent systems and interacting systems.

.2 Cx procedures to be repeatable and reported results are to be verifiable.

.3 Follow equipment manufacturer's operating instructions.

.4 EMCS trending to be available as supporting documentation for performance verification.

1.21 WITNESSING COMMISSIONING

.1 Engineer to witness activities and verify results.

1.22 AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION

.1 Where specified start-up, testing or commissioning procedures duplicate verification requirements of authority having jurisdiction, arrange for authority to witness procedures so as to avoid duplication of tests and to facilitate expedient acceptance of facility.

.2 Obtain certificates of approval, acceptance and compliance with rules and regulation of authority having jurisdiction.

.3 Provide copies to Consultant within 5 days of test and with Cx report.

1.23 COMMISSIONING CONSTRAINTS

.1 Since access into secure or sensitive areas will be difficult after occupancy it is necessary to complete Cx of occupancy, weather, and seasonal sensitive equipment and systems before issuance of the Interim Certificate.

1.24 EXTRAPOLATION OF RESULTS

.1 Where Cx of weather, occupancy, or seasonal-sensitive equipment or systems cannot be conducted under near-rated or near-design conditions, extrapolate part-load results to design conditions when approved by Engineer in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions, using manufacturer's data, with manufacturer's assistance and using approved formulae.

1.25 EXTENT OF VERIFICATION

.1 Laboratory areas:

.1 Provide manpower and instrumentation to verify up to 100 % of reported results.

.2 Elsewhere:

.1 Provide manpower and instrumentation to verify up to 30 % of reported results, unless specified otherwise in other sections.

.3 Number and location to be at discretion of Engineer.

.4 Conduct tests repeated during verification under same conditions as original tests, using same test equipment, instrumentation.



.5 Review and repeat commissioning of systems if inconsistencies found in more than 20% of reported results.

.6 Perform additional commissioning until results are acceptable to Engineer.

1.26 REPEAT VERIFICATIONS

.1 Assume costs incurred by Engineer for third and subsequent verifications where:

.1 Verification of reported results fail to receive Engineer's approval.

.2 Repetition of second verification again fails to receive approval.

.3 Engineer deems Contractor's request for second verification was premature.

1.27 SUNDRY CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

.1 Make adjustments and changes which become apparent as Cx proceeds.

.2 Perform static and operational checks as applicable and as required.

1.28 DEFICIENCIES, FAULTS, DEFECTS

.1 Correct deficiencies found during start-up and Cx to satisfaction of Engineer.

.2 Report problems, faults or defects affecting Cx to Consultant in writing. Stop Cx until problems are rectified. Proceed with written approval from Engineer.

1.29 COMPLETION OF COMMISSIONING

.1 Upon completion of Cx leave systems in normal operating mode.

.2 Except for warranty and seasonal verification activities specified in Cx specifications, complete Cx prior to issuance of Interim Certificate of Completion.

.3 Cx to be considered complete when contract Cx deliverables have been submitted and accepted by Consultant.

1.30 ACTIVITIES UPON COMPLETION OF COMMISSIONING

.1 When changes are made to baseline components or system settings established during Cx process, provide updated Cx form for affected item.

1.31 TRAINING

.1 As required within related sections.

1.32 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS, SPARE PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS

.1 Supply, deliver, and document maintenance materials, spare parts, and special tools as specified in contract.

1.33 OCCUPANCY

.1 Cooperate fully with Consultant during stages of acceptance and occupancy of facility.



1.34 INSTALLED INSTRUMENTATION

.1 Use instruments installed under Contract for TAB and PV if:

.1 Accuracy complies with these specifications.

.2 Calibration certificates have been deposited with Consultant.

.2 Calibrated EMCS sensors may be used to obtain performance data provided that sensor calibration has been completed and accepted.

1.35 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION TOLERANCES

.1 Application tolerances:

.1 Specified range of acceptable deviations of measured values from specified values or specified design criteria. Except for special areas, to be within +/- 10% of specified values.

.2 Instrument accuracy tolerances:

.1 To be of higher order of magnitude than equipment or system being tested.

.3 Measurement tolerances during verification:

.1 Unless otherwise specified actual values to be within +/- 2 % of recorded values.

1.36 OWNER'S PERFORMANCE TESTING

.1 Performance testing of equipment or system by Engineer will not relieve Contractor from compliance with specified start-up and testing procedures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

END OF SECTION


GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 02 41 19 543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 OF 4

1 GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1. This section of the Specifications forms part of the Contract and is to be read, interpreted, and coordinated with all other parts including Division 01, General Requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY

1. Demolition clauses apply primarily to: .1 Selective Demolition of the existing store room into which the new kitchen is to be

installed. See also Architectural drawings. .2 Selective Demolition of the existing kitchen following the construction of the new

commercial kitchen. .3 Note: No demolition is required in the existing Cafeteria.

2. Location Plan

3. Works to existing kitchen: .1 Contractor is to remove all remaining equipment in the existing kitchen. .2 The ceiling and all the mechanical ducting above the ceiling are to remain in place. .3 There may be cause to remove and replace part of the existing ceiling to terminate

a particular service. .4 Any existing cooker hoods are to be removed. .5 All dwarf walls are to be stripped back to the floor. .6 Any full height walls and doors that form a part of the kitchen enclosure or rooms

within the existing kitchen are to be retained. .7 Services are to be stripped back to either a wall, floor or ceiling and capped off.

These services are to be labelled. .8 Existing wall and floor finishes are to be retained, but any trip hazards are to be

remediated. .9 See also Mechanical Selective Demolition clauses for the removal of mechanical

and plumbing fittings.

4. Perform demolition work to interior space in a neat, non-destructive and courteous manner for adjacent occupancies.

5. Dispose of demolition materials continuously throughout this work and clean areas where adjacent occupancies use for access or pass by.


1.3 REFERENCES

1. Comply with BC Building Code, 2006, Part 8, Construction Safety Measures at Construction and Demolition sites.

1.4 PROTECTION

1. Prevent movement, settlement, or other damage to adjacent structures, utilities, and parts of building to remain in place. Provide bracing and shoring required.

2. Keep noise, dust, and inconvenience to occupants to a minimum.

3. Protect and maintain active building mechanical and electrical systems, services and equipment required for adjacent occupants.

4. Provide temporary dust screens, covers, railings, supports and other protection as required, and at all entry points.

5. Do not overload any portion of the structure with material or equipment

6. Where existing load bearing partitions are to be removed, do not commence work until new support structure is installed, inspected and approved by the Consultant.

7. Cease operations and notify Consultant if safety of any adjacent work or structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure. Do not resume operations until reviewed with the Consultant.

8. Ensure safe passage of building occupants around area of demolition. Remove debris and clean areas of access often.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

1. Where required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit for approval, drawings, diagrams, details and supporting data clearly showing sequence of demolition and removal work of building supporting structures and underpinning

2. Drawings for temporary structural elements, other than those indicated in the contract documents, shall be designed and bear signature and stamp of qualified engineer registered in the Province of British Columbia.


1. Salvage or Demolition Firm: Company(ies) must be experienced and specializing in performing the work of this section with documented experience in similar types of deconstruction work.

2. Qualifications of Workers: Provide a supervisor who shall be present at all times during the deconstruction work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the work required and who shall direct all work. Provide one (1) person on site who is responsible for maintaining the safety barriers and protection of the workers and the public.

3. Employ a structural engineer registered in the Province of British Columbia to design bracing, shoring or underpinning required to secure or support parts or assemblies of the existing building or structure. Submit copy of design to the Consultant, for review prior to proceeding with the Work.



1.7 EXISTING CONDITIONS

1. Site visits strictly in accordance with the Invitation to Bid

2. Confirm conditions are suitable for execution of the work. No additional sums of money will be allowed for after acceptance of bid for any items resulting from lack of understanding and familiarity with the site conditions, and failing to report immediately to the Consultant any discrepancies observed on site that are in conflict with the intent of drawings and specifications.

3. Accept the site as it exists and be responsible for deconstruction work indicated.

4. Maintain public safety and traffic control precautions during the demolition work, using properly trained qualified persons to control Contractor's activities, vehicles, equipment, traffic and public pedestrian and vehicles traffic that are coming to and from the site or passing along the vicinity of the site access locations.

5. Maintain unobstructed safe access and exiting for personnel and for removal of demolished materials.

6. Provide and maintain necessary perimeter protection including hoarding, guard railings, screen covers, lights and warning signs during execution of the work to fully protect all persons.

7. Take precautions to guard against movements, settlements, collapse and damages to adjacent structures, services, utilities, streets, curbs, paving, landscaping and construction designated to remain.

8. Prevent debris from accumulating and blocking surface drainage systems and blocking safe exit passage to adjoining streets and property.

9. Protect and maintain existing active services designated to remain or as required to facilitate the Work.

10. Keep utility and service outages to a minimum. Outages will be permitted only with written permission from the Owner. Make outage requests at least 72 hours before date of proposed outage.

1. Suppress dust and dirt. Prevent occurrence of unsanitary conditions, flooding or leaking.

2. Do not allow dirt, debris or discarded materials to accumulate on site. Remove promptly.

3. Keep fire extinguishing suppression equipment on hand at all times.

4. Provide illumination for safe demolition and working conditions, but in no case less than prescribed by WorkSafeBC regulations.



5. Where non-visible (i.e. concealed by other materials) conditions upon exposure, are revealed to be other than those indicated in the Contract Documents, immediately inform the Consultant.

.1 Such variance of conditions may result in a contemplated change to the cost of the work or an alternate method of deconstruction or change of materials may be appropriate. Immediately notify and discuss options with Consultant

.2 Do not continue work in this area until receiving written notice from Consultant.

1.2 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

1. If during the course of deconstruction Work, the Contractor observes or suspects the existence of hazardous materials in areas of the structure or components of the buildings not previously noted, the Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the immediate area and notify the Owner;

.1 Owner will engage testing, encapsulating or removal of hazardous materials in accordance with WorkSafeBC and other applicable regulations, under separate contract.

.2 See also Pre Renovation Hazardous Materials Assessment Report by Lance Pissariellio. Copy in the Tender Documentation

1.3 MINOR MODIFICATIONS

1. It may become necessary during the progress of the Work, to make minor modifications to details in order to conform to as-built conditions. These minor modifications, if required shall be consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents and shall not be construed as Changes in the Work.

2. Should such modifications be determined to have increased costs to the Contractor, or the Owner, the condition shall be resolved in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS

1. Unless noted otherwise, materials removed in this Section shall become the property of the Contractor and are to be removed entirely from site and local responsible disposed of or salvaged as specified in General Requirements, Division 01.

2. Selling or burning of salvaged materials, fittings, fixtures, and equipment on site is not permitted.

3. Salvageable material:

.1 Collect reusable and recyclable waste materials from construction site and divert from waste stream.



.2 Place materials designated to reused for this project or identified by owner to be retained for storage into locations on site as directed by Owner.

3 EXECUTION


1. The electrical and gas services MUST NOT be terminated within the rest of the building at any time. Notify the building occupants of any requirements for partial termination of power in accordance with Division 1 requirements. Keep down time at a minimum.

2. Mechanical and electrical systems in the building are still active. Post warning signs on electrical lines and equipment that must remain energized to serve other areas during period of demolition.

3. Employ qualified tradesmen to disconnect and discontinue affected services.

3.2 RESTORATION

1. Immediately notify Consultant of damage to existing parts intended to remain.

2. Patch and repair areas of damaged existing parts in accordance with Consultants written instructions, at no expense to the Owner.

3.3 CLEANUP

1. Remove debris and rubbish away from site at regular intervals.

2. Leave the site in a condition acceptable to the Consultant.

3. Conform to the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction with regard to disposal of debris.

END OF SECTION


Project No. 144319132 17 January 2020

FRED VICTOR CENTRE SECTION 03 30 00 59 ADELAIDE ST. EAST, TORONTO ON CONCRETE FLOOR REPAIR PROJECT NO. 2019-26 PAGE 1 OF 3

1 GENERAL

1.1 DOCUMENTS

1. This section of the Project Manual forms part of the Contract and is to be read, interpreted, and coordinated with all other parts including Division 1, General Requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY

.1 Concrete slab demo for underslab piping and repair after placement.

.2 Repair and build up slab for walk -in freezer.

.3 Repair and patch any concrete cracks, chips or rough areas in floor surface for new smooth, flat concrete flooring, prepared for Resilient Flooring.


1. Install concrete patching in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and requirements.

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

1. Apply patching and buildup only to completely dry surfaces, and at air and material temperatures above minimum established by manufacturer's specifications.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PATCHING

1. Where existing slab has been damaged or removed, fill with standard floor concrete (on compacted fill, where required).

.1 Latex-Portland Cement Grout for Floors, except washrooms, with Joints

1/8” Interior or Exterior: factory blended stain resistant latex modifiers, Portland cement and graded silica sand and dry-set grout and meeting requirements of A108.1:

.1 Acceptable Materials:

.1 ARDEX FG-C Microtec Unsanded Grout

.2 Custom Building Products Polyblend Sanded Grout

.3 Flextile Ltd., 600/100 Series Sanded Grout

.4 MAPEI Inc. Keracolour S Sanded Grout

.2 Epoxy Grout for Floors and Walls in in wet areas (pots and dish wash areas): Water cleanable, chemical resistant, factory blended modified Portland cement compound with 100% epoxy additives and hardeners meeting requirements of ANSI A108.1:

.1 Acceptable Materials:

.1 ARDEX WA 100% Solids Epoxy Grout

Sirlin Giller & Malek Architects 24 January 2020


.2 Custom Building Products 100% Solids Epoxy Grout

.3 Flextile Ltd., Flex Epoxy 100 Grout

.4 MAPEI Inc. Ker 400 Kerapoxy Grout

2. Freezer Floor Buildup Materials:

.1 Levelling Bed / Mortar Additive: Performance standard meeting requirements of ANSI A108.1, Type 2; Acceptable material:

.1 ARDEX Engineered Cements, AM100 Rapid Set Ramping Mortar

.2 Custom Building Products Level Quik Underlayment

.3 Flextile Ltd., Mortar Bed with #43 Additive.

.4 MAPEI Inc. Mapecem Premix PL50.

2.2 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER:

1. Solid Acrylic, low VOC, non-yellowing concrete sealer, where indicated only.

2. Approved products:

.1 'Ultra Seal 30 EF' by Dayton Superior

.2 'Decra-Seal W/B' by W. R. Meadows

.3 or approved alternate.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

1. Remove loose sections of existing concrete slab and provide clean dust free surface for new topping / fill.

2. Clean down caulked metal surfaces with clean cellulose sponges or rags soaked in solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer, and wipe dry with clean cloths. Ensure that solvent is not injurious to painted surfaces.

3. Use methods of preparation suitable for substrate as recommended by topping underlayment manufacturer, and that does not damage adjacent surfaces.

3.2 EXECUTION

1. Patch in concrete on compacted base, to full depth of existing slab at all locations of trenching and excavation at existing slabs. Level to adjacent slab for future finish.

2. Apply topping at existing crack locations and feather to existing slab.

3. Provide level floor finish for floor finishes. Extend and feather topping to slab as required at new openings.

4. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's specifications for underlayment specified.



3.3 CLEANING

1. Clean floor thoroughly for finish applications

END OF SECTION



GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 06 10 00 543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 ROUGH CARPENTRY NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 OF 6

1 GENERAL

1.1 DOCUMENTS

1. This section of the Specifications forms part of the Contract and is to be read, interpreted and coordinated with all other parts including Division 01, General Requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY

1. Provide labour, materials, services and equipment necessary for supply and installation of rough carpentry, including blocking, nailers, backing, rough bucks, and rough hardware as indicated and as specified.

2. Install and remove temporary enclosures, hoarding, dust screens, scaffolding, ladders, hoists, cranes and other equipment required for the execution of the work.

3. Provide temporary bracing.

4. Provide blocking and backing for fixtures, mechanical and electrical equipment and other items as required including fastenings and hardware as shown and where required.

5. Provide wood or plywood backing at windows as detailed.


1. 05 40 00 - Structural Metal Stud Framing.

2. 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications.

3. 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry.

4. 07 21 00 - Building Insulation.

5. 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers.

6. 07 84 00 - Firestopping and Smoke Seals.

7. 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.

8. 09 22 16 - Non structural Metal Framing.

9. 09 25 00 - Gypsum Board.

10. 10 28 13 - Toilet Accessories.

11. Division 22 - Plumbing.

12. Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning.

13. Division 26 - Electrical.

1.4 REFERENCES

1. CSA B111-1974 (R2003), Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples.

2. CAN/CSA G164-M92 (R2003), Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.



3. CSA O80-08 General Requirements for Wood Preservation.

4. CAN/CSA O141-05, Softwood Lumber.

5. Canadian Lumber Standards Administration Board.

6. National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA), "NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber".

1.5 SUBMITTALS

1. Submittals to be in accordance with Submittal Procedures in Division 01.

2. For adhesives, include printed statement of VOC content.

3. For composite wood products, provide documentation indicating the product contains no urea formaldehyde.

4. Chain-of-Custody certificates certifying that products specified to be made from certified wood comply with forest certification requirements. Include evidence the mill is certified for Chain-of- Custody by and FSC-accredited certification body. Include statement indicating costs for each certified wood product.


1. Grading: Dimension lumber shall be graded according to the National Lumber Grading Authority Rules for Douglas Fir, Pacific Coast Hemlock and Western Red Cedar. Size, grading and inspection to CAN/CSA O141-05. Species groups to CSA O86-01.

2. Identify lumber by grade stamp of an agency certified by Canadian Lumber Standards Accreditation Board(CLSAB).

3. Deliver mill end-marked to site with certificates as required by Consultant to show compliance with specifications.

4. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood obtained from forests certified by and FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principals and Criteria for Forest Stewardship".

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

1. Protect materials from moisture.

2. Store materials on site to prevent deterioration or loss or impairment of structural and other essential properties.

3. Store on raised supports in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and WHMIS regulations.

4. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from site for recycling.

1.8 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION

1. Cut, trim, drill, frame and make good rough carpentry work for passage of work of other sections except where otherwise specified.



2. Provide location, centering and bracketing for all trades and wood framing for plumbing, heating, electrical and other trades. Make good all defects and fully complete the rough carpentry.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

1. Conform to the following CSA Standards for sheathing and lumber:

.1 Sawn lumber: CAN/CSA O86-01 and CAN/CSA O141-05.

.2 Douglas Fir plywood: CSA O121.

2. Dimensions and thicknesses of material shall be as indicated.

.1 Nails, Staples and Fasteners: Conform to CSA B111. Stainless steel for exterior locations and treated lumber, to CSA G164.

.2 Machine Bolts, Washers, Lag Bolts, Drift Pins and Dowels: Conform to CSA G164. Exterior items hot-dipped galvanized.

.3 Hardware: Supply and install rough hardware as indicated and required, including, bolts, nuts, washers, lags, drifts, pins, nails, screws, joint hangers, etc. Exterior exposed fixing items to be hot dip galvanized to CSA G164.

2.2 LUMBER, PLYWOOD AND TIMBER

1. Sawn Lumber for Exterior Blocking, Strapping and Backing: Hem-Fir or Douglas Fir-Larch

Construction Grade, preservative treated.

2. Interior Accessory Blocking: Hem-Fir or Douglas Fir-Larch Construction Grade

3. Medium Density Overlay Board (MDO): exterior grade plywood, faced with a resin impregnated fiber overlay with smooth surface.

4. Exterior Sheathing: Refer to Section 09 25 00 Gypsum Board.

5. Provide 16mm Plywood backing on the ceiling with a Security Mesh in the Seclusion Room.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

1. Fasteners: in accordance with British Columbia Building Code requirements and as noted below. Use hot dipped galvanized steel for exterior work and for pressure-preservative and fire-retardant treated lumber except where indicated otherwise. Use standard finish elsewhere with primer paint finish where installed on sight-exposed surfaces.

.1 Bolts: To ASTM A307 unless otherwise noted, complete with nuts and washers, non- corrosive.

.2 Screws: To ASTM requirements, non-corrosive.

.3 Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples: To CSA B111, galvanized.

.4 Nails: Stainless steel nails, type 316, for salt spray environments. Plain galvanized or electroplated nails are not acceptable. Do not use aluminum nails in conjunction with galvanized building components.



.5 Machine bolts, washers, lag bolts, drift pins, dowels, timber rivets to conform to CSA B33.1; galvanized in exterior locations, high humidity areas, and elsewhere where liable to corrosion, and in treated lumber.

.6 All lag screws to be machined threaded, not cast threaded.

.7 Pre-drilled hole sizes in wood member for lag screw shall be in accordance with CSA O86.1.

.8 Pre-drilled holes in steel plates for timber rivets shall be in accordance with CSA O86.1.

2. Connection Steel: mild structural steel, conforming to CSA G40.21, Grade 300W galvanized in exterior locations, high humidity areas, and elsewhere where liable to corrosion, unless noted otherwise.

3. Flashings: Refer to Section 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

4. Sealants: Refer to Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants.

5. Security Mesh: expanded and flattened galvanized steel mesh. Approximately 60% Open Area, 0.50in SWD, 1.25in LWD. To be placed between two(2) pieces of drywall for security.

2.4 WOOD PRESERVATIVE

1. Treat with wood preservative timber and lumber in contact with concrete.

2. Treat wood members in contact with concrete slabs on grade, set into concrete, and used at roof surfaces in accordance with CSA O80.1-97 for wood members and CSA O80.9-97 for plywood. Use Borate Pressure Treated (BPT) water borne preservative in accordance with AWPA Standard P5-06. Treatment shall result in a minimum retention of 4 kg/cu.m (0.25 lbs/cu.ft) for above ground applications, and 6.4 kg/ cu.m (0.4 lbs/cu.ft), for in-ground.

.1 Acceptable Products: Penetrate Timber Saver, Tim-Bar, Born-Care, or approved alternative.

3. Following water-borne preservative treatment, dry dimension lumber and plywood sheathing to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

4. Field Treatment: Provide additional treatment solution to the site for field touch up of field cuts and drilled holes. Apply two coats of wood preservative to pressure treated plywood that is cut or drilled on site. Field treatment to be borate based insecticide/fungicide. Acceptable products:

.1 Boracol 20-2 BD Luorganic Boron Wood Preservative.

.2 Shellguard Insecticide and fungicide concentrate for wood.

.3 Pre-Ser-Vor 25-3 Inorganic Boron Wood Preservative.

.4 Window Liner: Treated with Boron CAN/CSA-O80 Series.

5. Use of CCA (Chromated Copper Arsenate) or AZCA (Ammonical Zinc Copper Arsenate) is not permitted.



2.5 FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT

1. Pressure treated in accordance with CSA O80 or to ULC Standards to ensure flame spread of less than 25 by ASTM E119.00a. Mark each piece with ULC Fire Hazard Classification label. Rough lumber around heat emitting equipment to be fire retardant treated.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION

1. Examine surfaces and conditions to which the work of this section shall be applied. Ensure that conditions are suitable to provide a complete and satisfactory installation. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.

2. Layout work carefully and to accommodate work of others. Cut and fit accurately; erect into position as indicated on drawings; align, level, square, plumb and secure work permanently in place. Brace work temporarily as required. Join work only over solid backing.

3. Bore holes true to line and to same size as bolt. Drive bolts into place for snug fit and use plates or washers for bolt head and nut bearing. Turn up bolts and lag screws tightly when installed, and again just before concealed by other work or at the completion of work.

4. Provide anchors, bolts and inserts required for attachment of the Work of this Section to those performing the Work of other Sections and who are responsible for their installation.

5. Work to include rough hardware such as nails, bolts, nuts, washers, screws, clips, hangers, connectors and strap iron required for installation of Work.

6. Do not attach work by wood plugs or blocking in concrete or masonry. Use lead shields, expansion shields, or similar methods only as approved by Consultant.

3.2 FURRING AND BLOCKING

1. Install furring and blocking as required to space-out and support casework, cabinets, wall and ceiling finishes, toilet accessories, facings, fascia, soffit, siding and other work as required.

2. Provide 38mm x 284mm backing for grab bars on walls behind and besides each toilet. Grab bars to be mounted as shown on drawings and blocking must extend minimum 1800mm from corner each way.

3. Mount 38mm x 235mm (2 in. x 10 in.) at washroom accessory locations except at mirror, as noted on drawings.

4. Align and plumb faces of furring and blocking to tolerance of 1:600.

3.3 CURBS AND BACKING

1. Install wood cants, fascia backing, nailers, and other wood supports as required and secure using galvanized steel fasteners. Do not regard such fastening provisions as shown on drawings as exact or complete.

2. Install cant strips and blocking on roofs as required at junctions of different planes of roof secured permanently to structure, trimmed and leveled to accommodate campers, falls, insulation, roof membrane and flashings.



3.4 CARPENTRY

1. Install rough bucks, nailers and linings to rough openings as required to provide backing for frames, railings, washroom accessories, grab bars and other work.

3.5 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT BACKBOARD

1. Electrical Backboard Panels: 19mm MDO board, painted white, on 19mm x 38mm furring at maximum 300mm intermediate spacing, floor to 2400mm, fastened through to wall studs, located on back wall of all electrical room closets, and all sides of electrical distribution room.

3.6 FASTENERS

1. Frame, anchor, fasten, tie and brace members to provide necessary strength and rigidity. Countersink bolts where necessary to provide clearance for other work.

END OF SECTION


GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 07 84 00 543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 OF 7

1 GENERAL

1.1 DOCUMENTS

1. This Section of the specifications forms part of the contract and is to be read, interpreted, and coordinated with all other parts including Division 1 General Requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY

1. Provide asbestos free firestopping and smoke sealing systems including accessories for a complete system as indicated and specified.

2. Provide firestopping at:

.1 Penetrations and openings in fire resistance rated walls, floors, ceilings and roofs including those around mechanical and electrical services.

.2 Openings and spaces at perimeter edge conditions, such as floor slabs edges at exterior walls.

.3 Fire resistant gypsum board partitions.

.4 Openings and sleeves installed for future openings.

3. Firestopping and smoke seals to deflection voids between top of fire-rated CMU walls, fire- rated steel stud, gypsum board partitions and structure above.

4. Firestop interruptions to fire-rated assemblies, materials or components.

5. Coordinate firestopping and smoke sealing within mechanical and electrical work.


1. 04 22 00 - Concrete Masonry Units.


3. 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.


5. 07 95 00 - Expansion Control Joints.

6. 08 11 00 - Metal Doors and Frames.

7. 09 25 00 - Gypsum Board.

8. 09 22 16 - Non Structural Metal Framing.

1.4 REFERENCES

1. Comply with current edition of referenced standards unless indicated otherwise.

2. CAN/ULC S101-04, Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials.



3. CAN/ULC S102-03, Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.

4. CAN/ULC S115-95(R2001), Standard Method of Fire Tests of Firestop Systems.

5. ULC FS04 Firestop Systems and Components.

1.5 SYSTEMS

1. Firestopping systems shall be ULC labeled and tested in accordance with CAN4-S115-M and listed in Standard with at least a FH Rating. Ensure that flame and hose stream ratings meet requirements of authorities.

2. Definition: Firestop systems protect against the passage of flames, deadly gases and toxic smoke through openings that are created for penetrations, joints and gaps in fire-resistive walls, floors and floor/ceiling assemblies.

3. When a concrete block wall or hollow core concrete slab is indicated in a firestop system, concrete or mortar must be installed in voids around the opening to create a solid surround for the opening. The structural integrity of the floor or wall assembly needs to be evaluated in accordance with the requirements of the Building Code when providing openings for the penetrating items.

4. Firestopping and smoke sealing within Mechanical work and Electrical work shall be provided as part of Work of Divisions 21 through 28.

5. Firestopping and smoke sealing at expansion joints specified in Section 07 95 00 Expansion Control Joints.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


2. Product Data:

.1 Submit "Letter of Conformance" with manufacturers product data attached, indicating specified products.

.2 Mark each copy to identify applicable products, characteristics, models, options and other supplemental data to clearly communicate information specific to this project.

.3 Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency applicable to each through-penetration firestop configuration.

.4 Where project conditions require modification of qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration to suit a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration approved by firestopping manufacturer's fire protection engineer with modifications indicated.

.5 Product certificates signed by manufacturers of firestopping products certifying that their products comply with specified requirements, comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs), and are nontoxic to building occupants.



3. Maintenance Data:

.1 Comply with Submittal requirements of Operational and Maintenance Manuals in Division 01.

.2 Manuals: Complete firestopping details and instructions. Include listing, location, and test for each type of firestopping system condition on project.

.3 Instruction of Owner's Personnel: Instruct designated personnel in procedures required to maintain integrity of firestopping systems and fire-resistive rated construction and assemblies.


1. Manufacturer to be a company specializing in the manufacture of firestopping and smoke sealing materials.

2. Installer Qualifications: Approved by manufacturer of firestopping and smoke sealing materials. Employ only skilled installers, thoroughly trained and competent in use of specified materials.

3. Execute work of this section by a Subcontractor who has adequate plant, equipment, and skilled mechanics to perform it expeditiously, with experienced installers who are certified, licensed, and have full knowledge of the chosen systems in total, and the requirements of applicable underwriter test designs and authorities.

4. Conform to reference standards and British Columbia Building Code requirements for fire and smoke resistance ratings.

5. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

6. Continually co-ordinate and sequence firestopping and smoke sealing work with other trades.

7. Pre-Installation Conference: Convene a meeting between related sections following award of contract to discuss firestopping requirements. Ensure that other sections are aware of the maximum and minimum clearance requirements to the penetration stipulated by the underwriter’s design listing.

8. Sequence Work with other trades to permit installation of firestopping and smoke seals to be after adjacent Work is complete and before closure of spaces.

9. Schedule firestopping work as late as possible in the construction schedule to minimize re-entering firestops.

1.8 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

1. Install only firestopping materials which have been tested, by testing laboratories acceptable to authorities (ie: Underwriters' Laboratories or INTERTEC), to ensure compliance with restrictions imposed by authorities.

2. Conform to reference standards and National Building Code requirements for fire and smoke resistance ratings.

.1 The cUL Listing Mark is applied to US products and indicates compliance with and certification to Canadian safety requirements.



.2 The cULus Listing Mark indicates compliance with and certification for both Canadian and U.S. requirements who may also use the separate UL Marks for the United States and Canada.

3. Materials, methods of application, thicknesses, preparation of bases, and similar requirements shall meet standards described in underwriter's validating specification.


1. Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.

2. Deliver materials in original containers with manufacturer's labels and seals intact. Do not use materials that are damaged or not labelled.


1. Install firestopping components under environment conditions prescribed by the manufacturer for installation of their product. Maintain conditions before, during and for seventy-two (72) hours after installation of materials.

2. Provide adequate lighting, ventilation and take safety precautions in accordance with WorkSafeBC requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Subject to compliance with specifications the following manufacturers are acceptable:

.1 Tremco Ltd.

.2 Hilti Canada Ltd.

.3 Dow Corning Corporation.

.4 3M Fire Protection Products.

.5 Johns-Manville Firestop Systems.

2.2 MATERIALS

1. Materials shall comply with VOC requirements: VOC content limits to be less than 250 g/L. (South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1113, Amended July 13, 2007)

.1 Firestopping materials applied shall be products of one manufacturer to the maximum extent possible.

.2 Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by Firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience.



.3 Exposure: For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction.

.4 Forming and Damming Materials: Mineral fiberboard or other type recommended by firestop manufacturer.

2. Firestopping and Smoke Sealing Systems: Low VOC, asbestos free, capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame, smoke, gases, temperature rise and hose stream (where noted) in accordance with requirements of CAN4-S115-M85 or ULC 1479 and ASTM 814 and not exceeding opening sizes or design limitations for which they are intended.

3. Fire resistance rating of installed fire stopping assembly shall not be less than the fire resistance rating of penetrated assembly and to be Type F, FT, FH or FTH in accordance with British Columbia Building Code and applicable Standard requirements.

4. Sealants:

.1 Vertical and overhead joints: non-sagging type.

.2 Horizontal joints and fluid seals at floors: self-levelling type.

.3 Flexible: elastomeric type allowing movement and capable of returning to original configuration without damage to seal and without adhesive or cohesive failure.

5. Primers: in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for fire stop material and substrate conditions.

6. Damming, Gasketting, Back-up Materials, Supports and Anchoring Devices: in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for tested assembly, substrate conditions and to Standards noted.

7. Expansion Joint covers and fire barrier materials are specified in Section 07 95 00 Expansion Control Joints.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

1. Examine areas to receive firestopping with Installer present. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.

2. Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions as suitable for a satisfactory installation.

3. Firestopping and smoke sealing over dust, dirt, rust, scale, oil, grease, paint, sealers, moisture, or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable bond is not acceptable.

3.2 PREPARATION

1. Sequence work to permit installation and inspection of firestopping and smoke sealing materials after adjacent work is complete and before the application of mechanical pipe insulation and the closure of spaces.

2. Clean, prepare and prime contacting surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for substrate conditions. Ensure surfaces are dry and frost free.



3. Protect equipment, floors and other surfaces against splatter, staining or damage by firestopping and smoke sealant work. Remove splatters by proper methods, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces.

4. Ensure formed, sleeved or cored penetrations, holes or voids made by through penetrations, poke through termination devices, and unpenetrated openings or joints, conform to appropriate ULC/ INTERTEC requirements for type of system to be used.

5. Provide damming and temporary forming as required and remove only after materials have gained sufficient strength and cured in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

1. Install firestopping and smoke sealing materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and appropriate ULC/ INTERTEC certification requirements to provide ratings of not less than rating of penetrated assembly.

2. Use flexible sealants or assemblies at expansion, contraction, control, and sway joints, and deflection spaces.

3. Tool or trowel exposed sealant surfaces to provide a neat finish and allow to cure before covering or enclosing.

4. Provide minimum 75mm (3 in.) square identification tags, plates or decals at each mechanical and electrical penetration stating seal number, installation date and the following note:

FIRESTOP SYSTEM - DO NOT RE-ENTER, PUNCTURE OR DESTROY

UNLESS PREPARED TO RE-SEAL IMMEDIATELY WITH APPROVED COMPATIBLE MATERIALS

5. Apply such identification each side of wall and on top of floor penetrations on penetrant(s), on seal or next to assembly.

6. This card should also contain the following information:

.1 Warning that the opening has been firestop protected.

.2 Indicate the firestop system used.

.3 F, FH, FT rating.

.4 Fire stop product(s) used.

.5 Person to contact and phone number in case of modification or new penetration of firestop system.

7. Notify inspection authorities when ready for inspection and prior to concealing or enclosing firestopping materials and service penetration assemblies.

3.4 SCHEDULE

1. Penetrations through fire-resistive rated masonry, concrete and gypsum board floors, partitions and wall. Coordinate mechanical and electrical to ensure all penetrations are filled.

2. Top of fire-resistive rated masonry and gypsum board partitions.



3. Gaps between the edges of perimeter floor slabs and the exterior wall (curtainwall).

4. Intersection of fire-resistive rated masonry and gypsum board partitions and walls.

5. Control joints in fire-resistive rated masonry and gypsum board partitions and walls.

6. Openings and sleeves in non-rated installations for future use through fire separations.

7. Openings in non-rated fire separations as noted.

8. Firestopping for elevator equipment piping and wiring penetrating fire separations.

3.5 CLEANING

1. Daily as the work progresses, remove waste and debris from site. Place in recycle or waste containers on site where available.

2. Remove excess material from adjacent surfaces using firestopping manufacturer’s recommended products.

3. Touch up surfaces affected by firestopping application

END OF SECTION


GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 07 92 00 543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 JOINT SEALANTS NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 OF 6

1 GENERAL

1.1 DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

1. Provide interior Low VOC caulking and sealant materials and accessories in wall construction.

2. Provide sealants not specified in other sections.


1. 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry.

2. 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

3. 08 11 00 Metal Doors and Frames.

4. 09 25 00 Gypsum Board.

5. 09 90 00 Painting and Coating.

1.4 REFERENCES

1. CAN/CGSB-19.22-M89, Mildew-Resistant Sealing Compound for Tubs and Tiles.

2. ASTM C834-05 Standard Specification for Latex Sealants.

3. ASTM C1193-09 Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.

4. ASTM C1253-93(2005) Standard Test Method for Determining the Outgassing Potential of Sealant Backing.

5. ASTM D1056-07 Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubber.

6. Occupational Health and Safety Regulations of the WorkSafeBC.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


2. For sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system, include a printed statement of VOC content.

3. Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's information indicating chemical characteristics, performance criteria and limitations for all proposed caulking and sealant products to be supplied as well as sealant colour charts and colour availability for each sealant type specified for Consultant's review, selection and pre-approval prior to installation.



4. Manufacturer’s Certification: Submit written confirmation from the product manufacturer, that product is approved for use in proposed application as well as laboratory tests or data verifying product compliance with criteria specified.


1. Architectural Sealant: to have Low VOC content limits to be less than 250 g/L. (South Coast Air

Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1113, Amended July 13, 2007)

2. Installer Qualifications: Installer specializing in application of caulking and sealants with a minimum of five (5) years local experience.

3. Apply sealant materials using Installers thoroughly trained and competent in application of caulking and sealants using both hand and pressure operated equipment.

4. Pre-installation Conference

.1 Conduct a pre-installation conference with each sealant manufacturer to review requirements for each material to be applied.

.2 Field Test Sealers: Inspect sealant with installer and sealant manufacturer present prior to full installation. Test and re-install where sealant installation has not sealed as expected.

.3 Verify sealant manufacturer’s requirements for substrate priming.

.4 Make modifications required by the manufacturer after completion of pull tests to ensure adequate seal.

1.7 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

1. Deliver materials to site in original, un-opened containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

2. Handle and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

1. Apply caulking and sealants to completely dry surfaces within air and material temperatures as established by manufacturer's specifications.

2. As caulking and sealant application continues, record conditions and temperatures of application.

1.9 WARRANTY

1. Provide material manufacturer's five (5) year written material guarantee from date of Substantial Performance that covers materials and replacement of caulking and sealant work that does not cure, leak, crack, crumble, melt, shrink, run, lose adhesion or stain adjacent surfaces after installation.

2. Provide Installer’s written five (5) year warranty to repair or replace caulking and sealants which, in the Consultant’s opinion, fail to provide airtight or watertight joints, fail in adhesion, cohesion, and abrasion, weather, extrusion, migration, resistance, and stain resistance, general durability, or appear to deteriorate.



2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL

1. Sealants (SL): to CAN/CGSB 19 series to suit condition with non-staining colours to approximately match adjacent surfaces. Color to be selected by Consultant from manufacturer's full range.

2. Use materials with unexpired shelf life.

3. Obtain materials from manufacturers who will, if required, send a qualified technical representative to project site, for purpose of advising on procedures and precautions for proper application of materials.

4. Use materials which are known to be fully compatible with actual installation conditions. Subject to compliance with specifications the following products are acceptable:

2.2 INTERIOR SEALANTS

1. Sealant – Single Component Silicone Sealant, Mold and Mildew Resistant and Food Grade.

2. Approved Product:

.1 Tremsil® 600 is a single-component, neutral-cure, fast-skinning, medium modulus silicone sealant. The sealant cures to a flexible rubber when exposed to moisture present in the air.

.2 Or approved alternate.

3. Locations:

.1 Joints in kitchens countertops, at sinks piping through walls and areas in Pot or Dish Wash.

.2 To prevent insect infestation from behind the baseboard and wall and outside of space as a whole, place a continuous full bead of sealant along the joint between the drywall/wall sheathing and the floor finish prior to installing flooring coved base. Allow sealant to fully cure before applying covering finish products.

4. Properties:

.1 Heat resistant low VOC sealant

.2 Cyclic Movement ASTM C719 ±25%

.3 Elongation ASTM D412 500%

.4 Hardness (shore A) ASTM C661 45

.5 Tensile Strength at Max Elongation ASTM D412 1.4 MPa (200 psi) .

2.3 ACCESSORIES

1. Joint Cleaner: As recommended by sealant or caulking manufacturer for joint surfaces.

2. Joint Primers: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, as recommended by sealant manufacturer, for joint surface conditions encountered.



3. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape/plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer, applied to sealant contact surfaces where bond to substrate or backer rod must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

4. Solvents, Cleaners and Primers: non-staining, non-corrosive types as recommended by sealant manufacturer for each particular substrate and compatible with joint forming materials.

5. Backer Rod: Non-adherent type, open or closed cell to suit application requirements flexible rod, conforming to ASTM D1056 compatible with primers and sealants used, of type as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

.1 Products:

.1 Extruded polyolefin, polyethylene, urethane, neoprene or vinyl foam rod with Shore A hardness of 20 and tensile strength from 140 to 200 kPa.

.2 Neoprene or butyl rubber round solid rod with Shore A hardness of 70.

.3 Polyvinyl chloride or neoprene extruded tubing with minimum 6mm (1/4 in.) thick walls.

.2 Locations:

.1 Horizontal Joints: Closed cell polyethylene foam rod, except where joint filler is specified at paving.

.2 Vertical Joints: Closed cell polyethylene foam or "soft rod" (skinned open cell) polyethylene foam.

.3 Diameter: 1/3 greater than width of joint where it is to be installed.

.4 Polystyrene foam and open cell rods are not acceptable.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

1. Verify surfaces and conditions ready to receive work of this section with Installer present. Do no work until conditions are satisfactory. Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

1. Verify substrates are clean and dry before proceeding.

2. Remove lacquers and protective films from metal surfaces.

3. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

4. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.

5. Verify that back-up material and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

6. Perform preparation in accordance with referenced ASTM C920 for elastomeric sealants and ASTM C834 for latex type materials.

7. Apply masking tape tightly around joints to protect adjacent surfaces from excess sealants.



8. Apply sealants prior to painting.

9. Protect equipment, floors and other surfaces against overflow, spillage, splatter or damage by primers and caulking and sealant work but suitable means.

10. Ensure temperature conditions are within manufacturer's recommended limitations for proper application.

3.3 INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with ASTM C1193-05a and manufacturer's instructions unless noted otherwise. Where in conflict with Contract Documents, follow more stringent requirements.

2. Employ proven application techniques and ensure full and uniform continuous beads of sealant without runs, sags, gaps or air-pockets and with equal joint bond on both surfaces.

3. Sealant beads shall have a sectional width to depth ratio of 2 to 1, unless specified otherwise or recommended otherwise by the sealant manufacturer.

4. Install sealants to size and shape indicated, with slightly concave surface.

5. Backing for surfaces:

.1 Where more than 19mm (3/4 in.) wide pack with foam rod back-up material to within 13mm (1/2 in.) of surface.

.2 Where less than 13mm (1/2 in.) wide install foam rod back-up material to within 6mm (1/4 in.) of surface.

.3 Where less than 13mm (1/2 in.) deep, apply bond breaker tape to bottom of joints to prevent adhesion of sealant to bottom of joint.

.4 Provide backing materials in as long lengths as practicable; install with proper tool. Force backing into joint to proper depth for sealant.

.5 Do not insert with sharp objects. Do not puncture backer rod.

6. Install back-up material so sealant depth is not greater than joint width, and not less than 6mm (1/4 in.) thick. Joint width 25mm (1 in.), unless indicated otherwise.

3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

1. Examine installation carefully. Repair areas where sealant is not properly adhered due to bubbles, foreign matter, or other defects.

2. Remove excess sealant material.

3. Remove and dispose of masking materials.

4. Leave surfaces neat, clean, and smooth.

5. Protect surfaces adjacent to joints. Apply masking around joints to protect adjacent surfaces from defacement and staining during sealing operations.

6. Protect from dust, moisture, and other harmful substances during installation.



7. Protect sealed joints for at least 12 hours.

8. Do not allow sealant or priming compound to overflow, spill, or to migrate onto adjoining surfaces. Use masking tape or other precautionary devices to prevent staining of adjoining surfaces.

9. Caulking over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable bond is not acceptable.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 08 11 00 543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 OF 7

1 GENERAL

1.1 DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

1. Provide commercial grade, insulated exterior and un-insulated interior metal doors and frames as indicated.

2. Provide glazed metal doors and frames as indicated.


1. 07 92 00 Joint Sealants.

2. 08 71 00 Door Hardware.

3. 08 81 00 Glass Glazing.

4. 09 90 00 Painting and Coating.

1.4 REFERENCES

1. ASTM A653/A653M-05a (Replaces ASTM A525) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

2. ASTM A924/A924M-07 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

3. Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers Association (CSDFMA), Manufacturing Specification for Steel Doors and Frames.

4. CSDFMA, Canadian Metric Guide for Steel Doors and Frames (Modular Construction).

5. NFPA No. 80 – 2007 Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.

6. ULC CAN4-S104-M80(R1985), Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

7. ULC CAN4-S105-M85(R1992), Standard Specification for Fire Door Frames Meeting the Performance Required by CAN4-S104.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

1. Submittals to be in accordance with Division 01.

2. Product Data:

.1 Provide configurations, standard details for cut-outs and hardware reinforcement, and door reinforcement and construction.

.2 Provide manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate special installation instructions. Transmit one copy of instructions to Installer.

Project No. 144319132 26 February 2020


3. Shop Drawings: for review prior to fabrication.

4. Clearly indicate manufacturer, door frame, elevations, dimensions, fastening, reinforcing , thickness hardware, reinforcement details, opening requirements for glazing, quality of materials, shop finishes, fabrication details, installation requirements and wall condition/anchorage details.

5. Indicate doors and frames bearing labels for ratings and opening classifications.

6. Manufacturer's Certificates:

.1 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Certify that products conform to, or exceed, specified requirements. Manufacturer agrees to replace, at no additional cost to Owner, doors and frames not meeting provisions of Specifications

.2 Primers: Certify that specified priming procedures, methods, and products have been followed.


1. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated. Fire Rated Doors and Frames to be labeled by UL or INTERTEC.

2. Provide steel doors and frames from single manufacturer.


1. Deliver in manufacturer's protective packaging. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.

2. Store under cover in building in protected, upright position. Set on wood sills. Protect doors, frames, and finish to prevent rust and damage.

1.8 WARRANTY

1. Provide two year written warranty against warpage, twist, deformation or other defects from date of Substantial Performance that defective doors will be replaced and refinished at no cost to Owner.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Subject to compliance with specifications the following manufacturer’s are acceptable:

.1 Fleming Co.

.2 Steelcraft Manufacturing Co.

.3 Shanahans




2.2 MATERIALS

1. Steel to have minimum 25% post-consumer recycled content.

2. Sheet Steel: Commercial steel (CS), Type B (stretcher-levelled standard of flatness), to ASTM A653, ZF075 (satin or wipe coat), zinc coated, minimum.

3. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units.

4. Bituminous Coating: Fibrated asphalt coating.

5. Sealant: Refer to Section 07 91 00 Joint Sealants.

6. Firestopping: In accordance with Section 07 84 00 Firestopping.

7. Glazing: as indicated on Door Schedule, Refer to Section 08 81 00 Glass Glazing.

8. Glazing Stops: Standard non-removable 1 mm (20 gauge) outside face of doors and frames.

9. Removable Glazing Bead: On room side of doors and frames except room 1421 door to have stop on exterior side of door.

10. Thermal break: rigid polyvinylchloride extrusion conforming to CGSB 41-GP-19Ma.

2.3 FABRICATION - DOORS

1. Fabricate doors in accordance with CSDFMA Standards.

2. Surfaces: smooth and flat, free from dents, warp, wave, buckle. Corners: neatly formed and finished without horizontal or vertical seams showing on exposed faces in final installation. Reinforcing, cores or marks telegraphing through flat panels and surfaces will not be accepted.

3. Factory or shop fit and assemble door and frame units to be rigid and free from defects, such as warp or buckle.

4. Close recessed tops and bottoms of doors with galvanized steel inverted channels or end caps for flush seamless appearance.

5. Fabricate frames with hardware reinforcement welded into place. Include concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, and moldings fabricated from either cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel.

6. Weld longitudinal joints continuously, grind, dress, and make smooth, flush, seamless appearance.

7. Bevel door edges 3mm (1/8 in.) in 50mm (2 in.) on lock and hinge edges.

8. Attach fire rated label to hinge side of door.

9. Exterior Doors:

.1 1.6mm thermally broken doors by using insulated core and separating exterior parts from interior parts with continuous interlocking thermal break.



.2 Face Sheets: 1.52mm (16 ga) minimum thickness, galvanized sheet steel with vertical stiffeners as required.

.3 Rigid, modified polyisocyanurate, closed cell board. Density; 32 kg/m3 (2.0 pcf) minimum, thermal values; RSI 1.9 (R 11.0) minimum, in accordance with ASTM C591 (un-faced) or C 1289 (faced).

.4 Provide extruded PVC top closures on exterior doors.

10. Interior Steel Doors:

.1 Face Sheets: Heavy Duty 1.21 mm (18 ga) minimum thickness, galvanized sheet steel.

.2 Structural small cell 25.4 mm (1") maximum kraft paper 'honeycomb'. Weight: 36.3 kg (80 lb.) per ream minimum, density: 16.5 kg/m3 (1.03 pcf) minimum, sanded to required thickness.

11. Temperature Rise Rated (TRR): As required, core composition to provide the fire- protection rating and limit the temperature rise on the unexposed side of door to 250°C at 30 or 60 minutes, as determined by governing building code requirements. Core to be tested as part of a complete door assembly, in accordance with CAN4-S104, covering the Standard Method of Tests of Door Assemblies and shall be listed by a nationally recognized testing agency having a factory inspection service.

2.4 STEEL FRAMES

1. Fabricate frames in accordance with CSDFMA Standards and details shown on drawings. Provide welded frames (WD) unless noted otherwise. Provide knock-down frames only in interior walls, not rated and not security door location.

2. Fabricate frames as welded to suit ULC requirements.

3. Frame to be mortised, blanked, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for templated hardware only, in accordance with the approved hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier.

4. Reinforce frames wider than 1200mm (48 in.) with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head flush with top.

5. Prepare frames for silencers. Provide three (3) single silencers for single doors, mullions of double doors on strike side and 2 single silencers on frame head at double door without mullions.

6. Attach fire rated label to each frame unit at hinge side.

7. Provide frame anchors of a type suitable for wall construction.

8. Back paint frames with bituminous coating where in contact with masonry, concrete, plaster or grout.

9. Pressed steel frames to suit installation in accordance with frame schedule.

10. Frames at Interior Doors, Sidelights and Relights: Medium duty 1.52 mm (16 gauge).



11. Frames at Exterior Doors: 1.6mm thermally broken type construction with continuous interlocking thermal break separating exterior parts form interior parts.

12. Anchors: Cover fastener locations on frames and body with putty, flush with frame, to make invisible.

13. Corner joints to have contact edges closed tight with faces mitred and stops either butted or mitred. Faces and soffits shall be continuously welded and the faces finished smooth. The use of gussets or splice plates as a substitute for welding will not be acceptable.

14. Plaster Guards: Weld 0.46 mm (26 gauge) steel plaster guards or mortar boxes to frame at back of finish hardware cutouts where finish materials might obstruct hardware operation.

15. Accessories: Include glazing stops for hollow metal frames for installation of glass specified Section 08 81 00 Glass Glazing.

2.5 PROVISION FOR HARDWARE

1. Doors and frames shall be prepared and hardware located in accordance with the Canadian Metric Guide for Steel Doors and Frames (Modular Construction), published by the CSDFMA.

2. The installation of hardware is specified under Section 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry.

3. Prepare doors and frames to receive electrified hardware supplied and installed under Section 087100 Door Hardware. Frame preparation shall include the application of shallow back boxes suitable for EMT termination at all device locations. Back boxes shall be welded to frames and shall be provided for all electrified devices including door position indicators.

4. Back boxes shall be of sufficient size allowing for wiring, connectors, and the device to be properly installed in the mortise.

5. Door preparation shall include the installation of conduit or suitable wire raceway within door assemblies during fabrication. Coordinate all preparation requirements with Section 087100.

6. Factory reinforce, drill and tap doors and frames to receive mortised hinges, locks, latches, flush bolts, and concealed door closers.

7. Minimum Gauge for Hardware Reinforcing:

.1 Hinges: 2.66 mm (12 gauge) at doors or equivalent number of threads and 7 gauge at frames.

.2 Locks: 1.52 mm (16 gauge) or equivalent number of threads.

.3 Surface Closers: 2.66 mm (12 gauge).

.4 Hold Open Arms: 2.66 mm (12 gauge).

.5 Panic Devices: 1.21 mm (18 gauge).

.6 Floor Check Hinges and Pivots: 1.52 mm (16 gauge).



8. Anchors: Provide sufficient wall anchorage for wall attachment, tested in accordance with ANSI/SDI 119, Level A of one million cycles, except where anchorage is otherwise detailed on Drawings.

9. Do work using hardware templates. Factory drill for door silencers. Do not install silencers on fire-rated doors.

10. Plaster Guards: Provide at silencers and strike pockets.

11. Finish Hardware Locations: Refer to Section 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry and 08 71 00 Door Hardware.

12. Provide field tapping and drilling and installation of surface applied hardware not applicable for factory installation.

2.6 GALVANIC PROTECTION

1. Coat or otherwise isolate metal doors and frames to prohibit galvanic action where it might occur.

2.7 LABELED DOORS AND FRAMES

1. Fire Rated Doors and Frames: Provide doors and frames constructed, tested, and approved by Underwriters' Laboratories Canada (ULC), INTERTEC or other nationally recognized testing agency.

2. Where door or frame specified does not qualify for appropriate labeling because of design, hardware, or other reason, notify Consultant. Obtain approval of modifications required for compliance before fabricating unit.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION / PREPARATION

1. Confirm dimensions on site prior to fabrication or delivery to site.

2. Ensure glazing stops and all loose parts and assemblies which are supplied by this section are packaged and identified clearly for installation by others.

3.2 INSTALLATION

1. Install metal doors and frames in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings and Code requirements.

2. Installation of Metal Doors and Frames: Refer to Section 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry.

3. Tolerances: Maximum allowable variation 1.6mm (1/16 in.) out of plumb measured on face of frame, 3mm (1/8 in.) twist corner to corner diagonally.

4. Brace frames securely. Anchor to floor and walls using anchorage provided. Provide temporary bracing to hold frames true while being built-in.

5. Provide temporary spreaders at midpoint of frame, and vertical brace for frames over 1200 mm wide, until building-in work completed.


26 February 2020


3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

1. Touch up damaged galvanized finish. Remove mortar splatter and leave components ready for finishing by others.

END OF SECTION

Project No. 144319132


GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 08 11 16 543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 INTERIOR ALUMINUM WINDOWS NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 OF 4

1 GENERAL

1.1 DOCUMENTS

1. This section of the Project Manual forms part of the Contract and is to be read, interpreted, and coordinated with all other parts including Division 1, General Requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY

1. Provide aluminum single glazed interior windows.


1. 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants

2. 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board


1. Contractor Qualifications: to have minimum of five (5) years continuous Canadian experience in successful fabrication and installation of interior glazed wall of type and quality shown and specified. Submit proof of experience upon Consultant's request.

2. Installers: trained and experienced in installation of framed glass doors and hardware as indicated on drawings.

3. Execute Work in accordance with recognized highest standards of workmanship of industry and to fabricators written instructions.

4. Conform with laws, by-laws and regulations which govern design and installation of sliding storefronts and CSA, CGSB and ASTM standards specified.

5. Supervise work using competent foremen in the shop and during erection. Workers to be skilled in their respective trades.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

1. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

2. Shop Drawings:

.1 Identify adjacent items shown on shop drawings which are not supplied as part of the work of this section. Clearly note dimensions and methods of fastening and anchoring detailed. Show accurately and identify adjacent materials.

1.6 STORAGE, DELIVERY, HANDLING AND PROTECTION

1. Coordinate deliveries to comply with construction schedule and arrange ahead for strategic off the ground, under cover storage locations. Do not load any areas beyond the design limits.

2. Adequately protect and crate components against damage, dirt, disfigurement and to prevent damage and scratched surfaces.

3. Protect work of other sections in the area of work from damage. Make good damage to satisfaction of the Consultant.



1.7 WARRANTY

1. Warrant work of this section against defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with General Conditions for a period of two (2) years and agree to promptly make good defects which become evident during warranty period without cost to the Owner. Defects to include but not be limited to, leaking, deformation of members, breakage of glass caused by frame distortion, discolouration of finishes and sealants and failure of closing device.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR ALUMINUM WINDOWS

1. Storefront Framing: single glazed, centre plane frame, 114mm x 44mm (4-1/2” x 1-3/4”), single glazed, in single and composite sizes as indicated on drawings.

.1 Alumicor Limited;

.2 Or approved alternative

2.2 MATERIALS

1. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by producer or finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than strength and durability properties specified for Aluminum Association designation 6063-T5.

2. Provide frame extrusions with minimum 3mm wall thickness, glazing stops and other applied trim extrusions with minimum wall thickness of 1.6mm (1/16”).

3. Steel reinforcement: High strength aluminum to AAMA or Steel to CAN/CSA-G40.21, Grade 300 W.

4. Fasteners: Aluminum, non-magnetic 300 series stainless steel, or 400 series cadmium plated stainless steel, or other non-corrosive metal fasteners compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and other items being fastened and of sufficient size and quantity to perform their intended function. For exposed fasteners (for hardware only), provide Phillips flat head screws with finish matching item being fastened.

5. Isolation Coating: Acid and alkali resistant bituminous paint or epoxy solution.

6. Sealants and Gaskets: Types recommended and guaranteed by manufacturer to remain permanently elastic, non-shrinking and non-migrating, and required for fabrication and assembly of screen and door framing.

7. Glass: Minimum clear 10mm (3/8”) inch thick, tempered float glass conforming to CAN/CGSB2-12.3.

2.3 FABRICATION

1. Metal sections drilled, tapped, welded, braced as required for proper installation and fixing of components and accessories, and supplied complete with necessary anchors, clips, bolts, screws, for installation.

2. Framing, bracing, reinforcing and anchors having structural properties adequate to safely sustain and withstand strains wind forces and stresses to which they will be subjected.



3. Provision for proper expansion and contraction.

4. Bolts tight and threads nicked to prevent loosening of nuts, bolting and screwed work made as inconspicuous as possible.

2.4 ALUMINUM FINISHES

1. Anodized Finishes in accordance with American Aluminum Manufacturers Association designation system DAF-45 and AAMA 611 Voluntary Standards for Anodized Architectural Aluminum, Clear Class 1 both sides, finishes for anodizing to AA 12-C22-A41.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

1. Examine openings to receive the work of this section. Correct and report unsatisfactory conditions prior to start of work. Openings to be finished with plywood surround.

2. Commencement of work implies acceptance of conditions as they exist and no extra will be allowed for failure to ensure satisfactory conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

1. Take field measurements from actual structure and verify prior to commencement of fabrication.

2. Allow for dimensional tolerances and deviations from true planes permissible in the structural frame. Excessive deviations to be reported to the Consultant in writing for correction. Commencement of work implies acceptance of conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

1. Provide stainless steel anchors required for system. Conform to details on final shop and erection drawings. Ensure that anchor bolts, embedded components, pockets and chases required for assembly anchorage are properly located and positioned.

2. Back-paint stainless steel surfaces in contact with concrete surfaces and between dissimilar metals with one coat of bituminous paint.

3. Use and handle caulking compounds in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Gassing or thinning of compounds with solvents will not be permitted. Follow recommendations of compound manufacturer for usage during cold weather.

4. Prior to caulking, clean spaces and joints of foreign matter that would injure bond, wipe metal surfaces to be sealed with cellulose sponges or clean rags soaked with ethyl alcohol, ketone solvent, xylol or toluol, and wipe dry with clean cloth; prime surfaces.

5. Where joints are 1/2 inch deep or deeper, back with polyethylene rope filler. Sealant bead depth to be maximum 1/2 inch width but not less than 1/4 inch. Mask surfaces where required. Apply sealants with pressure gun having proper sized nozzles to fit various joints. Use sufficient pressure to fill joints. Tool and finish joints. Immediately clean adjacent materials which have been soiled.



3.4 GLAZING

1. Locate and install setting blocks and spacers according to glass manufacturer's directions. Centre and space each piece of glass on pre-moulded neoprene spacers. Provide minimum of two spacers on each edge piece of glass and four where dimension exceeds 4 feet. Use spacers of size to accurately fit thickness of glass.

2. Clean glass and metal surfaces to present clean, dry grease and oil free surfaces to receive glazing tapes, gaskets or seals.

3. Do not chip or damage glass edges in handling and setting. Set stops uniformly snug to produce positive seal and adequate bearing without fracture.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

1. Immediately prior to final inspection, clean glass and before handing over building to Owner, correct any damage and disfigurement to this work, remove protective coatings, stains and foreign matter from exposed exterior and interior surfaces of glass and aluminum and leave in first-class condition to Consultant's satisfaction.

2. At completion of work, remove labels from glass and clean inner and outer faces of glass and exposed aluminum surfaces at interior and exterior. Replace scratched or broken glass and make good any damaged materials.

END OF SECTION

Project No: 144319132 26 February 2020

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION 543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 NORTHERN HEALTH

SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE

PAGE 1 OF 6

Part 1 GENERAL

1.1

SECTION INCLUDES

.1 Hardware for hollow steel, and aluminum doors. Refer to Section 08 71 01 Door

Hardware Schedule

1.2

RELATED SECTIONS

.1 08 10 00 - Metal Doors and Frames.

.2 08 43 13 - Aluminum Framed Storefront

.3 08 71 01 - Door Hardware Schedule

.4 Division 26: Power supply to electric hardware devices.

1.3

REFERENCES

.1 The versions of the standards referenced in this section are those listed in the BC

Building Code, current edition at the time of the application for Building Permit; or if

they are not referenced in the specified code, they are the latest version of the

standard in effect at the time of the application for Building Permit.

.2 CAN/ULC-S104-10 - Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

.3 CAN/ULC-S132-07 - Standard for Emergency Exit and Emergency Fire Exit

Hardware.

.4 CSDMA (Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association).

.5 DHI (Door and Hardware Institute Canada) - AHC and EHC certification programs.

.6 DHI (Door Hardware Institute) - A115 series.

.7 DHI - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors

(1993).

.8 BHMA (Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association) - A156 Series Standards.

.9 NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives, 2013 Edition.

.10 NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, 2012 Edition.

.11 UL 10B-2008 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies (10th Edition).

.12 UL 305-2012 - Standard for Panic Hardware (6th Edition).

.13 Hardware for Mental Health areas shall be non-loopable or designed to release under

a load of 20 kilograms and meet either the load release or non-loopability ligature

release tests outlines in the Door and Hardware Federations Technical Specifications

DHF-TS-001: Door mounted anti-ligature devices for safety and security purposes:

November 04.

1. Most exposed surfaces on ligature resistant door and lock hardware have

sloped or curved corners to resist attachment of a cordlike object.




PAGE 2 OF 6

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Section 01 30 00 - Coordination: Coordinate with other work having a direct bearing

on work of this section.

1. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture

or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware and recessed items.

2. Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during the course of the Work.

.2 Sequencing: Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an

orderly and expeditious manner.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Finish hardware shall be heavy duty commercial quality hardware. Lock and latch

set to be fully mortised type with lever handles of solid material.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

.1 Section 01 33 00: Submission procedures.

.2 Submit contract hardware list.

.3 Submit detailed hardware schedule showing each separate type of item including

design, finish, catalogue identification, and reference identification to specified

standards.

.4 Submit complete set of schematic drawings illustrating function and wiring for

electronic hardware at each door opening.

.5 Submit samples if requested by the Consultant.

.6 Provide templates of approved hardware to door and frame manufacturers for

accurate shop fabrication.

.7 Labeled hardware (for use in labeled or rated doors) must have appropriate ULC

label permanently affixed to each item of hardware.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

.1 Operation and Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication

requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.

.2 Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have

been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

.3 Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have

been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

1. Tools:

2. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special

hardware component.

3. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component

manufacturer.




PAGE 3 OF 6


.1 Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC)

.2

to assist in the work of this section.

Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Electrified Hardware Consultant (EHC) to

assist in the electronics and controls work of this section.

1.10

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Conform to applicable code for Products requiring electrical connection. Listed and

classified by ULC, as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.11

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

.1 Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door

opening code to match hardware schedule.

1.12

WARRANTIES.

.1 Provide two (2) year warranty on finish hardware items.

.2 Refer to Section 08 71 00.01 - Door Hardware - Specific Requirements issued with

the Hardware Schedules for guarantee requirements.

Part 2

PRODUCTS

2.1

DOOR HARDWARE

.1 Material - General

1. General products of the following manufacturers are approved equals for the type

of hardware listed. Product numbers of the first-named manufacturers are the

ones generally used in the finish hardware schedule.

.2 Mortise Locks – non-electric locksets

1. ML2000 Series: ANSI/BHMA Certified, A156.3 – 2012, Series 1000, Grade 1

Operational, Grade 1 Security, UL listed, 25 mm throw, stainless steel. Exceeds

1,000,000 ANSI cycles

2. Standard of Acceptance: Corbin Russwin

.3 Electric Locksets

1. ML2000 ECL Series: ANSI/BHMA Certified, A156.3 – 2012, Series 1000,

Grade 1 Operational, Grade 1 Security, UL listed, 25 mm throw, stainless steel.

Exceeds 1,000,000 ANSI cycles

2. Corbin Russwin ML2000ECL, Functions as noted on schedule

3. Voltage: 24V AC or 24V DC. RX = Amps 1.0.

4. In accordance with National Electrical Code, NFPA70.

5. Functions (as noted on the schedule):

.1 M92/RX – request to exit.

.2 M91/LX – latchbolt monitor




PAGE 4 OF 6

6. No substitution

.4 Levers, Rose, Occupied Indicator, Trim:

1. Corbin Russwin Princeton Trim series

2. T Rose, 2.75” Wrought

.5 Butt Hinges, Heavy Weight:

1. IVES 5BB1HW, five knuckle, ball bearing, heavy weight, full mortise hinge.

2. Comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.1. Size in accordance with DH1 and

ANSI/BHMA standards.

3. NRP – non-removable pin on secure openings and exterior locations.

4. Approved equal.

.6 Power Transfer Devices:

1. Electrified hinge: IVES electrified hinge. UL listed, comply with ANSI/BHMA

A156.1, through wire, TW4 and TW8 with MON-monitor. 50V AC/DC at 3.5

amp continuous and 16 amp pulse up to 400 milliseconds.

2. Electric Power Transfer: Von Duprin EPT10.

3. Approved equal.

.7 Closers:

1. Surface Closer: LCN 4040 XP Series, LCN 1460 Series

2. Approved equal.

.8 Protection Plate (kick plate/mop plate/armour plate)

1. Door protection plates, 0.05” thick stainless steel

2. Bevel edge, stainless steel screws

3. 300mm high for kick plate

4. 900mm high for armor plate

5. IVES 8400 series protection plates

6. Approved equal

.9 Door Edge Protection

1. Door edge protection, 0.05” thick stainless steel


3. 900mm high

4. Mortised to door edge

5. Gallery GHS 48N series

6. Approved equal

.10 Door Frame Protection (Half/Full Wrap)

1. Door frame protection, 0.04” thick stainless steel


3. 900mm high




PAGE 5 OF 6

4. Gallery GHS 50N series

5. Approved equal

2.2 UNDERWRITER'S REQUIREMENTS

.1 All latch bolts on labeled doors to have 12mm throw.

.2 On pairs of labeled doors latch bolts and bolts on vertical rods of panic sets shall

have 19mm throw.

.3 Labeled doors shall have labeled hardware items and seals whether scheduled or not.

.4 All pairs of labeled doors with astragal to have labeled coordinating device.

2.3 CYLINDERS

.1 To match existing facility:

.2 Requirements: Provide cylinders complying with the following requirements.

1. Cylinders compliant with ANSI/BHMA A156.5; latest revision, Section 12,

Grade 1; permanent cylinders; cylinder face finished to match lockset,

manufacturer’s series as indicated.

2. Provide temporary construction cores replaceable by permanent cores, furnished

as part of the hardware sets as indicated o the schedule.

2.4 KEYING

.1 Final keying to be provided by the owner thru its designated keying vendor and is not

covered under this scope.

.2 The owner’s designated keying vendor will coordinate will with owner,

building occupants and campus security and create the final keying schedule

for the facility.

.3 Provide temporary/construction keys for site security, shall be responsible for control

and distribution of such keys during the duration of construction.

.4 Hand over all sets of keys to the owner or its designated representative after

construction.

.5 Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in

ANSI/BHMA A156.28.

.6 Keys

1. Material: Nickel silver; minimum thickness of .107-inch (2.3mm)

2. Key Type: Furnish the following sets of keys for specific use and rooms

identified as follows:

.1 Door change (day) key (keyed alike)

3. Quantity: Furnish in the following quantities.

.1 Change (day) keys for keyed alike doors: 6




PAGE 6 OF 6

2.5 FINISHES

.1 Match hardware finishes throughout the project, generally satin chrome, stainless

steel or aluminum, or as noted in the finish hardware schedule.

Part 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as

indicated on reviewed shop drawings.

.2 Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and is of the correct

characteristics.

.3 Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door

types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or

conflicts have been resolved in writing.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.

.2 Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series

3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Install hardware to manufacturer instructions.

.2 Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.

.3 Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to centre line of hardware item:

1. Locksets: 1024 mm.

2. Push/Pulls: 1067 mm.

3. Dead Locks: 1525 mm.

4. Exit Devices: 965 mm.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect installation and certify that hardware

and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions and as specified.

3.5 ADJUSTING

.1 Adjust hardware for smooth operation.

3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

.1 Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.

END OF SECTION


GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 08 71 01

543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 OF 4

Part 1 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

1.1 Manufacturer’s Abbreviations:

.1 IVE - Ives

.2 SCH – Schlage

.3 COR – Corbin Russwin

.4 ZER – Zero International

.5 SOS – SOSS Invisible Hinges

.6 PEM – Pemko

.7 SAR – Sargent

.8 VON – Von Duprin

.9 LCN – LCN

.10 ADR – Adams Rite

.11 SEC – Securitron

.12 GAL – Gallery Specialty Hardware

.13 CAM – Camden

.14 NAB – Nabco Gyrotech

.15 STA – Stanley

.16 RO – Rockwood

.17 OT – Other

.18 UNK – Unknown (By Others)

.19 BR – Brio by Allegion

.20 SDC – Security Door Controls

.21 FLE – Flair Electronics

.22 ABH – Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg.



543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 2 OF 4

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 01

FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S):

D08

Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:

Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr

2 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 114 X 102 652 IVE

1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 5BB1HW 114 X 102 CON TW8 652 IVE

1 EA EU MORTISE LOCK ML20906 X SEC X M92 X PSA T X CT6SD 630 COR

1 EA CORE BY OWNER 626 COR

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 EDA FC 689 LCN PULL SIDE

1 EA WIRE HARNESS CON- TO SUIT DR WIDTH VON

1 EA WIRE HARNESS CON-6W VON

1 EA DOOR POSITION MSS100-7 GRY FLE SWITCH

2 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 900MM X SIZE TO SUIT X B-NH-A 630 IVE

1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 630 IVE

1 EA GASKETING 188S-BK (1XW 2XH) S-Bk ZER 1 EA CARD READER BY DIVISION 28 UNK



D09





1 EA EU MORTISE LOCK ML20906 X SEC x M92 X PSA T X CT6SD 630 COR







2 EA EDGE DUARD GSH 48N X 900MM 630 GAL

1 EA FRAME GUARD GSH 50N X FULL WRAP X 900MM 630 GAL

1 EA FRAME GUARD GSH 50N X HALF WRAP X 900MM 630 GAL


1 EA GASKETING 188S-BK (1XW 2XH) S-Bk ZER 1 EA CARD READER BY DIVISION 28 UNK







D10





1 EA EU MORTISE LOCK ML20906 X SEC X M92 X PSA T X CT6SD 630 COR







2 EA EDGE DUARD GSH 48N X 900MM 630 GAL

1 EA FRAME GUARD GSH 50N X FULL WRAP X 900MM 630 GAL

1 EA FRAME GUARD GSH 50N X HALF WRAP X 900MM 630 GAL


1 EA GASKETING 188S-BK (1XW 2XH) S-Bk ZER

1 EA SURFACE OH STOP 90S 630 GLY 1 EA CARD READER BY DIVISION 28 UNK



D07A D07B




1 EA PASSAGE SET ML2010 PSA T 630 COR


2 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 9000MM X SIZE TO SUIT X B-NH-A 630 IVE 1 EA PERIMETER SEAL 870AA (1XW 2XH) AA ZER







D01 D02



3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW NRP 114 X 102 652 IVE

1 EA PASSAGE SET ML2010 PSA T 630 COR

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA ST-3068 689 LCN PULL SIDE

1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 630 IVE 2 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 9000MM X SIZE TO SUIT X B-NH-A 630 IVE

END OF SECTION


GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 09 22 16 543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 NON STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 OF 8

1 GENERAL

1.1 DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

1. Provide non-load bearing stud wall framing and furring at interior locations as indicated

2. Provide framing accessories and acoustic sealants for a complete installation.



2. 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.



5. 09 25 00 - Gypsum Wallboard.

6. Division 22 – Plumbing.

7. Division 23 - Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning.

8. Division 26 - Electrical.

1.4 REFERENCES

1. ASTM A645-05 Standard For Non-Structural Steel Framing Members.

2. ASTM A653/A653M-08, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

3. ASTM A1003-M08, Standard specification for sheet steel, carbon, metallic and non-metallic coated for cold formed framing members.

4. ASTM C1002-07, Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.

5. Association of Wall and Ceiling Contractors - B.C. (AWCC).

6. British Columbia Building Code.

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1. System: Interior metal stud framing systems, plenums, furred ceilings, and soffits used in conjunction with sound insulation, gypsum board systems and soffit construction.

2. Maximum Allowable Deflection: Design and size components for 1/120th defection at five (5)psf loading as indicated on Structural Drawings.



3. Accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearance of intended openings.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

1. Submittals to be in accordance with Submittal Procedures, Division 01.

2. Product Data:

.1 Manufacturer's published literature including each type of metal stud framing system and accessory. Show compliance with Specifications. Include installation instructions and procedures requiring special attention.

3. Shop Drawings: Indicate details required for proper installation including gauges, typical cross sections, connections, anchorage to structure, fasteners, lateral bracing and components not indicated by Product Data submittal. Coordinate submittal with Division 22 Plumbing, Division 23 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning and Division 26 Electrical systems.

4. Fire and Sound tested assemblies demonstrating equivalency with ULC and Intertek (WH) test indicated.


1. Work of this section shall conform to the Association of Wall and Ceiling Contractors (AWCC) Standards Manual.

2. Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members", for calculating structural characteristics of cold-formed metal framing. Refer to Section 05 40 00.

3. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in work of this section, with minimum 5 years documented experience.

4. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in work of this section, with minimum 3 years documented experience in commercial quality work of comparable scope.

5. Regulatory Requirements:

.1 Comply with local and provincial codes, ordinances, and other regulatory requirements.

.2 Comply with applicable ULC or WH tested design for fire-resistive assemblies.

6. Coordination:

.1 Conform with Product Requirements in Division 01, for coordination with related Sections.

.2 Coordinate installation of backing and bearing plates for casework, equipment, specialties, utilities, and other items required by other Sections, including Division 22 Plumbing, Division 23 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning and Division 26 Electrical.

.3 Coordinate work of this Section with Section 07 84 00 Firestopping for firestopping installations prior to installation of gypsum board systems.




1. Comply with provisions of Product Requirements in Division 01 and manufacturer's instructions.

2. Deliver in unopened containers or bundles, clearly labeled with manufacturer's name, brand, type, and grade. Verify undamaged conditions.

3. Protect steel studs, carrying and furring channels, lath and accessories from dampness and damage. Store under cover, off floor, on wood supports or pallets in dry well-ventilated space to protect from rusting and damage.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

1. General: Metal Source: Post-Consumer Recycled Content: Minimum of 30%.

2. Comply with Contract Documents, References, Codes, and manufacturer's instructions. Where in conflict, follow more stringent requirements.

3. Non-Load Bearing - Light Gauge Framing Members: ASTM C645, Grade NS33, galvanized ASTM A1003-Z180G 40.

4. Steel Studs: 25 gauge minimum or as required by wall assembler, 1-1/4 inch flanges, with 90o

angle return leg 5/16 inches long, punched webs (for mounting electrical conduit).

5. Runners: 25 gauge, 1-1/4 inch flange minimum, faces knurled, except as otherwise indicated for top runners.

6. Reinforcement for Metal Stud Framing Faced with Wall Board on One Side Only: 16 gauge minimum, 3/4 inch cold rolled channel, weighing 300 pounds per 1000 lineal feet, or 1-1/2 inch cold rolled channel, weighing 475 pounds per 1000 lineal feet.

2.2 GYPSUM CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

1. Metal furring runners (carrying channels): cold formed steel channels not less than 1-1/2” x 1/2" x 16 ga. (38mm x 12.7mm x 1.4mm thick. Cross channels to be Furring channels note above.

2. Hangers: 9 ga. (3.6mm) diameter galvanized wire or 3/16” (4.8mm) diameter zinc coated or cadmium plated steel round rods with rust inhibitive coating, as required by area supported.

3. Tie wires: 2 strands of 18 ga. (1.21mm) galvanized soft annealed steel wire.

4. Inserts and anchors: of suitable type for attachment to support surface. Use drilled inserts into concrete, bolting clips at large steel members, wrapping and tying or bolting at smaller steel members. Do not penetrate steel deck or ductwork. Do not use powder actuated fasteners to concrete.

2.3 DEFECTION TRACKS

1. At the top of full height steel stud framing provide allowance for overhead deflection as indicated on Structural Drawings and Specifications by using one of the following practices.

.1 Double track deflection system



.1 Utilize a continuous top 20 ga deflection track and a second track nested into the outside track without attachment to it. The track-inside-a-track allows the stud at the top of the wall to be attached to the inside track to provide more uniform load transfer to the outside deflection track flange and to stabilize the studs against rotation.

.2 Each stud flange is to be stabilized to resist rotation of the stud by attaching the stud flange to the leg of the nested, inside, track.

.3 The inside track has sufficient stiffness to provide a uniform distribution of load to the outside deflection track.

2.4 SHAFT WALL SYSTEMS

1. ULC rated assemblies to meet ratings as noted on drawings in accordance with ULC requirements.

2. Utilize all manufacturer recommended framing, liners and finish to achieve required rating.

2.5 FURRING CHANNELS

1. Drywall (non-structural) Framing and Accessories conforming to ASTM C645, with protective galvanized coating to Z1870(G40).

2. Furring: 0.47mm(25 ga.) light gauge steel furring member, galvanized for screw attachment of gypsum wallboard. Refer to sizes as noted on drawings.

3. Exterior Furring: 0.47(25 ga.) light gauge galvanized Z275(G40) steel furring member to underside of concrete slab for screw attachment of cedar soffit boards at Lobby. Refer to sizes as noted on drawings.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

1. Sheet Metal Backing Channel: Minimum 0.47mm(25 gauge), 150mm(6 inch) wide with 38mm(1-1/2 inch) legs, notched and continuous between studs designed for wall supported items.

2. Fasteners: ASTM C1002, self-drilling, self-tapping framing screws, designed for gauge of framing.

3. Anchorage Devices: Powder activated fasteners as required to transfer design loads. fastener and charge from manufacturer's standard range to suit structural conditions, and fixing requirements and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Ramset, Hilti or approved equivalent.

4. Appropriate hand driven or screw fasteners for fastening to framing.

5. Screws: Lengths as required to suit applications, self tapping corrosion resistant drywall screws.

6. Acoustic Gasket or Tape: Self-adhesive foam tape 6mm x 25mm (1/4 in. x 1 in.) closed cell neoprene and/or polyvinyl chloride.

7. Acoustic Caulking: Acoustic sealant conforming to ASTM C834 Tremflex 834 by Tremco, Grace Acousticaulk or approved equivalent.



8. Wood blocking: Class ‘A’ Fire-retardant treated wood between studs as specified in section 06 10 53, Framing and Sheathing.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

1. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Section with Installer present. Correct unsatisfactory conditions. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.

2. Verify that rough-in utilities are in proper location.

3.2 PREPARATION

1. Meet at project site with the installers of related work including for hollow metal frames, mechanical, and electrical work. Review areas of potential interference and conflicts. Coordinate layout and make provisions for interfacing work.

2. Protect installed finish work of other trades and surfaces to preclude damage from work of this Section.

3.3 INSTALLATION

1. Erect work in accordance with Contract Documents, References, Codes, and Manufacturer's instructions. Where in conflict, follow more stringent requirements.

2. Comply with ASTM C754 for installation of metal studs to receive gypsum board and other drywall systems.

3. Determine partition type and location from drawings, stud spacing, gauge, sizes of built-ins for rough openings, access panels locations and sizes. Erect in accordance with ASTM C 1007, manufacturer's written directions, and using mechanics skilled in this trade. Provide plumb, level, and true wall surfaces.

.1 Cut framing members by sawing or shearing. Do not torch cut.

.2 Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

.3 Install framing members in one-piece lengths.

.4 Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed.

.5 Install insulation in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

.6 Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.

4. Erection Tolerances: Install framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1:960 (1/8 inch in 10 ft.).

5. Isolation of Stud Systems from Structure:



.1 At exterior concrete or concrete block walls, maintain 12mm (1/2 in.) gap. Use polystyrene blocks glued to studs to maintain spacing top and bottom of framing.

.2 Where stud systems abut horizontal structural elements and underside of metal decking, install a deflection track system to prevent transfer of structural loads or movement to stud systems.

.3 Install deflection track at top of wall where required to accommodate minimum 25mm (1in.) and maximum 38mm (1-1/2 in.) vertical defection. Do not fasten together. Stagger joints.

.4 Layout and align with bottom runners for plumb wall framing.

6. Runner Tracks:

.1 Install runner tracks at top and bottom, except where deflection tracks are indicated.

.2 Layout and align tracks accurately at base and top of studs to ensure plumb partitions.

.3 Secure with approved fastening method 50mm (2 in.) from each end not over 600mm (24 in.) o.c. maximum.

.4 Size to match studs.

.5 Provide fasteners at corners and ends of tracks.

.6 Butt runner tracks at partition corners and intersections, except leave clearance where base course of gypsum board is to run through.

7. Studs:

.1 Except as otherwise detailed, comply with following:

.2 Erect studs to specified centers but not over 600mm (24 in.) o.c., except install additional studs as detailed or required at partition intersections, corners or openings.

.3 Place studs against walls of dissimilar materials and secure in place with anchors or fasteners 915mm (3 ft.) o.c. maximum.

.4 In areas of possible water penetration place asphalt felt strip between runners, studs and adjacent surface.

.5 Install runner tracks screwed through each stud flange or approved clinch fastener to attach studs at openings, partition intersections, corners, and where partitions support fixtures or casework.

8. Double Stud Framing:

.1 Install at door, window, and wall openings.

.2 Install double steel studs at door and window openings by boxing method, back to back, or nesting to suit pressed steel frame condition and provide the most stable installation.

.3 Attach one metal stud to jamb anchors in each side of metal frames with two screws per anchor.



.4 Install second stud in contact with the first stud, and attach gypsum board, and other types of base board materials to both studs with screws not over 200mm (8 in.) on center forming a column section.

.5 Install channel stiffener above door heads. Stiffener to run to closest stud adjacent to boxed jamb studs.

9. Shimming and Bracing:

.1 Shim metal furring to provide true and level surface for application of wallboard.

.2 Cross brace chase partitions as recommended by manufacturer or approved by Consultant.

.3 Laterally brace metal studs with finish systems on side only or where finish system does not run full height of studs, as recommended by manufacturer, to meet lateral design loads.

10. Supplementary Framing and Backing:

.1 Install continuous steel channel backing, notched between studs. Coordinate with requirements for support of wall mounted items including, shelving, plumbing fixtures, mechanical equipment, and other construction as required for the Work. Include supplementary framing where necessary to accommodate loading.

.2 Install all backing for electrical, all rough openings for building in washroom accessories, mirrors, vanities, light cover reflectors, and access panels supplied and installed by others, or supplied and installed under this section. Coordinate with Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry to provide solid wood backing for washroom accessories. Blocking to be sized and positioned to allow for sufficient installation tolerance of accessories.

11. Sound Retardant Partitions:

.1 Install floor and ceiling track seated on two continuous strips of foamed tape. Lap tape at joints to ensure continuity. Fasten securely to concrete at maximum 600mm (24 in.) o.c. using approved concrete fasteners.

.2 Where studs butt walls of concrete, treat as for floor and ceiling track, installing two continuous strips of foamed tape, lapping tape at joints to ensure continuity, and fasten to abutting walls using approved fasteners.

12. Welding: Conform to provisions of the Standard Code of Welding in Building Construction and to Recommended Practices for Resistance Welding of the American Welding Society, for details of welding, inspection, and qualification of welding operators.

3.4 CEILING SUSPENSION

1. Install ceiling suspension system in accordance with engineered shop drawings.

2. Use steel studs in lieu of ceiling suspension only where long spans are required such as beneath large ducts or in small places. Space steel studs in accordance with Section 9.7 of the AWCC Manual.

3. Hangers for suspended wallboard shall support grillage independent of walls, column, pipes, and duct. Erect plumb and securely anchor to structural frames or imbed in structural slab.



4. Space hangers at 1200mm maximum centers and not more than 150mm from perimeter walls. Attach to hangers securely. Level to tolerance of 3mm over 3000mm noncumulative.

5. Space carrying channels at maximum 1200mm centers and not more than 150mm from perimeter walls. Run channels transversely to structural framing members. Brace to provide rigid frame with lateral reinforcing.

6. At spices, lap channel members at least 300mm and wire tie each with two (2) strands of wire.

7. Erect drywall screw channels transversely across runner channels at maximum 400mm centers.

8. At splices, lap screw channels members at least 200mm and wire-tie each end with two (2) strands of wire.

9. Provide casing bead and unrestrained joint at wall/ceiling junctures between dissimilar wall and ceiling constructions.

10. Provide runner channel at each side of standard recessed light fixtures, diffusers or other openings and provide additional hangers at each corner.

3.5

INSTALLATION - FURRING

1. Install in vertical or horizontal pattern to suit conditions, centre at 600mm (24 in.) or 400mm

(16 in.) as required, or detailed to provide solid backing for applications of gypsum board, backer board or plywood backing board.

2. Install furring to underside of soffit at maximum 400mm (16 in.) perpendicular to placement of

cedar boards.

3. Fastening to substrates or structure to be by approved powder-activated or drill-in type

fasteners satisfying AWCC requirements and recommendations of that manufacturer.

4. Install all backing for electrical, washroom accessories, mirrors, and build in chases and

openings for access doors and built-ins installed under this section or supplied and installed by others.

3.6

SHAFT WALL SYSTEMS

1. Install shaftwall assemblies in accordance with ULC or applicable manufacturer’s instructions.

3.7

REPAIRS

1. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and

installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION


GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 09 25 00 543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 GYPSUM BOARD NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 OF 8

1 GENERAL

1.1 DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

1. Provide mold resistant gypsum wallboard, in plain and fire rated, in walls, partitions, ceilings, and soffits.

2. Provide strip of abuse drywall at base of wall as detailed.

3. Provide exterior sheathing.

4. Provide water resistant backer board under tile in wet areas as detailed.

5. Provide finishing of gypsum wallboard, including taping, filling and sanding.

6. Provide trim, accessories, control joints, reveal moldings, fasteners, and sealants.

7. Provide fire rated wall construction and shaft walls as indicated.

8. Provide Level 3 finish for smooth wall surfaces unless noted otherwise.






5. 08 11 00 - Metal doors and Frames.

6. 08 14 00 - Wood doors.

7. 09 22 16 - Non-Structural Metal Framing.

8. 09 91 00 - Painting and Coating.

1.4 REFERENCES

1. ASTM A653/A653M-08 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

2. ASTM A924/A924M-08, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

3. ASTM C1396/C1396M-06a, Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.

4. ASTM C36/C36M-03e1 Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard



5. ASTM C475/C475M-02(2007), Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.

6. ASTM C630/C630M-03, Standard Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.

7. ASTM C840-08, Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.

8. ASTM E119 - 08a Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

9. ASTM C931/C9 ASTM 31M-04e1, Standard Specification for Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board.

10. ASTM E84 - 09a Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

11. ASTM E557-00(2006), Standard Guide for the Installation of Operable Partitions.

12. AWCC Specification Standards Manual, 2003 edition.

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1. Provide assemblies complying with performance requirements specified, as demonstrated by pre-testing manufacturer's corresponding stock systems.

2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance rating has been determined per ULC by a testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


1. Structural Performance Characteristics: Provide assemblies engineered to withstand the following lateral design loadings (air pressures), applied transiently and cyclically, for maximum heights of partitions required, within the following deflection limits, verified by pre- testing for deflection characteristics.

.1 Lateral loading of 5 psf.

.2 Wall Deflection Limit:

.1 Gypsum Board Partition Assemblies: L/240 of partition height.

.2 Gypsum Board Partition Assemblies with Tile Finish: L/360 of partition height.

1.7 SUBMITTALS


2. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data including installation instructions.

3. Samples: Provide two (2) 300mm x 300mm (12 in. x 12 in.) samples of ceiling and wall surfaces.


1. Installer: Company specializing in gypsum wallboard work with five (5) years proven experience for projects of similar size and complexity.



2. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of laws, codes, ordinances and regulations of Federal, Provincial and Municipal authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary approvals from such authorities.

3. Where time-rated gypsum wallboard assemblies are indicated on the Drawings, conform to applicable NBC, ULC, Intertec or other pre-approved testing agency construction details pertaining to the assembly. Where specific design number listings are specified herein or shown on the Drawings, construct assemblies to the minimum requirements of those designs.

.1 The cUL Listing Mark is applied to US products and indicates compliance with and certification to Canadian safety requirements.

.2 The cULus Listing Mark indicates compliance with and certification for both Canadian and U.S. requirements who may also use the separate UL Marks for the United States and Canada.

4. Pre-Installation Conference: Convene a pre-installation conference. Installer prior to start of Work. Familiarize installer with conditions at site and related Work.

5. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required.

6. Mock-Ups: Provide a mock-up complete with accessories and sealants as per the Owner’s requirements.


1. Keep products dry during shipping, storage, and handling.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Subject to compliance with specifications, the following manufacturers are acceptable:

.1 Georgia Pacific.

.2 CGC Inc.

.3 Or approved alternative.

2. Gypsum product fabricated in China is not allowed on this project.

2.2 MATERIALS

1. Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to- end joints.

2. Gypsum Board: Regular and Type X, mould and mildew resistant products only, conforming to ASTM C36, with tapered longitudinal edges, thickness as indicated.

.1 Accepted Products:

.1 Moisture-Guard and Fireguard Moisture-Guard Gypsum Board by Georgia Pacific.



.2 SHEETROCK Brand Humitek by CGC Inc.


3. Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board: High impact resistant 12.7mm (1/2inch) thick, square edges, ULC classified.


.1 FibreRock AquaTough by CGC Inc.

.2 Toughrock Moisture-Guard and Toughrock Fireguard Moisture-Guard by Georgia Pacific.


4. Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board

.1 Conform to ASTM C36.

.2 Indentation Resistance to ASTM D1037: 45N for 16.0mm board.

.3 Impact Resistance to ASTM E695: 838mm for 16.0mm board.

.4 Edge Type: Tapered.

.5 Thickness: As shown on Drawings.

.6 Dimensions: Largest sheets practical to minimize end joints.

.7 Acceptable Products: VHI by Canadian Gypsum Co. or approved substitution.

5. Ceiling Board: Light weight sag resistant, 12.7mm 16mm thick to ASTM C36, Class A flame spread rating, non-combustible core.


.1 ToughRock CD Ceiling Board by Georgia Pacific.

.2 SHEETROCK Interior Ceiling Board by CGC Inc.


6. Tile Backer Board: Regular and Type X, in thickness indicated, bathrooms with tile.


.1 Dens Shield Tile Backer by Georgia Pacific.

.2 Fiberock Aqua Tough Tile Backer by CGC Inc.


7. Shaft Liner: Type X conforming to ASTM C442 and ASTM C1396. Thickness 25mm (1 in.) unless noted otherwise.




.1 ToughRock Fireguard Shaft Liner by Georgia Pacific

.2 Cavity Shaft Wall by CGC Inc.


8. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing: Regular and Type X conforming to ASTM C36 complete with water repellant, non-organic glass mat finish, square edges bound factory cut in thicknesses as detailed.


.1 'DensGlass Gold' by Georgia Pacific

.2 'Securock' by CGC Inc.


2.3 ACCESSORIES

1. Resilient Channels: 25 ga corrosion resistant steel.

2. Resilient Isolation Hangers: Mason WHR Hangers by Mason Industries, Model ICW Ceiling Hanger; or approved; combination high deflection steel spring in series with a resilient, molded neoprene noise and vibration isolation pad incorporated into a stamped steel hanger assembly to resiliently support isolated ceiling.

3. Gypsum Board Accessories:

.1 Screws for Metal Support Systems: Type S, bugle head, sizes as recommended by manufacturer. Length such that penetration through metal supporting member shall be 6mm (1/4 in.) minimum and 13mm (1/2 in.) maximum.

.2 Corner Bead: Fine mesh expanded steel wing type, bullnosed edge, zinc coated in conformance with ASTM A525 G90 coating designation, or ASTM A633.

.3 Control Joint: Steel, perforated wing type, with single bead, zinc coated in conformance with ASTM A525 G90 coating designation, or ASTM A633.

.4 Metal Trim: Steel, of configuration and size as shown or required. Zinc coated in conformance with ASTM A525 G90 coating designation, or ASTM A633.

.5 Provide PVC 'J' trim at windows.

4. Joint Treatment: 2" wide paper joint tape, 2" wide mesh joint tape and low dust joint compound for embedding and finishing shall be products of one manufacturer and in conformance with ASTM C475.

5. Adhesive: As recommended by gypsum board manufacturer.

6. Insulation: As specified in Section 07 21 00 Building Insulation.



3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

1. Examine areas to receive gypsum wall board with Installer present. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.

2. Verify that framing is accurately spaced and aligned. Correct framing members out of alignment, bowed or warped, to provide true, plumb, surfaces before applying gypsum board.

3. Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

1. Erect work in accordance ASTM C840, AWCC standards, reviewed Shop Drawings, Code requirements and manufacturer’s printed instructions. Where in conflict, follow more stringent requirements.

2. In areas of possible water penetration place asphalt felt strip or approved flashing material between runners, studs and adjacent surface.

3. Install additional framing, furring, runners, lath and beads, as required to form openings and frames for other work as indicated. Coordinate support system for proper support of framed work which is not indicated to be supported independently of metal furring system.

4. Isolation: Where metal support system abuts building structure horizontally, and where partition/wall work abuts overhead structure, isolate the work from structural movement sufficiently to prevent transfer of loading into the work from the building structure. Install slip or cushion type joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support.

.1 Frame both sides of control and expansion joints independently, and do not bridge joints with furring and framing or accessories.

5. Apply gypsum board first to ceilings and then to partitions. Apply vertically to partitions. Joints on opposite sides of same partition shall occur on different studs. Install gypsum board in moderate contact, not forced into place. Joints that do not fall over framing members will be rejected.

6. Where ceilings are to receive hand or spray applied water based texture materials, apply gypsum board perpendicular to framing boards of not less than 13mm (1/2 in.) thick for 400mm (16 in.) on centre framing and not less than 16mm (5/8 in.) thick for 600mm (24 in.) on center framing.

7. Attach gypsum board to framed panel edges and intermediate supports with screws at 300mm (12 in.) on center for ceilings, and 400mm (16 in.) on center for partitions.

8. Upon completion of ceiling installations neatly cut tape at intersections of walls and ceilings at locations where walls have been designed and built to accommodate structural movement. Provide resilient channels and resilient isolation hangers in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, acoustical specifications, and as shown and specified.

9. Accessories: Provide corner beads at vertical and horizontal external corners. Provide metal trim where gypsum board abuts partition or ceiling of dissimilar construction.



10. Insulated Partitions:

.1 Friction fit batts in place until interior finish is applied. In areas where noise barrier batt insulation will be applied in heights over 8 feet provide supplementary support until interior finish is applied. Carefully fit insulation around outlets, junction boxes, and other irregularities.

.2 Install gypsum board 6mm to 10mm (1/4 in. to 3/8 in.) above floor and fill resultant space with acoustical sealer.

.3 Provide a minimum clearance of 6mm (1/4 in.) along perimeters of penetrations, fill resultant space with acoustical sealer.

.4 Achieve maximum sound insulation through careful installation in jointing, sealing, taping, and staggering of joints. Conform to ASTM E497.

3.3 FINISHING

1. Finish gypsum wallboard in accordance with the AWCC Manual and as follows:

.1 Level 1 for areas totally concealed from view in the finished work including partitions above ceilings to underside of structure above.

.2 Level 3 for interior wall surfaces.

2. Provide taping and finishing using proper hand tools such as broad knives or trowels with straight and true edges or mechanical tools designed for this purpose.

3. Seal screw heads at water resistant gypsum board with waterproof sealer.

4. Apply joint compound at joints, fasteners, and metal trim in accordance with GA 216, and AWCC Finish Level 4.

5. Sand finish coat when dry to leave surface flush, smooth, and ready for painting specified in Section 09 91 00 Painting and Coating.

6. Prime paint gypsum board, with latex primer sealer specified in Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating, before and after application of texture coat.

7. Provide fire rated gypsum wallboard enclosures around fire dampers where dampers penetrate fire separations.

8. Install attachments supplied by others for installation within gypsum drywall on steel stud partitions and in ceilings for fixtures being hung from or anchored to such partitions or ceilings.

9. Provide fire retardant treated plywood and lumber or 1.22mm sheet metal blocking and backing in partitions for anchoring various accessories. Equipment, fixtures and anchoring to be fastened by blocking or backing in the partitions. Refer to section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry.

10. Where several pieces of equipment are mounted close together, install full width of sheet metal backing over wall area receiving equipment. Refer to section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications.

11. Install access panels to electrical or mechanical fixtures supplied under respective sections.



12. Rigidly secure frames to furring or framing systems.

END OF SECTION



543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC CEILINGS


1 GENERAL

1.1 DOCUMENTS

1. This section of the Specifications forms part of the Contract and is to be read, interpreted and

coordinated with all other parts including Division 1, General Requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY

1. Provide acoustic mineral fibre panels and T-grid suspension system as indicated and

specified.

2. Provide perforated wood panels and T-grid suspension system as indicated and specified.

1.3 RELATED WORK

1. 09 25 00 Gypsum Board

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

1. ASTM C635-91, Specifications for the Manufacture, Performance and Testing of Metal

Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings.

2. ASTM C636-91, Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical

Tile and Lay-In Panels

3. ASTM E-580 For seismic restraint installation where only ceiling suspension and lay-in tile

loads need be considered.

4. B.C. Building Code

1.5 SAMPLES


2. Submit two (2) 300mm x 300mm (12``x12``) samples of ceiling tile and one (1) 300mm (12``)

long T-Bar section.

3. Seismic Restraint:

.1 Where components, other than ceiling system and suspension system designed to

ASTM E580, place seismic loads on the ceiling or support system, provide a

professional engineered seismic design as required by the National Building Code and

local requirements including but not limited to ceiling suspension, ceiling grid, and tile

system, its integrity and the system's attachment to the building structure under seismic

loads as calculated for the site location.

.2 Include the seismic loads associated with light fixtures, air vents or other equipment

built into the ceiling or partitions to be fixed to the underside of the ceiling grid, or

anything affecting the ceiling which is not specified elsewhere to have seismic restraint

or which otherwise affect the ceiling system under seismic loading.





.3 Where seismic design is required as specified above, provide Shop Drawings sealed by

a professional engineer registered in the Province of B.C. and experienced in such

design.

.4 Submit a copy of the approved shop drawing to the authority having jurisdiction for their

records and provide such other information or clarification as they may require. Show

seismic loading values for all points of attachment to the building structure and details of

the fastening system or devices to be employed.

.5 Upon completion of the installation and prior to the application for Substantial

Performance of the Work, provide Letters of Assurance signed by the seismic design

engineer, stating that the installation is complete, has been reviewed, and that it

substantially conforms to the seismic design requirements inherent in the approved

shop drawings.

4. Submit complete instructions for the maintenance of ceiling materials to the Contractor for

incorporation into maintenance manual.


1. Permit wet work to dry before commencement of installation of acoustical panels.

2. Maintain uniform minimum temperature of 60oF and humidity of 20 - 40 % before and during

installation.

3. Store materials in work area 48 hours prior to installation.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

1. Provide a minimum 10% of total area of each ceiling tile from same production run for project

maintenance upon completion, neatly packaged in Manufacturer`s packaging and deliver to

location specified by Owner. Obtain receipt from Owner.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACOUSTICAL SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM

1. Provide manufacturer's standard wet formed mineral fibre panels in accordance with

ASTM E1264 Type III, Form 2, Pattern C, E classification with flame spread rating of 25 or

less and smoke developed rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with

CAN/ULC S102 and ASTM E1264 - Class A and as follows:

2. Mineral Fibre Acoustic Tiles: imperial measure coordinated with lighting fixtures.

.1 Approved Products:

.1 Armstrong "Kitchen Zone",

.2 24" x 48" x 3/4" or 24" x 24" x 3/4" Refer to Drawings.

.3 Square Lay-in

.4 Surface Finish Factory-applied latex paint – colour White





.5 Fire Performance ASTM E84 surface burning characteristics. Flame Spread

Index 25 or less. Smoke Developed Index 50 or less.

.6 ASTM E1264 Classification Type IX, Form 2, Pattern G Fire Class A

.7 Humidity/Sag Resistance HumiGuard® Plus

.8 BioBlock® performance resist the growth of mold and mildew.

.9 VOC Emissions GREENGUARD Gold Certified Third-party certified

.10 Recommended for areas subject to high humidity, up to, but not including,

standing water and outdoor applications. Not designed for use in close proximity

to commercial grease ducts

.11 30-Year Performance Guarantee & Warranty When installed with Armstrong®

Suspension System.

2.2 SUSPENDED GYPSUM BOARD CEILING TILE

1. Sheetrock® Brand Lay-in Gypsum Ceiling Panels by CGC

.1 Washable and scrubbable finish–impact and scratch resistant

.2 USDA Certified Biobased Product

.3 Panels meet USDA/FSIS requirements for food processing areas

.4 ClimaPlus™ 30-year lifetime system warranty against visible sag

.5 Panel Thickness: 1/2 inch

.6 Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches or 24 by 48 inches. Refer to Drawings

.7 Surface Finish Factory smooth colour White.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM

1. Grid System: To ASTM C635, intermediate duty, capable of supporting ceiling assembly as

shown on the Drawings, or specified, with a maximum deflection of 1/360th of the span,

including mechanical and electrical components.


.1 Prelude XL 5/16" suspension system by Armstrong for Mineral Fibre Acoustic

Tiles

.2 Suspension Grid Width: DX/DXL by CGC for Gypsum Board Ceiling Tile

2. Exposed tee bar grid components: shop painted satin sheen white. Components die cut. Main

tee with double web, rectangular bulb and 23.8mm rolled cap on exposed face. Cross tee with

rectangular bulb; web extended to form positive interlock with main tee webs; lower flange

extended and offset to provide flush intersection with the same width and finish as the main

tees. Colour: White.





3. Mouldings, Trim and Fixture Supports: As manufactured by suspension system

manufacturer and finished to match suspension components. Fabricate special trim members

and mouldings as detailed with straight lines, square corners or smooth bends, free from

twists, kinks, warps, dents, and other imperfections which may affect appearance or

serviceability. Provide special curved edge moldings to follow contour of curved walls.

4. Hanger wires: purpose made, secured to carrying framing. Size hangers to safely carry loads

in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

5. Fasteners: As recommended by the manufacturer to suit the purpose for which they are

intended. Powder actuated fasteners to concrete for attachment of ceiling suspension system

or at any location where the load is not perpendicular to the fastener length are not permitted.

6. Accessories: fasteners splices, clips, wire ties, retainers and wall moulding, to complement

suspension system components as recommended by system manufacturer. Anchors shall be

cast-in type for attachment to concrete slab .

7. Seismic bracing: Wire , fasteners, grid connectors and compression struts as required by

ASTM E-580 and/or the approved shop drawings.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

1. Do not install acoustical panels and tiles until work above ceiling has been inspected by

Consultant.

2. Coordinate ceiling work to accommodate components of other sections, such as light fixture,

diffusers, speakers, sprinkler heads, to be built into acoustical ceiling components.

3.2 INTERIOR SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

1. Install suspension systems in accordance with ASTM C636, the manufacturer's instructions,

tested design requirements, referenced standards, to ASTM E580 and the seismic engineer's

shop drawings and instructions. Lay out grid system in accordance with ceiling plans using

laser leveling instruments.

2. Install hangers spaced at maximum 1219mm (48”) centres and within 150mm (6”) from ends

of main tees directly above the point they support. Where there are obstructions, use

symmetrical V pairs of hangers or hang nested carrying channels below the obstruction to

support hangers below the obstruction. Do not secure hangers to pipes, ducts, cable trays or

similar other work.

3. Do not level ceilings by putting kinks in the hanger wires.

4. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all cross tees shall be interlocked or mechanically

fastened to main tees.

5. Provide compression posts at all seismic bracing locations.

6. Install wall and edge mouldings where tile abuts walls or other vertical surfaces.

7. Provide and install framing members, hangers and fastenings of adequate strength to safely

carry all loads. Maximum deflection shall be 1/360th of the span. Install supplemental hangers





where the weight of items supported cause deflection to exceed 1/360. Finished ceiling

system to be square with adjoining walls and level within 1:1000.

8. Provide trim frames to suit mechanical and electrical fixtures as required, coordinate with

mechanical and electrical. Support light fixtures and diffusers with additional ceiling

suspension hangers within 150mm of each corner and at maximum 610mm around perimeter

of fixture.

9. Except where fixtures are independently supported, use positive fastening devices to fix

fixtures to suspension system.

10. Where partitions stop at the underside of the lay in ceiling system screw track to the grid at

600mm oc. min. Where the lay in ceiling system grid cannot safely absorb the seismic loads

transmitted by partitions to the grid as determined by coordination with the certifying engineer

for Section 09 22 16, coordinate installation of diagonal steel stud bracing at the top of the

partition to the underside of the structure.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF TILES

1. Do not install acoustical panels and tiles until work above ceiling has been inspected by

Consultant.

2. Coordinate ceiling work to accommodate components of other sections, such as light fixture,

diffusers, speakers, sprinkler heads, to be built into acoustical ceiling components.

3. Install acoustical panels and tiles in ceiling suspension system.

3.4 CLEANING

1. Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids and other defects in painted surfaces.

2. Upon completion of work, clean suspension system and replace any defective or marked tiles

on suspension system. Make adjustments to provide a level system.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 09 65 00 543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 RESILIENT FLOORING NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 OF 7

1 GENERAL

1.1 DOCUMENTS

1. This section of the Specifications forms part of the Contract and are to be read, interpreted and coordinated with all other parts, including Division 1, General Requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY

1. Provide heavy duty skip resistant vinyl sheet flooring with 8 inch flash cove base and matching 8 inch steel angle corner guard at corners exposed to possible damage and pre- cut overlapping split corner piece at inside and outside corners not exposed to damage.

2. Vinyl sheet felt-backed to be adhered to entire floor with manufacturer's approved adhesive.

1.3 REFERENCES

1. ASTM D 2047, Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine.

2. ASTM E 648/NFPA 253, Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

3. ASTM E662, Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials.

4. ASTM F710, Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring.

5. ASTM F 970, Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit.

6. ASTM F1482, Standard Guide to Wood Underlayment Products Available for Use Under Resilient Flooring.

7. ASTM F1303, Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing.

8. ASTM F2170, Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes.

9. RFCI Standard Slab Moisture Test Method (Calcium Chloride Method) as a supplementary test method to ASTM F2170.

10. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC)

11. CAN/ULC-S102.2, Surface Burning Characteristics of Flooring, Floor Covering and Miscellaneous Materials and Assemblies

12. ASTM F 3010 Standard Practice for Two-Component Resin Based Membrane-Forming Moisture Mitigation Systems for Use Under Resilient Floor Coverings

13. ACI 302.2R-06 Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials

14. RFCI Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Covering



1.4 SUBMITTALS


2. Product Data:

.1 Provide product data for each material specified, including storage and installation instructions.

.2 Submit "Material Safety Data Sheets" for sealers and adhesives.

.3 Maintenance Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer’s written installation and personal protection instructions prior to commencing installation.

.2 Submit, at completion, maintenance data, including procedures for recommended cleaning and polished materials, for specified type of resilient floor covering installed.

3. Shop Drawings: Submit seaming pattern for review by Consultant prior to ordering materials.

.1 Submit a cut diagram indicating seam locations and roll direction. Use mitered seam layouts for corners when changing directions 180 degrees (e.g. when running material down corridors which bisect at a right angle), unless approved otherwise

4. Samples: Submit samples of each type of flooring material, base to match and accessories for the Consultant's approval.

.1 Submit duplicate 6" x 9" (152 mm x 228 mm) sample pieces of sheet material, 6" (152 mm) long [gulley edge] [cap strip] [joint cover strip] [cove former] in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

5. Pre Installation Meeting:

.1 Schedule and convene a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Division 01, just prior to commencement of field operations, to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to co-ordinate this work with related and adjacent work.

.2 Conference to include: Owner's Representative, Consultant, Project Site Manager, Flooring Subcontractor, installers and Flooring manufacture's representative.

6. Mock-up:

.1 Mock-up one suite of each colour scheme specified using specified sealants and setting materials.

.2 Mock-up one Exterior Corner and one Interior Corner coved base condition.

.3 Mock-up 10 sq. m (100 sq. ft.) of common area, locations as directed by Consultants.

.4 Do not proceed with balance of work until Consultant’s approval is received.



7. Mock-up may remain as part of finished work upon Consultant’s approval.

8. Test Reports: Submit copies of subfloor moisture and alkalinity test for Consultant’s review.

9. Submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in accordance with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Include methods for maintaining installed products and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.


1. Quality of Products and Workmanship: In accordance with the Specification Standards Manual as published by the British Columbia Floor Covering Association (BCFCA).

2. Installer: Company specializing in the installation of resilient flooring specified with a minimum of five (5) years proven experience for projects of similar size and complexity.


1. Store packaged material in original containers with manufacturer's seals and labels intact.

2. Prevent damage to materials during handling and storage. Keep materials under cover and free from dampness. Store materials at a minimum of 20degC for 48 hours before installation.

3. Do not stack materials more than two (2) tile packages high. Stand rolls of materials on end.


1. Ensure temperature of surrounding areas is within the recommended range; minimum 16degC, maximum 19degC. Avoid concentrated or irregular heating.

2. Conform to the manufacturer's recommendations for specific installation temperature of adhesives and coverings.

3. Provide proper ventilation.

4. Do not start to lay resilient coverings until moisture and alkalinity tests indicate that all surfaces are properly cured and ready for coverings.

5. Consult other trades in advance and make provisions for work of other trades to avoid cutting and patching.

6. During installation, maintain minimum 40-fc illumination on floor surface.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS AND DATA

1. Provide a minimum 5% of total area of each type and of each colour of resilient flooring used from same production run for project maintenance upon completion. Neatly package and identify materials and deliver to location specified by Owner. Obtain receipt from Owner.



2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

1. Materials used in this contract shall be of the highest quality as manufactured by nationally recognized manufacturers and of the type indicated on drawings and in these specifications.

2. Refer to Interior Finishes List and Colour Schedule on the drawings for product colour, pattern and style as selected for this project.

2.2 SLIP-RESISTANT SHEET VINYL FOR COMMERCIAL KITCHEN FLOOR

1. Heavy duty safety flooring: combination of high quality vinyl content, aluminum oxide and coloured quartz grains throughout the thickness, silicon carbide grains in the surface layer and a non-woven polyester/cellulose backing with glass fibre reinforcement to ASTM F1303-2, Type 2, Grade 1, Class A moisture resistant backing. Suitable for commercial kitchens, food preparation and back of house service areas.


.1 "Stronghold 30" by Altro

.2 Or approved alternates

.2 Static coefficient of friction of .60 or greater for level surfaces and .80 or greater for dry ramps, ASTM D 2047-04a.

.3 All seams to be heat welded with matching colour welding rods.

.4 Slip Resistance ASTM D2047 .92 Dry, .88 Wet;

.5 Thickness: 3 mm (0.12”);

.6 Roll Width: 2 m (6' 7"); Roll Length: 15 m (49'); Roll Weight: 130 kg (286 lb).

.7 Minimum operating temperatures should not drop below -30°C (-22°F) for Altro Stronghold 30.

.8 Colour to be selected by Consultant from manufacturer's standard range.

2.3 ACCESSORIES:

1. Vinyl heat welding rod: Acceptable material:

.1 Altro WeldRod

2. Cove former: Acceptable material, sized to suit application:

.1 Altro Cove former [20R - 24 mm (1") radius] [38R - 45 mm (1.75") radius].

3. Gulley edge at door ways to other spaces:

.1 Acceptable material, vinyl, sized to suit application:

.2 Altro Gulley angle GA 35/25



4. Cap strip: Acceptable material, sized to suit application, Vinyl

.1 Altro Cap Strip C4.for floor to wall continuity

5. Adhesives:

.1 Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, moisture resistant, silicate free, Portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation.

.2 Acceptable material

.1 Altrofix 30- 2-part polyurethane for areas prone to moisture

.2 Altrofix 31- 2-part polyurethane fast set adhesive

6. Stainless Steel Corner Guard: 8 inch height

7. Stainless Steel Deflector Plate: as required for use under stove equipment not fitted with such; 22”x22”

8. Sub-floor filler and leveler: as recommended by flooring manufacturer for use with their product. Provide slopes of no greater than 1:2 at changes in level greater than 1/4 in (6mm) in subflooring and against thicker adjacent finish flooring.

.1 Approved Product:

.1 ARDEX - "TL PATCH Tile Leveler Underlayment Patch and Skimcoat or approved alternates

9. Welding Rod: in material to matched manufacture's products. Colour selected by Consultant.

10. Reducer strips where required to accommodate level changes between floor materials. Colour to be selected from manufacturer’s standard range. Or feather edges (1:12) between different floors of material thicknesses with floor leveler. .

11. Extruded cove former with a internal radius 8 inch high.

12. Top edge of coved base to be install prior to wall cladding.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

1. Inspect work of other sections upon which Work of this section depends. Proceed only after deficiencies, if any, in work of other sections have been corrected.

2. Concrete floors, including patching compounds, shall be clean and dry, moisture content not exceeding the maximum percentage permitted by the flooring manufacturer for use with adhesives and resilient flooring Materials, and free from alkali, dust, solvents, paint, wax, oil, grease, asphalt, sealing compounds.

3. Ensure overhead work finished; mechanical and electrical work completed, tested and approved; all painting finished and dry.



4. Take moisture and alkalinity tests on substrate surfaces to indicate that all surfaces are properly cured and within limits of moisture content as specified by the manufacturers of tile and adhesives.

3.2 PREPARATION

1. Carry out preparation of the subfloor using Materials and methods compatible with the floor coverings to be installed.

2. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and other defects with subfloor filler. Grind down subfloor ridges and bumps.

3. Clean floor, apply, trowel and float filler to leave smooth, flat, hard surface with perfect feather edge. Prohibit traffic until fully cured.

4. Vacuum clean floor slab immediately prior to the application of flooring.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF LINOLEUM

1. Install flooring in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Sand to remove ridges and bumps and vacuum sub floor prior to applying two thin layers of manufacturer's sealer.

3. To ensure a good installation, perform scribing and cutting carefully. Pay extra attention to the first sheet of floor covering.

4. Fit safety flooring and mechanically fasten to drain outlets to ensure a permanent, watertight installation

5. installing "Altro flooring" under "Altro Whiterock" Overlap joint method

6. installation is made by

7. Use cove former at base of wall and run flooring 8 inch up the wall. Wall cladding is overlapped 2 inches down over flooring. Run continuous clear silicone sealant along seam where wall cladding meets flooring.

8. Adhering:

.1 Adhere flooring to the subfloor with manufacturer's recommended adhesives. Cut seams to fit using the recommended trimmer.

.2 Lay sheet onto wet adhesive bed and press firmly into place, sheet ends in particular.

.3 Use roller to roll the surface, first width wise, then lengthwise. Remove any excess adhesive.

.4 After installation, make sure that the room will be ventilated in order to allow the adhesive to dry.

.5 Do not use or load freshly installed floor until adhesive has thoroughly set, approximately two days.




9. Welding: After the adhesive has set, approximately 24 hours; the floor can be welded using manufacturer's welding system.

10. Install flash cove base with butterfly corners in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, allowing additional width and length to sheet for this purpose. Do not install cove base as separate strip of material. Provide extruded cove former to support cove at base of wall.

11. Provide sealant at seam where flooring meets wall cladding. Where there isn't a wall cladding provide capping strip at top edge of 8 inches high base.

3.4 CLEAN-UP

1. Continuously, as work proceeds, remove excess adhesive from floor, flooring, base and wall surfaces or other surfaces.

2. Clean, seal and wax floor in accordance with the manufacturer's written directions.

3. Close off cleaned and finished areas to unauthorized traffic.

4. Remove debris, dirt, tools, equipment and surplus materials from site.

5. After installation, protect flooring with a layer of non-staining, reinforced heavy building paper or poly sheet over all traffic areas. Keep paper in good repair.

6. Remove protection and clean the flooring just prior to Substantial Performance of the Work to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

END OF SECTION


GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 09 72 16 543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 RIGID SHEET VINYL WALL COVERING NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 OF 5

1 GENERAL

1.1 DOCUMENTS

1. This section of the Specifications forms part of the Contract and is to be read, interpreted, and coordinated with all other parts including Division 1, General Requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY

1. Provide PVC panel protective wall coverings to designated areas indicated in Drawings and as specified.

1.3 RELATED WORK

1. 09 25 00 Gypsum Board

2. 09 51 23 Acoustic Ceilings

3. 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring

4. 09 91 00 Finish Painting

1.4 SUBMITTALS

1. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

2. Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer’s current printed product literature, specifications, installation instructions, and field reports in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Submit one (1) copy of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) prior to commencement of work for review and for posting at job site as required.

3. Submit Shop drawings indicating by large scale details, materials, finishes, dimensions of area to be covered, anchorage and assembly.

4. Samples: Submit duplicate 300 mm long samples of profiles and colours for both corner and wall joint areas.

5. Operation and Maintenance Data:

.1 Submit one (1) hard copy and one electronic PDF copy on thumb drive of Maintenance Manuals at completion of Project on application for Certificate of Substantial Performance,

.1 Manual to include copy of final approved shop drawing issued for Project of which have been recorded changes made during fabrication and installation caused by unforeseen conditions, extended warranties and Project Data Book.

.2 Include separate booklet of maintenance requirements for staff reference located in kitchen including maintaining products and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.

6. Submit copy of Manufacturer’s Warranty for Owner’s review, prior to installation



1. Installer Qualifications:

.1 Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project.

.2 Training: Installer who has attended an ALTRO Whiterock installation training clinic.

.3 Source Quality: Obtain wall products from a single manufacturer.

2. Mock-up:

.1 Install site mock-up using one (1) 4 ft x 8 ft panel of accepted products and manufacturer approved installation methods. Obtain Owner’s and Consultant’s acceptance of finish color, texture and pattern, and workmanship standards.

.2 Maintain mock-up during construction for workmanship comparison;

.3 Mock-up may be incorporated into final construction upon Owner’s approval.

3. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer’s installation instructions and manufacturer’s warranty requirements.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

1. Coordinate manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays.

2. Deliver, store and handle ALTRO Whiterock wall panels in accordance with Section 01 60 00 Materials and Equipment.

3. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

4. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions, at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.

5. Store panels in temperature controlled environments. Leave protective film on panel until ready to use.

1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

1. Deposit of packaging materials in appropriate container on site for recycling or reuse.

2. Avoid using landfill waste disposal procedures when recycling facilities are available.

3. Keep discarded packaging away from children.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

1. Temperature Requirements: If storage temperature is below 65deg F (18deg C), the ALTRO Whiterock wall panel must be moved to a warmer place and allowed to reach this temperature before installation. For further information, refer to current Installation Guide.



2. Maintain air temperature and structural base temperature at installation area between 65deg F (18deg C) and 80deg F (26deg C) for 48 hours before, during and 24 hours after installation.

1.9 WARRANTY

1. Submit fully executed Manufacturer’s Warranty authorized by company official for Owner's acceptance. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.

2. Warranty Period to be for twenty (20) years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

1. Provide extra materials of product and adhesives in accordance with Section 01 70 00 - Closeout Procedures.

2. Provide one (1) full 4 ft x8 ft panel of same type material required for project for maintenance use in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

1. Wall Protection Systems:

.1 Prefabricated components manufactured designed to absorb shock and resist map and abrasions under impact. Smooth, low maintenance PVC panels with matching and caps returns and accessories designed for mechanical attachment directly to continuous aluminum retainer.

.2 Fire rating: ULC classified for flame spread and smoke requirements for a Class 1 rating. Acceptable Material for components listed.

.3 Accepted Product:

.1 ALTRO Whiterock White Hygienic Wall System, maintenance free, impact resistant, extruded semi-rigid PVCu polymer for operating temperatures up to 60deg\ C.

.1 Thickness: 2.5mm (0.10”)

.2 Sheet Size: 4’ x8’, 4’ x10’ – 2500 x 1200mm

.3 Colour: Pure White

.4 Impact Strength in accordance with ASTMF476.

.5 Chemical and Stain Resistance in accordance with ASTM D-1308.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

1. Vinyl welding rod: Acceptable material:

.1 ALTRO weld rod – WSR01, Colour White,



2. Joint Strips:

.1 1-Part Joint Strip – G831/25, Colour White, Length 98.5” or 118”

3. Interior and Exterior Preformed Corner Trim

.1 90deg corners, flush mounted with overlap on interior corners, Colour White

4. Flooring to Wall Transition Strips: Coordinate with Section 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring.

.1 C4 CAP Strip (or C8 CAP if selected by Consultant to be confirmed), Colour White, Length 72”.

5. Start and Edge Trim:

.1 1-Part Start and Edge Trim – [G833/25 White] Length 98.5” or 118”

6. Stainless Steel Accessories:

.1 Stainless Steel Corner Protector – A861/12 Brushed Steel Dimensions: 4’ x 3” x 3”

7. Acrylic Adhesive: For dry, climate controlled areas, use ALTROFix W157, a one-part, water-based, acrylic adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.

8. Polyurethane Adhesive: The default adhesive for most installations, suitable for wet area, non-climate controlled areas, and non-absorbent surfaces, use ALTROFix W39, a two-part resin-based polyurethane adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.

9. Caulking and Sanitary Sealant Compounds and Tools:

.1 ALTRO Sanitary Sealant – A802 White, 10.5 oz Tube,

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

1. Install components plumb, true and square, scribed neatly to adjoining surfaces in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Form field joints between components using manufacturer's joint adhesives, without conspicuous seams.

3. Keep hands and tools clean during installation. Remove adhesives, sealants and other stainInstall corner guard on steel stud continuous solid backing and erect with materials and components straight, tight and in alignment.

4. Mechanically fasten corner guards, as detailed on the drawings. Secure vinyl cover with concealed fastening to prevent vinyl face from falling down out of retainer.

5. Adhere panel wall protection to substrate at locations and heights as indicated continuous between abutments. Scribe to tight butt joint between door frames, projections and corner guards.

6. Space wall panels 2 mm apart at vertical joints to abutments to allow for thermal expansion. Finish joints with matching colour sealant.



7. Coordinate with Section 09 65 00 and install wall panels after floor is installed. After wall finish is completed finish edge and seal any remaining gaps with manufacturers matching colour urethane mastic.

END OF SECTION


GR Baker Hospital Northern Health BC 11 40 00 Foodservice Page 1 Project No.:19026 Issued for Tender May 1, 2020

KAIZEN FOODSERVICE PLANNING & DESIGN INC.

1 PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Division 1 General Requirements of the Contract, are a part of this Section and shall apply here.

.2 The General Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all work contained in this

section of the specification including the work provided by the: • Foodservice Division 11 40 00; • Plumbing 22 00 00; • Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning 23 00 00; • Electrical Division 26 00 00 • Other trades subcontractors.

.3 ABREVIATIONS

S.S. - Stainless Steel C/W - Complete With A.F.F. - Above Finished Floor A - Amperes V - Volts CY - Cycle P - Phase Pl. lam. - Plastic Laminate Kw - Kilowatt kPa - Kilopascals J.B. - Junction Box L/S - Litres per Second L.E.D - Light Emitting Diode mm - Millimetres C - Celsius C.P. - Chrome Plated I.P.S. - Inside Pipe Size N.I.C. - Not in Contract (for Section 11) L.C. - Load Centre CBP - Circuit Breaker Panel KEC - Food Service Equipment Sub-contractor

.4 Delivery and installation, removal, storage and relocation of all food service equipment, included in this specification to be as per the schedule set out by the General Contractor or other designated party.



1.2 WORK INCLUDED BY FOODSERVICE DIVISION 11 SUB-CONTRACTOR

.1 GENERAL

.1 The work listed here includes, but is not limited to, the provision of all equipment indicated on the drawings and listed in the specifications together with labour, material, tools, plant, delivery, un-crating, setting-in-place of equipment, erecting of prefabricated insulated walk-in type refrigerated and frozen room assemblies, levelling, final assembly of equipment items shipped knocked down or in sections and cleaning herein ready for final connection of services by mechanical and electrical trades.

.2 The work listed here includes coordination of the schedule for the manufacture, delivery and setting into place of the food service equipment in conjunction with the overall construction schedule being maintained by the Contractor. This also includes the delivery and set-into-place of all large foodservice equipment that may not fit through normal building doorways such as but not limited to mechanical refrigeration system components, dishwashing or self-contained exhaust system. Ensure that there is sufficient access into the building for the delivery and set into place of all foodservice equipment, mechanical refrigeration system components, prefabricated insulated panels for walk-in refrigerated and frozen rooms, conveyors or ware washing equipment etc.

.3 Attend project site meetings when requested by the Contractor, food service consultant, owner and/or architect and provide coordination with the other construction team members as required.

.4 Oversee the scheduling, performance and delivery of all work and products being supplied by sub-contractors hired by the K.E.C.

.5 Provide all required drawings including by not limited to: plans, elevations, construction and fabrication details, refrigeration shop drawings, mechanical and electrical rough in and connection drawings in conjunction with the project schedule as maintained by the Contractor.

.2 ELECTRICAL.

.1 All work shall comply with the standards for material and workmanship specified

under Division 26. .2 Supply and installation of low water cut-off devices for any equipment in which

immersion type electric heating elements are utilized. .3 Supply and installation of all motors integral with equipment complete with

starters, motor control centers and internal thermal overload protection. .4 Supply and installation of all internal wiring on custom fabricated items in a

concealed and well supported manner and terminated inside circuit breaker panels or junction boxes ready for final connection by the electrical trades. All equipment shall carry CSA and ULC approval.

.5 Supply and installation of all necessary junction boxes and circuit breaker panels (electrical load centres) required to terminate internal wiring within custom fabricated equipment, exhaust ventilator(s) exhaust hood(s) and conveyors etc.

.6 Tag each multiple electrical wire or cable used in any custom fabricated piece of equipment to indicate the item serviced. When circuit breaker panels are used, identify each circuit.

.7 Supply and installation of waterproof wiring, outlets, panels and controls in all wet areas.

.8 Supply and installation of cords and plugs on equipment as required and match the plug with the respective receptacle.

.9 Supply and installation of waterproof electrical outlets on all custom fabricated equipment, prefabricated insulated walk-in type refrigerated and frozen room assemblies, conveyors and ware washing/waste management equipment. Mount electrical plug receptacles with stainless steel cover plates and casings.



Furnish and install waterproof wiring. On open tables, recess outlets in stainless steel housing under table top. On enclosed tables and counters, recess outlets in stainless steel insert pans in counter front.

.10 Supply and installation of switches for all lights in custom fabricated items.

.11 Supply and installation of all necessary cords and plugs to match designated receptacles.

.12 Supply and mount interior low temperature LED lights with quick start ballasts within prefabricated walk-in refrigerator and frozen room assemblies. Physically mount all interior lights and run electrical wiring within conduit from each interior light to a junction box located on top of the prefabricated walk-in refrigerated and frozen room assembly. Supply and install junction box, ready for final connection by Division 26.

.13 Supply and installation of interior light switches within pre-fabricated insulated walk-in refrigerated and frozen room assemblies. Factory pre-wire light switches within pre-fabricated insulated wall panels and run wiring to a junction box located on top of the walk-in room assembly. (NOTE: if a room have multiple doors then three way switches are required)

.14 Factory pre-wire door heaters within pre-fabricated insulated wall panels and run wiring to a junction box located on top of the walk-in room assembly.

.15 Supply and installation of temperature alarms. Factory pre-wire all temperature alarms within pre-fabricated insulated wall panels and run wiring to a junction box located on top of the walk-in room assembly. Section 11 to supply and install all necessary control wiring interconnections within conduit between temperature alarms and refrigeration system parallel pack.

.16 Supply and installation of electrical waterproof receptacles within pre-fabricated insulated walk-in refrigerated and frozen room assemblies. Supply and install all electrical receptacles within the walk-in room assemblies. Factory pre-wire electrical receptacles within pre-fabricated insulated wall panels and run wiring to a junction box located on top of the walk-in room assembly.

.17 Supply and installation of electrical waterproof receptacles within pre-fabricated insulated walk-in refrigerated and frozen room assemblies for connection of drain line heaters. Factory pre-wire electrical receptacles within pre-fabricated insulated wall panels and run wiring to a junction box located on top of the walk-in room assembly.

.18 Supply and installation of all drain line heater cables and insulation required for the walk-in refrigerated and/or frozen room assemblies.

.19 Supply and installation of electrical wiring from contacts on evaporator coils through disconnect switches (supplied and installed by K.E.C.) to a junction box located on top of the walk-in refrigerator and freezer assembly ready for final electrical connection from refrigeration rack by K.E.C..

.20 All receptacles installed by the K.E.C. to have the colour to match project standards.

.21 Supply and installation of all electrical control wiring required for the mechanical refrigeration systems including but not limited to inter-connections from remote compressor(s), compressor(s), parallel pack(s), evaporative condenser(s), evaporator coils and temperature alarms.



.3 MECHANICAL

.1 All work shall comply with the standards for material and workmanship specified under Division 22.

.2 Supply and installation of hard drawn copper condensate drain lines from each evaporator coil inside prefabricated, insulated walk-in refrigerated and frozen room assemblies complete with traps to building funnel floor drains. Wrap freezer evaporator coil drain lines with drain line heaters from coil to exterior of walk-in freezer. Evaporator fan coil condensate drain lines to be pitched down from drip pan connection to funnel floor drain at a rate of not less than 25mm in 610mm. Wrap all condensate drain lines with insulated white PVC covering.

.3 Provision and installation of all faucets complete with aerators and replaceable seats, ready for connection by appropriate contractor.

.4 Supply and installation of chrome plated overflow assemblies, drain fittings and traps with tail pieces for all sink type assemblies.

.5 Supply and installation of chrome plated blow down piping from items with relief or safety valves, extend piping to nearest hub or floor drain approximately 4" (100mm) above drain.

.6 Supply of any pressure regulating valves on domestic hot and cold water, low temperature chilled water, gas, steam or condensate lines for equipment supplied herein.

.7 Conceal and support of all piping and accessories within custom fabricated equipment.

.8 Interconnection of drains and water lines between common multiple pieces of equipment. i.e. steam equipment, dishwashers etc.

.4 PREFABRICATED, INSULATED WALK IN TYPE REFRIGERATED AND FROZEN

ROOM ASSEMBLIES

.1 Supply, installation and erection of all prefabricated, insulated panels for walk-in type refrigerated and frozen room assemblies including ceiling and evaporator coil suspensions.

.2 Supply, installation and erection of all prefabricated insulated panels required to insulate building structural columns that occur within walk-in type refrigerated and frozen room assemblies.

.3 Supply and set into place of all overhead horizontal structural supports and hanging rods required for suspension of ceiling panels for prefabricated walk in type refrigerated and frozen room assemblies and evaporator coils.

.4 Supply and installation of internal and external bumpers as specified for all pre-fabricated, insulated walk-in type refrigerated or frozen room assemblies.

.5 Supply and installation of all sliding door, double acting doors, overhead roll up door, and hinged door assemblies specified as part of the walk in structures.

.6 Supply and mount interior low temperature LED lights with quick start ballasts within prefabricated walk-in refrigerator and frozen room assemblies. Division 11 to physically mount all interior lights and run electrical wiring within conduit from each interior light to a junction box(es) located on top of the prefabricated walk-in refrigerated and frozen room assembly. Division 11 to supply and install junction box(es), ready for final connection by Division 26. (NOTE: if a room have multiple doors then three way switches are required)

.7 Supply and installation of interior light switches within pre-fabricated insulated walk-in refrigerated and frozen room assemblies. Division 11 to factory pre-wire light switches within pre-fabricated insulated wall panels and run wiring to a junction box located on top of the walk-in room assembly. (NOTE: if a room have multiple doors then three way switches are required)

.8 Supply and installation of door heaters. Division 11 to factory pre-wire door heaters within pre-fabricated insulated wall panels and run wiring to a junction box located on top of the walk-in room assembly.



.9 Supply and installation of temperature alarms. Division 11 to factory pre-wire all temperature alarms within pre-fabricated insulated wall panels and run wiring to a junction box located on top of the walk-in room assembly. Division 11 to supply and install all necessary control wiring interconnections within conduit between temperature alarms and solenoid valves for the mechanical refrigeration system as required.

.10 Supply and installation of electrical receptacles within pre-fabricated insulated walk-in refrigerated and frozen room assemblies. Division 11 to supply and install all electrical receptacles within the walk-in room assemblies. Division 11 to factory pre-wire electrical receptacles within pre-fabricated insulated wall panels and run wiring to a junction box located on top of the walk-in room assembly.

.11 Provision of all holes required in pre-fabricated insulated wall and ceiling panels by Electrical Division 26 and Mechanical Division 22 to accommodate including but not limited to hot and cold water lines, drain lines for hand sinks and work tables with sinks, condensate drain lines, sprinkler lines and electrical conduit. Seal all penetrations with an approved permagum sealant.

.12 Supply and installation of internal bracings inside of the foamed in place urethane walk in panels required to support external bumpers or other fixtures attached to the prefabricated walk-in type panels.

.13 Supply and installation of 2.8mm thick stainless steel corner guards at all interior and exterior outside corners and insulated panels around building structural columns. Corner guards are to be “L” - Shape 150 x 150 mm x 1830 mm high mounted 50 mm above the top of the finished floor cove.

.14 Provision of all necessary foamed in place re-enforcement to accommodate the installation of hand sinks, spray wash stations, fire alarm speakers (coordinate with Division 26) and stainless steel chases/enclosure panels.

.15 Supply and installation of s.s. door sill cover plates.

.16 Supply and installation of 1220mm high s.s. tread plates on both interior and exterior of sliding doors and hinged doors.

.17 Supply and installation of viewing windows (heated for freezers) on sliding and hinged doors.

.5 MECHANICAL REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS

.1 Refrigeration equipment and system shall be provided to maintain stated

temperatures for each unit or room. Plant sizes given in this documentation are guides only. This section shall verify heat load and size equipment to maintain design temperatures for normal commercial kitchen use. All mechanical piping and materials installed under this section shall be in accordance with Divisions 22.

.2 Should consist of the following equipment to correctly operate all refrigeration identified in this specification and shall include all coolers and freezers. All compressors shall be medium and low temperature Glacier scroll type compressors. Required elements include the following: R404A refrigeration, 208/1/60 voltage, Individual systems, Electric defrost control package, Off time defrost control package, CPC ‘Einstein’ computer controller on board, Input/output boards for temp control and temp monitoring by BAS., Alarm for oil failure, low refrigerant, high head pressure, Modem for remote communication, Suction cores, Liquid cores, Spare set of core filters, Super flex hose for pressure controls, unit to contain full refrigeration leak detection system.

.3 Installation under this section should include: Receiving and placing the complete refrigeration system, Installation of all supplied evaporator coils, Final drain connections from evaporator coil to drains, drains, heat trace freezer coils, all required refrigeration piping, fittings and insulation, supply and install thermostats for cooler room…one per system, evaporator coils to be shipped with installed TX valves, supply and installation of refrigeration piping and fittings, refrigerant,



Copeland approved Polyolester refrigeration oil, pipe insulation, piping supports and all other installation materials to complete project, Start-up of refrigeration systems and adjustment of controls, expansion valves and related switches

.4 Refrigeration System Schematic Description: Provide a split refrigeration system for low and medium temp applications properly sized for the required refrigeration loads. Rack to have split suction and liquid header and common discharge header. Rack to be direct expansion. A mounted heat exchanger for the medium temp to be connected to a stand-alone chiller package.

.5 Loop Piping consists of two pipes, a supply main and a return main, often of large size, running throughout the building, passing in close proximity to each refrigerated space or fixture. Smaller branch lines are tapped off these main lines to provide supply and return fluid to individual coils, equipment or walk-in coolers. In this configuration, all controls and valves for refrigeration and defrost are located in or near the refrigerated spaces. If the system uses warm fluid defrost, a third pipe for defrost supply fluid is also run from the system to the refrigerated spaces, creating what is commonly called at three-pipe loop system.

.6 Required Components for the Food Services Rack Refrigeration System. .1 General .2 Refrigerant type: R-404a .3 Compressor class: Scroll .4 Rack frame isolation type: Cork&rubber pads

Circuit stub orientation: Rear vert up Refrigerant identifier: Painted compressor heads

.7 Discharge Discharge header design: Pulled holes Provide discharge line check valve, Provide condenser service isolation valves Service valve on condenser supply and liquid return lines. Provide water heat reclaim with diOFCIrential bypass valve and adjustable regulator. Provide isolation valves Provide operational status light. Provide status indicator location on device.

.8 Liquid Liquid circuits fed from bottom of header Provide vertical liquid receiver on rack frame with a minimum pressure rating of 450 psi. Include 3way relief service tree, liquid level monitoring, digital with optical eye liquid level sensor and time delay low liquid level alarm. Provide liquid line filter-drier and sightglass

.9 Suction Suction lines insulation thickness shall be 13mm thick wall. Accumulator shall have an integral header, 13mm insulation thickness

.10 Install accumulator on each suction group. Provide a Flow Control suction filter on each suction group with an allowable pressure drop for medium temp of 1 psig and an allowable pressure drop for low temp of .5 psig.

.11 Provide Mueller ball valve. Provide crankcase heaters Unit shall have individual pressure controls with low pressure control applied per compressor. Compressor pressure control line type shall be steel formed tube. The primary control valve pilot line type shall be copper tube. Isolation valves shall be ball valves. Use hand valves for service access. The non-serviceable check valve shall be Watsco or equal. Use the OEM recommended oil failure control on each compressor and provide an oil failure status indicator.

.12 Oil shall be Polyol Ester, CPI BVA Solest LT-32 or equal. Provide electronic oil float with a Flow Control reservoir. Complete with Turbashead oil separator. Oil feed line shall be a POST reservoir and be equipped with an Sporalan oil SF283 or better filter. Provide hand type service/isolationvalve after oil filter.

.13 Electrical Electrical division to provide non-fused disconnect as per local codes. Provide



phase loss protection. The rack shall be protected by fuses with compressor overcurrent circuit breakers for protection. Compressor or motor MOPD sizing basis-125% Minimum circuit breaker AIC rating-10,000 amps, circuit breaker shall be Eaton Cultler Hammer or equal. Contactor shall be a definite purpose, Eaton Cultler Hammer or equal. Unit to have a two one point power connection. Control circuit shall be protected by group breaker. Control circuit voltage, 120/60/1 with an overcurrent rating of 10 Amps Elec defrost contactor and elec defrost circuit breaker shall be Eaton Cultler Hammer or equal.

.14 Provide monitoring via controller for the following: Discharge line temperature, ambient temperature, phase loss, oil failure, low refrigerant level.

.15 Utilize a CPC Einstein 2 rack controller with a Failsafe compressor control backup method. Manufacturer shall provide I/O list, programming and modem. Controller shall communicate with a remote alarm panel.

.16 Provide control switch, status indicator panel for refrigeration and defrost. Suction stop/EPR control. Provide liquid line solenoid.

.17 Supply and installation of all mechanical refrigeration systems including but not limited to evaporator coils, compressors, high pressure receivers, evaporative condenser sump tanks, evaporator condenser pumps, low, medium or high temperature suction accumulators, refrigeration leak detector, liquid refrigerant sub coolers and all refrigerant supply and suction lines etc as specified to form a complete and operating system.

.18 Supply and installation of all insulated liquid refrigerant supply and suction return lines required to interconnect mechanical refrigeration system components including piping runs to the evaporator coils within each prefabricated, insulated walk-in type refrigerated or frozen room assembly, compressors, condensing units and/or parallel packs, roof mounted condenser, high pressure receivers, low and high temperature suction accumulators, liquid refrigerant sub-coolers and any other device or equipment items required to form a complete operating mechanical refrigeration system.

.19 Supply and installation evaporator coil fan motors, time clocks, room thermostats, solenoid valves and defrost heaters ready for final electrical connection by KEC.

.20 Supply and installation of all control wiring for evaporator coil fan motors, room thermostats, alarms and sensors to junction boxes located on the top of each prefabricated, insulated walk-in type refrigerated or frozen room assembly. Run electrical control wires in conduit above the ceilings of the prefabricated structures and enter inside exactly where required. Factory pre-wire all interconnections for room thermostats, alarms and sensors inside foamed-in urethane panels and terminate on top of prefabricated structures in junction boxes.

.21 Supply and installation of all control wiring required for remote compressors and/or compressor parallel packs.

.22 Supply and installation of all control wiring required for roof top condenser, parallel packs, compressors and any other devices or equipment specified as part of the mechanical refrigeration system such as, but not limited to, pumps, receivers, sump tank, suction accumulator, waste heat exchangers and liquid refrigerant sub-coolers etc.

.23 Supply and installation of all hot gas defrost lines between the parallel pack and the evaporator coils inside walk-in freezers and the tempering room.

.24 Supply and installation of all electrical wiring from terminals on evaporator coils through disconnect switches to a junction box located on top of the room ready for final connection by KEC.



.25 Supply and installation of all electrical receptacles behind evaporator coils for power supply to drain line heaters. Run wiring from receptacles to a junction box located on top of the room ready for final connection by Division 26.

.6 EXHAUST VENTILATOR(S), (HOODS) AND FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS

.1 Supply, set-into-place of all specified self-contained exhaust system. .2 Supply and set-into-place of control panels complete with control relays as

required for interlock to the building central alarm panel. .3 Supply and set-into-place of fire suppression electrical control panel(s) and

Automan(s) complete with piping, bottles, fusible links as specified, release mechanisms and all other necessary accessories and components to form a complete operational and approved system.

.4 Supply and installation of fire pull stations for the exhaust fire suppression system.

.5 The supply and installation of fire suppression system shall be in accordance with all requirements and regulations of Underwriters’ Laboratories of Canada, “N.F.P.A. Code 96”, Quebec Building Code and other local municipal authority having jurisdiction.

.7 WAREWASHING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

.1 The K.E.C. will be responsible for the manufacture, supply, relocation and set-in-place and on-site commissioning of the entire ware washing and waste management system.

.2 The K.E.C. will be responsible to ensure that all these items function together as a complete and inter-related system, the entire system is fully operational and that all of the system sub-component parts are properly integrated.

.3 The scrapping table will be used to disassemble cafeteria soiled meal trays, loading soiled meal service wares into 508mm x 508mm plastic dish machine racks and loading cutlery from flat racks into plastic type bins. It will also be used for source separation of organic and non-organic food waste materials, transfer of organic food waste, transfer of dish racks to the main dishwashing machine. The electrical circuit that provides power to the main system control panel mounted on the scrapping table must have electrical ground fault protection (GFI) protection.

.8 MISCELLANEOUS

.1 Supply and installation of all hardware and standard accessories normally part of

the equipment whether shown and/or specified or not; ie locks, catches, handles, hinges, etc.

.2 Provision of rubber button feet or pads under any piece of equipment that will rest on a counter.

.3 Caulking and sealing of equipment to walls, curbs, bases, adjacent units and between any dissimilar materials. Use an approved silicone sealer for gaps under 8mm and stainless steel trim strips and sealer for wider gaps. Prepare area being siliconed prior to silicone application.

.4 Securing of all permanent equipment to floor or base. Use stainless steel shims for levelling.

.5 Supply and installation of all stainless steel strips and filler pieces necessary to properly finish any individual or combined set of pieces of equipment as part of the contract.

.6 Protection, identification and recessing of all controls, pilot lights, switches and valves on any item of equipment.



.7 Provision of all necessary access panels within each piece of equipment to allow for proper maintenance and service. Allow access when two (2) or more units are adjacent to each other.

.8 Supply of all standard equipment accessories normally furnished with all items specified whether indicated or not.

.9 Provision of all inserts, bolts, anchors, sleeves, ferrules, sleepers and other assorted hardware as may be necessary for the proper anchorage, fixing or attachment of equipment to the building.

.10 Verification of the dimensions and services of all pieces of equipment that may be supplied by the Owner but are to become a part of a unit specified under this work in order to ensure a proper fit and co-ordination of installation.


.1 The work of this section shall be executed by qualified Foodservice Equipment Sub-Contractors such as foodservice equipment dealer/custom stainless steel fabricator, manufacturer of prefabricated insulated walk-in type refrigerated and frozen room panels, foodservice refrigeration specialists, manufacturer of blast chillers, manufacturers of ware washing/waste management systems and conveyor systems.

.2 If the Foodservice Equipment Sub-Contractor performing the work included in this

specification is an equipment dealer only, the firm shall at the time of tendering, provide in writing the name, address and qualifications of the fabricator proposed for the manufacturing and installation of custom stainless steel equipment.

.3 If the Foodservice Equipment Sub-Contractor performing the work included in this

specification intends to further sub contract out any portions of the work they are to perform to another individual or firm including but not limited to research and development, design, sub-fabrication, stamping, sub-assembly, electrical wiring or controls and any parts or all of the installation, the name of the proposed individual or firm who the Foodservice Sub-contractor intends to further sub-contract work to, must be identified at the time of tender. No further subcontracting will be permitted after tender award without written authorization by the food service consultant.

.4 If the Foodservice Equipment Sub-Contractor performing the work for the prefabricated

insulated walk-in panels also proposes to supply the mechanical refrigeration systems, the firm shall at the time of tendering provide in writing the name, address and qualifications of the company proposed to supply and install the mechanical refrigeration systems.

.5 No company will be considered for the supply and installation of the mechanical

refrigeration systems without having an authorized service agency in Montreal, Quebec. At the time of tendering, the name of the authorized service agent for each and every component of the mechanical refrigeration system must be identified as well as the terms and conditions of the warranty.

.6 Before submitting tenders, it is the responsibility of the bidder to carefully examine the

drawings, specifications and the site to become aware of all existing conditions and limitations and to ensure that all of the work called for will be included in the tender submission.

.7 All equipment and components supplied from manufacturers shall be the latest model or

issue and shall be new and unused in every respect. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS AND MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS



.1 All fabricated items and assemblies of equipment shall be completely illustrated by shop drawings with detailed descriptions, clearly indicated methods of construction, gauges, assembly, fastenings and services, etc.

.2 All shop drawings for this project shall use Metric units.

.3 Drawings prepared by the Consultant depict equipment design intent only. It is the

responsibility of the foodservice equipment sub-contractor to prepare shop drawings in conjunction with the Consultants' drawings, specifications, mechanical and electrical data, details and other information. The Foodservice Equipment Sub-contractor shall be responsible to coordinate all shop drawings with Architectural and Engineering plans, as built site conditions and the work of all relevant Sections.

.4 Identify and explain any variation in the shop drawings that do not adhere to the original

specifications or details. Advise the Consultant in writing of any conditions that would limit or adversely affect the design intent.

.5 Ensure that all component parts and assemblies of each piece of equipment will support the

loads anticipated without detriment to function, safety or appearance.

.6 Prepare shop drawings on the same size sheet as plans and elevations, in a scale of not less than 1:50 for plans and 1:10 for details and sections so as to clearly illustrate the construction and arrangement of equipment.

.7 Prepare fully dimensioned "roughing-in" and final connection point drawings for mechanical

and electrical services. Separate mechanical and electrical, or combined drawings, may be submitted. In either case, drawings must be a minimum of 1:50. Include walk-in and fire suppression schematics and any pertinent installation diagrams including dimensioned "sleeving" drawing.

.8 “Rough-in” and “final connection point drawings” must include a list of symbols for each type of

connection and must show the location of connections on equipment as well as the location of the rough-in point for all mechanical and electrical services. Both connections to the equipment and the rough-in point must be dimensioned so as to show the relative distances from grid lines or architectural wall reference points as well as the height above the finished floor.

.9 Verify the energy requirements for any piece of equipment that is being supplied by the Owner

or is existing and being reused. Incorporate this information into the shop drawings, "rough-in" and connection point drawings.

.10 Base, curb and depression drawings including low walls, cut-outs and openings must be fully

dimensioned and drawn at 1:50 scale.

.11 Submit equipment data sheets and shop drawings in the following order: 1. Catalogue cuts and illustrations. 2. Plan lay out drawing with mechanical and electrical "roughing-ins"and "connection points" 3. "Sleeving" drawing 4. Base, curb and depressions 5. Custom fabricated items

.12 Review of shop drawings is general and applies to design only, it is not intended to serve as a

final check and shall not relieve the Foodservice Equipment Sub-contractor of the responsibility for errors in dimensions, quantity, material or interfacing as required to complete the intent of the design.



.13 All shop drawing submissions shall be checked and signed by a senior member of the firm qualified to evaluate the function and construction necessary.

.14 The Consultant reserves the rights to reject any submissions that do not comply with the

standards noted herein.

.15 After the drawings have been reviewed, provide the number of sets required by the Consultant for distribution. Do not proceed with the fabrication until the drawings have been reviewed by the Consultant.

.16 Prior to manufacture, the Foodservice Equipment Sub-Contractor shall provide a schedule

outlining the proposed manufacture and installation dates for all equipment.

.17 The Foodservice Equipment Sub-contractor shall be responsible to keep one (1) copy of the reviewed shop drawings on the project job site in good order available to all consultants approved.

.18 Examine the drawings and specification of all Sections for any information that may aOFCIct

this work and co-ordinate the architectural and service requirements with other appropriate contractors.

.19 Submit one copies of each shop drawing, quantity of shop drawings to be provided as

required by General Contractor.

.20 All shop drawings must be prepared using AutoCAD. Hand drawn shop drawings will be automatically rejected without review and returned to the Foodservice Equipment Sub-contractor.The Consultant will only perform one (1) subsequent review of re-submitted shop drawings that have been rejected. If shop drawings are rejected in whole a second time, the Consultant will proceed to prepare the shop drawing and the costs including fees and disbursements will be deducted from the Foodservice Equipment Sub-Contractor’s contract amount.

.21 “Rough-in” and connection point drawings will not be reviewed unless the catalogue cuts and

illustrations are submitted first. 1.5 CATALOGUE CUTS AND ILLUSTRATIONS

.1 All manufactured items being purchased by the Foodservice Equipment Sub-Contractor

must be illustrated by catalogue cuts and data sheets.

.2 Submit one (1) set of illustration/cuts bound in booklet form for review. Sheets are to be in numerical order, properly labelled with the name of the project and accompanied by a lead sheet with an itemized list of contents. The lead sheet must include the project name, the name of the General Contractor (if applicable), the name of the Foodservice Equipment Sub-Contractor, the item number, the manufacturers name and model number, all options and accessories included as well as mechanical and electrical service requirements.

.3 Ensure that the equipment suits the space allocations and the intent of the design.

.4 After the illustrations have been reviewed, provide the required number of sets for

distribution. 1.6 DRAWINGS AND SITE DIMENSIONS

.1 In addition to preparing shop drawings illustrating custom fabricated equipment or

assemblies, the Foodservice Equipment Sub-contractor shall be responsible to prepare a



set of final plan layouts of the foodservice equipment included in the UTM Site. These final plan layouts are to include:

.2 1:50 final plan drawings of the food service equipment drawings, on AutoCad version

2008 or later;

.3 Finalized itemized list of food equipment by component and functional area indicating item number, quantity, manufacturer, model number, etc. for all new and relocated existing equipment;

.4 Detailed schedule of the mechanical, electrical and structural requirements for new and

re-used existing equipment with connection size information; and

.5 Depression and curb layout drawings.



2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

.1 All equipment supplied under this contract shall be made of the best grade materials and with first class workmanship and shall be in strict accord with the Drawings and Specifications.

.2 The specifications attached hereto shall be considered the minimum acceptable standard and all equipment supplied shall be within the intent of approved shop drawing and specification.

.3 Unless otherwise specified in the Itemized List of Equipment, fabricated equipment referred to as "stainless steel" shall incorporate the materials listed in 2.2 wherever necessary.

.4 Trademarks and labels, including applied trademarks and labels are not acceptable in the finished work, except those required for operating instructions.

2.2 MATERIALS

.1 Materials for fixed surfaces shall be impervious to moisture, corrosion resistant, smooth and able to withstand regular cleaning and sanitizing.

.2 Stainless steel, denoted by the abbreviation "s.s." in this specification shall be ASTM-

A167-81A, (18-8 Analysis) type 304 cold rolled and annealed, No. 4 finish one side, 180 grit finish free of buckles, pits, warps and imperfections. Ensure that direction of grain matches throughout units.

.3 Stainless steel tubing shall be 304, seamless and welded, No. 4 finish, 38mm sq. for all

legs and bracing.

.4 Nuts, bolts, screws, washers and other fastenings shall be type 304 stainless steel.

.5 Galvanized steel sheet, generally referred to as Satincoat; zinc coated, 380 gms/sq. m. Where such material is used as an exposed surface, it shall be finished with one (1) coat of primer and two (2) coats of air dry enamel, silver gray unless otherwise specified.

.6 Structural steel shall be new material, conforming to recognized standards, grade 300W,

cleaned and primed.

.7 Gauges of material refer to U.S. Standard Gauges.

.8 Plywood to be Douglas Fir, minimum 5 ply construction conforming to CSA 0121, good two (2) sides, waterproof where required.

.9 Gauges are as follows:

1.0 mm - 20 ga. 1.2 mm - 18 ga. 1.6 mm - 16 ga. 2.0 mm - 14 ga. 3.0 mm - 12 ga.



2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

.1 Electrical parts supplied under this Section shall be compatible with materials specified for use on this project. Refer to Division 26. Receptacles shall have stainless steel cover plates and screws. Cords and caps shall be approved type, matching the receptacles for which they are intended, whether or not such receptacles are supplied by the Foodservice or Refrigeration Sub-contractor.

.2 Make receptacles, junction boxes and breaker panels easily accessible without

dismantling equipment.

.3 Terminate wiring within equipment at load centre or junction boxes with wires identified by Item No. and load.

.4 Properly rate and ground all receptacles.

.5 Supply load centres with bolt on "qwik-gard" type circuit breakers properly rated and

identified. Include two (2) 20 amp. spare breakers. Face of panel shall be easily accessible behind stainless steel hinged door of a compartment that must be insulated from local heat.

.6 Equip 3-phase motors with magnetic starters with thermal overload protection on each of

the three phases.

.7 Equip single-phase motors of fractional horsepower rating and those ranging up to and including .746 Kw with manual starters with overload protection. Motors rated over .746 Kw must have magnetic starter with overload protection.

.8 Control circuits to be 120 V maximum.

.9 Provide all lighting fixtures for designated equipment with colour corrected lamps and

controls or switches wired to an easily accessible common junction box for power connection.

.10 Fit all portable and mobile electrical equipment with cord and plug suited for the electrical

characteristics and outlets specified for the equipment. Include grounding conductor in the cord.

2.4 PLUMBING COMPONENTS

.1 Plumbing components supplied under this section shall be compatible with materials

specified for use on this project. Refer to Division 22.

.2 All control valves and faucets, pipe fittings, waste and tail pieces etc., must be brass chrome plated, bright finish, new, best quality and comply with applicable codes.

.3 Valve handles must be of non-conductive materials.

.4 Faucets, Delta Commercial, Inlet Size 12mm IPS.

• Deck Mount, Delta Model 26C3134, Inlet centres 203mm, Spout 203mm, 279mm, or Gooseneck.

• Splash Mount, Delta Model 28C4444, Inlet centres 203 mm, Spout 203mm or 279mm. • Provide wrist action handle on all faucets unless specified otherwise.

.5 Pre-Rinse units, Pot Sink, 13mm IPS Fisher Model No. 2311-WB, complete with add-on

faucet and all attachments including wall bracket and 16” riser.



.6 Wastes, 38mm or 51mm IPS. • Centre type, with removable basket strainers and tailpiece, Specialty • Hardware model P1. • Rotary type stainless steel, Specialty Hardware DSS8000 with strainer. • Corner type, with stainless steel overflow, removable strainer and tailpiece.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS

.1 Casters to be Darnell, Colson, Kilian or Jarvis black neoprene non-marking rubber tired,

60 shore hardness, doughnut shaped, ball bearing, equipped with brakes as noted, sized to suit specific usage, zinc finished. Plate type shall be securely bolted to frame. Shank casters shall be threaded type c/w bushing. Bushing shall be welded and upright. Bolts, nuts and lock washers shall be stainless steel. All casters supplied shall be made by the same manufacturer. Casters shall be supplied on each unit to suit its particular application so that is runs freely and handles easily, minimum of 4" diameter and 200 lbs. capacity per caster.

.2 Bumpers shall be Colson #6915 for wrap around type set into stainless steel channel and #6927 for corner type c/w a 1.6mm s.s. exterior casing. Secure bumpers on equipment at identical height and seal any exposed gap.

.3 Garbage containers shall be yellow Rubbermaid #2620 complete with lid and #2623 Dolly or as specified.

.4 Cutting boards shall be white thermoplastic polyethylene, with a hardness of 65-70 durometer and all surfaces polished, as supplied by Rubbermaid Products Inc., Johnson Plastics or approved equal.

.5 All sealants shall be one-part silicone type, tackfree in less than one hour with complete cure achieved to 6mm depth in less than 24 hours. Sealant must not significantly alter its properties when set.

.6 Sealant to remain flexible and resistant to damage from all normal environments of a commercial kitchen. It must not support the growth of bacteria, mould or fungi or disColour.

.7 Sealant to be clear or as required to suit colour of surrounding materials.

2.6 HARDWARE

.1 Handles that are an integral part of doors shall be Component Hardware Model P44-1010 full grip stainless steel pulls.

.2 Handles that are an integral part of drawers shall be Component Hardware Model P44-1010 full grip stainless steel pulls.

.3 Catches shall be Component Hardware Model M32-2401, concealed magnetic catch with a 30 lb. pull.

.4 Door track hardware shall be Component Hardware Model B57-0144.

.5 Door guides shall be Component Hardware Model B62-1093 or equal.

.6 Door stops shall be Component Hardware Model B60-1086 or equal.

.7 Front door by-passing door locks shall be Component Hardware Model B58-5513 for non-heated cabinets and B58-5511 for heated cabinets.

.8 Back door by-passing door locks shall be Component Hardware Model B58-5523 for non-heated cabinets and B58-5521 for heated cabinets.

.9 Swing door hinge for refrigerator doors shall be Component Hardware Model R42-2840.

.10 Refrigerator door hardware: Self closing, heavy duty stainless steel offset pivot hinges with magnetic gaskets and 430 stainless steel door frame and tamper proof cylinder locks and two (2) keys per lock.

.11 Stainless steel drawer slides: Component Hardware Model S52 series for standard and refrigerated units.

.12 Drawer locks: Component Hardware Model P30 series, stainless steel face (drawers shall not be keyed alike). Supply two (2) keys per lock and hand over to the Owner or Consultant.



.13 Provide locks on all doors and drawers. Key each section of the foodservices areas with a diOFCIrent series of locks, two (2) keys per lock.

.14 Casters shall be cadmium plated, steel disc cushion non-marking rubber tired wheels with adjustable cup and cone ball bearings. Caster swivel with two rows of ball bearings running in hardened raceways. Capacity per caster, minimum 100 kg. All stem casters with expanding type fittings of size to suit tube. Plate casters mounted with stainless steel bolts and lock washers for easy replacement. All casters on mobile equipment lubricated for efficient use in varied temperatures of kitchen, walk-in refrigerators and freezers. Casters on mobile equipment equipped with cart-washable casters with grease nipples to assure adequate watertight lubrication.

.15 Pilaster strips, stainless steel 20mm wide with 13mm adjustment.

.16 Clips for shelves shall be die formed stainless steel.

2.7 WELDING

.1 All welding shall conform to the requirements of CSA specifications and be performed by fabricators who are approved by the Canadian Welding Bureau and CSA specifications. Exposed welds shall be filed or ground smooth and flush and polished to match surfaces. All exposed welds shall be continuous.

.2 Electric seamless welding shall utilize low carbon filler rod, coated with non-carbonaceous flux, with sufficient chromium and nickel so that the deposited metal and the original metal have the same composition.

.3 Welds shall be free from pits, cracks, discolouration and other imperfections.

.4 Welded joints shall be butt fitted, properly jigged, continuous, ground smooth and polished for both exposed conditions as well as unexposed welds on underside of equipment.

.5 Where soldering is desirable, it shall be made with tin-lead solder. In no case shall soldering be relied upon for the stability of the seam or joint. Soldering shall serve only as a filler to prevent leakage and shall not be considered as a replacement for welding or brazing.

.6 Butt joints made by spot welding or riveting straps under seams and filling with solder, puddled welds and exposed screws are not acceptable.



2.8 FABRICATION

.1 Before fabrication commences, check all dimensions and conditions at the building site, including means of access into and through the building to the area where equipment is to be set in place, for all conditions aOFCIcting the delivery and installation of the equipment.

.2 Fix and assemble work in the shop wherever possible. Execute the work in accordance

with details and shop drawings that have been reviewed and accepted by the Consultant. Where complete or final shop fabrication is not possible, make a trial assembly in the shop prior to delivery.

.3 Workmanship shall be of the best grade modern shop and field practice for the

manufacturers who specialize in this work.

.4 Fabricate and erect work square, plumb, straight and accurately fitted. Provide adequate reinforcing and anchorage in all places.

.5 Insulate where necessary to prevent electrolysis.

.6 All drillings to be reamed and exposed edges left clean and smooth.

.7 All straight lengths shall be one piece throughout, with all seams, including field joints,

continuously welded. Radiused corners must be welded and polished to match original finish.

.8 Conceal joints and connections wherever possible. Intermediate joints between supports

are not acceptable.

.9 Machine dressed work and finished work shall be free from drag, feathers or roughness of any kind. Remove machine marks by sanding

.10 Pop rivets shall not be used unless clearly noted on shop drawings, and then only if such

drawings have been reviewed and accepted by the Consultant.

.11 The methods of construction, reinforcement and anchorage, as well as details of finish, fitting and jointing, and other data indicated on shop drawings shall be accurately followed. No deviations from shop drawings that have been reviewed and accepted will be permitted during the construction of equipment or installation.

.12 The gauge of metal and methods of construction shall in all cases be adequate for the

various conditions to be met, with the requirements of the design details and Specifications considered as minimum. Finished equipment shall be rigid when assembled and installed.

.13 All fastenings and fittings shall be stainless steel, type 304 unless otherwise specified. All

bolts and screws shall have truss heads or flat heads that are properly countersunk, at exterior and interior surfaces that are normally visible. Concealed fastenings shall be used throughout, unless otherwise approved by the Consultant.

.14 Sheet material for counter tops, tables, shelves and similar forms shall be straight lengths,

in one continuous sheet if not over 3 metres long.

.15 Make provisions in the equipment for proper installation of services and connections. Cut and patch only when necessary. The completed installation shall be properly finished without rough edges or exposed openings.

.16 Allow for expansion and contraction of materials.



.17 Obtain samples and confirm sizes of trays, racks, pans and china to determine the exact

requirements for openings in equipment. 2.9 CONSTRUCTION

.1 WORKTABLES & COUNTERS

.1 2.0mm stainless steel continuous sheets all welded.

.2 Reinforcing shall be a minimum 3.0mm Satin Coat sub top arranged so that forms

are concealed from normal view. Secure reinforcing to tops with stud welding and appropriate silicone.

.3 Table or counters up to 1800mm in length shall have a minimum of 4 legs.

.4 Tables with sinks shall have a marine edge unless otherwise specified.

.5 Worktable and counters with sink, work tops to slope towards sinks at a slope of

20mm per metre. For dish tables 8mm per metre toward dishwashing machine. Front edge level over full length.

.6 Edges shall be as shown and specified in the standard detail, SD 401.

.7 Kick plates, where specified, shall be of 1.6mm stainless steel and secured to

equipment, easily removable.

.2 TOPS

.1 Stainless steel tops as specified under "Worktables and Counters".

.2 Polyethylene tops (high density types) as distributed by Johnson Plastics. Material is white (all surfaces polished with a hardness of 65 Ä 70 durometer), 19mm thick, non-toxic, with no odour or taste transfer and stain resistant. Top to be reversible and properly supported on stainless steel framework.

.3 Marble tops shall be continuous 25mm thick, white veined and uniform in colour.

Provide "A" type graded marble free of cracks and fractures. Support top on stainless steel framework with lateral cross members and a rubber cushioned under pad at the supports. Polish and seal to protect against acids and oils.

.4 At the request of the owner or consultant, provide samples before commencing

fabrication.



.3 BACKSPLASH

.1 2.0mm stainless steel fully welded. See Standard Detail Sheet SD 401.

.2 Integral section of table or counter top turned up on a 19mm radius to the height specified, then boxed or splayed. Refer to Standard Detail Sheet SD 401.

.3 Enclose, fill and weld all exposed ends and back. Exposed backs at upturns and

splash backs shall be faced with 1.2mm stainless steel back panel to bottom of splash back. Such panels shall be removable as required for access to mechanical and electrical parts. Secure backsplash to wall by hanging backsplash on galvanized "Z-bar”, anchored to wall. Seal backs to wall with clear silicone.

.4 LEGS AND BRACING

.1 1.6mm stainless steel wall, 41mm O.D. tubular.

.2 Provide framework for table tops to maintain a height of 900mm above finished

floor.

.3 Leg spacing maximum 1600mm apart, 760mm front to back.

.4 Bullet feet, Component Hardware Model A10-0851. When table has service connections, dowel and secure to floor using Component Hardware Model A10-0854. Secure only one set of feet when bridging a structural expansion joint.

.5 Braces shall be continuously welded to legs, polished with minimum reduction in

volume.

.6 Cross brace legs in pairs and longitudinal brace at front, centre or back to suit requirements. All set at 250mm above floor.

.7 Legs shall be continuously welded to s.s. saddles of inverted U shape 100mm

wide x 20mm deep x 2.75mm. Flanges angled back or rounded at each end.

.5 OVER-CUPBOARDS

.1 1.2mm stainless steel all welded

.2 Top sloped at 30 deg., end gables boxed and bottom shelf fixed.

.3 Intermediate and adjustable shelves as specified under "Shelving".

.4 Doors as specified under "Doors" section.

.5 Secure units to wall with stainless steel fastenings.



.6 SHELVING

.1 1.6mm stainless steel all welded construction.

.2 Boxed edges on all four (4) sides. Notch corners to fit contour of legs as required for work tables.

.3 Shelves with sides or backs shall be turned up 50mm and set to backs or folded if

away from walls.

.4 Shelves shall be easily removable and in sections capable of being pulled out through a single door opening.

.5 Over shelves to be boxed with backs set to walls and secured with stainless steel

tubular brackets.

.6 Wire shelves to be 5mm O.D. on 25mm centres, set in a 10mm O.D. perimeter frame either stainless steel or heavy duty chrome plated finish as specified.

.7 Provide a removable bottom shelf in any counter or table set on an enclosed base

with mechanical and electrical services.

.8 Removable bottom shelf in counters or tables with sink for access to clean-out valve on trap.

.7 ANGLE SLIDES

.1 1.6mm stainless steel construction

.2 Slides shall be of 50mm x 50mm section, length to suit. Leading corners rounded,

fully welded to supports on vertical edge (for fabrication) or secured by no less than four (4) s.s. screws (for millwork)

.3 Round exposed corners and provide back stops. Mount units in key hole slots to

ease cleaning and removal.

.4 Back stops to be provided to limit travel.

.5 Verify tray, pan or basket size to ensure accurate fit.

.8 DRAWERS

.1 Front shall be double pan construction with insulation equal to cabinet body. Where drawer fronts are shown to have a plastic laminate finish, the double pan construction shall be reversed so that the plastic laminate is contained by the outer edges of the back pan.

.2 Frames shall be 1.6mm stainless steel channel, welded to drawer front.

.3 Pulls shall be formed of stainless steel and welded onto the top edge of drawers;

profile shape and size as indicated on the Drawings. Where such formed pulls are not indicated, recessed pulls shall be used, Component Hardware P63-1012 or approved equal.

.4 Slides for refrigerated cabinets shall be Component Hardware S52 series; for other

drawers Component Hardware S26 series as specified under "Hardware".



.5 All slides to be installed so that drawers are self closing.

.6 Housing of 1.0mm stainless steel fully enclosed for drawers under worktables and open cabinets.

.7 Drawers shall accommodate one plastic pan Component Hardware S80 series or

one stainless steel pan Component Hardware S81 series for 510 x 510 x 125mm insert.

.8 Provide rubber buttons at end of frames to cushion drawer.

.9 SINK BOWL

.1 All of 2.0mm stainless steel integrally welded into table or counter top.

.2 Interior corners radiused 19mm both vertically and horizontally, all welded and

polished. Slope bottom to drain fitting.

.3 Undercoat with sound deadening compound when sinks are not exposed.

.4 Multiple sinks to have 18 ga. stainless steel apron to conceal gap between bowls.

.5 Faucets and drains as specified under "Hardware".

.10 HINGED & SLIDING DOOR

.1 Front and back of 1.6mm stainless steel.

.2 All welded, double pan type 19mm thick sound deadened with fibreglass insulation board.

.3 Hinges for cabinet doors shall be concealed, continuous stainless steel piano type

secured to body with stainless steel screws.

.4 Sliding doors shall be top hung with a stainless steel track mounted above to allow self-closing. Provide nylon rollers with ball bearing centre except for heated cabinets where stainless steel rollers shall be used. Doors must be removable without tools.

.5 Provide rubber buttons to cushion doors.

.11 UNHEATED CABINETS

.1 Stainless steel tops and backsplash. Top edges boxed, backs up and splayed

unless otherwise noted.

.2 1.2 mm stainless steel body.

.3 Door to be hinged or sliding as required.

.4 Stainless steel pilasters for adjustable shelves c/w clips.

.5 1.6 mm stainless steel fixed bottom shelf and removable intermediate shelf.

.6 Legs as specified under "Legs and Bracing"



2.10 PREFABRICATED, INSULATED WALK-IN TYPE REFRIGERATED & FROZEN ROOM ASSEMBLIES

.1 MATERIALS

.1 All walk-in room assemblies to meet The Quebec Building Code requirements for maintaining structural stability in the case of an earthquake.

.2 Stainless steel sheet metal (min. 24 ga): to CSA G1110.6 1968 type 304 with No.

4 finish.

.3 Galvanized steel sheet metal: commercial grade to ASTM A526-M81 with galvanized zinc coating to ASTM A525-M80, designation Z275.

.4 Mild steel: cold rolled sheet to SAE 1010 to 1020 suitably prepared for the

specified finish.

.5 Aluminum sheet metal: utility sheet with "stucco" pattern finish unless otherwise indicated.

.6 Sealant: silicone sealing compound, eg. Dow Corning Silastic 732 RTV silicone

adhesive/sealant.

.7 Asphaltic paint: to CGSB 1-GP-108c, type 1.

.8 Insulation shall be foamed-in-place polyurethane injected into the panels to form a rigid wall without the use of wood or metal structural members. Insulation for panels and screeds: to CAN/ULC-S705.1, Class 3, poured type foamed-in-place CFC free, polyurethane (urethane), 100 mm thick with a minimum rating of R24 and shall be rated as self extinguishing, fire retardant type.

.9 Factory fabricate the exterior and interior walls, ceilings and floor panels using

steel pressure dies and maintain uniformity.

.2 CONSTRUCTION

.1 All pre-fabricated insulated wall and ceiling panels shall bear a stamp indicating ULC approval.

.2 Panel sections shall consist of exterior and interior metal pans with die formed

flanged edges. Section edges shall have a matching tongue and groove profile to ensure self-alignment and to provide a continuous foam-to-foam airtight contact, when panels are locked into place. Flexible vinyl gaskets may be used in addition to the continuous foam-to-foam airtight contact.

.3 Corner panels: built with 12.5mm return.

.4 Silicone between all panel joints to provide a clean finished appearance and to

form air-tight vapour-proof joints. No wood framing to be used in wall or ceiling panels.

.5 Panel sections shall be of modular design, assembled with eccentric locking

devices, or approved equal, actuated from the interior of any of the rooms and enabling sections to be erected within 38mm of any building room, column and ceiling.



.6 Steel for all panels to be painted shall be Satincoat or approved alternative, 0.595mm thick minimum. Paint shall be baked white enamel in two coats. All exterior panels not exposed to normal view to be 0.792mm core galvanized steel.

.7 Door panels shall be insulated and finished as per exterior and interior panels with

a minimum 865 x 1980mm clear door opening. Ensure that doors will close and seal opening.

.8 In-fitting flush hinged type doors (swing as indicated in item description) to fit door

openings, insulated and finished same as panels, complete with 1015 high x 1.6mm thick stainless steel kick plates on both exterior and interior, as well as soft thermoplastic gaskets with magnetic steel core at top and both sides and adjustable rubber wiper gasket at bottom. Gaskets to be oil, fat, water and ultra violet resistant and to be replaceable.

.9 Sliding doors shall have similar construction and the same thermal efficiency as

the insulation wall panels. Finish as specified with 1.6mm stainless steel kick plates on both interior and exterior sides of door.

.10 Supply and install double pane Low E (i.e. argon gas filled) double pane viewing

window, heated Vacuum Pressure Release Valves within pre-fabricated insulated wall panels for walk-in refrigerated room assemblies as indicated on drawings and the itemized portion of this specification. Viewing windows to be 760mm high x 760mm wide and mounted at 1,220mm A.F.F. to the bottom of the viewing window.

.11 Supply and install triple pane Low E (i.e. argon gas filled) double pane viewing

window, heated Vacuum Pressure Release Valves within pre-fabricated insulated wall panels for walk-in frozen room assemblies as indicated on drawings and the itemized portion of this specification. Viewing windows to be 760mm high x 760mm wide and mounted at 1,220mm AFF to the bottom of the viewing window.

.12 Sliding door hardware shall be Fermod complete with locking mechanism. Door

finish as specified.

.13 Door hinges shall be self-closing type, with stainless steel pin and nylon cam-type bearing, of satin finished aluminum.

.14 Latches to match hinges, for opening door by breaking force of trigger-action door

closer and magnetic gasket. Latch to be capable of being locked with padlock and to have safety release handle. Adjustable sliding gasket on the bottom of each door. The magnetic force of the gasket must be sufficient to keep the door closed and airtight.

.15 Foot treadles to match hinges and latches, for opening door without use of hands.

.16 One trigger-action positive door closer, located on exterior, to assist in positive

closing of door.

.17 Anti-condensation heater cables shall be supplied and installed on all walk-in doors at gasket contact area, in snap-on channel, providing sufficient heat to prevent condensation and frost formation. Heaters across sill shall be protected with removable 1.60 stainless steel cover plates or angles. Heaters shall be inter-wired at factory, terminating in a junction box located on top of prefabricated insulated refrigerated and frozen room assemblies, ready for connection by electrical trades.



.18 Provide appropriate number of LED fixtures to ensure a 50 foot/candle (light intensity) at working level.

.19 Where 4’ long double tube LED lights are specified for walk-in type refrigerated

and frozen room assemblies provide CBM AW248 CWHO vapour-proof type fixtures with electronic rapid start low temperature ballasts (-29 C) and standard 120 Volt switches. Double tube 4’ long LED fixtures to operate on 120/60/1. Terminate wiring for lights in junction boxes located on top of the prefabricated insulated refrigerated and frozen walk - in type room assemblies, ready for final connection by electrical trades. Use three way switches if more than one door is specified.

.20 Provide and mount additional light fixtures for rooms with a floor area greater than

80 sq. ft. (7.43 metres square).

.21 Each door panel section shall have on the latch side, approximately 1,676mm above the finished floor, an operating toggle switch and pilot light, inter-wired within the panel to an interior fluorescent vapour proof light fixture complete with light tubes and suspended from ceiling panels.

.22 Wiring shall terminate in a DVR, to control power to fixtures on normal and

emergency power, on top of the prefabricated walk-in room, ready for connection by electrical trades. Use three-way switches if more than one (1) door is specified.

.23 Provide L.E.D. readout thermometers to provide temperature readings from -40 C

to +15 C and mount on latch side of door panel approximately 1,525mm from floor. Cover sensing bulb with protective metal cover, same finish as walk-in.

.24 Two-way pressure relief port shall be installed in freezer door panel and

refrigerator door panels in rooms operating at +2 C or less. Anti-sweat heater cables in frame of port to prevent intake and exhaust ports from freezing. Vent port to be pre-wired within panel.

.25 Where walk-in rooms are floor less, wall panels are to be fastened to screeds in

lieu of floors; 76mm high screeds are to be of similar construction material and insulation to wall and ceiling panels. Screeds are to be installed plumb and level and secured to finished building floor.

.26 Removable closure panels shall be installed from lower edge of erected ceiling

panels to finished building ceiling and cover strips or angles to extend from building floor to ceiling closure panels between exposed ends of walk-in boxes and building wall. Closure panels, cover strips or angles to match finish of exposed exterior wall panels. Provide removable ventilation panels in front of each condensing unit.

.27 Supply and installation of bumpers on all exposed interior and exterior walls as

indicated on drawings.

.28 Supply and installation of a 1.6 mm stainless steel protective plate 300mm high at 100mm above the finished floor, No. 4 finish all around the interior of each prefabricated refrigerated or frozen storage room. Factory mount a 1.3mm galvanized steel reinforcement in the interior of the prefabricated walls.

.29 Supply and installation of 2.8mm stainless steel corner guards 150mm x 150mm x

1830mm H on all exposed exterior and interior corners.



.30 Openings through walls or ceilings for electrical, plumbing or refrigeration lines must be sleeved, fit with grommets and sealed with an approved sealant.

.31 Ceiling panel supports must be anchored to the structural steel and not to the floor

deck above.

.32 Prefabricated walk-in refrigerated and frozen storage rooms covered under this section of the specification shall be fabricated to comply with Canadian Standards Association. The CSA label shall be affixed to the interior door jamb.

2.11 MECHANICAL REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS

.1 Supply and installation of all mechanical refrigeration equipment and controls for

refrigerators, freezers, blast chillers and freezer and tempering rooms to form a complete and functional system consisting of but not limited to: - scoll compressor/parallel compressor pack/condensing unit-air or water cooled,

as specified - automatic water regulator valve (on water cooled condensing units only if

specified) - evaporator/cooling coil c/w electric defrost heaters in all

refrigerator and freezer evaporator coils - automatic water valve on water-cooled condensing units - room thermostat

- thermostatic expansion valve(s) - liquid line sight glass - dehydrator filter/drier - solenoid valve - thermostat - dual pressure control - time clock (for defrost cycle in refrigerators and freezers), time

activated and temperature terminated - evaporator coil drain line heaters - contactor (where applicable) - fused disconnect switch (where applicable) - service valves

.2 The K.E.C. shall supply all products, materials and labour necessary to provide a

complete operating mechanical refrigeration system capable of meeting the cooling demands of, but not limited to, all refrigerated and frozen storage rooms, designated refrigerated preparation/assembly rooms, and freezing systems, tempering rooms. Parallel compressor pack(s) and/or compressors shall be located in the mechanical room with the capacity to accommodate all of the evaporator coils located in the refrigerated and frozen storage rooms, preparation or assembly rooms, tempering rooms as well as any air handlers. The system shall also include an existing roof top evaporative condensor(s) sized to suit the BTU cooling requirements that meet the specifications of the parallel pack(s) and/or individual compressors.

.3 Each individual mechanical refrigeration system shall be sized by the Foodservice

Refrigeration Sub-Contractor to suit the internal space, ambient temperatures and humidity levels of surrounding areas, product type and load, heat infiltration and temperature of incoming product in order to maintain the specified holding temperatures. The Food Service Refrigeration Sub-Contractor must verify all of this information with the Owner and/or the Consultant during the bidding period. Equipment sizes specified are to be used as a guideline only. Should an adjustment in the size of any refrigeration equipment be required, advise the Consultant during the bidding period so that an addendum may be issued.



.4 Design compressor and coil capacity on a 16 to 18 hour day compressor operation in 32.8 C ambient temperature maximum.

.5 Design refrigeration equipment for use with Freon R404 for refrigerators and freezers

(high, medium, and low temperature applications). Refrigeration equipment for use with Freon R22 will not be accepted.

.6 All condensing units 3/4 H.P. or greater if specified shall be Semi-Hermetic complete with

motor, water cooled condenser, receiver, compressor, suction and discharge valves, oil separator, high/low pressure controls and all other necessary components mounted in a flexible manner on a common base with all service valves and controls readily accessible and easily serviceable.

.7 Evaporator (coil) to be forced convection unit cooler type, suspended from ceiling panels.

Forced air discharge to be parallel to ceiling. Air circulation motor, multi-fin with tube type coil and grill to be assembled within protective housing. Expansion valve, with strainer, heat exchanger inlet and outlet service valve connections also to be contained within housing.

.8 Construct evaporator entirely of non-corrosive materials. Air circulation motors to be life

time sealed and entire unit-cooler assembly readily accessible for cleaning.

.9 Evaporator (coil) shall be equipped with mounting brackets, stainless steel drip pan, drain connection and required controls for a safe and satisfactory operation.

.10 Mechanical refrigeration systems used for both refrigerator and freezer applications shall

have an automatic electric system for defrosting including heaters and time control. Defrost to be time initiated and temperature terminated with built in fail-safe control and fan delay switch.

.11 Thermostatic type expansion valves, all metal, moisture proof with gas charged bulb

clamped to suction end of evaporator (coil). Freezers with 10 P.S.I. expansion valves.

.12 Equip each prefabricated walk-in refrigerated or frozen storage room and refrigerated preparation/assembly rooms with a room thermostat to control solenoid valve. Mount solenoid valves on liquid lines, close to the cooling unit to control flow of refrigerant.

.13 Remote condensing units, compressors or parallel compressor packs in mechanical

rooms shall be mounted on 38 x 38mm (1 1/2" x 1 1/2") angle iron racks, welded, primed and painted with black enamel or on concrete pads as specified.

.14 Mount components for each system, as specified herein, in a neat and orderly

arrangement. Identify the system being serviced with a permanent stencilled label as well as a second permanent label identifying the name and address of the service agency responsible for servicing and warranty work. Show dates of installation and end of warranty period.

.15 Compressors

under 1/2 hp - 120/1/60 service 1/2 hp to 3/4 hp - 208/1/60 service 1 hp - 208/3/60 service 2 hp and over - 600/3/60 service

.16 Provide a contactor for each three (3) phase motor and an ON/OFF switch, rated for the

hp served, for each single (1) phase motor.



.17 Mount all disconnect switches in an accessible location and clearly identified as to compressor served. Multiple disconnect switches shall be banked together.

.18 Condensate drain lines from evaporators (coils) shall be installed by the K.E.C. The

Foodservice Contractor shall supply and install the necessary drain line heater cable from freezer drain lines. Co-ordinate drain pitch to ensure a fall of 25mm in 610mm. Wrap all condensate drain lines with insulated, white PVC covering.

.19 Install a PVC sleeve in the walk-in refrigerator wall where any pipe passes through. The

sleeve shall be larger than the penetrating pipe to allow for a "permagum" packing and vapour seal.

.20 All refrigeration piping shall be type "L" copper tubing hard drawn with "silfos" brazed

joints, verified free of leaks. Completely dehydrate piping before charging with refrigerant.

.21 Joints at equipment on lines 16mm O.D. and smaller shall be made with flareless compression fittings, Swagelock or Metric "Hy-Seal". Joints on lines larger than 16mm O.D. shall be wrought copper solder joint fitting, with adaptor fittings where screwed connections are necessary.

.22 Installation of piping shall conform to applicable requirements of ANSI code for Pressure

Piping, Section on "Refrigeration Piping" and CSA Standard for "Mechanical Refrigeration Code". Refrigerant piping to obtain a pressure drop of less than 23 kPa per 50 metres in suction lines and 47 Kpa per 50 metres in liquid lines. To increase the velocity and assure proper oil return, install smaller diameter vertical risers on suction lines.

.22 All new refrigerant piping is to be pressure tested with dry nitrogen and properly

evacuated before recharging with refrigerant.

.23 All refrigerant piping shall be properly identified as to service and direction of flow.

.24 Valves shall be packless type designed and selected for R404 refrigerant. R22 refrigerant will not be accepted.

.25 Insulate suction lines with 16mm thick Armaflex, 19mm thick on freezer system; or

approved equivalent fire retardant pipe covering, installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Tape liquid and suction lines together.

.26 Testing and evacuation procedure shall conform to ANSI B31.5 and test pressure shall be

in accordance with CSA Code.

.27 Evacuation shall be accomplished by the use of a vacuum pump to ensure removal of all moisture and non-condensable gases.

.28 Provide all refrigerant required for charging and placing the system in proper operation.

Charging shall be done through a new filter dryer and completed by a licensed refrigeration contractor.



2.12 EXHAUST VENTILATORS AND HOODS

.1 The basic requirements of the design, unit to be self-contained, air moving devices, fire suppression systems, and auxiliary equipment shall be supply and installed in accordance to the current edition of the NFPA-96 and NFPA-17a, and ULC standard ULC-S646-98.

.2 Fabricate hoods of 1.25 mm stainless steel type 304, No. 4 finish with joints and seams

fully welded and liquid tight.

.3 Lights shall be LED recessed vapour type fixtures c/w bulbs. 2.13 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

.1 The basic requirements for the design, installation and use of a pre-engineered fire

suppression system shall be governed by the current edition of the NFPA-17a, NFPA-96, ULC listed, and acceptable to the local authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 The exhaust ventilator or hood manufacturer shall supply a wet chemical fire suppression

system as specified in the itemized specification.

.3 The exhaust ventilator hood manufacture shall provide a pre-piped fire suppression system with full coverage in each hood, plenum and duct collar. Each fire suppression drop shall extend from the roof of the hood and shall be chrome plated or stainless steel pipe or sleeve. The complete coverage of each hood will allow appliance(s) to be relocated and/or removed and/or added to any hood without requiring any changes to the overall capacity of the Wet chemical fire suppression system or re-location of the fire suppression drops. (Exception: Appliances requiring specific nozzle location per the ULC listing. i.e. Salamander Broiler, Upright broilers)

.4 The exhaust ventilator or hood manufacturer shall provide Fusible Link type detector(s)

factory installed in each hood and wired to a common junction box on top of each hood. The Fusible Link detectors and common J-boxes shall be accessible from the underside of the hood. The quantity and location of the Fusible Link detectors shall be in accordance with the ULC listing and the authority having jurisdiction.

.5 A fire condition shall cause the system to automatically discharge above the hazard areas

and extinguish the fire.

.6 On discharge of the system, all fuel and power to cooking equipment shall be shut off automatically by means of a mechanical gas valve for gas equipment and/or under voltage shunt trip for electrical equipment.

.7 Shunt trips shall be supplied, installed and wired by the Electrical Division.

.8 During a fire condition, water wash ventilators shall have their wash system activated and

operational until the system is manually reset.

.9 Provide mechanical, remote fire pull stations at the kitchen exit(s).

.10 System discharge nozzles shall have grease caps.

.11 The exhaust ventilator or hood manufacturer shall supply and install all field and factory piping in accordance with the ULC listing of the fire suppression system. Conceal all piping above the roof of the hood whenever possible. All exposed piping to be stainless steel or chrome plated and/or sleeved.



.12 The system shall be installed to the manufacturer’s specifications, by qualified representatives and in strict accordance to all applicable codes.

.13 Supply and installation of the field piping from the hoods to the Piranha Automan(s) shall

be by the hood manufacturer in accordance with the ULC listing. The exhaust ventilator or hood manufacturer to supply all thermostatic detection devices, release mechanisms and other accessories and components to form a complete operational and approved system.

.14 The exhaust ventilator or hood manufacturer to supply the electric manual remote pull

station for the fire suppression system(s) for wiring by the Control Division as required by the local authorities having jurisdiction.

2.14 CONVEYOR SYSTEMS

.1 POWER ROLLER CONVEYOR

.1 Construction

Support structure shall be constructed on 2.0 mm stainless steel side channels c/w stainless steel covers. Drive unit housing located where shown on plan shall be 2.0 mm stainless steel construction and shall be easily accessible for servicing.

.2 Rollers

Rollers shall be 48 mm dia. 1.6 mm stainless steel tubing fitted with self-lubricating acetal bearings. The rollers shall be covered in polyethelene. The rollers shall be mounted between the side channels and no part of the roller extending into the side channels.

.3 Driving System

The rollers shall be mounted 13 mm dia. stainless steel shafts that extend into the side channels through all-plastic self-lubricating bearings. The drive end of the shaft is fitted with an easily replaceable polyethylene sprocket. The sprocket (& shaft) shall be driven by a continuous stainless steel chain that runs on polyethylene wear strips on top and return strands.

.4 Gear Motor

The conveyor gear motor drive shall be totally enclosed, fan-cooled type with corrosion-resistant finish.

.5 Controls

The conveyor shall be controlled by a water-tight panel located under the dish table or any other suitable location where it is easily accessible to maintenance personnel only. The panel contains all required electrical components including magnetic starter with overload protection and necessary fusing.

.6 The conveyor is to be operated by remote start/stop stations located where shown

on plan. Inter-wiring from main control centre to remote panels by the Foodservice Equipment Sub-Contractor.

.7 Operation

The conveyor shall operate as a low pressure accumulation system. Rollers shall turn independently of sprocket and shaft combination.



.2 GRAVITY ROLLER

.1 Rollers Rollers shall be 48mm dia. blue PVC fitted with polypropylene bearings with stainless steel balls. Rollers shall be spaced at approximately 100 mm centres and where conveyor turns a corner, each roller shall consist of two separate rollers on a common shaft.

.2 Shafts

Shafts shall be 11 mm hex. aluminum securely bolted to side rails. “Floating axles” shall not be permitted.

.3 Guide Rails

Guide rails to be 2.5 mm X 50 mm stainless steel supported on 12 mm dia. “pins” secured to sides of conveyor bed. Rails to be made in approximately 1200 mm lg. sections to allow conveyor to be lifted out of bed for cleaning purposes.

.4 Conveyor Bed (Drip Pan)

Provide 2.0 mm stainless steel conveyor bed/drip pan under conveyor supported on 40 mm dia. stainless steel legs and rails and adjustable stainless steel bullet feet.

.5 Conveyor bed to be properly pitched to allow baskets to roll freely from powered

section to dishwasher.

.6 Hinged Gate Provide a 900 mm lg. hinged gate at entrance to dish machine. Gate to be equipped with an adjustable, off-centre counter weight to enable the gate to be raised with little effort by one person and remain safely in the raised position without the need for dead-bolts, latches or locking devices. Gate shall be slightly over-balanced to allow it to remain in the “down” position after lowering.

2.15 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS

.1 The following numbers correspond to those on the Foodservice Equipment Drawings.

.2 Where a manufacturer's name and model number is indicated, the item shall be supplied with all standard components, features and materials whether specifically identified or not, and shall be considered inherent in this specification.

.3 Items identified as custom fabricated shall be constructed of stainless steel unless otherwise specified. Refer to detail drawings at the end of this section for general fabrication methods for all items.

.4 Verify mechanical and electrical services on owner supplied equipment.

.5 Approved alternative manufactures must supply a product that is equal in performance to the specified item.

.6 The following items specification for the Main Kitchen, Servery and Cafe.



ITEM NO. 1.000A: TRASH BIN W/ DOLLY Quantity: Four (4) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: Rubbermaid or equivalent by Brute Model: FG262000GRAY Components:

• Manufacturer’s standard components. • Complete with model 2640 dolly. • Complete with lid. • Colour – gray.

ITEM NO. 1.000B: WASTE BIN W/ DOLLY Quantity: Two (2) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: Rubbermaid or equivalent by Brute Model: FG354100GRAY Components:

• Manufacturer’s standard components. • Complete with model 1968468 dolly. • Complete with lid 2674. • Colour – gray.

ITEM NO. 1.001: CART, UTILITY Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: METRO or equivalent by HATCH Model: MW208 Components:

• Manufacturer’s standard components. ITEM NO. 1.002: PLATFORM RECEIVING CART Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: EAGLE or equivalent by HATCH Model: 1202 Components:

• Manufacturer’s standard components. ITEM NO. 1.003: HAND SINK Quantity: Four (4) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: AMERICAN STANDARD Model: ICU SINK STANDARD SQ-0-4437 Components:

• Manufacturer’s standard components.



ITEM NO. 1.004: DOLLY, DISHRACK Quantity: Two (2) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: METRO or equivalent by HATCH Model: DH2020N Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. ITEM NO. 1.005: CONVEYOR TOASTERS Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: HATCO or equivalent by TOASTMASTER Model: TQ-800 Components:

• Manufacturer’s standard components. • Automatic power save mode. • 208/60/1 NEMA 6-20P.

ITEM NO. 1.006: MICROWAVE OVEN Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: AMANA or equivalent by PANASONIC Model: RC17S2 Components:

• Manufacturer’s standard components. • 208/60/1 NEMA 6-20P.

ITEM NO. 1.007: COFFEE BREWER Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: BUNN or equivalent by FETCO Model: 34600.0007 Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Complete with four (4) total TF server DSG2 #42750.0003. • Complete with four (4) total 20201.1201 funnels. • Complete with manufactures recommended water filter system. Filter

system by K.E.C. and installed by mechanical division. K.E.C. to coordinate with mechanical division interconnection to filter station.



ITEM NO. 1.007A: WATER FILTER Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: BUNN or equivalent by FETCO Components:

• Included in spec for 1.007. ITEM NO. 1.008: S.S. TABLE W/SINK Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Nominal size: 4,000mm long x 760mm wide x864mm high Type: Custom fabricated s/s construction in accordance with the

specification for this section. Components:

• 14 ga. s.s. top with dished and boxed edge as per Detail 400. • Full length 150mm high x 50mm wide integral splash at back, splayed to wall. • One (1) 406mm wide x 508mm long x 300mm deep sinks complete with T&S

Brass B-0231-CR-K-F10 splash mount mixer faucet, swing spout and s.s. apron. Sink edge to be notched to suit lay-in cutting boards over each sink with a space between front and back edge of the sink and edge of cutting board. KEC to provide set of 4 colour coordinated San Jamar cutting board and rack.

• Complete with solid base and intermediate shelves on left side. • 3 drawer lockable unit in centre as per detail 402. • Open section in base to suit under counter equipment. Note this section to

have a flat bar at the back so equipment is flush with front edge. • Legs and brace sets as required. • Secure table to the floor. • Fabricator to verify dimensions on-site prior to fabrication. • KEC to review the size of the elevation and fabricate the table in sections to

suit the size of the elevator prior to fabrication. • Refer to Elevation Drawing QF-300.

ITEM NO. 1.009: S.S. WALL SHELVING Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Nominal Size: 1,200mm long x 300mm wide x three shelving units high Type: Custom fabricated s/s construction in accordance with the specification for this section. Components:

• All s.s. construction. • Triple wall shelves mounted to architectural wall. • Refer to Detail 425B on QF-500. • Refer to elevation on QF-300.



ITEM NO. 1.010: REACH-IN SOLID SWING DOOR FREEZER Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: TRUE or equivalent by BEVERAGE AIR Model: STA1F-1S Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Complete with stainless steel back. • Unit to have field reversible hinge. • Complete with one additional shelf per door.

ITEM NO. 1.011: ICE MAKER Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: HOSHIZAKI or equivalent by FOLLETT Model: KM-340MAJ Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Manufacturer's recommended water filter. • Complete with ice bin B-300PF.

ITEM NO. 1.011A: WATER FILTER Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: HOSHIZAKI or equivalent by FOLLETT Components:

• Included in spec for 1.011.



ITEM NO. 1.012: S.S. TABLE W/ SINK Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Nominal size: 2,300mm long x 760mm wide x914mm high Type: Custom fabricated s/s construction in accordance with the


• 14 ga. s.s. top with dished and boxed edge as per Detail 400. • Full length 150mm high x 50mm wide integral splash at back, splayed to wall. • One (1) 406mm wide x 508mm long x 300mm deep sinks complete with T&S

Brass B-0231-CR-K-F10 splash mount mixer faucet, swing spout and s.s. apron. Sink edge to be notched to suit lay-in cutting boards over each sink with a space between front and back edge of the sink and edge of cutting board. KEC to provide set of 4 colour coordinated San Jamar cutting board and rack.

• Open section in base to suit under counter equipment. Note this section to have a flat bar at the back so equipment is flush with front edge.

• Legs and brace sets as required. • Secure table to the floor. • Fabricator to verify dimensions on-site prior to fabrication. • Refer to Elevation Drawing QF-300.

ITEM NO. 1.013: S.S. WALL SHELVING Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Nominal Size: 1,500mm long x 300mm wide x three shelving units high Type: Custom fabricated s/s construction in accordance with the specification for this section. Components:

• All s.s. construction. • Triple wall shelves mounted to architectural wall. • Refer to Detail 425B on QF-500. • Refer to elevation on QF-300.

ITEM NO. 1.014: INGREDIENT BIN Quantity: Four (4) – By K.E.C. Manufacturer: CAMBRO or equivalent by RUBBERMAID Model: IBSF27 Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Units to be white complete with clear lid.



ITEM NO. 1.015: POT RACK Quantity: Three (3) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: METRO or equivalent by CARI-ALL Model: PR48VX3 Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. ITEM NO. 1.016: HIGH SPEED OVEN Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: MERRYCHEF or equivalent by TURBOCHEF Model: EIKON E3 Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. ITEM NO. 1.017: HOT WATER DISPENSER Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: BUNN or equivalent by FETCO Model: 43600.0002 Components:

• Manufacturer’s standard components. • 208V power. • This item to be connected to water filter station. Filter system by K.E.C. and

installed by mechanical division. K.E.C. to coordinate with mechanical division interconnection to filter station.

ITEM NO. 1.017A: WATER FILTER Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: BUNN or equivalent by FETCO Components:

• Included in spec for 1.017. ITEM NO. 1.018: SPARE NUMBER ITEM NO. 1.019: SPARE NUMBER



ITEM NO. 1.020: WALK IN COOLER Quantity: One (1) – By K.E.C. Nominal Size: 2,280mm wide x 5250mm long x 2,770mm high Manufacturer: CANADIAN CURTIS or equal by NORBEC Operating Temperature: +3 oC Estimated Capacity: 4,000 KG Product Type: Holding refrigerator Components:

• 100mm thick ULC listed prefabricated insulated wall and ceiling panels with a ULC flame spread rating of R34.

• 100mm thick ULC listed prefabricated insulated floor panels complete with reinforcing and an R-value of R34. Floor panel to be installed in the depression prior to concrete topping being poured.

• White baked enamel on all exposed exterior and interior surfaces, galvanized steel on unexposed surfaces.

• Front and back of the room to be equipped with 200mm high vented enclosure panel to allow for ventilation under the room.

• Wall panels to be installed to ensure that front of walk-in room assembly are flush with adjacent architectural wall, supply and install trim pieces as required.

• One (1) right hand hinged door 914mm wide x 2,130mm high complete with heated viewing window and 48” high aluminum tread plate on both sides. Complete with Economax strip curtain and mounting hardware to suit opening. This door is to have the light fixture above the door replaced with a Cooper UX61RWH exit sign. (KEC is to interconnect the wiring from the exit sign to the junction box located above the door)

• One (1) left hand hinged door 914mm wide x 2,130mm high complete with heated viewing window and 48” high aluminum tread plate on both sides. Complete with Economax strip curtain and mounting hardware to suit opening. This door is to have the light fixture above the door replaced with a Cooper UX61RWH exit sign. (KEC is to interconnect the wiring from the exit sign to the junction box located above the door)

• Locking hardware for all doors to be a Keyed 7 pin, cylindrical lockset as well as any fittings necessary to accommodate this installation. Locking hardware to be complete with safety release on door so that they can be unlocked from the inside of the room. Note hardware should be best quality only, substitutions will not be accepted.

• Complete with Kason 1220mm long 1810L2 LED light fixtures (KEC to provide correct number of light fixture to achieve 50 foot/candles) with low temperature quick start ballast and low voltage on/off switch as per Details 315 and 316 on detail drawings. 3-way light switch installed at each door.

• Complete with Kason 1901A light fixtures motion sensor (KEC to provide correct number of sensor to cover entire room).

• Stainless steel sill plate below doors. • Heat tracing on three (3) sides of door. • Complete with 1220mm high Aluminum tread plate bumper on interior and

exterior perimeter and around insulated column of room as per Detail 302. Bumpers to be fastened to walk-in room wall with countersunk s.s. screws. All screws to be covered with a plastic cap, Colour to match bumper. Miter all corners and silicone seal tops and joints.

• Full length vertical trim, finish to match walk-in where gaps exist between walk-in and building walls, columns or other structures as required.



• Removable enclosure panels, finish to match walk-in, from top of walk-in to underside of ceiling as required as per Detail 310 on Drawing No. QF-500.

ITEM NO. 1.021: EVAPORATOR COIL Quantity: One (1) – By K.E.C. Manufacturer: RDT Model: ADT-090 Note: Evaporator coils sized and balanced to match the condensing unit mounted on

the roof and must be capable of maintaining the specified temperature. Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • 120/60/1 • Electronic controller, KE2 temp plus defrost, factory installed • Expansion valve, sporlan txv • Liquid line solenoid valve, sporlan, factory installed • Complete with INTELLIREF V2 + Defrost system. • External junction box. • Complete with vapour proof disconnect switch and wiring to a junction box on

top of room. • Air defrost. • Complete with AC motor. • All evaporator coils shall be circuited to match the actual operating conditions

of the space. • Refrigeration contractor shall be responsible for pulling all electrical from the

unit to a disconnect switch located in the walk-in room, then to a junction box located on top of the room.

• Complete with copper drain line, and insulation as per Detail 328. ITEM NO. 1.022: TEMPERATURE ALARM Quantity: One (1) – By K.E.C. Manufacturer: CURTIS or equivalent by NORBEC Model: KE2 Combo Display Components:

• Complete with KE2-EM35 wireless system. • To be installed on the front exterior of the walk-in room as per Detail 317.



ITEM NO. 1.023: CONDENSER UNIT Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: RDT Model: ZB08KAE/ ZB09KAE OUTDOOR AIR-COOLED REFRIGERATION SYSTEM Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • 208/230/60/3. • Stainless Steel Outdoor Housing with Stainless Steel One Piece Louvers. • Factory Prepiped & Prewired. • Unit Circuit Breaker & Compressor Contactor. • Dual Pressure Control. • Inlet & Outlet Rotolock Valves. • Prewired Control Panel. • OSHA Approved Fan Guard. • Fan Cycle Switch. • Crankcase Heaters. • Suction Filter. • Sight Glass & Filter Drier. • Vibrasorber (for Semi-Hermetic only). • Single Point Electrical Connection For Rack. • UL Approved Superhoses. • Copeland Scroll. • Over sized receiver. • Extended 4 year compressor warranty • Unit to be mounted on top of grade in weather proof housing.

ITEM NO. 1.024: SHELVING Quantity: Two (2) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: METRO or equivalent by CARI-ALL Model: Metro Max Q Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Four (4) Q2154G shelves. (note the bottom shelf to be MetroMax i solid) • Four (4) Q63UPE posts. • Microban coated.

ITEM NO. 1.025: SHELVING Quantity: Ten (11) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: METRO or equivalent by CARI-ALL Model: Metro Max Q Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Four (4) Q2172G shelves. (note the bottom shelf to be MetroMax i solid) • Four (4) Q63UPE posts. • Four (4) 5MPB all swivel casters. • Microban coated.

ITEM NO. 1.026: RACK, UTILITY



Quantity: Two (2) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: METRO or equivalent by CARI-ALL Model: RD78N Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Gray corner bumpers.

ITEM NO. 1.027: SHELVING Quantity: Six (6) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: METRO or equivalent by CARI-ALL Model: Metro Max Q Components:


ITEM NO. 1.028: SHELVING Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: METRO or equivalent by CARI-ALL Model: Metro Max Q Components:


ITEM NO. 1.029: SHELVING W/GRAVITY FED CAN RACK DISPENSERS Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: METRO or equivalent by CARI-ALL Model: MQ2436G Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components.



ITEM NO. 1.030: WALK IN COOLER Quantity: One (1) – By K.E.C. Nominal Size: 2,350mm wide x 5230mm long x 2,770mm high (note irregular shape) Manufacturer: CANADIAN CURTIS or equal by NORBEC Operating Temperature: +3 oC Estimated Capacity: 4,000 KG Product Type: Holding refrigerator Components:

• 100mm thick ULC listed prefabricated insulated wall and ceiling panels with a ULC flame spread rating of R34.

• 100mm thick ULC listed prefabricated insulated floor panels complete with reinforcing and an R-value of R34. Floor panel to be installed in the depression prior to concrete topping being poured.




• Two (2) left hand hinged door 914mm wide x 2,130mm high complete with heated viewing window and 48” high aluminum tread plate on both sides. Complete with Economax strip curtain and mounting hardware to suit opening. This door is to have the light fixture above the door replaced with a Cooper UX61RWH exit sign. (KEC is to interconnect the wiring from the exit sign to the junction box located above the door)




• Stainless steel sill plate below doors. • Heat tracing on three (3) sides of door. • Complete with 1220mm high Aluminum tread plate bumper on interior and






ITEM NO. 1.031: EVAPORATOR COIL Quantity: One (1) – By K.E.C. Manufacturer: RDT Model: ADT-090 Note: Evaporator coils sized and balanced to match the condensing unit mounted on

the roof and must be capable of maintaining the specified temperature. Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • 120/60/1 • Electronic controller, KE2 temp plus defrost, factory installed • Expansion valve, sporlan txv • Liquid line solenoid valve, sporlan, factory installed • Complete with INTELLIREF V2 + Defrost system. • External junction box. • Complete with vapour proof disconnect switch and wiring to a junction box on

top of room. • Air defrost. • Complete with AC motor. • All evaporator coils shall be circuited to match the actual operating conditions

of the space. • Refrigeration contractor shall be responsible for pulling all electrical from the

unit to a disconnect switch located in the walk-in room, then to a junction box located on top of the room.







ITEM NO. 1.034: WALK-IN FREEZER Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Nominal Size: 2,680mm wide x 2,700mm long x 2,770mm high Manufacturer: RDT or equal by CANADIAN CURTIS Operating Temperature: -10 oF Estimated Capacity: 10,000LB Product Type: Freezer for food distribution Note: Evaporator coils sized and balanced to match the condensing unit mounted on the

roof and must be capable of maintaining the specified temperature.

Components: • 100mm thick ULC listed prefabricated insulated wall and ceiling panels with a

ULC flame spread rating of R34. • 100mm thick ULC listed prefabricated insulated floor panels complete with

reinforcing and an R-value of R34. Floor panel to be installed in the depression prior to concrete topping being poured.






• Complete with Kason 1220mm long 1810L2 LED light fixtures (KEC to provide correct number of light fixture to achieve 50 foot/candles) with low temperature quick start ballast and low voltage on/off switch as per Details 315 and 316 on detail drawings.


• Stainless steel sill plate below doors. • Heat tracing on four (4) sides of door. • Complete with 1220mm high Aluminum tread plate bumper on interior and






ITEM NO. 1.035: EVAPORATOR COIL Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: RDT Model: LET-075 Note: Evaporator coils sized and balanced to match the compressor and must be

capable of maintaining the specified temperature. Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • External junction box. • Complete with vapor proof stainless steel disconnect switch to match Div 26

specifications and wiring to a junction box on top of room. • Electric defrost timer. • Complete with EC motor. • All coils shall include factory mounted Sporlan TX valves. • All evaporator coils shall be circuited to match the actual operating conditions

of the space. • Isolation valves for all refrigerated fixtures to be supplied and installed by

refrigeration contractor. • Complete with heat exchanger. • Refrigeration contractor shall be responsible for pulling all electrical from the

unit to a disconnect switch located in the walk-in room, then to a junction box located on top of the room. Unit to be powered from the refrigeration condensing unit mounted on the roof. Electrical contractor shall run power from the compressor to this unit in conduit as required.



ITEM NO. 1.037: SPARE NUMBER



ITEM NO. 1.038: WALK-IN FREEZER Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Nominal Size: 2,350mm wide x 2,700mm long x 2,770mm high Manufacturer: RDT or equal by CANADIAN CURTIS Operating Temperature: -10 oF Estimated Capacity: 5,000LB Product Type: Freezer for food distribution Note: Evaporator coils sized and balanced to match the condensing unit mounted on the

roof and must be capable of maintaining the specified temperature.

Components: • 100mm thick ULC listed prefabricated insulated wall and ceiling panels with a

ULC flame spread rating of R34. • 100mm thick ULC listed prefabricated insulated floor panels complete with

reinforcing and an R-value of R34. Floor panel to be installed in the depression prior to concrete topping being poured.








• Stainless steel sill plate below doors. • Heat tracing on four (4) sides of door. • Complete with 1220mm high Aluminum tread plate bumper on interior and






ITEM NO. 1.039: TEMPERATURE ALARM Quantity: One (1) – By K.E.C. Manufacturer: CURTIS or equivalent by NORBEC Model: KE2 Combo Display Components:


ITEM NO. 1.040: EVAPORATOR COIL Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: RDT Model: LET-075 Note: Evaporator coils sized and balanced to match the compressor and must be

capable of maintaining the specified temperature. Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • External junction box. • Complete with vapor proof stainless steel disconnect switch to match Div 26

specifications and wiring to a junction box on top of room. • Electric defrost timer. • Complete with EC motor. • All coils shall include factory mounted Sporlan TX valves. • All evaporator coils shall be circuited to match the actual operating conditions

of the space. • Isolation valves for all refrigerated fixtures to be supplied and installed by

refrigeration contractor. • Complete with heat exchanger. • Refrigeration contractor shall be responsible for pulling all electrical from the

unit to a disconnect switch located in the walk-in room, then to a junction box located on top of the room. Unit to be powered from the refrigeration condensing unit mounted on the roof. Electrical contractor shall run power from the compressor to this unit in conduit as required.

• Complete with copper drain line, and insulation as per Detail 329. ITEM NO. 1.041: SPARE NUMBER ITEM NO. 1.042: SPARE NUMBER









ITEM NO. 1.046: SPARE NUMBER



ITEM NO. 1.047: S.S. TABLE W/TWO SINKS Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Nominal size: 3,000mm long x 760mm wide x864mm high Type: Custom fabricated s/s construction in accordance with the


• 14 ga. s.s. top with dished and boxed edge as per Detail 400. • Two (2) 406mm wide x 508mm long x 300mm deep sinks complete with T&S

Brass B-0231-CR-K-F10 splash mount mixer faucet, swing spout and s.s. apron. Sink edge to be notched to suit lay-in cutting boards over each sink with a space between front and back edge of the sink and edge of cutting board. KEC to provide set of 4 Colour coordinated San Jamar cutting board and rack.

• Open section in base to suit under counter equipment. Note this section to have a flat bar at the back so equipment is flush with front edge.

• Full length 150mm high x 50mm wide integral splash at back, splayed to wall. • Two (2) three drawer lockable units on either end as per detail 402. • Legs and brace sets as required. • Secure table to the floor. • Fabricator to verify dimensions on-site prior to fabrication. • Refer to Elevation Drawing QF-300.

ITEM NO. 1.048: EXHAUST HOOD Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: HALTON or equivalent by SPRING AIR Model: KVE Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Furnish and install a complete kitchen exhaust canopy. The hood shall be the

“Capture-Jet” system, Model KVE as manufactured by the HALTON. The canopy shall bear either the ETL or Underwriters Laboratories U.L. label, for listed range hood without exhaust fire damper per standard 710 and be fabricated in compliance with NFPA-96-2001, and shall bear the National Sanitation Foundation seal of approval.

• The installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and conform to NFPA-96 guidelines and all applicable local codes. The size shall be as indicated on QF-400 series of drawings and/or equipment schedule.

• The canopy exposed areas and inner liner shall be 18-gauge type 304 stainless steel with a #4 finish. Each canopy shall have a filter housing of the same material as the canopy liner. The filter housing shall be equipped with a concealed drip tray the full length of the canopy and with a grease cup for easy removal and daily cleaning. All sides to be of double wall construction (single walled hoods not acceptable).

• Provide with listed LED light fixtures suitable and approved for Type I grease hoods. Fixture shall have the following certifications; ETLUS, NSF, UL and NFPA for use in grease exhaust hoods in quantity sufficient to provide a minimum of 50 foot candles at the cooking surface when the front leading edge of the hood is mounted at 1981mm AFF. LED fixture is complete with die cast aluminum junction box with integral heat sink fins for natural heat dissipation. Input voltage of 24dc with a power consumption not to exceed 20 watts. The housing encased 24 LED light emitters with a brightness of



1000 lumens. Junction box to accept standard 13mm NPT fitting. Fixture shall come complete with integral power supply with an input voltage of 108VAC-305VAC and input frequency of 50/60 Hz. Input rating shall be 0.57A @ 120VAC. Fixture shall contain no mercury or lead. (BULB TO BE PROVIDED BY KEC)

• The exhaust airflow will be based on the convective heat generated by the appliances underneath each canopy. Capture and Containment must be validated by and based upon ASTM F1704-05. The elimination of Convective Heat Gain to space must be validated and based upon ASTM F2474-5.

• Hood will include an active internal “Capture-Jet” System that will allow for Capture and Containment of thermal plume at specified air volumes. The Capture Jet air shall be pulled into a 25mm air plenum with the Capture-Jet fan and discharged through Capture-Jet ports that are located along the inside front, side and bottom edge of the hood at discharge velocity of 1800 FPM. Slot type, passive devises or “Short-Cycle” discharge is not acceptable.

• The hood shall be equipped with model KSA multi-cyclone stainless steel grease extractors. The grease extraction efficiency is 93% on particles with a diameter of 5 microns and 98% on particles with a diameter of 15 microns or larger, based upon ASTM F-2519-05 method of test. Sound levels shall be between 40 and 55 NC.

• Manufactures representative shall be present during start-up and commissioning and contacted by KEC when air balance has been completed. Air balance shall be determined by TAB ports located within the hood canopy on either side of the filter bank.

• The air flows through the KSA extractors and the Capture Jet air chamber are to be determined through the integral T.A.B. (Testing and Balancing) ports mounted in the hood. It is the responsibility of the air balancer to adjust the exhaust volumes after installation with a Magnahelic Gauge or Shortridge Digital Anemometer and the hood TAB ports.

• The ventilator shall be complete with a control panel. • Complete with s.s. enclosure panels. • Complete with Fusible link wet chemical surface and duct fire suppression

system installed in accordance with NFPA-17A: • Nozzles and links located to provide full coverage of the,

ventilators/equipment under ventilators, plenums and duct collars. • Wet chemical cylinders and automans mounted on the side of the hood in a

fire protection cabinet complete with stainless steel chase to enclosure top of cabinet to finished ceiling.

• All necessary fire suppression system piping and type K fire extinguisher. • Complete with light switch mounted on the hood. • KEC to review the size of the elevation and fabricate the hood in sections to

suit the size of the elevator prior to fabrication. • Refer to revised drawings for location of suggest joint and revised electrical

and duct connections.



ITEM NO. 1.049: EXHAUST HOOD Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: HALTON or equivalent by SPRING AIR Model: KVE Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Furnish and install a complete kitchen exhaust canopy. The hood shall be the

“Capture-Jet” system, Model KVE as manufactured by the HALTON. The canopy shall bear either the ETL or Underwriters Laboratories U.L. label, for listed range hood without exhaust fire damper per standard 710 and be fabricated in compliance with NFPA-96-2001, and shall bear the National Sanitation Foundation seal of approval.

• The installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and conform to NFPA-96 guidelines and all applicable local codes. The size shall be as indicated on QF-400 series of drawings and/or equipment schedule.

• The canopy exposed areas and inner liner shall be 18-gauge type 304 stainless steel with a #4 finish. Each canopy shall have a filter housing of the same material as the canopy liner. The filter housing shall be equipped with a concealed drip tray the full length of the canopy and with a grease cup for easy removal and daily cleaning. All sides to be of double wall construction (single walled hoods not acceptable).

• Provide with listed LED light fixtures suitable and approved for Type I grease hoods. Fixture shall have the following certifications; ETLUS, NSF, UL and NFPA for use in grease exhaust hoods in quantity sufficient to provide a minimum of 50 foot candles at the cooking surface when the front leading edge of the hood is mounted at 1981mm AFF. LED fixture is complete with die cast aluminum junction box with integral heat sink fins for natural heat dissipation. Input voltage of 24dc with a power consumption not to exceed 20 watts. The housing encased 24 LED light emitters with a brightness of 1000 lumens. Junction box to accept standard 13mm NPT fitting. Fixture shall come complete with integral power supply with an input voltage of 108VAC-305VAC and input frequency of 50/60 Hz. Input rating shall be 0.57A @ 120VAC. Fixture shall contain no mercury or lead. (BULB TO BE PROVIDED BY KEC)

• The exhaust airflow will be based on the convective heat generated by the appliances underneath each canopy. Capture and Containment must be validated by and based upon ASTM F1704-05. The elimination of Convective Heat Gain to space must be validated and based upon ASTM F2474-5.

• Hood will include an active internal “Capture-Jet” System that will allow for Capture and Containment of thermal plume at specified air volumes. The Capture Jet air shall be pulled into a 25mm air plenum with the Capture-Jet fan and discharged through Capture-Jet ports that are located along the inside front, side and bottom edge of the hood at discharge velocity of 1800 FPM. Slot type, passive devises or “Short-Cycle” discharge is not acceptable.

• The hood shall be equipped with model KSA multi-cyclone stainless steel grease extractors. The grease extraction efficiency is 93% on particles with a diameter of 5 microns and 98% on particles with a diameter of 15 microns or larger, based upon ASTM F-2519-05 method of test. Sound levels shall be between 40 and 55 NC.

• Manufactures representative shall be present during start-up and commissioning and contacted by KEC when air balance has been completed. Air balance shall be determined by TAB ports located within the



hood canopy on either side of the filter bank. • The air flows through the KSA extractors and the Capture Jet air chamber

are to be determined through the integral T.A.B. (Testing and Balancing) ports mounted in the hood. It is the responsibility of the air balancer to adjust the exhaust volumes after installation with a Magnahelic Gauge or Shortridge Digital Anemometer and the hood TAB ports.

• The ventilator shall be complete with a control panel. • Complete with s.s. enclosure panels. • Complete with Fusible link wet chemical surface and duct fire suppression

system installed in accordance with NFPA-17A: • Nozzles and links located to provide full coverage of the,

ventilators/equipment under ventilators, plenums and duct collars. • Wet chemical cylinders and automans mounted on the side of the hood in a

fire protection cabinet complete with stainless steel chase to enclosure top of cabinet to finished ceiling.

• All necessary fire suppression system piping and type K fire extinguisher. • Complete with light switch mounted on the hood. • KEC to review the size of the elevation and fabricate the hood in sections to

suit the size of the elevator prior to fabrication. • Refer to revised drawings for location of suggest joint and revised electrical

and duct connections. ITEM NO. 1.049A: CONTROL PANEL W/F.P.S. Quantity: One (1) SYSTEM (to control all hoods) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: HALTON Model: MARVEL II Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Fire protection cabinet mounted on the architectural wall. • Control panel mounted on architectural wall complete with stainless steel

enclosure panels to conceal services from the top on the panel to underside of ceiliing.

• When seismic regulations are applicable, all equipment shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with those regulations. All seismic requirements shall be shown on all submittals. Submit requested information to the agencies and authorities having jurisdiction.

• Refer to FS-400 series of drawings for specification. • Complete with fire protection system. • The control panel supplies a master electrical panel consisting of overload

protection, a main disconnect switch, terminal block wiring and control circuits that are pre-wired and contained in enclosures.

• Unit to be custom programmable demand control system that provides for the complete and independent modulation of exhaust air volumes for each hood sections sharing the common exhaust duct/fan.

• Control panel must control air flow rates, interconnection to fire protection system.

• Each hood section to be provided with a custom programmed controller, IR appliance sensors, pressure transducer, duct temperature sensor, room temperature sensor and automatic listed balancing damper.

• Master control panel utilized Modbus serial communication interface with optional BACnet communication protocol for building automation and control network compatibility all to be ASHRAE, ANSI and ISO standard protocol. Components to be provided with “plug & play” interconnections.

• Exhaust infrared cooking activity sensors to identify the average appliance



surface temperatures and rate of change in either direction. Temperature data is compared to inputs from the other components in order to identify actual cooking activity rather than a simply increase in the exhaust duct temperature. Customized exhaust volume programmed is based on ASTM-1704-05 design criteria for optimal threshold of capture & containment through heat load based design. The M.A.R.V.E.L. system will respond proactively to any change in cooking status when compared to the other component temperature inputs and work in concert on differential temperature readings with communication through the master controller.

• The system to be controlled with 24-hour automated schedule with a manual override function, or the hoods can be automatically regulated based on the appliance status. The system can be monitored and controlled with a standard IP internet link from either a local or remote location. Included 1 year web monitoring of customer defined alarms. (System complies with IMC 2006 Appliance Inter-Lock.)

• Electrical Division will be responsible for wiring between the supplied Halton M.A.R.V.E.L. control panel and the hood mounted sensors. Electrical Division will also be responsible for wiring between the Halton M.A.R.V.E.L. control panel and the VFD’s. Halton to provide inter-connectivity cables between the hoods and associated control panels. Halton shall provide room a temperature sensor. Electrician or appropriate trade shall provide labor to run low voltage and 120/1 wiring cables and required control power per submittal drawings.

• System will require either a DSL modem, IP Address or VPN connection. • A duct mounted temperature sensor only system will not be permitted. A duct

mounted temperature sensor in conjunction with a smoke detector will not be permitted.

• Field start-up to be performed by Halton Authorized Service Agency. • Mechanical gas valves as required for all hoods.

ITEM NO. 1.050: COMBI OVEN Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: RATIONAL or equivalent by CLEVELAND Model: SCC WE 102G Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Safety door lock. • Externally attached core temperature probe. • Complete with mobile stand. • Kitchen management system. • Heat shield for left hand side panel. • Special cleaner tablets and care tabs. • Complete with quick disconnect kit for water and gas c/w regulator, • This item to be connected to water filter station. Filter system by K.E.C. and

installed by mechanical division. K.E.C. to coordinate with mechanical division interconnection to filter station.



ITEM NO. 1.050A: WATER FILTER Quantity: Two (2) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: RATIONAL or equivalent by CLEVELAND Components:

• Included in spec for 1.050 and 1.052. ITEM NO. 1.051: SPARE NUMBER ITEM NO. 1.052: COMBI OVEN, ELEC. Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: RATIONAL or equivalent by CLEVELAND Model: SCC WE 102E Components:

• Manufacturer’s standard components. • 208/3/60 • Safety door lock. • Complete with mobile stand. • Externally attached core temperature probe. • Heat shield for left hand side panel. • Kitchen management system. • Special cleaner tablets and care tabs. • Complete with quick disconnect kit for water, restraining device and

positioning docks for casters • Filter system by K.E.C. and installed by mechanical division. K.E.C. to

coordinate with mechanical division interconnection to filter station. ITEM NO. 1.053: SPARE NUMBER ITEM NO. 1.054: TILT SKILLET Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: CLEVELAND or equivalent by SOUTHBEND Model: SET-15-H Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Perforated Pasta Basket (BS-SET15) • Double Pantry with Swing Spout (DPS). • Faucet Bracket (FBSL) • Poaching Pan (PPR) • Vegetable Steamer (VS) • Stainless Steel Support Stands (ST28) with Sliding Drain Drawer and Splash

Screen • Food Strainer (FS-15-5) • 208/60/3 power



ITEM NO. 1.054A: TILT SKILLET STAND Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: CLEVELAND or equivalent by SOUTHBEND Model: ST28 Components:

• Included in spec for 1.054. ITEM NO. 1.055: INSULATED FOOD CART Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: CAMBRO or equivalent by HATCH Model: UPC800SP Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Complete with two Cam Warmer. • Complete with two Cam Chillers. • Colour to be confirmed prior to fabrication.

ITEM NO. 1.056: S.S. WALL PANEL Quantity: One (1) System – by K.E.C. Nominal size: Refer to drawing QF-200, detail 501 x Height to be from finished floor to

underside of exhaust hood Type: Custom fabricated s/s construction in accordance with the specification for this section. Components:

• 20 ga.25mm thick mineral wool Insulated stainless steel wall paneling sealed to the architectural wall from the top of the finished floor to the underside of the exhaust hood. Panel is to be double wall construction as per detail 501.

• The stainless steel panels are the run the full length of the wall behind the hood.

• Wall panels are to be equal length and to be silicone to the wall and screwed on edges with stainless steel fasteners.

• Edges and fasteners to be concealed with stainless steel “T” strips so that edges and fasteners are concealed and water tight.

• Unit to have stainless steel “Z” strip installed so that the top portion is extended 100mm behind the wall panel. Bottom edges to be concealed with stainless steel “Z” strips so that edges are water tight and extend 38mm over finish floor coving.

• Fabricator to verify dimensions on-site prior to fabrication and allow for services.

• Refer to drawing QF-200 for location of wall panel.



ITEM NO. 1.057: COUNTER MIXER Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: GLOBE or equivalent by HOBART Model: SP5 Components:

• Manufacturer’s standard components. • Complete with Standard Accessory Package. • Complete with mixer cover.

ITEM NO. 1.058: ELECTRIC CAN OPENER Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: EDLUND Model: 203 Components:

• Manufacturer’s standard components. ITEM NO. 1.059: SLICER Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: GLOBE or equivalent by HOBART Model: SG13A Components:

• Manufacturer’s standard components. • Removable knife. • Slicer cover. • Complete with Quick-Clean coating. • Complete with high food fence. • Complete with additional cleaning brush.



ITEM NO. 1.060A: S.S. TABLE Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Nominal size: 3,000mm long x 760mm wide x 863mm high Type: Custom fabricated s/s construction in accordance with the


• 14 ga. s.s. top with boxed edge as per Detail 400. • Full length 150mm high x 50mm wide integral splash at back, splayed to

adjacent table. • Open section on right to suit under counter equipment. • Solid stainless steel base and intermediate shelves on left side. • Three drawer lockable unit in centre of table as per detail 402. • Legs and brace sets as required. • Secure table to the floor. • All junction boxes and receptacle boxes (as required) are to be supplied and

installed by the KEC in the table. All receptacles, conduit and wiring is to be supplied and installed by electrical division. All junction boxes are to be identified by the item number that they are connected too. All final connections to the junction boxes are by the electrical division.

• Fabricator to verify dimensions on-site prior to fabrication. • Refer to Elevation Drawing QF-300.

ITEM NO. 1.060B: S.S. TABLE Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Nominal size: 3,000mm long x 760mm wide x863mm high Type: Custom fabricated s/s construction in accordance with the


• 14 ga. s.s. top with boxed edge as per Detail 400. • Full length 150mm high x 50mm wide integral splash at back, splayed to

adjacent table. • Open section in base to suit under counter equipment. Note this section to

have a flat bar at the back so equipment is flush with front edge. • Solid stainless steel base and intermediate shelves on left side. • Three drawer lockable unit in centre of table as per detail 402. • Legs and brace sets as required. • Secure table to the floor. • All junction boxes and receptacle boxes (as required) are to be supplied and

installed by the KEC in the table. All receptacles, conduit and wiring is to be supplied and installed by electrical division. All junction boxes are to be identified by the item number that they are connected too. All final connections to the junction boxes are by the electrical division.

• Fabricator to verify dimensions on-site prior to fabrication. • Refer to Elevation Drawing QF-300.



ITEM NO. 1.061: SCALE Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: GLOBE or equivalent by HOBART Model: GPS10-S Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. ITEM NO. 1.062 BLENDER Quantity One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: WARING or equivalent by VITAMIX Model: CB10BT Components:

• Manufacturer’s standard components. • Complete with two extra containers.

ITEM NO. 1.063: CUTTER/MIXER Quantity: Two (2) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: ROBOT COUPE or equivalent by HOBART Model: R2N Components:

• Manufacturer’s standard components. • Complete with 6 additional plates and plate stand.

ITEM NO. 1.064: SPARE NUMBER ITEM NO. 1.065: SPARE NUMBER ITEM NO. 1.066: MOBILE DISH STORAGE CART Quantity: Two (2) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: BURLODGE or equivalent by HATCH Model: BUDCW-3320 Components:

• Manufacturer’s standard components. • Two adjustable dish dividers.



ITEM NO. 1.067: COLD FOOD TABLE Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: BURLODGE or equivalent by HATCH Model: BCFS-M-4-OS-6DWS-5 Components:

• Manufacturer’s standard components. • Complete with 300mm s.s. overshelf. • Drop-down work shelf (operator’s side). • Complete with AB adapter bar for fractional size pans. • Complete with PSIB pan slide assembly in base. • Complete with doors.

ITEM NO. 1.068: AIR CURTAIN Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: BURLODGE Model: B-COOL Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • right hand hinged door. • 120/60/1 power cord and locking plug. • Complete with removable rack to dolly for cartridge style filling. • Complete with dolly for removable rack.

ITEM NO. 1.069: MOBILE SLIDING TABLE Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: BURLODGE or equivalent by HATCH Model: B2-ST-M-2360 Components:

• Components:Manufacturer's standard components. • B2-STBR basket riser. • Eutectic base.

ITEM NO. 1.070: GRAVITY SHELVES Quantity: Two (2) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: BURLODGE or equivalent by HATCH Model: B2-FSGS-M-2620-4 Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Complete with 18 Dividers for GS model B2-SSD-22-11G per unit. • Complete with 4 Anti-Falling devices for GS model B2-AT-REV1 per unit. • Complete with Eight (8) B2-CBD bins. • Complete with Twelve (12) B2-SSD-22-11G bins.



ITEM NO. 1.071: SLIDER TABLE Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: BURLODGE or equivalent by HATCH Model: BMWCST-TRD-1020-ADJ Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • 120/60/1 power cord and locking plug.

ITEM NO. 1.072: TRAY DISPENSER Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: BURLODGE or equivalent by HATCH Model: RTCM-1321 Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. ITEM NO. 1.073: SPARE NUMBER ITEM NO. 1.074: BLAST CHILLER/FREEZER Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: IRINOX or equivalent by AMERICAN PANEL Model: MF 45.1 L PLUS Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Door hinged Right • 4 Casters (2 with locks) • Additional core probe • Additional wire shelves

ITEM NO. 1.075: REACH-IN REFRIGERATOR Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: TRUE or equivalent by DELFIELD Model: STR2R-2S Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Complete with door locks. • Exterior rectangular digital temperature display.



ITEM NO. 1.076: HOT FOOD HOLDING CABINETS Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: ALTO SHAAM or equivalent by WINSTON Model: 1200-UP Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Complete with deluxe controller. • Complete with bumpers. • Complete with door lock. • Complete with drip pan without drain. • Unit to fit below counter as indicated on drawings. Supply and install smaller

casters. • 208mv.

ITEM NO. 1.077: B-POD CART Quantity: Three (3) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: BURLODGE or equivalent by HATCH Model: BLP0S.000 Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Unit to retherm and boost. • Air cooled. • Dock station complete with Two BPod cart. • Tray capacity to be 24 trays. To be confirmed prior to fabrication. • Vertical tray separation. • 4 stainless steel castors with standard brake. • Electronics controls with HACCP & wifi Bcloud online monitoring. • Manufacture to allow for 1 year monitoring fee per cart. • One (1) temperature probe pre docking station. • 208/60/3 40amp services.

ITEM NO. 1.077A: B-POD BASE STATION - CT SMALL Quantity: Six (6) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: BURLODGE or equivalent by HATCH Model: BLP1A.780 Components:

• Refer to 1.077 for specification.



ITEM NO.1.078: TRENCH DRAIN Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Nominal Size: 1,460mmlong x 430mm wide x 127mm deep Type: Custom fabricated stainless steel construction in accordance

With the specification for this section. Components:

• Honeycomb grating. • Complete with one (1) 50mm drain tailpiece ready for final connection by

Mechanical Division. • Fabricator to verify dimensions on-site prior to fabrication.

TEM NO. 1.079: CART WASH HOSE REEL Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: FISHER or equal by T&S BRASS Model: 99597 Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Complete with 12 feet of hose. • Complete with scrub brush and soap injection system

ITEM NO. 1.080: Z RACK Quantity: Three (3) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: BURLODGE or equivalent by HATCH Model: BHATZ2-2326-30-3.5 Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • KEC to confirm tray size prior to ordering. • Complete with removable plastic cover, cover to have a zipper to allow

access to the cart as well as to be solid colour. Colour to be confirmed prior to ordering.



ITEM NO. 1.081: POT WASH TABLE Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Nominal size: 2,800mm long x 762mm wide x 864mm high Type: Custom fabricated s/s construction in accordance with the


• 14 ga. s.s. top with rolled edges around front as per Detail 401. • Full length 300mm high x 100mm wide integral splash at back and 50mm

wide on left side.. • Three (3) 678mm wide x 450mm deep sinks complete with S.S. apron. • One (1) deck mount pre-rinse faucets complete with 300mm swivel spouts. • One (1) deck mount faucets complete with 300mm swivel spouts. • Legs and brace sets as required. • Secure table to the floor. • Fabricator to verify dimensions on-site prior to fabrication • Refer to elevation on QF-300.

ITEM NO. 1.081A: CAN CRUSHERS Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: EDLUND Model: CH-1000SS Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. ITEM NO. 1.081B: S.S. TABLE Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Nominal size: 500mm long x 762mm wide x 864mm high Type: Custom fabricated s/s construction in accordance with the


• Legs and brace sets as required. • Secure table to the floor. • Fabricator to verify dimensions on-site prior to fabrication • Refer to elevation on QF-300.



ITEM NO. 1.082: JANITOR’S CABINET W/MOP SINK Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: ADVANCE TABCO or equivalent by CUSTOM Model: 9-OPC-84DL Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Complete with door locks. • Complete with back panel. • Complete with service faucet.

ITEM NO. 1.083: EYEWASH Quantity: Two (2) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: GUARDIAN Model: G1813 Components:

• Manufacturer’s standard components. • Complete with stainless steel dust cover for each spray head. • Complete with G3600LF thermostatic mixing valve precisely blends hot and

cold water to deliver warm (tepid) water as required by ANSI Z358.1-2009. Refer to “Tempering Units” section for complete technical and product selection information.

ITEM NO. 1.084: S.S. DISHTABLE W/ SINK Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Nominal size: 2,100mm long x 760mm wide x Height to suit dishwasher Type: Custom fabricated s/s construction in accordance with the


• 14 ga. s.s. top with rolled edges on front as per Detail 401. • 300mm high x 100mm deep integral splash where table meets architectural

wall at the back and 50mm wide on side. • Edge on left to suit dish washer. • One (1) deck mount pre-rinse faucet Encore model, complete with K50Y-500

swivel arm support, K55-7012 add-on faucet and all attachments including wall brackets.

• Opening in top to suite item 1.086A. • Complete Salvajor P914 pot and pan collector. 120/60/1 power. One

additional scrap basket. • Open below table to suit food service equipment. • Table to be sloped from all directions to waste collector. • Legs and brace sets as required. • Fabricator to verify dimensions on site prior to fabrication. • Refer to Elevation on drawing QF-300.



ITEM NO. 1.084A: S.S. DISHTABLE Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Nominal size: 1,500mm long x 760mm wide x Height to suit dishwasher Type: Custom fabricated s/s construction in accordance with the


• 14 ga. s.s. top with rolled edges on front as per Detail 401. • 300mm high x 50mm deep integral splash where table meets architectural

wall at the back and 50mm wide on side. • Edge on right to suit dish washer. • Open below table to suit food service equipment. • Table to be sloped from all directions to waste collector. • Legs and brace sets as required. • Fabricator to verify dimensions on site prior to fabrication. • Refer to Elevation on drawing QF-300.

ITEM NO. 1.084B: TABLE MOUNTED HOSE REEL W/ GUN Quantity: One (1) – By K.E.C. Manufacturer: T&S BASS Model: B-7222-C01-STB Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Complete with control panel. Shown as item 1.084C on drawings.

ITEM NO. 1.085: RACK CONVEYOR DISHWASHER Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: HOBART or equivalent by CHAMPION Model: CL44eN-ADV Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Right to left direction of operation. • Opti-Rinse system. • Insulated Hinged double doors with door interlock switches. • 19.5 inch chamber height opening. • Racks: 2 dish racks & 1 silver rack • Complete with 30k.w. built in booster. • Complete with CLeR electric blower dryer at 208/60/3 power. • Single point electrical connection. • Stainless steel vent hoods. • Drain water tempering kit. • Two Hobart WS-40 CLE water softening unit complete with alarm. (one for

incoming hot water and one for incoming cold water) • Table limit switch (unmounted) • Unit will feature a single-point drain connection. • Commissioning & training by HOBART field engineer. • ENERGY STAR. • 208v/60/3 ph, electric heat



• Complete with Neoprene pad for each foot of the unit so that the vibrations are limited to the structure below.

ITEM NO. 1.085A: BLOWER-DRYER Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: HOBART or equivalent by CHAMPION Model: CLeR Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Right to left direction of operation. • 208/60/3 power.

ITEM NO. 1.086: WASTE COLLECTOR Quantity: One (1) – by K.E.C. Manufacturer: SALVAJOR or equivalent by CHAMPION Model: P914 Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Right to left direction of operation. • 120/60/1 power. • Complete with additional basket.

ITEM NO. 1.087: DIGESTER Quantity: One (1) – By K.E.C. Manufacturer: ORCA Model: OG25 Components:

• Manufacturer's standard components. • Complete with 4 hours of training. • Supply 6 months worth of biochips. • ORCA to provide an alternate price for this unit to be leased complete with

maintenance plan rather than purchased/capitalized. ITEM NO. R.001: RANGE Quantity: One (1) – RELOCATED By K.E.C. Components:

• Unit to be relocated by KEC.



3 PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SITE INSPECTIONS

.1 All dimensions shown on the Drawings or listed in this Section of the Specification are to

be considered nominal and for guidance only. It is the responsibility of the Foodservice Equipment Sub-contractor to check dimensions on the site and to co-ordinate any adjustments which may be necessary for the proper fabrication and set-in-place of the foodservice equipment.

.2 If significant variances are apparent to the General Contractor or Foodservice Equipment Sub-contractor which may require changes affecting the intent of the contract, immediately notify the consultant.

.3 Fabricate equipment in sections that will allow easy access into the building and to final location within the foodservice area. Any damage to the building or the equipment will be the Foodservice Equipment Sub-contractor's responsibility.

.4 Verify on the job site all actual dimensions of storerooms and walk-in refrigerators and freezers and adjust if necessary the size of shelving units specified in the item specification.

.5 Verify all points of access into the job site and ensure that all pieces of equipment or fabricated items installed or relocated are able to pass through doors, hallways etc. in order to arrive at designated location on plans.

3.2 SAMPLES

.1 If requested by the Consultant, submit samples of components or fabrication methods, materials or finishes, for review and approval before proceeding with that aspect of the work. Where necessary, request a shop inspection of an assembly which cannot be submitted for approval. Include in the base bid price, the cost of samples which may be rejected.

.2 Samples must be the precise articles proposed to be furnished.

.3 All samples must be supplied in the required quantity and all except one (1) will be returned.

.4 Reviewed samples will become the standard of workmanship and material against which installed work will be checked.

.5 Obtain from the Owner, all necessary samples of china, baskets, trays, etc. to determine proper sizes for openings, angle slides dispensers, conveyors, dishmachines, carts, wrapping machines, etc.

.6 Prior to ordering dishwashing or traywashing equipment, obtain from the Owner a sample of all service wares, trays and carts etc. and assure their compatibility with warewashing or cartwashing equipment.



3.3 DELIVERY STORAGE OF EQUIPMENT

.1 The Foodservice Equipment Sub-contractor will coordinate deliveries of equipment in conjunction with construction activity and progress at the site and as dictated by the General Contractor

.2 The Foodservice Equipment Sub-contractor shall obtain and/or hold equipment ready for

delivery in accordance with an agreed schedule which will permit completion of the work at the specific date.

.3 Deliver, unpack and set in place all equipment in the designated position, ready for final

connection of services, for units with electrical or mechanical connections.

.4 Supply to the General Contractor, in sufficient time, any information or items of service, articles, components or equipment which requires building in or which may overlap or impede the work of others.

.5 Provide all necessary information within adequate time and in proper sequence regarding

the exact location of openings, chases and any attachments or other fittings required for foodservice equipment.

.6 Supply and deliver to the site in sufficient time all inserts, anchors, bolts, sleeves, ferrules

and similar items for attaching to, or building into, masonry, concrete and other work for the proper anchorage and fixing of the equipment. Include necessary templates, instructions, directions and/or assistance in the location and installation of all items by other Sub-contractors.

3.4 INSTALLATION

.1 Supply to all other trades in sufficient time, any services, articles, or equipment that

require “building-in” or overlapping coordination. Also notify exact locations of openings, chases, anchors, floor pan, etc., required for the foodservice equipment covered in this contract.

.2 Caulk and seal equipment to walls, base pads, curbs, and adjacent equipment where

required.

.3 Leave installed work neat, cleaned and polished, well fitted into position, level, and in proper operating condition.

.4 Promptly remove all rubbish and debris from the building and site as the work proceeds

and on completion.

.5 Activate, test and adjust all equipment and apparatus installed under this Contract. Refinish and repair any painted and finished surfaces damaged during erection and installation. Hand over the completed installation in first class condition and working order.

.6 Ensure electrical equipment is accompanied by label or certification of approval by

Canadian Standards Association, Hydro Electrical Power Commission or Local Authority.

.7 Ensure steam pressure equipment is accompanied by a "Certificate of Boiler" to satisfy Federal and Provincial requirements.



.8 Finished work must be perfectly true and plumb with no warping, buckling or open seams. All edges, hidden or exposed must be ground smooth and rounded. Rivet heads, weld marks, or other imperfections are not acceptable.

.9 Cutting and repairs for the proper installation of services are part of the work in this

Contract.

.10 Obtain permits or special inspections. No allowance will be made for costs incurred.

.11 Identify equipment with metal plates or labels permanently secured which include, where applicable:

- Manufacturer's name or recognized trademark - Complete model identification - Model, serial number and CSA U.L.C. and NSF identifications - Electrical characteristics - Direction of drive - Controls - Circuits, lines, etc. - Specific operating instructions

.12 Identify equipment with temporary labels showing location and Item number per

Specifications.

.13 After installation has been completed and all items checked and adjusted where necessary for satisfactory operation, arrange for inspection of equipment. If items are found unsatisfactory, make necessary corrections and adjustments.

3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

.1. Protect properly and efficiently all work against any damage. Repair without charge to

the Owner any damage to equipment and/or building. Cooperate at all times to keep the area clean and free of all rubbish and debris. At the end, clean all equipment to permit immediate use by the Owner without further cleaning.

3.6 MAINTENANCE MANUALS

.1. Supply four (4) sets of manuals, bound and labeled, incorporating operating and

maintenance instructions, including spare parts list and optional accessories for all items specified.

.2. Identify each item, arrange in proper sequence and ensure that the numbers correspond to the specifications and drawings.

.3. Provide an itemized lead sheet at the front of the manual with a list of the contents and the name and phone number of the service company.



3.7 DEMONSTRATION

.1 After completion of installation, cleaning, testing and final inspection, instruct the Owner or their authorized personnel in the correct operation and maintenance of the equipment.

.2 A demonstration shall be made of each piece of equipment requested by the Consultant,

and such demonstration shall be carried out by a competent representative of the manufacturer's equipment.

.3 It is the responsibility of the General Contractor and/or Foodservice Equipment Sub-

contractor to correct deficiencies and make adjustments to items which are not functioning properly at the time of demonstration.

.4 The Contractor shall co-ordinate the schedule for equipment demonstrations with the

Owner representative, with adequate time allowed for each demonstration.

.5 Submit to the Foodservice Consultant 3-4 months prior to Facility Takeover, cleaning, final inspection and testing, a schedule of demonstration by the suppliers of purchased equipment. Indicate clearly the timing for each supplier to start up and demonstrate the proper use and maintenance of their equipment to the Owner.

.6 The Consultant will inspect equipment on substantial completion of work and will issue a

deficiency report immediately thereafter. A final inspection will also be made to verify corrected deficiencies.

.7 The Owner reserves the right to inspect equipment at the factory of the Foodservice

Equipment Sub-contractor, or at other locations as necessary.

.8 Rejection of any item of equipment, components or fabrication will be based on degree of conformance to the Specification and Drawings, and is subject to the Conditions of the contract in any matter of dispute.

3.8 GUARANTEE

.1 All new equipment shall be guaranteed for a minimum of One (1) years from the date of

facility takeover against defects in material, manufacture, assembly, labour and installation. Those items or components which have inherent guarantee periods beyond this minimum shall be sustained to the maximum time provided by the manufacturer.

.2 This guarantee applies to new purchases and fabricated equipment specified under this

Division. Repair and/or replace at no cost to the Owner, parts and labour included, any and all equipment covered in this contract, which proves defective within the guarantee period.

.3 The One (1) year warranty shall include service, inspection, and maintenance for the fire

extinguishing system as requested by the national and/or local authorities and N.F.P.A. - Code 96.

.4 All mechanical refrigeration system components including compressors, condensing

units, parallel packs and condensors shall be supplied with a One (1) year replacement guaranteed including parts and labour and an additional four (4) year parts guarantee on compressors.



.5 If defects become apparent during the guarantee period they shall be made good by the Foodservice Equipment Sub-contractor/supplier or authorized service representative. The supplier means the manufacturer of the equipment item, but under all circumstances it is the responsibility of the General Contractor/Foodservice Equipment Sub-contractor to maintain the obligation of guarantee whether or not the supplier provides this service.

.6 If defects identified at any time during the One (1) year warranty period are not corrected

prior to expiration of the warranty period, the warranty period will automatically be extended until the defect is corrected to the “Owners” or “Consultants” satisfaction.

.7 If deficiencies identified at the point of substantial completion of the food equipment

installation or during the One (1) year warranty period are not corrected or resolved prior to the expiration of the One (1) year warranty period, the warranty period will automatically be extended until such time as the outstanding deficiency is corrected to the “Owners” or “Consultants” satisfaction.

.8 The guarantee shall not apply where it can be clearly shown that a defect or malfunction

is due to misuse or neglect by the Owner or their representatives.

.9 The guarantee period shall commence upon acceptance of the equipment by the Owner, or such date(s) as may be mutually agreed upon after facility takeover of the work. In no event shall the period of guarantee begin later than the date upon which the lien holdback expires.

3.9 INSPECTION, REJECTION AND FACTORY TESTING

.1 The Owner and Consultant reserve the right to inspect the fabrication of any items at the

fabricating plant and they may reject any equipment which does not comply with Plans and/or Specifications. The Contractor will replace without charge all rejected material or equipment within (10) days or rejection.

.2 Factory test and verify all items such as cold pans, refrigerated display cases, ice cream

freezers, custom built refrigerators, etc., to be sure that they are in proper working order before shipment. Inform the Consultant of the date of these tests in advance in writing so that he may observe and inspect these items in the ship if necessary. Advise the Consultant when installation is complete and ready for inspection.



4. Itemized Tender Form

SUB TOTAL FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT $ DELIVERY, UNCRATING AND SET-IN PLACE $ MISCELLANEOUS S.S. TRIM ETC. $ 1,500.00 APPLICABLE TAXES $ TOTAL FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT $



4.2 ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATIVE EQUIPMENT The following are prices for alternative equipment listed hereunder. Such alternative equipment and amounts are NOT included in the base bid stipulated price. ITEM DESCRIPTION ALTERNATIVE UNIT ADDITION TO NO. MANUFACTURER PRICE OR DEDUCTION FROM BASE TENDER PRICE



4.3 OTHER PREAPPROVED ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATIVE MANUFACTURERS The following are prices for alternative equipment listed hereunder that has been pre-approved. Such alternative equipment and amounts are NOT included in the base bid stipulated price. ITEM DESCRIPTION AND ALTERNATIVE UNIT ADDITION TO NO. MODEL NO. MANUFACTURER PRICE OR DEDUCTION FROM BASE TENDER PRICE End of Document

Procurement and Contracting RequirementsGeneral Requirements

Architectural and Mechanical Specifications

for

New Kitchen Design

GR Baker Hospital543 Front Street, Quesnel. BC V2J 2K7

Prepared for Northern Health

Issued For Tender on 02 April 2020

Stantec Project Ref: 144319132

Project Manual Volume 1

Issued For Tender on 22 May 2020

2

Mechanical and Plumbing Specifications

Project Manual Volume 2 of 2

Issued for Tender on 25 May 20208 June 2020

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION DIVISION 21 TABLE OF CONTENTS543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7

NORTHERN HEALTH Page 1 of 1



Section Title Section #

Common Work for Fire Suppression Systems 21 05 00

Identification for Fire Suppression 21 05 53

Testing and Adjusting for Fire Suppression 21 05 93

Commissioning for Fire Suppression Systems 21 08 00

Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems 21 13 00

Fire Extinguishers 21 25 00

Fire Suppression Equipment Manufacturers 21 99 65

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 COMMON WORK FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS

NORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 8


Part 1 General

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 This Section of the Specification forms part of the Contract Documents and is to be read, interpreted and coordinated with all other parts.

.2 The Division 23 Common Work Results for HVAC shall govern the Division 21 Fire Suppression sections of the work (read in conjunction with Division 1). This section covers items common to Division 21 series sections and is intended only to supplement the requirements of Division 1 and 23.

.3 Fire Suppression drawings are diagrammatic and approximately to scale. They establish the scope of the work and the general location and orientation of the fire suppression systems. The systems shall be installed generally in the locations and generally along the routings shown, close to the building structure and coordinated with other services. Piping shall be concealed within walls, ceilings or other spaces and shall be routed to maximize head room and the intended use of the space through which they pass, unless specifically noted otherwise.

.4 Refer to Section 23 99 60 Mechanical Forms and submit all documentation therein that is applicable to Division 21 Fire Suppression.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 The fire suppression contractor shall retain the services of a Professional Engineer registered in the Province of British Columbia to provide complete engineering design and field review services including signed and sealed CAD fire suppression drawings and hydraulic calculations. Refer to “Document Submittals” for additional information.

.2 The contractor’s Professional Engineer shall provide field reviews of the work on site as the work progresses and submit signed copies of the reports to Stantec Consulting Ltd.

.3 Provide hard copy and digital files of all “as-built” record drawings for inclusion in the maintenance manuals.

.4 Provide digital files in Revit format for the 3D model of the facility.

.5 Submit all documentation to the Authorities Having Jurisdiction, arrange for, pay for and obtain trade permits prior to commencing installation work on site.

.6 Arrange for, pay for and obtain static and residual water supply pressure information from the utility or municipality in writing and submit a copy of this information with the Shop Drawings. If this information is not available, arrange for, pay for and perform a hydrant flow test.

.7 Provide all fire suppression systems throughout the buildings as noted on the drawings and including:

.1 Modification to the existing wet sprinkler system

.2 Non-Freeze Sprinklers for the Freezers and Coolers

.3 Portable fire extinguishers

.8 Refer to the Code Consultant’s or equivalency reports, obtain copies through the Architect or Project Manager and provide all fire suppression systems outlined therein including water curtains, window and glazing sprinkler suppression systems.

.9 Connect to the existing combined fire suppression system / modify the layout to suit the new kitchen.

.10 Refer to the Civil Consultant’s drawings for work beyond 1 meter from the building.

.11 Provide all Testing, Adjusting; Commissioning; Identification; Insulation; and Heat Tracing for all fire suppression systems as described in the associated specification Sections.






.1 A 3D Walkthrough scans of the existing hospital departments and plant spaces are available for additional information through the following links:

.1 Existing Storage / Plant Room: https://my.matterport.com/show/?m=vsXAmq3VoDu

.2 Existing Kitchen Department: https://my.matterport.com/show/?m=674WqmGfFE7

(Please copy links into Google Chrome for best viewing)

.2 Please note: These Matterport 3D walkthrough scans may not accurately represent existing conditions. Data loss may occur in storage and use from their original format might result in unanticipated problems, such as poor resolution. They are provided for convenience and reference only. Recipients or bidders assume the risk of their use and cannot rely upon them as accurate.

1.4 CODES, BYLAWS, STANDARDS AND APPROVALS

.1 Where multiple versions of the same code are published, the most recent version shall be applied, unless noted otherwise by building codes and local by-laws.

.2 Installation, workmanship and testing shall conform to the following standards:

.1 Province of BC Building Code

.2 City of Quesnel Local building by-Laws

.3 National Fire Protection Association NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.

.4 National Fire Protection Association NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.

.5 Fire Commissioner of Canada standards.

.6 Factory Mutual (FM) approval guides.

.7 Insurer’s Advisory Organization (IAO) Interpretive Guides.

.3 Installation shall be subject to design approval, inspection and test of the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

.4 All system components shall be of one manufacturer. Normally, materials and devices listed by nationally recognized fire test laboratories will be acceptable.

1.5 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS

.1 The fire suppression contractor shall retain the services of a Professional Engineer registered in the Province of British Columbia to provide complete engineering design and field review services including signed and sealed CAD fire suppression drawings and hydraulic calculations.

.2 The contractor’s Registered Professional Engineer shall provide signed and sealed Province of BC Building Code Letters of Assurance Schedule B and Schedule C-B for the project.

.1 Some Cities or Municipalities may allow sprinkler contractors to perform limited amounts of sprinkler work (such as the relocation or addition of a limited number of sprinklers) under a Trade Permit, without the requirement of submitting Schedules B and C-B. Where this scenario is permitted by the City or Municipality, the sprinkler contractor may not, under the scope of this contract, break down the work and take out multiple Trade Permits in order to alleviate submitting Schedules B and C-B.







.2 Where the project size is limited enough to consider the previous clause, Stantec still requires Schedules B & C-B from a Sprinkler Engineer as specified. If detailed calculations are not required for a project, then a signed and sealed letter from the Sprinkler Engineer confirming design approach (i.e. pipe schedule method) shall be submitted.

.3 Submit static and residual water supply pressure information.

.4 Submit CAD drawings of all fire suppression sprinkler systems, fire suppression standpipes, clean agent suppression systems, and other fire suppression or fire extinguishing systems, for both shop drawings and record drawings.

.1 Sprinklers shall be referred to on drawings, submittals, and other documentation, by the sprinkler identification or model number as specifically published in the appropriate agency listing or approval.

.5 Any drawings prepared by the Consultant are provided only to show the general features of the systems, and general concepts of the arrangement and locations of the sprinklers.

.6 Submit hydraulic calculations for all water-based fire suppression sprinkler and standpipe systems.

.7 Submit a "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate" for each section of the work in accordance with the Authority Having Jurisdiction test procedure requirements, to the Consultant and to the local Authority Having Jurisdiction a minimum of 10 working days prior to Occupancy.

.8 Submit a signed letter from the fire stopping installation firm on their company letterhead certifying that all penetrations of fire suppression piping through vertical and horizontal rated separations have been fire stopped in accordance with CAN4-S115.

.9 Obtain from the Division 26/27 Electrical contractor and submit a copy of the Fire Alarm Verification Certificate.

.10 Submit maintenance data for all systems and arrange for inclusion in the project Mechanical Maintenance and Operations Manuals as outlined below.

.11 Submit signed and sealed copies of Record Drawings, Final Design Drawings and As-built Drawings as requested by the project Architect, Certified Professional (C.P.), Authority Having Jurisdiction and the Consultant.

.12 Submit shop drawings as noted below.

.13 Submit samples as noted below.

1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Refer to Division 1 and Section 23 05 00 for additional requirements.

.2 Submit shop drawings for the following items where they are provided for the project:

.1 Piping materials.

.2 Valves, fittings and grooved joint couplings.

.3 Sprinklers and escutcheon plates.

.4 Fire extinguishers and cabinets.

.5 Fire stopping component data sheets and ULC or Warnock Hersey listings.

1.7 RECORD DRAWINGS

.1 Provide project record drawings for all fire suppression systems as specified in Section 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC.

.2 Submit hard copies of all “as-built” record drawings for inclusion in the paper maintenance manual.

.3 Provide digital files in pdf formats for inclusion in the digital format manuals and submit files directly to the consultant.





.4 Provide digital files in Navisworks and Revit formats for the 3D model of the facility as per the project requirements.

1.8 MAINTENANCE DATA

.1 Refer to Section 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC.

.2 Provide maintenance data for all fire suppression systems complete with a Table of Contents and coordinate with the plumbing and HVAC trades for incorporation into a designated section of the project Mechanical Operation and Maintenance Manual.

.3 Submit pdf format digital files of all equipment data sheets, approved shop drawings, and maintenance data for inclusion in the maintenance manual.

.4 Detailed instructions for the normal maintenance of all installed equipment including operational procedures, frequency of operational checks, service instructions and troubleshooting instructions. Information provided must be suitable for incorporation into the local Fire Department's operation manual if so requested by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (City of Quesnel).

.5 Local source of supply for each item of equipment indicating the manufacturer’s and local supplier’s company names, addresses, phone numbers, faxes and e-mails.

.6 Labeling and identification schedules.

.7 Valve schedule including location, service type and normal position for all systems.

.8 Warranties, certificates and miscellaneous reports.

.9 Manufacturer's operating and maintenance brochures, including wiring diagrams.

.10 Comprehensive description of the operation of the system including the function of each item of equipment within the system.

.11 Operating electrical switchgear schedule indicating location of equipment.

.12 Lubrication schedule indicating the recommended lubricants and grades (grease or oil) for all lubricated equipment components.

.13 Shop drawings for all components as listed in the Shop Drawings clauses above.

.14 Documentation as listed in the Documentation Submittals clauses above.

1.9 OCCUPANCY DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS

.1 Provide occupancy documentation for all fire suppression work as specified in Section 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC.

.2 The contractor shall submit the following documentation to the Consultant a minimum of 5 working days prior to the project occupancy site walk-through or occupancy date, whichever is scheduled first. The dates will be established by the project architect, project manager or Certified Professional. It is the contractor’s responsibility to provide all documentation to the Consultant in a timely manner. If all documentation is not received, the Consultant may not be able to issue their associated Schedule C-B in support of the building occupancy application and any associated consequences shall become the responsibility of the contractor.

.3 Fire Suppression system Letters of Assurance Schedules B Assurance of Professional Design and Commitment for Field Review; and Schedule C-B Assurance of Professional Field Review and Compliance from the contractor’s fire suppression engineer.

.4 Seismic restraint system letters of assurance Schedules Band C-B from the fire suppression contractor’s seismic restraint engineer.

.5 Letter confirming that all penetrations of rated assemblies have been firestopped in conformance with CAN4-S115, on the firestopping installing agencies letterhead.

.6 Fire Suppression system Contractor’s Material and Test Certificates for Aboveground Piping and for Underground Piping systems per NFPA-13.





.7 A copy of the Fire Alarm Verification Certificate for components related to the fire suppression system devices.

.8 Copies of pressure test reports for all piping systems on contractor’s letterhead.

.9 Maintenance manuals for fire suppression systems.

1.10 SWAY BRACES

.1 Supply and install sway-bracing hangers on fire suppression piping systems in accordance with NFPA 13 requirements. Generally, this shall apply to all cross mains 50 mm [2"] and larger, and shall apply to all feed mains including all standpipe risers. Horizontal piping shall be 2-way bracing and vertical piping shall include 4-way bracing at the tops of all risers. On floor loops, sway-braces are also required at the corners of all loops.

.2 Power actuated or drop-in fasteners shall not be used to resist tension forces for the support or restraint of the fire suppression systems or their components. All fasteners shall be reviewed and approved by the Supporting Professional Engineer for Seismic Restraints prior to installation.

1.11 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

.1 Supply and install seismic restraints for all fire suppression piping systems in accordance with the Province of BC Building Code.

.2 Include the services of a Supporting Professional Engineer to design and certify the seismic restraints for all fire suppression piping systems in accordance with the Province of BC Building Code. Provide signed and sealed Letters of Assurance Schedule B and Schedule C-B for the project.

.3 Power actuated or drop-in fasteners shall not be used to resist tension forces for the support or restraint of the fire suppression systems or their components. All fasteners shall be reviewed and approved by the Supporting Professional Engineer for Seismic Restraints prior to installation.

1.12 PIPE, FITTINGS AND COUPLINGS

.1 The responsibility for including for all pipe, fittings, couplings, valves, nipples, drains, test connections and all accessory pipe work for a complete installation is to be included in this Section of the work within the base tender price.

.2 No extra cost will be considered based on failure of the contractor to allow for extra pipe, fittings and pipe work as required during construction to provide offsets to avoid structural components, and to coordinate with other piping services, ductwork, cable trays, conduits or other obstacles whether shown on the drawings or not.

.3 All grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components.

.4 All castings used for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, etc., shall be date stamped for quality assurance and traceability.

1.13 SPRINKLERS

.1 The responsibility for allowing for all sprinklers for a complete installation is to be included in this Section of the work within the base tender price. The layout on the drawings shows the general intention of the work and sprinkler locations with respect to other ceiling elements such as ceiling tiles, lights and diffusers. However, the contractor shall provide all additional sprinklers as may be required.

.2 No extra cost will be considered based on failure of the contractor to allow for extra sprinklers as required during construction to conform to all NFPA requirements and the Authority Having Jurisdiction, whether shown on the drawings or not.





.3 Include sprinklers above and below suspended architectural ceiling panels.

.4 Include sprinklers in concealed spaces containing exposed combustible construction including exposed wood beams, exposed wood framing and exposed wood ceiling materials.

.5 All sprinklers, piping and related equipment in the MRI area shall be non-ferrous.

1.14 CLEAN UP

.1 Leave systems operating with work areas clean to satisfaction of the Consultant, Architect or the Owner’s representative.

Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL

.1 All materials shall be ULC Listed for the intended service and shall be supplied in original factory packaging.

2.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

.1 All hangers and supports including seismic restraints shall be ULC Listed and shall conform to the BC Building Code and to the appropriate NFPA standards.

.2 Toggle hangers or strap hangers are unacceptable.

.3 All sprinklers, piping and related equipment in the MRI area shall be non-ferrous.

2.3 FIRE STOPPING

.1 Provide fire stopping materials listed in accordance with CAN4-S115 at all pipes penetrating horizontal and vertical fire rated separations.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS METAL RELATED TO FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

.1 All miscellaneous metal related to the fire suppression systems including all metal back up plates, stands, brackets and supports for all roof, floor or wall supported equipment and piping systems is part of this Section of the work.

.2 Provide two coats of heavy red oxide primer to all steel components after fabrication, and touch up on site after installation.

2.5 ISOLATION VALVES:

.1 Install isolation valves whether shown on the drawings or not at the following locations:

.1 At each sprinkler zone.

.2 At all points where required by the Building Codes, By-Laws or NFPA.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 PIPE ROUTING

.1 Install piping to maximize headroom in all areas, including areas without ceilings where the piping is exposed, without interfering with other systems.

.2 Do not route piping through electrical or communications rooms or closets, elevator machine rooms, or other similar locations without express permission from the electrical consultant. Limit the piping to branch lines that serve those specific rooms where such rooms are required to be sprinklered.

3.2 GRADING AND DRAINAGE OF PIPING

.1 Grade all fire suppression piping so that it can be drained through drain cocks.





.2 Pipe all sprinkler system drains to floor drains in mechanical service rooms across the hall from the new Kitchen area.

3.3 BUILDING MOVEMENT

.1 Install all piping systems, including all take-offs installed within the building such that the piping and connected equipment will not be distorted by expansion, contraction or building settlement.

.2 Provide offsets and / or piping expansion components at all building expansion joints, all building seismic joints and all firewalls.

.3 Provide anchors where necessary to control pipe expansion and pipe movement.

3.4 PIPE SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS

.1 The supply and installation of pipe sleeves and escutcheons for fire suppression system piping is included in this Section of the work.

.2 Do not cast piping into concrete walls, slabs or masonry walls.

.3 At exterior wall or slab penetrations, provide sleeves a minimum of 2 nominal pipe diameters larger than the pipe. (i.e. a 300 mm [12”] sleeve for a nominal 200 mm [8”] diameter pipe).

.4 Install pipe concentric within the sleeves.

.5 Remove plastic sleeves, where they are used, prior to installation of the pipe penetration. The resulting hole shall be then classified as the sleeve except in wet areas.

.6 Provide minimum Schedule 10 steel pipe sleeves where piping penetrates masonry walls.

.7 Extend sleeves 50 mm [2"] above floor slabs in wet areas. Wet areas include penthouse equipment rooms, janitor's rooms, utility rooms and washrooms.

.8 Seal all penetrations through aboveground exterior walls, and underground exterior walls and slabs including slabs on grade, where no hydrostatic pressure exists, with a flexible, non-hardening, weatherproof caulking compound. Seal around the exterior circumference of the sleeves as well as the annular space between the pipes and the sleeves.

.9 Seal all penetrations through underground exterior walls and slabs, including slabs on grade, where hydrostatic pressure exists, with mechanical seals such as Link Seal.

.10 Install chrome plated escutcheons on exposed piping passing through walls and ceilings in finished areas.

.11 Risers for fire suppression systems with horizontal branch takeoffs passing through sleeves that are set rigidly in the structure adjacent to the risers shall be set to accommodate long term structural movement to avoid imposing stress on these systems.

3.5 FIRE STOPPING

.1 Provide fire stopping to CAN4-S115 at all pipes penetrating horizontal and vertical rated separations.

.2 Smooth the finished surface in a neat and workman like appearance.

3.6 CORE DRILLING

.1 The fire suppression contractor shall be on site and coordinate sleeves and block out requirements in accordance with the project construction schedule to minimize coring.

.2 Arrange and pay for all costs of all core drilling required for fire suppression systems in this Section of the Work.

.3 X-ray all concrete walls, partitions, shafts, slabs and other concrete or concrete block assemblies prior to coring. The cost of x-raying shall be included in the cost of the Work. Repairs to existing services damaged as a result of core drilling is included in this section of the Work.





.4 Verify the location of existing service runs and structural reinforcement within existing concrete floors and walls prior to core drilling and cutting. Core drilling and cutting of structural building components shall only take place upon the receipt of specific written approval of the structural consultant. Repairs that may be required to existing services damaged as a result of core drilling is included in this Section of the work.

.5 Penetrations up to 150 mm [6"] nominal pipe size in precast concrete may be cored on site per the fire suppression contractor. Larger penetrations shall be located and arranged for in precast work with the precast manufacturer prior to shipping to the construction site.


.1 Provide all hangers and supports as outlined in NFPA including supports to adequately secure the piping to restrict movement upon activation of the fire suppression systems including the activation of fire pumps and charging of the systems through the fire department connections.

3.8 PRESSURE GAUGES

.1 Provide pressure gauges at the following locations and additional gauges as required by NFPA, the Authority Having Jurisdiction and the system configuration:

.1 Water entry valve station both upstream and downstream of the backflow preventer.

.2 Upstream and downstream of all pumps.

.3 At the top of all fire suppression standpipe and sprinkler risers.

3.9 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

.1 Provide seismic restraints as outlined in NFPA and to the seismic zone listed in the applicable building code or bylaw.

.2 Anchorage and seismic restraints of the fire suppression systems as listed in the Letters of Assurance Schedules B and C-B is included in this Section of the work.

3.10 TESTS AND INSPECTION

.1 Furnish all labour, materials, equipment and instruments necessary for all required tests. All work shall be subject to review by the Consultant, Owner’s representative, and local Authority Having Jurisdiction.

.2 Provide a minimum of one hundred and twenty (120) business hours’ notice, in advance of making the required tests.

.3 Tests on fire suppression systems shall include pressure tests and shall conform to the standards of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Fire department connections and fire pump test header lines shall also be hydrostatically tested.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Refer to Section 23 05 53 Mechanical Identification. Comply with all requirements of that Section of work as related to general requirements, products and execution.

.2 In addition to the piping, equipment and systems listed in Section 23 05 53 provide identification on all fire suppression piping, valves and equipment including the following:

.1 Modification to the existing wet sprinkler system

.2 Portable fire extinguishers

.3 Identification of all fire suppression systems must comply with the requirements of the applicable NFPA Standard where the requirements of that standard exceed these specifications.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 TESTING & ADJUSTING FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


.2 Refer to Section 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting & Balancing for HVAC. Comply with all requirements of that Section of work as related to General Requirements, Products and Execution.

.3 Also refer to Section 21 08 00 Commissioning of Fire Suppression.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 In addition to the piping, equipment and systems listed in Section 23 05 93 provide testing, adjusting and balancing for all fire suppression piping, equipment and systems including the following:

.1 Modifications to the existing fire suppression wet sprinkler systems.

.2 The fire suppression contractor shall provide testing, adjusting and balancing of the fire suppression and fire extinguishing systems.

.3 Provide completed copies of Contractor’s Material and Test Certificates for Aboveground Piping, and for Underground Piping as per NFPA-13.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 COMMISSIONING FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Refer to Section 23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC. Comply with all requirements of that Section of work as related to general requirements, products and execution.

.2 In addition to the piping, equipment and systems listed in Section 23 08 00 provide commissioning of all fire suppression piping, equipment and systems including the following:

.1 Modifications to the existing fire suppression wet sprinkler system

.3 The fire suppression contractor shall provide commissioning of the fire suppression and fire extinguishing systems.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK



.1 The following is a general description of the work involved:

.1 Modifications to the existing Wet sprinkler system

.2 Dry sprinkler system head at designated areas subject to freezing (Freezers and Coolers).


.1 Provide a wet sprinkler system throughout the building, in accordance with the listed codes, bylaws, standards and approvals including NFPA 13 and the Province of BC Building Code

.2 Obtain a copy of the Code Consultant’s report and include all equivalency requirements, glazing system requirements and all other works described therein that pertain to the fire suppression sprinkler systems.

1.4 RELATED WORK

.1 Coordinate with Division 26 Electrical for connection of all supervised isolation valves to supervisory signals, flow switches to alarm signals, and supervisory switches to supervisory signals on the fire alarm system.

.2 Coordinate the work of this Section with the HVAC trades, plumbing trades, electrical trades and ceiling trades.

1.5 SPRINKLER SYSTEM SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit drawings of all fire suppression sprinkler systems, fire suppression standpipes, clean agent suppression systems, and other fire suppression or fire extinguishing systems, for both shop drawings and record drawings.


.3 Any drawings prepared by the Consultant are provided only to show the general features of the systems, and general concepts of the arrangement and locations of the sprinklers.

.4 The fire suppression subcontractor and their Registered Professional Engineer shall include for all sprinklers as required to fully comply with NFPA-13, local by-laws (City of Quesnel) and the Province of BC Building Code whether or not they are indicated on the Consultant’s, Architect’s or any other drawings.

.5 Indicate on the drawings all information required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction including features of the building construction, direction and size of beams, ceiling configurations, partition locations, as well as light fixtures (noting the depths of surface mounted light fixtures where these occur) and diffuser locations.

.6 Stipulate the positions and elevations of the sprinklers with respect to the floor elevations; the temperature rating all sprinklers; the spacing and types of hangers; drains and low point drains; test and flushing connections; types of sprinkler alarms; locations and types of sprinkler control valves; backflow preventers and all other essential features of the piping systems.

.7 Include with the submission detailed sprinkler plans and hydraulic calculations as described in NFPA 13.






.9 Only those shop drawings that have been reviewed, signed and sealed by the fire suppression subcontractor’s Registered Professional Engineer shall be submitted to the Consultant for review.


.1 Some Cities or Municipalities may allow sprinkler contractors to perform limited amounts of sprinkler work (such as the relocation or addition of a limited number of sprinklers) under a Trade Permit, without the requirement of submitting Schedules B and C-B. Where this scenario is permitted by the City or Municipality, the sprinkler contractor may not, under the scope of this contract, break down the work and take out multiple Trade Permits in order to alleviate submitting Schedules B and C-B.

.2 Where the project size is limited enough to consider the previous clause, Stantec still requires Schedules B & C-B from a Sprinkler Engineer as specified. If detailed calculations are not required for a project, then a signed and sealed letter from the Sprinkler Engineer confirming design approach (i.e. pipe schedule method) shall be submitted.

.11 The contractor’s Professional Engineer shall provide field reviews of the work on site as the work progresses and submit signed copies of the reports to Stantec Consulting Ltd.

.12 Submit additional signed and sealed sets of shop drawings as requested by the Owner for their use and for review by their insurer, and incorporate all requirements made during that review process.

.13 Submit to the Authority Having Jurisdiction for their review and/or approval, complete sets of shop drawings and hydraulic calculations for each area.

.14 Arrange for, pay for and obtain a fire suppression system / sprinkler permit, as required by the City of Quesnel, prior to commencing the fire suppression system installation.

.15 In addition to the foregoing documentation, submit shop drawings for the following items:

.1 Pipe, valves, fittings and grooved joint couplings.

.2 Zone isolation valves as required.

.3 Test and drain assemblies.

.4 Sprinklers including all sprinkler types.

1.6 SYSTEM DEMONSTRATIONS

.1 Refer to Section 21 05 00 re system demonstration requirements.

Part 2 Products

2.1 SPRINKLER PIPING AND FITTINGS - ABOVE GROUND

.1 Piping:

.1 Steel pipe, black or hot dipped galvanized, standard weight or lightwall, material and IPS dimensions conforming to NFPA 13 and ASTM A53, ASTM A135 or ASTM A795.

.2 CPVC piping is not acceptable for this project.

.2 Fittings:

.1 Compatible with the piping material and suitable for the maximum pressures in the system but not less than 1210 kPa [175 psig] working pressure.





.2 Welded fittings shall conform to ANSI B16.5, B16.9, B16.11 and B16.25 and ASTM A234.

.3 Threaded fittings conforming to ANSI B16.1, B16.3 and B16.4 are acceptable on minimum Schedule 40 steel pipe up to 150 mm [6”] diameter and shall have a ULC corrosion resistance ratio of 1.00 or greater.

.4 Grooved end fittings shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536, and shall provide full flow design, short pattern, with flow equal to standard pattern fittings. Fittings, couplings and gaskets shall be of one manufacturer and shall provide a rigid joint. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components. Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic FireLock™.

.5 Branch connections may be provided by bolted mechanical branch connections complete with synthetic rubber gaskets approved for line service. Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic Style 920920N-and 922.

.6 Victaulic 922 outlet tees shall have cast upper and lower housings and may be used for up to 25 mm [1”] branch outlets and individual sprinklers.

.7 Victaulic "Pressfit System" of pipe and cold drawn carbon steel fittings with

integral synthetic O-ring is not acceptable for this project.

.8 Grooved joint couplings shall consist of two ductile iron housing segments conforming to ASTM A536, pressure responsive gasket to ASTM D2000, and zinc electroplated steel bolts and nuts.

.1 Rigid Type: Housings shall be cast with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads to provide rigidity and system support and hanging in accordance with NFPA-13. Couplings shall be fully installed at visual pad-to-pad offset contact. (Tongue and recess type couplings, or any coupling that requires exact gapping of bolt pads on each side of the coupling at specified torque ratings, are not allowed.)

.1 32 mm [1-1/4”] through 100 mm [4”]: Installation-Ready, for direct stab installation without field disassembly.

.2 Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic Style 107, Victaulic FireLock™ Style 005H or Victaulic Zero-Flex Style 07

.2 Flexible Type: For use only in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are required, and for seismic applications.

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic Installation-Ready Style 177 and Style 75 / 77.

.3 For dry pipe systems, use a FlushSeal® coupling gasket in rigid and flexible couplings where required by NFPA 13.

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic Style 005 Firelock and Style 75

.9 Submit requests for consideration of other products or systems in accordance with the submittal procedures, prior to the closing of this subtrade tender.

.3 The Victaulic Vic-Flex multiple use flexible stainless steel drop system may be used to properly locate sprinkler heads. The drop system shall be supplied with required supporting members and bracing.

2.2 VALVES

.1 Gate - 1210 kPa [175 psig] - Underwriters' Laboratories Canada (ULC) listed:

.1 12 mm - 50 mm [1/2” - 2”]: Standard of Acceptance:Jenkins 305-U, Crane 459, Nibco T-104-0, Kennedy.

.2 Test and Drain Valves - 1210 kPa [175 psig] - ULC listed

.1 25 mm and 50 mm [1” through 2”]: Forged brass or cast bronze construction, tapped 6 mm [1/4”] gauge outlet, and integral sight glass.





.2 Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic TestMaster II or NFE model A61

.3 All valves shall be ULC listed for fire suppression systems.

.4 All grooved end valves shall be of one manufacturer. Acceptable products: Victaulic.

.5 Valves shall be externally resettable.

.6 Valve internal components shall be replaceable without removing the valve from the installed position.

.7 All drain valves shall be provided with hose end adaptors complete with caps and chains, and auxiliary drains shall be provided with a drum drip.

2.3 SPRINKLERS

.1 Sprinkler body shall be glass bulb type, with a die-cast body. The body shall be integrally cast with a hex-shaped wrench boss to reduce the risk of damage during installation.

.1 Wrenches shall be provided by the sprinkler manufacturer that directly engage the hex-shaped wrench boss in the sprinkler body.

.2 Sprinklers with rubber O-rings are not permitted,

.3 All sprinklers shall be ULC listed for use in the occupancies in which they are to be installed.

.4 All sprinklers shall be quick response unless stated otherwise.

.5 All sprinklers shall be for commercial applications unless stated otherwise. Residential sprinklers are only permitted in residential areas of residential buildings.

.6 Sprinkler Types:

.1 Upright – chrome plated, quick response, glass bulb in finished rooms and spaces without ceilings.

.2 Concealed Pendant – concealed, quick response, chrome plated flat cover plate, at locations as noted on the drawings including main entrances, foyers, boardrooms, and other similar high-profile locations.

.3 Dry Sprinklers – provide dry pendant or dry sidewall sprinklers where serving areas subject to freezing from wet sprinkler system piping (Freezers and Coolers in the Kitchen)

.4 Standard of Acceptance: -Viking

.7 All sprinklers in exposed areas subject to viewing by the occupants of the building shall be in chrome plated finish with chrome plated escutcheons.

.8 Escutcheon plates shall allow accessible ceilings to be removed without removing sprinklers. Construction consists of a cup and skirt, the cup being the portion retaining the sprinkler and the skirt being the removable portion around the exterior perimeter of the cup that covers the tile hole. The finished escutcheon installation shall not project more than 4 mm [1/4”] below the finish ceiling surface. Recessed two-piece escutcheons and single piece escutcheons that are specifically manufactured with sprinklers to permit escutcheon and ceiling tile removable without sprinkler removal are also considered to be acceptable. The escutcheons shall match the sprinkler finish, be of the same manufacturer as the sprinkler and shall coordinate with architectural features of the building.

.9 Provide wire sprinkler guards in areas where sprinklers are susceptible to mechanical damage or vandalism.

.10 Escutcheons and guards shall be listed, supplied, and approved for use with the sprinkler by the sprinkler manufacturer.





Part 3 Execution

3.1 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

.1 Supply and install fire suppression sprinkler systems throughout the building, in accordance with the listed codes, bylaws, standards and approvals including NFPA - 13 and the Province of BC Building Code.

.2 Test sprinkler systems to listed requirements and furnish a certificate stating that such testing has been carried out and approved.

.3 Provide inspector's test valves and drains at all remote points in the system to NFPA - 13 requirements.

.4 Supply and install fire suppression sprinkler systems in accordance with the general piping configuration depicted on the drawings. The sprinkler contractor shall hydraulically calculate the sprinkler systems in accordance with the following provisions:

.1 Such calculations shall be the responsibility of, and shall be signed and sealed by, the fire protection subcontractor’s Registered Professional Engineer.

.2 Submit signed and sealed Province of BC Building Code Letters of Assurance Schedule B for the project to the Consultant and to the local Authority Having Jurisdiction in accordance with the Province of BC Building Code

.3 Such calculations shall be based on the general piping configuration depicted on the tender and/or contract drawings.

.4 The water supply hydraulic data shall be confirmed in writing by the contractor with the water utility or the municipal authority prior to the submission of shop drawings.

.5 Supply and installation of the sprinkler systems based on the hydraulic calculations shall be the responsibility of the fire suppression subcontractor and their Registered Professional Engineer.

.6 Install piping to maximize headroom in all areas, including areas without ceilings where the piping is exposed, without interfering with other systems.

.7 Locate sprinklers in general conformance with the locations shown on the sprinkler design drawings. For exact locations refer to the architectural reflected ceiling plans. In the absence of reflected ceiling plans sprinklers shall be installed at the centre point, quarter point and/or third point in the long dimension of ceiling tiles, and in the center point of the short dimension of ceiling tiles, and/or in line with other ceiling elements, light fixtures, diffusers, audio devices and other fittings, in a symmetrical and aesthetic pattern acceptable to the Architect. Coordinate the sprinkler layout with architectural, structural, electrical and mechanical HVAC ceiling elements.

.1 The Victaulic Vic-Flex multiple use flexible stainless steel drop system may be used to properly locate sprinkler heads. The drop system shall be supplied with required supporting members and bracing.

.8 Do not install sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, or show a visible loss of fluid. Never install sprinklers with cracked bulbs.

.9 Sprinkler bulb protector shall be removed by hand after installation. Do not use tools or any other device(s) to remove the protector that could damage the bulb in any way.

.10 At substantial completion, and a minimum of 10 working days prior to the scheduled Occupancy date, submit 'Schedule C-B: Assurance of Professional Field Review and Compliance' to the Consultant and to the local Authority Having Jurisdiction in accordance with the Province of BC Building Code.

.11 Submit to the Consultant a completed Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for all fire suppression systems, and a provide copy in the project Mechanical Operation and Maintenance Manuals. All sections of the forms must be filled in completely and





accurately and signed by the applicable persons. In addition to their signatures, their names must be legibly printed on each form.

3.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS

.1 All welding shall be done in the shop using welding fittings. Field welding is not permitted.

.2 Flanged pattern fittings shall be used for piping 200 mm [8”] diameter and larger, and at valve stations and fire department connections.

.3 Provide ULC listed expansion joints or flexible joint fitting assemblies at building expansion joints, building earthquake joints, building firewalls and all other locations as necessary.

.4 All grooved end components including valves, fittings, gaskets and couplings shall be of one manufacturer and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

.5 The grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained representative shall provide on-site training for the contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving tools and installation of grooved joint products. The representative shall periodically visit the jobsite and review that the contractor is following their recommended practices in grooved product installation. Roll and cut grooves shall be made in conformance with the fitting manufacturer’s written Standard Groove Specifications and within the listed dimensional tolerances. The contractor shall measure the groove dimensions and adjust the grooving machine rollers and cutters on a regular basis to ensure all grooves are within the manufacturer’s written dimensional tolerances.

.6 Tie rods shall only be used in conjunction with fittings possessing integral tie lugs.

.7 Tie rods complete with their associated nuts and bolts shall be coated with two coats of asphaltic paint after installation.

3.3 FLUSHING OF SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

.1 Flush new piping with water until effluent is clear and free of debris.

.2 Rate of flushing flows shall be as indicated in NFPA-13.

.3 Provide proper drainage for this flushing operation.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK



.1 Perform work in accordance with the recommendations and requirements of:

.1 National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.

.2 B.C. Building Code

.3 Municipal Building Bylaws


.1 Submit shop drawings and product data for fire extinguishers and extinguisher cabinets.


.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into the Mechanical Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

Part 2 Products

2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER FE-1

.1 Surface mounted 2.3 kg [5 lb.] extinguisher without cabinet.

.2 Extinguisher: 2.3 kg [5 lb.] dry chemical, multipurpose ABC, fully rechargeable, steel cylinder with bottom skirt, polyester powder cost finish, waterproof stainless steel gauge, stainless steel or aluminum valve body, rivets and gauge, handles with polyester powder coat finish, steel pull pin, matching wall hook, service info tag, hose strap, hose and nozzle.

2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER FE-2

.1 Type K Surface mounted liquid agent fire extinguisher specifically designed for use on fires that involve combustible cooking vegetable or animal fats in commercial cooking equipment

.2 Meet or exceed requirements of UL Standard 8 and Standard 711

.3 Meet requirements of ULC Standard S554

.4 Meet requirements of NFPA 10

.5 Wide angle, soft discharge spray pattern, stainless steel bourdon tube gauge, rechargeable, UL/ULC rated 2-A-K, factory filled and pressurized, stainless steel pick-up tube and strainer, heavy chrome plated tank with minimum of 1.6 USgal (6 L) of fire extinguishing agent.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install fire extinguishers in cabinets, and wall mounted (Type K) at locations as indicated on the drawings.


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS



.2 Coordinate locations of fire extinguisher cabinets with the framing trades in order to facilitate recessed and semi-recessed installations.

.3 Mount fire extinguishers and cabinets such that the top of the extinguisher is at 1220 mm above the floor.

.4 Install fire extinguisher cabinet doors, glazing panels and fire extinguishers in the cabinets prior to the project substantial completion review by the Consultant.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

.1 Identify fire extinguishers in accordance with the recommendations of NFPA 10.

.2 Attach a tag or label to all fire extinguishers, indicating the month and year of installation, with space for recording subsequent service dates.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 21 99 65543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS



ITEMACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS / SUPPLIERS / MANUFACTURERS

SHOP DWG.

All fire suppression products shall be ULC, cUL or FM Listed.

ACCESS DOORS/PANELS REFER TO DIV. 23 X

BALANCING, COMMISSIONING, MAINTENANCE MANUALS

REFER TO DIV. 23 X

FIRE EXTINGUISHERSNFE, Larsons, Wilson & Cousins, Flag, Pyro-Chem, Kidde, Ansul

X

FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS

Reliable , Grinnell, Viking, Victaulic X

INSULATION - PIPING REFER TO DIVISION 23 X

PIPE FITTINGS & COUPLINGS

Victaulic X

PIPE CONNECTORS (FLEXIBLE)

Mason Industries X

SEISMIC RESTRAINTS REFER TO DIVISION 23 X

NOTE:.1 The design is based upon the equipment listed in the equipment schedules and/or

underlined in this Fire Suppression Equipment Manufacturers Schedules.

.2 “X” Denotes required submission.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION DIVISION 22 TABLE OF CONTENTS 543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7





Common Work for Plumbing Systems 22 05 00

Motor Requirements for Plumbing Systems 22 05 13

Thermometers and Gauges for Plumbing 22 05 20

Hangers and Supports for Plumbing 22 05 29

Vibration Isolation for Plumbing 22 05 48

Seismic Restraints for Plumbing 22 05 49

Identification for Plumbing 22 05 53

Testing and Adjusting for Plumbing Systems 22 05 93

Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 07 19

Commissioning of Plumbing Systems 22 08 00

Domestic Water Distribution 22 11 00

Domestic Water Pumps 22 11 20

Sanitary and Storm Drainage Systems 22 13 00

Grease Sewer Systems 22 13 03

Radon Venting 22 13 09

Facility Natural Gas Systems 22 16 00

Facility Propane Gas Systems 22 17 00

Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 22 40 00

Plumbing Equipment Manufacturers 22 99 65

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 22 05 00543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 COMMON WORK FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMSNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 8


Part 1 General

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


.2 The Division 23 Common Work Results for HVAC shall govern the Division 22 Plumbing sections of the work (read in conjunction with Division 1). This section covers items common to Division 22 series sections and is intended only to supplement the requirements of Division 1 and 23.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Concrete Division 3

.2 Trenching and Backfilling Division 33

.3 Piped Utilities Division 33

.4 Electrical Division 26

1.3 COORDINATION

.1 Plumbing drawings are diagrammatic and approximately to scale. They establish the scope of the work and the general location and orientation of the plumbing systems. The systems shall be installed generally in the locations and generally along the routings shown, close to the building structure and coordinated with other services. Piping shall be concealed within walls, ceilings or other spaces and shall be routed to maximize head room and the intended use of the space through which they pass, unless specifically noted otherwise.



.2 Installation, workmanship and testing shall conform to the following standards:

.1 British Columbia Building Code

.2 Local Building By-Laws (City of Quesnel and the Cariboo Regional District)

.3 National Building Code of Canada

.4 CSA B149.1, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code

.5 British Columbia Gas and Safety Branch Bulletins

.6 CSA Standard Z7396.1 Medical Gas Pipeline Systems

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 and Division 23.

.2 Shop drawings are required for all materials and equipment including, but not limited, to the following:

.1 Cleanouts and access panels.

.2 Floor drains

.3 Floor Sinks

.4 Funnel Floor Drain

.5 Hydrants/hose bibbs

.6 Plumbing fixtures

.7 Pumps and controls

.8 Trap primers.



.9 Valves.

.10 Water hammer arrestors.

.11 Pipe, fittings and couplings.

.12 Fire stopping.

.13 Emergency Eye Wash



1.7 RECORD DRAWINGS

.1 Provide project record drawings for all plumbing systems as specified in Section 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC.

1.8 OCCUPANCY DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS

.1 Provide occupancy documentation for all plumbing work as specified in Section 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC.


.3 Seismic restraint system letters of assurance Schedules B and C-B from the plumbing contractor’s seismic restraint engineer.

.4 Backflow Prevention Assembly Test Reports for each backflow prevention device, signed by the tester.:

.5 Letter confirming that all penetrations of rated assemblies have been firestopped in conformance with CAN4-S115, on the firestopping installing agencies letterhead.

.6 Copies of pressure test reports for all piping systems on contractor’s letterhead.

.7 Chlorination certificates for potable water systems.

.8 Balancing reports for domestic hot water recirculation systems.

.9 Heat trace megger test reports for each circuit, on the manufacturer’s representative’s letterhead.

.10 Plumbing inspector’s final certificate.

.11 Gas inspector’s final certificate.

.12 Maintenance manuals for plumbing systems.

1.9 TEMPORARY USAGE OF PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

.1 Plumbing equipment and systems shall not be used without the written permission of the Design Authority and in no circumstances shall be used prior to testing and inspection.

1.10 CHROMIUM PLATED PIPING

.1 Use strap wrenches only on chromium plated pipe or fittings. Surfaces damaged by wrench marks shall be replaced. Joints shall be threaded or slip joints.

1.11 EXISTING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED

.1 All existing plumbing piping systems that become obsolete as a result of the work or depicted on the drawings for abandonment shall be removed, and/ or disposed of if the Owner declines to retain, in the following situations:



.1 Where specifically noted on the drawings for removal.

.2 Where plumbing piping systems are exposed.

.3 Where ceilings are opened-up for any reason that would permit such removal to be implemented. In such a case only those portions of the plumbing system that can be removed without taking down more ceiling shall be removed.

.2 All existing plumbing equipment that become obsolete as a result of the work or depicted on the drawings for removal shall be removed, and/ or disposed of if the Owner declines to retain.

.1 If the Owner is to keep the equipment, move to a location as identified by the Owner.







1.13 SOIL CONDITIONS

.1 All buried metallic (cast iron, ductile iron) pipe materials in direct contact with the ground material shall be hot asphalt coated on all exterior surfaces including all couplings prior to installation of bedding and backfill. Asphalting operating may be carried out with piping installed in place in trench on wooden blocks prior to bedding installation.

1.14 BUILDING SHRINKAGE AND SETTLEMENT

.1 Due to special soil conditions at the site of this project, buried services may settle greater than normally anticipated.

.2 All underground water, sanitary and storm system piping are to include the following provisions:

.1 Short lengths of piping maximum 900 mm [36"] with flexible couplings at all points of transition between the "slab band" structure and the "floating slab" structure. See drawings.

.2 Flexible couplings shall include mechanical joint or push-on rubber ring joint fittings.

1.15 COLD WEATHER PROTECTION

.1 Roof Penetrations:

.1 All vent penetrations of roof structure shall be 100 mm [4"] minimum size.

1.16 SEISMIC PROTECTION

.1 Refer to Section 22 05 49 Seismic Restraint Systems for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.





1.17 BUILDING OPERATION DURING CONSTRUCTION

.1 In order to minimize operational difficulties for the building's staff, the Contractor must cooperate with the Owner throughout the entire construction period and particularly ensure that noise is minimized.

.2 Convenient access for the staff and public to the building must always be maintained . Minor inconvenience and interruption of services will be tolerated, provided advance notice is given, but the Contractor will be expected to coordinate his work, in consultation with the owner, so the operation of the facility can be maintained as nearly normal as possible.

1.18 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC)

.1 The following equipment and systems shall include contacts and/or electronic relays as required as an integral part of the equipment supplied and installed in the Plumbing Section of the work to allow connection from such equipment to the existing DDC system.

.2 The plumbing systems and each condition to be monitored and/or controlled within each plumbing system for remote readout on the DDC system is as follows:

.1 Hot water recirculation pumps.

.2 Domestic hot water recirc temperature

.3 Domestic hot water temperature

.3 Refer to Division 25 for further detail. Connection from plumbing systems equipment to DDC by Division 25.


.1 Protect all existing services encountered. Every effort has been made to show the known existing services. However, the removal of concealing surfaces may reveal other existing services. Work with the Owner's staff to trace the originating source and points served. Obtain instructions from the Consultant when existing services require relocation or modifications, other than those already indicated in the Contract Documents.

.2 Arrange work to avoid shutdowns of existing services. Where shutdowns are unavoidable, obtain the Owner's approval of the timing, and work to minimize any interruptions.

.3 In order to maintain existing services in operation, temporary relocations and/or bypasses of piping may be required.

.4 Be responsible for any damages to existing system by this work.

.5 The Owner reserves the right to withhold permission for a reasonable period with respect to any shutdown, if shutting off a service will interfere with important operations.

Part 2 Products

2.1 PRODUCT CONSISTENCY

.1 All products utilized on the project shall be as per the shop drawing submissions.

.2 All products of a similar nature used in a similar system or application shall be of the same manufacturer throughout the project.

2.2 ACCESS DOORS


2.3 CLEANOUTS

.1 Cleanouts shall be full size for pipe sizes up to 100 mm [4"] and not less than 100 mm [4"] on larger sizes. Cleanouts in inside finished areas shall all be of the same shape either round or square.



.2 Cleanouts passing through a waterproofed floor or a slab on grade subject to hydrostatic pressure shall possess a clamping collar which shall be clamped to the floor membrane or lead flashing.

.3 Pipe manufacturers' cleanouts are acceptable for vertical installation at the base of soil and waste stacks or rainwater leaders only.

.4 Make cleanouts with Barrett type fitting that has a bolted cover plate and gasket, fitting that has a threaded plug, or a cleanout ferrule that is installed in a wye or extended wye.

.5 Unfinished concrete area cleanouts shall be of heavy-duty construction and have a fully exposed scoriated cover. Standard of Acceptance: Zurn Z1400, Jay R. Smith 4229, Watts, Mifab

.6 Lino or lino tiled area cleanouts shall have the centre portion of cover recessed to receive a piece of tile that matches the adjoining tile. Standard of Acceptance: Zurn ZN 1400-X or ZN 1400-TX, Jay R. Smith 4140, Ancon, Mifab

.7 Ceramic tile floor area cleanouts shall have a fully exposed scoriated cover. Standard of Acceptance: Zurn ZN 1400 or ZN 1400-T, Jay R. Smith 4020, Ancon, Mifab

.8 Terrazzo tile floor area cleanouts have the centre portion of cover recessed to receive terrazzo that matches the adjoining terrazzo finish. Standard of Acceptance: Zurn ZN 1400-Z, Jay R. Smith 4180, Ancon, Mifab

2.4 SERVICE PENETRATIONS IN RATED FIRE SEPARATIONS


2.5 SERVICE PENETRATIONS IN NON-RATED FIRE SEPARATIONS


2.6 FIRE STOPPING AND SMOKE SEAL MATERIALS


2.7 MISCELLANEOUS METAL RELATED TO PLUMBING SYSTEMS

.1 Frames shall be of welded construction consisting of angle iron sections with 7.9 mm [5/16"] locating strips and anchoring lugs at a minimum of 900 mm [36"] centres.

.2 Cover plates shall be constructed of minimum 7.9 mm [5/16"] checker plate in sections not exceeding 0.93 square metres [10 ft2] in size with lifting holes at each end of each section. Cover plates shall be provided complete with at least two lifting keys.

.3 Gasketing between frames and cover plates on sanitary systems shall be of rubber construction.

.4 Backing Plates shall be adequate to support the use intended and shall be a minimum 4.76 mm [3/16"] in thickness.

2.8 PIPE BEDDING

.1 All buried piping inside the building below floors and slabs except for footing drains, shall be supported on a bed of well compacted sand (i.e. 95% Modified Proctor Density). Bedding shall extend from 150 mm [6"] below pipe and shall support the pipe barrel; not the joints and/or couplings. Before backfilling, the complete line shall be inspected and approved by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction.



Part 3 Execution

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION

.1 General:

.1 Install piping straight, parallel and close to walls and ceilings, with a fall of not less than 1:100 for gravity piping and with a slope to drain cocks, fixtures or equipment for all pressure piping unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Use standard fittings for direction changes. Provide drain cocks as required.

.2 Install groups of piping parallel to each other; spaced to permit application of insulation, identification, and service access, on trapeze hangers.

.3 Where pipe size differs from connection size to equipment, install reducing fitting close to equipment. Reducing bushings are not permitted.

.4 Brass and copper pipe and tubing shall be free from surface damage. Replace damaged pipe or tubing.

.5 Ream ends of pipe and tubes before installation.

.6 Lay copper pipe so that it is not in contact with dissimilar metal and will not be crimped or collapsed. All joints on cast or ductile iron pressure service piping shall be made electrically conductive.

.7 Install flanges or unions to permit removal of equipment without disturbing piping systems.

.8 Clean ends of pipes or tubing and recesses of fittings to be jointed. Assemble joints without binding.

.9 Install piping to connections at fixtures, equipment, outlets and all other appurtenances requiring service. Trap and vent waste connections to fixtures. Grade all vents to drain back to waste piping.

.10 Plug or cap pipe and fittings to keep out debris during construction.

.11 Jointing of pipe shall be compatible with type of pipe used.

.12 Non-corrosive lubricant or Teflon tape shall be applied to the male thread of threaded joints.

.13 Flush and clean out piping systems after testing.

.2 Equipment Drainage:

.1 Install drain valves at low points.

.2 Extend equipment drain piping to discharge into floor or hub drain.

.3 Expansion and Contraction and Building Seismic Joints:

.1 Support piping to prevent any stress or strain.

.4 Install pressure piping with loops and offsets which will permit expansion and contraction to occur without damaging the pressure piping system.

.5 Buried Piping:

.1 Lay pipe on compacted bedding of clean, coarse sand free from clay, snow or ice, organic matter or stones.

.2 Do not lay pipe in water or when conditions are unsuitable.

3.2 ACCESS DOORS

.1 Install access doors at all concealed cleanouts, traps, unions, expansion joints, valves, control valves, air vents, water hammer arrestors, special equipment, trap primers, vacuum breakers and any other equipment for which subsequent periodic access will be required during the life of said equipment.

.2 Locate access doors so that all concealed items are readily accessible for adjustment, operation, maintenance and replacement.



.3 Do not locate access doors in feature walls or ceilings without the prior approval of the Consultant and the Hospital Facility Maintenance and Operation staff. Locate in service areas and storage rooms wherever possible.

3.3 CLEANOUTS

.1 Install cleanouts at the following locations:

.1 Changes of direction of more than 45 degrees in drainage piping.

.2 Nominally horizontal branch or building drain at intervals of not more than 7.5 metres [25'] for pipe sizes 65 mm [2½"] and less, 15 metres [50'] for 75 mm [3"] and 100 mm [4"] pipe sizes, and 26 metres [85'] for pipe sizes larger than 100 mm [4"].

.3 Fixture drain of a sink, kitchen piping or grease waste piping at intervals not exceeding 7.5 metres [25'] for pipe all sizes.

.4 Base of soil or waste stacks and rainwater leaders.

.5 As called for by the applicable codes.

.2 Cleanouts which are located low on walls shall be located 75 mm [3"] minimum above the top of the baseboard or minimum 200 mm [8"] above finished floor level where there is no baseboard.

.3 Cleanouts shall be coordinated with all millwork and with all other obstructions, shall be placed in readily accessible locations and shall have enough clearance for rodding and cleaning.

.4 Extend cleanouts to the finished floor or wall unless exposed in a basement room, pipe tunnel or accessible crawlspace.

.5 Cleanouts in wet floor areas shall extend above the floor in walls or be provided with gasketed waterproofed tops.

.6 Cleanouts on outside drains shall be brought to grade and anchored in a concrete collar.


.1 Refer to section 22 05 29 for Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Systems.

3.5 PIPE SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS


3.6 CUTTING, PATCHING, DIGGING, CANNING, AND CORING


3.1 MISCELLANEOUS METALS


3.2 PIPING EXPANSION

.1 All piping systems, including all take-offs shall be so installed within the building that the piping and connected equipment will not be distorted by expansion, contraction or settling.

.2 If circumstances on the job require additional changes in direction from those shown on the drawings, the configuration shall be adjusted to suit at no extra cost.

.3 Anchors shall be installed where necessary to control expansion. Expansion joints or loops shall be installed on hot water piping where required.

3.3 TESTING AND INSPECTION

.1 Furnish all labour, materials, instruments, etc. necessary for all required tests. All work shall be subject to inspection by local plumbing inspector.



.2 All leaks shall be corrected by remaking the joints. The systems shall be retested until no leaks are observed.

.3 No plumbing system or part thereof shall be covered until it has been inspected and approved by the Plumbing Inspector.

.4 If any plumbing system or part thereof is covered before being inspected or approved, it shall be uncovered upon the direction of the Plumbing Inspector or Consultant.

3.4 PROJECT PHOTOGRAPHS

.1 The Contractor shall provide digital photographs in “jpeg” format to the Consultant complete with a text description or each photograph including the date, system type, materials used, and location/direction for all sections of underground piping pros to backfilling. Submit the photographs via email and/or disc as requested by the Consultant.

.2 Provide additional digital photographs of the work as requested by the Consultant to assist in the resolution of RFIs, prior to covering the work.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 MOTOR REQUIRMENTS FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Refer to Section 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC. Comply with all requirements of that Section of work as related to general requirements, products and execution.

.2 In addition to the piping, equipment and systems listed in Section 23 05 13 provide motors for all plumbing equipment including the following:

.1 Domestic Hot Water Recirculation system

.2 Pumps and all other equipment.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Refer to Section 23 05 20 Thermometers and Pressure Gauges for HVAC. Comply with all requirements of that Section of work as related to general requirements, products and execution.

.2 In addition to the piping, equipment and systems listed in Section 23 05 20 provide thermometers and pressure gauges on all plumbing piping systems and equipment including the following:

.1 Domestic cold water.

.2 Domestic hot water

.3 Domestic hot water recirculation

.4 Natural gas.

.5 And all other equipment.

.3 Provide pressure gauges complete with isolation ball valves on both sides of all pressure reducing valves, backflow prevention stations and other equipment intended to change the pressure of the fluid.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


.2 Also refer to Section 22 05 48 Vibration Isolation for Plumbing Piping and Equipment, and Section 22 05 49 Seismic Restraint Systems for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Refer to Section 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment. Comply with all requirements of that Section of work as related to general requirements, products and execution.

.2 The contractor is to arrange and pay for the services of a BC registered professional engineer to provide all required engineering services necessary for the complete design, sizing and detailing of all anchors and anchor supports to the structure required for the project. Submit details for approval.

.3 In addition to the piping, equipment and systems listed in Section 23 05 29 provide hangers and supports on all plumbing piping and equipment including:




.4 Sanitary waste and venting.

.5 Grease waste.

.6 Storm drainage.

.7 Natural gas and

.8 All other equipment.

.4 Hangers, threaded rods, nuts and associated components for hanging of under-slab piping shall be stainless steel and shall be fixed to the foundation or structural slab.

.5 Spacing of hangers shall comply with B.C. Building Code.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


.2 Also refer to Section 22 05 49 Seismic Restraint Systems for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Refer to Section 23 05 48 Vibration Isolation for HVAC Piping and Equipment. Comply with all requirements of that Section of work as related to general requirements, products and execution.

.2 In addition to the piping, equipment and systems listed in Section 23 05 48 provide vibration isolation on all plumbing piping and equipment including the following:



.3 Domestic Hot Water Recirculation


.5 Grease Sanitary waste.

.6 Storm drainage.

.7 Natural gas.


END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS FOR PLUMBING



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


.2 Also refer to Section 22 05 48 Vibration Isolation for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Refer to Section 23 05 49 Seismic Restraint Systems for HVAC Piping and Equipment. Comply with all requirements of that Section of work as related to general requirements, products and execution.

.2 In addition to the piping, equipment and systems listed in Section 23 05 49 provide seismic restraints on all plumbing piping and equipment including the following:






.6 Storm drainage.

.7 Natural gas.

.8 And all other equipment

1.3 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide letters of assurance signed and sealed by the contractor’s specialist registered Professional Engineer.

.2 The contractor’s Professional Engineer shall provide field reviews of the work on site as the work progresses and submit signed copies of the reports to the Consultant.


.4 Submit Schedule B to the Consultant and to the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of the shop drawing submission.

.5 Submit Schedule C-B to the Consultant and to the local Authority Having Jurisdiction a minimum of 10 working days prior to Occupancy.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Refer to Section 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment. Comply with all requirements of that Section of work as related to general requirements, products and execution.

.2 In addition to the piping, equipment and systems listed in Section 23 05 53 provide identification on all plumbing piping, valves and equipment including the following:






.6 Storm drainage.

.7 Natural gas.


END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 TESTING & ADJUSTING FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


.2 Refer to Section 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting & Balancing for HVAC. Comply with all requirements of that Section of work as related to General Requirements, Products and Execution.

.3 Also refer to Section 22 08 00 Commissioning of Plumbing Systems.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 In addition to the piping, equipment and systems listed in Section 23 05 93 provide testing, adjusting and balancing for all plumbing piping, equipment and systems including the following:





.5 Grease sanitary waste.

.6 Storm drainage.

.7 Natural gas.


.2 Balancing of the domestic hot water system by a recognized balancing agency and submission of a balancing report is mandatory.

.3 Pressure test all plumbing piping systems in accordance with the specific requirements of the specification sections that describe those systems.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


.2 Also refer to Section 22 07 16 Plumbing Equipment Insulation.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Refer to Section 23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation. Comply with all requirements of that Section of work as related to general requirements, products and execution.

.2 In addition to the piping and systems listed in Section 23 07 19 provide piping insulation on all plumbing piping systems including the following:


.2 Domestic hot water and


.4 Existing Storm drainage piping for the full length of the systems located within the building and the underside of drain bodies.

.5 Sanitary vent stacks for the last 3 meters prior to penetrating the roof or penetrating a cold attic or similar space.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Refer to Section 23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC. Comply with all requirements of that Section of work as related to general requirements, products and execution.

.2 In addition to the piping, equipment and systems listed in Section 23 08 00 provide commissioning of all plumbing piping, equipment and systems including the following:





.5 Grease sanitary waste

.6 Storm drainage.

.7 Natural gas.


.3 Commissioning related to plumbing systems shall include the start-up, set up, adjustment and recording of the operational data of at least all the following systems and components as related to the project:

.1 Incoming municipal water pressure.

.2 Pressure reducing valve set points and downstream pressures.

.3 Domestic water temperature set points (Temperature Maintenance).

.4 Individual tempered water mixing valve set points.

.5 Balancing of the domestic hot water recirculation systems.

.6 Operation of all plumbing fixtures including confirmation of meeting the requirements of CSA Z317.1.

.7 Megger tests of heat trace cables for hot water temperature maintenance.

.8 Set points for all control devices.

.9 Testing and certification of all backflow preventers.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 DOMESTIC WATER DISTRIBUTION



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Domestic water systems include domestic cold water, domestic hot water, and domestic hot water recirculation systems.

.2 Interior domestic water piping shall be provided as depicted on the drawings to all plumbing fixtures, appliances and equipment that require domestic water service.

.3 New interior domestic water piping shall be connected to receive domestic water supply from the existing domestic water piping as depicted on the drawings.

.4 Non-functioning existing interior domestic water piping shall be removed where access is readily available or capped off and abandoned in place as referenced on the drawings.

1.3 CROSS CONNECTION CONTROL

.1 All installations shall be in accordance with the recommendations contained in the latest edition of the Cross-Connection Control Manual published by Pacific Northwest Section of the American Water Works Association.

.2 Double check valve assemblies and reduced pressure principle backflow prevention devices shall have approval from the Foundation for Cross Connection Control, University of Southern California.

.3 Vacuum breakers shall conform to the requirements of C.S.A. B64.5.

.4 Following installation, a test report completed by a certified tester shall be submitted to the Owner, indicating satisfactory operation of each device.

.5 Tests are to be conducted in the period 30 to 60 days prior to date of Substantial Completion.

.6 Provide one repair kit for every cross-connection control device installed.

Part 2 Products


.1 Above ground water pipe and fittings inside the building:

.1 Cold water:

.1 Type 'K' hard drawn seamless copper tubing to ASTM B88 or copper pipe to ASTM B42. All copper water tubing shall be certified by the Canadian Standards Association or Warnock Hersey Professional Services Ltd. to ASTM B88.

.2 Hot water:

.1 Type 'K' hard drawn seamless copper tubing to ASTM B88 or copper pipe to ASTM B42. All copper water tubing shall be certified by the Canadian Standards Association or Warnock Hersey Professional Services Ltd. to ASTM B88.

.3 Hot water Recirculation:

.1 Type 'K' hard drawn seamless copper tubing to ASTM B88 or copper pipe to ASTM B42. All copper water tubing shall be certified by the





Canadian Standards Association or Warnock Hersey Professional Services Ltd. to ASTM B88.

.4 Fittings

.1 Above ground copper water pipe fittings inside the building:

.2 Use of the 'T-Drill' system of joining copper piping is not acceptable.

.3 Cast brass or wrought copper solder joint pressure fittings with 95/5 Sn/Sb or Silvabrite 100 solder joints; or

.4 Cast bronze or wrought copper roll grooved pressure fittings with grooved mechanical pipe connector couplings with angle bolt pad and Victaulic style of 'flush seal' gaskets or Shurjoint ‘Gap Seal’ gaskets.

.5 Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic 'The Copper Connection System for Copper Tubing (CTS)' with 606 couplings, 600 Series fittings and 641 flange adaptors.

.6 Exception: Where compression fittings are required they shall be to ANSI B16.22

2.2 VALVES

.1 All valves to be certified lead free and contaminant free, and NSF-61 compliant.

.1 Gate: (for shut-off and isolation)

.1 NPS 2 and smaller:

.1 Standard of Acceptance:

.1 Soldered. Kitz 807

.2 Threaded Kitz 808

.2 Ball: (in lieu of gate valves or as specified)



.1 Soldered.

.2 Threaded

.3 Butterfly: (in lieu of gate valves or as specified,)

.1 NPS 2½ and larger: flanged, full lug body,

.2 to MSS-SP-67, ANSI 150 temperature and pressure rating and suitable for working pressures up to 1720 kPa (250 psig) at 100°C (212°F)

.1 Factory tested to minimum of 2067 kPa (300 psig) at 37.8°C (100°F)

.4 Globe: (for throttling, bypass and make-up applications)



.1 Soldered.

.2 Threaded

.2 NPS 2½ and larger: flanged,

.1

.5 Swing Check Valves: (for horizontal installation only)



.1 Soldered.





.2 Threaded

.2 NPS 2½ and larger: flanged,

.1

.6 Balance: (for domestic hot water recirculation)

.1 Lead free, NSF/ ANSI 61 & 372 certified, automatic flow limiting valve specifically designed for domestic potable water applications, threaded ends..


.1 Nexus UltraMatic UMNL up to 25mm [1”]

.7 Pressure Reducing Valves

.1 Pressure reducing valve with integral low flow bypass:

.2 Vacuum relief: (for DHW tanks)

.8 Drain Valves:

.9 Solenoid Valves:

.10 Mixing Valves (tempered water):

.1 Refer to Section 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures.

.2 Gate: (for shut-off and isolation)

.1 Gate valves NPS 2 and under, soldered

.1 1000 kPa (150 psig) to MSS SP-80, Class 150, bronze body, solid wedge bronze disc, non-rising stem, screw in, or union bonnet.

.2 Standard of Acceptance: Solder joint type: Jenkins 300P, Kitz 41, Red & White / Toyo 281A.

.2 Gate valves NPS 2 and under, threaded

.1 1000 kPa (150 psig), to MSS SP-80, Class 150, bronze body, solid wedge disc, rising stem, screw in, or union bonnet.

.2 1000 kPa (150 psig) to 2000 kPa (300 psig), to MSS SP-80, Class 300, bronze body, solid wedge disc, rising stem, union or screw in bonnet.

.3 Standard of Acceptance: Threaded joint type: Crane 428, Grinnell 3000, Grinnell Powell 507, Jenkins 810, Kitz 40, Lunkenheimer 2127, Newman-Hattersley A40AT or 33X, Nibco T113, Red & White / Toyo 280A.

.3 Ball: (in lieu of gate valves or as specified)

.1 50 mm [2"] and smaller, two-piece bronze body, full port, blow-out proof stem, PTFE seat, brass chrome plated bronze ball, lever handle operator, 1035 kPa [150 psig] rating.

.2 Handle extensions suitable to clear 50 mm (2 in) pipe insulation thickness.


.1 Solder joint type: Red & White / Toyo 5049A, Apollo 70-100, Crane, Grinnell 171S, Jenkins, Kitz 59, Lunkenheimer 746FS or 747FS, MAS B-4, Newman-Hattersley, Nibco, Watts, Worcester.

.2 Threaded joint type: Red & White / Toyo 5044A, Apollo-70-200 Series, Crane 93-TF, Grinnell 171N, Jenkins-1101-T, Kitz 58, Lunkenheimer 746F or 747F, MAS B-3, Newman-Hattersley 1969AT, Nibco T-580-BR, Watts B-6000, Worcester 4211-RT.

.4 Swing Check Valves: (for horizontal installation only)

.1 50 mm [2"] and smaller, to MSS SP-80, threaded ends, bronze body, threaded cap, bronze or brass swing disc, Pressure Class 125.






.1 Crane 37

.5 Pressure Reducing Valves:

.1 6 mm [¼"] to 9 mm [3/8"] ,860 kPa [125 psig] rating.


.1 Watts 215, Cash Acme, Singer.

.2 12 mm [½"] to 50 mm [2"], 860 kPa [125 psig] rating.


.1 Watts 223, Braukman, Conbraco, Cash Acme, Singer.

.6 Pressure reducing valve with integral low flow bypass:

.1 40 mm [1½"] and larger, 860 kPa [125 psig] rating.


.1 Watts PV-10-06M, Clayton, Singer, Wilkins.

.7 Drain Valves:

.1 Ball type with outlet with hose threads, brass body, cap & chain and chrome plated brass ball.


.1 Kitz 58CC, Red & White / Toyo 5046, Dahl.

.8 Solenoid Valves:

.1 Slow-closing forged brass body, Buna "N" disc, stainless steel parts, enclosure to suit environmental conditions, UL and CSA approved, 120 volt.


.1 ASCO

.9 Mixing Valves (tempered water):

.1 Refer to Section 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures.

2.3 VACUUM BREAKERS

.1 Pressure type:

.1 CSA approved, mechanically independent spring-loaded poppet type check valve with a downstream spring loaded air inlet valve, with upstream and downstream isolation valves and test cocks.

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Cla-Val 27, Conbraco 40-500, Febco 765, Watts 800, Wilkins 720A

.2 Atmospheric type:

.1 CSA approved, bronze body, chrome plate finish where exposed.


.1 Conbraco 38-100; Febco 710 / 715A; Watts 288A, 288AC; Wilkins 30; Rainbird

.3 All vacuum breakers shall be sized in accordance with the following table:

Pipe Sizemm [in.]

Pressure Type Sizemm [in.]

Atmospheric Type Size

12 - 25 [½ - 1]30 - 40 [1¼ - 1½]50 - 75 [2 - 3]

12 [½]19 [3/4]25 [1]

Full Pipe SizeFull Pipe SizeFull Pipe Size





2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTION STATIONS

.1 Double check valve assembly (DCVA), factory assembled station to CAN/CSA-B64.10 and CAN/CSA-B64.10.1.

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Watts Series 709; Ames 3000 Series; Beeco #FDC, #2, CXm F-72; Cla-Val D, D2; Conbraco 400-100; Hersey #1; Neptune 550, DHC; Febco 805; Wilkins 950, MBD-10.

.2 Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device (RPPD), with inlet and outlet shut-off valves, double check valve assembly, differential relief outlet and repair/maintenance kit to CAN/CSA-B64.10 and CAN/CSA-B64.10.1.

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Watts Series 909; Ames 4000 Series; Beeco #FRP-11, #6CM; Cla-Val RP; Conbraco 40-200; Febco 835B, 825; Neptune 575; Wilkins 975, MBC-8, MBC-10.

2.5 STRAINERS

.1 Sized on a 4 to 1 ratio of basket open area to connecting pipe cross-sectional area, 'Y' pattern, 304 stainless steel screen.

.1 50 mm [2"] and smaller: threaded ends, bronze body, 1034 kPa [150 psig] rating.

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Red & White / Toyo 380, Crane 988-1/2, Armstrong, Muessco, RP&C 59, Sarco (Canada), Kitz 15.

.2 65 mm [2½"] and larger, flanged ends, cast iron body, 860 kPa rating.

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Red & White / Toyo 381A, RP&C 531, Crane 989-1/2, Armstrong, Muessco, Sarco (Canada), Kitz 80.

2.6 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

.1 Bellows or piston manufactured style with stainless steel casing and welded stainless steel nesting bellows if of the bellows style. Air chambers are unacceptable.

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Zurn Z-1700 Series bellows style, Jay R. Smith, Ancon, Amtrol, Watts; Precision Plumbing Products Inc. piston style.

2.7 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES

.1 Refer to Section 22 05 20 Thermometers and Pressure Gauges.

2.8 TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

.1 A.S.M.E. rated for the energy input to the system and the pressure rating of the equipment.

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Watts, Cash Acme.

2.9 PIPE JOINTS

.1 Solders and fluxes having a lead content and self-cleaning acid type fluxes are not acceptable.

.2 All copper to steel or iron and flanged adaptors shall be brass, not copper.

.3 All unions or similar interconnections between dissimilar metals shall be dielectric couplings.


.1 Epco Dielectric Pipe Fittings, Victaulic dielectric waterway

2.10 AIR VENTS

.1 Automatic float type, 1035 kPa [150 psig] max. operating pressure.

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Armstrong 11-AV, Maid-o-Mist 71, Taco 426, Amtrol.





2.11 HOSE BIBBS

.1 Hose Bibb Type: (mixing type):

.1 Provide a mixing type hose bibb for the hose real shown on the kitchen consultant drawings

.2 Encased self-draining hot and cold mixing wall hydrant with thread on vacuum breaker.

.3 Standard of Acceptance: Zurn ZN-1325-5, Watts, Jay R. Smith, Mifab

2.12 TRAP SEAL PRIMERS

.1 Time clock controlled electronic trap primer:

.1 Provide trap priming assembly to maintain a constant water seal in multiple floor drain traps.

.2 Assembly shall include

.1 16-gauge galvanized steel metal cabinet, suitable for recessed mounting, stainless steel access door with screwdriver latch

.2 Manual shut off valve

.3 Anti-syphon atmospheric vacuum breaker

.4 Calibrated manifold header for equal distribution to suit number of drains

.5 BMS controlled solenoid valve].

.6 24V Solenoid Valve

.7 20mm [3/4”] type L copper tubing

.8 Lead-free (<0.2%) soldered joints

.9 Select unit model/size to suit number of connected drains.


.1 Precision Plumbing Products Prime-Time Electronic Trap Priming Assembly

Part 3 Execution

3.1 CONCEALED SUPPLY PIPING

.1 Concealed water supply piping to plumbing fixtures, trim items, equipment, hose bibbs, etc. shall be installed using cast brass 90 degree drop ear elbow or drop ear tees as the piping design dictates.

.2 Blocking shall be provided within the concealed space and the elbows and tees shall be secured to the blocking using brass screws to provide a rigid installation.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

.1 Combined domestic and fire suppression systems:

.1 Coordinate with the fire suppression contractor regarding all valves in piping systems that serve both domestic and fire suppression systems. These valves shall be ULC and / or FM labeled for use in fire suppression systems and shall be provided with supervisory switches for monitoring their valve position by the fire alarm system.

.2 Where possible, disassemble solder end joint valves before soldering.

.3 Where disassembly and the subsequent reassembly is not possible, the contractor shall give special regard to solder jointing in order not to damage, melt or deform and valve parts.





.4 Shut Off Valves:

.1 Install shut-off or isolation valves whether shown on the drawings or not at the following locations:

.1 At each main branch supply point; provide a valve on each outlet leg from the tee or cross.

.2 At each single plumbing fixture

.3 At each single piece of equipment.

.4 At all points as indicated on the drawings.

.5 At all points where the plumbing code requires same.

.5 Drain Valves:

.1 Install drain valves 18 mm [3/4"] minimum, or line size where the piping is smaller than 18 mm [3/4"].

.2 Install a hose-end adaptor, cap and chain on the discharge side of each drain valve or pipe to drain where indicated.

.6 Mixing:

.1 On both the up-stream hot and cold supplies, in an accessible location, provide positive swing check valves and strainers. This is a requirement in addition to any check valve device that is common to the mixing valve. Where required, provide an access panel to the check valves and strainers.

3.3 VACUUM BREAKER INSTALLATION

.1 Install at each fixture or item of equipment where contamination of the domestic water system can occur.

.2 Vacuum breaker installation shall be in complete accordance with Clause 1.3 Cross Connection Control and with the manual "Cross Connection Control Manual" published by the Pacific Northwest Section of the American Water Works Association.

.3 Vacuum breaker installation shall be in complete accordance with the manual "Cross Connection Control Manual" published by the Pacific Northwest Section of the American Water Works Association.

.4 All atmospheric type vacuum breakers shall be installed at least 300mm [12"] above flood level rim of fixture.

.5 All vacuum breakers serving fume hoods shall be installed outside fume hood.

.6 Provide drain pan with water deflecting enclosure on concealed pressure type vacuum breakers with drain line to appropriate drain.

.7 Complete testing of all vacuum breakers shall be carried out under this section of the work prior to final acceptance of plumbing systems. A certificate shall be submitted duly signed and witnessed that testing was satisfactory.

3.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTION STATION INSTALLATION

.1 Install at each fixture or item of equipment where contamination of the water system can occur.

.2 Pipe differential relief outlet to drain.

.3 Backflow prevention stations shall be in complete accordance with CAN/CSA-B64.10 and CAN/CSA-B64.10.1 Manual for the Selection and Installation of Backflow Prevention Devices/Manual for the Maintenance and Field Testing of Backflow Prevention Devices.

.4 Complete testing of all double check valve devices shall be carried out by a certified tester under this section of the work prior to final acceptance of plumbing systems.





Submit a certificate for each device duly signed and witnessed that testing was successfully completed.

3.5 STRAINER INSTALLATION

.1 Install strainer blow-off connections.

.2 Blow-off connections shall be full drain connection size and shall include:

.1 Up to 50 mm [2"] - nipple and cap (hot services).

.2 All sizes (cold services) - plug the blow-off connection only.

3.6 FLANGES AND UNIONS

.1 Provide on all connections to pumps, reducing valves, control valves, fixtures, and equipment.

.2 Connections up to and including 50 mm [2"] size shall be all bronze union, 1,035 kPa [150 psig] rating with ground seat; larger connections shall be flanged.

3.7 PRESSURE GAUGES

.1 Install pressure gauge at all pump suction and discharge points and at each pressure reducing station inlet and outlet.


.1 Size in accordance with the Plumbing and Drainage Institute PD1-WH-201 sizing procedures.

.2 Install on branch lines to flush valves, solenoid valves, self-closing faucets, quick closing valves and on refrigeration, kitchen and laundry equipment incorporating solenoid valves.

3.9 THERMOMETERS

.1 Install at the start of the hot water temperature maintenance system.

.2 Locate for ease of readability and such that their sensing elements are directly in the flowing medium and immediately adjacent to the sensing elements.

.3 When installed to sense the water temperature in a pipe; install its sensing element in a non-ferrous, separable well filled with a heat conducting paste. Install the separable well in a form which minimizes the restriction to water flow; if necessary, in a section of oversized pipe.

3.10 PIPE JOINTS

.1 Install dielectric type couplings where copper piping and accessories connect to plumbing equipment such as steel storage tanks, pressure reducing stations and ductile iron pipe.

.2 Where the water service enters the building terminate at the edge of the building and excavation with a Smith Blair standard sleeve coupling having stainless steel nuts and bolts. Bridge the excavation with ductile iron pipe.

.3 Tie rods shall only be used in conjunction with fittings possessing integral tie lugs.

.4 Tie rods complete with their associated nuts and bolts shall be coated with two coats of asphaltic paint after installation.

3.11 HOSE BIBBS

.1 Provide an isolating shut-off valve upstream of all hose bibbs.

.2 Seal around the perimeter of hose bibs with silicone caulk in a neat manner, for a waterproofing seal. Where a water proof membrane is present, provide a hose bibb with a membrane clamp.





3.12 TRAP SEAL PRIMERS VALVES

.1 Provide floor drain trap primers in watercloset rooms and other areas connected to the sanitary sewer in accordance with the plumbing code and as designated on the drawings.

.2 Locate at locations that are readily accessible by the building maintenance staff.


.1 Testing shall consist of hydraulic pressure testing at 1,400 kPa [200 psig] for 8 hours.

.2 Submit signed and dated pressure test reports for all sections of the water distribution systems.

3.14 FLUSHING AND CHLORINATION OF WATER LINES

.1 Thoroughly flush all water piping so that it is free from scale, sediment and debris as soon as possible after the system is filled with water.

.2 On completion of installation and testing, all water piping shall be pre-flushed, chlorinated and flushed again in accordance with AWWA C-601.

.3 Retain a reputable firm qualified to supervise and inspect the chlorination and flushing procedures and perform chemical biological tests as required.

.4 The piping shall be chlorinated so that a chlorine residual of not less than 10 ppm remains in the water after standing for 24 hours. Hypochlorite and water is recommended as a disinfectant. AWWA C-601 recommends the amount of chlorine required.

.5 Submit to the Consultant a certificate from the testing firm stating that chlorination and flushing has been successfully completed.

.6 On projects with water piping being connected to the existing water distribution system including system piping modifications, piping extensions, tenant fit outs etc. flushing and chlorination of all new piping remains a requirement. Provide all required isolation, fill and drain valves required to flush and chlorinate the new piping without impacting the existing system piping.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 22 11 20543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPSNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 2


Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Domestic water systems include domestic cold water, domestic hot water, domestic tempered water and domestic water re-circulation systems.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 23 05 00.

.2 Submit shop drawings of pump curves with operating points indicated. Include NPSH curve when applicable.

.3 Submit manufacturer's detailed composite wiring diagrams for control systems showing factory installed wiring and equipment on packaged equipment or required for controlling devices or ancillaries, accessories, controllers.

.4 Submit motor efficiencies for all motor sizes 1 horsepower and over. Refer to Section 23 05 13 for minimum efficiencies.


.1 Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25% of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

.2 Where pumps are operated in conjunction with others such as parallel pumps, show all operating points on the pump curve.

.3 All grooved joint piping components used in pump drops and connections shall be the products of a single manufacturer and shall be rated to full system working pressure. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components.

1.5 GENERAL

.1 Motors powered by variable speed drive controllers shall be EEMAC Class B with Type F insulation, shall have a 1.15 service factor and shall be suitable to be driven by PWM variable speed drive controllers. The motor manufacturer shall submit in writing confirmation that the motors are designed to withstand voltage peaks of 1400 volts and a voltage rate of rise of 2000 volts / microsecond at a frequency of 20 kHz.

Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL

.1 Statically and dynamically balance rotating parts.

.2 Construction shall permit complete servicing without breaking piping or motor connections.

.3 Pumps shall operate at 1750 r/min. unless specified otherwise.

.4 Domestic water pumps shall be all bronze or stainless-steel construction.

2.2 PUMP SEALS

.1 Pumps with suction pressures less than 700 kPa (100 psig) to be fitted with mechanical seals.

.2 Pumps with suction pressures greater than 700 kPa (100 psig) may be fitted with mechanical seals or packing glands.

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 22 11 20543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPSNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 2 of 2


.3 Fit pumps with packing gland with;

.1 Stainless steel shaft, or

.2 Stainless steel shaft sleeve for full length of stuffing box.

2.3 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS

.1 For performance requirements and additional details, refer to separate equipment lists.

.2 Suitable for a maximum working pressure of 860 kPa [125 psig] and maximum temperature of 107oC [225oF].

.3 Provide all bronze pumps for domestic water applications.

.4 Casing: bronze radially split, with flanged connections. Supplied with matching companion flanges.

.5 Impellor: Corrosion resistant cadmium plated steel [stamped brass or bronze].

.6 Shaft: Alloy steel with bronze sleeve bearing, integral thrust collar.

.7 Seal Assembly: Mechanical.

.8 Coupling: Flexible self-aligning.

.9 Motor: Resilient mounted, drip proof, sleeve bearing, ODP motor, rated for AFD application.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Ensure that pumps are installed such that no piping or equipment loads are imposed on the pump body. Provide stanchions or hangers for this purpose. Refer to manufacturer's installation instructions for details.

.2 Pumps shall be aligned by qualified millwright and alignment certified.

.3 Check pump rotation.

.4 Pipe drain tapping to floor drain.

.5 "Start-up" strainer baskets in strainer/suction guides must be removed prior to commissioning of systems.

.6 Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.

.7 Provide line sized gate or Victaulic MasterSeal butterfly valve and strainer on suction and line sized soft seated check valve and memory stop balancing valve on discharge.

.8 Decrease from line size, with long radius reducing elbows or reducers.

.9 Shave or replace pump impellers to meet actual operating conditions.

.10 Where remote control panels are used, this contractor shall allow for wiring from panel to pumps.

.11 Provide seismic restraints for pumps.

.12 Secure control panels for seismic loads.

3.2 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS

.1 Install as indicated by flow arrows.

.2 Support at flanges on outlets of unit.

.3 Install with bearing lubrication points accessible.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 SANITARY AND STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 New Kitchen

.1 Interior sanitary waste and vent piping shall be provided as depicted on the drawings to plumbing fixtures that will discharge sanitary waste and shall be connected to discharge to the existing sanitary waste piping as depicted on the drawings.

.2 Interior storm drainage piping and rainwater leaders shall remain as existing. There are a number of existing rainwater leaders near columns and adjacent to the walls and are all to remain as existing. The contractor to ensure that all existing rainwater leaders are protected during demolition and construction.

.2 Existing Kitchen

.1 Existing sanitary drainage in the existing kitchen is to be demolished above grade and capped with a cleanout at the slab level to allow future connections.

.2 Provide a marked up set of photos, sketch drawing and labels on the floor at each capped off connection to indicate the following:

.1 Size of the existing connection

.2 Previous use of the drain (Equipment type, source etc)

.3 Existing Cafeteria

.1 No scope of work at this time





Part 2 Products

2.1 INTERIOR DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS

.1 Buried pipe and fittings:

.1 Class 4000 cast iron mechanical joint pipe and fittings with mechanical joint stainless-steel couplings to CSA CAN3-B70.

.2 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Drain Waste and Vent Pipe Fittings

.3 conforming to CSA CAN 3-B181.1

.2 Above ground pipe and fittings:

.1 Class 4000 cast iron mechanical joint pipe and fittings with mechanical joint stainless-steel couplings to CSA CAN3-B70 up to 200 mm [8"].

.2 DWV copper drainage pipe with cast brass or wrought copper drainage pattern fittings with recessed solder joints.

.3 Additional Requirements

.1 Pressure waste piping from equipment shall be pressure piping and fittings as specified for domestic water.

.2 Plastic ABS piping where used underground shall adapt to approved non-plastic material prior to penetration above the building slab.

.3 Class 4000 mechanical joint cast iron soil pipe, fittings and mechanical joint couplings shall be of one manufacturer.

.4 Copper to cast iron joints shall be male brass adaptors to tapped fittings.

.5 Nipples shall be cast iron or heavy brass.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

.1 All floor drains, funnel floor drains and floor sinks connected to the sanitary system shall include trap primer connections.

.2 Floor Drain FD-1: (covered grate for finished areas).

.1 Dura-coated cast iron body with bottom outlet, combination invertible membrane clamp and adjustable collar with seepage slots and top assembly A/W pre-packaged shims for tilt correction and integrated, self-contained "Type B" light duty, heel proof strainer with rough-in cover for protection during concrete pour. Cast iron floor drain with secondary drainage flange with gasketted bolt down solid cover over secondary screen. Cast iron non-plated parts to be coated for rust prevention, D.C.C.I. Body Assembly w/ Polished Stainless Steel Top, trap primer connection and sediment bucket

.2 Standard of Acceptance: Zurn Z415-BZ1-ZS-P-Y, Watts, Jay R. Smith, Mifab

.3 Floor Drain FFD-1: (funnel for finished areas).

.1 Cast iron floor drain with secondary drainage flange and 125 mm [5"] diameter adjustable nickel bronze strainer with 90 mm x 230 mm [3¼" x 8"] nickel bronze oval funnel. Cast iron non-plated parts to be coated for rust prevention.

.2 Standard of Acceptance: Zurn ZN-415-BF-P-Y, Watts, Jay R. Smith, Mifab

.4 Floor Drain FS-1: (floor sink).

.1 Cast iron floor sink with secondary drainage flange and 240 mm [9½"] square nickel bronze grate and frame, white acid resisting epoxy coated interior, aluminum interior anti-splash dome strainer and aluminum sediment bucket. Cast iron non-plated parts to be coated for rust prevention.

.2 Standard of Acceptance: Zurn ZN-1901-K-P-2-23-33, Watts, Jay R. Smith, Mifab





.5 Trench Drain

.1 The Trench drain is provided and installed by the kitchen equipment contractor (KEC) with the sanitary drain connection by the mechanical contractor.

.2 Trench drain to be connected to the grease sewerage system.

.3 Refer to the Kitchen Equipment Drawings for additional information and details.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 FLOOR DRAINS

.1 Install floor drains set low to provide proper drainage.

.2 Generally do not locate floor drains in the center of mechanical rooms. Locate floor drains in close proximity to the equipment and / or devices that will be discharging water to them, such that drain connections from the equipment and / or devices can be piped to the floor drains without creating a tripping hazard.

.3 Do not locate floor drains in front of doors.

.4 Water piping from trap primer to floor drain to be PEX tubing where cast into concrete and protected in a polyethylene sleeve where buried below slab. Provide Type L copper where exposed within the building.

3.2 SAFES, FLASHING AND VENT TERMINALS

.1 Connect new venting to existing vent system. If a new roof penetration is required terminate all vent terminals a minimum of 25 mm [1"] above the water level at which roof drainage overflows through roof overflow scuppers or drains.

.2 All cleanouts passing through walls subject to hydrostatic pressure and waterproofed by

.3 Supply and fix 25 kg/m² [5 lb/ft²] sheet lead flashings to all cleanouts and drains. Securely fix to flashing clamps and extend 300 mm [12"] beyond edge of cast iron fittings.

.4 Supply and install 25 kg/m² [5 lb/ft²] lead safes under built-up showers and mop sinks on any floor which is not slab-on-grade. The safes shall extend across the floors and up walls and curb to a minimum height of 150 mm [6"] and shall be turned into the floor drain flange, unless specifically noted otherwise. Seams shall be welded (burned), not soldered. Any metal shall be commercially pure lead only. Treat both sides of the safe with two coats of asphalt.

.5 Chloraloy 240 lining material may be used as an alternate to lead under built-up floor sinks and showers; and at floor drains and cleanouts. Materials shall be solvent welded to manufacturer's installation instructions. Lead shall not be used on roofs where the roofing material is applied by a torch-on method.

.1 Dow reinforced sheeting 45R may be used as an alternative to lead in all applications except in areas in which a rubberized or plastic membrane must be clamped to a drain.

.6 Vent flashing minimum 450 mm x 450 mm [18" x 18"] base dimension shall terminate flush with the top of 300 mm [12"] high vent pipe and the gap between the flashing and pipe shall be closed with a 25 kg/m² [5 lb/ft²] separate lead cap 75 mm [3"] high. The main flashing shall not be turned over the pipe.

.7 Provide intrinsically safe barriers for all sump pumps located within parking garages, vehicle service or parking bays and in other areas which can receive fuels.

3.3 PIPING

.1 Do not install piping with glued joints at temperatures below those recommended by the solvent manufacture.






.1 Tests on the sanitary waste and storm drainage systems shall consist of hydraulic pressure testing of 3000 mm [10’] for 8 hours.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 GREASE SEWER SYSTEMS



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


1.2 SCOPE

.1 All general items, products and execution shall be in accordance with the Facility Sanitary Sewerage section unless specified otherwise in this section.


.1 Connect all kitchen and other grease laden waste producing equipment to the grease interceptors as shown on the drawings.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MANUAL TYPE GREASE TRAP / INTERCEPTORS

.1 Steel body, coated for acid resistance, double wall deep trap, integral clean-out, primary and secondary baffles, clean-out lid or plug, internal flow rate control, gasketed non-skid aluminum cover.

.2 Large Capacity Grease Interceptor GT-1:

.1 Large capacity Acid Resistant Coated interior and exterior fabricated steel grease interceptor, rated at 756 L.P.M. and 182 kg grease capacity, with internal air relief by-pass, bronze cleanout plug (which can be used as a sampling port) and visible double wall trap seal with removable pressure equalizing/flow diffusing baffle. Gasketed non-skid secured cover with removable lift handles, complete with flow control fitting. Regularly furnished with inlet and outlet in high position, c/w Heavy duty traffic cover and Anchor flange

.2 Standard of Acceptance: Zurn Z1172-HD-KC

Part 3 Execution

3.1 PIT INSTALLATION

.1 Provide cover over pit.

3.2 SLAB SUSPENSION

.1 Provide mounting brackets and supports as required to suspend interceptor from above ceiling structure to ensure a rigid installation.

.2 Where the interceptor cover penetrates a rated floor assembly, coordinate with other trades to provide a rated enclosure around the interceptor body.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 RADON MITIGATION SYSTEMS



Part 1 General

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


.2 Refer to the Geotechnical report for detailed requirements.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Please refer to the drawings and Matterport scan of the existing storage room area for existing radon vent locations.

.2 The contractor shall provide protection and maintenance of the existing radon vent system located in the are to be renovated.

.3 Example exisitng radon vent pipe:






1.4 RELATED WORK


.1 Division 1 – General Requirements

.2 Division 22 – Plumbing



543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 RADON MITIGATION SYSTEMS



Part 2 Products

2.1 PRODUCT CONSISTENCY

.1 All products utilized on the project shall be as per the shop drawing submissions.

.2 All products of a similar nature used in a similar system or application shall be of the same manufacturer throughout the project.


.1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) DR35 perforated building sewer pipe and solvent weld fittings conforming to ASTM D3034 and CAN/CSA B182.1; sizes as indicated on the drawings.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 FACILITY NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


.2 Also refer to Division 33 Utilities, Natural Gas Distribution for site underground natural gas piping where required.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Connect to the utility company’s natural gas meter set.

.2 Provide all natural gas piping, fittings, valves, pressure regulators, unions, hangers and supports, and all other components as required for a complete installation generally as depicted on the drawings.

.3 Distribute natural gas to all natural gas outlets, appliances and equipment that require natural gas service including all kitchen equipment. Refer to the kitchen consultant drawings for additional information.

.4 Connect natural gas piping to existing natural gas piping at locations indicated on the drawings.


.1 Submit to the Provincial Gas Inspection Department documentation and detailed drawings as required, pay for and obtain a permit and approval for the natural gas installation prior to commencing work.

.2 All materials and installations shall comply with CAN/CSA B149.1 Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code, and B.C. Code Amendments.

1.4 PAINTING AND COLOR CODING

.1 Painting of all natural gas piping, equipment and material installed under this Division of the specification shall be included under this Division of the work.

.2 Paint all exterior piping including the section of piping from the gas meter to the building entry, piping installed above the roof, piping installed in underground parking garages and all exterior pressure regulating valve vent piping.

.3 Painting shall consist of one coat of Rust-Oleum 769 damp proof red primer, one coat of Rust-Oleum 960 zinc chromate and two finish coats of Rust-Oleum 850 grey enamel paint.

.4 Provide yellow colour-coding identification banding of the natural gas piping as required by the gas code. Also refer to Section 22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.

Part 2 Products

2.1 ABOVE GROUND PIPING

.1 Schedule 40 seamless carbon steel to ASTM A53 and CSA B-63.

2.2 FITTINGS

.1 Screwed fittings up to 50 mm [2”] diameter shall be malleable iron with beaded ends, Class 150 to ANSI B16.3.

.2 Welded fittings 65 mm [2 ½”] and larger shall be forged steel of the same weight as the connecting pipe. Steel butt weld fittings to ANSI B16.9a. Steel pipe flanges and flanged fittings to ANSI B16.5.

.3 Unions shall be malleable iron with ground joints to ANSI B16.3.





.4 Thredolets or Weldolets: - Acceptable Products: Grinnell, Anvil, CCTF, Bonny Forge.

.5 Provide dielectric fittings where a buried service enters and connects to the building piping.

2.3 JOINT MATERIALS

.1 Screwed: Thread lubricant or Teflon paste.

.2 Teflon tape is unacceptable.

.3 Flanged: Full faced gasket materials to ANSI B16.20, ANSI B16.21 or ANSI B21.11, flanged steel weld neck, raised face type, carbon steel (ASTM A307) square headed bolts with hexagon nuts to ANSI B18.2.1 and ANSI B18.2.2. Bolts shall be full diameter of bolt holes.

2.4 MANUAL ISOLATION VALVES

.1 Provincial Gas Department approved and suitable for the temperature to which they are exposed.

.2 Screwed end valves up to 50 mm [2”] and flanged end valves 65 mm [2 ½”] and larger.

.3 Standard of Acceptance: Red & White / Toyo 5044A, Kitz 58, Homestead 601, Emco, Mueller, Rockwell, DeZurik.

2.5 PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES

.1 High tensile iron body with synthetic rubber diaphragm and valve disc.

.2 CSA listed for use in natural gas piping systems.

.3 Standard of Acceptance: Rockwell, Fischer.

2.6 SEISMIC ACTUATED SHUT-OFF VALVES

.1 Seismic actuated automatic shut-off valves, 50 mm:

.1 CSA, UL and State of California certified seismic gas shut-off valve with acceleration trigger mechanism, soft seat construction, visual open/close

indicator and a manual reset capable of operating between -23C [-10F] to 65C

[150F].

.2 The sensing means of the valve shall actuate the shut off within 5 seconds when subjected to a horizontal sinusoidal oscillation having a peak acceleration of 0.3 G (2.94 metres/second2 [9.65 feet/second2]) and a period of 0.4 seconds.

.3 Standard of Acceptance: Koso.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 PIPE JOINTING

.1 Install all piping in accordance with CSA B149.1, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code.

.2 Cut pipe ends square utilizing proper pipe cutting tools. Ream pipe ends and clean scale and dirt from inside and outside the pipe before and after assembly.

.3 Protect all openings in piping and equipment, by capping or plugging to prevent the entry of dirt or debris during construction.

.4 Slope piping down in the direction of flow to low points and provide dirt legs with capped ends.

.5 Interior gas piping - screw or weld up to 50 mm [2"]; weld 65 mm [2½"] and larger.

.6 Interior gas piping located in unvented spaces, in supply or return air ceiling plenums, or operating at 35 kPa [5 psig] pressure or higher - weld all sizes.





.7 Exterior gas piping - weld all sizes except for polyethylene pipe which shall have no joints other than those allowed in CSA B149.1 Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code.

.8 Use welding tees to make all branch connections, except those less than half the diameter of the main. Branch connections less than half the diameter of main may be made with weldolets or threadolets.

.9 Use eccentric reducers at changes in pipe size, to provide for positive drainage.

.10 Remake all leaking joints.

.11 Do not paint dielectric isolating couplings.

.12 Provide pressure regulators and lockable shut-off valves at the discharge of the gas meter before entry into the building.

.13 Provide heat shrink factory extruded polyethylene sleeves over bare metallic pipe at welds.

3.2 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT AND SPECIALTY COMPONENTS

.1 Provide a manual isolation valve on each branch line to an individual piece of equipment, appliance and gas outlet or specialty component upstream of dirt legs, unions and flanges.

.2 Install unions or flanges on connections to all pressure regulators, equipment, appliances and specialty components.

.3 Arrange piping connections to allow ease of access and for removal of equipment.

.4 Align and independently support piping connections to prevent piping stresses being transferred to equipment.

3.3 MANUAL ISOLATION VALVES

.1 Install natural gas manual isolation valves complete with handles at the following locations:

.1 At all locations shown on the drawings.

.2 At each branch supply line from a common meter set.

.3 At the service entry point to each building immediately prior to entry.

.4 At each branch or riser connection from the main.

.5 Immediately upstream of all pressure regulating valves.

.6 At each service to each laboratory (install valves in readily accessible locations).

.7 At each service to each laboratory bench (install valves in readily accessible locations).

.2 All building isolation valves shall possess locking lugs.

3.4 SEISMIC ACTUATED SHUT-OFF VALVES

.1 Install natural gas seismic actuated automatic shut-off valves at the service entry point to each building immediately prior to entry.

3.5 PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES

.1 Install pressure regulating valves at each piece of equipment where the natural gas supply pressure exceeds the recommended maximum operating pressure of the equipment.

.2 Pipe the relief vent ports full diameter to atmosphere in accordance with the requirements of CSA B149.1 Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code.

3.6 NATURAL GAS OUTLETS

.1 Provide natural gas outlets at all locations shown on the drawings.





3.7 VENT TERMINALS

.1 Terminate vent outlets to atmosphere at the following minimum lateral distances:

.1 1.5 metres [5 feet] from any door, openable window or building opening including building mechanical exhaust openings and louvers.

.2 3.0 meters [10 feet] from any mechanical forced air intake.

.2 Terminate vents with 180 degree down turn elbows complete with insect screens.

3.8 TESTING

.1 Pressure test all piping in accordance with CSA B149.1 Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code.

.2 Examine all joints for leaks and remake all leaking joints with new materials.

.3 Purge all piping after pressure tests in accordance with CSA B149.1 Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code.

.4 Submit copies of pressure test reports for all sections of piping.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS

.1 All fixtures shall display CSA (Canadian Standards Association) approval where a CSA standard is available and in effect.

.2 Plumbing fittings shall be to CAN/CSA B125, Plumbing Fittings.

.3 Plumbing fixtures shall be to CAN/CSA B45, 'General Requirements for Plumbing Fixtures',

.4 Vitreous china plumbing fixtures shall be to CAN/CSA B45.1, 'Ceramic Plumbing Fixtures',

.5 Enameled cast iron plumbing fixtures shall be to CAN/CSA B45.2, 'Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures',

.6 Porcelain enameled steel plumbing fixtures shall be to CAN/CSA B45.3, 'Porcelain Enameled Steel Plumbing Fixtures',

.7 Stainless steel plumbing fixtures shall be to CAN/CSA B45.4, 'Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures'.

.8 Plastic plumbing fixtures shall be to CAN/CSA B45.5, 'Plastic Plumbing Fixtures'.

.9 Combustible plumbing fixtures including acrylic and / or fiberglass bathtubs and shower bases / shower enclosures shall not exceed the limitations of the flame spread rating (FSR) or smoke development classification (SDC) permitted for the building construction in which they are installed.

1.3 COLOUR

.1 Vitreous china fixtures shall be white unless otherwise noted.

.2 Stainless steel fixtures shall be satin and/or mirror finish or a combination thereof.

.3 Exposed plumbing brass and metal work shall be heavy triple chromium plated.

1.4 QUALITY

.1 Similar plumbing fixtures shall be of one manufacturer.

.2 Plumbing fixture supply brass shall be of one manufacturer unless otherwise specified.

.3 Fixtures shall be free from flaws or blemishes. Surfaces shall be clear, smooth and bright and have dimensional stability.

.4 Plumbing fixtures and trim shall be brand new unless otherwise noted.

.5 All visible or exposed parts, trim, supplies, traps, tubing, nipples escutcheons, check valves on diverter supply lines and valves to sanitary and/or kitchen fixtures shall be chrome plated finish unless otherwise noted.

.6 All fittings shall have heavy duty stems.





Part 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

.1 Please not that most plumbing fixtures are supplied by the KEC (kitchen equipment contractor. The mechanical contractor shall protect and install the fixtures including all drainage and venting, domestic hot and cold water, mixing valves and supplies.

.2 Minimum connection sizes for all kitchen equipment is shown on drawing QF-102

.3 Install and connect all equipment requiring plumbing connections is indicated in the KEC drawings QF-101 and QF-102:

2.2 SINKS

.1 Provide braided stainless-steel flexible supplies for all sinks. Supplies for sinks shall incorporate 9 mm [3/8”] chrome plated quarter turn mini ball valve stop.

2.3 MIXING VALVES

.1 General

.1 Mixing valves shall be thermostatic in operation, not mechanical mixing valves. This includes individual mixing valves at single fixtures or groups of fixtures including lavatories, sinks, showers, emergency fixtures etc.

.2 On both the up-stream hot and cold supplies, in an accessible location, provide isolation valves, positive swing check valves and strainers. This requirement does not apply when such components are supplied with or integral to the mixing valves itself. Where required, provide an access panel to the isolation valves, check valves and strainers.

.2 Mixing Valve MV-1:

.1 Valve:

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Watts HydroGuard LFLM490

.2 Factory assembled and tested, lead-free components mounted in a white painted steel cabinet. Valve shall comply with ASSE 1017 and CSA B125.

.3 Thermostatic control valve, fast response paraffin-based actuation, certified lead free cast brass construction, all components in rough brass finish, dirt and lime resistant.

.4 Provide triple duty strainer check stops, dial thermometer reading 18oC to 46oC [65oF to 115oF] on tempered supply to reverse osmosis unit, quarter turn ball valve on outlet for shut off and volume control.

.5 Flow capacity of 0.48 litres per second [7.6 USgpm] at 35 kPa [5 psig] differential.

.6 Provide the following:

.1 stainless steel cabinet

.2 powder coated steel cabinet

.3 inlet pressure/temperature gauges

.4 vacuum breaker

.5 cold water by-pass

.6 high-temperature alarm





Part 3 Execution

3.1 FIXTURE INSTALLATION

.1 Connect fixtures complete with specified trim, supplies, drains accessory piping, vented traps, stops or valves, reducers, escutcheons and fittings for the proper installation of all fixtures and their respective supply fittings.

.2 Provide necessary hangers, supports, brackets, reinforcement, steel back-up plates and floor flanges to set fixtures level and square. Mount fixtures so that 90 kilogram [200 pound] mass will not loosen or distort mounting.

.3 Provide minimum 18 gauge circular stainless steel shrouds for concealing all services dropping to island or bench fixtures from ceiling spaces complete with all necessary ceiling and counter flanges. Diameter shall be as necessary to accommodate services; however, all shrouds shall be of the same diameter in any one room or area.

.4 Provide chrome plated quarter turn mini ball valves for all lavatories, sinks and tank type water closets.

.5 ABS p-traps and waste arms are not permitted.

.6 Waterclosets

.1 Water closets shall be connected to waste utilizing brass or cast iron floor flanges with lead stub or mechanical joint connections and wax seals.

.2 Provide braided stainless-steel flexible supplies for tank type water closets. Supply shall incorporate 12 mm [½"] chrome plated quarter turn mini ball valve stop.

.3 PEX or other plastic supplies are not acceptable.

.7 Lavatories and Sinks

.1 Provide braided stainless-steel flexible supplies for sinks, drinking fountains and lavatories.

.1 Supplies for drinking fountains and lavatories shall incorporate 9 mm [3/8”] chrome plated quarter turn mini ball valve stop.

.2 Supplies for sinks shall incorporate 12 mm [1/2”] chrome plated quarter turn mini ball valve stop.

.2 PEX or other plastic supplies are not acceptable.

.3 Double waste fittings for lavatories and sinks shall be a double sanitary tee.

.4 Control handles for all two handle mixing faucets shall be positioned with the cold control on the right and the hot control on the left. Activation shall be accomplished by rotating the cold control handle clockwise and the hot control handle counterclockwise.

.5 Faucets shall be complete with nuts and tailpieces.

.6 Provide appropriate gaskets and/or sealing washers that will prevent the entry of water into fixture trim or faucet holes or punchings in millwork.

.7 Gooseneck spouts shall have a clearance of 200 mm [8"] from nozzle tip to countertop, unless otherwise specified.

.8 Plastic control handles and spouts are unacceptable.

.9 Lavatory and sink P-traps shall be cast brass or tubular brass complete with either a cleanout or possess slip joint connections. Assembly shall be chrome plated where not concealed in millwork. Plastic drain and trap assemblies are not acceptable.

.10 Lavatory and sink P-traps shall be complete with either a cleanout or possess slip joint connections.





.11 See drawings for sinks where P-traps are not required as a result of being indirectly connected to waste.

.12 Cleanouts serving fixtures in Healthcare Facilities, Mortuaries, Laboratories and similar occupancies, where contamination by bodily fluids is likely, shall be located a minimum of 150mm [6”] above the flood level rim of the fixture.

3.2 FIXTURE TRIM HOLES OR PUNCHINGS

.1 Fixture punchings for faucets or other trim shall not contain more punchings than necessary for the specified trim.

.2 Provide fixture and templates to the applicable trades for holes and cut outs required in all countertops.

3.3 WALLS AND FLOORS

.1 Fixtures mounted on glazed tile surfaces shall have ground faces to finished surface.

.2 Where plumbing fixtures come in contact with walls and floors, joints shall be sealed with Dow Corning anti-mildew 786 building sealant, made watertight and beaded smooth in a neat and workmanlike manner.


.1 Provide water hammer arrestors or shock absorbers on fixtures with flush valves and/or quick closing valves.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 22 99 65543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERSNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 2


ITEM ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS / SUPPLIERS / MANUFACTURERS

SHOP DWG.

ACCESS DOORS & COVERS

REFER TO DIV. 23 X

BACKFLOW PREVENTERS Ames, Apollo, Febco, Watts, Zurn X

BALANCING, COMMISSIONING, MAINTENANCE MANUALS

REFER TO DIV. 23 X

DRAINAGE PRODUCTS cleanouts, drains, hose bibs, water hammer arrestors

Mifab, Jay R.Smith, Watts, Zurn, Wade X

EMERGENCY EYE WASH Acorn, Bradley, Guardian, Haws X

EXPANSION JOINTS REFER TO DIV. 23 X

FAUCETS Acorn, Alsons, American Standard, Bradley, Cambridge, Chicago, Crane, Delta, Grohe, Kohler, Moen, Powers, Sloan, Symmons, TOTO , T&S Brass

X

FIXTURES Refer to Kitchen Drawings for Additional Information

stainless steel Acorn, AMI, Bradley, Franke, KIL, Kindred, Steel Queen X

vitreous American Standard, Crane, Kohler, TOTO X

HANGERS REFER TO DIVISION 23 X

HEAT TRACING Raychem HWAT (Temperature Maintenance) X

INSULATION REFER TO DIVISION 23 X

INTERCEPTORS, grease, oil, solids

Proceptor, Green Turtle, Mifab, Jay R.Smith, Watts, Zurn X

PIPE & FITTINGS

ABS Canplas, IPEX X

cast iron Bibby St Croix, Charlotte Pipe, Tyler Pipe X

copper Wolverine X

ductile iron Canada Pipe, Charlotte Pipe X

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 22 99 65543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERSNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 2 of 2


ITEM ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS / SUPPLIERS / MANUFACTURERS

SHOP DWG.

stainless steel for potable water

Type 304 X


REFER TO DIVISION 23

Mason Industries

X

PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

Watts X

SEISMIC RESTRAINTS REFER TO DIVISION 23 X

VALVES

brass, butterfly, cast iron Crane, Apollo, Jenkins, Kitz, Nibco, Red & White/Toyo X

fixture shut off Brass Craft, Dahl X

pressure reducing - air DeVilbiss, Fischer, Watts X

pressure reducing - gas Fisher, Rockwell X

pressure reducing - water

Watts, Apollo, Clayton, Conbraco, Singer, Wilkins, Zurn X

pressure & temperature relief

Watts X

seismic shut-off Koso X

thermostatic or pressure mixing

Bradley, Lawler, Leonard, Powers, Symmons X

VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES (VSD, VFD)

REFER TO DIVISION 23 X

VIBRATION ISOLATORS REFER TO DIVISION 23 X

WASTE FITTINGS McGuire, OS&B, Teck X

NOTES:.1 The design is based upon the equipment listed in the equipment schedules and/or

underlined in the Plumbing - Equipment Manufacturers Schedules.

.2 “X” - Denotes required submission.

END OF SECTION






Common Work for HVAC Systems 23 05 00

Motor Requirements for HVAC Systems 23 05 13

Variable Speed Drives 23 05 14

Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC 23 05 16

Thermometers and Gauges for HVAC 23 05 20

Hangers and Supports for HVAC Systems 23 05 29

Vibration Isolation for HVAC Systems 23 05 48

Seismic Restraints for HVAC Systems 23 05 49

Identification for HVAC Systems 23 05 53

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 05 93

HVAC Duct Insulation 23 07 13

HVAC Piping Insulation 23 07 19

Commissioning of HVAC Systems 23 08 00

Hydronic Piping 23 21 13

Hydronic Specialties 23 21 14

Refrigerant Piping 23 23 00

HVAC Water Treatment 23 25 00

HVAC Ducts and Casings 23 31 00

Air Duct Accessories 23 33 00

HVAC Fans 23 34 00

Air Terminal Units 23 36 00

Air Outlets and Inlets 23 37 00

Particulate Air Filtration 23 41 00

Packaged Indoor Heating/Cooling Make-up Air Units 23 81 10




Heating/Cooling Coils 23 82 05

H.V.A.C. – Equipment Manufacturers 23 99 65

H.V.A.C. – Subtrades 23 99 66

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 23 05 00543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 COMMON WORK FOR HVAC SYSTEMSNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 33


Part 1 General

1.1 CONFORMANCE

.1 The General Conditions, Supplements and Amendments shall govern this Division (read in conjunction with Instructions to Tenderers / Bidders). This section covers items common to all sections of Division 21, 22, 23 and 25,and is intended to supplement the requirements of Division 01.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

.1 This project is deemed to be a post-disaster design.

.2 Provide complete, fully tested and operational mechanical systems to meet the requirements described herein, in complete accordance with applicable codes and ordinances.

.3 The word "Provide" shall mean "Supply and Install" the products and services specified. "As Indicated" means that the item(s) specified are shown on the drawings.

.4 Provide materials, equipment and plant, of specified design, performance and quality; and, current models with published certified ratings for which replacement parts are readily available.

.5 Provide project management and on-site supervision to undertake administration, meet schedules, ensure timely performance, ensure coordination, establish orderly completion and the delivery of a fully commissioned installation.

.6 Follow manufacturer's recommended installation details and procedures for equipment, supplemented by requirements of Contract Documents.

.7 The most stringent requirements of this and other mechanical sections shall govern. Should inconsistencies exist such as the drawings disagreeing within themselves or with the specifications, the better quality and/or greater quantity of work or materials shall be estimated upon, performed and furnished unless otherwise ordered by the Consultant in writing during the bidding period.

.8 Drawings and specification are complimentary in nature and combined, create a complete set of construction documents. Any item called for by one and not by the other shall be interpreted as being called for by both.

.9 Any discrepancy between drawings and specifications leaving in doubt the true intent of work shall be brought to the attention of the Consultant immediately.

.10 All work shall be in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications and their intent, complete with all necessary components, including those not normally shown or specified, but required for a complete installation.

.11 Provide seismic restraints for all required equipment, piping and ductwork.

.12 Connect to equipment specified in other sections and to equipment supplied and installed by other Contractors or by the Owner. Uncrate equipment, move in place and install complete; start-up and test. Include all field assembly of loosely/separately packaged accessories

.13 Refer to Section 23 99 60 Mechanical Forms and submit all documentation therein that is applicable to Division 23 HVAC.

.14 "Consultant" shall mean Stantec Consulting Ltd.












.2 Divisions 21, 22, 23, and 25 work shall conform to the following codes, regulations and standards, and all other codes in effect at the time of award of Contract, and any others having jurisdiction.

.3 The latest revision of each code and/or standard shall generally apply unless building codes reference a previous version, or otherwise specified in the contract documents.

.4 Where multiple standards apply, the most stringent requirement shall be incorporated into the work.

.5 Where the contract documents indicate requirements more stringent requirement than any applicable code and/or standard, the contract documents shall be implemented.

.1 Atomic Energy Control Board

.1 Basic Design Requirements for Radioisotope Laboratories.

.2 By-laws

.1 City of Quesnel local Building By-laws.

.2 Cariboo Regional District

.3 Canadian Council on Animal Care

.1 Guide to the Care and Use of Experimental Animals.

.4 Canadian Standards Association

.1 CAN/CSA-6.19 Residential Carbon Monoxide Alarming Devices

.2 CAN/CSA-B51 Boiler, Pressure Vessel and Pressure Piping Code.

.3 CAN/CSA-B52 Mechanical Refrigeration Code.

.4 CAN/CSA-B149.1 Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code.

.5 CAN/CSA B214 Installation Code for Hydronic Heating Systems.

.6 CAN/CSA-C22.1 Canadian Electrical Code, Part I

.7 CAN/CSA-C22.2 Test methods for electrical wires and cables

.8 CAN/CSA-C448 Design and installation of earth energy systems

.9 CAN/CSA-S350 Code of Practice for Safety in Demolition of Structures

.10 CAN/CSA-Z305.8 Medical Supply Units.

.11 CAN/CSA-Z317.1 Special requirements for plumbing installations in healthcare facilities

.12 CAN/CSA-Z317.2 Special Requirements for Heating, Ventilation, and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) Systems in Healthcare Facilities.

.13 CAN/CSA-Z317.13 Infection Control during Construction, Renovation, and Maintenance of Healthcare Facilities

.5 National Fire Protection Association




.1 NFPA 10 Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers

.2 NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems

.3 NFPA 17 Standard for the Installation of Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems

.4 NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

.5 NFPA 90B Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems

.6 NFPA 91 Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Vapors, Gases, Mists and Noncombustible Particulate Solids

.7 NFPA 96 Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations

.8 NFPA-99 Health Care Facilities

.9 NFPA 101 Life Safety Code

.6 Province of British Columbia

.1 B.C. Building Code

.2 B.C. Plumbing Code

.3 B.C. Fire Code

.4 B.C. Safety Authority Safety Standards Act

.5 B.C. Safety Authority Power Engineers, Boiler, Pressure Vessel and Refrigeration Safety Regulation

.6 B.C. Amendment to Canadian Electrical Code

.7 B.C. Electrical Safety Regulation

.8 B.C. Electrical Safety Branch Bulletins

.9 B.C. Elevating Devices Safety Regulation

.10 B.C. Gas Safety Regulation

.11 B.C. Code Amendments, Gas Safety Act & Regulations

.12 B.C. Occupational Health & Safety (OHS) Regulations, WorkSafeBC

.13 R.S.B.C. c39 Safety Standards Act

.7 Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada

.1 CAN/ULC-S110 Test for Air Ducts

.2 CAN/ULC-S111 Fire Test for Air Filter Units

.3 CAN/ULC-S112 Fire Test of Fire-Damper Assemblies

.4 CAN/ULC-S112.1 Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems

.5 CAN/ULC-S115 Fire Tests of Fire Stop Systems

.6 CAN/ULC-S603 Standard for Steel Underground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids

.7 CAN/ULC-S615 Standard for Fibre Reinforced Plastic Underground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids

.8 ULC/ORD C199P Combustible Piping for Sprinkler Systems

.9 ULC/ORD-C1254.6 Fire Testing of Restaurant Cooking Area Fire Extinguishing System Units

.8 SMACNA Publications

.1 SMACNA 001 Guidelines for seismic restraints of mechanical systems



.2 SMACNA 002 Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards

.3 SMACNA 005 Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards

.4 SMACNA 006 HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible

.5 SMACNA 008 IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction

.6 SMACNA 012 HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual

.7 SMACNA 014 HVAC Systems Commissioning Manual

.8 SMACNA Fire, Smoke, and Radiation Damper Installation Guide

.9 Miscellaneous Standards

.1 ASHRAE Standard 62 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality

.2 ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings

.3 ASHRAE Standard 202 The Commissioning Process for Buildings and Systems.

.4 ASHRAE/NIBS Guideline 0 The Commissioning Process

.5 ASHRAE Guideline 1.1 HVAC&R Technical Requirements For The Commissioning Process

.6 ASHRAE Guideline 1.3 Building Operations and Maintenance Training for The HVAC&R Commissioning Process

.7 ASHRAE Guideline 1.4 Procedures for Preparing Facility Systems Manuals

.8 Thermal Insulation Association of Canada – TIAC Best Practices Guide

.9 British Columbia Insulation Contractors Association – BC Insulation Contractors Association (BCICA) Standards Manual

.10 Environment Canada Canadian Environment Protection Act

.11 Environmental Protection Agency EPA 625 Radon Prevention in the Design and Construction of Schools and Other Large Buildings

.10 Specialty Standards:

.1 ANSI/UL 300: Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishing Systems for Protection of Commercial Cooking Equipment – 2005

.2 CSA Z662/Z662.1 Oil and Gas Pipeline Systems/Commentary

1.5 GREEN INITIATIVES

.1 Follow instructions and initiatives such as pollution preventions and recycling of materials, packaging and debris.

.2 HVAC & R equipment shall contain zero CFC or HCFC based refrigerants, and zero use of Halons in fire suppression equipment.

.3 For all Adhesives and Sealants Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) highlighting the materials Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) levels.

.4 Construction IAQ:

.1 During construction, meet or exceed the recommended Design Approaches of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction.

.2 Protect stored on-site or installed absorptive materials from moisture damage.

.3 It air handling units are used during construction, filtration media with a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 8 must be used at each return air grille, as determined by ASHRAE 52.2.



.4 Mechanical rooms should not be used to store construction or waste materials.

.5 During construction, all openings in supply, return and exhaust HVAC systems shall be protected from dust infiltration. Provide temporary ventilation as required.

.6 Duct Cleaning: Clean ductwork to ensure that dust and contaminants are effectively removed and contained. Sequence ductwork cleaning in a way that avoids re-contamination.

.7 All filtration media, immediately prior to occupancy, shall be replaced with filtration media with a MERV of 13 (if air handling equipment was operating during construction).

.8 Materials that emit VOCs are to be avoided, however, maintain sufficient temporary ventilation of areas where materials are being used that emit VOC’s. Maintain ventilation continuously during installation, and until emissions dissipate after installation. If continuous ventilation is not possible via the building’s HVAC system(s), then ventilation shall be supplied via open windows and temporary fans, sufficient to provide no less than three air changes per hour.

.9 The period after installation shall be sufficient to dissipate odours and elevated concentrations of VOCs. Where no specific periods stated in these specifications, a time period of 72 hours shall be used.

.10 Ventilate areas directly to outside; ventilation to other enclosed areas is not acceptable.

1.6 INDOOR AIR QUALITY

.1 General:

.1 In the interest of providing an acceptable indoor environment for the occupants of a new building, it is required that the air systems be used to "flush out" chemical fumes that may be present from building products, furniture, carpets, equipment, etc.

.2 Execution:

.1 The Contractor is required to keep the ductwork systems including plenums and equipment debris free and take all necessary measures to minimize dust contamination into systems.

.2 After all HVAC systems have been cleaned and balanced, the Control Sub-Contractor shall adjust the controls and dampers on all systems for a period of four (4) calendar weeks to achieve the following conditions:

.1 Fans to run continuously complete with temporary filters in place.

.2 Systems to run on 100% outside air or to the highest percentage that can be tolerated by the system capacity and the freeze protection.

.3 Room temperature to be maintained at:

.1 Heating to 20°C (68F).

.2 Cooling to 25°C (77F).

.3 Night setback to 15°C (59F).

.4 Variations from these standards must be approved by the Owner.

.3 At the end of the four (4) week period, the Controls Sub-Contractor shall readjust the controls to return the air systems to the design conditions established by the Consultant.

.4 The Controls Sub-Contractor shall notify the Owner's representative five (5) days in advance of the beginning and the end of the four-week period.



.3 Report:

.1 The Controls Sub-Contractor shall provide a letter to the Consultant for inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals stating the dates of the "flushing" period and the approximate percentage of outside air used.

1.7 ALTERNATE PRICES

.1 Refer to Division 01

1.8 SEPARATE PRICES


1.9 UNIT PRICES


1.10 CASH ALLOWANCES


1.11 STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE

.1 Means that an item named and specified by manufacturer and/or catalogue number forms part of specification and sets standard regarding performance, quality of material and workmanship and when used in conjunction with a referenced standard, shall be deemed to supplement the standard.

.2 Acceptable Product manufacturers are listed in the list of Equipment Manufacturers in Section 23 99 65.

.3 Where two or more manufacturers are listed, the manufacturer's name shown underlined or shown with a model name and/or number was used in preparing the design. Tenders may be based on any one of those named, if they meet every aspect of the drawings and specifications.

.4 Where other than the underlined manufacturer or scheduled/specified manufacturer is selected or approved, include for the cost of any resulting work (both under this Division and other Divisions) and any necessary redesign of installation or structure. Submit redesign drawings for review with Shop Drawings. Maintain installation, access and servicing clearances. Redesign drawings shall be to scale and of a standard equal to the Project Drawings.

.5 Where two or more items of equipment and/or material, of the same type, are required, provide products of a single manufacturer.

.6 Install and test all equipment and material, in accordance with the detailed recommendations of the manufacturer.

.7 A visible manufacturer's nameplate shall indicate manufacturer's name, model number, serial number, capacity data, electrical characteristics and approval stamps.

1.12 ADDITION OF ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 Material/products considered to satisfy the specification, but of a manufacturer other than those named in Section 23 99 65 Acceptable Products/Manufacturers may be submitted to the Consultant for consideration not later than five (5) working days prior to closing of tender or of bid depository subtrade tender whichever is earlier.

.2 Addition of manufacturer's names to the specifications will be only be by formal addendum.

1.13 TENDER INQUIRIES

.1 All contractor queries during the tender period shall be made in writing to the consultant. Contractor queries will be collected, and suitable addenda will be issued for clarification.



No verbal information will be issued by the consultant's office during tender. All tender queries may be e-mailed, faxed, mailed or couriered to the consultant's office. No telephone questions will be answered.

1.14 EQUIPMENT LIST

.1 Within ten (10) days after the award of contract submit a completed Equipment List, showing the equipment manufacturer’s name with model number, material included in the Tender, and names of subtrades. The equipment schedules shall be used for this purpose.

.2 The equipment list shall be a full list of equipment and materials intended for installation.

1.15 DETAILED PRICE BREAKDOWNS

.1 Tender Price Breakdown:

.1 Within ten (10) days after the award of contract submit price breakdowns similar to the Price Breakdown Forms included in Section 23 99 60.

.2 Submit a separate breakdown for each section of the mechanical work listed on the Progress Claim Summary Form in Section 23 99 60.

.2 Proposed Change, Notice of Change, Contemplated Change, etc.:

.1 Provide detailed itemized time and materials breakdowns to assess and evaluate each item indicated in the request for quotation. Indicate number of hours and labour rates, along with quantity of materials and unit costs.

.2 Each supplier and sub-contractor shall be detailed separately.

.3 Indicate mark-ups and allowances separately.

1.16 PROGRESS CLAIMS

.1 For each progress claim, submit a progress claim summary based on the Progress Claim Summary Form included in Section 23 99 60.

.2 Submit detailed price breakdowns for each section of the mechanical work listed on the Progress Claim Summary Form and for each change order item being claimed.

1.17 SCHEDULING

.1 Coordinate with Division 1, Construction Schedule.

.2 Incorporate within the Construction Schedule, a complete and realistic schedule, integrated with, and recognizing the reliance on, other divisions of the work. Consider the lead time for the review of operating and maintenance manuals, commissioning, verification of system operation by the Consultant and the demonstration and instruction to the Owner.

.3 The schedule shall include but not limited to the following items:

.1 Installation and testing of piping systems and equipment.

.2 Installation and cleaning of duct systems and equipment.

.3 Chemical cleaning and treatment of piping.

.4 Control system installation.

.5 Air/Water balancing

.6 Air measurements of existing systems prior to any renovation work.

.7 Connection of electrical services to equipment by electrical contractor.

.8 Start-up of mechanical equipment and systems.

.9 Check-out of control systems.

.10 Commissioning of mechanical systems.

.11 Demonstration of systems and equipment to Consultant.



.12 Demonstration of systems and equipment to Owner.

.13 Preparation of maintenance manuals and as-built drawings.

.14 Submission of the various documents required prior to substantial performance.

1.18 RESPONSIBILITIES

.1 Visit the site before tendering. Examine all local and existing conditions on which the work is dependent. No consideration will be granted for any misunderstanding, of work to be done, resulting from failure to visit the site.

.2 Ensure that equipment does not transmit noise and/or vibration to other parts of the building, as a result of poor installation practice.

.3 Where the Contract Documents do not contain sufficient information for the proper selection of equipment for bidding, notify the Consultant during the tendering period. If clarification is not obtainable, allow for the most expensive arrangement. Failure to do this shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility to provide the intended equipment.

.4 Examine carefully the mechanical, electrical, structural and architectural drawings and confirm that the work under this Sub-Contract can be satisfactorily carried out without changes to the building as shown on these plans.

.5 Be responsible for prompt installation of this work in advance of concrete pouring or similar work. Provide and set sleeves where required.

.6 During freezing weather, protect all materials in such a manner that no harm can be done to installations already in place and/or to materials and equipment on the job.

.7 On completion of the work, all tools and surplus and waste materials shall be removed, and the work left in a clean and perfect condition.

1.19 COORDINATION

.1 Check drawings of all trades to verify space and headroom limitations for work to be installed. Coordinate work with all trades and make changes to facilitate a satisfactory installation. Make no deviations to the design intent involving extra cost to the Owner, without the Consultant's written approval.

.2 The drawings indicate the general location and route to be followed by the piping and ductwork. Where details are not shown on the drawings or only shown diagrammatically, the pipes and ductwork shall be installed in such a way as to conserve head room and interfere as little as possible with the free use of space through which they pass. Service lines shall run parallel to building lines. All ducts and pipes in the ceiling shall be kept as tight as possible to beams or other limiting members at high level. All pipes and ducts shall be coordinated in elevation to ensure that they are concealed in the ceiling or structural space provided unless detailed otherwise on drawings.

.3 Work out jointly all interference problems on the site with other trades and coordinate all work before fabricating or installing any material or equipment. Where necessary produce interference drawings showing exact locations of mechanical equipment within service areas, shafts and the ceiling space. Ensure that all materials and equipment fit into the allotted spaces and that all equipment can be properly serviced and replaced, if and when required. Advise the Consultant of space problems before fabricating or installing any material or equipment. On completion of the work demonstrate to the Consultant that all equipment installed can be properly and safely serviced and replaced where applicable. Remove and replace improperly installed equipment to satisfaction of the Consultant at no extra cost. Extras for improper coordination and removal of equipment to permit remedial work will not be allowed.

.4 When open web structural joists are used, obtain structural shop drawings to ensure adequate space is available for installation of pipes and ductwork.



1.20 HOISTS AND SCAFFOLDS

.1 Provide all necessary interior movable or roller scaffolds, platforms, lifts and ladders for the installation of the mechanical work.

1.21 INSPECTION OF WORK

.1 The Consultant representative will inspect all work prior to it being concealed. All piping below ground must be approved prior to covering.

.2 All work shall be approved by all authorities having jurisdiction.

.3 All openings shall be sealed appropriately in particular in fire rated walls and floors. Sealing shall be inspected prior to covering.

1.22 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION

.1 Where the Contractor determines that more information is required to complete the scope of work, submit a written “Request For Information” to the consultant before making assumptions as to intent.

1.23 PERMITS

.1 Obtain all required permits and pay all fees therefore and comply with all Provincial, Municipal, and other legal regulations and by-laws applicable to the work.

.2 Arrange for inspection of all Work by the authorities having jurisdiction. On completion of the Work, furnish final unconditional certificates of approval by the inspecting authorities.

1.24 WARRANTY

.1 Use of installed equipment during construction shall not shorten or alter the warranty period as specified in the General Conditions.

.2 Take note of any extended warranties specified.

.3 Refer to Section Division 25 for Control System warranty requirements.

.4 Furnish a written warranty stating that all work executed under this Division will be free from defects of material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial performance, which shall include one (1) complete summer and one (1) complete winter of uninterrupted operation. Warranty shall include any part of equipment, units or structures furnished hereunder that show defects in the works under normal operating conditions and/or for the purpose of which they were intended.

.5 The above parties further agree that they will at their own expense promptly investigate any mechanical or control malfunction, and repair or replace all such defective work, and all other damages thereby which becomes defective during the time of the guaranty-warranty.

1.25 ENERGY CONSUMPTION

.1 Consultant may reject equipment submitted for approval or review on basis of performance or energy consumed or demanded.

1.26 INFECTION CONTROL

.1 Refer to Division 1 for infection control measures. Conform to the requirements of CSA Z-317.2 Special Requirements for Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Systems in Healthcare Facilities

.2 Coordinate with General Contractor.

.3 Maintain negative pressurization in the work area. Exhaust shall be filtered.

1.27 ASBESTOS

.1 All material / products installed shall be free of asbestos.



1.28 ASBESTOS DURING RENOVATIONS

.1 If the Contractor, during renovations, should discover asbestos (or material suspected to be asbestos) on piping, ductwork, etc., he shall immediately cease all work in that area and contact the General Contractor or Owner's representative.

.2 The General Contractor or Owner's representative will take immediate appropriate action to verify presence of friable asbestos. The Contractor will not be entitled to a claim for any delays resulting from the investigation of or removal of asbestos.

.3 Refer to Division 2 for removal and disposal of asbestos.

.4 All work performed on systems with asbestos insulation must be reported to WorkSafeBC before work commences.

.5 Removal of all asbestos products shall be carried out in accordance with the applicable codes by a contractor experienced in this specialty.

1.29 WORKMANSHIP

.1 Workmanship shall be in accordance with well-established practice and standards accepted and recognized by the Consultant and the Trade.

.2 The Consultant shall have the right to reject any item of work that does not conform to the Contract Documents and accepted standards of performance, quietness of operation, finish and appearance.

.3 Employ only tradesmen holding valid Provincial Trade Qualification Certificates. Tradesmen shall perform only work that their certificate permits. Certificates shall be available for inspection by the Consultant.

1.30 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION OF INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

.1 Installed mechanical equipment whose performance is questioned by the Consultant, may be subject to performance verification as specified herein.

.2 When performance verification is requested, equipment shall be tested to determine compliance with specified performance requirements.

.3 The Consultant will determine by whom testing shall be carried out. When requested, the contractor shall arrange for services of an independent testing agency.

.4 Testing procedures shall be reviewed by the Consultant.

.5 Maintain building comfort conditions when equipment is removed from service for testing purposes.

.6 Promptly provide the Consultant with all test reports.

.7 Should test results reveal that originally installed equipment meets specified performance requirements, Owner will pay all costs resulting from performance verification procedure.

.8 Should test results reveal that equipment does not meet specified performance requirements, equipment will be rejected, and the following shall apply:

.1 Remove rejected equipment. Replace with equipment, which meets requirements of Contract Documents including specified performance requirements.

.2 Replacement equipment will be subject to performance verification as well; using the same testing procedures on originally installed equipment.

.3 Contractor shall pay all costs resulting from performance verification procedure.

1.31 DRAWINGS AND MEASUREMENTS

.1 Drawings are generally diagrammatic and are intended to indicate the scope and general arrangement of work and are not detailed installation drawings. Do not scale the drawings. Obtain accurate dimensions from the Architectural and Structural drawings.



.2 Consult the architectural drawings and details for exact locations of fixtures and equipment. Obtain this information from the Consultant where definite locations are not indicated.

.3 Take field measurements, where equipment and material dimensions are dependent upon building dimensions.

.4 Where imperial units have been indicated in brackets [ ] following the requirements in SI units, the conversion is approximate and provided for convenience. The SI units shall govern.

1.32 PHASED CONSTRUCTION

.1 See Architectural specifications and drawings for construction phasing. Make all allowances to phase the work in accordance with the project phasing.

.2 All existing services and the existing building(s) must be maintained in operation. Provide and install temporary services as required.

.3 All trades in this Division shall make allowance for the implications of having to totally complete all work in the new addition before proceeding with work in the existing building.

1.33 SEQUENCE OF WORK

.1 Before interrupting major services notify the Owner well in advance and arrange an acceptable schedule for the interruptions.

.2 Before interrupting any services complete all preparatory work as far as reasonably possible and have all necessary materials on site and prefabricated (where practical) and work continuously to keep the length of interruption to a minimum.

.3 Include for the cost of all work that may be required out of regular hours to minimize the period of service interruption when connecting into the existing systems.

.4 Work in the Boiler Room will interrupt and affect the existing steam plant. This and all other work in the existing building required for the operation of the systems in the new addition must be completed before the new addition is ready for occupancy.

.5 If the timing of the Contract allows, the interruption of the steam plant shall be scheduled to occur sometime between May 1 and September 20.

1.34 BUILDING OPERATION DURING CONSTRUCTION

.1 In order to minimize operational difficulties for the building staff, the various trades must cooperate with the owner throughout the entire construction period and particularly ensure that noise is minimized.

.2 Convenient access for the staff and public to the building must be maintained at all times. Minor inconvenience and interruption of services will be tolerated, provided advance notice is given, but the Contractor will be expected to coordinate his work, in consultation with the owner, so the operation of the facility can be maintained as nearly normal as possible.


.1 Work includes changes to existing building and changes at junction of old and new construction. Route pipes, ducts, conduits and other services to avoid interference with existing installation.

.2 Relocate existing pipes, ducts, conduits, bus ducts and any other equipment or services required for proper installation of new work, including as required for temporary removal and re-installation to suit new installation work.

.3 Protect all existing services encountered, even when the removal of concealing surfaces reveals existing services other than what is shown on the drawings.



.4 Work with the Owner's staff to trace the originating source and points served. Obtain instructions from the Consultant when existing services require relocation or modifications, other than those already indicated in the Contract Documents.

.5 Remove existing plumbing fixtures, lighting fixtures, piping, ductwork, wiring, and equipment to suit new construction. Cut back and cap drain, vent and water outlets, conduits and electrical outlets, not being used.

.6 Arrange work to avoid shutdowns of existing services. Where shutdowns are unavoidable, obtain the Owner's approval of the timing, and work to minimize any interruptions.

.7 Shutdowns, to permit connections, will be carried out by maintenance staff.

.8 In order to maintain existing services in operation, temporary relocations and/or bypasses of piping and ductwork may be required.

.9 Be responsible for any damages to existing systems by this work.

.10 The interruption of utility services to permit tie-ins shall be arranged through the Owner’s representative. Application must be received in writing at least seven (7) calendar days prior to the date required for the shutdown. Service shutdowns shall only be carried out by Physical Plant and will normally be scheduled to occur during evenings or weekends. The Owner reserves the right to withhold permission for a reasonable period with respect to any shutdown, if the shutting-off of a service will interfere with important operations.


.1 General

.1 The term "Shop Drawings" means drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures and other data which are to be provided by Trade Contractor to illustrate details of a portion of Work.

.2 Shop drawings shall be reviewed, signed and processed as described in in Division 1, Submittals.

.3 Submit shop drawings to the Consultant as listed in Sections 21 99 65 (Fire Suppression), 22 99 65 (Plumbing), and 23 99 65 (HVAC) Equipment Manufacturers.

.4 Submit shop drawings with reasonable promptness and in orderly sequence so as to not cause delay in Work. Failure to submit in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for an extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.

.5 Indicate materials, methods of construction and attachment or anchorage, erection diagrams, connections, explanatory notes and other information necessary for completion of Work. Where articles or equipment attach or connect to other articles or equipment, indicate that such items have been coordinated, regardless of Section under which adjacent items will be supplied and installed. Indicate cross references to design drawings and specifications.

.6 Work affected by submittal shall not proceed until the review process is complete.

.7 Installed materials and equipment shall meet specified requirements regardless of whether shop drawings are reviewed by the Consultant.

.8 Shop drawings shall include the Contractor's stamp, signed by Contractor's authorized representative, certifying approval of submissions, verification of field measurements and compliance with Contract Documents.

.9 Shop drawings shall be reviewed by the General Contractor and Mechanical Sub-Contractor indicating that the shop drawings have been reviewed,



coordinated with the work and that the shop drawings are submitted without qualifications. Shop drawings shall bear the ‘reviewed’ stamp dated and initialed by the General Contractor and Mechanical Sub-Contractor prior to submitting the shop drawings to the consultant. Shop drawings, which do not bear the contractors and sub-trades ‘reviewed’ stamp, initials and date will be rejected and sent back as ‘not reviewed’.

.10 Submit samples, in addition to drawings, of all items, which in the Consultant's judgment, can be better examined for capacity, quality, finish or detail by sample rather than by drawings. Samples shall be submitted before equipment or material is ordered.

.11 Adjustments made on Shop Drawings by Consultant are not intended to change Contract Price. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to Consultant prior to proceeding with Work.

.12 Make changes in Shop Drawings as Consultant may require, consistent with Contract Documents. When resubmitting, notify Consultant in writing of any revisions other than those requested.

.13 If upon review, no errors or omissions are discovered or if only minor corrections are made, copies will be returned, and fabrication and installation of Work may proceed. If Shop Drawings are rejected, noted copy will be returned and re-submission of corrected Shop Drawings, through same procedure indicated above, must be performed before fabrication and installation of Work may proceed.

.14 If shop drawings are rejected technically after 3 submissions, the Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner shall revert to the specified product and manufacturer for this project.

.2 Content

.1 Submissions shall include transmittal letter containing:

.1 Date.


.3 Name and address of:

.1 Trade Contractor

.2 Supplier

.3 Manufacturer

.4 Identification and quantity of each shop drawing, product data and sample.

.5 Other pertinent data.

.2 Information shall be given in S.I. units .

.3 Provide title sheet.

.4 The project shall be identified.

.5 Identify each piece of equipment as related to specification section and project equipment schedules.

.6 Data shall be specific and technical.

.7 Information shall include all scheduled data.

.8 Material for maintenance and operating manuals is not suitable.

.9 Advertising literature will be rejected.

.10 The shop drawings/product data shall include:



.1 Clearly mark submittal material using arrows, underlining or circling to show differences from specified ratings, capabilities and options being proposed. Cross out non-applicable material. Specifically note on the submittal specified features such as special tank linings, pumps, seals, material, or painting.

.2 Dimensioned construction drawings with plans and sections showing size, arrangement and necessary clearances, with mounting point loads.

.3 Weights of all major equipment for review by the appropriate Consultant.

.4 Mounting arrangements.

.5 Detailed drawings of bases, supports and anchor bolts.

.6 Capacity and performance characteristics indicated on performance curves for fans and pumps.

.7 Sound Power Data, where requested.

.8 Motor efficiencies on motors 1H.P. and larger.

.9 List of the manufacturers and figure numbers for all valves, traps and strainers.

.10 Control explanation and internal wiring diagrams for packaged equipment.

.11 Control system drawings including a written description of control sequences relating to the schematic diagrams. Refer to additional requirements in Division 25.

.12 Submit as a shop drawing, an electrical equipment list for any equipment supplied by the mechanical contractor or his subtrades. The list is to be submitted in a timely fashion so that the electrical contractor can utilize the list as a final check prior to ordering motor control centres, starters, or disconnects. The list is to indicate the following:

.1 The horsepower size and number of motors.

.2 The minimum circuit amps (MCA) for packaged equipment such as roof top units.

.3 The voltage and phase of the motors.

.4 Whether or not a starter or a disconnect is included as part of the package.

.3 Format

.1 Submit electronic copy of Shop Drawings for each requirement requested in specification Sections and as Consultant may reasonably request. If electronic copy is not feasible, submit hard copies as necessary.

.2 Include blank space for review comments and multiple consultant stamps.

.3 An assembly of related components, e.g. grilles, registers and diffusers or plumbing fixtures, shall be submitted with a cover sheet with the contents indicated, identified by tag and model number.

.4 Coordination

.1 Where mechanical equipment requires electrical connections, power or other services, the shop drawings shall also be circulated through the Electrical Contractor or other "services" contractor(s) prior to submission to the Consultants.

.2 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Division 1 – Submittal Procedures. In addition to transmittal letter referred to in Division 1: use



MCAC "Shop Drawing Submittal Title Sheet.” Identify section and paragraph number.

.5 Keep one (1) copy of shop drawings and product data, on site, available for reference.

1.37 DUCT AND PIPE MOUNTED CONTROL EQUIPMENT

.1 The following automatic control equipment will be supplied by the Controls Contractor but installed by the appropriate trade sections of the Mechanical Contract:

.1 Automatic control valves.

.2 Temperature control wells.

.3 Pressure tappings.

.4 Flow switches.

.5 Automatic control dampers.

.6 Static pressure sensors.

1.38 MAINTENANCE OF BEARINGS

.1 "Turn over" rotating equipment at least once a month from delivery to site until start-up.

.2 "Run-in" sleeve type bearings in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendation. After "run- in", drain, flush out and refill with new charge of oil or grease.

.3 Protect bearings, shafts and sheaves against damage, corrosion and dust accumulation during building construction.

1.39 DEMOLITION

.1 Reference Standards

.1 Unless otherwise specified, carry out demolition work in accordance with CAN/CSA-S350, Code of Practice for Safety in Demolition of Structures.

.2 Existing Conditions

.1 Visit and examine the site and note all characteristics and irregularities affecting the work of this section.

.3 Protection

.1 Cease operations and notify the Prime Consultant immediately for special protective and disposal instructions when any asbestos materials are uncovered during the work of this section.

.2 Prevent debris from blocking surface drainage inlets and mechanical and electrical systems, which remain in operation.

.4 Salvageable Materials

.1 Except as otherwise indicated, salvageable materials from areas of demolition shall become the property of the Owner at his discretion. All material removed from the building not handed over to the Owner for salvage under this project shall be removed from site and disposed of as required by any applicable disposal regulations.

.5 Existing Services

.1 Disconnect and cap all mechanical services in accordance with requirements of local authority having jurisdiction. Natural gas supply lines shall be removed by the gas company or by a qualified tradesman in accordance with gas company instructions.

.2 Maintain all building services as required during demolition/removal of existing.

.6 Demolition



.1 Carry out demolition in a manner to cause as little inconvenience to the adjacent occupied building area as possible. Coordinate the activity with the Owner and/or the Consultant.

.2 Carry out demolition in an orderly and careful manner.

.3 All removal of existing equipment, pipes and ductwork that may affect occupied areas of the building to be done outside of regular office hours or as scheduled with the Owner.

1.40 SALVAGE

.1 All piping, ducting and equipment, which becomes redundant and is no longer required due to the work in this Contract, shall be completely removed.

.2 All existing items which need to be removed, and which have a reasonable salvage value, such as fans and motors, air terminals, plumbing fixtures, and valves, shall be carefully removed. The Owner shall have first right of refusal.

.1 If the Owner accepts any items, the Contractor shall move those items to the Owner's designated storage place on site. These items shall not become the property of the Contractor. Obtain a written receipt from the Owner detailing each of the items handed over.

.2 If the Owner declines any items, the Contractor shall remove those items from the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs of removal and disposal of the materials and equipment that are not accepted by the Owner.

1.41 REUSED EQUIPMENT

.1 Where existing equipment is being relocated and re-used, check and report on the condition to the Consultant before reinstallation.

1.42 TEMPORARY HEATING

.1 The new make-up air handling supply unit shall not be used for temporary heat.

1.43 TEMPORARY OR TRIAL USAGE

.1 Temporary or trial usage by the Owner of mechanical equipment supplied under this contract shall not represent acceptance.

.2 Repair or replace permanent equipment used temporarily.

.3 Repair or otherwise rectify damage caused by defective materials or workmanship during temporary or trial usage.

1.44 SPARE PARTS

.1 Provide spare parts as follows:

.1 One set of packing for each pump.

.2 One casing joint gasket for each size pump.

.3 One head gasket for each heat exchanger.

.4 One glass for each gauge glass installed.

.5 One set of V-belts for each piece of machinery.

.6 One set of air filters for each filter bank installed (pre and final filters).

.7 One box of 6 cartridge filters for each water filter installed

1.45 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT REQUIREMENTS

.1 The project closeout requirements are specifically listed in each section of this specification. The following is a summary of those requirements. Refer to detailed specifications in each section for further requirements. Also refer to Section 23 99 60



Mechanical Forms for list of required HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Systems substantial completion submissions.

.2 Items designated with an asterisk (*) are required to be submitted one week prior to required date of Schedule C-B. All life safety systems must be operational and tested and demonstrated to Consultant prior to issuance of Schedule C. This includes, but not limited to, items such as kitchen fire suppression and exhaust systems, sprinklers, .

.1 Controls:

.1 Controls system completion report

.2 Controls system final electrical approval certificate.

.3 As built control drawings.

.4 Control training signed off by Owner (Indicate dates of training in letter and attendance).

.5 List of control manuals and documents turned over.

.6 Printed copy of control program and database. Printed to disk in word format acceptable.

.7 Disc of control system database.

.8 Airflow station start up and calibration report.

.2 Heating/Cooling

.1 Gas fired appliances/gas line/pressure piping certificate.

.2 Pressure test reports for heating, chilled and refrigeration lines.

.3 Vibration isolation report.

.4 Seismic inspection report.

.5 Valve tag chart.

.6 As built drawings.

.7 Flushing and cleaning of piping report.

.3 HVAC

.1 Fire damper test report letter and schedule.


.3 Duct cleaning certificate.

.4 Kitchen hood verification / air balance

.4 Miscellaneous

.1 Identification Schedules.

.2 Seismic Engineer’s Letters of Assurance

.3 Demonstrations to Owner signed off by Owner.

.4 List of incomplete or deficient work prepared by each sub trade.

.5 Contractor's Letter of Guarantee

.6 Signed-off substantial completion inspection report.

.7 Power Smart documentation for chiller, VSDs etc.

.8 List of spare parts signed off by Owner.

.9 Kitchen Hood fire suppression system verification

.5 Plumbing

.1 Final plumbing acceptance inspection report from city of Quesnel

.2 Valve tag chart for plumbing system.

.3 Pressure test reports for sanitary, storm and domestic water.



.4 Back flow prevention test reports.


.6 O&M information.

.7 Final gas inspection acceptance inspection.

.8 Inside water service chlorination report.

.6 Sprinkler System

.1 Sprinkler material and test certificate.

.2 Sprinkler contractor's schedule 'C' letter of assurance.

.3 Final sprinkler acceptance inspection report from municipality.

.4 Valve tag chart and low point drains.

.5 Back flow prevention test reports.

.6 As built documents.

.7 O&M information. Spare sprinklers, cabinet and wrench.

.7 Other reports including:

.1 Manufacture start-up reports

.2 Air and Water Balance.

.3 Commissioning.

.4 Fire stop letter of assurance.

.5 Heating, chilled water chemical treatment.

.6 VFDs

1.46 SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS


.2 Before the Consultant is requested to inspect for substantial performance of the work:

.1 Commission all systems and prove out all components, interlocks and safety devices.

.2 Submit a letter certifying that all work (including calibration of instruments and balancing of systems) is complete, operational, clean and all required submissions have been completed.

.3 A complete list of incomplete or deficient items shall be provided. If, in the opinion of the Consultant, this list indicates the project is excessively incomplete, a substantial completion inspection will not be performed.

.3 The work will not be considered to be ready for use or substantially complete until the following requirements have been met:

.1 All reported deficiencies have been corrected.

.2 Testing and balancing completed.

.3 Operating and Maintenance Manuals completed.

.4 "As built" record drawing ready for review.



.5 System Commissioning has been completed and has been verified by Consultant.

.6 All demonstrations to the owner have been completed.

.4 Letters of assurance will not be issued until the following requirements have been met:

.1 All items listed in .1 and .2 above have been completed.

.2 Certificate of Fire Damper Installation

.3 Certificate of Penetrations through Separations

.4 Gas Inspection - Certificate of inspection.

.5 Seismic engineer’s letter of assurance and final inspection report.

.6 Certificate of Substantial Performance

.7 Signed off copy of final inspection report.

.8 Sprinkler and fire alarm test verification, sprinkler materials and test certificate and engineer’s letter of assurance.

.9 Plumbing inspection report / card.

.10 Certificate of Backflow Prevention Device.

1.47 DEFICIENCY HOLDBACKS AND DEFICIENCY INSPECTIONS

.1 Work under this Division which is still outstanding when substantial performance is certified will be considered deficient and a sum equal to at least twice the estimated cost of completing that work will be held back.

.2 It is expected that outstanding work will be completed in an expeditious manner and the entire holdback sum will be retained until the requirements for Total Performance of Division 21, 22, 23 and 25 work have been met and verified.

Part 2 Products

2.1 ACCESS DOORS

.1 Supply flush mounted access doors, for installation by Building Trades in furred ceilings and walls, to permit servicing of mechanical equipment and accessories, inspection of life safety or operating devices, and where specifically indicated.

.2 Refer to Specifications Section 08 31 13 for additional access hatch requirements.

.3 Unless otherwise noted, access doors shall be minimum: 600mm x 600mm [24" x 24"] for body entry; 300mm x 450mm [12" x 18"] for hand entry; 200mm x 200mm [8" x 8"] for cleanout access.

.1 Access doors in building surfaces shall be at least as large as duct access panels accessed through them and shall be oversized when necessary. Size to suit masonry modules when located in a masonry wall.

.4 Locate access doors so that all concealed items are readily accessible for adjustment, operation and maintenance. Locate in service and storage areas wherever possible. Do not locate in paneled, feature or special finish walls, without prior approval of the Consultant.

.1 Access doors in rated fire separations and firewalls shall have a compatible fire rating and a ULC label with tamper-proof latch, self-closing.

.5 Access Doors – Non-secure:

.1 Constructed of steel, prime coated, except:

.1 Constructed of stainless steel in areas finished with tile or marble surfaces



.2 Constructed of stainless steel with neoprene gasketed door in damp and high humidity areas

.2 Flush mounted with 180o opening door, round safety corners, concealed hinges, plaster lock and anchor straps and tabs to suit wall or ceiling construction type.

.3 Generally fitted with screwdriver operated latches, except:

.4 Plaster or wet wall construction: flush with wall or ceiling type with concealed flange.

.5 Tile, ceramic tile, marble, terrazzo, plaster or wet wall construction in washrooms and other special areas: flush with wall or ceiling type with concealed flange.

.6 Feature wall construction: Recessed wall type that is selected to complement and conform with the architectural module, treatment, or panelling. The size shall conform to adjacent finishes.

.7 Access panels in fire separations and fire walls shall have a compatible fire rating and ULC label.

.8 Access doors are not required in removable ceilings. Provide coloured marking devices after completion of ceilings, at four corners of each panel below point requiring access. Colour code markers to show service or device above.

.9 At time of instruction of owners operating staff, hand-over and obtain signed receipt for 4 sets of each type of key used to lock access doors.

.10 Standard of Acceptance: Maxam, Milcor, Acudor

2.2 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

.1 Prepare instruction manuals which include equipment manufacturers' operating and maintenance bulletins, a report on the balancing of the air and water systems and a report on chlorination of water mains.

.2 Comply with requirements indicated in Division 1.

.3 The manufacturers' bulletins shall include:

.1 General description of the unit or system, with component parts, and their operational procedures.

.2 Normal maintenance and minor troubleshooting of each major item.

.3 Start-up and shut-down requirements for each system.

.4 Engineering data and tests.

.5 Wiring diagrams.

.6 Control diagrams.

.7 Servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.

.8 Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.

.9 Spare parts list.

.10 Local source of supply for replacement parts.

.4 Provide three hard copies in suitably labelled stiff Accopress binders, to the Consultant at least 10 days prior to the Substantial Performance inspection date. The front cover of the manual indicates the Name of Project and Name of Manual.

.5 Provide digital format manuals as follows,

.1 Digital manuals shall be supplied on CD or USB drive

.2 The digital version content and organization for each manual shall be arranged in a manner identical to the hard copy version.

.3 Utilize Adobe Acrobat 11 (or later) Portable Document Format (PDF). Include a copy of Adobe Acrobat Reader 11 (or later)



.4 The information shall be organized into sections in a user-friendly format that is easy to search for specific information. An indexing system shall be included that remains on an expandable portion of the screen and allows the end user to scroll through the manual information that appears on the main portion of the screen.

2.3 RECORD DRAWINGS

.1 Comply with requirements indicated in Division 1 – Project Record Documents.

.2 Maintain one hard copy set of contract drawings, including all supplementary and revision drawings on site, solely for the purpose of recording, in red, any change and/or deviation from the Contract Drawings as it occurs. Include elevations and detailed locations of buried services.

.3 The set of drawings will be provided to the contractor by the Consultant at the contractors cost.

.4 The marked-up set of drawings will be reviewed on site monthly by the consultant during the construction process. This review will form a requirement for approval of the monthly progress claim.

.5 Back filling shall not occur until underground services dimensions are marked on the on-site record set.

.6 The Record Drawings shall include, but not limited to, the following changes and shall be recorded daily:

.1 Size, location, arrangement, routing and extent of ductwork, piping, terminal units, equipment, fixtures, clean-outs, valves, rough-in, etc. above and below grade inside the building and including dimensioned locations of buried piping from building walls

.2 Location of fire dampers.

.3 Location of all heat traced piping and associated controllers.

.4 Location of back flow preventers.

.5 Location of water hammer arrestors.

.6 Water lines: Invert elevations to be recorded at each junction, changes of direction and every 30 m [100 ft.] run.

.7 Sanitary Sewers: Invert elevations and locations to be recorded at each clean-out.

.8 Storm Drains & Sewers: Invert elevations to be recorded at each manhole, clean-out, changes of direction and every 30 m [100 ft.] run.

.9 Gas Lines: Invert elevations to be recorded at each junction, at building entry point and at changes of direction.

.10 All services located below ground level and in or below a building slab.

.11 All valve stations, trap stations, coils dampers and ductwork not easily accessible.

.12 Location, tagging, and numbering of all valves as specified in Section 23 05 53

.7 Record Drawings:

.1 Refer to Division 1 for cost of preparing record drawings.

.2 Obtain the services of the Consultant or an approved draftsperson to transfer all changes to amend the model files.

.3 Include all details from revision drawings, addenda, and change orders. Label each drawing in the lower right corner in letters of at least 12mm [1/2"] high as follows:

.1 "AS BUILT DRAWINGS,” Contractors name and date.



Part 3 Execution

3.1 CONCEALMENT

.1 Conceal all piping, ductwork and conduit in partitions, walls, crawlspaces and ceiling spaces, unless otherwise noted.

.2 Do not install piping and conduit in outside walls or roof slabs unless specifically directed, in which case, install them with the building insulation between them and the outside face of the building.

3.2 ACCESSIBILITY

.1 Install all work so as to be readily accessible for adjustment, operation and maintenance. Furnish access doors where required in building surfaces for installation by building trades. Refer to item "Access Doors.”

3.3 PIPING EXPANSION

.1 Install piping with all necessary changes of direction, expansion loops, anchors and guides so that expansion and contraction will not overstress the piping and equipment piping connections.

.2 Expansion loops shall be of all welded construction with long radius elbows; cold sprung 50% and located between anchors.

.3 Anchors shall be fabricated from mild steel plate and structural steel angle and channel sections, in accordance with ANSI B.31.

3.4 PROTECTION OF WORK

.1 Protect equipment and materials, stored or in place, from the weather, moisture, dust and physical damage.

.2 Mask machined surfaces. Secure covers over equipment openings and open ends of piping, ductwork and conduits, as installation work progresses.

.3 Equipment having operating parts, bearings or machined surfaces, showing signs of rusting, pitting or physical damage will be rejected.

.4 Refinish damaged or marred factory finish.

.5 Air systems to have air filters installed before fans are operated. Install new air filters before system acceptance.

3.5 CUTTING, PATCHING, DIGGING, CANNING, AND CORING

.1 Lay out all cutting, patching, digging, canning and coring required to accommodate the mechanical services. Coordinate with other Divisions.

.2 Refer to structural drawings for permissible locations of openings and permissible opening sizes in concrete floors and walls. Openings through structural members of the building shall not be made without the approval of the Consultant.

.3 Be responsible for correct location and sizing of all openings required under Division 21, 22, 23 and 25, including pipe sleeves and duct openings. Allow oversized openings for fire dampers and pipe penetrations where insulation is specified.

.4 Verify the location of existing service runs and steel reinforcing within existing concrete floor and walls prior to core drilling and/or cutting. Repairs to existing services and structural components damaged as a result of core drilling and cutting is included in this section of the work.

.5 The performance of actual cutting, patching, digging, canning and coring is specified under other Divisions.



.6 Be responsible for all cutting, patching, digging, canning and coring required to accommodate the mechanical services.

.7 All openings shall be core drilled or diamond saw cut.

3.6 SERVICE PENETRATIONS IN RATED FIRE SEPARATIONS

.1 Provide pipe sleeves for all piping passing through fire-rated walls and floors. Sleeves to be concentric with pipe.

.2 Submit shop drawings(s) of listed assemblies for each type of penetration through a rated assembly.

.3 All piping, tubing, ducts, wiring, conduits, etc. passing through rated fire separations shall be smoke and fireproofed with ULC approved materials in accordance with CAN4-S115-11 (R2016) and ASTM E814 standards and which meet the requirements of the Building code in effect. This includes new services, which pass through existing rated separations, and all existing services, which pass through a new rated separation or existing separations whose rating has been upgraded.

.4 Sleeves shall be sized to suit fire stopping methods employed for bare pipes, conduits, insulated pipes, and bare and insulated ducts without fire dampers, and

.5 Sleeves shall be sized to suit conditions of approval given in manufacturers installation instructions for fire and smoke dampers.

.6 Fire resistance rating of installed firestopping assembly shall not be less than fire resistance rating of surrounding assembly indicated on Architectural drawings.

.7 All smoke and fire stopping shall be installed by a qualified Contractor who shall submit a letter certifying that all work is complete and in accordance with this specification.

.8 Install fire stopping and smoke seal material and components in accordance with ULC certification and manufacturer's instructions in formed, sleeved or cored penetrations.

.9 Combustible pipe penetrations through fire separations that are required to have a fire resistance rating shall be as follows:

.1 Intumescent firestopping material contained in a metal housing that is certified for firestopping use. Installation shall be implemented in full compliance with the certified installation procedures. Standard of Acceptance: FGC Fireguard Corp. DONUT Firestop for flat surfaces; 3M Brand (Intumescent) Fire Barrier, Dow Corning Fire Stop Intumescent Wrap for Q-deck.

.10 Sleeves for fire-rated floor slabs in wet or dry areas shall be as noted on the Standard Details.

.11 Pack future-use sleeves with mineral wool insulation and then seal with ULC approved fire stop sealant for rated fire separations.

.12 Sleeves for interior partition (i.e. drywall) shall be as noted on the Standard Details.

.13 Sleeves for interior concrete or block walls shall be steel pipe or removable plastic pipe.

3.7 SERVICE PENETRATIONS IN NON-RATED SEPARATIONS

.1 Pipes and ducts passing through separations that have no fire resistance (non-rated separations) do not require a sleeve, but the insulation at the separation shall be wrapped with 0.61 [24 ga] thick galvanized sheet steel band to which to apply the flexible caulking compound to, to achieve a tight seal.

.2 Sleeves for concrete perimeter walls and foundation walls shall be cast iron sleeve or Schedule 40 steel pipe with annular fin continuously welded at midpoint and protruding 150 mm [6”] beyond sleeve diameter. Annular fin shall be embedded into centre of wall.

.3 Sleeves for non-rated floor slabs in wet or dry areas shall be steel pipe.

.4 Sleeves for interior concrete or block walls shall be steel pipe or removable plastic pipe.



3.8 FIRE STOPPING AND SMOKE SEAL MATERIALS

.1 References:

.1 CAN4-S115-M, Standard Method of Fire Tests of Firestop Systems.

.2 ASTM E814 Standard Method of Fire Tests and Through-Penetration Firestops.

.3 1997 Certifications Listings Intertek Testing Services N.A. Ltd. (Warnock Hersey).

.4 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada. Listing of Equipment and Materials Vol. 3 Fire Resistance Ratings -Revision 4/95.

.2 Work Included:

.1 Furnish all labour, material, equipment and services necessary to supply and install firestopping and smoke seals around mechanical service piping and duct penetrations through fire rated wall and floor assemblies, as indicated and as specified.

.3 Quality Assurance:

.1 The work of this section shall be carried out only by an approved specialist firm, employing skilled tradesmen experienced in firestopping and smoke seal application and approved, licensed and supervised by the manufacturer of fire stopping materials.

.2 All work to be of the highest quality according to best trade practice and in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed specifications.

.4 Submittals:

.1 Submit shop drawings to show proposed material, reinforcement, anchorage, fastenings and method of installation.

.2 Submit manufacturers' product data for materials and prefabricated devices. Include assembly/location design system number references with copies of test information. Construction details should accurately reflect actual job conditions.

.3 For building assemblies which do not correspond to any previously tested and rated assemblies, submit proposals based on related designs using accepted fireproofing design criteria.

.5 Materials:

.1 Asbestos-free materials and systems capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of ULC CAN4-S115 and not to exceed opening sizes for which they are intended.

.2 Service penetration assemblies and design numbers: Certified by ULC in accordance with CAN4-S115 and listed in ULC Guide No. 40 U19. 1997 Certification Listings Intertek Testing Services N.A. Ltd. (Warnock Hersey).

.3 Service penetration firestop components: Certified by ULC in accordance with CAN4-S115 and listed in ULC Guide No. 40 U19.13 and ULC Guide No. 40 U19.15 under the Label Service of ULC or equivalent approved tests by Warnock Hersey.

.4 Fire resistance rating of installed fire stopping assembly shall be not less than the fire resistance rating of surrounding floor and wall assembly.

3.9 LINK SEALS

.1 Fit each pipe passing through floor slab in contact with ground or basement walls below grade with link seal between sleeve and bare pipe.

.2 Submit manufacturer’s literature and schedule showing location, service, inside diameter of wall opening, sleeve length and pipe outside diameter.



.3 Link seal:

.1 Manufactured from modular synthetic rubber links with stainless steel hardware.

.2 Loosely assembled with bolts to form continuous rubber belt around pipe, with pressure plate under each bolt head and nut.

.3 Constructed to provide electrical insulation between pipe and sleeve.

.4 Installation

.1 Determine inside diameter of each wall opening or sleeve before ordering seal.

.2 Position seal in sleeve around pipe and tighten bolts to expand rubber links until watertight seal is obtained.

3.10 ACCESS DOORS

.1 Install access doors at all concealed cleanouts, traps, unions, expansion joints, valves, control valves, air vents, water hammer arrestors, special equipment, trap primers, vacuum breakers and any other equipment for which subsequent periodic access will be required during the life of said equipment.

.2 Locate access doors so that all concealed items are readily accessible for adjustment, operation, maintenance and replacement.

.3 Do not locate access doors in feature walls or ceilings without the prior approval of the Consultant. Locate in service areas and storage rooms wherever possible.

3.11 ESCUTCHEONS AND PLATES

.1 Provide on pipes passing through finished walls, partitions, floors and ceilings.

.2 Plates shall be stamped steel, split type, chrome plated, or stainless steel, concealed hinge, complete with springs, suitable for external dimensions of piping/insulation. Secure to pipe or finished surface. For all pipes passing through suspended ceilings and uninsulated piping passing through walls. Outside diameter shall cover opening or sleeve.

.3 Where pipe sleeve extends above finished floor, escutcheons or plates shall clear sleeve extension.

.4 Do not install escutcheons and plates in concealed locations.

3.12 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS, PLATFORMS, LADDERS, AND BASES

.1 Provide stands and supports for equipment and materials supplied.

.2 Supports:

.1 Fabricate platforms, gratings, ladders, piping and equipment supplementary supporting steel, and trench and pit covers, from steel and provided by this Division.

.2 Concrete housekeeping bases for mechanical equipment which are in direct contact with floor slab, to be provided by this Division.

.3 Concrete bases for equipment supported on vibration isolation materials (inertia pads), to be provided by this Division.

.4 Construct equipment supports of structural steel or steel pipe. Securely brace. Employ only welded construction. Bolt mounting plates to the structure.

.5 Support ceiling hung equipment with rod hangers and/or structural steel.

.6 Work to be done by firms specializing in these fields.

.7 Submit shop drawings for steel and concrete work, prepared by licensed Professional Engineers.

.3 Concrete bases for housekeeping pads:



.1 Lay out concrete bases and curbs required under Divisions 21, 22, 23 and 25. Coordinate with Division 3. All concrete work is under Division 3.

.2 Constructed using plywood form work and 20 Mpa [3000 lb] concrete.

.3 Bases and curbs shall be keyed to the floor and incorporate reinforcing bars and/or steel mesh. Chamfer edges of bases at 45 degrees.

.4 Dowel to concrete floor slab with not less than 13 mm [1/2”] diameter steel rods.

.5 Plan dimensions:

.1 150 mm [6”] larger all around than base of apparatus for non-seismic applications,

.2 200 mm [8”] larger all around than base of apparatus for seismically restrained equipment, and

.3 finished to make smooth, neat surfaces with corners chamfered 25 mm [1”].

.6 Height conforming to following table;

.1 Equipment:

.1 Stationary, not motorized: 100mm [4”]

.2 Motorized: 150mm [6”]

.7 Equipment with bedplates shall have metal wedges placed under the edges of the bedplates to raise them 25 [1"] above the base after levelling. The wedges shall be left permanently in place. Fill the space between the bedplate and the base with non-shrink grout.

.4 Installation:

.1 Locate supporting steel to permit removal of parts for service or repair, and to allow clear access to valves, fittings, and equipment,

.2 Set equipment on supporting frames and brackets and install hangers, anchor bolts, vibration mountings and snubbers.

.3 Set equipment base plates on housekeeping pads on minimum 13 mm [1/2”] epoxy grout and fill hollow portion of base with concrete.

.4 Install anchor bolts, vibration mountings and snubbers between equipment and housekeeping pad, or inertia pad and housekeeping pad.

.5 Erect metalwork square, plumb, straight, and true, accurately fitted, with tight joints and intersections.

.6 Provide anchorage, dowels, anchor clips, bar anchors, expansion bolts and shields, and toggles.

.7 Make field connections with bolts to CAN/CSA-S16.1, or weld.

.8 Supply items for casting into concrete or building into masonry to appropriate trades together with setting templates.

.9 Touch-up field welds, bolts and burnt or scratched surfaces after completion of erection with primer.

.10 Where gratings or trench covers are cut in field or damaged, touch up with zinc rich paint.

3.13 EQUIPMENT RESTRAINT

.1 It is the entire responsibility of equipment manufacturers to design their equipment so that the strength and anchorage of internal components of the equipment exceeds the force level used to restrain and anchor the unit itself to the supporting structure.



3.14 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

.1 Provide unions and flanges to permit equipment maintenance and disassembly and to minimize disturbance to piping and duct systems and without interfering with building structure or other equipment.

.2 Provide means of access for servicing equipment including permanently lubricated bearings.

.3 Pipe equipment drains to floor drains.

.4 Line up equipment, rectangular cleanouts and similar items with building walls wherever possible.

3.15 ANCHOR BOLTS AND TEMPLATES

.1 Supply anchor bolts and templates for installation by other divisions.

3.16 MISCELLANEOUS METALS

.1 Be responsible for all miscellaneous steel work relative to Division 21, 22, 23, 25 of the Specifications, including but not limited to:

.1 Support of equipment

.2 Hanging, support, anchoring, guiding and relative work as it applies to piping, ductwork, fans and mechanical equipment.

.3 Earthquake restraint devices - refer to Section 23 05 49.

.4 Access platforms, ladders, and catwalks.

.5 Pipe anchor and/or support posts.

.6 Ceiling ring bolts - secure to structure or steel supports.

.7 All steel work shall be primed and undercoat painted ready for finish under Division 9. Refer to drawings for details.

3.17 FLASHING

.1 Flash and counterflash where mechanical equipment passes through weather or water proofed walls, floors, and roofs.

.2 Flash, vent and soil pipes projecting 75 mm [3”] minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked 25 mm [1”] minimum into hub, 200 mm [8”] minimum clear on side with minimum 600 x 600 mm [24” x 24”] sheet size. For pipes through outside walls turn flange back into wall and caulk.

.3 Flash floor drains over finished areas with lead 250 mm [10”] clear on sides with minimum 900 x 900 mm [36’” x 36”] sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device.

.4 Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 200 mm [8”] minimum high above roof insulation. Flash and counterflash with galvanized steel, soldered and made waterproofed.

.5 Provide continuous lead or neoprene safes for built-up mop sinks, and shower stalls located above finished rooms. Solder at joints, flash into floor drains and turn up 150 mm [6”] into walls or to top of curbs and caulk into joints.

3.18 DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS

.1 On all "OPEN" systems provide wherever pipes of dissimilar metals are joined.

.2 Provide insulating unions for pipe sizes 50mm [2”] and under and flanges for pipe sizes 65mm [2.5”] and larger.

.3 Provide felt or rubber gaskets to prevent dissimilar metals contact.

.4 Standard of Acceptance: Capital, Walter Vallet, EPCO.



3.19 LUBRICATION OF EQUIPMENT

.1 Lubricate all new equipment prior to being operated, except sealed bearings, which shall be checked.

.2 Use the lubricant recommended by the manufacturer for the service for which the equipment is specified.

.3 Extend lubricating connections and sight glasses to the outside of housings, where lubricating positions are not readily accessible.

.4 Submit a check list, showing that all operated equipment has been lubricated prior to and during any temporary heating period and the demonstration and instruction period.

3.20 PAINTING

.1 Clean exposed bare metal surfaces supplied under Division 21, 22, 23 and 25 removing all dirt, dust, grease and millscale. Apply at least one coat of corrosion resistant primer paint to all supports and equipment fabricated from ferrous metal.

.2 After equipment has been installed and piping and insulation is completed, clean rust and oil from exposed iron and steel work provided under this Division, whether or not it has been factory prime painted.

.3 Paint all pipe hangers and exposed sleeves, in exposed areas, with a rust inhibiting primer, as they are installed.

.4 Repaint all marred factory finished equipment supplied under Division 21, 22, 23 and 25, which is not scheduled to be repainted, to match the original factory finish.

.5 In "occupied" areas of building touch up any damage to prime coat resulting from shipping or installation and leave ready for final painting under Finishes, Division 9.

.6 In "un-occupied" areas of the building such as mechanical equipment rooms, boiler rooms, fan rooms, crawl spaces, pipe tunnels and penthouses:

.1 paint exposed galvanized metal surfaces with one coat of zinc dust galvanized primer and one coat of 100% Alkyd base enamel in an approved colour; and

.2 paint exposed iron or steel work with one coat of chrome oxide phenolic base primer and one coat of 100% Alkyd base enamel in an approved colour.

.7 Natural gas and fire protection piping shall be painted for identification purposes over their entire lengths throughout all exposed areas and in the mechanical room(s) as follows:

.1 Gas: Yellow, C.G.S.B. 505-101

.2 Fire: Red, C.G.S.B. 509-102

.8 Coordinate with Division 9.

.9 Painting of all equipment and materials, supplied under Division 21, 22, 23 and 25, installed in mechanical equipment areas and inside finished areas of the building or exposed outside the building, is included under Division 9 of the Specification.

.10 Painting by Division 9 shall be in accordance with the following Colour Schedule for Mechanical Equipment Areas:

Item Primer (Note **) Colour Finish

Air Handling Units 1. Damp-proof Red2. Zinc Chromate

Grey

Catwalks and Ladders 1. Damp-proof Red2. Zinc Chromate

Grey

Ductwork, Plenums and Miscellaneous Steel

not galvanized 1. Damp-proof Red2. Zinc Chromate

Grey

galvanized Clear blue undercoat White (2 coats)



Item Primer (Note **) Colour Finish

plenum access doors and 200 mm [8”] around doors

Clear blue undercoat Grey

Exposed Misc. Metal (supplied under this contract)

1. Damp-proof Red2. Zinc Chromate

To be determined on site

Fan Casings and Bases 1. Damp-proof Red 2. Zinc Chromate

Grey

Guards – Belt and Coupling 1. Damp-proof Red 2. Zinc Chromate

To match equipment

Handrails Red Primer Aluminum

Insulation Covering (on piping) White Primer White

Motors (electric) To match associated equipment

Piping (uninsulated)

fire lines (standpipes, sprinklers) Red Primer Red

gas (natural) Red Primer Yellow

services other than above Red Primer White

Valve Bodies (uninsulated)

hot water heating, antifreeze heating Red Primer Aluminum (high temp.)

Note ** 1. denotes first primer coat and 2. denotes second primer coat.

3.21 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP

.1 Protect equipment and material in storage, on site and after installation until final acceptance. Leave factory covers in place. Take special precautions to prevent entry of foreign material into working parts of piping and duct systems.

.2 All mechanical equipment stored on site shall be kept in a dry, heated and ventilated storage area.

.3 Thoroughly clean piping, ducts and equipment of dirt, cuttings, and other foreign material.

.4 Protect bearings and shafts during installation. Grease shafts and sheaves to prevent corrosion. Supply and install necessary extended nipples for lubrication purposes.

.5 Provide, install and maintain 30% efficient temporary filters to return and exhaust air openings from ceiling spaces to prevent air born dust from entering ducts, plenums and coils. Install filters to return air grilles when fans are operated, and building is not at a clean condition.

3.22 FINAL CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENTS

.1 Conduct final cleaning.

.2 Thoroughly clean exterior surface of exposed piping, and vacuum external surfaces of exposed ducts and interior surfaces of air handling units. Clean strainers in piping systems and install clean filters in air handling systems.

.3 Remove tools and waste materials on completion of work and leave work in clean and perfect condition.

.4 Calibrate components and controls and check function and sequencing of systems under operating conditions.

.5 Supply lubricating oils and packing for proper operation of equipment and systems until work has been accepted.

3.23 START-UP

.1 Before starting the plant, provide a certificate stating that the plant is ready for start-up and the following conditions have been met. Use forms in Section 23 99 60 for this purpose.



.1 All safety controls installed and fully operational.

.2 Qualified personnel available to operate the plant.

.3 Permanent electrical connections made to all equipment.

.4 All air filters installed.

.5 Fan drives properly aligned by a journeyman millwright.

.6 All mechanical equipment rooms, including plenums, vacuum cleaned.

3.24 START-UP AND PERFORMANCE REPORTS

.1 Required reports

.1 Provide the following Start-Up and Performance Testing reports:

.1 Equipment start-up report

.2 Authorities report

.3 Acoustic survey report

.4 Controls / BMS operation report

.2 Equipment start-up report

.1 Provide a test report in spreadsheet format which summarizes the following data for each piece of equipment which is powered or has automatic controls:

.1 equipment ID and name,

.2 motor insulation megger test - result and initialed by contractor,

.3 motor rotation (bump test) - result and initialed by contractor,

.4 equipment Start-Up report status - status and initialed by contractor,

.5 manufacturer Start-Up report status – status and initialed by contractor,

.6 test completion date.

.2 Provide a test report in spreadsheet format which summarizes the following data for testing of piping systems:

.1 system name

.2 system limits (if system is not tested in its entirety),

.3 type of test (pneumatic, hydrostatic),

.4 pressure at start of test,

.5 pressure at end of test,

.6 duration of test,

.7 contractor dated and initialed,

.8 expansion tank initial pressure,

.9 expansion tank final pressure,

.10 backflow preventers have been tested - status and initialed by contractor,

.11 pressure relief valves installed – record setpoint and initialed by contractor.

.3 Equipment/System Start-Up Test Report

.1 Provide a separate start-up report for each piece of the following equipment. The SMACNA “Systems Ready to Balance Check List”, where applicable, may be used for this report.

.1 HVAC Units

.2 Duct Systems

.3 Refrigeration Equipment



.4 Hydronic piping systems

.5 Sprinkler systems (to NFPA 13)

.4 Manufacturer’s Start-Up Test

.1 Provide a separate start-up report for each piece of the following equipment, utilizing the manufacturer’s start-up check list. This report may be prepared by the manufacturer’s service representative:

.1 chemical water treatment - pipe cleaning,

.2 chemical water treatment - passivating and inhibition,

.3 refrigeration equipment,

.4 packaged AC equipment,

.5 packaged humidity steam generators,

.6 adjustable frequency drives,

.7 Building Automation Systems.

.3 Authorities review

.1 Submit copies of authorities-having-jurisdiction inspection and test reports, including:

.2 Plumbing and drainage municipal inspector reports

.3 BC Safety Authority for pressure vessel and piping inspection reports

.4 ESA field certification reports

.4 Acoustic survey

.1 Provide acoustic survey test report:

.5 Controls / Building Management System

.1 Provide controls test reports.

.6 Report Submissions

.1 Deficiencies

.1 Immediately report to Consultant, any deficiencies in the systems or equipment performance resulting in design requirements being unobtainable.

.2 Draft report

.1 On completion of the start-up, testing, adjusting and balancing of all systems, submit to the Consultant, two (2) typewritten copies of a full report on all tests, adjustments, and balancing performed.

.2 Attachments including systems schematics with numbered terminals for referring to data above.

.3 Spot checks

.1 After review of the Draft Report by the Consultant and at the Consultants direction, retest up to 30% of all measurements in locations as directed by the Consultant, at no cost extra to the contract.

.2 If results indicate unusual testing inaccuracy, omissions, or incomplete balancing/adjustment, in the opinion of the Consultant, re-balance entire affected system(s) at no increase in Contract Price.

.4 Interim report

.1 After completion of any retesting described above, submit three (3) typewritten copies of the interim report, in a 3-hole “D” style binder, and two (2) CD or DVD electronic copies in pdf format.



.5 Final report

.1 Submit to Consultant following completion of alternate season testing and balancing. Submit three (3) typewritten copies, and two (2) CD or DVD Adobe PDF in the same formats as the initial report specified above.

.6 Additional testing

.1 The Consultant may request such additional testing in connection with this project as he deems necessary.

.2 Perform additional testing and balancing at the rates quoted. Costs will be deducted from the Mechanical Subcontractor's allowance for the additional Testing and Balancing work as approved by the Consultant.

3.25 ACOUSTIC TESTING

.1 Scope

.1 Conduct acoustic (noise) measurements.

.2 Qualifications

.1 Acoustic measurements and analysis to be performed under supervision of recognized expert with an established reputation in this field.

.3 Acoustic survey

.1 Provide acoustic performance testing in accordance with SOR 5.3.7.20.

.4 Report format

.1 Reports to incorporate approved standard forms.

.2 Provide a one (1) page summary for each room/space test and include:

.1 date and time of test,

.2 background and operating test results,

.3 RC bandwidth results for 63 through 8000 Hz in both tabular and graphical formats.

.3 Include reduced architectural floor plan drawings, identifying test locations.

.4 Submit four hard copies of acoustic reports.

.5 Submit two soft copies of acoustic reports in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

.5 Verification

.1 Reported measurements will be verified.

.2 Provide instrumentation and manpower to verify results of up to 10% of reported measurements.

.3 Number and location of verification measurements to be at discretion of Engineer.

3.26 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION TO OPERATING STAFF

.1 Provide certified personnel to demonstrate plant operation and to instruct operating staff on operation of mechanical equipment. Provide maintenance specialist personnel to instruct operating staff on maintenance and adjustment of mechanical equipment and any changes or modification in equipment made under terms of guarantee.

.1 The demonstration shall include:

.2 Operation and sequencing of all automatic control dampers and automatic temperature control devices.

.3 Operation of smoke venting and pressurization systems including smoke dampers and fire fighters control panel.



.4 Operability of randomly selected fire dampers.

.5 Operation and maintenance requirements of all air, gas and water systems and equipment under each mode of operation including:

.1 Automatic controls.

.2 Hot water heating system (addition to).

.3 Fire protection systems.

.4 Plumbing Systems.

.5 Gas systems.

.6 Fans.

.7 Coils.

.8 Pumps.

.9 Kitchen Hood Exhaust Systems

.10 Kitchen Hood Fire Suppression Systems

.11 Specialty systems.

.2 Provide instruction during regular work hours prior to acceptance and turn-over to operating staff for regular operation.

.3 Use Operating and Maintenance manuals for instruction purposes.

.4 Submit the proposed instructional agenda for approval.

.5 Finalize demonstration and instructions by obtaining a signed statement from the Owner that the demonstration and instructions have been given satisfactorily. Use Forms in Section 23 99 60 for this purpose.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 23 05 13543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC SYSTEMSNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 8


Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


1.2 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

.1 Motors to be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with standards of:

.1 NEMA, ANSI, IEEE, and ASTM,

.2 conform with applicable sections of NEMA Standard No. MG-1 Motors and Generators.


.1 Motors shall be UL listed and CSA certified.

.2 Full Voltage Start Applications:

.1 All motors shall be in accordance with NEMA standards, and CSA C390-93, or the latest version insofar as it is applicable. Motors also shall comply with the applicable portions of the Canadian Electrical Code.

.3 Variable Frequency Drive and soft start applications:

.1 All motors shall be in accordance with NEMA standards (MG-1) Part 31, and inverter duty class, or the latest version insofar as it is applicable. Motors also shall comply with the applicable portions of the Canadian Electrical Code.

.2 Motors connected to VFD(s) shall be wound using inverter spike resistant magnet wire capable of 1600V.

.4 The noise level of each motor shall comply with NEMA standards, less than 80 dBA at 1 meter.

.5 Provide all motors with thermal overload protection. Coordinate with Electrical contractor.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit data of test method used and motor efficiencies with shop drawings.

Part 2 Products

2.1 ELECTRIC MOTORS - GENERAL


.2 Provide motors for all mechanical equipment.

.3 Test performance equal to or better than level required by Energy Efficiency regulations when tested to CSA 390 M Energy Efficiency Test Methods for Three Phase Induction Motors, or IEE 112b Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators.

.4 Motor nameplate rating:

.1 Not less than input brake horsepower of driven equipment at specified operating condition,

.2 Suitable for starting conditions.

.5 Motor Characteristics:

.1 Frequency: 60 Hz

.2 Voltage:

.1 Motors less than 373 W [½ HP]: 120 volt, single phase



.2 Motors 1/2 H.P. and larger to be 3 phase power and for the scheduled voltage. Confirm electric voltage, phase and starter requirements with the electrical specification.

.3 Speed: 1800 RPM unless specifically scheduled otherwise.

.6 All motors shall be designed and manufactured to operate with ±10% voltage and ±5% frequency variations of the nameplate ratings. Combined voltage and frequency variation shall not exceed ±10%.

.7 Motors powered by variable speed drive controllers shall be EEMAC Class B with Type F insulation, shall have a 1.15 service factor and shall be suitable to be driven by PWM variable speed drive controllers. The motor manufacturer shall submit in writing confirmation that the motors are designed to withstand voltage peaks of 1400 volts and a voltage rate of rise of 2000 volts / microsecond at a frequency of 20 kHz.

.8 Motors will be rated for a 1.15 service factor in a 40°C ambient environment.

.9 Provide all motors with terminal boxes, suitable for power connections.

.10 Provide screw adjustable bases on all belt-connected motors.

.11 Motors to be of the capacitor start type when they may be manually cycled from a starting switch, which is located in the finished space.

.12 Motors exposed to outdoor temperature to be lubricated with lubricants suitable for operation at 6 deg. C. below the lowest temperature recorded by ASHRAE or the Climatic Information (Supplement to the National Building Code), for the location in which they are installed.

.13 All motors 10 hp and larger that are controlled by a VFD are to use a dielectric grease bearings and a grounding kit with a system of brass or stainless steel brushings.

2.2 ELECTRIC MOTORS – PREMIUM EFFICIENCY

.1 All motors shall be provided with NEMA Design Type B, premium efficiency classification with non-wicking leads.

.2 All motor efficiencies shall comply with ASHRAE 90.1, minimum.

.3 Premium efficiency open drip-proof motors shall have the following typical full load efficiencies (nominal):

Premium Efficient - Minimum Efficiency (%)

HP 3600 RPM2 Pole

1800 RPM4 Pole

1200 RPM6 Pole

1 77.0 85.5 82.5

1.5 84.0 86.5 86.5

2 85.5 86.5 87.5

3 86.5 89.5 88.5

5 86.5 89.5 89.5

.4 Premium efficiency totally enclosed fan cooled motors shall have the following typical full load efficiencies (nominal).

Premium Efficiency - Minimum Efficiency (%)

HP 3600 RPM2 Pole

1800 RPM4 Pole

1200 RPM6 Pole

1 77.0 85.5 82.5

1.5 84.0 86.5 87.5

2 85.5 86.5 88.5

3 86.5 89.5 89.5

5 88.5 89.5 89.5



2.3 SINGLE PHASE MOTORS

.1 Motors less than 375 W (½ HP):

.1 single phase,

.2 continuous duty,

.3 resilient mount, and

.4 built-in thermal overload protection.

2.4 THREE PHASE FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER

.1 Motors of 375 W (½ HP) and 560 W (3/4 HP):

.1 three phase squirrel cage induction type,

.2 NEMA Design B

2.5 THREE PHASE MOTORS FOR SERVICE WITH MAGNETIC STARTERS

.1 Motors 745 W (1 HP) and larger for sine wave power supply.

.2 General:

.1 Open Drip Proof (ODP), NEMA T frame assembly

.2 NEMA Premium efficiency, general purpose duty type,

.3 suitable for horizontal, vertical or belt-driven mounting

.4 NEMA Design B, squirrel cage, induction type

.5 class B insulation, at 40°C (104°F) ambient temperature.

.6 1.15 service factor,

.7 3 leads for single voltage service.

.8 Two speed motors: six (6) lead motors.

.9 Five lead two-speed motors are not acceptable.

2.6 THREE PHASE MOTORS FOR SERVICE WITH SPEED DRIVES

.1 Motors 745 W (1 HP) and larger suitable for pulse width modulated wave form.

.2 General:

.1 Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC), NEMA T frame assembly

.2 NEMA Premium efficiency, inverter duty type,

.3 suitable for horizontal, vertical or belt-driven mounting

.4 NEMA Design B, squirrel cage, induction type

.5 Fabricated and nameplated in accordance with NEMA MG-1 Part 31 for;

.1 200% of full load starting torque

.2 Class F triple build winding insulation

.3 continuous duty

.4 40°C (104°F) ambient temperature

.6 1.15 service factor,

.7 3 leads for single voltage service.

.8 Motor designed for grounding of stray rotor currents by application of electrically conductive bearing grease or rotor bearing brush assembly.

2.7 ENCLOSURE, ALL MOTORS

.1 Construction:

.1 cast iron, aluminum, or rolled steel construction,

.2 drain openings,

.3 shouldered lifting eye bolts,



.4 bi-directional, spark-proof, abrasion and corrosive resistant fan keyed to shaft,

.5 compression type grounding lug or double ended cap screw of silicon bronze, mounted in conduit box by drilling and tapping into motor frame

.2 Motor nameplate:

.1 Type 316 stainless steel,

.2 Mounted on enclosure with stainless steel fastening pins,

.3 information as described in NEMA Standard MG-1-20.60,

.4 motor bearing part numbers and motor wiring diagram indicated.

.3 Protective coating;

.1 primer and 4-5 mils epoxy overcoat on external surfaces, and corrosion resistant coating of epoxy paint on internal surfaces, shaft, rotor, stator iron, and end bells.

.2 shaft extension protected with rust preventive strippable coating capable of being peeled off or unwrapped.

.4 Motor termination boxes/leads:

.1 cast iron diagonally split, pipe tapped for conduit,

.2 attached to motor frame with cadmium plated hex head cap screws,

.3 arranged for conduit entry from either side or bottom,

.4 gaskets between box and motor frame and between halves of box,

.5 cover secured with cadmium plated hex head cap screws,

.6 box assembled to motor,

.7 motor leads in conduit box;

.1 identified in accordance with ANSI C6.1 ,

.2 with same insulation class as windings,

.3 sized in accordance with EASA recommended minimum ampacity values.

.8 motor leads between motor frame and termination box to pass through tight fitting neoprene rubber seal.

2.8 THREE PHASE MOTOR CONSTRUCTION FOR AFD

.1 Motor stator winding:

.1 made up with copper magnet wire coated with moisture resistant Class F, non-hygroscopic varnish with thermal rating of not less than 150C for 30,000 hours life when tested in accordance with IEEE No. 57.

.2 insulation resistance greater than 100 megaohms when measured at 25°C measured with 1000-volt megger for 600V motors and 500V megger for 208V motors.

.3 held in stator slots that have had sharp edges and burs removed prior to winding insertion.

.4 coils phase insulated using Nomex paper, laced down.

.5 connection leads mechanically secured and silver soldered.

.6 designed for operation in either direction of rotation.

.2 Motor bearings:

.1 anti-friction single shield, vacuum-degassed steel ball bearings with

.1 extended pipe zerk fitting, and ½-lb relief fitting for external lubrication while machine is in operation.

.2 bearing shield on motor winding side of bearing.



.3 rated fatigue life of L'-10 (B-10) 150,000 hours for direct coupled applications and 50,000 hours for belted applications.

.4 belted rating based on radial loads and pulley sizes from NEMA MG1-14.43.

.5 high quality bearing seal or Forsheda shaft slinger on outer or shaft end of bearing.

.2 lubricated at factory, after assembly, using zerk fittings to fill grease chamber and pipe extension

.3 Motor shafts and rotors

.1 Shafts:

.1 precision machined from high-strength carbon steel

.2 “standard long” for units 200-hp and smaller, for both direct connected drive duty and V-belt drives.

.2 rotor assemblies to be die cast aluminum, keyed, and shrunk or pressed to shaft using full shaft diameter for full length of rotor.

.3 shaft extension run out not to exceed 0.001" dial indicator reading measuring at right angles to shaft axis.

2.9 MOTOR OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

.1 Provide motor thermal protection devices in motors.

.2 Three phase motors 37 kW (50 HP) and larger:

.1 Winding sensors:

.1 three (3) Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) temperature sensors, one in each motor winding, wired in series, and compatible with Siemens model 3RN10 12 control unit.

.2 Connected to trip the motor starter, VFD or control device on an overheating condition.

2.10 SLIDING BASES FOR MOTORS WITH BELT DRIVES

.1 Construction:

.1 fabricated from steel as a single unit with double supported slide and two adjusting bolts.

.2 finished with coating as specified above for motor exterior.

2.11 PERMISSIBLE VIBRATION

.1 Vibration velocity to be not more than 0.05 inches/second measured at bearing housing.

2.12 SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL:

.1 Not more than 85dbA, measured at 3 metres in accordance with IEEE publication No. 85.

.2 Motor manufacturer to ensure that motor is compatible with type of adjustable frequency generation to be supplied, and that system will be capable of providing rated torque over frequency range from 15 to 60 hz while operating within motor temperature rise specification.

.3 Motor to be capable of operating between 60 Hz and 90 Hz with torque reducing at drive frequency above 60 Hz

2.13 BELT DRIVES

.1 Provide V-belt drive for each motor driven device which is not direct connected. Keep overhung loads on prime mover shafts within manufacturer's design guidelines.

.2 Minimum drive rating shall be 150% of nameplate rating of motor. Keep overhung loads within manufacturer's design requirements on prime mover shafts.



.3 Match drive and driven sheaves.

.4 Sheaves for motors up to 5.6 kW (7.5 hp) with not more than two belts:

.1 Cast iron or steel secured to shafts with removable keys.

.2 Provide adjustable pitch on motor, fixed pitch on driven device, giving plus or minus 10% speed range,

.3 Selected to meet specified operating condition at mid position in pitch adjustment.

.5 Sheaves for motors 7.5 kw (10 hp) and larger or drives with three or more belts

.1 Cast iron or steel with split tapered bushing and keyway.

.2 Provide fixed pitch drive sheaves with split tapered bushing and keyway. Provide final drive sheaves of size to suit final balancing.

.6 Belts:

.1 Select for service factor of 2.0 based on installed motor horsepower.

.2 V-belts shall conform to the American Belt Manufacturers standards. Multiple belts shall be matched sets.

.3 Capable of carrying load with one belt broken.

.7 Motor slide rails:

.1 Adjustment plates for centre line alignment

.2 Belt tension adjusting screws.

.8 Installation

.1 Tension belts to manufacturer's recommendations before start-up and after first 100 hr of operation using calibrated belt tensioning gauge.

.2 Provide replacement pulleys and belts during start-up and balancing to suit field operating conditions.

.9 Provide one spare set of belts for each piece of equipment with each belt separately identified for the equipment item to be served.

2.14 SHAFT COUPLINGS

.1 Shaft couplings shall be of the pin or jaw neoprene insert type, gear type, or flexing steel insert type and shall allow coupling inserts to be easily removed without disassembly of the equipment.

2.15 DRIVE AND COUPLING GUARDS

.1 Provide removable protective guards on all exposed V-belt drives and shaft couplings in accordance with OSHA and WorkSafeBC requirements.

.2 Guards for drives shall have:

.1 1 mm [18-gauge] expanded metal screen welded to 25 mm [1"] steel angle frame.

.2 1.5 mm [16-gauge] thick galvanized sheet metal tops and bottoms.

.3 Removable side[s] for servicing.

.4 38 mm [1-1/2"] dia. holes on both shaft centres for insertion of tachometer.

.5 Sectionalize if necessary so one man can handle removal.

.3 Provide means to permit lubrication and use of test instruments with guards in place.

.4 Fabricate and install belt guards for V-belt drives to permit movement of motors for adjusting belt tension and for belt slap.

.5 Provide removable "U" shaped guards for flexible couplings with 2.5 mm [12-gauge] thick galvanized frame and 1.2 mm [18-gauge] thick expanded mesh face.



.6 Provide guards on all unprotected fan inlets and outlets. Guards to be provided by fan manufacturer.

.1 Minimum 20 mm (: in) galvanized wire mesh or expanded metal screen with net free area of guard not less than 80% of fan opening

.7 Secure guards to equipment allowing for ease of removal.

.8 Prime coat guards and finish paint to match equipment.

2.16 TESTING

.1 Test motor in accordance with IEEE 112 "Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators" to conform with NEMA MG-1.

.2 Additional tests may be performed on a random sampling of units supplied for the project as follows;

.1 insulation test to establish capability to withstand continuous phase-to-ground RMS voltage of 1000 volts minimum for 30 minutes.

.2 winding to withstand 2500 volt AC phase-to-ground for one second.

.3 surge comparison test using 3000 volts AC phase-to-phase with submission of detailed comparison wave forms.

.4 shaft runout tests with results taken after motor is completely assembled.

.5 measurement of full load amperes, watts, power factor, RPM, and locked rotor current at rated voltage.

.6 verification of vibration status through velocity readings in inches/second taken at both ends of motor.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 ELECTRIC MOTORS

.1 Unless otherwise noted starters and protection devices will be included under the Electrical Division of the Specification.

.2 Assist Division 26 to ensure proper connection, correct thermal overload protection and correct motor controls.

.3 Where starters are included in this Division as an integral part of packaged equipment, they shall contain thermal overload protection in all ungrounded lines.

.4 Equipment, which has more than one voltage rating, shall be fed from a single power source through a disconnect switch.

.5 If delivery of specified motor will delay delivery or installation of any equipment, install an acceptable motor for temporary use. Final acceptance of equipment will not be given until specified motor is installed.

3.2 SHIPPING

.1 Ship motors from factory;

.1 packed in Styrofoam or similar material or

.2 fastened to hardwood skid or pallet for fork truck handling

.3 protected against dirt and moisture during transit and outdoor storage.

.4 clearly identified with permanent ink marking on packing.

.2 Motors attached to equipment:

.1 protected against dirt and moisture during transit and outdoor storage.

.2 rotated by hand at one-month intervals.



3.3 SETTING AND ALIGNMENT

.1 Employ a journeyman millwright to align all V-belt drives and/or shaft coupling drives prior to initial start-up. The millwright shall also check that centrifugal fan wheels are properly centered on fan shafts.

.2 Align shaft couplings, using a dial indicator, to within +/-0.051 mm [0.002"] after grouting is complete and the piping system is operational.

.3 Align V-belt drives using a straight edge.

.4 Submit a certificate from the millwright employed, certifying that all shaft couplings and V-belt drives have been aligned and centrifugal fan wheels centered prior to initial start-up and checked again after final system balance adjustment.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 23 05 14543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 VARIABLE SPEED DRIVESNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 11


Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK




.2 Comply with:

.1 CSA C22.1 Canadian Electrical Code.

.3 Reference Standards:

.1 IEEE Standard 519 IEEE Guide for Harmonic Content and Control

.2 UL 508C Power Conversion Equipment

.3 NEMA ICS 7.0 AC Adjustable Speed Drives

.4 IEC 16800 Parts 1 and 2.


.1 Manufacturer specializing in development and production of the products specified in this Section.

.2 Product:

.1 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) and options UL listed as a complete assembly,

.2 VFD's that require the customer to supply external fuses are not acceptable,

.3 VFD and options tested to ANSI/UL Standard 508 and listed by a nationally recognized testing agency such as UL or ETL, subject to the drives are suitable for use on nominal voltages up to 600 V AC with a nominal supply range of ±5%.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit for VFD’s in addition to the requirements of Division 01:

.1 Outline dimensions, conduit entry locations and weight,

.2 Control and power wiring diagrams,

.3 Complete technical product description including a list of options provided,

.4 A detailed statement of non-compliance issues to this specification, absent which the vendor and/or contractor shall be liable to provide all additional components required to meet this specification,

.5 Termination diagrams for electrical contacts, relays, thermostats, timers and components in control circuits shown.

1.5 PRODUCT SUPPORT

.1 Manufacturer to have factory trained application engineering and service personnel locally available at the installation locations and/or available through a toll free 24/365 technical support line.

1.6 WARRANTY

.1 VFD shall be warranted for twenty-four (24) months from date of certified start-up by manufacturer’s representative, not to exceed 30 months from date of shipment, but in no instance less than twelve (12) months from hand-over of equipment to the Owner (start of the Work warranty period).

.2 The warranty shall include all parts, labor, travel time and expenses.



Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL

.1 Provide the following:

.1 Electronic pulse width modulating design for speed control of NEMA Design B induction motors,

.2 CSA listed, mounted in CSA Standard C22.1 Type 1 NEMA 3R enclosure,

.3 Door or frame mounted interlocked disconnect switch, padlockable, to disconnect all input power from the drive and all internally mounted options,

.4 Manually controlled bypass,

.5 Line/load reactors may be mounted externally from the VFD, or integral within the VFD cabinet.

.6 Operating voltage:

.1 +30%, -35% of nominal supply voltage range to drive,

.2 Protection circuitry to lock-in drive or bypass over this voltage tolerance,

.3 As per associated equipment

.7 Environmental operating conditions:

.1 Temperature: 0 - 40°C (32 – 104oF) continuous,

.2 Altitude: 0 - 1000 m (0 - 3300 ft) above sea level,

.3 Humidity: up to 95% relative humidity non-condensing.

.8 Cooling fans:

.1 Designed for easy replacement, and without requiring removing the VFD from the wall or removal of circuit boards,

.2 Operate only when required; VFD cycles the cooling fans on and off as required.

.9 Seismic rated:

.1 Drive and bypass package seismic certified,

.2 Seismic importance factor of 1.5 rating is required,

.3 Rating certification based upon actual shake table test data as defined by ICC AC-156.

.10 Manufacturer:

.1 VFD’s manufacturer by a 3rd party and “brand-labeled” are not acceptable.

.2 Connect drives to BMS for control and monitoring.


.1 Capable of starting into a coasting load (forward or reverse) up to full speed and accelerate or decelerate to set point without tripping or component damage (flying start),

.2 Ability to automatically restart after an over-current, over-voltage, under-voltage, or loss of input signal protective trip.

.3 Programmable number of restart attempts, trial time, and time between attempts,

.4 Drive overload rating:

.1 110% of its normal duty current rating for 1 minute every 10 minutes,

.2 130% overload for 2 seconds

.5 Maximum input current rating of the VFD: not more than 3% greater than the output current rating,



.6 Input and output current ratings must be shown on the VFD nameplate.

.7 Include a coordinated ac transient surge protection system consisting of 4-120 joule rated mov's (phase to phase and phase to ground), a capacitor clamp, and 5% impedance reactors.

.8 Power mis-wiring detection and alarm on drives up to 56 kW [75 hp].

2.3 POWER CONDITIONING

.1 Provide 5% input reactor. This may be built-in as part of the drive or supplied as a separate reactor or in combination with the drive’s reactor.

.2 Provide 5% output reactor. This may be built-in as part of the drive or supplied as a separate reactor or in combination with the drive’s reactor.

.3 Input impedance reactors to reduce the total harmonic current demand (tdd) to a maximum of 45% tdd measured at the drive line terminals composed of either:

.1 Dual (positive and negative DC bus) link, or

.2 5% AC link, or

.3 Single DCink and an AC link.

.4 Provide Input transient protection and RFI filter,

.5 Provide output LC filter for drives with motor feeders exceeding 10 meter (30 ft) developed length between drive and motor, matched to motor.

.6 Additional standalone harmonic filter shall be supplied where noted below. Where harmonic filters are installed, the input reactor would not be required; however, the output reactor is still required.

2.4 EQUIPMENT AND MOTOR PROTECTION

.1 Under and over voltage protection, phase loss protection and phase unbalance protection,

.2 Current limiting device adjustable from 70% to 100% of rated motor current,

.3 Ground fault protection,

.4 Inherent short circuit protection for line to line and line to ground faults giving safe shut down without damage to power circuit devices,

.5 Instantaneous electronic over-current protection,

.6 Internal over-temperature protection,

.7 Motor stall protection.

2.5 OPERATOR INTERFACE KEYPAD AND DISPLAY

.1 Provide capabilities to connect drives to BMS for control and monitoring.

.2 Same interface across motor rating range,

.3 Digital display with keypad,

.4 Keypad includes “hand-off-auto” selections and manual speed control,

.5 Fault reset and "help" buttons on the keypad,

.6 Loss-of-load alarm,

.7 Keypad:

.1 Backlit LCD display,

.2 Complete English words for programming and fault diagnostics (alpha-numeric codes are not acceptable),

.3 Faults displayed in English words,



.8 Help button access to "on-line" assistance for programming and troubleshooting, including a minimum of 14 programming assistants:

.1 Start-up

.2 Parameter

.3 PID

.4 Reference

.5 I/O

.6 Serial communications

.7 Option module

.8 Panel display

.9 Low noise set-up

.10 Maintenance

.11 Troubleshooting

.12 Drive optimizer

.9 Operating values displayed in engineering (user) units, with a minimum of three values displayed at one time from the following:

.1 Output frequency

.2 Motor speed (RPM, %, or engineering units)

.3 Motor current

.4 Motor torque

.5 Motor power (kW)

.6 DC bus voltage

.7 Output voltage

.10 Control functions:

.1 Three (3) programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent VFD from operating the load continuously at an unstable speed, fully adjustable, from 0 to full speed.

.2 Two (2) PID set point controllers allowing pressure or flow signals to be connected directly to the VFD;

.1 VFD microprocessor for the closed-loop control,

.2 250 mA of 24 VDC auxiliary power and be capable of loop powering a transmitter supplied by others,

.3 PID set point adjustable from the VFD keypad, analog inputs, or over the communications bus,

.4 Two (2) independent parameter sets for the PID controller and the capability to switch between the parameter sets via a discrete input, serial communications or from the keypad.

.3 The independent second PID loop able to utilize the second analog input and modulate one of the analog outputs to maintain the set point of an independent process (i.e.. Valves, dampers, etc.),

.4 All set points, process variables, etc. To be accessible from the serial communication network,

.5 Programmable "Sleep" and "Wake up" functions to allow the drive to be started and stopped from the level of a process feedback signal.,



.6 "Bumpless Transfer" of speed reference when switching between "Hand" and "Auto" modes

.7 Programmable loss-of-load (broken belt / broken coupling) Form-C relay output and over the serial communications bus, with programmable time delay for motor start-up,

.8 Programmable underload and overload curve functions to allow user defined indications of broken belt or mechanical failure / jam condition causing motor overload,

.9 Loss of input reference (4-20 mA or 2-10V); user the option of either (1) stopping and displaying a fault, (2) running at a programmable preset speed, (3) hold the VFD speed based on the last good reference received, or (4) cause a warning to be issued, as selected by the user with alarm output to a Form-C relay output and over the serial communication bus,

.10 Password protection against parameter changes.

.11 Input Connections:

.1 Analog; two (2) programmable inputs for current or voltage signals,

.2 Discrete; six (6) programmable inputs for interfacing with external devices;

.1 Programmable to initiate upon an application or removal of 24VDC or 24VAC.

.3 Run permissive circuit for damper or valve control:

.1 When the damper or valve is fully open, a damper normally open dry contact (end-switch) closes, and the closed end-switch is wired to a discrete input and allows VFD motor operation,

.4 Safety interlock circuits:

.1 Two (2) separate safety interlock inputs,

.2 When either safety is opened, the motor coasts to stop and associated damper/valve commanded to close,

.3 Keypad displays "start enable 1 (or 2) missing" and the safety input status transmitted over the serial communications bus.

.12 Output Connections:

.1 Analog; two (2) programmable outputs for 0-20mA, 4-20 mA, or 0-10VDC;

.1 Each programmable as a minimum to output proportional to Frequency, Motor Speed, Output Voltage, Output Current, Motor Torque, Motor Power (kW), DC Bus voltage, Active Reference, Active Feedback.

.2 Discrete: three (3) programmable, digital Form-C relay outputs;

.1 Programmable on and off delay times and adjustable hysteresis,

.2 Rated for maximum switching current 8 amps at 24 VDC and 0.4 A at 250 VAC. At least one contact shall be rated for 2A at 120VAC. If a separate interposing relay is required, it shall be wired to the VFD by the controls contractor or the equipment supplier where part of a packaged assembly,

.3 Maximum voltage 300 VDC and 250 VAC with continuous current rating of 2 amps RMS,

.4 True Form-C type contacts; open collector outputs are not acceptable.

.3 Run command circuit for damper or valve control:

.1 Functions regardless of the source of a run command (keypad, input contact closure, time- clock control, or serial communications),



.2 Form-C relay closure that will signal the damper to open (VFD motor does not operate),

.13 Programmable Time Delay functions:

.1 VFD start delay and a keypad indication that this time delay is active,

.2 A Form C relay output provides a contact closure to signal the VAV boxes open; this will allow VAV boxes to be driven open before the motor operates,

.3 Field programmable from 0 - 120 seconds,

.4 Start delay active regardless of the start command source (keypad command, input contact closure, time-clock control, or serial communications), and when switching from drive to bypass

.14 Speed Control functions:

.1 Seven (7) programmable preset speeds,

.2 Two (2) independently adjustable accel and decel ramps with 1 - 1800 seconds adjustable time ramps.

.3 Minimum speed setting adjustable from 0 to 70%,

.4 Maximum speed setting adjustable from 50 to 110%,

.5 Rotating motor restart routine to match frequency and actual speed before accelerating to set speed.

.6 Acceleration/deceleration ramp adjustable from 10 to 100 seconds for 0 to 100% speed,

.7 Motor flux optimization circuit to automatically reduce applied motor voltage to the motor to optimize energy consumption and reduce audible motor noise;

.1 Selectable software for optimization of motor noise, energy consumption, and motor speed control.

.8 Carrier frequency control circuit to reduce the carrier frequency based on actual VFD temperature that allows higher carrier frequency settings without derating the VFD.

.15 Programming:

.1 Built-in time clock in the VFD keypad with battery backup of 10 years minimum life span,

.2 Time clock date and time stamp faults and records operating parameters at the time of fault. On battery failure, the VFD automatically reverts to hours of operation since initial power up,

.3 Time clock programmable to control start/stop functions, constant speeds, PID parameter sets and output Form-C relays,

.4 Discrete input that allows an override to the time clock (when in the off mode) for a programmable time frame,

.5 Four (4) separate, independent timer functions that have both weekday and weekend settings,

.6 Utilize pre-programmed application macro's specifically designed to facilitate start-up,

.7 Application macros provide one command to reprogram all parameters and customer interfaces for a particular application to reduce programming time, and

.8 Two user macros to allow the end-user to create and save custom settings.

.16 Fireman’s override input:

.1 On receipt of a contact closure from the fire / smoke control station, the VFD operates in one of two selectable modes:



.1 Operate at a programmed predetermined fixed speed ranging from -500 HZ (reverse) to 500 HZ (forward), or

.2 Operate in a specific fireman's override PID algorithm that automatically adjusts motor speed based on override set point and feedback; setpoint adjusted over the serial communications bus.

.2 Operating mode overrides all other inputs (analog/digital, serial communication, and all keypad commands), except safety run interlocks, and force the motor to run in one of the two modes above.

.3 "override mode" displayed on the keypad.

.4 Upon removal of the override signal, the VFD resumes normal operation, without the need to cycle the normal discrete input run command

.17 Building automation system integration:

.1 Eia-485 port as standard for the following protocols which are resident in the base VFD;

.1 BACnet MS/TP

.2 BACnet IP

.3 Lonworks

.4 Modbus

.2 The use of third party gateways and multiplexers is not permitted.

.3 All protocols certified by the governing authority including:

.1 BTL listing for BACnet,

.2 Lonmark functional profile 6010, for both mandatory and optional items.

.4 Use of non-certified protocols is not permitted.

.5 BACnet interface:

.1 Eia-485, MS/TP interface operating at 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, or 76.8 kbps,

.2 Connection tested by the BACnet testing labs (BTL) and be BTL listed,

.3 Conforms to the BACnet standard device type of an application specific controller (B-ASC),

.4 Interface support all bibbs defined by the BACnet standard profile for a B-ASC including, but not limited to:

.1 Data sharing - read property - b.

.2 Data sharing - write property - b.

.3 Device management - dynamic device binding (who-is; i-am).

.4 Device management - dynamic object binding (who-has; i-have).

.5 Device management - communication control - b.

.5 if additional hardware is required to obtain the BACnet interface, the VFD manufacturer to provide one BACnet gateway per drive; multiple VFDs sharing one gateway shall not be acceptable.

.6 Serial communication capabilities in VFD mode include:

.1 Run-stop control,

.2 Speed set adjustment,

.3 Proportional/integral/derivative PID control adjustments,

.4 Current limit,

.5 Accel/decel time adjustments,

.6 Lock and unlock the keypad,



.7 Allow the BMS to monitor feedback such as process variable feedback, output speed / frequency, current (in amps), % torque, power (kW), kilowatt hours (resettable), operating hours (resettable), and drive temperature.

.8 BMS capable of monitoring the VFD relay output status, discrete input status, and all analog input and analog output values.

.9 All diagnostic warning and fault information,

.10 Remote VFD fault reset.

.7 Digital and analog output control:

.1 BMS may control digital and analog outputs via the serial interface; this control is independent of any VFD function,

.2 The analog outputs may be used for modulating chilled water valves or cooling tower bypass valves,

.3 Form-C relay outputs may be used to actuate a damper, open a valve or control any other device that requires a maintained contact for operation,

.4 Discrete inputs capable of being monitored by the BMS system, including monitoring of which (of up to 4) safeties are open.

.5 One output shall be configured to close (or open) a 2A, 120VAC contact when the motor output is greater than 40%. The contact will drop off when the motor output drops below 30%.

.8 Independent PID loop

.1 May be used for cooling tower bypass value control, chilled water value / hot water valve control, etc.

.2 Both the VFD PID control loop and the independent PID control loop continue functioning even if the serial communications connection is lost,

.3 As default, the VFD keeps the last good set point command and last good DO & AO commands in memory in the event the serial communications connection is lost and continue controlling the process.

2.6 HARMONIC FILTERS


.1 MTE MAPGXXXE002

.2 Harmonic filters shall be provided in addition to the drive built-in power conditioning input filters, for all motors equal to and greater than 7.46 kW [10 HP].

.3 General;

.1 Type: passive inductor/capacitor network.

.2 Treat low frequency harmonics generated by VFD drives.

.3 No resonance between harmonic filter with system impedances or attract harmonic currents from other harmonic sources.

.4 Wiring:

.1 All copper.

.2 Wiring insulation class: 220oC (428oF).

.3 Temperature rise: 130oC (266oF).

.5 Anti-vibration pad mounts for reactor and/or transformers.

.6 Enclosure: NEMA-3R.

.4 Performance:



.1 Power factor: 0.98 lagging to 0.95 leading in operating range from 50% to 100% full load.

.2 Maximum capacitive reactive power KVAR generated: 20% of kVA rating.

.3 Combined drive and harmonic filter mitigation:

.1 To IEEE standard 519, to Table 10.2 and Table 10.3,

.2 For the purpose of testing filters, the Point of Common Coupling (PCC) is measured at the input terminals of the harmonic filter,

.3 Filter requirements to obtain the maximum Total Current Demand Distortion (TDD) at the PCC based on motor HP rating is as follows:

Motor Size Filter Rating TDD Rating

5.6 kW [7.5 HP] and smaller 5% line and load reactors 35%

.4 Efficiency at full load

.1 Harmonic filter only: minimum 99%

.2 Harmonic filter and Drive combined: minimum 96%.

.5 Harmonic Mitigation

.1 Motors rated 7.46 [10 HP] and larger and provided with Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) shall have an individual Passive Harmonic Filter connected on the line side of each VFD to limit the total harmonic current distortion (THID) at the input terminals of the passive harmonic filter to:

.1 Less than 5% of the full load fundamental current of the motor when operating at full load; and

.2 Less than 8% when the motor is 30% loaded.

.2 Passive Harmonic Filter

.1 Will treat all of the characteristic low frequency harmonics generated by a 3-phase, diode bridge rectifier load (5th, 7th, 11th, 13th, etc.).

.2 Will suppress the characteristic harmonics without the need for individual tuning or the requirement to phase shift against other harmonic sources.

.3 Will achieve harmonic mitigation by passive inductor/capacitor network. Active electronic components will not be used.

.4 Will never introduce a capacitive reactive power (KVAR) which is greater than 20% of its kVA rating to ensure compatibility with engine driven generators.

.5 Will not resonate with system impedances in the power distribution system nor attract harmonic currents from other harmonic sources.

.6 Supplied with a contactor to remove the capacitors from the circuit at low loads.

.3 Input line reactors and/or DC link chokes associated with VFDs will not be acceptable in-lieu of passive harmonic filters.

.4 Provide the ability to demonstrate to the Authority at any time that there are no potentially harmful power conditions present and that equipment intended to guard against such conditions is in proper working order.



Part 3 Execution

3.1 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

.1 Install variable frequency drives in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.

.2 Where a separate disconnect is installed between the drive and the controlled equipment, provide interlock wiring between disconnect status contact switch, and VFD, to prevent drive from operating if disconnect switch is open.

.3 Conduct impact vibration test to determine first natural harmonic of driven equipment, and program VFD skip speed function to prevent operation at this speed.

.1 Nominal skip speed range equal to ± 5% of measured harmonic frequency, or as determined on site.

.4 Provide power wiring, conduit and branch circuit protection to line side of VFD, selected for drive input current.

.5 Mount all loose VFD provided as part of this contract.

.6 Coordinate wiring with Division 26.

3.2 HARMONIC FILTERS

.1 Install harmonic filters in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.

.2 Provide Harmonic Filters for all Variable Frequency Drive serving motor equal to or greater than 7.46 kW [10 HP].

.3 Harmonic Filter to be connected on the load side of the local disconnect. Coordinate with Division 26.

.4 Commission filters units onsite. Provide test records of site condition performance at 0%, 50% and 100% motor load including measurements of:

.1 Voltage and current harmonic distortion at input terminals of filter,

.5 Obtain measurements with a recording type Fluke 41 or equivalent harmonics analyzer for individual and total harmonic currents and voltages.

3.3 CLEANING

.1 Do not start-up drives until local area has been brought to final clean, floors are sealed, and any drywall in the same space is sanded and painted.

3.4 START-UP AND TESTING

.1 If such heating equipment is to be used prior to final construction clean, provide temporary magnetic starters, or, provide enclosures around the drives and pressurized the enclosures with a source of clean air.

.2 Provide the services of a certified factory authorized representative for the start-up of each drive. Complete and submit a certified start-up form filled out for each drive.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

.1 Provide the services of a factory trained manufacturer’s representative to provide training to owners’ staff. Include in training:

.1 Installation instructions,

.2 Programming of VFD,

.3 Operation of VFD,

.4 At-site servicing of VFD

.5 Replacement of VFD keypad controller

.6 Manual and automatic operation of bypass, if applicable.

.7 Serial communications



.8 BMS over-ride for catastrophic event control and fireman’s smoke control override.

.2 Provide a computer-based training CD/DVD to the owner at the time of project closeout for the above topics.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 HYDRONIC PIPING EXPANSION



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


1.2 SCOPE

.1 Flexible pipe connections.

.2 Expansion joints and compensators.

.3 Pipe loops offset and swing joints.



.2 ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and hot dipped, zinc-coated, welded and Seamless

.3 ASTM F1120 Standard Specification for Circular Metallic Bellows Type Expansion Joints for Piping Applications

.4 ASME B31.1 Power Piping Code.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARD

.1 Conform to Standard of "Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association" and manufacturer's recommendations.

1.5 SYSTEM PRESSURE RATINGS

.1 All hydronic accessories, valves and fittings in EC and MH building suitable for a maximum working pressure of 1033 kPa

1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit manufacturers product data sheets for expansion joint equipment showing

.1 Manufacturer, model number, piping service, pressure and temperature rating.

.2 Design allowances for axial, lateral and angular movement.

.3 Nominal size and overall dimensions.

.2 All grooved joint couplings, fittings, and specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components.

.1 All castings shall be date stamped for quality assurance and traceability.

.3 Grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be shown on drawings and product submittals and shall be specifically identified with the applicable style or series designation.

.4 Submit sealed design drawings for pipe anchors, and include;

.1 plan drawings showing location of anchors and guides,

.2 fabrication details,

.3 pipe expansion forces,

.4 resulting reaction force and bending moments at building connection,

.5 building fastening details.

.6 Examine piping layout and notify the Consultant of additional anchors or expansion joints required to adequately protect system.






.1 Make provision for expansion and contraction of all pipe work. All piping shall be anchored and supported in such a manner that strain and/or weight does not come upon any apparatus and pipe branch connections.

.2 Examine piping layout and notify the Consultant of additional anchors or expansion joints required to adequately protect system.

.3 Expansion joints and compensators shall be installed and guided as per manufacturer's recommendations.

.4 All equipment shall be connected with unions or flanges to provide for easy removal.

.5 Where piping passes through walls or floor slabs, the sleeves shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the expansion and the pipe insulation without binding or crushing the insulation or preventing the expansion of the piping.

Part 2 Products

2.1 SLIP TYPE EXPANSION JOINTS

.1 Application:

.1 for axial pipe movement,

.2 travel: 100 mm (4 in) to 300 mm (12 in) single unit, 200 mm (8 in) to 600 mm (24 in) for double units.

.3 size: NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 24

.4 Working pressure: 2070 kPa (300 psig) saturated steam.

.5 factory tested to 1 ½ times maximum working pressure; furnish test certificate.

.2 Construction:

.1 body and packing housings: Class 300 carbon steel pipe to ASTM A 53, Grade B,

.2 wall thickness to match service pipe with flanges or weld ends to match service pipe jointing specification.

.3 adjustable packing gland or fixed packing gland arrangement with a packing injection assembly, arranged for repacking under full line pressure.,

.4 slip pipe of carbon steel pipe to ASTM A 53, Grade B, hard chrome plated,

.5 anchor base constructed of steel welded to body on double units,

.6 internal and external guides in packing housing with concentric alignment of slip pipe,

.7 extension limit stop of stainless steel, with accessible and removable pins,

.8 not less than six packing rings of Teflon or graphite impregnated material,

.9 lubricating fittings with grease nipple, pet cocks, and lubricant gun with hose assembly or plunger body of heavy wall carbon steel and plunger of carbon steel with hex head for use with socket wrench.

.10 lubricant: to manufacturer's recommendations. .

.11 drip connection coupling with drain plug.

2.2 CONTROLLED FLEXING EXPANSION JOINTS

.1 Application:

.1 for axial and lateral movements,

.2 travel: up to 190 mm (7.5 in) axial and 8 mm (1.5 in) lateral depending on size.

.3 size: NPS 3 to NPS 18

.4 Working pressure: 2070 kPa (300 psig) at up to 425°C (800°F)






.2 Construction:

.1 bellows hydraulically formed, type 304 stainless steel for specified fluid,

.2 two-piece nickel iron reinforcing or control rings,

.3 flanges or weld ends to match service pipe jointing specification,

.4 austenitic stainless-steel liner oriented with direction of flow,

.5 carbon steel tie rods,

.6 carbon steel painted shroud.

2.3 BRAIDED EQUIPMENT CONNECTOR

.1 Application:

.1 for axial and lateral movements and vibration isolation at pumps and equipment,

.2 size: NPS 2 to NPS 10

.3 Working pressure: 1100 kPa (160 psig) at up to 121°C (250°F)


.2 Construction:

.1 Type 304 stainless steel corrugate internal liner with braided stainless steel cover,

.2 flanges: to ASTM A36 carbon steel, ASME/ANSI B16.5 class 150,

2.4 FLEXIBLE RUBBER JOINTS

.1 Application:

.1 for axial, lateral and angular movements,

.2 travel:

.1 axial: up to 55 mm (2-1.4 in) for double arch, and 19 mm (3/4 in) for single arch

.2 lateral: up to 35 mm (1-1./8 in) for double arch, and 9.5 mm (3/8 in) for single arch

.3 angular: 35° for double arch, and 15° for single arch.

.3 size: NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 12 for double arch, NPS 14 to 20 for single arch.

.4 Working pressure: 1450 kPa (210 psig) at up to 37C (100F)

.5 factory tested to 1 ½ times maximum working pressure; furnish test certificate

.2 Construction:

.1 spool type, reinforced EPDM inner liner and outer cover, with wire reinforced flange collars.

.2 NPS 1-1/2 to 12: two filled arches with stabilizing ring,

.3 NPS 14 to 20: one filled arch.

.4 tie rod control units with vibration isolation washers,

.5 retaining rings, and

.6 neoprene covers.

2.5 FLEXIBLE METAL HOSE CONNECTIONS

.1 Construction:

.1 inner hose: corrugated T304 stainless steel,

.2 outer jacket: braided T304 stainless steel wire mesh,

.3 threaded or female soldered end connections up to NPS 2, flanged NPS 2½ and larger,





.4 selected for 1034 kPa (150 psig) working pressure and 93 C (200 F) working temperature,

2.6 GUIDES

.1 Construction:

.1 fabricated from steel

.2 guide spider clamped to pipe

.3 guide body with split bolted housing and angle bracket base.

2.7 ANCHORS

.1 Anchors shall be fabricated from mild steel plate and structural steel angle and channel sections, in accordance with ANSI B.31.

.2 Anchors shall securely attach piping to structural members. Size the anchors to accommodate the forces due to the pipe expansion and weight.

.3 Where bolts secure anchor to the structure, weld the bolts to the plate. Arrange anchors so that bolts are in shear not in tension.

.4 Provide anchors on both sides of expansion devices, as indicated on the drawings, and as required to control the flexing of the piping system.

2.8 EXPANSION LOOPS

.1 Provide expansion loops as required.

.2 Expansion loops shall be of all welded construction with long radius elbows. The three legs of the expansion loop shall be equal.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install all piping systems with due regard and provision for expansion avoiding strain or damage to equipment and building. Pay particular attention to piping running horizontal across building expansion joints and provide adequate expansion and contraction for all such piping.

.2 Only major expansion configuration and fittings have been shown on the drawings. Provide all required additional compensators, loops and swing connections.

.3 Where necessary provide 2 pipe guides per side of expansion joint or expansion loop so that movement takes place along axis of pipe only.

.4 Install expansion loops, cold sprung 50% of the calculated expansion.

.5 Install at least three [3] elbows in all branch connections. Where space does not permit 3 elbows, install braided flexible pipe connectors in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Three [3] elbow branch connections shall have sufficient developed length to ensure that excessive stresses are not generated in the piping and in no case less than 900 mm [36"].

3.2 EXPANSION JOINTS

.1 Install expansion joints, where shown on the drawings, in strict accordance with the manufacturers detailed installation instructions.

.2 Take care to be aware of the temperature at which the expansion compensator is installed to properly establish the length.

.3 Ensure that expansion joints are not damaged during hydrostatic testing.

.4 The piping shall be tested hydrostatically with the expansion joints in place using cold water.





.5 Select expansion joints to compensate for thermal expansion in pipe between anchors with not less than 25% safety margin, calculating expansion based on the following operating temperatures;

.1 for heating systems, from-18°C (0°F ) ambient up to maximum possible operating fluid temperature, but not less than 93°C (200°F) for water

.2 for cooling systems, from 15°C (60°F) ambient down to 5°C (40°F).

.6 Provide expansion joint types as follows:

Service Limits Type

NPS 2 to NPS 12 Externally PressurizedHeating and cooling piping

NPS 4 and smaller Expansion Compensator

NPS 2 and larger Externally PressurizedDomestic Hot Water piping

NPS 3 and smaller Expansion Compensator

Domestic Cold Water piping NPS 2 and larger Externally Pressurized

.7 Support and guide piping adjacent to expansion joints;

.1 support piping on each side of expansion joint as specified herein,

.2 support expansion joint when provided with mounting supports,

.3 do not rely on pipe guides to support piping and expansion joint

.8 Sleeve Type:

.1 Locate expansion joints centrally between anchors and position guides to manufacturer's specific requirement. Provide structure as required to properly mount guides.

.2 Set and secure base, if base mounted. Provide structure as required.

.3 Ensure that piping is properly aligned through the expansion joints, over the full travel.

.4 Adjust the installed length of the expansion joints to suit the ambient temperature at the time of installation.

.5 Pack the joints for service.

.9 Grooved End Type:

.1 Install in accordance with Victaulic written instructions.

.2 Gaskets shall be of an elastomer grade suitable for the intended service and shall be molded and produced by the coupling manufacturer.

.3 The grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained representative shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving tools and installation of grooved joint products. The representative shall periodically visit the jobsite and review contractor is following best recommended practices in grooved product installation. (A distributor’s representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training or jobsite visit(s).)





3.3 EQUIPMENT CONNECTOR INSTALLATION

.1 Install equipment connectors on piping connections to equipment and select connector types as follows:

Service Limits Connector Type

Air handling units supported on spring vibration isolators

Flexible Metal HoseHeating and cooling coils, and humidifiers

Hot water reheat coils All sizes Flexible Metal Hose

.2 Connector and hose sizing:

.1 Nominal diameter: same size as pipe.

.2 Length: selected at not less than manufacturers catalogued minimum active length for the configuration, and not more than 1.5 times this minimum recommended length.

.3 Support or guide piping firmly adjacent to equipment connectors and prevent pipes from swaying.

.4 Where equipment connectors are to be installed at steam coils, locate connectors;

.1 Between control valve and coil on steam supply side, and

.2 After steam trap on condensate line.

.5 Where equipment connectors are to be installed at chilled and/or hot water coils, locate connectors;

.1 Between strainer and coil on the supply side, and

.2 Between coil and control valve on return side

.6 At reheat coils installed in terminal boxes or in ductwork, arrange equipment connectors so there are no bends, and no axial offsets greater than the OD of the connector measured from the centerline of the connector.

3.4 PIPING ANCHORS INSTALLATION

.1 Anchors;

.1 Submit shop drawings sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the jurisdiction of the project,

.2 Include connection loads to the building structure to be reviewed by the structural engineering consultant

.2 Fabricate piping anchors from structural steel angles, channels, or plates secured directly to piping and the building structure:

.1 Single leg design, for piping NPS 4 and smaller and where distance between side of pipe and building attachment point is 200 mm (8”) and less

.2 Minimum four-contact point design for all other distances

3.5 PIPE GUIDES INSTALLATION

.1 Guides;

.1 Submit shop drawings sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the jurisdiction of the project,

.2 Include connection loads to the building structure to be reviewed by the structural engineering consultant

.2 Guide locations:

.1 As required, and





.2 For each expansion joint and expansion loop, provide two guides on each side of and adjacent to the joint or loop;

.1 Locate the first guide within 4 x pipe diameters from joint or loop,

.2 Locate the second guide within 10-14 x pipe diameter from first guide and additional guides as required to suite anchor design, and

.3 Guide expansion joints as per expansion joint manufacturer requirements.

.3 Guide installation:

.1 Factory fabricated type, pipe rolls, or structural steel shapes

.2 Secured to building structure and arranged to restrict lateral displacement and bowing of pipe adjacent to expansion joint or loop,

.3 Supported from building structure with structural steel angles, channels or plates,

.4 Guide may be omitted between joint and anchor where an anchor is located within minimum distance in accordance with expansion joint manufacturer installation instructions.

3.6 INSPECTION OF ANCHOR AND GUIDE INSTALLATION

.1 Make arrangements and pay for expansion joint manufacturer’s field representative to review anchors and guides around expansion joints on;

.1 Steam piping

.2 Domestic hot water and recirculating water piping NPS 6 size and larger

.3 Heating system and chilled water piping NPS 6 size and larger

.2 Submit written report, prepared by field representative, confirming that expansion joints, anchors, and guides are installed in accordance with joint manufacturers recommendations.

3.7 START-UP AND TESTING

.1 Prior to placing expansion joint in service, apply match-marks to joint flanges/connectors to record axial, lateral, rotation and angular movement of joint connections.

.2 After system is at operating temperature, inspect match-marks and record displacement of joint connections compared to pre- start conditions.

.3 Submit report including photos of displaced match-marks.

3.8 FLEXIBLE HOSES - BRAIDED

.1 Install braided flexible hoses where shown on the drawings and as the flexible connections to designated heating/cooling terminal units.

.2 On screwed connections, install a union on one end.

.3 Take care not to torque the hose.

.4 Ensure braided flexible hoses are not damaged during hydrostatic testing.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 23 05 20543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES FOR HVACNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 3


Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS / PRODUCT DATA

.1 Submit manufacturer's catalogue literature for;

.1 Flow indicators

.2 Thermometers

.3 Pressure gauges

.2 Include schedule of thermometers, and pressure gauges showing for each instrument:

.1 identification number,

.2 location,

.3 type,

.4 range and

.5 accessories.


.1 ASME B40.200 Thermometers, Direct Reading and Remote Reading

.2 ASME B40.100 Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments

.3 ASME PTC 19.3 TW – Thermowells

.4 CSA B51 Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code

Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL

.1 Selection criteria:

.1 normal operating reading to be between half and two thirds of full scale range

.2 expected maximum and minimum readings to be within scale range.

.3 thermometers to have both Celsius and Fahrenheit scales.

.4 pressure gauges to have both kPa and psig scales.

2.2 FLOW INDICATORS

.1 Construction:

.1 visual flow indication.

.2 equipped with dual flow scale calibrated in l/s and USGPM.

.3 protected against accidental breakage of the glass indicator.

.4 in-line type for pipe sizes up to 40mm [1.5”].

2.3 THERMOMETERS – PIPING (DIGITAL)

.1 Direct reading thermometers

.2 Solar powered 178mm [7”] industrial, variable angle type, passivated thermistor, cast aluminum epoxy coated case, with solar cell and 11mm [7/16”] LCD display.

.3 Remote reading thermometers

.4 115 mm [4.5”] liquid filled, or gas activated type, stainless steel capillary, stainless steel spring armour, stainless steel bulb and phenolic, cast aluminum, or stainless-steel case for surface mounting.



2.4 THERMOMETER WELLS

.1 Construction:

.1 Body material:

.1 in copper pipe: brass.

.2 in steel pipe: stainless steel.

.2 threaded connection, manufactured from bar stock or forged brass with cap and chain, compatible with temperature sensors used.

.3 pressure rating: 2000 kPa (300 psig) at 121°C (250°F)

.4 C.R.N. registered

2.5 THERMOMETERS - DUCT/PANEL MOUNTED

.1 Minimum Requirements:

.1 Mercury content is not acceptable

.2 All thermometers to be in accordance with Canadian General Standards Board CGSB 14-GP-2a.

.3 Duct mounted dial type - solid liquid filled with remote capillary element.

.4 Panel mounted dial type (surface) type - vapour filled direct mounting.

.5 Panel mounted dial type (flush) type - remote liquid filled capillary element.

.2 Case:

.1 Dial type - cast aluminum, black enamel steel or stainless steel with stainless steel or chrome-plated face ring.

.3 Scale:

.1 Dial type - nominal 115mm [4.5”] unless otherwise indicated.

.2 White background with temperature range in black.

.3 Dual Celsius and Fahrenheit scale.

.4 Standard of Acceptance: Marsh, Moeller, Trerice, Weiss, Weksler, Winters.

2.6 PRESSURE GAUGES - PIPING


.1 All gauges to be in accordance with ANSI B40.1 Grade "A" level.

.2 115mm [4.5"] cast aluminum, black steel or stainless-steel case, with stainless steel or chrome plated face ring.

.3 White background with pressure range in black.

.4 Dual kilopascal and psig scale.

.5 Phosphor bronze bourdon tube, silver brazed tip and socket

.6 6mm [1/4"] lower connection.

.7 Rotary type bushed movement, silicone dampened to prevent pointer oscillation.

.8 Gauges to be registered with Provincial Boiler and Pressure Vessel Safety Branches with CRN number.

.9 ULC listed for use on fire protection systems.

.10 Accuracy shall be 1% off full scale over the middle half of the scale.

.2 Accessories:

.1 Install a needle valve ahead of each gauge.

.2 Install an anti-syphon loop (suitable for steam pressure) ahead of each gauge on steam systems.

.3 Standard of Acceptance: Marsh, Moeller, Trerice, Weiss, Weksler, Winters.



2.7 TEST PLUGS FOR PRESSURE / TEMPERATURE

.1 Provide 6mm [1/4"] solid brass test plug fitting c/w brass chain where indicated.

.2 Test plugs shall be capable of receiving either a pressure or temperature 3mm [1/8"] O.D. Dual seal core shall be Nordel suitable for temperature of 177oC [350oF] and shall be rated zero leakage from vacuum to 6895kPa [1000psi).

.3 Provide 1 master test kit containing two test pressure gauge of suitable range, one gauge adaptor, 3mm [1/8"] O.D. probe and two stem pocket testing thermometers of suitable range.


.1 Sisco P/T Plugs.

.2 Flow Design - Superseal.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Install thermometers and gauges so they can be easily read from floor or platform. If this cannot be accomplished, install remote reading thermometers and gauges.

.2 Install engraved lamicoid nameplates as specified in Section 23 05 53 Identification, identifying medium.

3.2 THERMOMETERS

.1 Install in wells on all piping.

.2 Install the separable well so as to minimize the restriction to flow and, if necessary, install in a section of oversized pipe.

.3 Install wells where indicated for use with test thermometers.

.4 Install in locations as indicated and on inlet and outlet of:

.1 Water heating and cooling coils.

.5 Use extensions where thermometers are installed through insulation.

3.3 PRESSURE GAUGES

.1 Install in following locations:

.1 Water heating and cooling coils,

.2 Use extensions where pressure gauges are installed through insulation.

.3 Where a single gauge is used to measure multiple points provide needle valves to isolate each point, including pressure gauge.

.4 Install needle valves on pressure gauges.

.1 For differential pressure gauge, provide needle valve on each sensing line.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 22 05 29543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR HVAC SYSTEMSNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 7


Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


.2 Refer to Section 23 05 49 for required seismic restraint of piping.

1.2 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS;

.1 ASME B31.1 Pressure Piping Code

.2 Manufacturers Standardization Society of Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS)

.1 MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials Design and Manufacture

.2 MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application

.3 MSS SP-77 Guidelines for Pipe Support Contractual Relationships

.4 MSS SP-90 Guidelines for Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports

1.3 CONCRETE ANCHORS

.1 As per the BC Building Code, power-actuated or drop in fasteners shall not be used to resist tension forces for the support or restraint of the piping systems or their components. All fasteners shall be reviewed and approved by the Supporting Professional Engineer for Seismic Restraints prior to installation.

1.4 GENERAL

.1 This project is deemed a be post-disaster design.

.2 Provide hangers and supports to secure equipment in place, prevent vibration, protect appropriate against damage from earthquake, maintain grade, provide for expansion and contraction and accommodate insulation.

.3 The contractor shall arrange and pay for the services of a BC registered professional engineer to provide all required engineering services necessary for the complete design, sizing and detailing of all anchors and anchor supports to structure required for the project. Submit details to the Consultant for review.

.4 Provide insulation protection saddles on all insulated piping.

.5 Fabricate hangers, supports and sway braces in accordance with ANSI B31.1 and MSS-SP58.

.6 Set inserts in position in advance of concrete work. Use grid system in equipment rooms.

.7 Support from (top of) structural members. Where structural bearings do not exist or inserts are not in suitable locations, suspend hangers from steel channels or angles. Provide supplementary structural members, as necessary.

.8 Do not suspend from metal deck.

.9 Hangers for copper pipe shall be copper plated or plastic dipped unless pipe hangers bear on piping insulation (cold services).

.10 Hangers and strut located outdoors shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123. All hanger hardware shall be hot dip galvanized or stainless steel. Zinc plated hardware is not acceptable for outdoor or corrosive use.

.11 Hangers and strut located in corrosive areas shall be type 316 stainless steel with stainless steel hardware.

1.5 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SUPPORTS

.1 In certain locations in the project there may numerous large pipes that are required to be suspended from the slab above. The Contractor shall install the anchors and supports in



an approved manner to ensure the entire installation (seismic, gravity and lateral forces) will be compliant with the BC Building Code.

.2 Cast-In-Place Anchors:

.1 Anchors, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Bolts and studs, nuts, and washers shall conform to ASTM A307, Grade A, and ASTM A449, ASTM A563, and ASTM F436, as applicable. Hot-dip galvanized bolts and studs including associated nuts and washers in accordance with ASTM A153.

.3 Drilled-In Anchors:

.1 Installer Qualifications

.1 Drilled-in anchors shall be installed by a Contractor with at least five years of experience performing similar installations.

.4 Installer Training:

.1 Conduct a thorough training with the manufacturer or the manufacturer’s representative for the Installer on the project. Training shall consist of a review of the complete installation process for drilled-in anchors, to include but not limited to:

.1 hole drilling procedure

.2 hole preparation & cleaning technique

.3 adhesive injection technique & dispenser training / maintenance

.4 rebar dowel preparation and installation

.5 proof loading/torqueing

.5 Field Quality Control:

.1 Testing: 25% of each type and size of drilled-in anchor shall be proof loaded by an independent testing laboratory. Adhesive anchors and capsule anchors shall not be torque tested unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. If any of the tested anchors fail to achieve the specified torque or proof load all anchors shall be tested, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.

.2 Tension testing should be performed in accordance with ASTM E488.

.3 Torque shall be applied with a calibrated torque wrench.

.4 Proof loads shall be applied with a calibrated hydraulic ram. Displacement of adhesive and capsule anchors at proof load shall not exceed D/10, where D is the nominal anchor diameter.

1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submittals shall include:

.1 upper attachment.

.2 hanger rods.

.3 pipe attachment.

.4 riser clamps.

.5 shields and saddles.

.6 inserts.

.2 Submit details for supports, guides, and anchors for glass, fibre-reinforced plastic, and plastic piping systems.

.3 Submit design drawings for custom fabricated trapeze hangers, sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the project location jurisdiction.

.1 Shop drawing details shall include:

.1 construction detail drawings for each loading condition,



.2 span deflection calculations,

.3 building attachment load calculations and type.

.2 Provide services of engineer who sealed the custom trapeze hanger shop drawings to conduct a general review of the completed installation on site.

Part 2 Products

2.1 ATTACHMENTS

.1 Concrete:

.1 Do not use inserts in base material with a compressive strength less than 13.79 MPa [2000 psi] [refer to structural drawings].

.2 All inserts supporting piping shall have a factor of safety of 5. All other inserts shall have a factor of safety of 4.

.3 All inserts shall be ICBO approved. Use only ICBO design load ratings.

.4 Inserts for cast-in-place concrete: galvanized steel wedge. ULC listed for pipe NPS 3/4 through NPS 8

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Grinnell/Anvil Fig. 281

.5 Carbon steel plate with clevis for surface mount: malleable iron socket with expansion case and bolt. Minimum two expansion cases and bolts for each hanger

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Grinnell/Anvil, plate fig. 49, socket fig. 290, expansion case fig. 117

.6 Drilled, adhesive type:

.1 Adhesive anchor consisting of anchor rod assembly with a capsule containing a two-component adhesive, resin and hardener.

.2 For use in concrete housekeeping bases (in vertical downward position) where the distance to the edge of the concrete base could cause weakness if a mechanical expansion type anchor were used.

.3 Rod assemblies shall extend a minimum of 50 mm [2"] into the concrete slab below the housekeeping bases.

.4 All drilling for inserts shall be performed using the appropriate tool specifically designed for the particular insert. The diameter and depth of each drilled hole shall be to the exact dimensions as specified by the insert manufacturer.

.5 Refer to manufacturer's recommendations for tightening torques to be applied to inserts.

2.2 MIDDLE ATTACHMENTS (ROD)

.1 Carbon steel black (electro-galvanized/cadmium plated for mechanical rooms) continuous threaded rod

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Grinnell/Anvil fig. 146 or Myatt fig. 434.

2.3 PIPE ATTACHMENTS

.1 Cold piping, steel or cast iron: hot piping steel, with less than 25 mm [1"] horizontal movement; hot piping, steel, with more than 300 mm [12"] middle attachment (rod) length: adjustable clevis

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Grinnell/Anvil fig. 260.

.2 Cold copper piping; hot copper piping with less than 25 mm [1"] horizontal movement; hot copper piping with more than 300 mm [12"] middle attachment (rod) length: adjustable clevis copper plated



.1 Standard of Acceptance: Grinnell/Anvil fig. CT-65.

.3 Suspended hot piping, steel and copper, with horizontal movement in excess of 25 mm [1"]; hot steel piping with middle attachment (rod) 300 mm [12"] or less; pipe roller

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Grinnell/Anvil fig. 174 or Grinnell/Anvil fig. 181 up to NPS 6 and Grinnell/Anvil fig. 171 NPS 8 and larger.

.4 Bottom supported hot piping, steel and copper: pipe roller stand

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Grinnell/Anvil fig. 271.

.5 Spring hangers; where required to offset expansion on horizontal runs which follow long vertical risers

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Grinnell/Anvil fig. 171 single pipe roll hanger with Grinnell/Anvil fig. 178.

2.4 RISER CLAMPS

.1 Steel or cast iron pipe: galvanized carbon steel

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Grinnell/Anvil fig. 261 or Myatt fig. 182.

.2 Copper pipe: carbon steel copper finished

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Grinnell/Anvil fig. CT-121.

2.5 SADDLES AND SHIELDS

.1 Cold piping NPS 2 and under: protection shield with pipe insulation under shield with uninterrupted vapour barrier

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Kingspan “K Block” – high density insulation

.2 Cold piping NPS 2-1/2 and over: protection shield with high density insulation under shield with uninterrupted vapour barrier

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Kingspan “K Block” – high density insulation.

.3 Hot piping NPS 3 and under: insulation over pipe hanger.

.4 Hot piping NPS 4 and over: protective saddle with insulation under saddle

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Grinnell/Anvil fig. 160 to 166.

2.6 TRAPEZE HANGERS

.1 Performance:

.1 Manufactured: to product load listings.

.2 Custom fabricated:

.1 maximum deflection between supports: 1/250 (0.4%) of span

.2 minimum factor of safety : 5 times load to ultimate tensile or compressive strength.

.2 Construction:

.1 Carbon steel shapes, to suit load application:

.1 hollow steel section,

.2 equal leg El section, or

.3 double C channel “strong-back”, with welded clips.

.3 Hanger rods:

.1 as specified above, and

.2 minimum two support rods,

.3 rods selected for minimum factor of safety of 5 times load to ultimate tensile or compressive strength of rod.

.4 Pipe restraint:



.1 restrain pipes from lateral movement with:

.1 bolt-on angle brackets or pipe U-bolts for manufactured hangers,

.2 welded-on angles for fabricated hangers.

.5 Finish:

.1 electro-galvanized finish in mechanical rooms and outdoors.

.2 black steel finish in other areas.

2.7 WALL SUPPORTS

.1 Horizontal pipe adjacent to wall:

.1 Angle iron wall brackets with specified hangers.

.2 Vertical pipe adjacent to wall.

.1 Exposed pipe wall support for lateral movement restraint

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Grinnell/Anvil fig. 262 or 263.

.2 Channel type support

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Burndy, Canadian Strut, Cantruss or Unistrut - (arrangement to be acceptable to B.C. Boiler Inspection Department).

2.8 FLOOR SUPPORTS

.1 Horizontal pipe.

.1 Do not support piping from the floor unless specifically indicated.

.2 Vertical pipe.

.1 Mid-point of risers between floor slabs - adjustable fabricated steel supports. Refer to Section 23 05 49 Seismic Restraints.

.3 Steel or cast iron pipe:

.1 floor supported, black carbon steel riser clamps to MSS SP-58, type 42, ULC listed, field-welded pipe lugs.

.2 suspended, black carbon steel riser clamps to MSS SP-58, type 42, ULC listed, 4 or 6 bolt pattern, field-welded pipe lugs.

.4 Copper pipe:

.1 carbon steel, copper finished, riser clamps to MSS SP-58, type 8.

2.9 VARIABLE LOAD SUPPORTS

.1 Performance:

.1 Selected for piping loads and estimated travel under service conditions.

.2 Construction:

.1 carbon steel housing and spring,

.2 pre-compressed spring,

.3 load indicator,

.4 welding to ASME Section IX

.5 welded attachment points

.6 finish: semi gloss primer coat.

2.10 CONSTANT LOAD SUPPORTS

.1 Performance:

.1 maintains constant support load under variable hanger displacements.

.2 selected for piping loads and estimated travel under service conditions, with a minimum safety factor of 25 mm (1 in) extra travel or 20% of total travel, whichever is greater.



.2 Construction:

.1 to WW-H-171E, ANSI/MSS SP-69 and 58

.2 carbon steel housing and spring,

.3 combination hanger moment arm and balancing spring design,

.4 horizontal and vertical arrangements,

.5 load adjustment and load indicator scale,

.6 factory set for load and travel,

.7 welding to ASME Section IX

.8 welded attachment points

.9 finish: semi-gloss primer coat.

2.11 RODDING FOR MECHANICAL JOINT PIPE

.1 Plain end cast iron and asbestos cement drain waste and vent pipe, NPS 5 and over,

.1 bell clamps and rodding at each joint

.2 bell clamp and rodding at each tee branch

Part 3 Execution

3.1 COORDINATION WITH CONCRETE WORK

.1 Supply and deliver inserts to site in ample time to be built into work.

.2 Set and correctly locate inserts for pipes and equipment hangers. Secure inserts firmly to formwork before concrete is poured.

3.2 HANGER SPACING

.1 Support piping and conduit directly from or on structural building elements. Do not support pipe or conduit directly from other services.

.2 Adjust hanger spacing noted below to suit specific pipe manufacturer’s recommendations (specifically related to plastic pipe).

.3 Spacing and middle attachment (rod) diameter as specified in paragraphs below or as in table below, whichever is more stringent.

.1 Plumbing piping: most stringent requirements of the Plumbing Code or authority having jurisdiction.

.2 Fire protection: to applicable fire code; toggle hangers are unacceptable.

.3 For Gas Piping refer to Gas Code CAN/CGA-B149.1.

.4 Flexible joint roll groove pipe: in accordance with table below, but not less than one hanger at joints.

.5 Within 300 mm [12"] of each horizontal elbow, tee, joints, etc.

.4 Maximum hanger spacing table.

Pipe Size: NPS Rod Diametermm [ins]

Maximum SpacingSteel Pipe

m [ft]

Maximum Spacing Copper Pipe

m [ft]

½ 10 [3/8] 1.8 [6] 1.5 [5]

¾, 1 10 [3/8] 2.4 [8] 1.8 [6]

1¼ , 1½ 10 [3/8] 3.0 [10] 1.8 [6]

2 10 [3/8] 3.0 [10] 3.0 [10]

2½ , 3, 4 12 [1/2] 3.0 [10] 3.0 [10]

3.3 HANGER INSTALLATION

.1 Adjust hangers to equalize hanger loads, to support piping true to line and grade, and to minimize loads transferred through connections to equipment and outlets



.2 Offset hanger so that rod is vertical in operating position.

.3 Install hanger to provide minimum 12 mm [½"] clear space between finished covering and adjacent work.

.4 Support vertical piping at every other floor.

.5 Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers.

.6 Where practical, support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

.7 Install plastic inserts between steel studs and piping.

.8 For beam clamps, extend hanger rod tight to underside of beam with top bolt and washer.

3.4 ACOUSTICALLY SENSITVE AREAS

.1 Use spring hangers and spring isolators for all piping, ducts and equipment exiting the basement mechanical room to minimize vibration transfer.

.2 Hangers in the ceiling space of acoustically sensitive areas shall be resilient type such as Mason WHR. Refer to acoustical report for vibration isolation requirements for this type of areas.

3.5 INSERTS

.1 Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams wherever practicable.

.2 Set inserts in position in advance of concrete work. Provide reinforcement rod in concrete for inserts carrying piping over 100 mm (4”) or ducts over 1500 mm (60”) wide.

.3 Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, finish inserts, flush with slab surface.

.4 Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide rod with recessed square plate and nut above slab, in concealed locations.

.5 Provide a test mock up for review.

.6 Inserts shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and in no case closer than 2.1 m (7 ft.) apart.

.7 Install anchors per manufacturer instructions.

.8 The contractor shall arrange an anchor manufacturer’s representative to provide onsite installation training for all of their anchorage products. The Seismic Engineer shall receive documented confirmation that all of the contractor’s personnel who install anchors are trained prior to the commencement of installing anchors.

.9 Anchor capacity is dependent upon spacing between adjacent anchors and proximity of anchors to edge of concrete. Install anchors in accordance with spacing and edge clearances indicated on the drawings.

.10 Existing reinforcement bars in the concrete structure may conflict with specific anchor locations. Unless noted on the drawings that the bars can be cut, the contractor shall review existing structural drawings and shall undertake to locate the position of the reinforcing bars at the locations of the concrete anchors by GPR, X-RAY, or other means.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR HVAC SYSTEMS



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


.2 Provide vibration isolation on all motor driven equipment, piping and ductwork such that noise transmitted to occupied space by any other path than airborne is less than airborne noise transmitted from mechanical space to occupied space. The following are considered minimum requirements to meet this criterion.

1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Supply isolators and seismic restraints meeting the structural requirements of the British Columbia Building Code, with respect to seismic snubbers, or provide equivalent requirements where integral seismic restraint is provided in isolators / bolting.

.2 Vibration isolator housings are considered a safety guard with respect to isolated equipment and any contained compressed springs. Include "Fail Safe" seismic restraint in all vibration isolation designed to hold mechanical equipment and springs in place.



.2 Comply with the latest edition of the following:

.1 British Columbia Building Code and local by-laws

.2 SMACNA - “Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems”

.3 NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems

.4 ASHRAE Handbook – HVAC Applications

.5 VISCMA (The Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control Manufacturers Association)

1.4 SCOPE

.1 Isolate motor driven mechanical equipment.

.2 Provide restraints for equipment mounted on vibration isolation to limit movement during start-up and normal operation.

.3 Isolator and base type designations shall comply with the appropriate chapter of current ASHRAE Applications Handbook, as a minimum.

.4 Information shown here is to establish minimum standards. Vibration isolation equipment shall be selected to maintain noise levels in building in accordance with acoustical consultant’s requirements.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS, QUALIFICATIONS AND SUBMITTALS

.1 Anchorage of all equipment shall be certified by a B.C. registered professional structural engineer who specializes in seismic restraint of resiliently mounted systems.

.2 All seismic integral isolation mounts or snubbers shall be O.S.H.P.D. (Office of Statewide Health and Planning Department – State of California) approved and the associated OSHPD number clearly indicated on the seismic device. Where OSHPD certification is not available for a restraint device, results of tests consistent with OSHPD procedures and approvals shall be submitted and certified by a B.C. registered professional structural engineer.

.3 Obtain all relevant equipment information and provide shop and placement drawings for all vibration isolation elements and steel bases for review before materials are ordered.





.4 Provide attachment to both the equipment and the structure meeting the specified forces involved. Attachment details to the structure to be reviewed by the structural consultant for the project.

.5 Submit samples of materials required to complete the work of this section for inspection and review when requested.

.6 Submit product data sheets for isolation components.

.7 Show fabrication details, location and size of anchor bolts and concrete requirements for inertia bases.

.8 Provide vibration isolation equipment by one manufacturer.

.9 Submit samples of materials required to complete the work of this section for inspection and review when requested.

1.6 GENERAL

.1 Provide vibration isolation on all motor driven equipment with motors of 1/2 HP and greater power output (as indicated on the motor nameplate) and on piping and ductwork, as specified herein. For equipment less than 1/2 HP, provide vibration isolation grommets at the support points.

.2 Provide seismic restraint for all equipment including all seismic restraint related hardware (bolts and anchors) from point of attachment to equipment through to and including attachment to structure. The required anchors shall be indicated on the shop drawings and shall be clearly identified for the correct location and so as to be readily identified after installation. Provide clear instructions for their installation. Refer to Section 23 05 49, Seismic Restraints.

.3 Place isolators under equipment so that the minimum distance between adjacent corner isolators is at least equal to the height of the centre of gravity of the equipment. Include height of centre of gravity on shop drawings. Otherwise, design for increased forces on the supports, and submit design calculations with shop drawings for approval. In particular, provide chiller isolation meeting this requirement.

.4 Ensure isolation systems have a vertical natural frequency no higher than one third of the lowest forcing frequency, unless otherwise specified. Use dynamic stiffness correction factors for elastomers and do not exceed 60 durometer.

.5 Isolators and restraining devices, which are factory supplied with equipment, shall meet the requirements of this section. Isolation supplier to check with pump supplier for number and location of isolators and if there is a requirement for structural or inertia bases.

.6 Provide concrete inertia bases or structural steel bases, where specified or required by equipment manufacturers, located between vibrating equipment and the vibration isolation elements, unless the equipment manufacturer certifies direct attachment capabilities. Coordinate with Division 3 for the provision of concrete work.

.7 Coordinate with Division 3 for the provision of housekeeping pads at least 100 mm [4"] high under all isolated equipment, or greater thickness where specified. Provide at least 300 mm [12"] clearance between drilled inserts and edge of housekeeping pads. Housekeeping pads to be tied to structure with reinforcement to meet Code seismic requirements.

.8 For isolated equipment, design anchors, bolts, isolators and bases to meet Code requirements. For larger isolators, where the Code requirement cannot be met by the isolator housing, provide Type 6 seismic snubbers or Type 6P where post-disaster requirement is specified.

.9 Use ductile materials in all vibration and seismic restraint equipment.

.10 Follow structural consultant's instructions for drilled inserts re: installation of anchors.





.11 Coordinate with Section 23 33 00 "Duct Connectors – Vibration Isolation" for all ductwork connections to fans or plenums.

.12 Provide flexible connectors between equipment and piping where required by manufacturers to protect equipment from stress and reduce vibration in the piping system. Meet connector manufacturer's installation specifications as well as equipment manufacturer's requirements.

.13 Coordinate with Electrical Division 26 for the provision of a minimum 180o hanging loop of flexible conduit for all electrical connections to isolated equipment.

.14 Supply all isolators fully assembled and clearly labelled with full instructions for installation by the contractor.

Part 2 Products

2.1 ISOLATORS - GENERAL

.1 Supply all of the vibration isolation equipment by one approved supplier with the exception of isolators, which are factory installed and are standard equipment with the machinery. Confirm with manufacturer that these factory-installed isolators meet the seismic requirements of this specification.

.2 Select isolators at the supplier's optimum recommended loading and do not load beyond the limit specified in the manufacturer's literature.

.3 Design springs in accordance with the Society of Automotive Engineers' Handbook Supplement 9 entitled "Manual on Design and Application of Helical and Spiral Springs - SAE". Provide neoprene isolators and components using maximum 60 duro "Bridge bearing quality neoprene", as defined by CSA Standard CAN3-S6. Ensure design of isolation and restraint elements allows adequate clearance to avoid binding.

.4 Design springs "iso-stiff" (kx/ky = 1.0 to 1.5) with a working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of solid deflection.

.5 Provide hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs, or other acceptable weather protection, for all isolation equipment located out of doors or in areas where moisture may cause corrosion.

2.2 ISOLATORS - TYPE 3, SPRING FLOOR MOUNTS

.1 Spring mounts complete with levelling devices, selected to achieve 25mm deflection under load. Springs to incorporate a minimum 6 mm [1/4"] thick neoprene sound pad or cup having a 1.3 mm [0.05"] minimum deflection under load. Design isolator to meet specified seismic requirements.

.2 Standard of Acceptance: Mason SSLFH, Mason SSLR (for chillers and cooling towers only).

2.3 ISOLATORS - TYPE 3A, SPRING FLOOR MOUNTS

.1 As per Type 3 except 50mm deflection.

2.4 ISOLATORS - TYPE 4, HANGER MOUNTS

.1 Spring hangers, c/w 6 mm [1/4"] thick neoprene cup/bushing sized for 1.3 mm [.05"] minimum deflection, or neoprene hangers.

.2 Standard of Acceptance: Mason HD (non- spring), WDNHS (with spring)

2.5 ISOLATORS - TYPE 4A, HANGER MOUNTS

.1 As per Type 4 except 50mm deflection.





2.6 ISOLATORS - TYPE 6, SEISMIC SNUBBERS.

.1 Seismic snubbers c/w minimum 3mm [1/8"] neoprene bushing and 6mm [1/4"] air gap. Snubber to act omni-directionally. Ensure bushing can easily be turned by hand after installation

.2 Standard of Acceptance: Mason Z-1225.

2.7 CLOSED CELL FOAM GASKETS / NEOPRENE GROMMETS - TYPE 7

.1 20 mm [3/4"] thick continuous perimeter closed cell foam gasket to isolate base of package type equipment, AHU's, exhaust fans, etc. from concrete floors Select width for nominal 3psi loading under weight of equipment and allow for 25% compression 5mm [3/16"]. Increase width of curb using steel shim if necessary to accommodate gasket. For light equipment such as exhaust fans, deflection should be a minimum of 0.05". Contractor to check fire rating requirements specified for project.


.1 American National Rubber-EPDM-SBR blend SCE 41 type neoprene.

.2 Mason Industries Type HG Hemi-Grommets.

2.8 CONCRETE INERTIA BASES

.1 Concrete inertia bases to be a minimum of 1.5 times the weight of the isolated equipment. Generally base thickness shall be 1/12 of the longest dimension of the base, but not less than 150 mm [6"]. Include with base a steel channel concrete form with required steel reinforcement (as determined necessary by suppliers' registered professional engineer). Provide additional steel as required by sleeves or inserts to receive equipment anchor bolts.

.2 Use height saving brackets in all mounting locations to maintain a 35 mm [1-1/2"] clearance below the base.

.3 Bases to be furnished with built-in motor slide rails. Motor location as specified/scheduled.

.4 Standard of Acceptance: Mason type K.

2.9 STEEL BASES

.1 Construct structural steel bases sufficiently rigid to keep deflection and misalignment within acceptable limits as determined by the equipment manufacturer.

.2 Use height saving brackets in all mounting locations to provide a base clearance of 35 mm [1-1/2"].

.3 Bases to be furnished with built-in motor slide rails. Motor location as specified/scheduled.

.4 Steel bases supplied as integral part of equipment to be supplied meeting the above requirements.

.5 Standard of Acceptance: Mason type WF.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Execute the work in accordance with the specifications and the manufacturer's instructions and only by workmen experienced in this type of work.

.2 For all equipment mounted on vibration isolators, provide a minimum clearance of 50 mm [2"] to other structures, piping, equipment, etc.

.3 Before bolting isolators to the structure, start equipment and balance the systems so that the isolators can be adjusted to the correct operating position before installing (seismically rated) anchors and/or welding.





.4 After installation and adjustment of isolators verify deflection under load to ensure loading is within specified range and isolation is being obtained.

.5 Where hold down bolts for isolators or seismic restraint equipment penetrate roofing membranes, provide "gum cups" and sealing compound to maintain waterproof integrity of roof. Ensure sealing compound is compatible with isolator components such as neoprene. Co-ordinate with roofing section of specifications and with roofing subcontractor.

.6 Under equipment mounted on Type 3 or 3A mounts, which do not meet the seismic requirement, provide Type 6 seismic snubbers.

.7 Provide Type 4 resilient hangers on all piping. connected to a vibrating source, if the piping is in excess of NPS 1-1/2 dia. Provide the hangers for a distance of 6.0 m [20 ft] for NPS 2 pipe. Isolate other pipe sizes for a proportionate distance.

.8 Provide concrete inertia bases on centrifugal fans.

.9 Make no connections between mechanical room equipment and drywall partitions, adjoining occupied spaces. Mount all equipment designed for wall mounting on non-critical, block work or concrete walls. Connect hangers to concrete structure only.

.10 Be responsible for ensuring that flexible duct connections (see Section 23 33 00) are installed with a minimum of 40 mm [1-1/2"] metal-to-metal gap. Use flanges to ensure that flexible connectors are clear of the airstream.

.11 Isolate variable frequency drive controller using isolators or soft grommets such that structure borne noise transmission to occupied space is less than airborne noise transmission. Controller supplier to provide all isolation, including wiring connections, to control flanking noise transmission. Provide isolation meeting all seismic requirements.

.12 Provide stabilizing springs limiting movement at flexible connections to 25% of fabric width under steady state conditions and 40% at start up.

.13 Floor mounted equipment: Isolate all floor mounted equipment on Type 3 isolators, unless otherwise specified.

.14 Slab on grade mounted equipment: For equipment mounted on a slab on grade mount on type 3A isolators unless otherwise specified.

3.2 INSPECTIONS

.1 The supplier shall provide assistance to the contractor as necessary during the course of installation of isolation equipment.

.2 The supplier shall inspect the complete installation after system startup and establish that the isolators for each piece of equipment are properly installed and adjusted. Correct any mal-performance. The supplier shall submit a statutory declaration to the Consultant stating that the complete vibration isolation installation is installed in accordance with his drawings and instructions and operates to his satisfaction. Form MF175 in Section 23 99 60 should be used for this purpose.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 Seismic Restraints for HVAC SystemsNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 10


Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK



.1 Restraints shall meet the requirements of the British Columbia Building Code and local by-laws.




.2 Comply with the latest edition of the following:

.1 SMACNA - “Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems”

.2 NFPA 13 - “Installation of Sprinkler Systems”

.3 ASHRAE - “HVAC Applications, Seismic and Wind Restraint Design”

.4 Applicable Codes and Standards.

.5 VISCMA (The Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control Manufacturers Association)

.6 Manufacturers Standardization Society of Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS): MSS SP-127 Bracing for Piping Systems Seismic - Wind - Dynamic Design, Selection, Application.

1.4 SEISMIC RESTRAINT DESIGN AND INSPECTION

.1 Arrange and pay for the services of a B.C. registered professional structural engineer who specializes in the restraint of building elements. This structural engineer, herein referred to as the seismic engineer shall provide all required engineering services related to seismic restraints of non-vibration isolated equipment, ductwork and piping as indicated below.

.2 The seismic engineer shall provide assistance to the contractor as necessary during the course of restraint of equipment, ductwork and piping.

.3 The seismic engineer shall certify that the installation fully meets the stipulated Post Disaster requirements.

.4 The seismic engineer shall inspect the completed seismic installation and shall submit a statutory declaration to the consultant stating that the complete seismic installation is installed in accordance with his drawings and instructions and it complies with the regulatory requirements. Form MF174 in Section23 99 60 should be used for this purpose. Prior to substantial performance, the seismic engineer shall provide letters of assurance for all mechanical, plumbing and fire protection systems.

1.5 SCOPE

.1 Provide restraint on all piping, ductwork, equipment and machinery, which is part of the building mechanical service systems to prevent injury or hazard to persons and equipment and to retain equipment in its normal position in the event of an earthquake. This specification covers equipment, which is not specifically covered in SMACNA.

.2 Provide design, selection and provision of materials, installation instructions, installation and inspection of seismic restraint of mechanical piping, ductwork, fire protection and equipment.

.3 Provide all seismic restraint related hardware, (including bolts and anchors) from point of attachment to equipment through to and including attachment to structure.




.4 When equipment is mounted on concrete housekeeping pads, and / or concrete curbs the anchor bolts shall extend through the pad into the structure.

.5 It is the entire responsibility of equipment manufacturers to design their equipment so that the strength and anchorage of internal components of the equipment exceeds the force level used to restrain and anchor the unit itself to the supporting structure.

.6 Seismic restraints may only be omitted where permitted by SMACNA.

.7 The requirements under this Section are in addition to the requirements for equipment, piping and duct supports and vibration isolation specified in other Sections.

.8 Where specifications of materials of this Section differ from those in other Sections, this Section governs, including but not limited to vibration isolation devices.

.9 Provide cable restraints on all isolated equipment and seismic restraint on all other equipment, piping and ductwork, all in general accordance with SMACNA Guidelines (see Products).

1.6 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SUPPORTS

.1 In some locations in the project there may be large pipes that are required to be suspended from the slab above. The Contractor shall install the anchors and supports in an approved manner to ensure the entire installation (seismic, gravity and lateral forces) will be compliant with the BC Building Code.

.2 Cast-In-Place Anchors:

.1 Anchors, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Bolts and studs, nuts, and washers shall conform to ASTM A307, Grade A, and ASTM A449, ASTM A563, and ASTM F436, as applicable. Hot-dip galvanized bolts and studs including associated nuts and washers in accordance with ASTM A153.

.3 Drilled-In Anchors:

.1 Installer Qualifications

.1 Drilled-in anchors shall be installed by a Contractor with at least five years of experience performing similar installations.

.2 Installer Training:

.1 Conduct a thorough training with the manufacturer or the manufacturer’s representative for the Installer on the project. Training shall consist of a review of the complete installation process for drilled-in anchors, to include but not limited to:

.1 hole drilling procedure

.2 hole preparation & cleaning technique

.3 adhesive injection technique & dispenser training / maintenance

.4 rebar dowel preparation and installation

.5 proof loading/torqueing

.4 Field Quality Control:

.1 Testing: 25% of each type and size of drilled-in anchor shall be proof loaded by an independent testing laboratory. Adhesive anchors and capsule anchors shall not be torque tested unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. If any of the tested anchors fail to achieve the specified torque or proof load all anchors shall be tested, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.

.2 Tension testing should be performed in accordance with ASTM E488.

.3 Torque shall be applied with a calibrated torque wrench.

.4 Proof loads shall be applied with a calibrated hydraulic ram. Displacement of adhesive and capsule anchors at proof load shall not exceed D/10, where D is the nominal anchor diameter.




1.7 SYSTEMS

.1 Seismically restrain the following equipment and systems:

.1 Piping:

.1 medical gas, natural gas, vacuum, petroleum based liquids and compressed air, NPS 1 and larger,

.2 piping located inside of mechanical equipment and service rooms, NPS 1¼ and larger,

.3 all other piping NPS 2½ and larger.

.2 All ductwork and piping:

.1 rectangular and oval ductwork with cross sectional area 0.55 m2 (6 ft2) and greater,

.2 round ducts with diameters 710 mm (28”) and larger.

.3 Equipment:

.1 vibration isolated equipment,

.2 rigidly or gravity supported equipment.

1.8 DESIGN CRITERIA

.1 Restraint systems as indicated in SMACNA "Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems", Seismic Hazard Level SHL A. If lesser restraint than recommended by SMACNA SHL A is proposed to meet local Code seismic requirements, provide shop drawings of details certified by a B.C. registered structural consultant.

.2 Design seismic restraint systems to conform to the British Columbia Building Code for the project location:

.3 For all pipework and duct systems, the vertical uplift force is restrained by the systems as defined in the SMACNA standard.

1.9 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings of all restraining devices, not covered in the SMACNA Guidelines, including details of attachment to the structure, either tested in an independent testing laboratory or approved by a B.C. registered professional engineer.

.2 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 1.

.3 Submit test certificates for each seismic restraint device, identifying maximum tested load capacities.

.4 Submit calculations for each piece of restrained equipment, piping, ductwork and conduit, including seismic forces, restraint selection, and selection data.

.5 Provide a calculation analysis summary (spreadsheet is acceptable) for each piece of equipment, including the following information:

.1 Equipment ID

.2 Floor level

.3 Horizontal seismic force factor

.4 Equipment weight

.5 Horizontal seismic force

.6 Vertical uplift seismic force (where applicable)

.7 Equipment centre of gravity in three directions

.8 Design condition (worst case) overturning moment

.9 Number of restraint fastenings

.10 Pull-out tension per fastener




.11 Horizontal shear per fastener

.12 Pull-out tension load rating per fastener

.13 Horizontal shear rating per fastener.

.6 Include worst case combination of tension and shear loads at each snubber and restraint location.

.7 Include anchor bolt diameters, embedment depth, full welding details including type and length for field welds, and required housekeeping base dimensions.

.8 Calculations to be sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the province of British Columbia.

.9 Proposed inserts or connections to structure to follow directions of project structural consultant.


.1 Pre-Construction meeting:

.1 Request and arrange a meeting with the Consultant to review seismic restraint approach, prior to any restraint installation. Obtain approval from the Consultant before commencing work.

.2 Testing and Review

.1 Install the first three lateral and three longitudinal braces for each of: each fire protection systems; one (1) building service piping system; and one (1) ductwork system.

.2 request and arrange for a review of the installation by the Consultant. Obtain approval of the installation before commencing remainder of the work.

.3 Provide services of the manufacturer’s technical representative to conduct site inspections of the Work in progress, and to conduct a final inspection of the work. Provide a copy of the final inspection report to the Consultant for review.

.4 Request and arrange for a construction review by the Consultant of the completed seismic restraint installation, before any ceilings are installed.

Part 2 Products

2.1 SEISMIC SNUBBER RESTRAINTS

.1 Single-Axis Limit Stop Snubber Assemblies:

.1 steel construction, attached to equipment structure and equipment, maximum of 6 mm¼” seismic movement.

.2 designed to restrict movement in one axis.

.3 minimum 6 mm¼” thick resilient neoprene pads to prevent metal-to-metal impact.

.4 minimum four (4) snubbers for each piece of equipment.

.2 Multi-Axis Limit Stop Snubber Assemblies:

.1 interlocking steel construction, attached to equipment structure and equipment, maximum of 6 mm¼” seismic movement.

.2 designed to restrict movement in two (2) or three (3) axis.

.3 minimum 6 mm¼” thick resilient neoprene pads to prevent metal-to-metal impact.

.4 minimum two (2) snubbers for each piece of equipment.

2.2 SEISMIC VIBRATION ISOLATORS

.1 All Direction Neoprene Isolator:




.1 molded, oil resistant neoprene compound, with encapsulated cast-in-place top steel load plate, and steel base plate with anchor holes designed for seismic loads in all directions with no metal-to-metal contact.

.2 Restrained Spring Isolator – Constant Load:

.1 colour coded seismic-controlled spring isolator, single or multiple spring coils, with minimum 6 mm¼” neoprene pad.

.2 removable coil spring element without having to disturb supported equipment.

.3 lateral stiffness greater than 1.2 times rated vertical stiffness.

.4 minimum 50% overload capacity

.5 non-welded spring elements: epoxy coated, with a minimum 1000 hour rating when tested in accordance with ASTM B-117.

.6 steel housing design to limit lateral and vertical movement of the supported equipment.

.7 neoprene snubber, to limit maximum equipment movement in any direction to 6 mm¼”.

.8 adaptor base suitable sized for larger anchors, when required to suit anchorage capacity.

.3 Restrained Spring Isolator – Variable Load:

.1 colour coded seismic-controlled spring isolator, single or multiple spring coils, with minimum 6 mm¼” neoprene pad.

.2 removable coil spring element without having to disturb supported equipment.

.3 lateral stiffness greater than 1.2 times rated vertical stiffness.

.4 minimum 50% overload capacity

.5 non-welded spring elements: epoxy coated, with a minimum 1000 hour rating when tested in accordance with ASTM B-117.

.6 steel housing design to limit lateral and vertical movement of the supported equipment.

.7 top load plate with adjustable and leveling bolts.

.8 adjustable vertical restraints

.9 isolation washers

.10 bottom load plate with internal non-skid isolation pads and anchor holes

.11 hot dipped galvanized for outdoor installations.

.12 neoprene snubber, to limit maximum equipment movement in any direction to 6 mm¼”.

.13 adaptor base suitable sized for larger anchors, when required to suit anchorage capacity.

2.3 PIPING AND DUCTWORK RESTRAINT

.1 Cable Restraints for Suspended Piping and Ductwork:

.1 manufactured system consisting of cable, building attachment, and vertical rod reinforcement assembly,

.2 field-built assemblies are not acceptable,

.3 steel wire strand cables:

.1 galvanized steel aircraft cable

.2 sized for seismic load with a safety factor of 2,

.3 arranged for restraint in both longitudinal and transverse directions.




.4 Rope connections: overlap wire “U” clips, or, tool-less wedge insert lock connectors.

.5 Connector strength rating equal to 90% of cable breaking strength rating.

.4 Building and equipment attachment brackets: designed to permit free cable movement in all directions up to a 45 degree misalignment:

.1 protective thimbles at sharp corners to protect against cable wear,

.2 Selected to exceed the cable working design load by 50%,

.3 Single sided “C” beam clamps are not acceptable.

.5 Vertical Suspension Rods:

.1 braced to avoid potential for buckling due to vertical up-lift forces,

.2 structural steel angle or formed channel brace selected to prevent support rod buckling,

.3 brace attached to support rod with a series of adjustable clips, without the use of hand-tools.

.2 steel angles or channels:

.1 sized for seismic load with a safety factor of 2,

.2 arranged for restraint in both longitudinal and transverse directions.

.3 Rigidly Mounted Equipment Restraint

.1 Undercut or Heavy-Duty Sleeve type, for post concrete-cure installation:

.1 carbon steel bolt, nut and sleeve,

.2 selected for concurrent shear and tension loads with a safety factor not less than 2.0 x estimated load.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Design seismic restraints to;

.1 keep equipment in place during and after seismic events in accordance with local building code,

.2 resist vertical loading simultaneously with transverse or longitudinal seismic loading .

.2 It is the responsibility of the contractor to ascertain that an appropriate size device be selected for each individual piece of equipment.

.3 Give special consideration to design for adjacent connections, insulation treatment, thermal movement, vibration isolation, and relation to building seismic joints.

.4 Building structure attachments;

.1 concrete construction:

.1 cast in place anchor

.2 drill-in wedge anchor

.2 steel construction:

.1 double sided beam clamp, loaded perpendicular to beam, or

.2 specifically designed welded or bolted connection.

.3 single sided “C” type beam clamps for support rods for piping, ductwork, conduit, bus duct, cable trays or other equipment are unacceptable as seismic restraint anchor points.

.4 Brace installation;

.1 install cable restraints snug,




.2 install solid braces only in rigidly supported situations,

.3 brace hanger rods forming a part of seismic restraint to accept resulting compressive loads,

.4 transverse and longitudinal braces to be no more than 45° above or below centerline of pipe, duct, or tray.

.5 Equipment:

.1 equipment secured rigidly to wall, floor, or housekeeping pad to have resilient neoprene bushings and washers between equipment and anchor bolts.

3.2 SELECTION OF BRACING DETAILS

.1 Select application type;

.1 single hanger or

.2 trapeze support.

.2 Determine required force level, based on weight of equipment and specified factors.

.3 With required force level, develop transverse and longitudinal brace spacing for single or trapeze hanger in accordance with;

.1 break length into separate straight runs, which are considered to be single straight section between any bends except where bend is at an offset of less than 610mm (2 ft),

.2 brace each straight run in transverse direction at both ends. Check required spacing for transverse bracing and compare it to the length of straight run. If length of straight run is greater than allowable distance for transverse bracing add transverse braces until spacing does not exceed allowable transverse brace distance,

.3 each straight run must have at least one longitudinal brace. Add longitudinal braces so that the spacing does not exceed allowable longitudinal brace spacing. Transverse brace may act as longitudinal brace for an adjacent run when it is located within 610mm (2 ft) of adjacent straight run,

.4 where several short runs occur one after other, each straight run requires longitudinal brace when adjacent short runs exceed offset length of 610mm (2 ft). When adjacent short runs do not exceed maximum offset length the longitudinal braces can act as transverse braces as long as allowable transverse brace spacing is not exceeded. Multiple offsets can be treated as single run when the total offset is less than maximum offset length,

.5 when flexible connection or swing joint is used, such as at pipe drop to mechanical equipment, pipe may cantilever at length equal to or less than half allowable transverse brace spacing. When pipe drop cantilever is greater than half allowable transverse brace spacing, support to floor is required.

.4 Select brace anchorage detail.

.5 Calculate hanger rod load and select rod attachment to structure to suit.

.6 Check if rod stiffeners are required to prevent hanger rod from buckling under compressive load.

3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Install seismic restraint devices in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

.2 Install snubber devices only after equipment is installed and operating, to ensure no metal-to-metal contact.

.3 Seismic restraint manufacturer to provide training to the installation contractor on installation methods.




.4 Anchors on piping systems used for thermal expansion may be used as both a lateral and longitudinal restraint where they are designed for concurrent thermal and seismic loadings.

.5 Pipe and duct penetrations through floors are acceptable as lateral restraints, provided sleeves and fire stopping materials are installed correctly.

.6 Racked piping systems may have the rack braced (laterally, longitudinally, or combination thereof), provided each pipe supported by the rack is restrained to the rack.

.7 Each lateral or longitudinal brace must be secured to the building structure, and not any other building service.

.8 Pipe and duct penetrations through masonry and poured concrete wall partitions are acceptable as a lateral restraint, provided sleeves and fire stopping materials are installed correctly.

.1 Drywall partitions, including demountable partitions, are not to be used for lateral restraint.

3.4 EQUIPMENT RESTRAINTS

.1 Floor Mounted Vibration Isolated Equipment

.1 Select basic vibration isolator as per Section 23 05 48.

.2 Select seismic restraint for each piece of equipment either:

.1 integrated seismic vibration restraint, or

.2 vibration isolator as per 23 05 48 combined with seismic snubbers.

.3 Do not mix type of restraint on the same piece of equipment.

.2 Suspended Vibration Isolated Equipment

.1 Provide restraint in accordance with the SMACNA guideline and manufacturers' instructions.

.2 Do not mix cable restraints and rigid bar restraints on the same piping or duct system, except:

.1 On piping or ductwork which is suspended on vibration isolators, use cable type SCR restraints and provide a small amount of slack in the cable to prevent vibration short-circuiting.

.3 Select basic vibration isolator as per Section 23 05 48.

.4 Provide cable restraints in longitudinal and lateral directions.

.5 Connect slack cable restraints to ceiling hung equipment in such a way that the axial projection of the wires passes through the centre of gravity of the equipment.

.6 Provide hanger rod reinforcement.

.7 Do not use ductwork or piping restraints to restrain equipment.

.8 Orient restraint wires on ceiling hung equipment at approximately 90 degrees to each other (in plan), and tie back to the ceiling slab at an angle not exceeding 45 degrees to the slab.

.9 On piping systems, provide transverse slack cable restraints at a maximum spacing of 12 m [40 ft] and longitudinal restraints at 24 m [80 ft] maximum spacing, or as limited by anchor/slack cable performance. For pipes greater than NPS10, reduce transverse restraint spacings to 6.0 m [20 ft]. Small pipes may be rigidly tied to big pipes for restraint, but not the reverse.

.10 Transverse bracing for one pipe section may also act as longitudinal bracing for the pipe connected perpendicular to it, provided the bracing is installed within 600 mm [24”] of the elbow or T, and if the connected pipe is the same or smaller in size. Do not use branch lines to restrain main lines.




.11 Provide flexibility in piping joints or sleeves where pipes pass through building seismic or expansion joints.

.12 At vertical pipe risers, wherever possible, support the weight of the riser at a point or points above the centre of gravity of the riser. Provide lateral guides at the top and bottom of the riser, and at intermediate points not to exceed the transverse spacings discussed above for horizontal pipes, with guide clearance not exceeding 3 mm [1/8”].

.13 Vary adjacent spacing of restraints on a piping run by 10% to 30% to avoid coincident resonances.

.14 Install restraints at least 50 mm [2"] clear of all other equipment and services.

.15 Adjust restraint cables such that they are not visibly slack, or such that the flexibility is approximately 40 mm [1-1/2"] under thumb pressure for a 1.5 m [5 ft] cable length (equivalent ratio for other cable lengths). Adjust the clearance at cable strap/spacer piece restraints to not exceed 6 mm [1/4"].

.16 Provide transverse and axial restraints as close as practical to a vertical bend.

.17 At steel trusses, connect to top chords and follow truss manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Rigidly Floor Mounted Equipment

.1 Anchor all floor mounted equipment with anchor bolts, minimum four bolts for rectangular equipment bases, and three bolts for circular equipment bases.

.2 For round equipment, such as expansion tanks with floor-support ring without mounting flanges, use snubbers or custom seismic snubbers.

.3 Provide resilient neoprene bushings and washers between equipment and anchor bolt.

.4 Surface wall-mounted Equipment and Panels

.1 Select bolts for concurrent shear dead-weight without deduction for uplift load, and tension restraint load.

.2 In block-wall;

.1 up to three bolts, each bolt rated for 2.0 times estimated restraint load, or

.2 for four bolts or more, each bolt is rated for 1.0 times estimated concurrent load.

.3 In dry-wall;

.1 minimum of four self-tapping screws drilled into the studs, with each screw rated for 1.0 times estimated restraint load.

.5 Recessed wall-mounted Equipment and Panels

.1 Same as for surface mounted equipment, except fasten through top bottom and sides of panels to adjacent block wall or wall studs.

3.5 AIR TERMINALS

.1 Where air terminals are installed in mechanical grid ceilings, provide at least two 12 ASWG galvanized steel wire seismic security bridles per air terminal tied either to the building structure or to ceiling hanger wires.

.2 Attach security bridles at opposite corners of each air terminal and in such a manner that the air terminal cannot fall.

.3 Provide all necessary brackets for attachment of security bridles to the air terminals.




3.6 RADIANT CEILING PANELS.

.1 Provide 12 ASWG galvanized steel wire seismic security bridles from radiant ceiling panel cross brace to building structure or to ceiling hanger wires at maximum 1200 mm [4 ft.] O.C.

3.7 MIXING BOXES AND AIR VALVES

.1 Provide seismic restraints in accordance with details in SMACNA Guidelines or alternatively slack cables may be used.

3.8 ISOLATED PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

.1 For post disaster installations, provide vertical rod stiffeners when rod length is greater than 50 rod diameters.

3.9 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES

.1 Review design drawings and specifications, and shop drawings.

.2 Provide design and selection of seismic restraints, and preparation of shop and installation drawings.

.3 Provide training of contractor personnel for the installation of seismic restraints.

.4 Conduct site inspections of the Work in progress, and to conduct a final inspection of the work. Provide a copy of the final inspection report to the Consultant for review, including photographs of representative installations of each type of restraint used in the Work.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 23 05 53543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC SYSTEMSNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 7


Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK

.1 This section of the Specification forms part of the Contract Documents and is to be read, interpreted and coordinated with all other parts.


.1 Mechanical systems identification, including piping, ducts and equipment, shall be in accordance with:

.1 CSA B-149.1

.2 CAN/CGSB 24.3

.3 ANSI/ASME A13.1

.4 CSA Z-7396.1

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit list of nameplates, with proposed wording, prior to engraving.

.2 Identification Schedules

.1 Submit schedules of the following for review, prior to framing:

.1 Pipe Identification Colours.

.2 Valves.

.3 Ceiling Access Identification Colours.

.4 Duct Access Identification Colours.

Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL

.1 Manufactured identification systems:

.1 laminated vinyl or polyester,

.2 resistant to chemical, ultraviolet,

.3 operating temperature: -25C (-12F) to 121C (250F)

2.2 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATES

.1 Each piece of manufactured equipment shall have a metal nameplate, with raised or recessed letters. Mechanically fasten plate to equipment.

.2 Manufacturer's nameplates shall indicate manufacturer's name, equipment model, size, serial number and electrical characteristics and pertinent information for any other services connections.

.3 Include ULC, (Underwriters' Laboratories Canada) or CSA, (Canadian Standards Association) registration logos and those of other agencies, as required by the respective agencies.

.4 Nameplates shall be located so that they are easily read. Do not insulate or paint over nameplates.

2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES

.1 Identification plates are in addition to manufacturers plates.

.2 Identification plates:

.1 provided for equipment identified with number designations in schedules and equipment selection sheets.



.2 marked with equipment ID, service and power source using wording and numbering used in contract documents, e.g. supply fan SF-1, cooling coil CC-1, pump P-1

.3 Apply nameplates securely in conspicuous places, on cool surfaces.

.4 Identify systems, and areas or zones of building being serviced.

.3 Fabrication:

.1 laminated plastic,

.2 black lettering on white background for “Normal” power equipment

.3 white lettering on red background for “Emergency” power equipment

.4 minimum size 90 x 40 x 2.5 mm (3 x 1½ x 1/8 in),

.5 engraved with 10 mm (7/16 in) high lettering.

.6 use 25 mm [1"] high lettering for major equipment.

2.4 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

.1 Piping Identification

.1 Each piping system shall be colour coded for identification and labelled with the system identification code letters, including temperature and pressure, if applicable, and directional flow arrows in accordance with the Pipe Identification Colour Schedule. See diagram for sizes of lettering and bands.

.2 Flexible coil-wrap manufactured markers:

.1 plastic coated markers with integral printing, or plastic cover with field applied self-adhesive markers,

.2 applicable WHIMS pictogram for identification of material hazard.

.3 Self-adhesive manufactured pipe markers, flow arrows and colour bands:

.1 Identification colour bands for primary and secondary colours to indicate the type and degree of hazard

.2 Standard of Acceptance: Brady vinyl cloth tape bands or Brady vinyl tape bands, with adhesive compatible with the surface temperature.

.4 Colour band tape with flow direction arrows,

.1 waterproof and heat resistant plastic marker tags for pipes and tubing 20mm (¾ in) nominal and smaller.

.2 applicable WHIMS pictogram for identification of material hazard.

.5 Stenciled pipe markers:

.1 stenciled letters and numbers: 12 mm (½ in) high lettering on pipes NPS 2 and smaller, and 25mm (1 in) high for pipes NPS 2 ½ and larger, showing pipe service, pipe size and arrows showing direction of flow.

.2 colour bands: 50mm (2 in) wide, using primary and secondary colours conforming to Pipe and Valve Identification Table. Paint to conform to CGSB 1-GP-60M.

.3 direction arrows:

.1 150mm (6 in) long by 50mm (2 in) wide for piping 75mm (3 in) nominal or larger outside diameter including insulation,

.2 100mm (4 in) long by 20mm (¾ in) wide for smaller diameters.

.3 applicable WHIMS pictogram for identification of material hazard

2.5 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

.1 Provide every valve job with a numbered tag showing valve type and size, attached to valve stem or wheel handle with nonferrous chain or S-hook.



.1 Valve identification is not required at the following valves:

.1 inside fire hose cabinets,

.2 radiation heating units, unit heaters, or fixture stops,

.3 within sight of equipment or apparatus they control provided there is no branch piping between valve and equipment served.

.2 Tags may be of brass, aluminum, metalphoto, lamicoid or fiberglass, stamped or engraved, of 25 mm [1"] minimum diameter.

.3 Identification information:

.1 indicating service, sequential valve number by service or specific equipment ID for control valves, location identifier, purpose of valve, valve type and size.

.2 valve type designation:

.1 B (ball valve), GT (gate valve), GL (globe valve), CBV (circuit balancing valve), BF (butterfly valve).

.3 valve size:

.1 for valve size, use NPS designation.

.4 Prepare flow diagrams for each system showing pumps, heat transfer equipment, schematic piping and tagged valves.

.5 Provide a tag schedule for each system, designating number, service, function, size, and location of each tagged item and normal operating position of each valve.

.6 Submit two copies of valve tag schedules, encased in clear plastic, bound in vinyl covered, hardbacked 210mm x 297mm (8½ in x 11 in) three ring binders.

.7 All fuel oil valves shall be identified in conformance with CPPI 1990, “Using the CPPI color-symbol to mark equipment and vehicles for product identification”.

2.6 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION

.1 Paint stencilled letters 25mm (1 in) high showing;

.1 duct service,

.2 fan number, and

.3 arrows showing direction of flow,

Part 3 Execution

3.1 PIPING IDENTIFICATION - GENERAL

.1 Install markers on cleaned and prepared surfaces free of dirt and oil.

.2 Provide manufactured tape markers:

.1 self-adhesive type:

.1 indoor uninsulated piping,

.2 indoor insulated piping with PVC or smooth metal jackets,

.2 flexible coil-wrap:

.1 outdoor piping,

.2 indoor insulated piping with canvas or embossed metal jackets.

.3 Provide stencil markers:

.1 Paint stenciled letters and numbers identification marks showing pipe service, pipe size and showing direction of flow.

.2 Paint flow direction arrows adjacent to each identification mark.

.3 Paint colour bands adjacent to each identification mark.

.4 Locations:



.1 Identify piping (pipe markers and direction arrows) at the following locations:

.1 Adjacent to major valves and where valves are in series at no more than 2 m [6'-6"] intervals.

.2 At least once in each room and at 15 m [50 ft.] maximum spacing in open areas. Exception: gas piping to be identified at 2 m [6'-6"] intervals in ceiling plenums.

.3 maximum every 15 m (50 ft) along length of pipe, except for medical gas, natural gas and fuel oil,

.4 Adjacent to all major changes in direction.

.5 At point of entry and leaving each pipe chase and/or confined space and piping accessible at each access opening.

.6 At the beginning and end points of each run; and, at each piece of equipment in each run.

.7 maximum every 6 m (20 ft) along length of pipe for natural gas and fuel oil,

.8 within 1 m (3 ft) of each side of barriers, floors and walls,

.9 within 1 m (3 ft) of and behind access doors ,

.10 within 1 m (3 ft) of piping termination point..

.5 Provide schedules in each major mechanical room and at least one schedule will be required on each floor having a minor mechanical room. Frame schedules under glass in matching frames and hang where directed.

.1 Include one copy of schedules in each operating and maintenance manual.

3.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION – BURIED PIPING

.1 Provide tracer tape along entire length of pipe at a depth of:

.1 600 mm (2 ft) mm below top of grade for water piping,

.2 150 mm (6 in) above top of natural gas

.2 This tape is in addition to any required electrical tracing wire that may be required under other sections.

3.3 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

.1 Provide valves with a numbered tag showing valve type and size, attached to valve stem or wheel handle with nonferrous chain or S-hook.

.2 Valves to be tagged include:

.1 Valves on all main piping circuits.

.2 Valves on all major branch lines.

.3 Valves on minor branch lines in horizontal service spaces, vertical service spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

.4 Drain valves and hose bibbs on systems containing glycol.

.5 Control valves.

.3 Valve identification is not required at the following valves:

.1 inside fire hose cabinets,

.2 radiation heating units, unit heaters, or fixture stops,

.3 within sight of equipment or apparatus they control provided there is no branch piping between valve and equipment served.

.4 control valve stations, steam trap stations, fixture stops, system drain valves other than glycol.



.4 Prepare flow diagrams for each system showing pumps, heat transfer equipment, schematic piping and tagged valves.

.5 Provide a tag schedule for each system, designating number, service, function, size, and location of each tagged item and normal operating position of each valve.

.6 Schedule the valve numbers using a sequential numbering system indicating location, service and normal position (open or closed). Numbers shall be prefixed by the letter "P" or the letter "H" indicating that the valve is on plumbing or heating service.

.7 Submit two copies of valve tag schedules, encased in clear plastic, bound in vinyl covered, hardbacked 210mm x 297mm (8½ in x 11 in) three ring binders.

.8 All fuel oil valves shall be identified in conformance with CPPI 1990, “Using the CPPI color-symbol to mark equipment and vehicles for product identification”.

3.4 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION

.1 Identify plenum access doors as to accessed items, e.g. Filter F-1, Supply Fan SF-1, Cooling Coil CC-1.

.2 Stencil on all plenum doors, downstream from air filter bank. "Do not open when fan operating".

.3 Identify all ductwork in mechanical equipment rooms to denote system and/or zone served and an air flow direction arrow.

.4 Identify automatic control dampers concealed in ductwork. Identify the "open" and "closed" position of the operator arm on the outside of the duct or duct insulation.

.5 Identify all hazardous exhaust ducts, e.g. fume hood, radioactive exhaust at not greater than 3 metre [10 ft.] and at least once in each partitioned space. Radioisotope exhaust ducts shall be marked with a radiation-warning symbol. See detail MD 01 005 in Section 23 99 50.

.6 Identification letters shall be 50 mm [2"] high black letters on white background. Flow arrows shall be 50 mm [2"] wide by 150 mm [6"] long black arrows on a white background. Stencil over final finish only.

3.5 CEILING ACCESS IDENTIFICATION

.1 Secure 6 mm [1/4"] self-adhesive coloured dots, (Brady Quik Dots or Avery Data Dots), to the ceiling, to identify the location of access to equipment concealed above the ceiling according to the following schedule:

Colour

Concealed equipment and cleaning access Yellow

Control equipment, including control valves, dampers and sensors Black

Fire and fire / smoke dampers Red

Fire protection including sprinkler equipment including drains Red

Heating/Chilled water, DCW, DHW isolation valves Green

Pipe mounted equipment, other than fire, smoke and sprinkler equipment

Green

.2 When T-bar ceilings are installed adhere coloured dots to T-bar framing, adjacent to panel to be removed.



3.6 DUCT ACCESS IDENTIFICATION

.1 Secure 50 mm [2"] high, Gothic style self-adhesive stick on-letters, (Letrasign or Brady Quick-Align) on duct access panels to identify their usage, according to the following schedule:

Colour Letters

Cleaning and service access black. C.A

Controls including sensors black C

Dampers, (backdraft, balance and control) black D

Fire dampers / Fire Smoke Dampers red F.D. / F.S.D

Smoke detectors red S.D.

3.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

.1 Secure engraved laminated plastic identification tags (black face and white centre) on the following items:

.1 Temperature control instruments, gauges and panels, coordinated with control diagrams identification.

.2 Electrical switchgear supplied under Division 21, 22, 23.

.3 Refer also to the Controls Section.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULES

.1 Submit schedules of the following for review, prior to framing:

.1 Pipe Identification Colours.

.2 Valves.

.3 Ceiling Access Identification Colours.

.4 Duct Access Identification Colours.

.2 Schedules will be required in each major mechanical room and at least one schedule will be required on each floor having a minor mechanical room. Frame schedules under glass in matching frames and hang where directed.

.1 Include one copy of schedules in each operating and maintenance manual.

3.9 PIPE IDENTIFICATION COLOUR SCHEDULE

Service IdentificationLettering

PrimaryColour

SecondaryColour

Cold Water Service C.W. green -

Domestic H.W. Supply D.H.W.S. yellow black

Fire lines W.S. W.S. red white

Glycol Heating Return50% GLR - do not drain

yellow black

Glycol Heating Supply50% GLS - do not drain

yellow black

Natural Gas Gas yellow orange

Radon Gas Radon Gas yellow magenta

Sprinkler lines S.P.R. red white

Steam kPa [psig] yellow black



3.10 PIPE IDENTIFICATION BANDING COLOURS

Pipe Size

.1 Letters:

.1 13 mm [1/2"] high - 1-1/4 NPS pipe & smaller.

.2 25 mm [1"] high - 1-1/2 NPS up to 2-1/2 NPS pipe.

.3 50 mm [2"] high - 3 NPS and larger pipe.

.2 Bands:

.1 38 mm [1-1/2"] wide, except arrow bands 50 mm [2"] wide.

.3 Colours:

.1 horizontally hatched - primary colour.

.2 vertically hatched - secondary colour.

.3 black letters and arrows on yellow primary colour background

.4 white letters and arrows on red, blue or green backgrounds.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK



.1 Procedures shall be in accordance with AABC'S National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation and ASHRAE Standards.

1.3 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

.1 Prior to finalizing contractual arrangements with the balancing agency, submit the names, qualifications and years of direct field testing and balancing experience in the testing and balancing field for all members of the balancing team that is scheduled to carry out the balancing work.

.1 The senior site technologist must have a minimum of five years testing and balancing experience of similar projects.

.2 Provide a list of a minimum of ten comparable projects successfully completed by all key members of the balancing team.

1.4 TESTS

.1 Give at least written 24 hour notice of date for tests.

.2 Do not externally insulate or conceal work until tested and approved. Follow construction schedule and arrange for tests.

.3 Conduct tests in presence of Consultant. Arrange for the Owner’s representative to be present.

.4 Bear costs including retesting and making good.

.5 Refer to Piping Sections for specific test requirements.

.6 Refer to Ducting Sections for specific test requirements.

.7 Prior to tests, isolate all equipment or other parts which are not designed to withstand test pressures.

1.5 BALANCING - AIR SYSTEMS

.1 Adjust duct and terminal balance dampers and adjust or change drive sheaves to balance supply, return and exhaust air systems to provide the design air quantities (within +/-10%) at each outlet and inlet and to maintain the design relationship between the supply and exhaust air system quantities.

.2 Adjust air terminals to obtain the optimum air distribution pattern.

.3 Permanently mark the final balance position on all balance dampers and adjustable air turning devices by means of permanent custom adhesive stickers across the balancing dampers to seal them in position.

.4 Submit a report to the Consultant indicating final fan r/min., motor operating amperages, system static pressure and final air quantities obtained.

.5 Air systems shall be balanced with clean filters in place, at a total of 105% to 110% of specified total airflow rates.

1.6 BALANCING - LIQUID SYSTEMS

.1 Balance liquid systems using a surface temperature measuring instrument such as Alnor pyrometer or a flow meter if installed. Adjust balance valves and balance fittings to obtain design flow rates or uniform temperature differences (on the liquid side) across


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC



coils and heating/cooling elements acknowledging the specified temperature drops and rises on the air and water side.

.2 Permanently mark the final balance position on balance valves and balance fittings and lock memory stops.

.3 Submit a report to the Consultant indicating the final temperatures obtained.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 23 07 13543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 HVAC DUCT INSULATIONNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 4


Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK



.1 Provide external thermal insulation for plenums and ductwork as called for. Note: items listed that do not require insulation.

.2 Provide internal acoustical insulation for plenums and ductwork, as called for. Note: do not externally insulate any ductwork that is specified to be internally insulated.

.3 Journeyman insulation applicators, skilled in this trade, shall perform the work.

.4 Be responsible for ensuring that sufficient space is always provided to allow proper installation of insulation materials.


.1 Material and method of application to comply with or be tested in accordance with the latest applicable versions of the following Standards;

.1 B.C. Building Code and local by-laws

.2 B.C. Insulation Contractors Association (BCICA) Standards Manual

.3 Thermal Insulation Association of Canada (TIAC) National Insulation Standard, excluding section 12

.4 ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings

.5 ANSI/NFPA 90A Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems and Installation.

.6 ANSI/NFPA 90B Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.

.7 CGSB 51-GP-10M Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fiber, Block or Board, for Ducting.

.8 CGSB 51-GP-11M Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fiber, Blanket for Piping, Ducting, Machinery and Boilers.

.9 ASTM C518 Standard Test Method for Steady State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of Heat Flo Meter Apparatus

.10 ASTM C533 Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation

.11 ASTM C534 Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form

.12 CAN/CGSB-51.12 Cement, Thermal Insulating and Finishing.

.13 CAN/CGSB-51.40 Thermal Insulation, Flexible, Elastomeric, Unicellular, Sheet and Pipe Covering.

.14 CGSB 51.53-95 Polyvinyl Chloride) Jacket Sheeting, for Insulated Pipes Vessels and Round Ducts.


.1 Flame spread ratings and smoke developed classifications shall be as required by the B.C. Building Code and NFPA 90A. Generally, the flame spread rating throughout the material shall not exceed 25 and the smoke developed classification shall not exceed 50.

.2 Insulation thickness and insulating values shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1.

.3 Duct linings shall be in accordance with CSA Z317.2



1.5 MINIMUM STANDARDS

.1 All ductwork shall be insulated to meet or exceed the minimum requirements of the MNECB. In addition, the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 are also applicable to this project. The more stringent insulation value (between the two codes) will be the level required for this project.

.2 Refer to the following table taken from MNECB Insulation of Ducts for additional information:

Temperature Difference, (1)

oC

Min. Thermal Resistance (RSI) for Ducts and Plenums

m2*oC/W

Min. Thermal Resistance (RSI) for Run-outs, (2)

m2*oC/W

< 5 0 0

5 to 22 0.58 0.58

>22 0.88 0.58

Notes:(1) The temperature difference at design conditions between the space within which

the duct is located and the design air temperature of the air carried by the duct. Where duct is used for both heating and cooling purposes the larger temperature difference shall be used.

(2) Ducts not exceeding 3 metres in length connecting to terminal grilles or diffusers.

1.6 DEFINITIONS

.1 "CONCEALED" means insulated mechanical services in chases, furred spaces, shafts and hung ceilings.

.2 "EXPOSED" will mean not concealed. For greater certainty, the following locations are considered exposed:

.1 Services in all mechanical and electrical rooms.

.2 Services in tunnels,

.3 Services in space beneath raised floors.

.4 Trenches located in boiler rooms.

1.7 ASBESTOS


Part 2 Products

2.1 DUCT INSULATION - EXTERNAL

.1 External flexible glass fibre insulation with integral vapour barrier.

.1 Minimum density - 12 kg/cu.m. [0.75 lbs/cu. ft.].

.2 Thermal Conductivity at 24 deg.C. - 0.042 W/m/deg.C.

.3 Flame Spread/Smoke Developed rating throughout the material shall not exceed 25/50.


.1 Certainteed SoftTouch Duct Wrap 75

2.2 DUCT INSULATION - INTERNAL

.1 Duct Liner – Flexible (fiber free foam)

.1 Internal, flexible, elastomeric, non-particulating, fiber free, formaldehyde free, low VOC, acoustical insulation with antimicrobial coating



.2 Minimum Noise Reduction Criteria (NRC): 0.6 as per ASTM C423 ‘Type A mounting’.

.3 Thermal Conductivity at 24 deg.C. - 0.036 W/m/deg.C.

.4 Flame Spread/Smoke Developed rating throughout the material shall not exceed 25/50.


.1 Armacell AP/Coilflex,

2.3 ACCESSORIES

.1 Lagging Adhesive (Canvas Jackets): Childers’ CP-50A, Epolux’s Cadalag 336, Foster’s 30-36.

.2 Vapor Seal Adhesive (Fibrous Glass Insulation): Childers’ CP-82, Epolux’s Cadoprene 400, Foster’s 85-75 or 85-20.

.3 Vapor Barrier Mastic/Joint Sealer (Fibrous Glass Insulation): Childers’ CP-30, Epolux’s Cadalar 670, Foster’s 95-44 or 30-35.

.4 Adhesive (Flexible Elastomeric Foam): Armstrong’s 520, Childers’ CP-80, Epolux’s Cadoprene 488, Foster’s 82-40.

.5 Adhesive (Reinforcing Membrane): Childers’ Chil-Spray WB CP-56.

.6 Mastic (Reinforcing Membrane): Childers’ AK-CRYL CP-9.

2.4 SCOPE OF INSULATION

.1 Scope 1: External Flexible Insulation with vapour barrier. (Exposed ducts within a room, which is being served by the exposed ducts, do not require external insulation unless there is a chance for condensation to occur).

Thickness

Service Mm [ins]

All cooling and heating supply ducts 50 [2]

Outdoor air ductwork and plenums (from intake to mixing plenum). 50 [2]

Exhaust air discharge through roof (including sides and bottom of plenum). 50 [2]

Exhaust air ductwork outside the building. 50 [2]

All exhaust air ductwork from outside wall or roof to 1.5 m [5 ft.] inside building.

25 [1]

Part 3 Execution

3.1 APPLICATION

.1 Apply external insulation to ductwork only after all tests have been made and systems accepted by the Consultant as airtight.

.2 Apply insulation and insulation finish in a workmanlike manner so that the finished product is uniform, smooth in finish, pleasing to the eye and with longitudinal seams concealed from view. Apply ductwork insulation materials, accessories and finishes in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

.3 Insulation and vapour barrier shall be continuous through all non-rated separations.

3.2 INSULATION TERMINATION

.1 Terminate insulation short of all control, smoke and fire dampers so as not to interfere with their operation.

.2 Terminate insulation 900 mm [36"] short of duct mounted electric heating coils.



3.3 INSULATION FOR COOLING COIL HEADERS AND RETURN BENDS

.1 Pack flexible glass fibre insulation around headers and return bends on all cooling coils in built-up air handling units to control condensation.

3.4 EXTERNAL FLEXIBLE INSULATION WITH VAPOUR BARRIER

.1 Adhere insulation with insulation adhesive applied in 150 mm [6"] wide strips on 300 mm [12"] centres.

.2 On rectangular ductwork and plenums, over 610mm [24"] in width, spotweld pins 6mm [1/4"] longer than the insulation thickness, one per square foot of duct minimum. If pins are installed in the field, a capacitor gun shall be used. Impale the insulation over the pins and hold in place using metal or nylon clips (washers). Alternatively, use an assembly consisting of a welded pin with integral head washer welded in place over the insulation. (Clinched pins not acceptable).

.3 Adhere foil faced vapour barrier tape over all butt joints, raw edges, holding washers and other points of penetration of the vapour barrier jacket on all exposed hot and cold ducts and concealed cold ducts.

3.5 DUCTWORK INSULATION FINISHES

.1 "Concealed" ductwork insulation, in horizontal and vertical service spaces, will require no further finish.

.2 "Exposed" ductwork insulation, in unfinished floor spaces will have no further finish.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 23 07 19543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 HVAC PIPING INSULATIONNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 8


Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK



.1 Provide thermal insulation on all piping, valves, fittings and radiant ceiling panels, as called for and as scheduled. Note items listed that do not require insulation.

.2 Journeyman insulation applicators, skilled in this trade, shall perform the work.

.3 Be responsible for ensuring that enough space is always provided to allow proper installation of insulation materials.

.4 As applicable, use the latest edition of the "B.C. Insulation Contractors Association (BCICA) Quality Standards Manual", as a reference standard if sufficient detail/information is not contained herein.


.1 Flame spread ratings and smoke developed classifications shall be as required by the B.C. Building Code and NFPA 90A. Generally, the flame spread rating and smoke developed classification shall not exceed 25/50.

.2 Insulation thickness and insulating values shall be in accordance with NRC Model National Energy Code of Canada for Buildings (MNECB) and ASHRAE90.1


.1 Material and method of application to comply with or be tested in accordance with the latest version of the following Standards;

.1 B.C. Building Code and local by-laws

.2 B.C. Insulation Contractors Association (BCICA) Standards Manual

.3 Thermal Insulation Association of Canada (TIAC) National Insulation Standard, excluding section 12

.4 ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings

.5 ANSI/NFPA 90A Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems and Installation.

.6 ANSI/NFPA 90B Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.

.7 CGSB 51-GP-10M Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fiber, Block or Board, for Ducting.

.8 CGSB 51-GP-11M Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fiber, Blanket for Piping, Ducting, Machinery and Boilers.

.9 ASTM C533 Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation

.10 ASTM C534 Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form

.11 ASTM C552 Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation

.12 ASTM C553 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications

.13 ASTM C612 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation

.14 ASTM C1126 (Gr.1) Standard Specification for Faced and Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation

.15 CGSB 51-GP-52MA Vapour Barrier, Jacket and Facing Material for Pipe, Duct, and Equipment Thermal Insulation.



.16 CAN/CGSB-51.2 Thermal Insulation, Calcium Silicate, for Piping, Machinery and Boilers.

.17 CAN/CGSB-51.12 Cement, Thermal Insulating and Finishing.

.18 CAN/CGSB-51.40 Thermal Insulation, Flexible, Elastomeric, Unicellular, Sheet and Pipe Covering.

.19 CGSB 51.53-95 Polyvinyl Chloride) Jacket Sheeting, for Insulated Pipes Vessels and Round Ducts.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS AND SAMPLES

.1 Submit, for approval, substantiating manufacturer's documentation (and samples when requested) for all materials, applications and finishing methods to establish that all will satisfy this specification and meet all applicable code requirements, before commencing work.

.2 Submit, for approval, samples of each type of firestopping, smoke seal and accessory.

1.6 DEFINITIONS

.1 "CONCEALED" insulated mechanical services in trenches, chases, furred spaces, shafts and hung ceilings

.2 "EXPOSED" will mean not concealed.

1.7 ASBESTOS


Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL

.1 Flame spread and smoke density of all products shall not exceed 25/50 per ASTM E84 with or without integral jacket.

2.2 PREFORMED PIPE COVERING

.1 Mineral Fibre - Low and Medium Temperature:

.1 With integral vapour barrier jacket and longitudinal lap.

.2 Thermal conductivity at 24oC - 0.033 W/m/deg.C.

.3 Standard of Acceptance: Manson Alley K, Owens Corning SSL-11, Knauf 850 ASJ/SSL, Johns Manville Micro-Lok AP-T Plus, Owens Corning 1200 ASJ/SSL.

.2 Perlite Insulation - High Temperature:

.1 Without integral jacket.

.2 Thermal Conductivity at 90øC - 0.071W/m/deg.C.

.3 Standard of Acceptance: Knauf Temperlite 1200.

.3 Mineral Fibre - High Temperature:


.2 Thermal Conductivity at 93oC - 0.040 W/m/deg.C.

.3 Standard of Acceptance: Manson Alley Kapt, Johns Manville Micro-Lok AP-T Plus, Owens Corning 1200 ASJ/SSL, Roxul ASJ/SL.

.4 Flexible Foamed Elastomeric:


.2 Standard of Acceptance: AP Armaflex, Rubatex R-180-FS.

.5 Flexible Closed Cell:


.2 Standard of Acceptance: Bondtex Polyethylene, Therma-Cel.



.6 Phenolic closed cell – rigid:


.2 Thermal conductivity @ 24oC - 0.019 W/m/deg.C.

.3 Standard of Acceptance: Kingspan Koolphenk

2.3 ACCESSORIES

.1 Insulation Fastenings:

.1 1.6 mm [16 ga.] galvanized wire or 1.6 mm thick copper wire as commercially available.

.2 Jacket Fastenings:

.1 Thermocanvas and All Service:

.1 Staples (flare type), compatible jacket finishing tape, contact adhesives recommended by the jacket manufacturer.

.2 Metal Jackets:

.1 Sheet metal screws, pop rivets, bands.

.3 PVC Jacket and Fitting Covers:

.1 PVC self-adhesive tape, plastic pop rivets, bonding cement.

.3 Adhesives:

.1 Flexible elastomeric and flexible closed cell insulation adhesive:

.1 Armstrong 520, Therma-Cel 1590, RubatexR-373, Zipcoat 8A.

.2 Vapour barrier jacket adhesive:

.1 Bakelite 230-39, Childers CP-82, Epolux Cadoprene 400, Foster 85-20.

.3 Fabric adhesive, to insulation pipe covering:

.1 Bakelite 120-18, Childers CP-52, Epolux Cadalag 336, Foster 30-36, Robson White Lag.

.4 Coatings:

.1 Vapour barrier coating on reinforcing membrane or on insulating cement:

.1 Bakelite 120-09, Childers CP-50, Epolux Cadalag 336, Foster 30-36.

.2 Childers CP-30 (refrigeration suction lines only).

.2 Flexible elastomeric and flexible closed cell insulation finish coating:

.1 Armstrong, Bakelite 120-13, Rubatex, Zipcoat.

.5 Finish Jackets:

.1 Thermocanvas Jacket:

.1 Fattal's Thermocanvas, Robson Flamex FR Canvas or Tai-Can Canvas.

.2 All Service Jacket (with 0.03 mm [0.0019”] minimum thick foil:

.1 Fattal's Fat-Lock ASJ, Fiberglass ASJ, Knauf ASJ, Kingspan ASJ, Manson APT, Johns Manville AP-T Plus, Owens Corning ASJ, Roxul ASJ.

.3 PVC Finishing Jacket (minimum 0.50 mm [0.02”] thick:

.1 Proto PVC, Speedline PVC, Zeston PVC.

.4 Aluminum Jacket:

.1 0.51 mm [22 ga.] thick corrugated or smooth aluminum jacketing with longitudinal slip joints and 50 mm [2"] end laps with factory applied protective liner on interior surface.

.1 Childers, Alco Thermoclad 1 or other as commercially available.

.6 Reinforcing Membrane:



.1 Glass reinforcing membrane as commercially available.

.7 Insulating Cement:

.1 Fibrex Superkote, Partek No. 1, Ryder Thermokote MW high temperature.

.8 Finishing Cement:

.1 Ryder Thermokote 1 FW.

.9 Flexible Insulation:

.1 Manson Alley-Wrap, Owens Corning AF 300 Series, Knauf Plain Wrap, Johns Manville Microlite, Roxul Wrap (RW).

.10 Preformed Fitting Covers:

.1 Aluminum Fitting Covers:

.1 0.51 mm [22 ga.] thick, die shaped components with factory applied protective liner on interior surface.

.1 Childers Ell-Jacs, Perma-Ells or Shield-Ells or other as commercially available.

.2 PVC Fitting Covers:

.1 0.50 mm [0.020"] thick premoulded one piece covers.

.1 Certainteed Snapform, Childers, Proto PVC, Speedline PVC, Zeston PVC, Fattal PVC.

.11 Preformed Insulation fittings:

.1 Shur-Fit, Moulded Acoustic Products or from insulation fabricators.

2.4 SCOPE OF INSULATION

.1 Heating Pipe, Fittings and Valves:

.1 Insulate the following systems, unless otherwise noted:

.1 Hot water (glycol) heating supply and return piping.

.2 Trace heated drain lines from freezer and cold rooms.

.2 DO NOT insulate the following, unless otherwise noted:

.1 Relief piping.

.2 Drain lines.

.3 Insulate the following valves and fittings if the pipe is insulated:

.1 Elbows, tees, reducers.

.2 Valve bodies on valves and check valves, over NPS 2-1/2".

.3 Flanges.

.4 Strainers.

.4 The following hot pipe fittings that operate at 60o C [140o F] shall be coated with Thermalite –SG as per manufacturer’s specifications to prevent skin burns:

.1 Valves, NPS 2-1/2" and smaller.

.2 Valve bonnets.

.3 Unions.

.4 Drip legs.

.5 Steam pressure reducing valves.

.6 Steam traps.

.7 Flexible connections.

.8 Expansion joints.

.9 Check valve covers.



.2 Plumbing pipes, fittings, valves:

.1 Insulate the following systems, unless otherwise noted:

.1 Domestic hot water supply (including hot water temperature maintenance tape) (insulation shall cover temperature maintenance cables).

.2 All drains, lines, stacks,* fire standpipes and sprinkler mains in unheated areas (insulation shall cover heat tracing cables).

.3 Water valves, flanges, PRV's, strainers, check valves.

.2 DO NOT insulate the following, unless otherwise noted:

.1 Piping used exclusively for fire protection (unless in unheated spaces).

.2 Soil stacks, vents, etc.,

.3 Unions.

.4 Flexible connections or expansion joints (unless noted on the drawings).

.5 Check valve covers.

.6 Strainer leg and basket covers.

.7 Flexible fixture connections.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 PIPE INSULATION THICKNESS TABLE - MM [INS]

NOMINAL PIPE SIZE (NPS)Service Design

Operating Temperature

Runouts

2 and less

(note 1)

1 and

less11/4 to 2

21/2 to

4

5 and

larger

Refrigerant Suction and Hot Gas

5oC [40oF] or lower

25 [1] 40 [1.5] 40 [1.5] 40 [1.5] 40 [1.5]

Hot Water / Glycol Heating

50-90oC[120-200oF]

25 [1] 25 [1] 25 [1] 40 [1.5] 40 [1.5]

Hot Water / Glycol Heating

96-120oC [205-250oF]

25 [1] 40 [1.5] 40 [1.5] 50 [2] 50 [2]

Domestic Cold Water

5oC [40oF] 25 [1] 25 [1] 25 [1] 25 [1] 25 [1]

Domestic Hot Water Supply

40-70 oC[105-160oF]

25 [1] 25 [1] 25 [1] 40 [1.5] 40 [1.5]

Self Regulated Heater Traced DHW Piping

40-60oC [105-140oF]

25 [1] 40 [1.5] 50 [2] 50 [2] 50 [2]

Buried & Exterior Rainwater Storm Drainage

5oC [40oF] none none None none none

Above Grade Interior Rainwater Storm Drainage

5oC [40oF] 25 [1] 25 [1] 25 [1] 25 [1] 25 [1]

Note 1: Runouts to individual terminal units not to exceed 3.7 m [12 ft] in length.

Note 2: All piping forming part of the HVAC system or plumbing domestic hot water or domestic hot water recirculation piping, and located outside the building envelope (including piping located within unheated areas of the building such as underground parking levels) shall be insulated for the level specified in the Table for steam piping at pressures 334 kPa [121 psig] and greater.



3.2 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING PIPING

.1 Make good all existing insulation disturbed or removed to facilitate alterations and additions to existing piping.

3.3 HEAT TRACED PIPING

.1 All piping, subject to freezing is specified to be heat traced. Insulation shall cover heat tracing. (Freezers and Coolers)

3.4 APPLICATION

.1 Apply insulation to piping only after all tests have been made and systems accepted by Consultant as tight.

.2 Apply insulation and insulation finish in a workmanlike manner so that the finished product is uniform in diameter, smooth in finish, pleasing to the eye and with the longitudinal seams positioned to be concealed from view. Apply piping insulation materials, accessories and finishes in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

.3 On piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger with insulation and vapour barrier, install high density insulation above hanger shield. Insert to be slightly longer than the length of shield. Maintain integrity of vapour barrier over full length of pipe without interruption at sleeves, fittings and supports.

.4 Insulation and vapour barrier shall be continuous through all non-rated separations.

3.5 INSULATION TERMINATION POINTS

.1 Terminate insulation 75 mm [3"] back from all uninsulated fittings to provide working clearance and terminate insulation at 90o and finish with reinforced scrim cloth and vapour barrier mastic system. Cover onto pipe and over the insulation vapour barrier. On concealed hot services terminate insulation 75mm [3"] back from all uninsulated fittings, cut off at 90o and apply reinforced scrim cloth and breather mastic system.

.2 Cut back insulation at 45o and finish with a silicone caulking sealant around the base of thermometer wells, pressure gauges, flow switches and pressure and control sensors.

3.6 VERTICAL RISERS

.1 On vertical pipe over 75 mm [3"] provide insulation supports welded or bolted to pipe, directly above lowest pipe fitting. Thereafter, locate on 4.5 m [15 ft.] centres.

3.7 HOT APPLICATION 26C [80F] TO 200C [400F]

.1 Piping:

.1 Install medium temperature pipe insulation with integral jacket to pipe and hold in place by stapling the flap, with spreading staples at 75 mm [3"] centres. Pipe insulation with integral self-sealing jacket will not require additional fastening.

.2 Install strips of vapour barrier jacket over butt joints and secure with spreading staples.

.2 Fittings:

.1 Insulate fittings, to thickness of adjacent pipe insulation, with sections of the pipe insulation mitred to fit tightly, or with preformed insulation fittings (Shur-Fit) or from insulation fabricator.

.3 Valves, Strainers:

.1 Insulate valve bodies and strainers with fitted pipe insulation, or mitred blocks all to thickness of adjacent pipe insulation or insulate with preformed insulation fittings (Shur-Fit) or from insulation fabricator. Drains, blowoff plugs and caps shall be left uncovered.

.4 Flanges and Victaulic Fittings:



.1 Insulate flanges with oversized pipe insulation or mitred blocks to the thickness of the adjacent pipe insulation. Insulation to overlap adjoining insulation at least 75 mm [3"].

3.8 COLD APPLICATION 10C [50F] AND LESS

.1 Piping:

.1 Install low/medium temperature pipe insulation with integral vapour barrier jacket to pipe and hold in place by securing the jacket flap. Seal all flaps with vapour barrier adhesive. Pipe insulation with integral self-sealing vapour barrier jackets will not require additional fastening.

.2 Install strips of vapour barrier jacket over butt joints with vapour barrier adhesive. Over wrap butt strips by 50 percent for insulation O.D. 300 mm [12”] and above apply strips on 250 mm [10”] centres for additional securement.

.2 Fittings:

.1 Insulate fittings to thickness of adjacent pipe insulation with sections of the pipe insulation mitred to fit tightly, or preformed insulation fittings (Shur-Fit), then apply reinforcing membrane embedded barrier coating and apply finish vapour barrier coating.

.2 Alternatively insulate fittings with tightly placed flexible insulation and apply premoulded 25/50 rated PVC fitting covers. Apply vapour-barrier adhesive and tape on all joints and overlaps.

.3 Valves, Strainers:

.1 Insulate valve bodies, bonnets and strainers with fitted pipe insulation, or mitred blocks all to thickness of adjacent pipe insulation, then apply reinforcing membrane embedded in barrier coating. Alternately, insulate with preformed insulation fittings (Shur-Fit) covered with reinforcing membrane, stapled in place and covered with a barrier coating. Drains, blow-off plugs and caps shall be left uncovered.

.4 Unions, Flange and Victaulic Fittings:

.1 Insulate cold unions and flanges with oversized pipe insulation or mitred blocks to the thickness of the adjacent pipe covering, then apply reinforcing membrane embedded in barrier coating and final coating of vapour barrier mastic.

3.9 ANTI-SWEAT COATING

.1 Coat with an anti-sweat coating - "No Sweat" by Robson Thermal Mfg. Ltd. or approved alternate the following uninsulated cold surfaces:

.1 Connecting surfaces of thermometers, pressure gauges, flow switches, controllers, etc.

.2 The coating thickness shall be as recommended by the coating manufacturer for the system operation conditions.

3.10 PIPE INSULATION FINISHES

.1 "Concealed" insulation in horizontal and vertical service spaces will require no further finish.

.2 "Concealed" pipe insulation in damp locations, e.g. pipe trenches shall have a vapour barrier jacket, vapour sealed.

.3 "Exposed" flexible insulation shall be painted with a heavy brush coating of foam plastic white insulation coating.

.4 "Exposed" insulation inside the building shall be finished as follows:

.5 PVC Jacket Finish:



.1 Over a factory applied integral all-service type jacket on the pipe insulation, apply PVC jacket.

.2 Over insulated fittings apply PVC fitting covers. Over insulated valve bodies, valve bonnets, strainers and flanges apply purchased PVC covers or field fabricate from PVC sheeting secured with solvent bonding cement.

.3 Finish fabric with one (1) coat of fabric coating.

.6 "Exposed" outdoor insulation shall be finished as follows:

.1 Insulation shall have a vapour sealed vapour barrier jacket.

.2 Over the pipe insulation jacket apply aluminum weather protecting jacket. The longitudinal seam shall be located to shed water. Secure the jacket using necessary metal banding on approximately 250 mm (10”) centres and at the overlaps. Screws are not permitted on cold operating systems, since they will penetrate the vapour barrier.

.3 Over insulated fittings, valve bodies, valve bonnets, strainers and flanges apply metal jacket or preformed metal fittings to provide a complete jacket system. Secure with necessary fastenings.

.4 Seal all outdoor jacketing watertight.

3.11 REFRIGERATION SUCTION PIPING OUTSIDE BUILDING

.1 Install flexible foamed elastomeric or flexible closed cell preformed piping insulation. Secure longitudinal and butt joints with adhesive. Insulate all fittings and components. To obtain the specified thickness, apply in layers with staggered joints.

.2 Finish with flexible elastomeric or flexible closed cell insulation coating.

3.12 INSULATION PACKING OF PIPE SLEEVES

.1 Tightly pack the space between all pipe sleeves and pipe or between pipe sleeve and pipe insulation with mineral wool insulation, Apply fire stop compound to prevent transmission of sound and/or passage of fire/smoke.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK



.1 The commissioning shall be executed in accordance with the intent of:

.1 ASHRAE Standard 202 - The Commissioning Process for Buildings and Systems.

.2 ASHRAE/NIBS Guideline 0 - The Commissioning Process

.3 ASHRAE Guideline 1.1 - HVAC&R Technical Requirements For The Commissioning Process

.4 ASHRAE Guideline 1.3 - Building Operations and Maintenance Training for The HVAC&R Commissioning Process

.5 ASHRAE Guideline 1.4 - Procedures for Preparing Facility Systems Manuals

.2 For list of acceptable Commissioning Agencies, refer to Section 23 99 66.


.1 Be responsible for the performance and commissioning of all systems and equipment supplied under the Sections of Division 21, 22, 23 and 25.

.2 Commissioning is the process of advancing the installation from the stage of static completion to full working order in accordance with the contract documents and design intent. It is the activation of the completed installation.

.3 In consultation with the General Contractor, ensure that sufficient time is allowed and fully identified on the construction schedule for the proper commissioning of all mechanical systems

1.4 COMMISSIONING AND DEMONSTRATION

.1 Submit a schedule for the commissioning phase of the work. This schedule shall show:

.1 Equipment start-up schedule.

.2 Submission dates for the various documents required prior to substantial completion.

.3 Timing of the various phases of the commissioning, testing, balancing and demonstration process.

.2 Commissioning is concluded when air and water systems have been balanced and the installation is in full working order and acceptable for use. The work will include the following:

.1 Balancing of the air systems as specified in this section.

.2 Balancing of the liquid systems as specified in this section.

.3 Set up air diffusers, registers and grilles for optimum distribution/comfort.

.4 Set up constant volume and variable volume fans.

.5 Adjust mixing boxes and air valves as necessary.

.6 Plug all air pressure and flow measuring holes.

.7 Adjust vibration isolators and earthquake restraints for optimum performance.

.8 Verification and certification of the sealing of all HVAC penetrations through fire separations (rated & non-rated) and sound separations. Forms in Section 23 99 60 shall be used for this purpose.


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS



.9 Verification of water tightness of all roof and exterior wall penetrations.

.10 Verification that all coil drain pans operate.

.11 Set up all automatic control valves/dampers and automatic temperature control devices.

.12 Testing and debugging of B.M.S. (Building Management System).

.13 Set up and test all alarm and protective devices.

.14 Power failure test with emergency generator start-up.

.15 Calibration and adjustment of the smoke venting and pressurization systems.

.16 At the conclusion of commissioning, demonstrate the operation of the systems to the Consultant and then to the Owner's Operating Staff. For demonstration and instruction to Operating staff requirements, refer to this section of the specification and also to Division 25.

.3 The verification process shall include the demonstration of the following:

.1 The ease of access that has been provided throughout for servicing coils, motors, drives, fusible link fire dampers, smoke dampers, control dampers and damper operators.

.2 Location of and opening and closing of all access panels.

.3 Operation of all automatic control dampers and automatic temperature control devices.

.4 Operation of all alarm and protective devices.

.5 Proper response of all mixing boxes and air valves to thermostats and volume adjustment controls.

.6 Operation of all smoke dampers and all smoke pressurization and removal provisions.

.7 Operability of randomly selected fire dampers.

.8 Noise level from typical mixing boxes and air valves under extreme operating conditions.

.9 Operation of all equipment and systems under each mode of operating, and failure, including:

.1 B.M.S. (Building Management System) control features.

.2 Packaged air conditioners.

.3 Refrigeration systems.

.4 Fans.

.5 Coils.

.4 At the completion of the commissioning, testing, balancing and demonstration submit the following to the Consultant:

.1 A letter certifying that all work specified under this contract is complete, clean and operational in accordance with the specification and drawings.

.2 Completed copies of all commissioning check lists plus copies of start-up reports from specialty contractors and vendors.

.3 "AS-BUILT" record drawings, as specified.

.4 A list of all alarm and protective devices tested, with the final operating settings.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 23 21 13543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 HYDRONIC PIPINGNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 12


Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


.2 Refer to Section 23 05 49 for required seismic restraint of piping.


.1 Do all piping system work in accordance with ASME/ANSI B31.9 code and CSA B51.


.1 All components, products and fabrication techniques shall be provided in compliance with the Regulations and Requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.

.2 Installation of, and repair or alterations to, pressure piping systems shall be performed only by licensed Contractors and licensed Welders, certified for the work being done in accordance with the Regulations and Requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.

.3 All field welding to be in accordance with the procedures of CSA-W117.2 and the current edition of ASME/ANSI B31.1 or B31.9 Code.

.4 All grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer. (Combining products of multiple manufacturers is not permitted.) Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components.

.1 The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified.

.2 All coupling, fitting, and valve (body and component) castings shall be date stamped for quality assurance and traceability.

.3 Gaskets shall be molded and produced by the coupling manufacturer.

.1 EPDM elastomer materials shall be developed, manufactured, and tested in the coupling manufacturer’s facility. The EPDM shall be a proprietary blend that exceeds industry standards for performance over the long term.

.2 The coupling manufacturer’s gasket development and production shall be periodically audited by quality and polymer industry professionals.

.4 All grooved joint products shall comply with CSA B242.


.1 Pipe Fittings:

.1 Piping systems 860 kPa [125 psig] or less operating pressure - 860 kPa [125 psig] rating.

.2 Valves:

.1 Suitable for maximum system operating temperature and pressure.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit detailed shop drawings of valves in accordance with Section 23 05 00. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate valve make, model, location, type, size and pressure rating and Provincial CRN number.

.2 Grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be shown on drawings and product submittals and shall be specifically identified with the applicable style or series designation.



Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL

.1 All products shall be registered with the regulatory authority in accordance with CSA B51.

2.2 PIPE

.1 Steel Pipe:

.1 12mm [1/2”] to 50mm [2”]: ASTM A795.

.2 65mm [2.5”] to 250mm [10”]: Schedule 40 to ASTM A53 Grade B

.3 300mm [12”] and over: 9.5 mm [0.375"] wall thickness to ASTM A53 Grade B.

.4 for the following systems:

.1 Glycol heating

.2 Copper Pipe: to ASTM B88, Type K, or L hard drawn copper tubing.

.1 Type L, hard drawn:

.1 Pressure drains 50mm [2”] and under.

.2 Type K, hard drawn:

.1 Air vent overflow where exposed.

.3 Type K, soft drawn:

.1 Air vent overflow where concealed.

2.3 PIPE JOINTS - STEEL PIPING

.1 50mm [2”] and under: screwed fittings, except where otherwise noted, with teflon tape and rectroseal teflon paste or pipe dope.

.2 65mm [2.5”] and over: welding fittings and flanges to CSA W47.1.

.3 Flanges: raised face, steel weld neck, lap or back-welded slip on type. Use flat face for attachment to cast iron valves.

.4 Flange Bolts and Nuts, carbon steel: to ANSI B18.2.1 and ANSI B18.2.2.

.5 Flange gaskets:

.1 860 kPa [125 psig] system pressure and under: non-asbestos gaskets for mating surfaces.

.2 Over 860 kPa [125 psig] system pressure: stainless steel spiral wound non-asbestos gaskets.

2.4 PIPE FITTINGS - STEEL PIPE

.1 Pipe fittings, screwed, flanged or welded:

.1 Cast iron pipe flanges: Class 125 to ANSI B16.1.

.2 Cast iron screwed fittings: Class 125 to ANSI B16.3.

.3 Steel pipe flanges and flanged fittings: to ANSI B16.5.

.4 Steel butt-welding fittings: to ANSI B16.9a.

.5 Unions, malleable iron ground joint type: Class 150 to ANSI B16.3.

.2 Fittings for roll grooved piping: -Ductile iron to ASTM 536; wrought steel to ASTM A234; or where cast or wrought pattern is not available factory fabricated and tested to ASTM A53.

.1 Fittings shall be of the same manufacturer as the adjoining couplings.

2.5 PIPE JOINTS - COPPER PIPE

.1 All sizes, soldered or brazed as specified in “EXECUTION”.

.2 50mm [2”] to 200mm [8”]: Victaulic Style 606 rigid copper couplings with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads and flush seal gasket grade "EPDM" gasket for temperature range -



34oC [-30oF] to 110oC [230oF] may be used on chilled water, domestic water and condenser water systems.

.1 Manufactured to copper-tube dimensions. (Flaring of tube or fitting ends to accommodate IPS sized couplings is not permitted.)

2.6 PIPE FITTINGS - COPPER PIPE

.1 Cast bronze: to ANSI B16.18.

.2 Wrought copper and bronze: to ANSI B16.22.

.3 Roll grooved (non-flared) fittings by Victaulic “Copper Connection” manufactured to copper tube dimensions.

2.7 FLANGES - COPPER PIPE

.1 Brass or bronze: to ANSI B16.15.

.2 Cast iron: to ANSI B16.4.

.3 Victaulic Style 641 Flange Adapter.

2.8 VALVES GENERAL

.1 Wherever possible all valves shall be of one manufacturer.

.1 Grooved valves shall be of the same manufacturer as the adjoining couplings.

.2 Provide valves with manufacturer's name and pressure rating clearly marked on outside of body. All valves must be suitable in all respects for service used.

.3 All valves shall have a Provincial CRN number which is current.

.4 Include lock shield handles where shown or noted.

.5 Provide valves located more than 2100 mm [7 ft] from floor in equipment room areas with chain operated sheaves. Extend chains to 1800 mm [6 ft] above floor and hook to clips arranged to clear walking aisles.

.6 Use non-rising stem valves where there is insufficient clearance for stem to rise.

.7 Where butterfly valves are installed to permit removal of equipment, they shall be of the threaded full lug type or grooved if grooved system is used. They may be of the wafer type if an additional pair of flanges (not those installed to contain the valve) are installed.

2.9 GATE VALVES

.1 50mm [2"] and under: screwed:

.1 Bronze body, rising stem, solid wedge disc, union or screwed bonnet.


.1 Class 125 [860 kPa] - Crane 1700, Grinnell 3010, Kitz 24, Nibco T-134, Red-White/Toyo 293

.2 50mm [2"] and under: soldered:

.1 Bronze body, rising stem, solid wedge disc, screwed bonnet.


.1 Class 200 W.O.G. [1380 kPa] - Crane 1700S, Grinnell 3080SJ, Kitz 44, Nibco S-134, Red-White/Toyo 299.

.3 65mm [2.5"] and over:

.1 Flanged, cast iron body, rising stem, O.S. & Y, solid wedge disc, bronze trim, bolted bonnet.


.1 Class 125 [860 kPa] - Crane 465-1/2, Grinnell 6020A, Kitz 72, Nibco F-617-0, Red-White/Toyo 421A.



2.10 GLOBE VALVES


.1 Bronze body, rising stem, renewable composition or bronze disc, union bonnet.


.1 Class 125 [860 kPa] - Crane 1703, Grinnell 3240, Kitz 03, Nibco T-235-Y, Red-White/Toyo 220


.1 Bronze body, rising stem, renewable composition or bronze disc, screwed bonnet.


.1 Class 200 W.O.G. [1380 kPa] - Crane 1703S, Grinnell 3240SJ, Kitz 10, Nibco S-211-YW, Red-White/Toyo 212.

2.11 BUTTERFLY VALVES

.1 65mm [2.5”] and over:

.1 Ductile iron body with bronze disc, stainless steel stems and extended neck to clear minimum of 50 mm [2"] thick insulation.

.2 Threaded full lug type or wafer type (with or without integral flanges).

.3 Resilient EPT or EPDM seat.

.4 Operators (unless otherwise specified in the Controls Section):

.1 200mm [8”] and under: lever handle with minimum 10 position ratchet and disc position indicator.

.2 250mm [10”] and over: worm gear operator.


.1 Class 125 [860 kPa] W.O.G. – Center Line, Crane, Demco, Dezurik, Grinnell, Keystone, Kitz, Nibco WD-2100 or LD-2100, Norriseal, Red-White/Toyo


.1 Class 200 [1380 kPa] W.O.G. –, Crane, Demco, Dezurik, Grinnell, Keystone, Kitz, Nibco WD-2100 or LD-2100, Norriseal, Red-White/Toyo

.2 65mm [2.5”] and over: - roll grooved piping:

.1 65mm [2.5”] to 300mm [12”]:

.1 Ductile iron body with electroless-nickel coated ductile iron, aluminum-bronze, or stainless steel disc.-

.2 Pressure responsive elastomer seat. -

.3 416 stainless steel stem. (Stem shall be offset from the disc centerline to provide full 360-degree circumferential seating.) -

.4 Grooved ends.

.5 Operators (unless otherwise specified in the Controls Section):

.1 200mm [8”] and under: lever handle with minimum 10 position ratchet and disc position indicator.

.2 250mm [10”] and over: worm gear operator.


.1 2065 kPa [300 psig] C.W.P. - Victaulic MasterSeal.

.2 350mm [14”] to 600mm [24”]:

.1 Ductile iron body with PPS (polyphenylene sulfide) coated ductile iron disc.



.2 Disc mounted elastomer seal.

.3 17-4PH stainless steel stem. (Stem shall be offset from the disc centerline to provide full 360-degree circumferential seating.)

.4 Victaulic ‘AGS’ grooved ends.

.5 Operators (unless otherwise specified in the Controls Section): Gear operator.


.1 2065 kPa [300 psig] C.W.P. – Victaulic AGS-Vic300.

2.12 BALL VALVES


.1 Forged brass body, threaded cap, chrome plated ball, PTFE seats, blow out proof stem.

.2 Ball valves for isolation service shall have a large/full port.

.3 Ball valves for balancing service shall have a reduced port and valve handle shall have a memory stop.

.4 Standard of Acceptance: Class 600 W.O.G. [4140 kPa] - Crane F9202, Grinnell 3700, Kitz 58, Nibco T-585-70, Red-White/Toyo 5044A, Victaulic 722.


.1 Forged brass body, threaded cap, chrome plated ball, PTFE seats.

.2 Ball valves for isolation service shall have a large/full port.

.3 Ball valves for balancing service shall have a reduced port and valve handle shall have a memory stop.

.4 Standard of Acceptance: Class 500 W.O.G. [3450 kPa] - Crane F9222, Grinnell 3700SJ, Kitz 59, Nibco S-585-70, Red-White/Toyo 5049A.

2.13 BALANCE FITTINGS AND PLUG VALVES

.1 32mm [1-1/4”] and under:

.1 Bronze body and bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition disc, globe type with memory stop, Lockshield, male union connection, angle and straight type.

.2 Standard of Acceptance: Class 100 [690 kPa] - Dahl 13000-M series, Toyo 250 or 251.

.2 40mm [1.5”] and over:

.1 Up to 50mm [2"]: screwed

.2 65mm [2.5”] and over: flanged

.3 Cast iron body, non-lubricated eccentric plug with resilient coating EPT or RS 55, suitable for 121oC [250oF] operating temperature, stainless steel bearings, adjustable memory stop, plug type suitable for wrench adjustment.

.4 Standard of Acceptance: Class 175 W.O.G. [1210 kPa] - DeZurik 400, Keystone Ballcentric.

.3 80mm [3”] and over:


.1 Victaulic Vic-Plug Valve Series 377.

2.14 AUTOMATIC FLOW LIMITING VALVES

.1 General: Devices shall automatically limit the rated flow quantity between differential pressure ranges of 14 to 310 kPa [2 to 45 psig].

.2 50mm [2"] and under:



.1 Body shall be forged brass ASTM B283 Class 600 W0G, 163oC [325oF].

.2 Return from coil: (downstream side of Temperature Control Valve); Combination assembly including:

.1 Body fitted with ball shut off valve, hard chrome plated, Teflon Ball Seals and Viton O-Rings.

.2 Flow limiting cartridge shall be accessible non-clogging piston type with + 5% accuracy.

.3 Two P/T Plugs, union for accepting temperature control valve (by controls contractor).

.3 Return from coil: (upstream side of Temperature Control Valve); Combination assembly including:

.1 Full port union with manual air vent and P/T test plug.

.4 Supply to coil; Combination assembly including:

.1 Ball valve, strainer P/T test plug and blow down drain valve.

.3 65mm [2-1/2”] and larger:

.1 Body shall be epoxy coated ductile iron ASTM A536 2758 kPa [400 psig] 177C [350F].

.2 Flow cartridges 304 SS moving parts in brass housing, 14 to 310 kPa (2 to 45 psig) 1.9 to 144 l/s (30 to 2282 USgpm)

.3 P/T Plugs, thermometer well and drain.

.4 Provide a dual hose temperature/pressure meter kit with flow conversion chart and carrying case.


.1 Delta, Griswold, Belimo

2.15 CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVES

.1 50mm [2"] and under: copper alloy body, screwed, 'Y' pattern globe.

.2 65mm [2-1/2”] and larger: cast iron body, flanged or grooved, 'Y' pattern globe.

.3 Maximum pressure 1715 kPa [250 psig] and maximum temperature 121oC [250oF].

.4 Calibrated balancing valve with memory, positive shut-off, inlet and outlet pressure measuring connections with integral shut-offs and drains.

.5 Calibration charts and adjustment tools to be included.

.6 Provide one (1) differential pressure meter kit suitable for direct readout c/w connection hoses suitable for the system pressure.


.1 Victaulic/Tour & Andersson: STAD (to 50mm [2”]) or STAF/STAG (65mm [2-1/2”] and larger), Nexus, Armstrong

2.16 SWING CHECK VALVES


.1 Bronze body, bronze swing disc, screw in cap, regrindable seat.


.1 Class 125 [860 kPa] - Crane 1707, Grinnell 3300, Kitz 22, Nibco T-413-B, Red-White/Toyo 236


.1 Bronze body, bronze swing disc, screw in cap, regrindable.


.1 Class 200 W.O.G. [1380 kPa] - Crane 1707S, Grinnell 3300SJ, Kitz 23,



Nibco S-413-B, Red-White/Toyo 237.

.3 65mm [2-1/2”] and larger: grooved:

.1 Ductile iron body, EPDM seat, stainless steel swing disc, coupled cap.

.2 Standard of Acceptance: 2065 kPa [300 psig] – Victaulic Series 712.

.4 65mm [2-1/2”] and larger: flanged:

.1 Cast iron body, renewable or regrindable seat, bronze swing disc, bolted cap.

.2 Standard of Acceptance: Class 125 [860 kPa] - Crane 373, Grinnell 6300A, Kitz 78, Nibco F-918, Red-White/Toyo 435A.

2.17 SILENT CHECK VALVES (SPRING TYPE)


.1 Bronze body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, (heavy duty spring in vertical down flow application)

.2 Standard of Acceptance: Class 125 [860 kPa] – Conbraco 61-500, Durabla, Grinnell 3600, Mueller 303AP

.2 65mm [2-1/2”] and larger:

.1 Cast ductile iron, grooved end type, with stainless steel spring and shaft, for vertical or horizontal installation.

.1 65mm [2-1/2”] and 80mm [3”]: Aluminum bronze single disc, with disc mounted elastomer seal and PPS coated seat.

.1 2065 kPa [300 psig]: Victaulic Series 716 or 717(UL/FMG).

.2 Cast steel, wafer style, bronze trim, stainless steel spring (heavy duty spring in vertical down flow application).

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Class 125 [860 kPa] - Apco, Centerline, Durabla, Duo-Chek II, Nibco W-910, Moygro or . Mueller 71

2.18 COMBINATION BALANCE/CHECK VALVES

.1 Integrated shut off, non-slam check valve and balance valve.

.2 Suitable for 2065 kPa [300 psig] and 110oC [230oF].

.3 Cast iron body, stainless steel trim, bronze seat and disc.

.4 Connections:

.1 50mm [2"] and under: screwed.

.2 65mm [2-1/2”] and larger: flanged

.5 Select for system flow rate, and allowable pressure drop at a velocity not exceeding 1.8 m/s (6 fps).

.6 Standard of Acceptance: Armstrong Flo Trex, Bell & Gossett Triple Duty, Taco Multi-purpose, Victaulic triple service valves.

2.19 NEEDLE VALVES

.1 Bronze body, screwed, globe type with cadmium plated steel stem.


.1 Class 400 [2760 kPa] - Crane 88/89, RP&C 60-100.

.3 Application: Install needle valves where petcocks or manual vents are indicated.

2.20 DRAIN VALVES

.1 Globe type, bronze body with bronze trim and composition disc.


.1 Crane 1703, Dahl 2343, Kitz 03, Nibco T-235-Y, Red-White/Toyo 220

.2 Brass ball valve with forged brass cap and chain, 20mm [3/4”] male threaded hose end,



lockshield in public areas. Working pressure 1724 kPa [250 psig] to 121oC [250oF].


.1 Crane F9202CC, DAHL #50-430 [50.430LS], Kitz 68AC, Red-White / Toyo 5046.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 PIPING

.1 Ream pipe ends. Clean scale and dirt, inside and outside before and after assembly. Remove welding slag or other foreign material from piping.

.2 During construction, protect all openings in piping and equipment, by capping or plugging to prevent entry of dirt.

.3 Screw, or weld, fittings (unless otherwise specified) for all piping systems up to 50mm [2”].

.4 Weld or Victaulic groove (unless otherwise specified) all piping systems 65mm [2.5”] and over.

.5 Install piping to conserve headroom and space. Run exposed piping parallel to walls. Group piping wherever practical.

.6 Avoid piping in exterior walls unless otherwise directed. If required, install this piping protected from the outside by the building insulation and vapour barrier.

.7 Maintain a minimum of 25 mm [1"] space between adjacent flanges or pipe insulation, whichever has the larger diameter.

.8 Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access for maintenance of equipment, valves and fittings.

.9 Saddle type branch fittings may be used on mains, if branch line is half size or smaller than main. Hole saw or drill and ream main to maintain full inside diameter of branch line prior to welding saddle.

.1 Victaulic Style 920/920N Mechanical Tee fittings may be used in applicable sizes in lieu of saddle-branch fittings. (Victaulic Style 622 may be used on hard copper tubing.) Use a Victaulic ‘HCT’ series tool for pipe preparation.

.10 Use long radius elbows. Victaulic #10 or W10 standard radius elbows may be used in lieu of long radius elbows in grooved piping systems in equipment rooms and where space considerations must be made.

.11 Install all thermometer wells and immersion sensor wells specified under the Controls Section. Where wells will restrict flow in small diameter pipes (40mm [1.5”] and smaller) install a section of oversized pipe at least 50mm [2”].

.12 Remake leaking joints using new materials, do not caulk or cement leaking threaded joints.

.13 Use eccentric reducers at pipe size changes, flush on top side, to permit positive venting and drainage.

.14 Do not use thread protection couplings, close nipples, running nipples or street elbows.

.15 Install dielectric type unions or flanges or Victaulic Style 47 Clearflow Dielectric Waterways on "OPEN" type systems, where copper piping connects to steel. eg. domestic hot water tanks.

.16 Avoid locating water and drain piping over electrical equipment. Where this is unavoidable, provide galvanized drip pans under such pipe and weld piping and fittings. Provide drain and piping from drip pans to satisfactory floor drain.

.17 Bull head tees shall not be used for converging flows.



3.2 PIPE GRADING

.1 Grade all piping to provide positive drainage and venting. Slope as follows:

.1 Supply mains and branches - up in the direction of flow, minimum 1:480 [1" in 40 ft].

.2 Return mains and branches - down in the direction of flow, minimum 1:480 [1" in 40 ft].

.3 Reverse return supply and return mains - up in the direction of flow, minimum 1:480 [1" in 40 ft.].

.4 Grade horizontal drainage and vent piping down in direction of flow, 2% minimum.

.5 On closed system, equip low points with 20 mm [3/4”] drain valves. Provide, at high points on lines and on equipment connections, collecting chambers and high capacity float operated air vents.

3.3 SOLDERING AND BRAZING

.1 Pressure fluid systems - with chemical treatment (heating, chilled and condenser water) BRAZE with silver base brazing alloy, 538oC [1000oF] melting point.

.2 Pressure fluid systems - without chemical treatment, (heat recovery, domestic water) SOLDER with 95/5 tin-antimony.

.3 Non-pressure systems, (drains) SOLDER with 50/50 tin lead.

.4 Piping connections to radiant ceiling panels, SOLDER with 95/5 tin-antimony.

3.4 GROOVED JOINT PIPING

.1 Grooved joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s latest published installation instructions.

.2 Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove.

.3 Gaskets shall be of an elastomer grade suitable for the intended service, and shall be molded and produced by the coupling manufacturer.

.4 The grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained representative shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving tools and installation of grooved joint products.

.1 The representative shall periodically visit the jobsite and review contractor is following best recommended practices in grooved product installation. (A distributor’s representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training or jobsite visit(s).)

3.5 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT AND TO EXISTING PIPING

.1 Install unions, grooved couplings, or flanges at connections to all equipment and specialty components and at all connecting points to existing systems which, for reasons of separation for testing, will require to be blank flanged or capped.

.2 Install removable sections of pipe or 300 mm [12"] spool pieces on the suction side of end suction pumps and where required for ease of maintenance.

.3 Connect to equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instruction unless otherwise noted.

.4 Arrange piping connections to allow ease of access and for removal of equipment.

.5 Align and independently support piping connections adjacent to equipment to prevent piping stresses being transferred.

.6 Do not reduce equipment connection sizes by bushing.

.7 Branch connections to existing steel piping may be made using double strap service



saddles - Smith Blair #313 or Dresser #91.

.8 Connections to existing copper piping systems may be made using Victaulic Series 606 or mechanical type couplings (flair or union types) provided they are compatible with the existing system's operating and test pressures and temperatures.

.9 When connecting to an existing antifreeze system, the antifreeze solution shall be drained into temporary storage tanks. Do not drain into sanitary / storm system.

3.6 DRAIN CONNECTIONS

.1 Pipe the discharge from all liquid relief valves, liquid safety valves, high capacity air vents, steam drip pan elbows, equipment blowdowns, water columns, overflows and piping system drains to the nearest building drain. Install a brass, bronze or copper receiving funnel on the drain where shown.

.2 Drains from drain pans shall be DWV copper ASTM B306 32 mm [1-1/4"] minimum size.

.3 Drain and vent piping shall be of the same material as the piping system to which it is connected, except where otherwise specified.

.4 Where item being drained is under pressure, provide a deep seal trap.

3.7 EXPANSION OF PIPING

.1 Install all piping systems with due regard and provision for expansion avoiding strain or damage to equipment and building. Pay particular attention to piping running horizontal across building expansion joints and provide adequate expansion and contraction for all such piping.

.2 Only major expansion configuration and fittings have been shown on the drawings. Provide all required additional compensators, loops and swing connections.

.3 Provide anchors, where shown. Anchors shall be fabricated from mild steel plate and structural steel angle and channel sections, in accordance with ANSI B.31.

.4 Expansion loops shall be of all welded construction with long radius elbows.

.5 Install expansion loops, cold sprung 50% of the calculated expansion.

.6 Install at least three [3] elbows in all branch connections. Where space does not permit 3 elbows, install braided flexible pipe connectors in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Three [3] elbow branch connections shall have sufficient developed length to ensure that excessive stresses are not generated in the piping and in no case less than 900 mm [36"].

.7 For water systems, use adequate numbers of Victaulic Style 77 flexible couplings in header piping to accommodate thermal growth and contraction, and for the elimination of expansion loops. (In accordance with Victaulic instructions and as approved by the engineer.) Where expansion loops are required, use Victaulic Style 77 couplings on the loops.

3.8 VALVES

.1 Install valves with stems upright or angled 45 degrees above horizontal unless approved otherwise.

.2 Install control valves with their stems upright unless approved otherwise and with adequate clearance for removal of actuators.

.3 Use gate valves or (ball valves for 50mm [2”] and under) to shut off branch takeoffs and to isolate equipment.

.4 Butterfly valves may be used as an alternative to gate valves on chilled water, condenser water, hot water heating, heat pump and glycol heat recovery systems.

.5 Use globe valves to control flow in circuits; except, where balancing cocks are specifically specified.

.6 Use plug type globe valves in control valve bypass connections.



.7 Use plug cocks for balance valves in water return branch mains and branch connections to return mains and for shut off and balancing on glycol circuits.

.8 Install balance fittings or valves in the return piping connections to each terminal heating and cooling unit - eg. radiators, unit heaters, fan coil units, heating and cooling coils.

.9 Install radiator valves in the supply connections to each convection heating element.

.10 Provide isolation valves in all systems such that floor by floor for horizontal systems, all risers in a vertical system and zone areas on a large horizontal system can be isolated.

.11 Provide valves upstream of all meters, gauges, automatic air vents, etc. for isolation purposes.

.12 Use swing or spring loaded check valves, in horizontal and vertical upflow pipes and on the discharge of pumps. Spring loaded water check valves shall be located 8 pipe diameters downstream of pumps or elbows.

.13 Use silent check valves where specifically shown in vertical pipes with downward flow.

3.9 DRAIN VALVES

.1 Install drain valves at each low point in the piping system and at specific drain locations shown on the drawings.

.2 Install 20mm [3/4”] drain valves at all downfed terminal heating and/or cooling units.

.3 Install 40mm [1.5”] or 20mm [3/4”] on line sizes less than 40mm [1.5”] drain valves at all low points in the piping systems to facilitate draining.

.4 Install a hose end adaptor on the discharge side of each drain valve, or pipe to drain where indicated.

.5 Use a 40mm [1.5”] hose and connect it to the discharge side of the drain valves, to flush the piping system during the pipe cleaning process.

.6 Install brass caps with restraining chains, on hose end adaptors, in public areas.

3.10 PIPING TESTS

.1 Notify the Consultant and the Inspection Authority having jurisdiction, 48 hours in advance of intended test dates.

.2 Before testing piping, isolate all equipment, which cannot withstand the test pressure.

.3 Do not insulate, backfill or conceal until tests have been completed and approved by the inspection authorities.

.4 Examine all systems under test for leaks.

.5 Joints shall remain dry during the test. A general sweating around a weld shall be reason for rejection.

.6 Remake all leaking connections and joints.

.7 Tests shall be limited to new piping only.

.8 New connections to existing piping shall be warranted.

.9 Initial Hydrostatic test:

.1 150% of working pressure, but not less than 860 kPa [125 psig] for 1 working day.

.10 Final Hydrostatic test:

.1 150% of working pressure, after piping connections to all equipment are complete, maintain until all parts of piping systems have been inspected.

3.11 WELDING TESTS

.1 Provide x-ray inspection of 10% of all welds on High Pressure steam mains.

.2 The welded joints in piping shall be gamma ray radiographed by a specialized firm. Radiography shall be performed in accordance with Article 3 of Section 5 of the ASME



Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and CGSB-48-GP-2.

.3 Radiograph over full circumference.

.4 Radiographs shall be interpreted by the Consultant and representative of firm carrying out radiographing.

.5 Replace welds of poor or doubtful quality at Contractor's expense.

.6 In the event of weld rejection, the Owner has the right to insist on further testing at the Contractor's cost. Repairs will also be at the Contractor's cost.

.7 Leave welds uncovered until inspected and approved by the Consultant or Boiler Inspection Branch.

3.12 FLUSHING AND CLEANING

.1 After completion of all piping tests, clean and flush all piping systems to remove all internal dirt, millscale, rust, piping dope, pipe reamings and slag. On completion of flushing, remove, clean and reinstall all strainer baskets.

3.13 CHEMICAL TREATMENT

.1 Chemically treat water systems in accordance with Section 23 25 00.

3.14 TESTING AND BALANCING

.1 Balance all piping systems in accordance with the requirements of Section 23 05 93.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 HYDRONIC SPECIALITIES



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK

.1 This Section of the specification forms part of the Contract Documents and is to be read, interpreted and coordinated with all other parts.


.1 The provision of all specialty components shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31 Codes for Building Services Piping.


.1 All water specialty components shall be provided in compliance with the Regulations and Requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.


.1 Piping systems 860 kPa [125 psig] or less operating pressure - 860 kPa [125 psig] rating.

Part 2 Products

2.1 AIR VENTS MANUAL - RADIATOR TYPE

.1 Needle Type

.1 Bronze or steel body, screwed, needle valve.

.2 Manual key operator.

.3 860 kPa [125 psig] maximum operating pressure and 121oC [250oF] maximum operating temperature.

.4 Standard of Acceptance: Maid-O-Mist 816.

2.2 FLEXIBLE HOSE ASSEMBLIES

.1 Scope: For connecting to air valve reheat coils.

.2 EPDM rubber inner core, stainless steel exterior braid, steel crimp ferrules and brass or bichromate steel threaded ends.

.3 End connections are male solid NPT one end and male swivel NPT on the other end.

.4 Suitable for hot water applications up to 110 o C [230o F].

.5 Standard of Acceptance: Unisource Manufacturing Inc. H-P Flex.

2.3 STRAINERS

.1 NPS 2 and under: bronze body, screwed connections.

.2 NPS 2-1/2 and over: cast iron body, flanged connections.

.3 NPS 2 and over: Y or T type strainer with grooved ends with ductile iron body (to NPS 12) or-factory-fabricated steel body (NPS 14 to 24).

.4 Suitable for maximum system operating pressure. Where system pressure exceeds 860 kPa [125 psig], use 2065 kPa [300 psig] strainer bodies.

.5 Basket Screen:

.1 Stainless steel perforated screen.

.2 35 holes/cm2, 1.2 mm dia. perforations, 36% open area.



.5 2.5 holes/ cm2, 5.2 mm dia. perforations, 57% open area.


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 HYDRONIC SPECIALITIES



.6 Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic Series 732 (Y-type) or W730 (T-type) for all grooved end strainers; or Spirax/Sarco (flanged), Muleller 315M or 758, Kitz 15 or 80, Red-White/Toyo 380 0r 318A.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 AIR VENTS MANUAL RADIATOR TYPE

.1 Install manual/automatic low capacity air vents on the return side of each water heating/cooling terminal element installed above the connection mains piping.

.2 Fit air vent on top of an air collecting chamber of 20mm [3/4”] pipe, 150 mm [6"] high.

.3 Arrange air vents so that screwdriver slots or key openings are easily accessible.

.4 Drill access holes through radiation enclosures, where necessary.

.5 Do not use this style of air vent for glycol systems.

3.2 COMBINATION BALANCE/CHECK VALVES

.1 Install combination stop/balance/check valves and valve assemblies on the discharge of centrifugal pumps where shown on the drawings and/or where scheduled.

.2 Install in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

.3 Minimum 5 pipe diameters from pump connections.

3.3 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS

.1 Install convoluted and arched pipe connectors, for misalignment connections, where shown on the drawings.

.2 Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

.3 Three Victaulic Style 77 couplings may be used in lieu of a flexible connector for vibration attenuation and stress relief. The couplings shall be placed in close proximity to the source of the vibration.

3.4 FLOW CONTROL VALVES - AUTOMATIC

.1 Install automatic flow control valves where shown on the drawings in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Hand over temperature/pressure meter kit and calibration charts to the Owner's representative, at substantial performance and obtain receipt.

3.5 CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVES

.1 Install flow measuring balancing valves where shown on the drawings in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Hand over differential pressure meter kit and calibration charts to the Owner's representative, at substantial performance and obtain receipt.

3.6 STRAINERS

.1 Install pipe line strainers where shown on the drawings.

.2 Provide isolation valves on either side of the strainer to permit cleaning without draining the system.

.3 Blowdown connections:

.1 Strainers, 50mm [2”] and under - hot services: nipple and cap.

.2 Strainers, 65mm [2.5”] and over - hot services: nipple, globe valve and nipple.

.3 Strainers, all sizes - cold services: plug.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 23 23 00543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 REFRIGERANT PIPINGNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 7


Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK

.1 This section of the specification forms part of the Contract Documents and is to be read, interpreted and coordinated with all other parts.


.1 Do refrigeration system work in accordance with latest version of B.C. Power Engineers and Pressure Vessels Safety Act and Regulations ("Refrigeration Code"), CSA B52 and ANSI B31.5.

1.3 PERMITS AND QUALIFICATIONS

.1 Ensure that a permit is obtained before anyone commences to install or alter any refrigeration system.

.2 Every person who installs or makes alterations or repairs to a refrigeration system shall be the holder of a valid and subsisting refrigeration contractor’s license and all persons repairing equipment with ODS/CFC's shall have completed an Environment Canada approved training program.

1.4 WARRANTY

.1 Contractor hereby warrants that refrigerant piping system loss of refrigerant will be in accordance with GC24, but for 5 years.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Refrigeration trade shall prepare an electrical control schematic for each type of system (product refrigeration only) and submit shop drawings for review.

1.6 ELECTRICAL WIRING

.1 Refrigeration trade shall carry out and be responsible for all refrigeration control wiring unless otherwise noted, including all line voltage wiring from disconnect switch to units.

.2 Refrigeration trade shall provide electric heating tracer cable on drain lines in all cold rooms with temperatures below 1.7oC [35oF].

.3 Power wiring to units to be by the Electrical Contractor.

Part 2 Products

2.1 REFRIGERANT TUBING

.1 Provide processed tubing for refrigeration installation, deoxidized, dehydrated and sealed.

.2 Hard copper tube, type L, to ASTM B88M.

.3 Annealed copper tube to ASTM B280, with minimum wall thickness as per CSA B52.

2.2 FITTINGS

.1 Service: design pressure 2070 kPa [300 psig] and temperature 121oC [250oF]

.2 Brazed: wrought copper to ANSI B16.22 or cast bronze to MIL-F-1183E.

.3 Flanged: bronze or brass, Class 150 and Class 300 to ANSI B16.24.

.4 Flare: Bronze or brass, for refrigeration, to ANSI B16.26.

.5 Long radius type for elbows and return bends.



2.3 JOINTS

.1 Brazing materials shall be SIL-FOS-15 phosphor-copper-silver alloy for copper piping jointed by copper fittings and silver solder for brass fittings.

.2 Flexible connections: 3/8” nominal or less shall be made using coiled soft copper tubing. For larger sizes, use seamless flexible bronze hose with bronze wire braid covering. Use factory sealed neoprene jacket unit where freezing may occur.

2.4 VALVES

.1 Shut-Off Valves:

.1 Line size; selected for low pressure drop.


.1 Sizes ¼” to 5/8” dia. - Henry Standard, Mueller Linemaster Special.

.2 Sizes 7/8" dia. and larger - Henry Wing Cap (back seating, Mueller Globemaster.

.3 All sizes may be Henry or Mueller ball valves.

.2 Solenoid Valves:

.1 With field replaceable coil, serviceable without removing valve from line.

.2 Coil voltage to suit field requirements.

.3 Provide upstream of thermostatic expansion valves.


.1 Alco 240 RA series.

.3 Expansion Valves:

.1 Thermostatic type with external equalizer, adjustable superheat setting, capacity and bulb charge to suit operating conditions.

.4 Water Regulating Valves:

.1 Pressure activated two-way straight-through type.

.2 For three-way regulators, install balancing valve in by-pass, adjusted to maintain constant system flow rate irrespective of valve position.

.5 Charging and Purging Valves

.1 Valves to be the same size as line size into which they are connected or 12 mm [½”] whichever is the larger.

.2 Valve complete with a removable seal cap chained to the valve body.


.1 Henry Standard type, Mueller Linemaster Special.

2.5 SIGHT GLASS

.1 Provide sight glass in liquid line following filter drier.

.2 Sight glass shall be combination moisture-liquid indicator and with a protective removable cap.

.3 Sight glass to be fitted in-line.


.1 Henry Dri-Vue, Mueller Vuemaster, Sporlan See All.

2.6 ACCESS FITTINGS

.1 Provide Schraeder access fittings in each suction connection from an evaporator, located adjacent to the superheat sensing element of the expansion valve.

.2 Fittings to be used for checking the superheat of the suction gas.



.3 Access fitting shall be soldered into a tee and shall be complete with a quick-seal cap.

2.7 FILTER DRIERS

.1 Provide a filter drier in the liquid line from the condenser. Shut-off valves shall be installed on each side of drier and sight glass.

.2 Filter drier shall be selected to have a pressure drop of not more than 13 kPa [2 psig] when passing 150% of the system flow rate.

.3 Removable core with flare connections.

.4 Desiccant drier material shall be replaceable.


.1 Alco Extra-Klean, Catch-All, Henry Dri-Cor, Mueller Drymaster II, Sporlan.

2.8 REFRIGERANT DRIERS

.1 Driers shall be in-line or angle type with copper or brass shell.

.2 Desiccant drier material shall be replaceable.

2.9 STRAINERS

.1 Refrigerant strainers shall be angle replaceable cartridge type with brass shell.

.2 Cartridge material and screen size shall be suitable for refrigerant and piping material utilized in the system.

2.10 PRESSURE GAUGES - REFRIGERATION


.1 Marsh, Moeller, Trerice, Weiss, Weksler, Winters.


.1 Panel surface mounting type, flanged type.

.2 Flush panel mounting type, flush mount case style.

.3 Seamless phosphor bronze Bourdon tube type, with minimum 65mm [2-1/2"] dia. dial, unless otherwise indicated.

.4 Cast aluminum, black steel or stainless steel case, with stainless steel or chrome plated face ring.

.5 Accuracy +/- 2% of scale range.

.6 Scales to be calibrated in both pressure and corresponding temperature of refrigerant.

.7 Scale Range:

Operating Pressure Scale Range

50 - 690 kPa 100 - 1035 kPa

690 -2750 kPa 0 - 3450 kPa

Operating Pressure Scale Range

15" VAC - 100 psig 30" VAC - 150 psig

100 - 400 psig 0 - 500 psig

.8 Note:

.1 Gauges complete with recalibrator and restrictor.

.2 Install a needle valve (carp) ahead of each gauge.



2.11 EVAPORATOR DRAINS

.1 Each evaporator shall be fitted with a copper drain line, size as shown.

.2 Drain line shall be complete with a running trap.

2.12 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

.1 Braided tin-bronze convoluted flexible connections.

.2 Design pressure 2070 kPa [300 psig].


.1 Anaconda

2.13 REFRIGERANT TUBE SUPPORTS

.1 Middle Attachments (Rod):

.1 Continuous threaded rod, hot-dipped galvanized


.1 Anvil Fig. 146

.2 Pipe Hangers:

.1 Uninsulated pipe, up to NPS 4

.1 Adjustable swivel ring, copper plated


.1 Anvil Fig. CT-69

.2 Insulated pipe, up to NPS 2

.1 Adjustable swivel ring, galvanized

.2 Galvanized insulation shield


.1 Anvil Fig. 69 with Anvil Fig. 167 shield

.3 Insulated pipe, NPS 2½ and larger

.1 Adjustable swivel ring, galvanized

.2 Galvanized insulation shield


.1 Anvil Fig. 260 with Anvil Fig. 167 shield

.4 Maximum horizontal pipe hanger spacing:

Pipe Size Maximum Spacing Rod Diameter

up to NPS ¾ 1.5 m [5 ft] 10 mm [3/8"]

NPS 1 & NPS 1¼ 1.8 m [6 ft] 10 mm [3/8"]

.3 Wall Supports:

.1 Horizontal pipe adjacent to wall; angle iron wall brackets with specified hangers.


.1 Anvil Fig. 194/195/199

.2 Vertical pipe adjacent to wall; exposed pipe wall support for lateral movement restraint only


.1 Anvil Fig. 262

.4 Note:



.1 On insulated piping, where the insulation is specified to have a continuous sealed vapour barrier, (cold services) install oversized clevis hangers and insulation protection shields (Anvil Fig. 167)

.2 Hangers for copper pipe shall be copper plated or plastic dipped unless pipe hangers bear on piping insulation (cold services).

.3 Cold Services - refrigerant suction lines.

2.14 GAUGE BOARD

.1 For each condensing unit, furnish a gauge board of 1.35 mm [16 ga] thick steel with angle iron supports and reinforcing. Gauge board shall be prime coated, then finished with enamel. Mount high and low pressure gauges, maker's nameplate, suitable lamicoid identifying labels, filter drier and sight glass on the board.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Install and test in accordance with the B.C. Refrigeration Code and CSA B52.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Refrigerant Tubing:

.1 Fittings shall be "Sil-Fos" brazed or silver soldered as specified. Solder will not be permitted. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent the overheating of copper tube. No joint shall be made without a pressurized nitrogen flow through the joint.

.2 Tubing shall be cut square and have all burrs removed.

.3 Piping shall be kept meticulously clean. All cleaned piping in the process of erection, whether installed or awaiting installation shall be capped or plugged.

.4 Piping shall be installed in true vertical and horizontal planes close to walls and ceilings, with specified pitch. Provide suitable offsets to account for expansion.

.5 Piping connections to equipment and terminal apparatus shall be supported independently and arranged to give easy access for maintenance.

.6 Provide rubber grommets where refrigerant piping passes through a metal surface.

.7 Grade horizontal pipe carrying gases 1:240 down in direction of flow.

.8 Locate double risers in hot gas or suction piping as indicated.

.9 Locate trap every 4.5 m [15 ft.] of vertical rise in any suction riser 9 m [30 ft.] or more in length.

.10 Install piping to prevent condensate or oil from flowing back into compressor or evaporator.

.2 Strainers:

.1 Provide full size strainer ahead of each automatic valve. Where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are used, install single main liquid line strainer.

.2 On steel piping systems provide adequate strainer in suction line to remove scale and rust inherent in steel pipe.

.3 Provide shut-off valve on each side of strainer to facilitate maintenance.

.3 Refrigerant Driers:

.1 Provide full flow permanent refrigerant drier in low temperature systems and systems utilizing hermetic compressors.



.2 Mount drier vertically in liquid line adjacent to receiver with three valve bypass assembly to permit isolation of drier for servicing.

.4 Filter Driers:

.1 Filter-driers may be used in systems instead of separate strainers and driers.

.2 Install with three valve bypass assembly to permit isolation for servicing.

.5 Solenoid Valves:

.1 Provide solenoid valves in liquid line of system operating with single pump-out or pump-down compressor control, in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems and in oil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into suction line when system shuts down.

.2 Provide solenoid valves with manually operated stems.

.6 Expansion Valves:

.1 Size expansion valves properly to avoid penalty of being undersized at full load and of being excessively oversized at partial load.

.2 Properly evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine the available pressure drop across the valve.

.3 Select valves for maximum load at design operating pressure and minimum 42C

[108F] of superheat.

.4 Locate remote expansion valve sensing bulb immediately after evaporator outlet and suction line.

.7 Charging Valves:

.1 Provide refrigerant charging connections in liquid line between receiver shut-off valve and expansion valves.

.8 Flexible Connectors:

.1 In general install suction and hot piping connections to compressors with three directional changes for distance of minimum six pipe diameters before reaching point of support.

.2 Flexible connectors shall only be utilized at or near compressor where it is not physically possible to absorb vibration within piping configuration.

3.3 ELECTRICAL

.1 In cold storage rooms, use one conduit to bring wiring into a compartment, piercing the wall insulation only once, just under the ceiling insulation. Seal inside on conduit at point where it penetrates wall.

3.4 REFRIGERANT TESTS

.1 Each refrigerant system shall be tested as follows before operation with dry nitrogen gas to a pressure not less than 1.5 times the system working pressure. During the test, each joint shall be tested for leaks with a solution of soap and water. Compressors with refrigerant holding charge shall remain isolated from system.

.2 The system shall then be evacuated to not less than 33.25 Pa (250 microns) absolute and left for 24 hours, during which time the pressure shall not have increased more than 33.25 Pa (250 microns). The system shall then be pressurized to 14 kPa [2 psig] with refrigerant to be used and shall be evacuated to 66.5 Pa [500 microns] absolute and then shall be immediately fully charged with the refrigerant to be used in the system and each joint checked with an electronic testing device. Tests shall be performed before insulation is applied. The refrigerant charge shall be applied immediately after acceptance of tests. In the event of any tube or any other component failure resulting in the loss of any part of the refrigerant charge, another charge shall be applied.



.3 All damaged or defective components shall be replaced with new (not reconditioned) components. A cracked or defective tube shall be replaced. If a defect of any description occurs in an insulated tube, the insulation shall be stripped to localize the leak. The amount of insulation so stripped shall be replaced with new - to be finished as specified.

3.5 START-UP AND ADJUSTMENT

.1 Provide necessary instruments, gauges and testing equipment required. Adjust controls, to obtain design requirements and manufacturer's ratings.

.2 Test and record cooling apparatus entering and leaving air temperatures, dry bulb and wet bulb.

.3 Test and record voltage and running amperes and compare to motor nameplate data, and starter heater rating against design requirements.

.4 Ensure that refrigerant temperatures are accurate to within 0.5oC [0.9oF] of design requirements.

.5 In cooperation with controls contractor's representative, set and adjust automatic control system to achieve required sequence of operations.

.6 Bring equipment into operation, trial run and make up any loss of oil and refrigerant.

.7 Test reports to be submitted for review and inclusion in Maintenance Manuals.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 HVAC WATER TREATMENT



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK

.1 All sections of Division 23 Specifications form part of Contract Documents and are to be read, interpreted and coordinated with all pages. Conform to General Conditions and Division; Instructions to Bidders, Contract General Conditions and Supplements thereto form part of this Division and contain items related to mechanical work.

1.2 SCOPE

.1 Provide for cleaning and degreasing of all systems that use glycol or water as a heat transfer medium.

.2 Provide for cleaning and disinfection of domestic hot and cold systems.

.3 Provide all temporary strainers, connections and by-pass lines as required.

.4 Provide equipment to add chemicals to the systems as specified herein.

.5 Provide equipment to operate and control the system as specified herein. Provide appropriate protection so that capped off unused piping does not corrode.

.6 Provide corrosion coupons for all closed and open loop circulation systems as specified herein.

.7 Piping systems to be chemically treated include the following new systems:

.1 Glycol system(s).


.1 The water treatment chemicals and treatment process shall be supplied and performed by the Contractor. This work shall be supervised by the Water Treatment Specialist who, upon completion shall certify that the process is satisfactory and submit a report outlining the cleaning operation and the treatment process.

.2 Notify Consultant 48 hours prior to chemical cleaning so that work may be verified and inspected.


.1 Do HVAC water treatment in accordance with ASME Boiler Code Section VII, and requirements and standards of regulating authorities, except where specified otherwise.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit shop drawings including proposed chemicals, quantities, calculations, procedures and equipment to be supplied. Provide written operating instructions and system schematics.

.2 Provide written report containing log and procedure of system cleaning, giving times, dates, problems encountered and condition of water.

1.6 WATER TREATMENT SERVICE

.1 The Water Treatment Specialist shall provide supervision of installations, set-up and adjustments and shall submit a written report on system operations.

.2 All chemicals, feed systems and test equipment shall be provided by the Water Treatment Specialist.

.3 Treatment chemicals shall not contain hydrazene.

.4 Treatment chemicals shall be non-foaming.

.5 The Water Treatment Specialist shall instruct the maintenance personnel before substantial completion. Written instructions of the treatment, dosages control charts and test procedures shall be included in the maintenance manuals.





Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 System Cleaner:

.1 Use a Sodium Metasilicate, Sodium Nitrite and a wetting agent compound which in solution removes grease and petroleum products. Concentration level to be determined by Water Treatment Specialist.

.2 Standard of Acceptance: PACE Chemicals Ltd. - PURGEX L-24.

.2 Glycol System:

.1 Charge hot water and/or heat recovery system(s) and chilled water system(s) with a 50% solution of inhibited propylene glycol equivalent to DOWFROST.

.3 Provide sufficient chemicals to treat the system from the time of commissioning to acceptance of the building. In addition, provide a stock of chemicals, filters and corrosion coupons suitable for twelve (12) months normal operation.

.4 Materials which may contact finished areas must be colourless.

2.2 GLYCOL SYSTEM

.1 Label all drain valves with “GLYCOL - DO NOT DRAIN.”

.2 Pre-mix solution in mixing tank, demonstrate specific gravity of solution to Owner and charge system using feed pump. After system has been filled, check specific gravity of solution in each system. Leave mixing tank filled with specified glycol solution. Secure cover lid.

2.3 TEST KITS:

.1 Provide test kits to determine proper systems treatment, including but not limited to the following:

.1 Glycol System Specific Gravity Test Kit:

.1 To determine freezing point of glycol systems. To contain a suitable hydrometer cylinder, a 305 mm [12”] specific gravity hydrometer equivalent to Kessler Model 8350 with scale range of 1.000 -1.110 at .001 specific gravity increments and a 305 mm [12”] brass armoured, non-mercury filled thermometer with scale range of -35 to +50C. Provide a chart showing the specific gravity of the specified solution by volume, at a specified temperature.

.2 Standard of Acceptance: PACE Chemicals Test Kit #127

Part 3 Execution

3.1 CLEANING AND CHLORINATION OF POTABLE WATER PIPING

.1 All domestic water piping shall be thoroughly flushed so that it is free from scale, sediment, construction debris, etc.

.2 On completion of installation and testing of the potable water systems, pre-flush, chlorinate with Sodium Hypochlorite to AWWA C651 specifications and let stand for 24 hours. Thoroughly flush again until flush water meets AWWA standards.

.3 Retain an independent inspection firm to supervise and inspect the chlorination and flushing procedures and perform chemical tests as required.

.4 Submit to the Consultant, a certificate from the testing firm, stating that the chlorination and flushing have been successfully carried out.

.5 Standard of Acceptance: PACE Chemicals Ltd.





3.2 GLYCOL ANTIFREEZE SYSTEMS

.1 Label all drain valves with “GLYCOL - DO NOT DRAIN.”

.2 Pre-mix solution in mixing tank, demonstrate specific gravity of solution to Consultant at sample points and charge system(s) using feed pump. After system has been filled, check specific gravity of solution in each system. Leave mixing tank filled with specified glycol solution.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 23 31 00543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGSNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 10


Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


.2 Refer to Section 23 05 49 for required seismic restraint of ductwork.


.1 The construction and installation of ductwork and plenums shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the following referenced SMACNA manuals and ASHRAE handbooks.

.1 SMACNA - H.V.A.C. Duct Construction Standards.

.2 SMACNA - H.V.A.C. Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

.3 ASHRAE - Handbook - Equipment Volume.

1.3 GENERAL

.1 Duct sizes on drawings indicate clear inside dimensions. For acoustically lined or internally insulated ducts, maintain inside duct dimensions.

.2 Where duct sizes are shown in nominal metric sizes, round and oval duct sizes may be supplied in the nearest available sizes in equivalent imperial units.

.3 Proper sized openings shall be arranged for in the correct locations through all slabs and walls. Openings shall be planned to include for the installation of fire dampers at all rated fire separations.

.4 Where ducts penetrate roofs, provide roof curbs with flashing and counterflashing.

.5 Arrange for 100 mm [4"] high by 100 mm [4"] wide concrete curbs around all duct penetrations through floor slabs outside of duct shafts.

.6 The project drawings are diagrammatic and although efforts have been made to provide information regarding the number of offsets and transitions, not all are necessarily shown. Changes may be required in duct routings, elevation and duct shape to eliminate interference with structure and other services. All required adjustments shall be established when coordinating and field measuring the work prior to fabrication and must be provided as part of the contract and all associated costs must be considered and included.

.7 Ductwork used on this project shall be clean and free from scale, corrosion and deposits. All ductwork shall be degreased and wiped clean of all oil and other surface films with appropriate solvents prior to installation.

.8 All ductwork shall be delivered clean to the site and maintained in clean condition. Dirty ductwork shall be removed from site.

.9 Where welded ductwork is indicated, the welding shall be continuous with Everdur welding. Tack welding is unacceptable except as specifically noted. Paint damaged areas with zinc coating after welding.

.10 Provide seismic restraints for ductwork in accordance with SMACNA "Guidelines for seismic restraints of mechanical systems and plumbing piping systems".



Part 2 Products

2.1 GALVANIZED STEEL

.1 Galvanized steel shall have a 380 g/sq.m. [1-1/4 oz/sq.ft] galvanizing coat both sides to ASTM A525 G90.

2.2 DUCTWORK AND PLENUM PRESSURES

.1 Provide ductwork and plenums fabricated from galvanized steel for the static pressure categories listed below.

.1 1000 Pa [4" W.G.] static pressure.

.1 All supply air ductwork downstream from supply air handling units discharge, to the upstream side of mixing boxes/air valves.

.2 All exhaust and return air ductwork downstream from return/exhaust air valves to the return/exhaust fans and downstream from the return/exhaust fans to the air handling units and/or outdoor relief.

.3 All outdoor intake plenums in mechanical room(s).

.2 500 Pa [2" W.G.] static pressure

.1 All supply ductwork downstream from mixing boxes/air valves to terminal air outlets.

.2 All supply ductwork and plenums on systems without mixing boxes/air valves.

.3 All return air ductwork and plenums, except where otherwise specified.

.4 All exhaust and relief air ductwork and plenums, except where otherwise specified (welding/sawdust exhaust).

.5 All outdoor air ductwork and plenums, except as otherwise specified.

2.3 DUCTWORK - 500 PA [2" W.G.] STATIC PRESSURE

.1 Provide galvanized iron ductwork for system operating pressures 500 Pa [2" W.G.] and less. Ductwork shall be constructed, reinforced, sealed and installed to withstand 1-1/2 times the working static pressure.

.2 Construct rectangular ductwork in accordance with Section I including Tables 1-5, 1-10, 1-11, 1-12, 1-13 and Figs. 1-4 through 1-18 of the SMACNA Duct Standards.

.3 Nomasco "Ductmate System, Lockformer TDC" or Exanno "Nexus System" may be used for rectangular duct joints.

.4 At least two opposite faces of all rectangular ductwork must be joined together using a type of joint, which cannot pull apart.

.5 Construct rectangular duct fittings in accordance with Section II including Figs. 2-1 to 2-11 and Figs. 2-16 to 2-18 of the SMACNA Duct Standards.

.6 Construct round ductwork in accordance with Section III including Table 3-2 and Figs. 3-1 and 3-2 of the SMACNA Duct Standards but excluding beaded crimp joints and snaplock seams.

.7 Construct flat oval ductwork in accordance with Section III including Table 3-4 and Fig. 3-6 of the SMACNA Duct Standards. Joints and seams shall be similar to those indicated for round ducts. Flat oval duct to be used for positive pressure application only.

.8 Construct round and flat oval duct fittings in accordance with Section III including Table 3-1 and Figs. 3-3 through 3-6 of the SMACNA Duct Standards. Round elbows shall have a centreline radius of 1.0 times duct diameter. Sheet metal gauge of fittings and elbows shall be not less than the thickness of that specified for longitudinal seam straight duct. Adjustable elbows are not permitted.

.9



2.4 DUCTWORK - 750 PA [3"] AND GREATER STATIC PRESSURE

.1 Provide galvanized iron ductwork for system operating pressure over 500 Pa [2" W.G.]. Ductwork shall be constructed, reinforced, sealed and installed to withstand 1-1/2 times the working static pressure.

.2 Construct rectangular ductwork in accordance with Section I including Tables 1-6 through 1-13 and Figs. 1-2 through 1-18 of the SMACNA Duct Standards.

.3 Nomasco "Ductmate System", Exanno "Nexus System" or "Lockformer TDC, TDF system", may be used for rectangular duct joints.

.4 Construct rectangular duct fittings in accordance with Section II including Figs. 2-1 through 2-11 of the SMACNA Duct Standards.

.5 Construct round ductwork in accordance with Section III including Table 3-2 and Figs. 3-1 and 3-2 of the SMACNA Duct Standards.

.6 Construct flat oval ductwork in accordance with Section III including Table 3-4 and Fig. 3-6 of the SMACNA Duct Standards. Joints and seams shall be similar to those indicated for round duct. Flat oval duct to be used for positive pressure application only.

.7 Construct round and flat oval duct fittings in accordance with Section III including Table 3-1 and Figs. 3-3 through 3-6 of the SMACNA Duct Standards. Round elbows shall have a centreline radius of 1.5 times duct diameter. Construct 90 deg. elbows of not less than 5 tapered sections. All seams and joints in round or oval duct fittings and elbows shall be spot welded lap seams at not more than 50mm [2"] spacing and all inside seams sealed with approved duct sealant. If the zinc coating is burned off the steel during welding, the joints shall be painted to prevent corrosion. Sheet metal gauges of fittings and elbows shall be not less than the thickness of that specified for longitudinal seam straight duct but suitably thick for welding methods used.

2.5 PLENUMS - 500 PA [2"] STATIC PRESSURE

.1 Provide galvanized steel low pressure plenums suitable for 500 Pa [2" W.G.] positive or negative pressure, for central plant ventilating and air conditioning equipment.

.2 Construct plenums in accordance with Section VI including Figs. 6-1 through 6-3 of the SMACNA Duct Standards.

.3 Where the building structure does not form the bottom surface of a walk-in plenum, fabricate plenum floor panels of 1.78 mm (14 ga.] galvanized steel, with angle iron reinforcing such as to limit deflection of the floor panels to a maximum of 6.4 mm [1/4"] under a concentrated load of 115 kg [250 lbs] at mid span.

.4 Where plenum floors are internally lined, install a 1.47 mm [16 ga.] thick galvanized steel panel on top of the insulation.

.5 Apply silicone sealant CGE Silpruf 2000 series or Dow Corning 781/732 between plenum base angles and concrete or curbs before bolting together.

.6 Reinforce all openings in plenum walls with 40 mm x 40 mm x 4.8 mm [1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 3/16"] angle iron, secured to the main vertical and horizontal reinforcing angles.

.7 Construct access door and casing around door as per SMACNA, casing access doors, Fig. 6-12. Section C-C with angle iron frame sized to suit plenum wall. Doors constructed of 16-gauge metal.

.8 Arrange access doors so that they open against the airflow and static pressure.

.9 Weld all joints on condensate drain pans. Construct the pans from 1.45 mm [16 ga.] thick stainless-steel type #302 or #304. Install a minimum of 32 mm [1-1/4"] piping connection, complete with water seal at least 100 mm [4"] deep, from the pan drain connection to the nearest building drain. Install drain connections so that they shall completely drain the pans.

.10 Seal piping penetrations through plenum walls, with gland seals as detailed in Fig. 6-10 of the SMACNA Duct Standards.



.11 Bulkheads mounting air filters and air coils shall be airtight to prevent air bypass around filters and/or coils.

2.6 PLENUMS - 750 PA [3"] AND GREATER STATIC PRESSURE

.1 Provide medium/high pressure galvanized steel plenums suitable for the specified pressures.

.2 Construct plenums in accordance with Section VI including Figs 6-3 through 6-9 of the SMACNA Duct Standards. If requested, pressure test the plenums to the specified static pressure (positive or negative) to demonstrate the structural integrity.

.3 Where the building structure does not form the bottom surface of a walk-in plenum, fabricate plenum floor panels of 1.78 mm [14 ga.] galvanized steel, with angle iron reinforcing such as to limit deflection of the floor panels to a maximum of 6.4 mm [1/4"] under a concentrated load of 115 kg [250 lb.] at mid span.

.4 Where plenum floors are internally lined, install a 1.47 mm [16 ga] thick galvanized steel panel on top of the insulation.

.5 Apply silicone sealant, CGE Silpruf 2000 series or Dow Corning 781/732 between plenum base angles and concrete or curbs, before bolting together.

.6 Reinforce all openings in plenum walls with 50 mm x 50 mm x 6.4 mm [2" x 2" x 1/4"] angle iron secured to the main vertical and horizontal reinforcing angles.

.7 Construct access door and casing around door as per SMACNA, casing access doors, Fig. 6-12. Section C-C with angle iron frame sized to suit plenum wall. Doors constructed of 16 gauge metal.

.8 Arrange access door so that they open against the airflow and static pressure.

.9 Weld all joints on condensate drain pans. Construct the pans from 1.45 mm [16 ga.] thick stainless-steel type #302 or #304. Install a 32 mm [1-1/4"] piping connection complete with water seal, from the drain pan connections to the nearest building drain. Install drain connections so that they shall completely drain the pans.

.10 Water Seal Depth:

.1 130 mm [ 5"] for 750 Pa [ 3" W.G.] systems.



.4 300 mm [12"] for 2500 Pa [10" W.G.] systems.

.11 Seal piping penetrations through plenum walls with gland seals as detailed in Fig. 6-10 of the SMACNA Duct Standards.

.12 Bulkheads mounting air filters and air coils shall be air tight to prevent air bypass around filters and/or coils.

2.7 DUCTWORK SEALERS

.1 Provide duct sealing compounds for use in fabrication of all ductwork and plenum joints.

.2 All ductwork shall be sealed to SMACNA Seal Classification A.

.3 For further details refer to Section 23 33 00, Duct Accessories.



2.8 DUCTWORK - KITCHEN EXHAUST

.1 Provide black iron ductwork for the kitchen range hood exhaust system(s).

.2 Material: 1.35 mm [16 ga.] uncoated black steel or 1.19 mm [0.047”] 304 stainless steel.

.3 Construct in accordance with NFPA 96.

.4 All exposed ducts shall be stainless steel with No. 4 finish.

.5 Weld all longitudinal seams and lateral joints.

.6 Provide gasketted companion flanged connections only at connections to kitchen exhaust hood and equipment.

.7 Provide gasketted cleanouts, with angle reinforced frames, in the side of the ductwork, at intervals of not more than 6 m [20 ft.] and at changes in direction. Cleanout covers shall be of same material and thickness as the duct. Refer to standard details indicated elsewhere.

.8 Provide Fiberfax 2300 gaskets, braid or tape to suit, suitable for 1,093oC [2,000oF].

.9 Slope down toward hood. Provide drains at all low points.

.10 Support ductwork with rods and angle iron trapeze hangers as follows:

MAXIMUM DUCTMm [ins]

COMPANION FLANGEANGLEmm [ins]

SUPPORT SPACING m [ft]

ROD.DIA.mm [ins]

SUPPORTANGLEMm [ins]

Up to 900[up to 36]

32x32x3.2[1¼ x1¼ x 1/8 ]

2.4 [8.0] 10 [ 3/8 ] 38x38x3.2[1½ x1½ x1/8 ]

925 to 1525[37 to 60]

38x38x3.2[1½ x1½ x1/8 ]

2.4 [8.0] 10 [ 3/8 ] 50x50x6.4[2x2x1/4]

1550 and over[61 and over]

50x50x6.4[2x2x ¼ ]

2.4 [8.0] 10 [ 3/8 ] 50x50x6.4[2x2x ¼ ]

.11 Fire Rating of Kitchen Exhaust Ductwork”

.1 Scope of Work: Refer to drawings for extent of fire rated ductwork. Typically, this would be where kitchen exhaust ducts are not located within fire rated enclosures provided by the General Contractor.

.2 Within the kitchen fire compartment:

.1 Kitchen exhaust ductwork shall be fire rated where clearance to combustibles as required by the building code cannot be maintained.


.1 Two hour rated kitchen exhaust ductwork shall consist of a non-combustible cementitious core mechanically bonded between galvanized facing sheets.

.2 The system shall comply with the requirements of the NFPA-96 Standard.

.3 The ductwork shall be manufactured and installed as per the manufacturer’s instructions and in accordance with the ULC Listing.

.4 The final installation shall be inspected and approved by the local representative of the product manufacturer.



.5 Standard of Acceptance: Durasteel 3DF2/9.5

2.9 DUCTWORK - STAINLESS STEEL - RECTANGULAR

.1 The following ductwork shall be fabricated from stainless steel:

.1 All exhaust ducts carrying moisture such as Dishwasher, Cartwasher, Washer/Sanitizer. Exhaust duct from unit to the discharge point.

.2 Low-pressure stainless-steel ductwork shall be suitable for system operating pressures 500 Pa [2" W.G.] or less.

.3 Material: 1.14 mm [18 ga.], 316L stainless steel, with No. 2B finish where concealed and No. 4 finish where exposed. (Exposed areas shall include finished occupied areas of the building but not mechanical rooms).

.4 Do not cross break duct panels. Grade to drain as indicated.

.5 Weld all longitudinal seams and lateral joints and finish all exposed seams and lateral joints by grinding smooth and buffing to finish of the sheet. Do not penetrate stainless steel with screws, bolts or rivets.

.6 Provide gasketted companion flange connections where necessary to connect to equipment. Flanged connections shall be made up by slipping a formed 1.8 mm [14 ga.] thick matching stainless-steel welded angle frame over the end of the duct, leaving space for continuously welding the frame to the duct on the inside.

.7 Provide escutcheon trim bands around all duct ceiling penetrations.

.8 Provide gasketted cleanouts (not smaller than 450 mm x 300 mm [18" x 12"], with formed 1.8 mm [14 ga.] thick matching stainless steel welded angle reinforcing frames, in the side of the ductwork at not more than 6 m [20 ft.] intervals, changes in direction and base of risers. Cleanouts shall be fastened with wing nuts at 150 mm [6"] centres. Cleanouts openings shall terminate not less than 40 mm [1-1/2"] from the bottom of the duct.

.9 Gaskets shall be 3 mm [1/8"] thick teflon or an approved alternate.

.10 Support exposed ductwork with 50 mm x 1.8 mm [2" x 14 ga.] matching stainless steel (No. 4 finish) U-strap hangers on 2.4 m [8 ft.] centres.

2.10 COIL END COVERS

.1 Provide coil end casings to eliminate coil frame air leakage.

.2 Provide for cooling coil ends to drip condensate to the coil drain pan. Insulate the inside of the coil end casing to prevent casing condensation and provide closure panels to retain insulation.

2.11 WIRE MESH SCREENS

.1 Provide wire mesh screens in all air intake openings where noted on the drawings.

.2 Screens shall be constructed from aluminum wire 1.3 mm diameter [16 ga].

.3 Screen mesh shall be 12.7 mm [1/2"].

.4 Mount screens in 0.66 mm thick [20 ga] folded aluminum frames.

2.12 COUNTER FLASHINGS

.1 Counter flashings - galvanized sheet steel of 0.8 mm [22 gauge] minimum thickness.

.2 Counter flashings are attached to mechanical equipment and lap the base flashings on the roof curbs.

.3 All joints in counter flashings shall be flattened and solder double seam. Storm collars shall be adjustable to draw tight to pipe with bolts. Caulk around the top edge. Storm collars shall be used above all roof jacks.

.4 Vertical flange section of roof jacks shall be screwed to face of curb.



Part 3 Execution

3.1 DUCTWORK & PLENUM INSTALLATION

.1 Where a duct contains a fire or smoke damper, construct the duct so that the free area of the duct is maintained through the fire or smoke damper.

.2 Where a duct is to be internally insulated, enlarge the duct so as not to reduce the duct free area.

.3 Make the taper of diverging transitions less than 20 deg. and the taper of converging transitions less than 30 deg., in accordance with Fig. 2-9 of the SMACNA Duct Standards. Maximum divergence upstream of equipment to be 30 deg. and 45 deg. convergence downstream.

.4 Make the inside radius of any rectangular duct elbow at least equal to the duct width, measured in the direction of the radius. If space conditions do not permit a full radius elbow to be installed, use square elbows with multi-blade turning vanes.

.5 Turning vanes shall be single wall type. Vanes in galvanized sheet metal ducts shall be constructed from galvanized steel, minimum thickness 0.76 mm [22 ga]. Vanes shall be spaced at 40 mm [1-1/2"] centres and shall turn through 90 deg., with a radius of 50 mm [2"]. Vanes shall not include a straight trailing edge. Refer to Figs. 2-3 and 2-4 of the SMACNA Duct Standards. Vanes and runners in aluminum ducts shall be constructed from aluminum. Aluminum vanes shall be 0.86 mm thick [18 ga].

.6 For 500 Pa [2"] pressure systems, install tie rods to limit the maximum unsupported vane length to 914 mm [36"]. Refer to Fig. 2-4 of the SMACNA Duct Standards.

.7 For 750 Pa [3"] and greater pressure systems, install tie rods to limit the maximum unsupported vane length to 460 mm [18"]. Refer to 2-4 of the SMACNA Duct Standards.

.8 Install duct necks before grilles, registers and diffusers and cushion heads after diffuser take-offs as required to suit site conditions.

.9 Where indicated, install adjustable air turning devices, where full radius take-off fittings cannot be installed, in accordance with Fig. 2-16 of the SMACNA Duct Standards. Adjustment shall be accessible outside the duct with lockable quadrant operator or through the grille or register with key-operated worm gear mechanism.

.10 Cross-break or bead all metal duct panels unless otherwise noted.

.11 Do not cross-break duct panels on 750 Pa [3"] and greater static pressure systems.

.12 Do not cross-break bottom duct panels when ductwork is handling moisture.

.13 Roof mounted ducts shall have standing seams and shall be sealed weather tight.

.14 Grade all ductwork handling moisture, a minimum of 1:120 [1" in 10 ft] back to the source or at low points in the ductwork, provide a 150 mm [6"] deep drain sump and 32 mm [1-1/4"] dia. drain connection with deep seal trap and pipe to drain.

.15 Construct ductwork handling moisture with three-sided bottom sections and a separate top panel. Install the three-sided bottom sections and internally seal the transverse joints with CGE Silicone Sealant "Silpruf". Then install the top panels and seal the top panel seams and joints.

.16 Provide floor drains in outside air and humidifier sections with deep seal traps.

.17 Provide moisture collection sections inside all louvres for outside air and exhaust air.

.18 Support ductwork using galvanized steel straps, cadmium plated threaded rods, flat bar or angle hangers. Attachments to the structure shall be compatible with the structure and selected for the load of the ductwork. Install ductwork hangers in accordance with Section IV including Tables 4-1 through 4-3 and Figs. 4-1 through 4-9 of the SMACNA Duct Standards.

.19 Support duct risers at their base and at each floor and at not greater than 3.7 m [12 ft] intervals.



.20 Prior to the fabrication of ductwork, co-ordinate and field measure all ductwork to ensure a complete installation respecting all other services. Provide all necessary fittings, offsets, and alternate construction methods to facilitate the installation.

.21 Arrange ductwork and plenums so that duct and plenum mounted equipment can be easily removed.

.22 Arrange access doors so that they open against the airflow and static pressure.

.23 Provide necessary baffling in manufactured or built-up mixed air plenums to ensure good

mixed air temperature with variations of not more than minus 5C [23F] under all operating conditions.

.24 Ducts passing through non-rated fire separations, sound insulated walls and through non-rated walls and floors shall be tightly fitted and sealed on both sides of the separation with silicon sealant to prevent passage of smoke and/or transmission of sound. (U.L.C. approved fire stop sealant is not a requirement). Where ducts are insulated provide a 0.61 mm [24 ga] thick galvanized steel band tightly fitted around insulation and then caulk to band.

.25 During construction, protect openings in ductwork, from dust infiltration, by covering with polyethylene, and protect floor outlet duct openings with metal caps.

.26 Where ductwork is required to pass through open web steel joists, coordinate with the joist fabricator before fabricating ductwork.

.27 Where ducts penetrate roofs, install sleeves and roof curb c/w flashing and counterflashing. Pack sleeves in roof with fibreglass insulation.

.28 Provide drip pans under piping and shields for protection of electrical panels and equipment.

.29 Unless noted otherwise, line all builder's shafts and air plenums used as ducts and plenums with sheet metal.

3.2 DUCTWORK - KITCHEN EXHAUST

.1 Protect ductwork exposed to outside elements by painting or coating with suitable weather/ heat resistant material.

.2 Install a residue trap with cleanout at base of vertical risers and at each trapped point.

.3 Provide minimum 150 mm [6”] clearance on all sides of kitchen exhaust ductwork in accordance with NFPA 96.

3.3 DUCTWORK LEAKAGE TEST

.1 Leakage test all 750 Pa [3"] and greater static pressure supply ductwork installed under this contract, as recommended in the SMACNA H.V.A.C. Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 1985 Standards, to a static pressure 500 Pa [2" W.G.] in excess of the specified ductwork design static pressure.

.2 Use equipment capable of demonstrating leakage.

.3 Test the first 30 m [100 ft] of installed ductwork in the presence of the Consultant.

.4 Test a 30m [100ft] section of 500 Pa [2"] static pressure ductwork, where complete systems over 30m [100 ft] long are installed under this contract to a static pressure of 500 Pa [2" W.G.].

.5 The total allowable leakage for the entire system shall be not greater than [5] percent of the total system capacity.

.6 Submit test reports for all ducts tested.

3.4 DUCTWORK AND PLENUM CLEANING

.1 Responsibility

.1 This Contractor shall be responsible for and ensure that all ductwork installed under this contract is internally CLEAN when handed over to the Owner. This



responsibility includes the entire systems, from outdoor air intakes to air terminals and from air terminals to relief outlets. It includes all ductwork, lined and unlined, all plenums and all equipment within or connected to ducts and plenums.

.2 The surfaces shall be considered clean when all foreign materials capable of particulating and visible to the naked eye are removed.

.2 Installation Procedure

.1 All ductwork shall be wiped clean prior to installation.

.2 LEED Requirement: Oil film on sheet metal shall be removed before shipment to Work Site. Ducts shall be inspected to confirm that no oil film is present.

.3 Oil film on sheet metal shall be removed before shipment to Work Site. Ducts shall be inspected to confirm that no oil film is present.

.4 Close all dampers immediately following installation thus checking the operation and retarding movement of contaminants through the system.

.5 Seal all openings at the end of each day and at such other time as site conditions dictate.

.6 Floor openings to be capped with sheet metal or floor grilles plus 0.15 mm [6 mils] thick poly sheet.

.7 Other openings to be covered with 0.15 mm [6 mils] thick poly sheet taped so as to be air tight.

.3 Cleaning Procedure

.1 All ductwork shall be handled and installed in accordance with the advanced level specified in SMACNA’s Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines

.2 Supply and return ducts shall be cleaned in accordance with NADCA General Specifications for the Cleaning of Commercial Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems. Verification of HVAC system cleanliness shall be in accordance with the latest NADCA ACR Standard.

.1 If visual inspection (Method 1 in NADCA ACR) is inconclusive, surface comparison testing (Method 2 in NADCA ACR) should be used.

.2 If surface comparison testing is inconclusive, vacuum testing (Method 3 in NADCA ACR) should be used.

.3 On completion of the duct and plenum installation and prior to the installation of air terminals and prior to balancing of the air systems, but not until the areas are substantially clean (floors have been swept and vacuumed) and all "dirty" construction has been completed, employ an approved Cleaning Agency to vacuum clean the following:

.1 All air handling units.

.2 All plenums.

.3 All supply and return air ducts.

.4 All exhaust air ducts.

.4 All components within each system shall be thoroughly cleaned and shall include but not be limited to the following: coils, fans and motors, silencers, air terminals and mixing boxes / air valves.

.5 When connecting to existing supply ductwork, clean existing supply ducts upstream from connection back to the filters. Clean existing supply ductwork downstream from new connections to outlets.

.6 Cleaning shall generally be by high capacity power vacuum. High-pressure compressed air, wire brushing and/or non-toxic solvent cleaning shall be used where dirt or scale cannot be removed otherwise. Coils shall be de-scaled.



.7 The Cleaning Contractor shall be responsible for removing and replacing filter media. This contractor will remove the temporary filters and replace with new after cleaning the systems.

.8 The Cleaning Contractor shall mark balancing damper positions before cleaning and return them to their original position when cleaning is completed unless the system is still to be balanced.

.9 Reinstall any grilles, registers and diffusers, which may have been removed for cleaning purposes.

.10 In accordance with CSA Standard Z317.2, Class I air handling systems shall be cleaned and disinfected prior to occupancy.

.11 After the duct systems have been cleaned they should be resealed if they are not being used. Provide filter media on the return air terminals if the return air fans are run after cleaning has been completed.

.12 The Cleaning Agency shall perform a full inspection of the duct interior. Utilizing a fibre optic borescope with dedicated light source, inspect interior ductwork surfaces, and ductwork accessories including terminal units, mixing boxes / air valves, ductwork liners, duct-mounted coils, filters, dampers, humidifiers and all other appurtenances within the ductwork system.

.13 Spot checks will be made by the Consultant during the cleaning process to verify that the required standard is being met. When substantial performance is claimed, final spot checks will be made to verify that the ducts are clean. Make available for the use of the Consultant a fibre optic borescope with dedicated light source. If any ducts are found to be unclean, then they shall be recleaned.

.14 Ducts serving very clean areas served with 85% NBS or HEPA filters shall be reviewed by the Consultant utilizing the equivalent of a white glove wipe technique.

.15 Submit a report from the cleaning agency that certifies all specified air systems have been cleaned.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK



.1 Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards

Part 2 Products

2.1 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS


.1 1.4 mm thick [16 ga] galvanized steel or aluminum channel frame.

.2 1.2 mm thick [15 ga] aluminum blades, complete with stiffening ribs/bends.

.3 Full blade length shafts; brass, ball or nylon bearings.

.4 Felt or neoprene anti-chatter blade strips.

.5 Blade connecting linkage with eyelet and pin bearings.

.6 Maximum blade length of 760 mm [30"], use multiples for larger dimensions.

.7 Manufacturer's label.

.8 Where a balanced backdraft damper (BBD) is indicated the damper shall incorporate an adjustable counterbalance weight and lever.

.9 Maximum pressure drop across damper at 4.06 m/s [800 FPM] shall be 45 Pa [0.18" w.g.]

.2 Standard of Acceptance: Airolite 625, Penn CBD-6.

2.2 BALANCING DAMPERS

.1 Construction in accordance with SMACNA Duct Standards - Figs. 2-14 and 2-15.


.1 Rectangular ducts:

.1 Up to 300 mm [12"] deep - single blade (butterfly type).

.2 330 mm [13"] to 400 mm [16"] deep - two opposed blades, mechanically interlocked with pivots at quarter points.

.3 430 mm [17"] deep and over - multiple opposed blades, mechanically interlocked with blades not greater than 200 mm [8"] deep and pivots equally spaced.

.2 Round Ducts:

.1 Single blade (butterfly type).

.3 Material:

.1 Minimum 1.47 mm [16 ga] thick galvanized steel blade on all butterfly dampers.

.2 Minimum 1.47 mm [16 ga] thick galvanized steel blades on multi-blade dampers with rigidly constructed galvanized steel frame (no frame required on single blade dampers).

.3 Minimum 1.14 mm [18 ga] thick stainless-steel blades for fume exhaust ducts.

.4 Bearings:





.1 End bearings on all low-pressure single blade dampers above 300 mm [12"] dia.

.2 Bearings on multiple blade dampers shall be bronze oilite type.

.5 Operating Mechanism:

.1 Lockable quadrant type with end bearing on accessible rectangular ducts up to 400 mm [16"] deep and on accessible round ducts.

.2 Wide pitch screw mechanism type with crank operator on accessible rectangular ducts 430 mm [17"] and over in depth and on inaccessible rectangular and round ducts.

.3 Override limiting stops.

.4 No blade movement in set position.

.6 Concealed Regulators:

.1 Drawing designation: D (CR).

.2 For all drywall ceilings which do not have access panels provide concealed balancing damper regulators embedded in the finished ceiling, mounted behind grilles, on or inside plenum slot diffusers and various types of diffusers.

.3 Concealed damper regulator to be connected to balancing damper by means of flexible Bowden cable and to be installed flush with ceiling.

.4 Coverplate to be held in place with 2 screws and to be easily removed for damper adjustment.

.5 Refer to Mechanical Details.


.1 Young Regulator Co. Model No. 270-301.

.2 Provide all necessary hardware including Young Regulator balance damper model 5020-CC, Bowden cable and Young Regulator Model 030-12 wrench.

2.3 DUCT ACCESS

.1 Locations: Refer to Part 3 (Execution).

.2 Dimensions:

.1 Doors:

.1 500 mm [20"] wide x 1370 mm [54"] high.

.2 Head of door 1780 mm [70"] above floor.

.2 Panels:

.1 380 mm x 500 mm [15"x20"].

.2 Where the far corners of the duct are closer than 500 mm [20"] and the equipment within the duct is closer than 300 mm [12"] the size may be reduced to 400 mm x 300 mm [16"x12"] or 450 mm x 250 mm [18"x10"] elliptical.

.3 Where space will not permit the above dimensions to be attained, they should be matched as closely as possible and where necessary additional access be provided.

.3 Products:

.1 Doors - construct in accordance with SMACNA Duct Standards Fig. 6-12 except for latch type. 40 mm [1-1/2"] thick insulation.

.2 Panels - Nailor Hart, Ventlok, 25 mm [1"] thick insulation.

.3 Gaskets - neoprene or foam rubber.





.4 Hardware:

.1 Panels up to 400 mm x 300 mm [16 "x 12"] - 2 sash locks.

.2 Panels - 380 mm x 500 mm [15 "x 20"] - 4 sash locks.

.3 Doors - piano hinge and Ventlok 310 latches c/w front and inside handles and front door pull.

2.4 DUCT CONNECTORS - THERMAL BREAKS

.1 Provide flexible duct connections to provide thermal breaks in all sheet metal ducts and plenums passing through or terminating at the exterior of the building. Install inside the building.


.1 Pre-assembled 75 mm [3"] long thermal barrier with 75 mm [3"] long, 0.61 mm [24 ga] galvanized steel duct connectors on each side of the thermal break.

.2 Thermal break - heavy fiber glass fabric with elastomer coating.

.3 Standard of Acceptance: Duro Dyne "Durolon", Ventfabrics "Ventlon".

2.5 DUCT CONNECTORS - VIBRATION ISOLATION

.1 Provide flexible duct connections to provide vibration isolation at all duct and plenum connections to fan and air handling units. See Figure 2-19 SMACNA Duct Standards.


.1 Pre-assembled 75 mm [3"] minimum long flexible connection with 75 mm [3"] long 0.62 mm [24 ga] galvanized steel duct connectors on each side of the flexible connection. Flexible connector - fiber glass fabric with elastomer coating.

.3 Centrifugal fans with 900 mm [36"] diameter and larger fan wheels, use 150 mm [6"] long flexible connection.

.4 Do not install connectors on perchloric acid fume exhaust systems.

.5 Standard of Acceptance: Duro Dyne "Durolon", Dynair "Hypalon", Ventfabrics "Ventlon".

2.6 DUCTWORK - FLEXIBLE - PLAIN

.1 Provide factory fabricated plain, flexible air ductwork for the following applications:

.1 Connections to air terminals.

.2 Connections to downstream side of mixing boxes / air valves.

.3 Connections to round fire dampers (up to 300 mm [12"] diameter).


.1 Non-corrosive spiral wire reinforcing with flexible vinyl coated fiberglass cloth membrane.

.2 Suitable for up to 2500 Pa [10" w.g.] positive static pressure and 250 Pa [1" w.g.] negative static pressure.

.3 U.L. or U.L.C. labelled, Class 1, duct connector.

.4 Flame spread rating not to exceed 25. Smoke developed rating not to exceed 50.

.3 Standard of Acceptance: Flexmaster FAB4, Thermaflex SLP10,

2.7 DUCTWORK - FLEXIBLE - INSULATED

.1 Provide factory fabricated insulated flexible ductwork for the following applications:

.1 Connections to downstream side of variable volume and constant volume mixing boxes, where indicated.

.2 Connections to air terminals where indicated.






.1 Flexible vinyl coated steel helix bonded to inner duct liner. Fibrous glass thermal insulation.

.2 Outer jacket of metalized fire-resistant vapour barrier.

.3 Suitable for up to 500 Pa [2" w.g.] positive static pressure and/or 250 Pa [1" w.g.] negative static pressure.

.4 UL or ULC labelled, Class 1, duct connector.

.5 Acoustically rated.

.3 Standard of Acceptance: Glass-Flex ABL-181, Thermaflex M-KE, Wiremold WK.

2.8 DUCTWORK SEALERS

.1 Provide duct sealing compounds for use in fabrication of all ductwork and plenum joints.

.2 All ductwork shall be sealed to SMACNA Seal Classification A.


.1 Foster 32-14, Hardcast Versa Grip, Hardcast Foil Grip 1402, Robson’s Duct Seal-WB, United Duct Sealer, Trans Continental Multi-Purpose.

.4 Where accessible, apply sealer to inside of joints on ducts and plenums under positive pressure - e.g. on the discharge side of fans.

.5 Apply sealer to outside of joints on ducts and plenums under negative pressure - e.g. on the suction side of fans.

2.9 FIRE DAMPERS


.1 Fire dampers shall be U.L.C. or Warnock Hersey tested and shall bear the testing agency's label.

.2 Fire dampers shall meet requirements of the applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction.

.3 All fire dampers shall be “dynamic”; rated to close under airflow.

.4 Mild steel, factory fabricated for fire rating requirement to maintain integrity of fire separation.

.5 Fusible link actuated and shall have a spring-closing operator.

.6 Fire dampers in low-pressure ductwork may be multi blade or curtain type.

.7 Fire dampers in medium and high-pressure ductwork shall be curtain type.

.8 Curtain fire dampers shall have blades retained in a recess so free area of connecting ductwork is not reduced.

.9 Fusible links: U.L.C. approved with a melting point of 74oC [165oF] on supply, return and exhaust air systems. Use fusible links with a melting point of 141oC [286oF] on all return and exhaust air systems if used for smoke venting.

2.10 FIRE/SMOKE COMBINATION DAMPERS


.1 Smoke dampers to be labelled to ULC Standard CAN/ULC S112.1-M90 and UL 555S.

.2 Pivoted blade type.

.3 Auxiliary operating shaft.

.4 Galvanized steel frames, blades, gussets and blade stops.

.5 Stainless steel jamb seals.

.6 Silicone rubber blade seals.

.7 Factory assembled caulked sleeve to required length (Contractor to advise).





.8 U.L.C. approved fusible links with a melting point of 74oC [165oF] on supply, return and exhaust air systems. Use fusible links with a melting points of 141oC [286oF] on all return air and exhaust air systems when used for smoke venting.

.9 For all dampers less than 0.25 sq.m. [2.7 sq.ft.] the damper size shall be the same size as the duct size measured inside the damper frame. Enlarge ducts to accommodate damper frames.

.10 Smoke dampers shall be equipped with two CSA approved end switches linked directly to the damper blade. End switches shall provide positive status indication of full open and full closed blade position. Mount switches in self-contained enclosure and wired outside of duct.

.11 Actuators for smoke dampers shall be supplied with the smoke dampers as a single entity which meets all applicable UL555 and UL555S qualifications for both dampers and actuators. Actuators shall be rated for 177oC [350oF] elevated temperature classification. Actuators shall be mounted so that the supply duct smoke damper fails to the closed position and return/exhaust dampers fail to the open position.

.12 Actuators (unless otherwise noted) shall be 120/1/60. Coordinate with Div. 16.

.2 Standard of Acceptance: Leakage Class II, Ruskin FSD-36; Controlled Air FSD-3V-57.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 BALANCING DAMPERS

.1 Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply, return and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger duct as required for proper air balancing.

.2 Provide balancing dampers at each run out to a grille or diffuser.

.3 Identify the airflow direction and blade rotation and open and closed position.

.4 On all round ductwork larger than 300 mm [12"] diameter and on externally insulated rectangular ductwork, provide sheet metal bridge to raise quadrant type operators above the insulation thickness (coordinate with Section 23 07 13). Provide an open end bearing where bridges are used. Bridges on uninsulated round ducts shall be at least 25 mm [1"] high.

.5 Where quadrant type operators are used, the lever shall be arranged parallel with the damper blade.

3.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

.1 Install backdraft dampers on all exhaust and relief openings through the building walls and roof on all exhaust fans where control dampers are not called for or indicated.

3.3 CONTROL DAMPERS - AUTOMATIC

.1 Packaged equipment specified to be complete with control dampers, shall include control dampers as normally supplied by the equipment manufacturer unless otherwise noted.

.2 All other automatic control dampers are specified in the Controls Sections.

.3 Under this section be responsible for receipt, handling, storage and installation of control dampers supplied under the Control Sections.

.4 The indicated size of control dampers is the dimension outside the frame. Oversize the ductwork to include the depth of the damper frame if the pressure drop across the damper exceeds 25 Pa [0.1" w.g.].

.5 Control damper frames shall be fitted tightly into ductwork and sealed airtight.

.6 Check that dampers are installed square and true. Ensure that damper end linkages are easily accessible.

.7 Do not install control dampers within the thickness of any wall unless otherwise indicated.





3.4 DUCT ACCESS

.1 Locations: Provide access doors and panels as follows:

.1 Doors: where shown on the drawings.

.2 Panels:

.1 Every 12 m [40 ft] on all ductwork.

.2 At the base of each duct riser.

.3 Both sides of equipment blocking the duct e.g.

.1 air flow measuring stations

.2 coils

.4 At or to one side of other equipment in duct e.g

.1 backdraft dampers (counterweight side)

.2 balance dampers serving multiple outlets/inlets

.3 bearings (fans/motors)

.4 control dampers

.5 control sensors

.6 fire dampers (rectangular ducts and round ducts 330 mm [13"] dia. and larger - latch side)

.7 heat detectors (upstream from device)

.8 smoke dampers (operator side)

.9 smoke detectors (upstream from device)

.5 Panels need not be provided where access is available through a door or a register mounted on the side of the duct.

.6 Kitchen exhaust access requirement specified under "Ductwork - Kitchen Exhaust".

.3 Patches:

.1 Where required for cleaning and where access panels are not specified, e.g. on both sides of turning vanes.

.4 Flexible duct - on round duct and round fire dampers up to 300 mm [12"] dia.

.2 Seal frames airtight.

.3 Install so as not to interfere with airflow.

.4 Install to provide easiest possible access for service and cleaning.

.5 Do not use sheet metal screws for attaching access panels to ductwork.

.6 Round ducts 330 mm [13"] dia. and larger shall include a short collar for the installation of access panels.

.7 Small rectangular ducts shall be transitioned to a minimum dimension across the duct of 330 mm [13"] for the installation of access panels.

3.5 DUCT CONNECTORS - VIBRATION ISOLATION

.1 Ensure flexible duct connectors do not reduce duct free area on suction side of fans.

3.6 DUCTWORK – FLEXIBLE

.1 Installed lengths shall be limited to 6 times duct diameter but not longer than 1200 mm [4 ft].

.2 Connect to ductwork and diffusers with stainless steel worm drive clamps or Panduit adjustable clamps or Thermaflex duct strap applied over two wraps of duct tape. Use stainless steel clamps on connections to fire dampers.

.3 Minimum centreline radius of flexible ductwork bends shall be 1.5 times the duct





diameter, alternatively, sheet metal elbows may be used at branch takeoffs and boot/diffuser connections.

.4 Support with 25 mm x 0.76 mm [1" x 22 ga] galvanized steel straps at a maximum of 600mm [24"]. Straps shall completely encircle duct.

.5 Support clear of ceiling assembly, light fixtures and hot surfaces.

3.7 FIRE AND FIRE SMOKE DAMPERS

.1 Install in accordance with the SMACNA Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for HVAC Systems.

.2 Fire damper sleeves must not extend more than 75 mm [3"] from wall on each side.

.3 Fire dampers must be installed within wall thickness of fire separation.

.4 Wall openings sized to allow sleeve/damper expansion.

.5 Arrange dampers so that linkages and locking catches are accessible from the access side of fire damper.

.6 Install so as to close in the direction of normal airflow.

.7 Size so that the free area of duct is maintained through the assembly.

.8 Install in galvanized steel sleeve, retained in place with retaining angles on all four sides at each face of wall.

.9 Connect ductwork to damper sleeves using break-away duct joints on all faces.

3.8 FLOW MEASURING DEVICES - AIR

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. The minimum distances from air turbulence - producing fittings, transitions etc. shall be maintained.

.2 When specified mount air volume gauges at a convenient height for easy visual inspection and install interconnecting piping.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 HVAC FANS



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK



.1 Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.

.2 Fans shall conform to AMCA bulletins regarding testing and construction. Airfoil fans shall bear the AMCA certified rating seal for airflow and sound.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Fan shop drawings shall include sound rating data and fan curves showing operating point plotted on curves.

.2 Fan shop drawings shall include motor efficiencies. Refer to Section 23 05 13 for minimum motor efficiencies.

1.4 GENERAL

.1 Fan motors shall be UL listed and CSA certified.

.2 Full Voltage Start Applications:

.1 All motors shall be in accordance with NEMA standards, and CSA C390-93, or the latest version as is applicable. Motors also shall comply with the applicable portions of the Canadian Electrical Code.

.3 Variable Frequency Drive and soft start applications:

.1 All motors shall be in accordance with NEMA standards (MG-1) Part 31, and inverter duty class, or the latest version insofar as it is applicable. Motors also shall comply with the applicable portions of the Canadian Electrical Code.

.2 Motors connected to VFD(s) shall be wound using inverter spike resistant magnet wire capable of 1600V.

.4 The noise level of each motor shall comply with NEMA standards, less than 80 dBA at 1 meter.

.5 Motors powered by variable speed drive controllers shall be EEMAC class B with Type F "inverter duty" insulation, shall have a 1.15 service factor on sine wave power, 1.0 service factor on PWM power and meet NEMA Code MG-1.

.6 All motors 10 hp and larger that are controlled by a VFD are to use dielectric grease bearings and a shaft grounding kit with a system of brass or stainless steel brushings to prevent premature failure.

Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL

.1 Provide fans selected for maximum efficiency and generating noise levels on site not exceeding the level calculated from the ASHRAE Guides. If fans are not specified at maximum efficiency, advise mechanical consultant before tendering and submit alternate price for maximum efficiency fans. If approval to supply noisier fans is not obtained prior to tendering, provide equipment meeting ASHRAE levels on site without loss in efficiency.

.2 Submit fan sound power levels with shop drawings measured to applicable AMCA standards, or other data acceptable to the engineer. Provide test data, if requested.





Indicate on shop drawings the test configuration, including ductwork, and any end reflection corrections applied to the data and / or if such corrections have been omitted.

.3 Fans: statically and dynamically balanced, constructed in conformity with AMCA-99. Dynamically balance fans to 1.5-mm/s vibration amplitude, maximum measured on bearing housings. Provide fan shafts with critical speed at least 1.5-times operational speed.

.4 Fans shall conform to AMCA bulletins regarding testing and construction. Airfoil fans shall bear the AMCA certified rating seal for airflow and sound.

.5 Ratings: based on tests performed in accordance with AMCA 210, and ASHRAE 51. Units shall bear AMCA certified rating seal.

.6 Refer to Section 23 05 13 for high efficiency motor requirements.

.7 All motors shall be TEFC unless noted otherwise.

.8 All motors shall be provided with premium efficiency classification.

.9 Where fans are used for smoke exhaust, the motor, bearings, operators, etc. shall be

capable of three (3) hours of operation at 250C [482F].

.10 Refer to drawings for motor position, rotation and discharge arrangements.

.11 For motors less than 10 H.P. provide standard adjustable pitch drive sheaves having +/-10% range. Use mid-position of range for specified RPM.

.12 For motors 10 H.P. and larger, provide fixed pitch drive sheaves with split tapered bushing and keyway. Provide final drive sheaves of size to suit final balancing.

.13 Match drive and driven sheaves.

.14 V-belts shall conform to the American Belt Manufacturers standards. Multiple belts shall be matched sets.

.15 Minimum drive rating shall be 150% of nameplate rating of motor

.16 Not less than a 2-belt configuration is required for each drive for motors 3/4 H.P. and larger.

.17 Provide belt guard with tachometer ports for all belt drive fans.

.18 Where fans are used for smoke exhaust, the motor, bearings, operators, etc. shall be

capable of three (3) hours of operation at 250C [482F].

.19 Bearings shall have a minimum L-10 life of 100,000 hours based on the maximum safe speed of the fan class.

.20 Fans shall be treated to suit the airstream in which they are used.

.21 Provide secure attachment points for seismic restraints. Mounting brackets shall be suitable for seismic loading.

2.2 MOTORS AND VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES

.1 Provide motors and variable frequency drive / motor assemblies generating noise levels which are imperceptible in the occupied space, and outside building, relative to fan noise. Provide acoustical data confirming required performance prior to tendering. If approval is not obtained prior to tendering, provide equipment meeting specified imperceptible requirement without loss in efficiency.

2.3 CENTRIFUGAL FANS - GENERAL


.1 Welded steel fan wheel with airfoil blades, unless otherwise specified.

.2 Bearings: Heavy-duty pillow-block grease lubricated ball or roller self-aligning type.

.3 Gasketted scroll access panel, secured with quick release fasteners.

.4 20 mm [3/4"] scroll drain and brass plug.





.5 Enamel painted steel fan wheels and inside scrolls.

.6 Prime coat painted outside scroll including supports and steel accessories.

.7 Rust preventative coating on fan shafts.

.8 Drip proof motor.

.9 On single inlet fans provide extended lubricators on inlet side bearings.

.2 Accessories:

.1 Belt drives.

.2 Belt guards c/w tachometer holes.

.3 Coupling guards.

.4 Fan inlet safety screens.

.5 Steel frame base and motor slide rails (refer to Section 23 05 48).

2.4 CENTRIFUGAL FANS - PLENUM


.1 Welded steel fan wheel with airfoil blades, unless otherwise specified.

.2 Bearings: Heavy-duty pillow-block grease lubricated ball or roller self-aligning type.



.5 Enamel painted steel fan wheels.

.6 Rust preventative coating on fan shafts.

.7 Drip proof motor.

.8 Fan assembly fully enclosed with expanded mesh screen, approved to WCB Standards.

.9 Direct drive fans shall be designed specifically for the duty and allow for easy motor replacement. Provide heavy-duty mechanical coupling and bearings for arrangement 8 where called for.

.10 Belt drives with belt guards c/w tachometer holes.

.11 Coupling guards.

.12 Fan inlet safety screens.

.2 Accessories:

.1 Steel frame base and motor slide rails (refer to Section 23 05 48).

.2 Backdraft damper - as scheduled.

2.5 KITCHEN EXHAUST UTILITY FANS


.1 Steel wheel and all welded construction scroll.



.4 Rust preventative coating on shaft.

.5 Enamel painted fan wheels and scrolls.

.6 Weatherproof enamelled cover for motor drive.

.7 Belt driven sets with adjustable motor bed plate and variable pitch drive sheave.

.8 U.L. listed to operate continuously at 190oC [375oF] and constructed to NFPA96A requirements.





2.6 KITCHEN EXHAUST VENTILATOR FANS


.1 Centrifugal non-overloading wheel.

.2 Variable pitch belt drive and motor drives out of exhaust air stream.

.3 Spun aluminum housing.

.4 Upblast vertical discharge.

.5 All parts corrosion resistant.

.6 Vibration isolators.

.7 External junction box and disconnect switch.

.8 Fan to NFPA96A requirements.

.2 Accessories:

.1 Roof curb to NFPA 96A requirements.

.2 Grease drain and container 3.78 L [1 USgal] container.

2.7 AIR PRESSURE GAUGES

.1 Application:

.1 Across the following fans:

.1 SF-.... , SF-.... ,


.1 Ranges:

.1 Supply fans: 0-1500 Pa [0-6" w.g.].

.2 Return/exhaust fans: 0-500 Pa [0-2" w.g.].


.1 Dwyer Series 2000.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 FANS

.1 Install fans as indicated, complete with vibration isolators and seismic restraints as specified in Sections 23 05 48 and 23 05 49.

.2 Install fans with flexible connections on inlet ductwork and on discharge ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum 25 mm [1"] flex between ductwork and fan during running.

.3 Install connectors such that connectors are clear of the air stream. Provide flange extensions as necessary. Ensure accurate alignment of duct to fan.

.4 Provide safety screens where fan inlet or outlet is exposed.

.5 Provide belt guards on belt driven fans.

.6 Provide and install sheaves and belts required for final air balance.

.7 Assist the Balancing Agency in altering blade pitch angles as required for final air balance. Provide access to fan wheel for blade adjustment.

.8 Mount floor mounted fans on 100 mm [4"] thick concrete housekeeping bases (bases under Division 3).

.9 Mount roof mounted fans on curbs 200 mm [8"] minimum above roof.

3.2 KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST FANS

.1 Installation of commercial cooing kitchen hood/canopy exhaust fans shall be in accordance with latest edition of NFPA-96.





.2 Adjust height of roof curb as may be required to ensure top of fan discharge is a minimum 1.0 m [40”] from roof.

.3 Roof mounted exhaust fan shall be installed a minimum of 3.4 m [11 ft] away from all fresh air intakes and property lines located in the horizontal plan. Wall terminations shall be in accordance with latest edition of NFPA-96.

.4 Provide interlocks between the building fire alarm system, the kitchen hood fire suppression system, the normally closed gas supply solenoid to the kitchen appliances, the exhaust fan and the makeup air unit.

.5 A local switch shall be used to activate the kitchen exhaust fan. If the hood is equipped with a time clock, the local switch will not be required.

.6 When the exhaust fan is activated, the makeup air unit for the area shall be activated.

.7 If the makeup air unit is a direct-fired unit, proof of exhaust fan operation is required prior to starting the makeup air unit.

.8 Upon activation of the hood fire suppression system, the gas valve shall close, and the exhaust fan shall continue to operate. The exhaust fan operation is to be verified with the hood fire suppression system supplier to insure that it conforms to the requirements for the specific suppression system supplied.

.9 The hood fire suppression system panel shall signal the main fire alarm panel that in turn will turn off the makeup air unit for the kitchen area.

.10 Provide a manual momentary contact switch with seal in relay contacts to open the normally closed electric gas solenoid valve after a loss of power due to fire alarm shutdown or building power loss.

.11 Provide an emergency shutdown push/pull switch to turn the normally closed solenoid gas supply off to the kitchen equipment.

.12 In the event that the suppression system is supplied with a mechanical gas valve, the provision of a reset and an emergency shutdown switch is not required.

.13 All switches are to be clearly identified with lamicoid labels.

3.3 AIR PRESSURE GAUGES

.1 Mount gauges for easy visual inspection.

.2 All piping to be neatly formed in true vertical/horizontal lines free from kinks.

.3 Seal all penetrations of plenums or ducts.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 23 36 00543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 AIR TERMINAL UNITSNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 4


Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK





.1 ARI Standard 410 Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils

.2 ARI Standard 880 Standard for Air Terminals

.3 ARI Standard 885 Standard for Estimating Occupied Space Sound Levels in the Application of Air Terminals and Air Outlets.

.4 ASHRAE Standard 180 Methods of Testing for Rating Ducted Air Terminal Units


.1 All hydronic accessories, valves and fittings in EC and MH building suitable for a maximum working pressure of 1033 kPa [150 psig].

Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL

.1 Manufacturers, other than those listed in the acceptable manufacturers list, wishing to bid shall make a detailed submission responding to each point outlined in the specification in the exact same form. A listing of valve for valve taken from the drawings, shall be included showing the design selection and the alternate proposed with airflow capacities and minimum static pressure requirement.

.2 Selection of units to meet air quantities shown to be based on;

.1 minimum Inlet Air Pressure; 75 Pa [0.3 in wg],

.2 maximum room NC sound pressure level ( 2 x 10-4 microbar reference) at maximum inlet pressure to be less than 40 at discharge and 42 radiated for box with attenuator mounted exposed (without ceiling).

2.2 TERMINAL UNIT /AIR VALVE IDENTIFICATION

.1 The manufacturer shall number the units in accordance with numbers shown on the drawings. Secure 50 mm [2"] high, Gothic style self-adhesive, black stick on-letters, (Letrasign or Brady Quick-Align) on one side and on the bottom of all air valves.

2.3 CONTROLLERS

.1 Direct Digital Controllers (DDC) including actuators to be supplied by BMS Equipment Controllers, and factory mounted by Terminal Box Manufacturer. Costs associated with receiving, storage, installation, box control system connections and calibration to be included by Terminal Box Manufacturer.

.2 Coordinate the installation of the BMS supplied equipment with the BMS supplier to ensure that it is installed and operates fully in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.

.3 Air flow sensor to be provided by Terminal Box Manufacturer.

.4 Commission and factor test/ calibrate each box before leaving the factory.



2.4 AIR VALVES – SINGLE DUCT

.1 Standard of Acceptance: E.H. Price SDV-5000 (supply), REV5000 (return/exhaust), LDV5000 (special construction).


.1 pressure independent type with pneumatic velocity sensor, damper assembly, factory calibrated controller and actuator with adjustable minimum stop

.2 damper arranged "normally open" for morning warm-up.

.3 controller capable of maintaining air quantity within ±5% of set value, between zero and stipulated rated air flow,

.4 sound level below specified values when operating from minimum to maximum inlet static pressure.

.5 Air valves shall be supplied as a factory assembly unit, comprising, basic unit, access section, reheat coil and attenuator as specified.

.6 At an inlet velocity of 10 m/s [2000 fpm] the differential static pressure required to operate any air valve size shall not exceed 37 Pa [0.15" w.g.] for any unit with an attenuator section and without a reheat coil.

.7 Air valves shall incorporate a multi-point flow sensor.

.8 Casing constructed from 0.76 mm [22 ga] thick galvanized steel. Provide attachment tabs on the top of the casing for ceiling hangers.

.3 Unit Internal Insulation:

.1 Fibre Free Insulation:

.1 20 mm [3/4"] thick, spray coated, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation in sheet form, with self-adhering backing

.2 flame spread rating not to exceed 25, smoke development rating not to exceed 50,

.3 fastened to interior sheet metal surface with 100% coverage of adhesive, and fasteners at 1 pin per 0.2m2 [2 ft2] but not less than 1 row on each duct side.

.2 Liner fasteners:

.1 2.0 mm [1/16”] diameter pins,

.2 length selected to suit thickness of insulation,

.3 32 mm [1-1/4”] square Nylon retaining clips.

.4 Control Dampers:

.1 Heavy gauge steel damper with peripheral gasket and self-lubricated bronze oilite or Delrin bearings.

.2 Air leakage past closed damper not to exceed 2% of the nominal rating at 750 Pa [3"] inlet static pressure.

.5 Reheat Coils:

.1 Water reheat coils enclosed in galvanized steel casing and factory installed on air valves.

.2 Copper tubes and aluminum fins.

.3 Capacities as scheduled.

.6 Access Panels:

.1 200 mm x 125 mm [8" x 5"] lift-off galvanized access panel. Positive gasket seal and camlocks.

.2 Mounted in frame and located upstream of reheat coil on the top and bottom of air valve



.7 Sound Attenuators:

.1 Casing constructed from 0.76 mm [22 ga] thick galvanized steel. Provide attachment tabs on the top of the casing for ceiling hangers.

.2 Provide on box discharge, acoustically treated open end or multiple outlet attenuator 900mm [30”] long on boxes up to Size 10 and 1.5m [60”] long on boxes Size 12 and larger.

.3 Conceal edges by metal nosing at inlet and discharge, with notch and tuck fabrication and seams protected by Z strips

.4 Attenuator with FF fibre free media:

.1 20 mm [3/4"] thick, spray coated, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation in sheet form, with self-adhering backing

.2 flame spread rating not to exceed 25, smoke development rating not to exceed 50,

.3 fastened to interior sheet metal surface with 100% coverage of adhesive, and fasteners at 1 pin per 0.2m2 [2 ft2] but not less than 1 row on each duct side.

.8 Selection Range:

InletSize

SelectionRange(L/s)

MinimumTurndown(L/s)

OutletSize(Supply)

6 38 – 180 38 305 X 203

8 181 – 330 62 305 X 254

10 331 – 550 108 356 X 318

.9 Acoustic Requirements:

.1 Provide air valves as indicated on the project drawings and schedules, such that the noise criteria specified in Table 1 below, are not exceeded under the following site conditions. Meet all applicable Codes and all other specified requirements.

.1 375 Pa [1.5"] static pressure on supply and return/exhaust units.

.2 Armstrong Cortega 769 ceiling tile.

.3 Price SPD/ASPD series square plaque diffuser selected for 700 fpm neck velocity, as specified.

.4 Room absorption equivalent to a typical office or single hospital bed only (plus ceiling) (for Hospital applications).

.2 Submit proposed test details prior to testing. Note that test data are to include measured noise level (as opposed to sound power) under mock-up conditions, together with mock-up room test details, dimensions and measured absorption (using reference sound source). Submit statement of test accuracy.

.3 Provide measured data, together with details of added treatment required to meet the criteria, e.g. Thermaflex MK-E lined flexible connector, additional treatment to control radiated noise, etc.

MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE BACKGROUND NOISE LEVELS, NC

Max. NC Areas

30-40 Corridors

35 Offices

35 Kitchen Areas

45 Storage



.10 Controls and Actuators:

.1 Microprocessor based controller and damper actuator will be supplied by the Mechanical Contractor. The controller shall be provided in a preassembled unit for mounting on the air valve.

.2 Controller and actuator shall be field mounted on the air valve by the controls contractor.

.3 Controls arranged for pressure independent, constant volume operation or variable volume operation.

.4 Resettable to any air volume between zero and maximum rated volume.

.5 External taps for balancing gauge.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 BOX INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

.2 Support terminal boxes from building structure with angles, hangers and supplementary steel before installation of piping and connecting ductwork. Support air terminal units independently of ductwork.

.3 Provide seismic restraints in accordance with details in SMACNA Guidelines or alternatively slack cables may be used.

.4 Arrange for suitable ceiling access to units. Provide access doors or locate near easily removable ceiling components.

.5 Seal openings in box and attenuator for control, and power wiring.

.6 Provide flexible connections for heating coil piping and electrical connection.

.7 Provide isolation valves, control valve and balancing valves on piping connections.

3.2 DUCTWORK CONNECTIONS

.1 Connect inlet ductwork with rectangular duct of same size as terminal box inlet

.2 Support outlet ductwork independent from box.

.3 Provide access door in ductwork downstream of terminal box.

.4 Install units with a minimum of four duct diameters of straight inlet duct, same size as the inlet, upstream of the inlet.

.5 Where inlet flow deflections and/or turbulence alter factory calibration by more than 10%, installer shall field adjust the air volume calibration settings to compensate.

3.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

.1 Electrical Division 26 will provide 120 Volt, single phase power supply with a junction box for each group of terminal boxes with maximum of 12 terminal box controls fed from one junction box.

3.4 LEAKAGE TESTING

.1 Terminal boxes and attenuators to be included in ductwork leakage testing.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 23 37 00543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETSNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 2


Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK




Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL

.1 For details and performance, refer to separate equipment lists.

2.2 AIR TERMINALS

.1 Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be product of one manufacturer.

.2 Refer to drawings for sizes and air quantities.

.3 Base air outlet application as follows:

Room Type/Usage NC (max)

Corridors and Public Spaces 35-40

Offices, Kitchen Area 30-35

.4 All air terminals must be checked for compatibility with ceiling types. Refer to Architectural reflected ceiling plans.

.5 Ceiling tee-bar modules are in soft conversion metric, SI metric measurements unless where specifically noted otherwise.

.6 The manufacturer (other than the design listed) shall match performance data and indicate a specific comparison for each item, with the shop drawing submission.

.7 All ceiling mounted air terminals shall be provided with means for attachment of two seismic security wires at opposite corners of each air terminal.

.8 Provide concealed baffles, where necessary, to direct air away from walls, columns or other obstructions within the radius of air terminal operation.

.9 Provide auxiliary frames for diffusers located in drywall ceilings and grilles mounted in gyroc walls in public areas. In other areas the grilles should be attached to the ductwork, flanged to the outside of the wall opening.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 AIR TERMINALS

.1 Install with cadmium plated screws in countersunk holes where fastenings are visible.

.2 Install ductwork as high as practical, using offsets where required to obtain maximum duct neck lengths for diffusers.

.3 Refer to Architectural Reflected Ceiling plans for exact locations of air terminals.

.4 Paint ductwork behind grilles with matte black paint where duct or insulation surfaces are visible.

.5 Attach registers and grilles to branch ducts with duct necks having minimum length to prevent grille or register damper from protruding into branch duct.

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 23 37 00543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETSNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 2 of 2


.6 Where air terminals are installed in mechanical grid ceilings, provide at least two 12 ga. galvanized steel wire seismic security bridles per air terminal tied either to the building structure or to ceiling hanger wires. Attach security bridles at opposite corners of each air terminal and in such a manner that the air terminal cannot fall.

.7 Hand over door grilles to the General Contractor for installation.

.8 Diffuser, grille, and register cores in air systems shall be removable for cleaning

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 23 41 00543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATIONNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 3


Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


1.2 FILTERS – QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Filters shall be product of and supplied by one manufacturer.

.2 Filter media shall be ULC listed and labelled, Class I or Class II.

.3 Filters suitable for air at 100% RH and air temperatures between 3oC [37oF] and 50oC [122oF].

.4 Dust holding capacity: Air Filter Institute (AFI) Test.

.5 Efficiency: based on ASHRAE 52-76, atmospheric dust spot efficiency. "Absolute filter" efficiency shall be tested with 0.3 Poly-alpha-olefin (P.A.O.) smoke.

.6 Representative filters shall have been tested by an independent test laboratory and test results shall be made available on request.

Part 2 Products

2.1 FILTERS - GENERAL

.1 Filter identification shall be clearly marked on each filter.

.2 Provide two (2) sets of filter media (for each filter) - one for initial installation and one for handover to the owner as a spare. This does not apply to HEPA filters. Obtain signed receipt.

.3 All panel filter media used during "temporary heating" shall be replaced by new media on substantial completion.

.4 All filters sections shall be designed for 2.5 M/s [490 ft/min] maximum air velocity.

.5 Roll type filters, automatic advance or otherwise will not be considered as an acceptable means of filtration.

.6 The use of permanent washable type impingement filters is generally not acceptable.

2.2 FILTERS - PANEL TYPE


.1 50 mm [2"] thick disposable pleated cotton media.

.2 Enclosing frame shall be constructed from rigid, heavy-duty high wet strength beverage board with diagonal support members bonded to both sides of each pleat.

.3 Efficiency: MERV 8 per ASHRAE Standard 52.2 and an average dust spot efficiency of 25% to 30% per ASHRAE Standard 52.1.


.1 AAF AM-AIR 300

.2 Camfil 30/30.

2.3 FILTERS - FINAL


.1 Disposable bag type with fine glass fibre media, self-inflating with holding frame and not requiring rigid support basket.

.2 Efficiency: MERV 14 per ASHRAE Standard 52.2


.1 AAF Dri-Pak



.2 Camfil Hi-Flo

2.4 FILTER - HOLDING FRAMES

.1 Built-up Frames:

.1 Provide separate holding frames for each bank of panel filters and each bank of final filters.

.2 Factory fabricated from 1.6 mm [16 ga] galvanized steel with spring retaining clips and neoprene gaskets.

.2 Slide-in-Frames:

.1 Provide slide-in-channels for filters mounted in ductwork where noted. Provide hinged and gasketted access doors.

2.5 FILTER HOUSINGS - DUCT MOUNTED


.1 Factory manufactured with duct connection flanges.

.2 Rigid galvanized steel casing, minimum 1.47 mm [16 ga] thick.

.3 Housing shall have a high degree of sealing integrity. Filters shall fit tightly in housing with no air leakage between filters and between filters and housing.

.4 Extruded aluminum or steel tracks for slide-out, side withdrawal of filters.

.5 Hinged access door for filter servicing.


.1 AAF Poly-Seal

.2 Cambridge Side-Flo

.3 Farr GlidePack.

2.6 FILTER GAUGES (DIGITAL)

.1 Application:

.1 Provide individual unit for each filter bank.


.1 Programmable 0.7” LCD digital readout

.2 Accuracy – 1% full scale

.3 Stability – 1% full scale

.4 4-20 mA output signal for connection to the building DDC system.

.5 Ranges:

.1 Panel filters: 0-550 Pa [0-2" w.g.].

.2 Final filters: 0-500 Pa [0-2" w.g.].

.3 HEPA filters: 0-750 Pa [0-3" w.g.].


.1 Dwyer Series DM-2000-LCD.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 FILTERS

.1 Do not operate fan system connected to filter banks until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Provide new filters at handover to the Owner. Replace filters used during construction.

.2 Provide filter banks in arrangement shown with removal and access indicated. Demonstrate removal of filters prior to substantial completion.

.3 Provide and install Dwyer filter pressure gauges across each filter installation.



3.2 FILTER GAUGES

.1 Mount gauges for easy visual inspection.

.2 All piping to be neatly formed in true vertical/horizontal lines free from kinks.

.3 Seal all penetrations of plenums or ducts.

3.3 FILTER HOLDING FRAMES

.1 Built-up frames shall be installed and bolted together (and sealed air-tight with specified duct and plenum sealers) to form a filter bank.

.2 Provide necessary reinforcing for filter banks over three frames high. Brace with vertical steel stiffeners, min. 1.78 mm thick [14 ga] riveted or bolted to frames and attached to top and bottom of plenum. When bolting frames together provide spaces between holding frames as necessary to centre filters on coils.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 23 81 10543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 PACKAGED INDOOR HEATING/COOLING UNITSNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 4


Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


1.2 WARRANTY

.1 Refrigeration compressors to be warrantied for five [5] years.


.1 Fibre type insulation in supply or return airstreams is not permitted for this project.

Part 2 Products

2.1 KITCHEN MAKE-UP AIR UNIT (HYRDONIC HEAT / DX COOLING)

.1 General:

.1 Packaged single zone indoor heating unit, bearing CSA, CGA and ULC labels.

.2 Completely factory assembled, wired and complete with all necessary controls, ready for field connections. Manufacturer shall test operate unit at the factory before shipment.

.3 Units shall consist of but not be limited to the following components:

.1 Mixing box with motorized outdoor and return air dampers (where scheduled).

.2 Filter section.

.3 Return Fan section c/w relief air damper (where scheduled).

.4 Supply fan section.

.5 Gas indirect fired heat exchanger and burner.

.6 Controls as specified

.2 Cabinet:

.1 Unit shall be built-up on a structural steel base.

.2 Galvanized steel panels with baked enamel finish.

.3 Cabinet panels shall be fully insulated with 25 mm [1"] thick neoprene coated FEBRE FREE insulation.

.4 Cabinet panels shall be easily removable for service access to all components, wiring and inspection areas.

.3 Filters:

.1 General:

.1 Filter frames mounted in gasketted sliding channel mounting frames, suitable for side removal. Provide airtight seal between frames and surrounding surfaces.

.2 Prefilters:

.1 50 mm [2"] thick fibrous glass disposable type – Farr 30/30 or equal.

.2 MERV-8, average efficiency 25% to 30% to A.S.H.R.A.E. Test Standard 52 (Dust Spot).

.3 Final Filters:

.1 305 mm [12"] deep disposable pleated fine glass fibre media complete with disposable frame, U.L. Class 2 -Farr Riga-Flo 15. Units should also be capable of accepting 600 X 600 X 533 [24" X 24" X 21"] bag filters.



.2 MERV-14, average efficiency 50% to 55%, according to A.S.H.R.A.E. Test Standard 52 (Dust Spot).

.3 Provide air pressure gauge across final filters: Dwyer Series 2000.

.4 Fans:

.1 Supply fan: centrifugal, spring mounted, statically and dynamically balanced. V-belt drive with adjustable variable pitch motor pulley, fan and motor integrally mounted on isolation base, separated from unit casing with flexible connections and spring isolators. Spring isolators shall be seismically restrained.

.2 Provide high efficiency electric motors with minimum efficiencies as indicated in Section 23 05 13 for motors 3 HP and larger.

.5 Heat Exchangers and Burners:

.1 Gas fired, primary drum and multiple flue passes, constructed of titanium stainless steel.

.2 Heat exchanger shall have a 10 year warranty.

.3 Positive pressure gas burner, factory mounted, wired and fire tested complete with operating and safety controls.

.6 Controls:

.1 Electrical Panel:

.1 A pre-wired control panel to include main power disconnect switch, and motor starters, control transformers, and control relays, wired to a numbered terminal strip to receive interlocks, and remote thermostat.

.2 Remote Control Panel:

.1 Provide a remote readout/control panel for all units. The panel shall be located where indicated on the drawings.

.2 The panel shall contain the following:

.1 System on-off switch and status "On" light for each unit.

.2 "Heat On" status light for each unit.

.3 Final filters "Dirty" status light for each unit.

.4 Outdoor air damper "Minimum - Maximum" position switch for each unit.

.5 0 to 12 hour timer for each unit, to override time clock night set-back.

.6 Space temperature selector switch for each unit.

.7 Programmable 365 day master time clock with independent channels for each unit. The time clock shall enter each unit into DAY (OCCUPIED) or NIGHT (UNOCCUPIED) modes as preprogrammed. Time clock shall be mounted inside remote control panel.

.3 Space Sensors:

.1 Provide all required space sensors for day and night mode control.

.4 Control Sequences

.1 General:

.1 All Air Handling units shall be controlled and monitored by the common remote-control panel with functions as specified above. The panel on/off switch shall interrupt the unit’s 24-volt control power and shut down the respective unit.

.2 The programmable time clock shall initiate the Day (Occupied) or Night (unoccupied) cycles independently for each unit. The units



shall be programmed in such a manner as not to start all units simultaneously.

.2 Return Air Unit - Day Cycle:

.1 The outdoor and return air dampers shall modulate to the minimum outdoor position as dictated by the setting of the potentiometer located on the control panel and supply fan shall start.

.2 The space temperature shall be controlled by a solid-state sensor located in the space which shall be adjustable from a selector switch on the remote control panel.

.3 The minimum discharge air temperature shall be controlled by a unit mounted adjustable solid-state controller which shall modulate the burner on a 1:6 ratio.

.4 On a call for cooling the burner shall be locked out and the mixing dampers shall modulate from minimum position to 100% outdoor air as required and shall modulate open relief dampers. (24 volt actuators).

.5 Night Cycle: (For each unit)

.6 The supply fan shall stop and the outdoor and return air dampers shall go to the 100% return air position.

.7 On a call for heat from the space sensor, which shall be switched to the night set point, the supply fan and burner shall cycle to maintain the night set point. Night set point to be adjustable.

.8 The night cycle to be overridden by the respective 0 to 12-hour timer.

.3 100% Outdoor Air Unit - Day Cycle:

.1 On unit start up the outdoor air damper shall open. When fully open the damper end switch makes and the supply fan shall start.

.2 The burner shall modulate from a unit mounted discharge air sensor to maintain a minimum of 14.4oC [58oF] discharge air temperature.

.3 The room temperature shall be controlled by a solid-state room sensor which shall be adjustable from a selector switch located in the remote control panel.

.4 An auxiliary contact shall make when the unit starts to activate exhaust fan.

.4 100% Outdoor Air Unit - Night Cycle:

.1 The supply fan shall stop and the outside air damper shall close.

.2 On a call for heat from the space sensor which shall be switched to the night set point, the outdoor air damper shall open and the supply fan and burner shall cycle to maintain the night set point. Night set point to be adjustable.

.3 The night cycle to be overridden by the 0 to 12-hour timer.

.5 Pre-wired unit completely so connection of power supply and field wiring from unit to remote control panel shall make unit operative.

.6 Remote control panel shall contain on-off (auto) switch, (summer-winter switch), indicating lights for supply fan (exhaust fan), pilot operation, burner operation, clogged filter indication (and lockout indication).



.7 Interlock unit to start when exhaust fan is running. Interlock burner to operate when flow switch located in exhaust duct proves flow. (Interlock exhaust fan speed control with inlet damper and burner profile damper to provide dual volume air capacity). (Interlock exhaust fans to inlet damper and burner profile to provide dual volume operation).

.8 Fan discharge thermostat shall control modulating gas valve to maintain supply air temperature. (Provide remote discharge thermostat adjustment). (Provide room thermostat to reset discharge thermostat minimum of three temperature levels).

.9 Provide time clock to operate fan system (off at night) (on low volume at night).

.10 Interlock with carbon monoxide monitoring system to operate fan on high volume when pre-determined carbon monoxide concentration detected.

.11 Provide safety controls to provide correct air flow before energizing pilot and to sense pilot ignition before activating main gas valve.

.12 Provide manual reset low and high limit controls to maintain supply air tempera-ture between set point and shut fan down if temperature are exceeded.

.13 Provide purge period timer to delay burner ignition and automatically bypass low limit control.

.7 Refrigeration Package:

.1 Evaporator Coil: Copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with galvanized drain pan and expansion valve.

.2 Compressor: Hermetic, 3600 r/min maximum resiliently mounted with positive lubrication, crankcase heater, high pressure control, motor overload protection, service valves and drier.

.3 Condenser: Aluminum fin and copper tube coil, direct drive axial fan resiliently mounted, galvanized fan guard.

.4 Operating Controls: Low voltage, adjustable room thermostat controls compres-sor, condenser fan and supply fan to maintain room temperature setting.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Install units as indicated and to manufacturers' recommendations.

.2 Provide and install all necessary refrigerant piping and electrical connection between "split" units.

3.2 EQUIPMENT PREPARATION AND START-UP

.1 Provide services of manufacturer's field engineer to set and adjust equipment for operation as specified.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 23 82 05543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 HEATING/COOLING COILSNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 2


Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


Part 2 Products

2.1 COILS - DIRECT EXPANSION



.1 Colmac

.3 Ratings: ARI Standard 410 certified.

.4 Fins: Aluminum fins continuous across entire coil width, with full fin collars for maximum fin-tube contact and even spacing. Fins mechanically bonded to tubes. Fins not to exceed 12 in 25 mm [1"].

.5 Tubes: 16 mm [5/8"] O.D. seamless copper tubes with return bends brazed into tube ends.

.6 Casing: Galvanized steel, formed end supports and top and bottom channels with additional center support on coils over 1067 mm [42"].

.7 Distributor: Compatible with condensing unit.

.8 Testing: To Canadian Refrigeration Code. Dehydrated, sealed with nitrogen charge.

2.2 COILS - LIQUID



.1 Colmac

.3 Ratings: ARI Standard 410 certified.

.4 Fins: Aluminum fins continuous across entire coil width, with full fin collars for maximum fin-tube contact and even spacing. Fins mechanically bonded to tubes. Fins not to exceed 12 in 25 mm [1"].

.5 Tubes: 16 mm [5/8"] O.D. Seamless copper tubes with return bends brazed into tube ends.

.6 Headers: Cast iron, copper or steel pipe.

.7 Casing: Galvanized Steel, formed end supports and top and bottom channels with additional center support on coils over 1067 mm [42"].

.8 Casing (cooling coils): Coil frames shall be 304 SS.

.9 Connections: Drain and vent threaded plug connections.

.10 Testing: Factory air pressure test under water to 1700 kPa [250 psig] and hydraulic tested to 860 kPa [125 psig].

.11 Glycol Coils: Where glycol coils are specified, coils shall be suitable for use with ethylene or propylene glycol at the scheduled percentage by volume.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Refer to manufacturer's installation drawings.

.2 Install according to piping layout. Provide for pipe movement during normal operation.

.3 Provide airtight seal between coil and duct or unit cabinets.

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 23 82 05543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 HEATING/COOLING COILSNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 2 of 2


.4 Verify electrical service work with characteristics stamped on unit.

.5 Cooling coil supports shall use Type 304 stainless steel.

.6 All bolts and fastenings shall be stainless steel.

.7 Connect water supply to bottom of supply header and return water connection to top in order to provide self-venting and reverse return arrangement.

.8 Provide coil drain pans under all coils; not just cooling coils. Drain lines for coils other than cooling coils may be capped outside of unit casing.

.9 Ensure coils and fins and flanges are not damaged. Replace loose and damaged fins. Comb out bent fins unless they need to be replaced.

.10 Drain line from drain pans shall be minimum 32 mm [1-1/4”]

.11 Pipe drain lines to floor drain with deep seal trap and trap primer.

.12 Venting:

.1 On up-fed units provide screw driver vent on convectors and standard air vent with cock on continuous wall convectors.

.2 On unit heaters and cabinet unit heaters provide standard air vent with cock unless piping is installed above units and is self-venting into mains.

.3 Pitch heating elements to assist air venting.

.13 Valves:

.1 Install isolating gate valve on supply and lock shield globe valve on return, together with control valve shown or specified in the Controls Section.

.2 In public areas use lock shield type on supply and return for isolation.

.14 Completion

.1 Clean coils and comb fins on finned elements.

.2 Set dampers and isolating valves open.

.3 Re-finish units damaged during installation.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 23 99 65543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 HVAC EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERSNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 2



SHOP DWG.

ACCESS DOORS Acudor, Maxam, Milcor, Mifab X

ACCESS PANELS Nailor, Ventlok X

AIR CONDITIONING UNITS Carrier, Mitsubishi, Sanyo, Trane, Fujitsu X

AIR HANDLING UNITS Haakon, Huntair, Scott Springfield, York, Engineered Air X

AIR TERMINALS Price, Nailor, Titus X

AIR TERMINAL UNITS Price, Nailor, Tempmaster, Titus, Trane, X

BACKDRAFT DAMPERS Airolite 625, Penn CBD-6, Ruskin CBD-4, Nailor X

COILS

DX, Liquid, Steam Aerofin, Colmac, Eng. Air, McQuay, Trane X

CONDENSING UNITS

Comfort Cooling Carrier, McQuay, Trane, Lennox, York X

Product Refrigeration Copeland, Keeprite, Prestcold, Tecumesh X

CONTROL DAMPERSArrow-Foil PBDAF & OBDAF, Honeywell Moduflow D642 & D643, Johnson Proportion/Aire D-1200 & D-1300, Ruskin CD36, Tamco 1000, Nailor 1010,

X

DUCT CONNECTORS FLEXIBLE

Duro Dyne "Durolon", Ventfabrics - "Ventlon", Dynair Hypalon X

DUCTWORK - SPIRAL United Sheet Metal, B.C. Ventilating, Spiro-Lok X

DUCTWORK FLEXIBLE Thermaflex SLP10, Flexmaster FAB4, Wiremold 57 X

EXPANSION JOINTS Flexonics, Hyspan, Uniroyal, Keflex, Mason, Goodall, Victaulic X

FANS Barry, Chicago, Northern Blower, Trane, Twin City, Loren Cook, Delhi, Greenheck, Penn

X

FILTERS AAF, Cambridge, Camfil Farr, Viledon, Tridec X

FILTER GAUGES Dwyer, Cambridge X

FIRE/ SMOKE DAMPERS Controlled Air, Ruskin, Nailor X

FLOW MEASURING DEVICES

Air (Probe Type) Air Monitor "Volu-Probe", Annubar "Airbar" Paragon Controls X

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 23 99 65543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 HVAC EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERSNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 2 of 2



SHOP DWG.

Liquid (Probe Type)Annubar, Accutube, Flo-Probe, Gerand, Measurell, Preso, Valitube

X

FLOW METERS Eagle Eye, Gerand, Preso, Western Meter X

INSULATION - DUCT Certainteed, Fiberglas, Knauf, Johns-Manville, PPG, Manson X

INSULATION - PIPING Certainteed, Fiberglas, Knauf, Johns-Manville, PPG, Manson X

INSULATION – FIBRE FREE Armacell AP/Coilflex, K-flex


Mason, Victaulic(flexible couplings) X

PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

Watts

SEISMIC ISOLATORS Mason, USS Snubbers X

SILENCERSIAC Acoustics, Korfund, Vibro-Acoustics, Vibron Kinetics, Ruskin, VAW Systems

X

VALVES Jenkins, Anvil, Crane, Red-White, Toyo, Kitz, Nibco, Apollo

VARIABLE SPEED DRIVESABB, Allen-Bradley, Baldor, Hitachi, Graham, Siemens, Teco-Westinghouse, Toshiba

X

VIBRATION ISOLATORS Mason, Korfund, VMC, Vibro-Acoustic X

NOTE:

.1 The design is based upon the equipment listed in the equipment schedules and/or underlined in the H.V.A.C. Equipment Supplier Schedules.

.2 X Denotes required submission.

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 HVAC SUBTRADES



BALANCING:

K.D. ENGINEERING CO.

WESTERN MECHANICAL SERVICES

MDT SYSTEMS LTD.

ACCU-AIR BALANCE CO.(BC) Inc.

COMMISSIONING:

K.D. ENGINEERING CO.

AIRMEC SYSTEMS LTD.


MDT SYSTEMS LTD.

OPERATING &

MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

K.D. ENGINEERING


MDT SYSTEMS LTD.

CLEANING AGENCIES:

DUCTWORK POWER SUCTION SERVICES LTD.

ACE MOBILE POWER SERVICES LTD.

CLEAN AIR SERVICES CANADA LTD.

WATER PIPING BIRD ARCHER

GRACE DEARBORN

IPAC CHEMICALS

PACE CHEMICALS

SAVOLITE

CHEMICAL TREATMENT:

BIRD ARCHER

GRACE DEARBORN INC.

IPAC CHEMICALS

PACE CHEMICALS

SAVOLITE

ENERCON WATER TREATMENT

END OF SECTION






Common Work for Control Systems 25 05 00

Instrumentation and Control Devices 25 09 13

Controls Equipment Manufacturers 25 99 65

END OF SECTION


543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 COMMON WORK FOR CONTROL SYSTEMS



Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 The new system shall be fully integrated with the existing system and operator interface shall be through the existing BMS



1.4 GENERAL

.1 The control system is to be fully microprocessor based.

.2 The controls system is to be complete with all necessary control components and connections to achieve the specified functions and to permit the H.V.A.C. systems to perform properly in the manner described and as hereinafter specified.

.3 The controls contractor shall furnish all materials, including all central computer hardware and software, operator input/output peripherals, standalone DDC panels, automation sensors and controls and wiring. The controls contractor shall be responsible for the design, installation, supervision and labour services, calibration, all software programming, and checkout necessary for a complete and fully operational Building Automation System.

.4 The control system is to be set up and adjusted to achieve optimum operation of the H.V.A.C. system. This includes sequencing, timing and readjustment, as required. Modifications to the sequence of operation using points indicated will not be considered as extra to the Contract. These modifications to continue through the construction period, commissioning period and warranty period as required to achieve optimum operation of the mechanical system.

.5 This Section is a performance specification clarified in certain sections to establish minimum standard of equipment, installation or level of control. The specification describes the basic functions required but not all of the installation details or components. This Trade is expected to have sufficient experience to be able to design and estimate the cost of an appropriate control system. Materials and work necessary to achieve a satisfactory result will not be considered extra to the contract.

.6 The contractor shall review all contract documents and visit the site if possible, prior to the closing date of the tender and site confirm the requirements regarding the routing of interconnecting transmission network, etc..

.7 When preparing shop drawings, review the proposed sequences, suggest improvements and review these with the Consultant.

.8 Work with the other parties involved in commissioning, assess how the programming can be modified to improve function, review this with the Consultant and modify the programming as instructed by the Consultant.

.9 The control system shall be a modular, flexible and fully commissioned Direct Digital Control (DDC) System except that controls not scheduled on the points list may be electric. Items identified in the sequence of operation as being under DDC control but which are not included in the points list shall be included in the DDC system.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 and Division 25.





.2 Shop drawings shall include:

.1 Control centre layouts.

.2 Manufacturer's descriptive technical literature for all equipment and devices.

.3 Interconnection schematics.

.4 Wiring and piping diagrams.

.5 One-line diagram from sensor and control points to Field Interface device and/or standalone DDC panel including all components and cables.

.6 Terminal cabinets, including termination listing.

.7 Written description indicating sequence of operation. Shop drawings will be rejected if the written description is not included with the submission. Sequences should reference English descriptors and labels for each point described.

.8 All input/output points which shall include the following information associated with each point.

.1 Sensing element type and location.

.2 Details of associated field wiring schematics and schedules.

.3 Software and programming details.

.9 Detailed block diagrams of transmission trunk routing and configuration.

.10 Valve and damper schedules indicating size, configuration, capacity and locations. If size varies greater than 10%, obtain approval of Consultant.

.11 Copies of all system graphics complete with system specific point labels.

1.6 OPERATING & MAINTENANCE MANUALS

.1 The maintenance manual data is intended to cover the operation and maintenance of all control systems and equipment installed. Forward 3 copies of the Controls and Instrumentation section of the operating and maintenance manuals to the Balancing Agency to ensure the binding and format of material are compatible. Ensure sufficient time has been given to the Balancing Agency for the compiling of the complete operating and maintenance manuals by the commissioning deadline. One complete manual shall be furnished prior to the time that system or equipment tests are performed.

.2 The manuals shall include the name, address and telephone number of the control subcontractor installing the systems and a list of emergency numbers for service personnel. The manuals shall have a table of contents and be assembled to conform to the table of contents with the tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject.

.3 Refer to Section 23 05 00 for additional requirements.

1.7 WARRANTY

.1 Refer to General Conditions.

.2 The system including all hardware and software components shall be warranted for a period of one year following the date of final acceptance. Any manufacturing defects arising during this warranty period shall be corrected without cost to the Owner.

.3 All applicable software as detailed in this specification shall be updated by the Controls Contractor free of charge during the warranty period. This will ensure that all system software will be the most up-to-date software available from the Controls Contractor. All future patches to the software shall be made available to the Owner.

.4 Repairs required by a total system failure, or the malfunction of any priority portion of the system shall be considered an emergency repair, and shall be performed within eight (8) hours of the report of the failure.

.5 Repairs of a non-emergency nature shall be promptly repaired on the next normal business day.





.6 Provide written assurance that a local service centre will be maintained with a complete stock of replacement parts, and capable of servicing any and all troubles in the system.

.7 Use of installed equipment during construction shall not shorten or alter the warranty period as specified in the General Conditions.

.8 Take note of and provide any extended warranties specified.

1.8 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS, WIRING AND CONDUIT

.1 By Division 25 Control Systems:

.1 All control system components to make a complete and operable system, except those supplied as part of packaged equipment controls, but including all auto-sequencing devices and electrical interlocks required to accomplish the sequences specified hereafter. Refer to the electrical equipment schedule, the electrical drawings and the electrical specification, which describes the limits of the extent to the work in Division 26 serving mechanical systems. Materials, equipment, connections and power not provided by Division 26 but required for the Control System shall be provided under this section.

.2 All control circuit transformers (120/1/60 or 24/1/60 and as designated).

.3 All control wiring and metallic conduit for mechanical system controls.

.4 Supply, installation and connection of all electric control items including: damper motors, relays, outside sensors, sub-master control circuits, safety devices, electric thermostats, aquastats, flow switches, wiring to terminal strips, proportional controllers, controllers, etc..

.5 All wiring and conduit from power distribution system to any control devices needing power (including B.M.S components)

.6 Be responsible for coordinating with Division 26.

.7 Electrical work installed under Division 25 shall be to the standards specified under Division 26.

.2 By Division 26 Electrical:

.1 All power wiring and conduit from power distribution system up to and including connection to all motors and starters.

.2 All disconnect switches required (unless specified in schedules as being integral with equipment).

.3 All motor protection switches, stop-start switches, magnetic starters, contactors and hand-off-automatic selector switches except those supplied as part of packaged equipment.

.4 Terminal strips within the motor control centres (MCC) for control connections.

.5 Fire alarm signals.

.3 Note:

.1 All magnetic starters for equipment shall have the following features supplied under Division 26:

.1 Hand-off-automatic selector or on-off selector or start-stop buttons in cover with hand-automatic bridge if applicable.

.2 120-volt coils.

.3 120-volt control transformer.

.4 Four auxiliary dry contacts for interlocks; two normally open and two normally closed.

.2 The Controls Contractor is responsible for reading Division 26 plans and specifications to determine scope of responsibility and standards.

.4 Wiring:





.1 Carrier System – Open, exposed areas including mechanical, electrical and equipment rooms:

.1 All wiring shall be run in EMT conduit except the final 900mm of wiring to all operators and to all sensors subject to vibration, which shall be run in flexible metallic conduit.

.2 Provide steel fittings with nylon throats for all conduit connections.

.2 Carrier System – Concealed, accessible areas.

.1 Class II low voltage BMS open cable, neatly bundled, shall be routed parallel to building lines. Cable may follow ductwork routing and may be tied to the side or top of the ducting at duct supports, using suitable cable ties. If cabling does not follow ducting, it shall be fixed to the structure, supported at a minimum of every 5m. Open cable must be properly rated per electrical code.

.3 Wire:

.1 Line voltage power or switched power wiring - 12-gauge copper wire minimum.

.2 Line voltage control wiring - 14-gauge copper wire, length not to exceed 50 meters; 12 gauge copper wire, lengths exceeding 50 meters.

.3 Low voltage - minimum 22-gauge wire as directed by applicable electrical codes and requirements. 24-gauge wire for thermostat cables

.4 Cable:

.1 Data transmission cable shall be minimum 18-gauge twisted pairs (shielding as per manufacturers recommendations).

.5 Note:

.1 Run carrier system parallel to building lines.

.2 Support conduit carrier system one meter on centre independent of piping, ductwork and equipment.

.3 All wiring shall be concealed in finished spaces.

.4 Seal all penetrations through fire separations or walls as per code requirements.

.5 Identify all junction box covers with control company label.

.6 Identify with colour bands, all conduits at all junction and pullboxes, at both sides of wall and floors and at not more than 7.5 m [25 Ft] intervals along the length. Identification bands to be sprayed on and not less than 100mm [4"] wide. Bands to be pink in colour unless in conflict with Division 26 colours.

.7 Use colour coded conductors.

.8 Adhere to all applicable electrical codes and regulations.

.9 Obtain electrical permit.

.10 For non-CSA equipment where required by electrical code, submit to Inspection Authorities and obtain approval prior to installation of equipment on site.

1.9 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED FOR INSTALLATION UNDER OTHER SECTIONS

.1 The following equipment shall be supplied under this section but installed under the appropriate trade sections of Division :

.1 Automatic control valves.

.2 Temperature sensor wells.





.3 Automatic control dampers.

.4 Pressure tappings.

.5 Static pressure sensors.

.6 Flow switches.

.2 The Controls Subcontractor shall be responsible for arranging, coordinating and supervising the installation of the above devices in a suitable manner and readily accessible location.

1.10 FREEZE PROTECTION

.1 All air supply handling units containing coils shall have a non-recycling, manual reset, electric line voltage freeze protection controller that will stop the system upon sensing 4oC.

.2 The freeze protection controllers shall contain an additional set of dry contacts that will close on freeze detection for remote alarm indication at the B.M.S.

.3 The freeze protection contacts shall be connected on the common line after the H.O.A. selector switch.

1.11 ALARMS - GENERAL

.1 No alarm shall be triggered for a device until the device has been started and is in stable operation. Use software time delays to achieve this effect.

.2 Generate an alarm on the B.M.S. if any equipment is not in the intended operating condition or if any analog input is not within the intended operating range.

1.12 IDENTIFICATION

.1 Identify all controls with symbols relating directly to the control diagram. Use plasticized tags, engraved brass, aluminum, metalphoto or lamicoid labels and secure them to, or adjacent to, the control devices with key chains or cable ties.

.2 All manual switches supplied by this trade, unless they come with standard nameplates, shall be labelled with engraved lamicoid plastic nameplates to clearly indicate the service. Wording on nameplates shall be subject to approval by the Consultant.

.3 Where "day" and "night" thermostats are adjacent to one another they shall be labelled with engraved lamicoid plastic nameplates.

.4 Motor control centre and motor starters should be provided with labels identifying that motors are under remote control.

.5 Mount an input/output layout sheet within each main DDC panel. This sheet shall include the name of the points connected to each controller channel.

.6 Identify all DDC panels and associated devices with symbols relating directly to the control diagram. Provide durable wire labels for each input and output point with the following information:

.1 Point descriptor.

.2 Point type and channel number.

.3 Corresponding DDC panel number.

1.13 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING AND CALIBRATION

.1 Program each standalone DDC panel immediately following installation.

.2 Set up and calibrate all control loops and sensors during the initial start-up of the systems and check, recalibrate and readjust as necessary during the Owner's Demonstration and Instruction period.

.3 Upon completion of the installation, perform all necessary testing and debugging operations satisfactorily.





.4 Perform all modifications and alterations as required to correct any deficiencies noted during these tests.

.5 Check sensor calibration and control system operation during the first heating season and prior to the first cooling season.

.6 Following each visit submit printed graphs of trend logs one week in duration with hourly samples for all analog inputs connected to each DDC panel.

1.14 VERIFICATION OF SYSTEM COMMISSIONING

.1 Preliminary Tests

.1 After installation of each part of the system and completion of mechanical and electrical hook-up, perform tests to confirm correct installation and functioning of equipment.

.2 Notify the Consultant in writing at least seven days before testing is to take place stating the following:

.1 Location and part of system to be tested.

.2 Describe testing procedure and anticipated results.

.3 Provide all necessary testing equipment and personnel.

.4 Provide portable 2-way radios for communications during demonstrations. Provide three units on the same frequency and of sufficient power and quality as to be useful throughout the building.

.5 Perform tests in presence of the Consultant.

.6 Demonstrate the proper operation of each component.

.7 Correct any deficiencies and re-test in the presence of the Consultant, until designated part of the system performs satisfactorily.

.2 Final Operational Acceptance Test

.1 A final operational test of not less than thirty (30) consecutive days, twenty-four (24) hours per day, shall be conducted on the complete and total installed and operational Control System to demonstrate that it is functioning properly in accordance with all requirements of this specification.

.2 The correct operation of all monitored and controlled points shall be demonstrated as well as the operation and capabilities of all sequences, reports, specialized control algorithms, diagnostics, and all other software. If the equipment operates at an average effectiveness level (AEL) of at least 95% during the performance test period of thirty (30) consecutive calendar days, it will be deemed to have met the Acceptable Standard of Performance, and final acceptance of the system shall be made, provided the contractor has satisfied all other requirements of this specification.

.3 The average effectiveness level (AEL) is defined as the ratio between the total thirty-day test period less any system downtime accumulated within that period, and the thirty-day test period.

.4 In the event the required AEL is not reached during the initial thirty (30) consecutive calendar day period, the final operational acceptance test period shall be extended on a day-to-day basis until the required AEL is reached for thirty (30) consecutive calendar days.

.5 Downtime shall result whenever the control system is unable to fulfill all required functions detailed within this specification due to any malfunction of either BMS hardware or software. Any defect of hardware or software shall be corrected when it occurs before the test may be resumed. Downtime created by non-BMS equipment or activities will not be considered as downtime for the AEL calculation.





1.15 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION TO OWNER

.1 The Controls Contractor shall provide the services of competent instructors who will give full instruction to designated personnel in the adjustment, operation and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the equipment and system specified.

.2 The training shall be oriented toward the system installed rather than being a general (canned) training course. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the subject matter they are to teach.

.3 The number of person-days (eight hours) of instruction furnished shall be as specified below as a minimum.

.4 A training manual shall be provided for each trainee which describes in detail the data included in each training program. All equipment and material required for classroom training shall be provided by the Contractor.

.5 Training Program: The training program shall be accomplished in two phases.

.1 First phase: this phase shall be for a period of at five days at a time mutually agreeable between the Contractor and Owner. Operating personnel will be trained in the functional operations of the system installed and the procedures that the operators will employ for system operation. First phase training shall include the following:

.1 General control system architecture.

.2 System communications.

.3 Operation of computer and peripherals.

.4 Elementary preventative maintenance.

.5 Report generation.

.6 Operator control functions.

.7 Colour graphics generation.

.2 Second phase: this phase of training shall be conducted four to eight weeks after system acceptance for a period of three days. The training shall include as a minimum, but not be limited to:

.1 A review of Phase 1 training.

.2 Equipment maintenance - this training shall include:

.1 General equipment layout.

.2 Trouble shooting of all control system components.

.3 Preventative maintenance of all control system components.

.4 Sensors and controls maintenance and calibration.

.3 Programming - this training shall include:

.1 System architecture.

.2 Application programs.

.3 DDC panel programming.

.4 Software access code review.

1.16 MAINTENANCE SERVICE DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD

.1 The Contractor shall provide all services, materials and equipment necessary for the maintenance of the entire Control System, for a period concurrent with the warranty period. Any necessary material required for the maintenance work shall be provided by the Contractor.

.2 The Controls Contractor shall provide one minor inspection per quarter or as required by the manufacturer and two major inspections per year, and all service for the required maintenance.





.3 Major Inspections: these inspections shall include but not be limited to the following:

.1 Work as detailed hereinafter for minor inspections.

.2 Clean all peripheral equipment, CPU, interface panels, multiplexing panels and micro processor interior and exterior surfaces.

.3 Provide signal, voltage and system isolation checks of all CPU, interface panels, multiplexing panels and peripherals.

.4 Provide mechanical adjustments, new ribbons and necessary maintenance on printers.

.5 Check and/or calibrate each field input/output device.

.6 Run system software diagnostics as required.

.4 Minor Inspections: These inspections shall include but not be limited to the following:

.1 Provide visual and operational checks to all CPU, peripheral equipment, interface panels, multiplexing panels, and field devices.

.2 Change filter and check fan for all CPU's peripheral equipment as required.

.3 Provide complete back up of BMS system.

.4 Regular service calls: these calls shall be performed during regular working hours, 8:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. Monday through Friday excluding legal holidays.

.5 Emergency Service:

.1 Tthe Owner will initiate service calls when there is indication that the control system is not functioning properly.

.2 The Contractor shall have qualified control personnel available during the warranty period to provide service to the "critical" control system components whenever required at no additional cost to the Owner.

.3 The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a telephone number where the service mechanic can be reached at all times. The service mechanic shall be on the job ready to service the control system within the next eight (8) hours, after receiving a request for service and the work shall be performed continuously until the control system is back in reliable operating condition.

.4 Repairs of a non-emergency nature shall be promptly repaired on the next normal business day.

.6 Records and Logs: records and logs shall be kept of each maintenance task.

.7 System Modifications: recommendations for system modification shall be provided in writing to the Consultant. No system modification, including operating parameters and control settings, shall be made without prior approval.

.8 Software: provide implementation of all software maintenance updates. These shall be accomplished as required and full coordination with control system supervisory personnel shall be maintained.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 25 09 13543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 INSTURMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICESNORTHERN HEALTH PAGE 1 of 11


Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK



.1 Provide all remote sensing points and instrumentation as required for the complete operational capability of the Control System. All sensors shall have the accuracies as stated hereinafter. Hysteresis, relaxation time, span, maximum / minimum limits, etc. shall also be accounted for in all application of sensors and controls.

.2 All instruments of a particular category shall be of the same type and manufacture.

.3 All external trim material shall be completely corrosion resistant with all internal parts assembled in watertight, shockproof, vibration proof, heat resistant assembly.

.4 Use standard conduit box termination with screwdriver connector block unless otherwise specifically stated.

.5 Operating conditions 0C to 60C with 10-90% RH (non-condensing) unless otherwise specifically stated.

Part 2 Products

2.1 AIR VALVE CONTROLLERS

.1 Microprocessor based terminal unit controllers (TUC's) (ASC – ASHRAE’s standards for naming unitary controllers) and damper actuators for the air valves will be supplied by the Controls Contractor. The TUC's shall be provided in a pre-assembled control box for mounting on the air valve. The multi-point flow sensor shall be supplied and installed by the air valve manufacturer.

.2 The necessary interface requirements for the multi-point flow sensor shall be provided by the Controls Contractor (confirm exact requirements with the air valve manufacturer).

.3 Controller and actuator shall be factory mounted on the air valve by the air valve manufacturer.

.4 The Controls Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the controllers and damper actuators are suitable for the units and that the characteristics of the boxes listed herein are met.

.5 Controls arranged for pressure independent, variable volume and constant volume operation.

.6 Resettable to any air volume between zero and maximum rated volume.

2.2 CURRENT SENSING (CR)

.1 Design: Nelsen-Kuljian; Greystone, Veris, RIB (Functional Devices).

.2 Range: 0-120 amps.

.3 Accuracy: +/-1%.

.4 Split core type if required by owner

.5 Interface care:

.1 +/-1% accuracy.

.2 Integral zero and span adjustment.

.3 1-5 VDC or 4-20 mA output for full range input.

2.3 CONTROL AND SMOKE DAMPERS




.1 Provide control dampers configured as follows:

.1 Modulating; opposed blade dampers.

.2 Mixing; parallel blade dampers.

.3 Two position; parallel blade dampers.

.2 Assemblies - rigid and adequately braced with corner gussets.

.3 Galvanized steel or extruded aluminum frames.

.4 Maximum frame dimensions - 1220 mm [48"] wide and 1220 mm [48"] high, unless otherwise indicated. Multiple sections to have stiffening mullions.

.5 Maximum blade width - 200 mm [8"].

.2 Standard control dampers:

.1 Minimum performance, based on 610x610 [24"x24"] damper size as tested in an independent testing laboratory:

.1 Maximum 87 Pa [0.35"] static pressure drop at 15.2 M/s [3000 fpm] velocity (damper fully open).

.2 Maximum 55 L/s / sq m [10.75 cfm/sq.ft] leakage at 747 Pa [3" wg] (Damper fully closed).

.3 Maximum blade length of 1219mm [48"] suitable for minimum 622 Pa [2.5" wg] and 7.6 M/s [1500 fpm] velocity.

.2 Minimum 1.6mm [16 ga] single skin galvanized steel blades with longitudinal groove reinforcement.

.3 Synthetic sleeve type bearings (no metal to metal contact).

.4 Linkage concealed within the damper frame.

.5 Square or hexagonal axles locked into blades.

.6 Synthetic rubber or PVC coated fabric seals mechanically locked into the blade edge (adhesive or clip-on type seals not acceptable).

.7 Flexible metal compression type or extruded synthetic rubber jamb seals.

.8 Standard of Acceptance: Ruskin CD36.

.3 Low leakage control dampers:


.1 Maximum 62 Pa [0.25"] static pressure drop at 15.2 M/s [3000 fpm] (damper fully open).

.2 Maximum 55 L/s / sq m [10.75 cfm/sq.ft] leakage at 747 Pa [3" wg] (Damper fully closed).

.3 Maximum blade length of 1219mm [48"] suitable for minimum 100 Pa [4" wg] and 15.2 M/s [3000 fpm] velocity.

.2 Minimum 2.0 mm [14 ga] galvanized steel airfoil type or 2.1mm [12 ga] extruded aluminum airfoil type blades.

.3 Synthetic sleeve type bearings (no metal to metal contact).



.6 Synthetic rubber blade seals mechanically locked into the blade edge (adhesive or clip-on type seals not acceptable).

.7 Flexible metal compression type or extruded synthetic rubber jamb seals.

.8 Standard of Acceptance: T A Morrison 1000.

.4 Low leakage control dampers (extended temperature range):



.1 Application:

.1 Emergency generator radiator discharge air.


.1 Maximum 0.25" static pressure drop at 3000 fpm.

.2 Maximum 10.75 cfm/sq.ft. Leakage at 3" w.g.

.3 Suitable for –60oC to 150oC [-76oF to 302oF] operating range.

.4 Maximum blade length of 1219mm [48"] suitable for minimum 4" w.g. and 3000 fpm velocity.

.3 Permanently lubricated stainless steel sleeve type bearings.



.6 Seals mechanically locked into the blade edge (adhesive or clip-on type seals not acceptable).

.7 Flexible metal, compression-type jamb seals.

.8 Standard of Acceptance: Ruskin CD60.

.5 Smoke control dampers:

.1 Smoke dampers to be labelled to ULC Standard CAN/ULC S112.1-M90 and UL 555S leakage class 1.

.1 Standard of acceptance: Ruskin SD50.

.2 Actuators for smoke dampers shall be supplied with the smoke dampers as a single entity which meets all applicable UL555 and UL555S qualifications for both dampers and actuators. Actuators shall be rated for 177oC [350oF] elevated temperature classification. Actuators shall be mounted so that the damper fails to the closed position (spring return).

.3 Smoke dampers shall be equipped with two position indicator switches linked directly to the damper blade.

.6 Note:

.1 Control dampers integral to air handling and heat recovery units provided and factory installed by the unit supplier (actuators by this Division). All other control and smoke dampers by this Division. Control dampers supplied by the unit manufactures shall follow the above specifications

.2 Instruct the Sheet Metal Trade on damper installation.

.3 Indicated size is outside frame dimension. Increase size of damper and oversize ductwork, to include for depth of the frame, for all dampers with a pressure drop greater than 12 Pa [0.05" w.g.]. Confirm with the Sheet Metal Sub-Contractor before fabrication.

.4 Check that dampers are installed square and true and that blades close tightly against seals and stops.

.5 Blades to be horizontal in vertical mounted dampers. Refer to drawings for orientation of dampers.

.6 Ensure that damper end-linkages are easily accessible (coordinate with the Sheet Metal Sub-Contractor).

.7 Provide an additional drive shaft bearing if the drive shaft is longer than 75 mm [3"].

.8 Do not install dampers within the thickness of any wall unless otherwise indicated (coordinate with the Sheet Metal Sub-Contractor).



.9 Dampers shall be adequate for the maximum system pressure. Refer to the appropriate Section of the specification.

2.4 CONTROL DAMPER ACTUATORS

.1 General:

.1 Valve operators shall allow smooth operation of the valve throughout its entire range and assure tight shut-off against system pressure.

.2 Valve actuator shall be easily removed from the valve body for replacement.

.2 Electric Two Position Valve Actuators (VTE):

.1 Two Position Control Valve Actuators (only to be used where specifically specified):

.3 Incremental Control Valve Actuators (only to be used where specifically specified) (VMI):

.1 The valve actuator shall modulate the control valve between the fully open and closed position based upon a 3-wire control signal (24 VAC). The actuator shall remain in position until the signal is applied.

.2 The valve shall maintain its shutoff force even if power is lost.

.3 The TUC shall calculate valve position based on the motor speed and duration of control signal. The valve shall be driven to a full position and the calculation reset once every 24 hours.

.4 Proportional Control Valve Actuators (VME):

.1 The valve actuator shall modulate the control valve between the fully open and closed position based upon a 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA control signal. The actuator shall remain in its position until the applied signal changes. In the event of a control signal loss, the actuator shall move to the zero-voltage input position.

.2 The valve shall maintain its shutoff force even if power is lost.

2.5 CONTROL VALVES

.1 All characteristics of control valves shall be suited to the required application. Three-way mixing valves shall be linear for each port giving constant flow, and two-way valves shall have modified linear flow characteristics.

.2 All valves shall be plug type with stainless steel stems and EPT ring pads or teflon packing.

.3 Valve pressure / temperature rating - minimum ANSI Class 125.

.4 Plugs shall be brass with molded composition discs.

.5 Discs (renewable) shall be bronze for media 110C or less and stainless steel for media

above 110C operating temperature.

.6 Valve bodies for NPS ½ shall be screwed cast brass with integral seat.

.7 Valves NPS ¾ to NPS 2 shall have screened cast brass body and cast brass cage with integral seat.

.8 Valve bodies for NPS 2½ and up shall be cast iron flanged.

.9 All control valves supplied with positive positioning relay shall have a minimum of 27-76 kPa spring range.

.10 Note:

.1 Size control valves according to capacities and pressure drops as indicated in the schedules.

.2 Clearly identify the control valve coefficient (Cv) rating on valve bodies.

.3 All primary building heating valves shall fail open to heating (valves on terminal units may fail either open or to the last operating position). Cooling valves shall



fail closed to cooling or to the last operating position. Domestic hot water heating valves shall fail closed to heating.

.4 Control valves to be supplied by this trade for installation by others.

.11 Design: NPS ½ to NPS 2 - Johnson Controls VG7000 series. NPS 2½ and larger - Johnson Controls cast iron flanged globe valves V5252, V5842.

.12 Standard of Acceptance: Honeywell V5011 and V5013 series (V5812 series for terminal units); Barber Colman 9213 and 9313 series; Landis & Gyr Powers 656, 658, 591, 592, 593 series.

2.6 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS (DPT)

.1 Provide differential pressure transmitters having the following minimum specifications:

.1 Internal materials to be suitable for continuous contact with the process material measured including compressed air, water, glycol or steam as applicable.

.2 Output signal of 4 - 20 mA into a maximum of 500-ohm load.

.3 Output variations of less than 0.2% full scale for supply voltage variations of +/- 10%.

.4 Combined non-linearity, repeatability and hysteresis effects not to exceed +/- 1% of full-scale output over entire range.

.5 Integral zero and span adjustment.

.6 Temperature effect of +/- 1.5% full scale/50C or less.

.7 Output short circuit and open circuit protection.

.8 Over-pressure input protection to a minimum of twice rated input.

2.7 DAMPER ACTUATORS

.1 General:

.1 Provide electric or electronic type damper actuators where indicated or required.

.2 Damper actuators for all fan variable volume devices, all control dampers and all smoke/fire dampers shall be supplied by this trade. Refer to Section 23 99 55 or the drawings for schedule of control and smoke/fire dampers.

.3 Damper actuators for mixing boxes and air valves shall be supplied by this trade for factory installation by unit manufacturer. Damper actuators shall meet the requirements of the unit manufacturer in all cases.

.4 Spring return for "fail-safe" in Normally Open or Normally Closed position where required.

.5 Size actuators to control dampers against maximum pressure or dynamic closing pressure whichever is greater.

.6 Size damper actuators so that they will provide smooth and full travel of the dampers while stroking in both directions.

.7 Where individual dampers are installed, install a separate damper actuator for each damper.

.8 Where multi-section dampers are installed, install a separate damper actuator for each section.

.9 Locate damper actuator so that they are easily accessible for testing and servicing.

.2 Electronic Damper Actuators (DME & DTE):

.1 Actuators shall be direct coupled enabling it to be mounted directly to the damper shaft without the need for connecting linkage.

.2 The actuators shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator.



.3 Proportional actuators shall accept a 2 to 10 VAC or 4 to 20 mA signal.

.3 Incremental Control Damper Actuator (DMI):

.1 For VAV box damper control only.

.2 The damper actuator shall modulate the damper between fully open and fully closed based on a 3-wire control signal (24 VAC). The actuator shall remain in position until the signal is applied.

.3 The TUC shall calculate damper position based on the motor speed and duration of control signal. The damper should be driven to a full position and the calculation reset once every 24 hours.

2.8 END SWITCHES - SMOKE DAMPERS (ESW)

.1 Provide CSA approved end switches on all Smoke and all Combination Fire/Smoke dampers and where indicated.

.2 End switches shall provide positive status indication of full open and full closed blade position. Provide 2 switches per damper if necessary.

2.9 ELECTRIC RELAYS (ER)

.1 Provide DPDT relays for control and status indication of alarms and/or electrical starters and equipment.

.2 Relay coils shall be rated for 120V or 24V. Where other voltages occur provide transformer.

.3 Contacts rated at 5 amps at 120V AC.

.4 Relays to be plug in type with termination base.

2.10 FLOW SWITCHES (FSW)


.1 Single pole double throw action (vapour proof on chilled water).

.2 Adjustable sensitivity.

.3 Extended trimmable paddles.

.4 Selected for minimum flow condition.

.2 Notes:

.1 Install in upright position in horizontal run of pipe.

.2 Install a minimum of 5 pipe diameters downstream of any valves, elbows, orifices or any other obstructions.

.3 Adhere to manufacturer's installation recommendations.


.1 McDonnell Miller, Johnson Controls.

2.11 FREEZE PROTECTION

.1 Freeze protection thermostats shall be manual reset type with 6 m averaging element. Provide multiple thermostats for large duct cross sectional areas.

.2 For liquids, elements shall be rigid bulb type mounted in separable wells.

.3 Freeze protection elements shall be hard wired to the fan starter and also wired to the B.M.S. or alarm system.

2.12 HUMIDITY SENSORS (HS)

.1 Provide humidity sensors as directed with the following minimum specifications:

.1 Range room type 30-80% RH.

.2 Range duct type 20-90% RH.



.3 Operating temperature range of 0C to 60C.

.4 Absolute accuracy of +/- 3% RH.

.5 Stainless steel sheath construction complete with integral shroud to enable specified operation in air streams of up to 10 m/sec.

.6 Sensor able to be cleansed of oil vapour, dust or other anticipated air borne contaminants by a simple field method such as solvent or mild detergent solution washing.

.7 Room humidity sensors shall be located at the inlet to an RA grille.

.8 Duct mounted sensors shall be located such that the sensing element is located in the air stream and the transmitter electronics are out of the air stream.

2.13 MIXING BOX CONTROLLERS

.1 Microprocessor based terminal unit controllers (TUC's) and damper actuators for the mixing boxes to be supplied by the Controls Contractor. The TUC's shall be provided in a pre-assembled control box for field mounting on the mixing boxes. The multi-point flow sensors shall be supplied and installed by the mixing box manufacturer

.2 The necessary interface requirements for the multi-point flow sensor shall be provided by the Controls Contractor (confirm exact requirements with the mixing box manufacturer).

.3 The Controls Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the controllers and damper actuators are suitable for the units and that the characteristics of the boxes listed herein are met.

.4 Controls arranged for pressure independent, variable volume and constant volume operation.

.5 Resettable to any air volume between 50% and 120% of the nominal schedule volume or to zero.

.6 External taps for balancing gauge.

.7 Refer to Section 23 36 00 for mixing box specifications.

2.14 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER NON DDC APPLICATION ONLY


.1 Seven-day programmable load controller with a minimum of four independent load circuits.

.2 Liquid crystal display to indicate time, day and function.

.3 Built-in battery to maintain program memory and clock accuracy for 72 hrs.

.4 Self-contained enclosure with clear plastic cover.

.5 Manual on/off/auto switches for each of the four circuits to allow manual override.

.2 Standard of Acceptance: MaxiRex D4, Davis Controls Ltd.

2.15 PRESSURE SWITCHES (PSW)

.1 Provide pressure or differential pressure switches for ranges as indicated.

.2 Pressure sensing elements shall be Bourbon tube, bellows or diaphragm type.

.3 Adjustable setpoint and differential.

.4 Pressure switches shall be snap action type rated at 120 volts, 15 amps AC or 24 volts DC.

.5 Sensor assembly shall operate automatically and reset automatically when condition returns to normal.

.6 Sensor Ratings: sensors shall have the following pressure and accuracy ratings:

.1 Low and medium steam sensors shall be rated at 1030 kPa. Low pressure shall operate from 0 to 207 kPa with an accuracy of plus or minus 3 kPa. Medium



pressure shall operate from 0 to 700 kPa and with an accuracy of plus or minus 7.0 kPa.

.2 High pressure steam sensors shall be rated at 2100 kPa, have a full operating range of 0 to 2100 kPa with an accuracy of plus or minus 14 kPa.

.3 Pressure switches for pump operation shall have a range of 20 kPa to 350 kPa and adjustable differential from 1 kPa to 35 kPa.

.4 Pressure switches for fan operation shall have a range of 0 to 1500 Pa and adjustable differential from 10 to 50 Pa.

.5 Sensors on steam lines and high temperature water shall be protected by pigtail siphon installed between the sensor and the fluid line.

.6 All sensors shall have an isolation valve and snubber installed between the sensor and pressure source.

2.16 ROOM HUMIDISTATS & THERMOSTATS

.1 Minimum Requirements

.1 Adjustable sensitivity and set point.

.2 Electric.

.1 Low or line voltage as specified.

.3 Standard metal or Lexan covers.

.1 Visible thermometer (thermostats only) graduated in deg.C.

.2 Concealed set-point adjustment (or removable key adjustment).

.3 Lock key covers.

.4 Thermostats to be adjustable by room occupants.

.5 Room thermostats sensors for all applications shall be equipped with an "occupied" switch or button to enable room occupants to override the "unoccupied" schedule for "after hours" operation.

.2 Note:

.1 Provide a key for each instrument requiring a removable key up to a maximum of six. Obtain two signed receipts from the Owner certifying that the keys have been received. Hand one over to the Consultant.

2.17 STATIC PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS (SPT)

.1 Output of 4 - 20 mA linear into maximum of 500-ohm load.

.2 Calibrated span: not greater than twice the static pressure at maximum flow.

.3 Accuracy: +/- 1% of span.

.4 Repeatability: within 0.5% of output.

.5 Linearity: 1.5% of span.

.6 Deadband or Hysteresis: 0.1% of span.

2.18 TEMPERATURE SENSORS

.1 General: Temperature sensors shall be thermistor, resistance or thermocouple type,

however, thermocouples shall be restricted to temperature range +200C and above.

.2 The following shall apply to thermistor, resistance or thermocouple temperature sensors as applicable.

.1 RTDs shall be 100 ohm or 1,000 ohms at 0øC (+/- .2 ohm) nickel or platinum element with strain minimizing construction and 3 integral anchored leadwires coefficient of resistivity of 0.000385 ohms/ohm/ deg.C. Thermistors shall be 3,000 or 10,000 ohms.

.2 Sensing element to be hermetically sealed.



.3 Stem and tip construction to be copper or 304 stainless steel as noted.

.4 Sensors to have a time constant response of less than 3 seconds to a

temperature change of 10C.

.5 Sensors shall operate over the following ranges with the accuracies over the noted range of the sensor.

.1 -50C to +50C, plus or minus 0.5C.

.2 0C to +50C, plus or minus 0.25C.

.3 0C to 25C, plus or minus 0.1C.

.4 0C to 100C, plus or minus 1C.

.6 Immersion wells shall be of stainless-steel materials for steam and domestic hot water and brass for other applications. Heat transfer compound to be compatible with sensor.

.3 Temperature sensors shall be of the following types:

.1 Room type (RTS) - suitable for wall mounting, with or without protective guard. Element length of 10-50 mm with ceramic tube or equivalent mode of mechanical protection.

.2 General purpose duct type (DTS) - suitable for insertion into air ducts at any angle, insertion length shall be suitable for application. Copper sheathed construction.

.3 Spring-loaded thermowell type (ITS) - spring loaded construction with compression fitting for 20 mm NPT well mounting. Lengths shall be suitable for application. Stainless steel sheathed construction.

.4 Averaging duct type (ATS) - continuous filament with immersion length of 6000 mm minimum. Probe to be bent, at field installation time, to a minimum radius of 100 mm at any point along the probe length without degradation in performance. Copper sheathed construction. Or multiple sensors mounted on a cable connected to provide an average temperature reading

.5 Outside air type (OTS) - complete with non-corroding shield designed to minimize solar and wind effects, threaded fitting for mating to 12 mm conduit, probe length of 100 - 150 mm.

2.19 TEMPERATURE SWITCHES (TSW)

.1 Provide high/low temperature switches for ranges as indicated on point schedule.

.2 Temperature sensing element shall be liquid, vapour or bimetallic type.

.3 Adjustable setpoint and differential.

.4 Snap action type rated at 120 volts, or 24 V DC as required.

.5 Sensors shall operate automatically and reset automatically. Sensors used for freeze detection or fire detection shall be manually reset type.

.6 Temperature accuracy shall be +/-1C.

.7 Temperature switches shall be of the following types:

.1 Room type - suitable for wall mounting on standard electrical box with or without protective guard.

.2 General Purpose Duct type - suitable for insertion into air ducts, insertion length of 457 mm.

.3 Thermowell type - with compression fitting for 20 mm NPT well mounting, length of 100 mm. Immersion wells shall be brass (stainless steel for domestic water and steam).



.4 Freeze detection type - continuous element with insertion length of 6000 mm minimum, suitable for duct mounting to detect the coldest temperature in any 30 mm section of its length.

.5 Strap-on type - with helical screw stainless steel clamps.

2.20 TIMECLOCKS


.1 150 mm (6") dia. dial, 7-day calendar type.

.2 Spring reserve (minimum of 10 hours) and manual reset.

.2 Accessories:

.1 Accessible manual-automatic bypass switch (one for each switching circuit).

.2 Adjustable spring wound timer (0-12 hours) without "hold" (Intermatic F12H).

.3 Standard of Acceptance: Intermatic, Paragon, Tork.

2.21 VELOCITY PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS (VPT)

.1 Output of 4 - 20 mA linear into maximum of 500-ohm load.

.2 Calibrated span: not greater than twice the static pressure at maximum flow.

.3 Calibrated accuracy: +/- 1.0% of span.

.4 Repeatability: within 0.1% of output.

.5 Linearity: 0.5% of span.

.6 Deadband or Hysteresis: 0.1% of span.

2.22 VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE CONTROLLER

.1 Refer to Section 23 05 14.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 GENERAL

.1 All equipment shall be installed according to manufacturers' published instructions.

.2 Temperature, Humidity Sensors, Thermostats and Humidistats:

.1 All sensors shall be stabilized to such a level as to permit on-the-job installations that will require minimum field adjustments or calibration.

.2 Sensor assemblies shall be readily accessible and adaptable to each type of application in such a manner as to allow for quick, easy replacement and servicing without special tools or skills.

.3 Outdoor installation shall be weatherproof construction in NEMA 4 enclosures. Install space instruments at a height of 1.5 m above the finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

.4 Install corridor instruments at a height of 2.1 m above the finished floor.

.5 Locate instruments in the same vertical centreline as light switches.

.6 Where instruments are indicated on an outside wall install on a stand-off wall bracket which provides an air space between the instrument and the wall; or on an insulating base (e.g. a cork pad).

.7 Install protective metal guards on instruments in areas where they may be subject to damage (loading areas, gymnasiums, workshops, public corridors and storage areas). Bolt guards, independent of instruments to separate baseplates. Provide backing in wall for securing mounting bases.

.8 Sensors in ducts shall be mounted in locations to sense the correct temperature of the air only, and shall not be located in dead air spaces. The location shall be



within the vibration and velocity limits of the sensor. Where an extended surface element is required to properly sense the average temperature it shall be securely mounted within the duct to measure the best average temperatures. Elements shall be thermally isolated from brackets and supports to respond to air temperature only. Sensor element to be supported separately and not connected to coils or filter racks.

.9 Wells shall be installed in the piping at elbows where piping is smaller than the length of the well to effect proper flow across the entire area of the well. Well shall not restrict flow area to less than 70 percent of line-size-pipe normal flow area.

.3 Temperature Transmitters, Humidity Transmitters, Controllers and relays to be installed in NEMA I enclosures.

.1 Panels to be either free standing or wall mounted ANSI 61 polyester powder coated steel cabinets with hinged and key locked front door. Arrange for conduit and tubing entry from top, bottom or either side.

.2 Panels shall be modular multiple panels being used if required for capacity in any particular location.

.3 All panels shall be lockable with same key.

.4 All wiring and tubing within panels to be located in trays or individually clipped to back of panel, and clearly identified.

.4 All field devices to be properly identified.

.5 Mount electrical instruments on standard electrical rough-in boxes fastened to structure.

.6 Testing:

.1 All field devices shall be properly calibrated and tested for performance and accuracy. A report detailing test performed and results to be submitted to the consultant for approval. The consultant will verify results at random. Provide all testing equipment necessary. Provide manpower necessary to assist consultant's verification.

END OF SECTION

GR BAKER – KITCHEN RENOVATION SECTION 23 99 65543 FRONT ST, QUESNEL BC V2J 2K7 CONTROLS EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERSNORTHERN HEALTH Page 1 of 1


ITEMACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS / SUPPLIERS /

MANUFACTURERS

SHOP

DWG.

CONTROL SYSTEMS Base Building Control Contractor X

CONTROL DAMPERS

Arrow-Foil PBDAF & OBDAF, Honeywell Moduflow D642 & D643, Johnson Proportion/Aire D-1200 & D-1300, Ruskin CD36, Tamco 1000, Nailor 1010,

X

CONTROL DAMPER

ACTUATORSBelimo X

CONTROL VALVE

ACTUATORSBelimo, Siemens X

NOTE:

.1 The design is based upon the equipment listed in the equipment schedules and/or underlined in the Equipment Supplier Schedules.

.2 X Denotes required submission.

END OF SECTION